JP7462960B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

For example, Patent Document 1 describes how effects are created using presentation images in gaming machines.

JP 2016-097096 A

However, in gaming machines such as those described in the above patent documents, there was room for further improvement in terms of presentation to increase entertainment value.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

The present invention, which achieves the above object, is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) comprises a first control means (for example, main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (for example, performance control board 130) for controlling the presentation, and a light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, button lamp 17c, etc.), and the first control means acquires judgment information when a starting condition is established, and is capable of executing a judgment as to whether or not to play a special game according to the judgment information, is capable of storing the judgment information as a reserved memory, and is capable of a variable display in which a special symbol is changed and then stopped according to the result of the judgment, and is useful to a player. a first mode (normal time-saving game state) which is a mode advantageous to a player and is controlled after the special game is executed, and a second mode (special time-saving game state) which is a mode advantageous to a player and is controlled when the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches a specified number of times, the second control means is capable of controlling a presentation mode and is capable of displaying an information display in a predetermined mode (for example, a completion display mode shown in FIG. 160(4)), the information display in the predetermined mode corresponds to the judgment information, and when the start condition is established, a specific operation mode (for example, an incomplete display mode shown in FIG. 160(1) to (3)) is displayed before the information display in the predetermined mode is displayed. The information display of a predetermined mode (a predetermined operation mode) can be displayed, a variable performance in which a performance pattern is displayed in motion and then stopped according to a result of the judgment can be executed, a reach performance can be executed during the execution of the variable performance, and when the second mode is selected when the reserved memory is stored, a specific variable performance (for example, the variable performances shown in Figs. 187(4) to (6), Figs. 188(7) to (12), and Fig. 189(13)) can be executed, and during the execution of the specific variable performance, the information display of the predetermined mode can be made difficult to see or its display can be restricted, and when the reserved memory is not stored, the second mode can be selected when the second mode is selected. When the start condition is satisfied after being controlled to the first mode (for example, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45 at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (6), or when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45 at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (2)), it is possible to restrict the display of the information display of the specific operation mode , and when the presentation patterns are displayed stopped in a specific sequence (for example, the sequence of "444" shown in FIG. 208 (10)) in the specific variable presentation, it is possible to restrict the reach presentation while the specific variable presentation is being executed, and after the specific variable presentation ends, it is possible to be controlled to the first mode (for example, normal time-saving gaming state) .

The above symbols in this section are given as examples in explaining the present invention, and do not limit the scope of the present invention.

The present invention provides a gaming machine that can create highly entertaining effects.

1 is a front view showing an example of a gaming machine. 1 is an oblique view showing an example of the back side of a gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining details of a base display. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of an image control board. A diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table and a hit determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a table scenario. FIG. 13 is another diagram for explaining an example of a table scenario. 13 is a diagram for explaining specific examples of a fluctuation pattern determination table for each period. FIG. A figure to explain other specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for each period. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a non-time-saving gaming state. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a time-saving gaming state. 11A and 11B are diagrams for explaining specific examples of a stationary notification image and a remaining number image. 13 is a diagram for explaining a display period of a stationary notification image and a remaining number image. FIG. A figure to explain specific examples of each screen at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. 11A to 11C are diagrams for explaining specific examples of each screen in the time-saving game state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a display period of a start image. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the display period of the start image. 13 is a diagram for explaining details of the update timing of the number of remaining times image. FIG. 11A to 11C are diagrams for explaining specific examples of each screen when a power outage occurs. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining other specific examples of the screens when a power outage occurs. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a configuration for notifying an activated period. A diagram to explain a specific example of the display period of a left-hit image. A figure to explain the configuration for notifying that it is possible to transition to the second time-saving gaming state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a pre-determination table. 4 is a flowchart of a main process by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process by a main CPU. 4 is a flowchart of an input control process by a main CPU. A flowchart of the first start hole detection switch input processing by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart of a pre-determination process by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart of special chart special electricity control processing by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol memory determination process by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart of processing by the main CPU when a special symbol stops. 13 is a flowchart of a transition determination process by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart of general map and general transmission processing by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart of a main process performed by a sub CPU. 13 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process by a sub CPU. 13 is a flowchart of a command analysis process 1 by a sub CPU. 13 is a flowchart of a command analysis process 2 by a sub CPU. 13 is a flowchart of a performance input control process by a sub-CPU. 4 is a flowchart of a main process by a host CPU. 13 is a flowchart of an interrupt process by a host CPU. A figure showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table. A figure to explain a specific example of an ending effect in the second embodiment. A figure to explain a specific example of the execution time of the ending performance in the second embodiment. A figure showing an example of a jackpot determination table and a hit determination table in the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table in the third embodiment. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a non-time-saving gaming state in the third embodiment. A figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a time-saving game state in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a pre-determination table in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of a pre-determination process by a main CPU in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of processing by the main CPU when a special symbol stops in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of a transition determination process and the like by a main CPU in the third embodiment. 13A to 13C are schematic diagrams of each screen in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a limited period in the third embodiment. A figure to explain a specific example of the variable time of a normal pattern display device in the third embodiment. A figure for explaining another specific example of the variable time of the passing pattern display device in the third embodiment. A figure to explain a specific example of overlapping operation of the time-saving game state in the third embodiment. A figure to explain a specific example of when the time-saving game state in the third embodiment ends. A figure to explain specific examples of each image displayed in the time-saving game state in the third embodiment. A figure to explain specific examples of right-hit start images and left-hit start images in the third embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining specific examples of result images in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a counting period in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining first information and second information in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a display period of a start image in a modified example. FIG. 2 is an oblique view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. 2 is an oblique view of the rear side of the gaming machine. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of various storage areas of a main RAM. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing main processing in a main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an initial setting process in the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing input control processing in the main control board. A diagram showing the first starting hole detection switch input processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the second starting hole detection switch input processing on the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing specific area detection switch input processing in the main control board. A diagram showing the special diagram special electric control processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the special pattern memory determination process in the main control board. A diagram showing the jackpot determination process on the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a big win determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. A diagram showing the special chart variation pattern determination process in the main control board. A figure showing an example of a normal special chart variation pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time reduction. A figure showing an example of a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time reduction. A figure showing an example of a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time reduction. A figure showing an example of a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time reduction. A figure showing an example of a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for special time reduction. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pre-determination table. A diagram showing special pattern change processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the special pattern stopping processing on the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control data determination table. A diagram showing the jackpot game processing on the main control board. A diagram showing small win game processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the jackpot game ending processing on the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a game status setting table. A diagram showing the game state referred to at the end of a big win game that does not go through a small win game. A diagram showing the game state to be referred to at the end of a big win game that goes through a small win game. 1 is a mode flow showing the transition of game modes. A diagram showing the general-purpose power control processing on the main control board. A diagram showing normal pattern change processing on the main control board. 11 is a diagram showing an example of various determination tables used in the normal power control process; FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an external information data creation process in the main control board. 4 is a diagram for explaining various signals output as game information. FIG. A diagram showing a performance display data setting process in the main control board. A diagram showing the display information of the information display device in each game area. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various drive sources after changing settings. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources after confirming settings. 1 is a comparative table of operation of various drive sources at various operation timings. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an initial setting process in a main control board of the first modified example. A figure showing the RWM clearing process in the main control board of the first modified example. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources during preparation for clearing the RWM. 1 is a comparative table of operation of various drive sources at various operation timings. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an initial setting process in a main control board of a second modified example. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing a specific example of initializing various driving sources after clearing the RWM; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an initial setting process in a main control board of a third modified example. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of initializing various driving sources during preparation for clearing the RWM. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an initial setting process in a main control board of a fourth modified example. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing a specific example of initializing various driving sources after clearing the RWM; This is a timing chart when a normal time-saving gaming state occurs. 13 is a timing chart showing when the normal time-saving gaming state ends. This is a timing chart from before the start to after the end of the special time-saving game state. A diagram showing the main processing of the performance control unit. A diagram showing timer interrupt processing of the performance control unit. A diagram showing the command analysis process of the performance control unit. A diagram showing the icon change performance decision process of the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change scenario determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the light-emitting effect when a prize is won by the effect control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a winning light-emitting effect pattern determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing the predictive consecutive performance decision processing of the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table. A figure showing an example of a look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table. A diagram showing the variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a change presentation pattern determination table for final change in time-saving mode. 13 is a flowchart showing the special time-saving performance processing of the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a pre-reading presentation is executed during normal game play. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a change presentation is executed after transitioning to an entry battle mode. This figure shows an example of a presentation in which a jackpot occurs in the final variable presentation of the battle mode. A figure showing an example of a presentation when the normal time-saving game state ends. This figure shows example 1 of the presentation when a small win occurs with the remaining reserved second special pattern when transitioning to the normal game mode. This figure shows example 2 of the presentation when a small win occurs with the remaining reserved second special pattern when transitioning to the normal game mode. A figure showing an example of the presentation when a small win game is executed in Chou Ranbu mode. A figure showing an example of a presentation when the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of a small win game in Ranbu mode. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a special time-saving presentation is executed. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a customer waiting state occurs upon transition to a special time-saving game state. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a variable presentation is executed after transitioning to a special time-saving game state. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating an example of a presentation when the countdown mode is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the presentation when the countdown mode is executed. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a variable presentation is executed after transitioning to a special time-saving game state. A figure showing an example of the presentation when a special time-saving game state ends. A figure showing an example of a game status setting table in the sixth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing the special pattern variation processing of the main control board in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display presentation using pending images. A diagram showing a gradual display presentation using pending images. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display presentation using pending images. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display presentation using pending images. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display presentation using pending images. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display presentation using pending images. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display presentation using pending images. An explanatory diagram of each effect in variable effect example 9. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. An explanatory diagram of each effect in variable effect example 10. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. A diagram showing a gradual display presentation using pending images. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. An explanatory diagram of each effect in variable effect example 14. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the embodiments shown in the drawings.
<Configuration of gaming machine>
FIG. 1 is a front view showing an example of a gaming machine according to this embodiment, FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an example of the back side of the gaming machine according to this embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 comprises an outer frame 2 and an inner frame 3. The outer frame 2 is attached to the island structure of the gaming hall, and the inner frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed. A glass frame 4 is attached to the inner frame 3. Furthermore, a gaming board 10 having a board surface from which gaming balls are shot out is attached to the inner frame 3.

As shown in FIG. 1, a window 4a is formed in the glass frame 4, and a transparent plate 4b is attached to the window 4a. A game area 10a in which game balls can move (flow down) is formed between the surface of the game board 10 and the transparent plate 4b in front of it. The transparent plate 4b is, for example, a glass plate, and is removably fixed to the glass frame 4.

The glass frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2 via a hinge mechanism 5 at one left-right end (e.g., the left side when facing the gaming machine), and can rotate around the hinge mechanism 5 in a direction that opens the other left-right end (e.g., the right side when facing the gaming machine) from the outer frame 2. Specifically, the glass frame 4 covers the gaming board 10 together with the glass plate 4b, and can open the inner portion of the outer frame 2, including the gaming board 10, by rotating like a door around the hinge mechanism 5 as a fulcrum.

A locking mechanism is provided on the other end of the glass frame 4 (e.g., on the right side when facing the gaming machine) to secure the other end of the glass frame 4 to the outer frame 2. The locking mechanism can be released with a special key. In addition, the glass frame 4 is provided with a door opening switch 136 (see Figure 3) that detects whether the glass frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2.

A tray unit 7 having storage trays 6 (upper tray 6a and lower tray 6b) for storing game balls is provided at the bottom of the glass frame 4 (the lower part of the window 4a). The tray unit 7 is also equipped with an effect button 8 that the player can press, a cross key 40 that allows the player to perform various selection operations, and an ejection button 9 that ejects game balls stored in the lower tray 6b to the outside of the gaming machine.

The performance button 8 is provided in the center of the dish unit 7, as shown in FIG. 1. In this embodiment, the performance button 8 is configured to be movable between a normal operation position, a depressed position that is recessed below the normal operation position, and a protruding operation position that protrudes above the normal operation position. In the specific example in FIG. 1, the performance button 8 is shown in the normal operation position.

The effect button 8 is configured to be capable of being pressed from any position, including the normal operation position and the protruding operation position, to the pressed position. Note that the detailed structure of the effect button 8 is not described in this specification, as it is disclosed in, for example, JP 2013-116168 A.

Although details will be described later, there is a valid operation period during which operation of the effect button 8 can be accepted (operation of the effect button 8 is valid). The effect button 8 is provided with an effect button detection switch 8a (see Figure 4), and when the effect button detection switch 8a detects operation by the player, a predetermined effect is executed.

The cross key 40 includes an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button. The cross key 40 is also provided with cross key detection switches (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d). The cross key detection switches (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d) include an up button detection switch 40a that detects operation of the up button of the cross key 40, a down button detection switch 40b that detects operation of the down button, a left button detection switch 40c that detects operation of the left button, and a right button detection switch 40d that detects operation of the right button (see FIG. 3).

As shown in FIG. 1, an operating handle 11 is provided on the lower right side of the glass frame 4. A touch sensor 11a (see FIG. 4) is provided on the operating handle 11. When the touch sensor 11a detects that the player has touched the operating handle 11, a touch signal is sent to the launch control board 160.

When the launch control board 160 receives a touch signal from the touch sensor 11a, it allows the launch solenoid 12a to be energized. When the rotation angle of the operating handle 11 changes, the gear directly connected to the operating handle 11 rotates, and the knob of the launch volume 11b (see Figure 3) connected to the gear rotates.

During the period in which the touch signal is received, a voltage corresponding to the detected angle of the launch volume 11b is applied to the launch solenoid 12a (see FIG. 3) provided in the game ball launch mechanism. When a voltage is applied to the launch solenoid 12a, the launch solenoid 12a operates according to the applied voltage, and the game ball is launched into the game area 10a of the game board 10 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operating handle 11.

As shown in FIG. 1, an outer rail R1 and an inner rail R2 are provided around the perimeter of the game board 10 (game area 10a). The outer rail R1 and inner rail R2 guide the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the upper part of the game area 10a. The game balls guided to the upper part of the game area 10a fall within the game area 10a. Multiple nails and windmills are provided in the game area 10a, causing the game balls to fall unpredictably.

As shown in FIG. 1, a center member 12 is disposed approximately in the center of the game board 10. The center member 12 is provided with an image display device 31, such as a liquid crystal display device, and a performance movable body 32. The performance movable body 32 can move to a retracted position and an appearance position, and normally stops at the retracted position. The specific example in FIG. 1 shows a case where the performance movable body 32 stops at the retracted position. The performance movable body 32 may overlap with the image displayed by the image display device 31 when viewed from the front. The performance movable body 32 is also configured to include a light-emitting body. The light-emitting body causes the performance movable body 32 to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 1, a first starting hole 13 through which a game ball can enter is provided in the game area 10a at the lower center of the center member 12. A second starting hole 14 is provided below the first starting hole 13. When a game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 13 or the second starting hole 14, the game begins.

The second starting opening 14 is provided with an opening/closing door 14b. The opening/closing door 14b is controlled to move between a first state in which it is maintained in a closed state and a second state in which the opening/closing door 14b is in an open state. With the second starting opening 14 described above, in the first state it is difficult for the game ball to win (including cases where it is practically impossible), and in the second state it is easy for the game ball to win (easier to win than with the first starting opening 13).

In this embodiment, the second starting opening 14 (opening/closing door 14b) is configured so that game balls cannot enter during the period when it is controlled to the first mode. However, if game balls can enter the second starting opening 14 more easily during the period when it is controlled to the first mode than during the period when it is controlled to the second mode, the second starting opening 14 may be configured so that game balls can enter the second starting opening 14 during the period when it is controlled to the first mode.

A game ball that enters the first start hole 13 is detected by the first start hole detection switch 13a (see FIG. 3). A game ball that enters the second start hole 14 is detected by the second start hole detection switch 14a (see FIG. 3). When a game ball is detected by the first start hole detection switch 13a, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of game balls (prize balls) are paid out. Similarly, when a game ball is detected by the second start hole detection switch 14a, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of game balls (prize balls) are paid out.

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 13 and the second start port 14, three game balls are paid out in common, but the number of balls paid out may be different for each start port. For example, the number of balls paid out from the first start port 13 may be three, and the number of balls paid out from the second start port 14 may be one.

When the first start hole detection switch 13a or the second start hole detection switch 14a detects a game ball, a lottery for the right to play a jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as a "jackpot lottery") is held. The jackpot game in this embodiment includes a long jackpot game and a short jackpot game. The long jackpot game is composed of 10 rounds, and in each round, the large prize opening is opened for a time during which the game ball can win (e.g., 30 seconds). However, each round ends when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) have won the large prize opening. The short jackpot game is composed of two rounds, and in each round, the large prize opening is opened for a time during which the game ball can win. However, each round ends when a predetermined number of game balls have won the large prize opening. A predetermined interval is provided between each round. In a small win game, the big win hole is open for the time during which the game ball can win (for example, 1.8 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 1, a gate 15 through which the game ball can pass is provided in the game area 10a on the right side of the center member 12. The gate 15 is provided with a gate detection switch 15a (see FIG. 3) that detects the passage of the game ball, and when the gate detection switch 15a detects the passage of the game ball, a lottery for a normal symbol, which will be described later, is executed.

In the game area 10a on the right side of the center member 12 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right side area"), a first large winning opening 16 and a second large winning opening 17 through which game balls can enter are provided. Game balls can enter the right side area when the operating handle 11 is rotated more than a predetermined angle (so-called "right hit"). On the other hand, game balls cannot enter the right side area when the operating handle 11 is rotated less than that angle (so-called "left hit"). In other words, the first large winning opening 16 and the second large winning opening 17 provided in the right side area are configured so that game balls can enter when playing with a right hit, but cannot enter when playing with a left hit.

In this embodiment, when playing with a left-handed hand, the game ball can enter the first starting hole 13, but the second starting hole 14 is configured to make it difficult (including cases where it is practically impossible) for the game ball to enter. Also, when playing with a right-handed hand, the game ball can enter the second starting hole 14, but the first starting hole 13 is configured to make it difficult (including cases where it is practically impossible) for the game ball to enter.

The first large prize opening 16 is normally kept closed by the opening/closing door 16b, and it is not possible for game balls to enter the opening. On the other hand, during a big win game, the opening/closing door 16b is opened and functions as a tray that guides game balls into the first large prize opening 16, allowing the game balls to enter the first large prize opening 16. A first large prize opening detection switch 16a is provided in the first large prize opening 16, and when the first large prize opening detection switch 16a detects a game ball, a preset number of prize balls (e.g. 15 balls) are paid out.

The second large prize opening 17 is normally kept closed by the movable piece 17b, and it is not possible for a game ball to enter the opening. On the other hand, during a big win game, the movable piece 17b is activated to open the second large prize opening 17, and the movable piece 17b functions as a guide path to guide the game ball into the second large prize opening 17, allowing the game ball to enter the second large prize opening 17. A second large prize opening detection switch 17a is provided in the second large prize opening 17, and when the second large prize opening detection switch 17a detects the entry of a game ball, a preset number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game area 10a is provided with multiple general winning openings 18. When a game ball enters each of the general winning openings 18, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out. In addition, at the bottom of the game area 10a, an outlet 19 is provided for discharging game balls that do not enter any of the general winning openings 18, the first start opening 13, the second start opening 14, the first large winning opening 16, and the second large winning opening 17.

The image display device 31 is controlled by the performance control board 120 (image control board 150) described below and displays various images. For example, during non-play periods when no game is being played, a moving image of a demonstration is displayed on the image display device 31. During play periods when games are being played, the image display device 31 variably displays three performance patterns GA (left pattern, center pattern, right pattern) to notify the result of the lottery for a jackpot. The performance patterns GA are scrolled (variably displayed) from the top to the bottom of the image display device 31, and then displayed (temporarily stopped) in a swinging manner within the image display device 31, and are stopped by a pattern confirmation command.

In this embodiment, a specific combination of effect symbols GA (e.g., 777, etc.) is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. Also, a combination other than the specific effect symbols 38 (e.g., 289, etc.) is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot lottery result is a miss.

The image display device 31 displays a fourth pattern separately from the GA pattern. The fourth pattern is an image showing the changing state of the GA pattern used to notify the result of the jackpot lottery. However, a separate indicator lamp showing the changing state of the GA pattern may be provided, and the fourth pattern may not be displayed on the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 1, a pair of performance lamps 33 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper part of the glass frame 4. Each performance lamp 33 is equipped with multiple lights, and the direction of light irradiation and the color of the light emitted by the lights are changed according to each performance.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an audio output device 34 (see FIG. 4) consisting of a speaker (not shown). The audio output device 34 outputs various sounds including BGM (background music) and SE (sound effects). For example, the audio output device 34 outputs BGM corresponding to the image displayed on the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 1, a main display 28 is provided on the lower left side of the play area 10a. The main display 28 is controlled by a main control board 110, which will be described later. The main display 28 also includes a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol reserved display device 23, a second special symbol reserved display device 24, a normal symbol reserved display device 25, and a round count display device 26.

The first special pattern display device 20 notifies the player of the result of the jackpot lottery when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 13, and is composed of multiple LEDs. Specifically, multiple special patterns corresponding to the results of the jackpot lottery are provided, and the first special pattern display device 20 displays a special pattern (illuminated) corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery, thereby notifying the player of the lottery result. The above special patterns are displayed in a variable manner (flashing) for a predetermined period of time, and then displayed stationary.

The second special pattern display device 21 is for notifying the result of the jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the second starting hole 14, and is composed of multiple LEDs (similar to the first special pattern display device 21). Specifically, multiple special patterns corresponding to the results of the jackpot lottery are provided, and the lottery result is notified to the player by displaying a special pattern (illuminated mode) corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery on the second special pattern display device 21. The special pattern on the second special pattern display device 21 is displayed as a variable pattern (flashing) for a predetermined period of time and then displayed as a stationary pattern, similar to the special pattern on the first special pattern display device 20 described above.

The normal symbol display device 22 notifies the result of the lottery for normal symbols that is executed when the gaming ball passes through the gate 15. As will be described in detail later, if the lottery for normal symbols (hereinafter "normal symbol lottery") is won, the normal symbol display device 22 lights up, and then the second starting hole 14 is controlled to the second mode for a predetermined period of time. The normal symbol display device 22 described above is displayed in a variable manner (flashing) for a predetermined period of time when the gaming ball passes through the gate 15, and then the display stops.

When a game ball enters the first start hole 13 or the second start hole 14 during the variable display of special symbols or during jackpot play, and the jackpot lottery cannot be held immediately, the right to the jackpot lottery is reserved under certain conditions. For example, the right to the jackpot lottery reserved when a game ball enters the first start hole 13 is reserved as the first reservation, and the right to the jackpot lottery reserved when a game ball enters the second start hole 14 is reserved as the second reservation.

The first special pattern reserved display 23 displays the current number of first reserved items. In this embodiment, the first reserved items are reserved up to a maximum of four items. The second special pattern reserved display 24 displays the current number of second reserved items. In this embodiment, the second reserved items are reserved up to a maximum of four items, just like the first reserved items. In this embodiment, when both the first reserved item and the second reserved item are stored, the second reserved item is consumed first. In other words, the second special pattern display device 21 is displayed with priority over the first special pattern display device 20.

If a normal drawing cannot be performed immediately during the normal pattern changing display or while the second starting port 14 (opening door 14b) is in the second mode (open), the right to draw a normal pattern is reserved. The upper limit of the reserved number of normal patterns for drawing is set to four, and the reserved number for the normal drawing is displayed on the normal pattern reserved display 25. Note that the normal drawing is also performed during jackpot play (non-time-saving play state). The round count display 26 is for notifying the number of rounds of the round play performed during a jackpot (special play).

As shown in FIG. 2, the rear surface of the gaming machine 1 is provided with a main control board 110, a presentation control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 170, and a game information output terminal board 27. The power supply board 170 is provided with a power plug 171 and a power switch (not shown) for supplying power to the gaming machine.

<Configuration of game control device>
3 is a diagram for explaining a game control device that controls the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine 1 includes a lamp control board 140, an image control board 150, and a launch control board 160 in addition to the main control board 110, the performance control board 120, the payout control board 130, and the power supply board 170 described above.

The main control board 110 controls the basic operations of the game. As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 has at least a one-chip microcomputer consisting of a main CPU 111, a main ROM 112, and a main RAM 113, and an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control.

The main CPU 111 reads out a program stored in the main ROM 112 and performs calculations based on input signals from each detection switch (such as the first start port detection switch 13a). Depending on the results of the above calculations, various commands are sent from the output port to other boards. The main CPU 111 also controls each display, including the main display 28 mentioned above. The main RAM 113 functions as a work area for data during the main CPU 111's calculations.

As shown in FIG. 3, the first start hole detection switch 13a, the second start hole detection switch 14a, the gate detection switch 15a, the first large prize hole detection switch 16a, the second large prize hole detection switch 17a, the general prize hole detection switch 18a and the out ball detection switch 19a are connected to the input side of the main control board 110, and game ball detection signals are input from these detection switches.

For example, a game ball that enters the first large prize opening 16 is detected by the first large prize opening detection switch 16a. The game ball detected by the first large prize opening detection switch 16a is then detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. Similarly, a game ball that enters the second large prize opening 17 is detected by the second large prize opening detection switch 17a, and then detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. A game ball that enters the general prize opening 18 is detected by the general prize opening detection switch 18a, and then detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. In the above configuration, the game ball shot into the play area 10a is finally detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. Hereinafter, the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 19a may be referred to as the "number of outs."

As shown in FIG. 3, a signal is input from the clear switch 30a to the main control board 110. Specifically, the gaming machine 1 is provided with a clear button 30 (not shown). The clear switch 30a outputs an ON signal to the main control board 110 while the clear button 30 is operated (pressed). The clear switch 30a also outputs an OFF signal to the main control board 110 while the clear button 30 is not operated.

The above-mentioned clear button 30 cannot be operated when the inner frame 3 is closed. In other words, the clear button 30 is provided in a position where it cannot be operated by the player. For example, the clear button 30 is operated by an administrator of the gaming machine 1. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on with the clear button 30 operated, various information in the main RAM 113 is initialized.

Connected to the main control board 110 are a start opening opening solenoid that opens and closes the opening and closing door 14b of the second start opening 14, a first large prize opening opening solenoid that opens and closes the opening and closing door 16b of the first large prize opening 16, and a second large prize opening opening solenoid that opens and closes the movable piece 17b of the second large prize opening 17.

The first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the normal symbol display device 22, the first special symbol reserved indicator 23, the second special symbol reserved indicator 24, the normal symbol reserved indicator 25, and the round count indicator 26 are connected to the main control board 110. The main control board 110 outputs external information signals required for managing the gaming machines in the hall computer of the gaming establishment, etc., to the gaming information output terminal board 27.

As shown in FIG. 3, a right-hit lamp 28 is connected to the main control board 110. The right-hit lamp 28 lights up during periods when it is more advantageous to play with a right hit than with a left hit, and turns off during periods when it is more advantageous to play with a left hit than with a right hit. For example, the right-hit lamp 28 lights up during time-saving play, big win play, and small win play. In the above configuration, when the right-hit lamp 28 lights up, the player plays with a right hit. Therefore, the right-hit lamp 28 can also be said to be a means for indicating the operation mode (left hit, right hit) of the operating handle 11.

The main ROM 112 stores a game control program and various data required for games, which will be described later. The main RAM 113 has multiple storage areas. For example, the main RAM 113 is provided with a normal symbol reservation number (G) storage area, a normal symbol reservation storage area, a first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area, a second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area, a judgment storage area, a first special symbol storage area, a second special symbol storage area, a high probability game count (X) storage area, a round game count (R) storage area, a release count (K) storage area, a game status storage area, a game status buffer, a stop symbol data storage area, a performance transmission data storage area, and the like. The game status storage area includes a time-saving game flag storage area, a high probability game flag storage area, a special symbol special transmission processing data storage area, and a normal symbol normal transmission processing data storage area. Note that the above-mentioned storage areas are merely examples, and many other storage areas are provided.

The game information output terminal board 27 is a board for outputting external information signals generated in the main control board 110 to the hall computer of the amusement arcade. The game information output terminal board 27 is wired and connected to the main control board 110, and is provided with a connector for connecting to the hall computer of the amusement arcade. In addition, a magnetic sensor for detecting unauthorized magnetic fields is connected to the main control board 110.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 is provided with a base display 114. In this embodiment, the base display 114 displays a base value, which will be described later. The base display 114 includes four segment displays (see FIG. 4, which will be described later), and is directly mounted on the main control board 110.

The power supply board 170 converts the power supply voltage supplied from the power plug 171 into a predetermined voltage and supplies it to each control board. The power supply board 170 also monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine, and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. Specifically, when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 111 becomes operable, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 111 becomes inoperative.

In this embodiment, a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor is provided on the power supply board 170. This backup power supply maintains the data stored in the main RAM 113 even when the device is not in operation. Note that the backup power supply is not limited to a capacitor and may be, for example, a battery. A capacitor and a battery may also be used in combination.

The performance control board 120 controls each performance. As shown in FIG. 3, the performance control board 120 is equipped with a sub-CPU 121, a sub-ROM 122, a sub-RAM 123, and an RTC (real-time clock) 124. The performance control boards 120 are connected to the main control board 110 so as to be able to communicate in one direction.

The sub-CPU 121 reads out a program stored in the sub-ROM 122 and executes arithmetic processing based on a command sent from the main control board 110 or an input signal from the performance button detection switch 8a input via the lamp control board 140. The sub-CPU 121 also transmits corresponding data to the lamp control board 140 or the image control board 150 based on the above-mentioned arithmetic processing. The sub-RAM 123 functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing by the sub-CPU 121.

The sub-ROM 122 stores programs for controlling effects and data necessary for various games. For example, the sub-ROM 122 stores a variable effect pattern determination table for determining an effect pattern based on a variable pattern designation command received from the main control board 110, and an effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a combination of effect patterns GA to be stopped and displayed. The sub-ROM 122 also stores many other tables and programs (not shown).

The sub-RAM 123 has multiple storage areas. Specifically, the sub-RAM 123 is provided with a command reception buffer, a game status storage area, a performance mode storage area, a performance pattern storage area, a performance design storage area, a judgment storage area (zeroth storage area), a first reserved storage area, a second reserved storage area, etc.

The RTC 124 outputs the current time. In this embodiment, the RTC 124 operates from the power source during a period when power is supplied to the gaming machine from an external source. On the other hand, during a period when power is not supplied to the gaming machine from an external source, the RTC 124 operates from a backup power source mounted on the power supply board 170. The above RTC 124 can keep track of the current date and time even during a period when power is not supplied to the gaming machine from an external source.

The sub-CPU 121 receives a date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time from the RTC 124, and executes various processes according to the current date and time. Note that a battery may be provided on the performance control board 120, and the RTC 124 may be configured to operate using the battery.

The payout control board 130 controls the launch of game balls and the payout of prize balls. As shown in FIG. 3, the payout control board 130 includes a payout CPU 131, a payout ROM 132, and a payout RAM 133, and is connected to the main control board 110 for bidirectional communication. In addition, signals from a payout ball count switch 135, a door opening switch 136, a tray full detection switch 51, and a ball jam detection switch 52 are input to the payout control board 130.

The payout ball counting switch 135 is a switch for detecting whether game balls have been paid out. The tray full detection switch 51 is a switch for detecting when the tray (lower tray) for storing game balls is full. The ball jam detection switch 52 is a switch for detecting, for example, a jam of game balls in the passageway through which the paid-out game balls move.

The payout CPU 131 reads out the program stored in the payout ROM 132 and performs calculations based on input signals from the various switches described above, and transmits data corresponding to the results of the calculations to the main control board 110.

As shown in FIG. 3, a payout motor 134 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from a game ball storage section to a player is connected to the output side of the payout control board 130. Based on a payout number designation command sent from the main control board 110, the payout CPU 131 controls the payout motor 134 of the prize ball payout device to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player. The payout RAM 133 functions as a data work area during calculation processing by the payout CPU 131.

In this embodiment, it is monitored whether a game ball lending device (card unit) (not shown) is connected to the payout control board 130. If the game ball lending device is connected to the payout control board 130, the launch control board 160 is permitted to launch game balls. On the other hand, if the game ball lending device is not connected to the payout control board 130, the launch control board 160 is prohibited from launching game balls.

When the launch control board 160 receives launch control data from the payout control board 130, it authorizes the launch. It then reads the touch signal from the touch sensor 11a and the input signal from the launch volume 11b, controls the energization of the launch solenoid 12a and the ball feed solenoid 12b, and launches the game ball.

The launch solenoid 12a is composed of a rotary solenoid. A firing member (not shown) is directly connected to the launch solenoid 12a, and the firing member rotates as the launch solenoid 12a rotates. One game ball is fired with each rotation of the launch solenoid.

The rotational speed of the launch solenoid 12a is set to approximately 99.9 (rpm) from a frequency based on the output cycle of a crystal oscillator provided on the launch control board 160. With the above configuration, the number of game balls launched per minute is approximately 99.9 (pieces/min). In other words, game balls are launched approximately every 0.6 seconds. The ball sending solenoid 12b is composed of a linear solenoid, and sends the game balls on the upper tray 6a (see Figure 1) one by one toward the launching member directly connected to the launch solenoid 12a.

The lamp control board 140 is connected to the performance control board 120 so that it can communicate in both directions. As shown in FIG. 3, the performance button detection switch 8a and the cross key detection switches (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d) are connected to the input side of the lamp control board 140. The detection signals from each of the above detection switches are input to the performance control board 120 via the lamp control board 140.

The lamp control board 140 is also connected to the performance movable body 32 and performance lamps 33 provided on the game board 10. Based on data transmitted from the performance control board 120, the lamp control board 140 controls the lighting of the performance lamps 33 and the drive of the motor that changes the direction of light irradiation. It also controls the supply of electricity to drive sources such as solenoids and motors that operate the performance movable body 32. In this embodiment, the performance button 8 is configured to protrude, so the performance movable body 32 includes the performance button 8.

The image control board 150 is connected to the performance control board 120 so as to be capable of two-way communication, and the image display device 31 and audio output device 34 are connected to its output side.

<Base display>
4(a) to 4(c) are diagrams for explaining the control of the base display 114 in this embodiment. Although details will be described later, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment transitions to each gaming state including a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. The base display 114 displays the base value B in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. The base value B for a specific section is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls paid out in that section by the number of outs (total number of gaming balls shot out).

Figure 4 (a) is a diagram for explaining various counters (a prize ball counter for calculating the base, an out counter for calculating the base, and a total out counter) used to control the display of the base display 114. Each of the above counters is provided, for example, in the main RAM 113.

The base calculation prize ball counter counts the number of prize balls in a specific section. Specifically, when a game ball enters the general winning port 18, the value "10" is added to the base calculation prize ball counter. Also, when a game ball enters the first large winning port 16 or the second large winning port 17, the value "15" is added to the base calculation prize ball counter. Similarly, when a game ball enters the first start port 13 or the second start port 14, the value "3" is added to the base calculation prize ball counter. Also, the base calculation out counter counts the number of outs in a specific section. Specifically, each time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 19a, the value "1" is added to the base calculation out counter.

The main CPU 111 calculates the base value B for a specific section by multiplying the result of dividing the value of the base calculation prize ball counter by the value of the base calculation out counter by the value "100". However, the base calculation out counter and the base calculation prize ball counter are not incremented except in the low probability non-time-saving game state. In the above configuration, the base value B is calculated in the low probability non-time-saving game state within the specific section. Note that in this embodiment, the period during which the base calculation out counter and the base calculation prize ball counter are incremented may be referred to as the "counting period", and the period other than the counting period may be referred to as the "non-counting period".

The main CPU 111 stores (saves) the base value B for each predetermined interval that ends. In this embodiment, the base value B is saved each time 60,000 outs are counted. Specifically, the total out counter counts the number of outs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "total number of outs") from when the power was first turned on until the present. The main CPU 111 calculates and saves the base value B from the current values of the prize ball counter for base calculation and the out counter for base calculation each time the total out counter is added with the value "60,000". In addition, the prize ball counter for base calculation and the out counter for base calculation are initialized each time the total out counter is added with the value "60,000".

Figure 4(b) is a diagram for explaining the base value B displayed on the base display 114. In the specific example of Figure 4(b), it is assumed that 60,000 outs are counted in section 3, then 60,000 outs are counted in section 2, 60,000 outs are counted in section 1, and section L begins. The number of outs in section L is less than 60,000 (0 to 59,999). It is also assumed that the base value B in section 3 is "B3", the base value B in section 2 is "B2", the base value B in section 1 is "B1", and the base value B in section L is "BL".

In the above specific example, in section L, the base value BL for section L (real time), the base value B1 for section 1 (the previous section), the base value B2 for section 2 (the section two times back), and the base value B3 for section 3 (the section three times back) are displayed on the base display 114. Specifically, the base display 114 switches between and displays four base values B in the order of base value BL, base value B1, base value B2, and base value B3. The base value B for each section is switched and displayed, for example, approximately every five seconds. In this embodiment, the base value B is continuously displayed on the base display 114, including the period during which play is possible.

When one interval ends (when 60,000 outs have been counted), the base value B of that interval is saved as the base value B of the previous interval, and the base value B of the oldest interval is discarded. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 4(b), when the number of outs in interval L reaches 60,000, the base value BL of interval L is stored as the base value B1 of interval 1, the base value B1 of interval 1 is stored as the base value B2 of interval 2, the base value B2 of interval 2 is stored as the base value B3 of interval 3, and the base value 3 of the oldest interval 3 is discarded.

Figure 4(c) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the base display 114. As shown in Figure 4(c), the base display 114 includes a first display section 114x and a second display section 114y. The second display section 114y is composed of two seven-segment displays, and displays the base value B. The above-described second display section 114y can display the numbers "00" to "99". If the base value is greater than the number "100", "99." is displayed on the second display section 114y (the dot display section lights up).

As described above, the base display 114 switches between displaying the base value B of each section on the second display unit 114y approximately every 5 seconds in the order of section L, section 1, section 2, and section 3. The first display unit 114x displays identification information (bL, b1, b2, b3) that allows identification of which section's base value B is being displayed on the second display unit 114y.

For example, in the specific example of FIG. 4(b) described above, during the period when the base value BL of section L is displayed, the identification information "bL" is displayed on the first display section 114x. Also, during the period when the base value B1 of section 1 is displayed, the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display section 114x, during the period when the base value B2 of section 2 is displayed, the identification information "b2" is displayed on the first display section 114x, and during the period when the base value B3 of section 3 is displayed, the identification information "b3" is displayed on the first display section 114x.

However, if the total number of outs is less than 60,000, the base value to be displayed on the second display unit 114y cannot be calculated during the period when the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display unit 114x. Similarly, if the total number of outs is less than 60,000, the base value to be displayed with the identification information "b2" and the base value to be displayed with the identification information "b3" cannot be calculated. Taking the above into consideration, if the total number of outs is less than 60,000, during the period when the identification information "b1" to "b3" are displayed on the first display unit 114x, each identification information is displayed flashing, and the special symbol "- -" is displayed lit on the second display unit 114y.

When the total number of outs is 60,000 or more but less than 120,000, the base value B1 that displays the identification information "b1" is calculated, but the base value B2 that displays the identification information "b2" and the base value B3 that displays the identification information "b3" cannot be calculated. Taking the above into consideration, when the total number of outs is 60,000 or more but less than 120,000, during the period when the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display unit 114x, the identification information is displayed in a lit state and the base value B1 is displayed in a lit state, and during the period when the identification information "b2" or the identification information "b3" is displayed, each identification information is displayed in a flashing state and the special symbol "- -" is displayed in a lit state on the second display unit 114y.

Similarly, when the total number of outs is 120,000 or more but less than 180,000, a base value B1 that displays the identification information "b1" and a base value B2 that displays the identification information "b2" are calculated, but a base value B3 that displays the identification information "b3" cannot be calculated. Taking the above into consideration, when the total number of outs is 120,000 or more but less than 180,000, during the period when the identification information "b1" or the identification information "b2" is displayed on the first display unit 114x, the identification information is displayed in a lit state and the base values (B1, B2) are displayed in a lit state, and during the period when the identification information "b3" is displayed, the identification information is displayed in a flashing state and the special symbol "- -" is displayed in the second display unit 114y.

As described above, in this embodiment, the real-time base value BL is displayed during the period in which the identification information "bL" is displayed. However, for example, in the specific example of FIG. 4(b), if the number of normal outs in section L is not sufficiently high, it is difficult to calculate an accurate (original) base value B. Taking the above into consideration, a configuration in which whether or not the number of normal outs in section L is sufficiently high is preferable. The above configuration has the advantage that the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can evaluate the base value BL after considering whether or not the number of normal outs is sufficient.

Specifically, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which, if the number of normal outs in section L is less than 6,000, the identification information "bL" is displayed in a flashing manner, and, if the number of normal outs in section L is 6,000 or more, the identification information "bL" is displayed in a lit manner. With the above configuration, whether or not the number of normal outs in section L is sufficiently high is essentially notified, and the above-mentioned advantages are obtained.

The operation of the gaming machine 1 is usually checked before the player actually plays. The above operation check includes checking whether the detection switches (13a, 14a, 16a, 17a, 18a, 19a) detect the gaming balls properly. Therefore, if the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter are incremented immediately after the gaming machine 1 is first powered on, it is expected that there will be an inconvenience in that the base value calculated immediately after the gaming machine 1 is first powered on will differ from the base value B calculated when the game is actually played.

Taking the above into consideration, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter are not incremented until the total out counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g., the value "300"). With the above configuration, the above-mentioned inconveniences are suppressed.

<Settings change switch>
As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 is provided with a setting change switch 115a. The setting change switch 115a is turned ON when the setting key device 115 (not shown) is rotated to a specific position, and is turned OFF when the setting key device 115 is rotated to a position other than the specific position. The gaming machine 1 can be set to any of a plurality of types (for example, six types) of setting values with different ball payout rates. Specifically, when the setting key device 115 is rotated to a specific position and the clear button 30 is pressed, the setting change process described below is executed, and the gaming machine 1 transitions to a mode in which the setting value can be changed (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "setting change mode"). When the gaming machine transitions to the setting change mode, the current setting value stored (set) in the main RAM 113 is displayed on the base display 114. In addition, the setting value displayed on the base display 114 is switched in the order of "... 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 ..." each time the clear button 30 is pressed in the setting change mode. When the setting change switch 115a is turned OFF in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the base display 114 is stored (set) in the main RAM 113, and the setting change mode ends.

In the setting change process, various information stored in the main RAM 113 is initialized. For example, the remaining number of times N, which indicates the number of times remaining until the second time-saving game state described below, is initialized to an initial value (the number "800" in this embodiment). The remaining number of times N is also initialized in the clear operation process described below. The clear operation process is executed when the power is turned on while the clear button 30 is pressed.

<Configuration of image control board>
Fig. 5 is a functional block diagram of image control board 150. As shown in Fig. 5, image control board 150 includes a host CPU 151, a host RAM 152, a host ROM 153, a CGROM 154, a crystal oscillator 155, a VRAM 156, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 200 for controlling the image display of image display device 31.

The host CPU 151 instructs the VDP 200 to display various images on the image display device 31 based on a performance pattern designation command (described later) received from the performance control board 120. The above instructions are executed by setting data in the control register 201 of the VDP 200 and outputting a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands.

The VDP 200 transmits a V-blank interrupt signal and a drawing end signal to the host CPU 151. When the host CPU 151 receives each of the above signals, it executes the appropriate interrupt process. Image data of the image displayed on the image display device 31 is stored in the CGROM 154.

The host CPU 151 instructs the VDP 200 to output a specified sound from the audio output device 34 based on the performance pattern designation command received from the performance control board 120. The host RAM 152 is built into the host CPU 151 and functions as a work area for data generated by the calculation processing of the host CPU 151. The host RAM 152 also temporarily stores data read from the host ROM 153.

The host ROM 153 is composed of a mask ROM, and stores a program for the control processing of the host CPU 151. The host ROM 153 also stores pattern arrangement information that associates the pattern numbers of the performance patterns with the types of performance patterns GA, a display list generation program for generating a display list, animation patterns for displaying animations of performance patterns, and animation scene information.

The animation pattern is referenced when displaying the animation of the production pattern, and the combination of animation scene information contained in the production pattern and the display order of each animation scene information are specified. The animation scene information also includes information such as the wait frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, destination address, etc.), drawing method, etc.

CGROM 154 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies) consisting of a collection of pixel information for a specific range of pixels (e.g., 32 x 32 pixels). A combination of color number information that specifies the color number of each pixel and an alpha value that indicates transparency is identified from the pixel information.

CGROM 154 also stores uncompressed palette data that associates display color information and color number information used when actually displaying colors. CGROM 154 may be configured to compress and store only a portion of the image data. Movie compression methods may include various well-known compression methods such as MPEG4. CGROM 154 also stores various types of audio data.

The crystal oscillator 155 outputs a pulse signal to the VDP 200. The clock generation circuit 205 of the VDP 200 divides the pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 155 and generates a system clock for the VDP 200 to perform control and a synchronization signal for synchronizing with the image display device 31.

VRAM 156 is a storage device capable of writing and reading image data, and is composed of, for example, an SRAM. For example, palette data is stored in VRAM 156.

The VRAM 156 also includes a display list memory area 156a that temporarily stores the display list output from the host CPU 151, an expansion memory area 156b that stores image data expanded by the expansion circuit 206, and a first frame buffer 156c and a second frame buffer 156d for drawing or displaying images. The two frame buffers 156c and 156d alternate between being the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time drawing begins.

The VDP 200 is a so-called image processor, and reads image data from a frame buffer (display frame buffer) in response to instructions from the host CPU 151. The VDP 200 also generates a video signal (such as an RGB signal) based on the read image data, and outputs it to the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 5, the VDP 200 of this embodiment includes a control register 201, a CG bus I/F 202, a CPU I/F 203, a clock generation circuit 205, an expansion circuit 206, a drawing circuit 207, a display circuit 208, a memory controller 209, and an audio control circuit 300.

The control register 201 is a register that the VDP 200 uses to control drawing and display, and drawing control and display control are performed by writing and reading data to the control register 201. The host CPU 151 writes and reads data to the control register 201 via the CPU I/F 203.

Specifically, the control register 201 includes a system control register that performs basic settings required for the operation of the VDP 200, a data transfer register that performs settings required for data transfer, a drawing register that performs settings for controlling drawing, a bus interface register that performs settings required for bus access, a decompression register that performs settings required for decompressing compressed images, and a display register that performs settings for controlling the display.

The CG bus I/F 202 is an interface circuit for communication with the CG ROM 154. Image data from the CG ROM 154 is input to the VDP 200 via the CG bus I/F 202.

The CPU I/F 203 is an interface circuit for communication with the host CPU 151. For example, a display list output by the host CPU 151 is input to the VDP 200 via the CPU I/F 203. In addition, various interrupt signals output from the VDP 200 are input to the host CPU 151 via the CPU I/F 203. The host CPU 151 can access the control register via the CPU I/F 203.

The data transfer circuit 204 transfers data between various devices. Specifically, the data transfer circuit 204 transfers data between the host CPU 151 and the VRAM 156, between the CGROM 154 and the VRAM 156, and between various storage areas of the VRAM 156 (including the frame buffer).

The clock generation circuit 205 receives a pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 155 and generates a system clock for the VDP 200. It also generates a clock for generating a synchronization signal and outputs the synchronization signal to the image display device 31 via the display circuit 208.

The decompression circuit 206 is a circuit for decompressing image data compressed in the CGROM 154, and stores the decompressed image data in the decompression memory area 153b. The drawing circuit 207 is a circuit for performing sequence control using a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands.

The display circuit 208 generates an RGB signal (analog signal) representing the color data of the image as a video signal from the image data (digital signal) stored in the "display frame buffer" in the VRAM 156. The video signal (RGB signal) generated by the display circuit 208 is output to the image display device 31.

The display circuit 208 also outputs a synchronization signal (vertical synchronization signal, horizontal synchronization signal, etc.) to the image display device 31 for synchronization with the image display device 31. Note that in this embodiment, the display circuit 208 is configured to output an RGB signal obtained by converting a digital signal into an analog signal as a video signal to the image display device 31, but the video signal may be output as a digital signal.

When the host CPU 151 instructs the memory controller 209 to switch frame buffers, it switches between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer."

The VDP 200 of this embodiment has a function for reproducing audio data in addition to a function for reproducing image data. Specifically, the audio output of the gaming machine is controlled by the audio control circuit 300 of the VDP 200. The audio control circuit 300 reads out a predetermined program based on a command sent from the performance control board 120, and controls the audio output of the audio output device 34.

The audio control circuit 300 outputs audio using audio data stored in the CGROM 154. Instead of storing audio data in the CGROM 154, an audio source ROM in which audio data is stored may be provided separately from the CGROM 154. The audio control circuit 300 may not be included in the VDP 200, but may be provided independently within the image control board 150. In the above cases, the audio source ROM may be included in the audio control circuit 300.

<Explanation of game state>
Next, the game states to which the gaming machine 1 transitions will be described. In this embodiment, the game progresses in any one of the game states of "low probability game state", "high probability game state", "time-saving game state" and "non-time-saving game state". Specifically, the game state transitions to a game state that is a "low probability game state" and a "time-saving game state", a game state that is a "low probability game state" and a "non-time-saving game state", and a game state that is a "high probability game state" and a "time-saving game state".

In the low probability game state described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery that is held when a game ball enters the first starting hole 13 or the second starting hole 14 is 1/299.5. Winning a jackpot means acquiring the right to play a jackpot game. Jackpot games include "long jackpot games" and "short jackpot games" described below.

In the high probability game state described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is higher than in the low probability game state. Specifically, in the high probability game state of this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/29.95. However, the probability of winning a jackpot in each game state may be changed as appropriate.

In the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery, which is executed when the game ball passes through the gate 15, is 1/20. Also, in the non-time-saving game state, the length of time from when the variable display of the normal pattern (normal pattern display device 22) starts to when it stops is set to about 10 seconds. Furthermore, if a player wins the normal pattern lottery, the total opening time of the second starting gate 14 when the long opening pattern described below is determined is set to about 4.2 seconds, and the total opening time of the second starting gate 14 when the short opening pattern is determined is set to about 0.2 seconds.

In the time-saving game state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery that is executed when the game ball passes through the gate 15 is higher than in the non-time-saving game state. Also, in the time-saving game state, the length of time from when the variable display of the normal symbols starts to when they are displayed stationary is shorter than in the non-time-saving game state, and the total opening time of the second starting port 14 is likely to be longer.

Specifically, in the time-saving play state, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is 19/20. Also, in the time-saving play state, the normal pattern is displayed stationary about 1 second after it is displayed in a varying manner. Furthermore, in the time-saving play state, the total opening time of the second start port 14 when the long opening pattern is determined is set to 5 seconds, and the total opening time of the second start port 14 when the short opening pattern is determined is set to 3 seconds. Note that when the normal pattern is stopped, the normal pattern is maintained in a stopped state for at least about 0.5 seconds.

In the above configuration, in the time-saving game state, the second starting hole 14 is more easily controlled to the second mode than in the non-time-saving game state, as long as the game ball passes through the gate 15. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the player can play while reducing the consumption of game balls. In this embodiment, playing with a right-handed shot makes it possible for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 14 and the gate 15. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, it is more advantageous to play with a right-handed shot than with a left-handed shot.

In this embodiment, multiple types of time-saving game states are provided. Specifically, the time-saving game states in this embodiment include a first time-saving game state and a second time-saving game state. A transition to the first time-saving game state occurs when the jackpot game (ending period) ends. A transition to the second time-saving game state can be made when a jackpot is not won a predetermined number of times in the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination process) in the low-probability game state.

In this embodiment, the normal pattern change time is common to each time-saving play state. Specifically, the normal pattern change time in each time-saving play state is about 1 second. In addition, the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery is common to each time-saving play state, and the probability of determining a long opening pattern and the probability of determining a short opening pattern are common to each time-saving play state.

In each time-saving game state, the operation mode (total opening time, number of openings) of the opening/closing door 14b when the long opening pattern is displayed in a stopped state is the same. In addition, in each time-saving game state, the operation mode of the opening/closing door 14b when the short opening pattern is displayed in a stopped state is the same. For the sake of explanation, the "variation time of the normal pattern, the opening (expansion) time of the second start opening 14, and the number of openings" in the time-saving game state may be referred to as the "opening mode" of the second start opening 14 (opening/closing door 14b) in the time-saving game state. As described above, the opening mode of the second start opening 14 is the same in each time-saving game state. However, the opening mode of the second start opening 14 may be configured to differ in each time-saving game state.

Each of the above time-saving game states ends when a predetermined number of plays have been played or when a transition to a jackpot game occurs. Hereinafter, the number of plays at which a time-saving game state ends may be referred to as the "time-saving number" of that time-saving game state. In this embodiment, each time-saving game state has a different number of time-saving plays. Specifically, the number of time-saving plays in the first time-saving game state is 100 or 799 plays. The number of time-saving plays in the second time-saving game state is 1000 plays. However, the number of time-saving plays in the time-saving game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of time-saving plays in the second time-saving game state may be 100 plays (common to the first time-saving game state).

Next, we will explain the details of the various tables stored in main ROM 112.

<Jackpot Judgment Table>
Figures 6 (a-1) and 6 (a-2) are conceptual diagrams of examples of jackpot determination tables that are referenced when determining whether the stopping result of the special pattern fluctuation is a jackpot or not (during the jackpot lottery).

Figure 6 (a-1) shows jackpot determination table A which is referenced when determining whether the stopping result of the special pattern fluctuation in the first special pattern display device 20 will be a jackpot, a small jackpot, or a miss (jackpot lottery). Details will be described later using Figures 7 (a-1) to 7 (a-3), but if a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, a jackpot pattern (special pattern A, etc.) described below will be displayed. Also, if a small jackpot is won, a small jackpot pattern (special pattern K) will be displayed.

Figure 6 (b-2) is a jackpot determination table B that is referenced when determining the stopping result of the special pattern fluctuation in the second special pattern display device 21. Note that the first special pattern display device 20 and the second special pattern display device 21 have different winning probabilities for small wins, but the jackpot probabilities are the same. Note that in this embodiment, the first special pattern display device 20 may be simply referred to as the "first special pattern" and the second special pattern display device 21 may be simply referred to as the "second special pattern". Also, the first special pattern display device 20 and the second special pattern display device 21 may be collectively referred to simply as the "special pattern".

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 13 or the second start hole 14 (hereinafter, sometimes collectively referred to as "start holes"), a random number value for determining a special symbol is obtained. In this embodiment, the random number value for determining a special symbol has a random number range of "0 to 598".

The jackpot determination table specifies the random number value for determining the special symbol that will result in a "jackpot" and the random number value for determining the special symbol that will result in a "small jackpot." In the jackpot lottery, the random number value for determining the special symbol obtained when the game ball enters the starting hole is compared with the random number value for determining the special symbol specified in the jackpot determination table, and if the two match, the player wins a jackpot or a small jackpot.

The jackpot determination tables (A, B) shown in Figures 6 (a-1) and 6 (a-2) are composed of a low-probability random number determination table and a high-probability random number determination table. The main CPU 111 refers to the game state, and selects the low-probability random number determination table in a low-probability game state, and selects the high-probability random number determination table in a high-probability game state. The main CPU 111 also determines whether the result is a "jackpot," "small win," or "miss" based on the selected table and the extracted random number value for special pattern determination.

For example, according to the low probability random number determination table shown in FIG. 6(a-1), two random numbers for determining special symbols are determined as "big wins". On the other hand, according to the high probability random number determination table, 20 random numbers for determining special symbols are determined as "big wins". Also, in the big win determination table of FIG. 6(a-1), whether the low probability random number determination table or the high probability random number determination table is used, four random numbers for determining special symbols are determined as "small wins". If a random number value is not determined as either a "big win" or a "small win", it is determined as a "miss".

As mentioned above, the random number range for the special symbol determination random number value is the numerical value "0 to 598". Therefore, in jackpot determination table A (when the ball enters the first starting slot), the probability of a jackpot being determined is 1/299.5 in a low probability game state. Similarly, the probability of a jackpot being determined to be a jackpot in a high probability game state is ten times as high, at 1/29.95. On the other hand, the probability of a small jackpot being determined is 1/149.75 in both the low probability game state and the high probability game state.

In jackpot determination table B shown in FIG. 6 (a-2), the random number value for determining the special symbol that is determined to be a jackpot in the low probability play state and the high probability play state is the same as that in jackpot determination table A. On the other hand, the random number value for determining the special symbol that is determined to be a small jackpot is different between jackpot determination table A and jackpot determination table B. For example, in jackpot determination table B, a "small jackpot" is determined only when the random number value for determining the special symbol is "50."

In the above configuration, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 13 and when a game ball enters the second starting hole 14, the probability of a big win in the low probability game state is 1/299.5, and the probability of a big win in the high probability game state is 1/29.95. On the other hand, the probability of a small win being determined when a game ball enters the first starting hole 13 is 1/149.75 in both the low probability game state and the high probability game state, but the probability of a small win being determined when a game ball enters the second starting hole 14 is 1/599 in both the low probability game state and the high probability game state.

<Hit determination table>
Fig. 6(b) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a winning judgment table that is referred to when judging whether or not the stopping result of the normal pattern variation is a winning result in the normal pattern lottery. The winning judgment table shown in Fig. 6(b) is composed of a random number judgment table for non-time-saving game state and a random number judgment table for time-saving game state. The random number judgment table for time-saving game state is commonly referred to in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state.

The main CPU 111 acquires a random number for determining a normal symbol when the game ball passes through the gate 15. The random number value for determining a win has a random number range of 0 to 19. The main CPU 111 refers to the game state, and in a non-time-saving game state, selects a random number determination table for the non-time-saving game state, and in a time-saving game state, selects a random number determination table for the time-saving game state. The main CPU 111 also determines whether there is a "win" or a "miss" based on the selected table and the acquired random number value for determining a win.

Specifically, the main CPU 111 determines whether the acquired random number value for hit determination matches the random number value for hit determination specified in the hit determination table. In the hit determination table shown in FIG. 6(b), the probability of a hit being determined in a non-time-saving play state is approximately 1/20, and the probability of a hit being determined in a time-saving play state is approximately 19/20.

<Pattern determination table>
FIG. 7(a-1) to FIG. 7(a-3) are conceptual diagrams of special symbol determination tables for determining special symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed in each game.

The special symbol determination table includes a big win symbol determination table, a small win symbol determination table, and a losing symbol determination table. The big win symbol determination table is referenced when determining the stopping symbol (big win symbol) when a big win is won in the big win lottery. The small win symbol determination table is referenced when determining the stopping symbol (small win symbol) when a small win is won in the big win lottery. The losing symbol determination table is referenced when determining the stopping symbol (losing symbol) when a big win lottery is lost.

As shown in Figures 7(a-1) to 7(a-3), each special pattern determination table is provided for each special pattern display device, and is composed of a special pattern determination table for the first special pattern display device 20 and a special pattern determination table for the second special pattern display device 21.

Figure 7 (a-1) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a jackpot symbol determination table. When a jackpot is won, the main CPU 111 refers to the random number value for the jackpot symbol. The random number range for the random number value for the jackpot symbol is the numbers "0 to 99." For example, when a jackpot is won as a result of winning the first starting hole 13, if the main CPU 111 obtains a random number value for the jackpot symbol between "0" and "59," it determines "01" (special symbol A1) as the stopped symbol data. In the above cases, the special symbol A1 is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display device 20 as shown in Figure 7 (a-1).

In addition, when the special symbol starts to change, the main CPU 111 generates a performance pattern designation command that can identify the stopping symbol data (type of special symbol). For example, when the stopping symbol data "01" is determined, the performance pattern designation commands "E0H" and "01H" are generated, as shown in FIG. 7(a-1).

As shown in FIG. 7(a-1), if a jackpot is won by winning the first starting hole 13 and the obtained random number value for the jackpot symbol is between "60" and "69", "02" (special symbol A2) is determined as the stopping symbol data, and the performance symbol designation commands "E0H" and "02H" are generated. In the above cases, the special symbol A2 is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display device 20.

Similarly, if a jackpot is won as a result of winning the first starting hole 13 and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is between "70" and "99", "03" (special symbol A3) is determined as the stopping symbol data, and the performance symbol designation commands "E0H" and "03H" are generated. In the above cases, the special symbol A3 is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display device 20.

If a jackpot is won as a result of winning the second starting hole 14 and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is between "0" and "69", "04" (special symbol B1) is determined as the stopping symbol data, and the effect symbol designation commands "E1H" and "01H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol B1 is displayed stopped on the second special symbol display device 21, as shown in FIG. 7(a-1).

In addition, if a jackpot is won by winning the second starting hole 14 and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is between "70" and "89", "05" (special symbol B2) is determined as the stopping symbol data, and the effect symbol designation commands "E1H" and "02H" are generated. In the above cases, the special symbol B2 is displayed as a stopped symbol on the second special symbol display device 21. If a jackpot is won by winning the second starting hole 14 and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is between "90" and "94", "06" (special symbol B3) is determined as the stopping symbol data, and the effect symbol designation commands "E1H" and "03H" are generated. In the above cases, the special symbol B3 is displayed as a stopped symbol on the second special symbol display device 21.

Similarly, if a jackpot is won by winning the second starting hole 14 and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is between "95" and "99", "07" (special symbol B4) is determined as the stopping symbol data, and the effect symbol designation commands "E1H" and "04H" are generated. In the above cases, the special symbol B4 is displayed as stopped on the second special symbol display device 21. As will be described in more detail later, the number of time-saving times M in the first time-saving play state after the jackpot play changes depending on the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed when the jackpot play begins.

When the special symbols A1, A2, A3, B1 to B4 (hereinafter sometimes collectively referred to as "jackpot symbols") are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game starts. As described above, the jackpot game includes long jackpot game and short jackpot game. In the jackpot game, the first large prize opening 16 and the second large prize opening 17 (hereinafter sometimes collectively referred to as "large prize openings") are opened. In the long jackpot game, the opening time of the large prize opening is set longer than in the short jackpot game.

The type of jackpot game depends on the special jackpot symbol that is stopped when the jackpot game starts. Specifically, if any of the special jackpot symbols A1, A3, B1 to B4 is stopped, a long jackpot game starts. On the other hand, if the special symbol A2 is stopped, a short jackpot game starts.

The game state after the jackpot game ends is determined by the special symbol that is stopped when the game transitions to the jackpot game. For example, if special symbol A1, special symbol A2, or special symbol B1 is stopped, the game transitions to a high-probability time-saving game state (hereinafter simply referred to as the "high-probability time-saving game state"). In principle, the high-probability time-saving game state continues until a jackpot is won. On the other hand, if any of special symbols A3, B2, and B4 are stopped, the game transitions to a low-probability time-saving game state (hereinafter simply referred to as the "low-probability time-saving game state"). Specifically, when special symbols A3, B2, and B4 are stopped and the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the number of time-saving cycles in the first time-saving game state differs depending on the type of jackpot symbol (A3, B2 to B4). Specifically, when the special symbol A3 or special symbol B2 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the number of time-saving cycles in the first time-saving game state becomes 100. On the other hand, when the special symbol B3 or special symbol B4 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the number of times the first time-saving game state is played becomes 799.

Although details will be described later, a new table scenario S is set when the jackpot game ends. By setting the table scenario S, the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol (described later) is switched according to the number of games played. The above table scenario S is variably set according to the type of jackpot symbol.

In this embodiment, a jackpot game in which the game state after completion is a high probability game state may be described as a "high probability jackpot", and a jackpot game in which the game state after completion is a low probability game state may be described as a "normal jackpot". Also, in this embodiment, a non-time-saving game state in a low probability game state may be described as a "low probability non-time-saving game state".

Figure 7 (a-2) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a small win symbol determination table. When a small win is won, the main CPU 111 refers to the random number value for the small win symbol. The random number range for the random number value for the small win symbol is the numerical value "0 to 99". However, when a small win is won as a result of winning the first starting hole 13, the main CPU 111 determines the stopping symbol data to be "11" (special symbol K) regardless of the acquired random number value for the small win symbol. In the above cases, as shown in Figure 7 (a-2), the special symbol K is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display device 20. In addition, the performance symbol designation commands "E0H" and "0AH" are generated.

Similarly, if a small win is won as a result of winning the second starting hole 14, the main CPU 111 determines the stopping pattern data to be "12" (special pattern K) regardless of the acquired random number value for the small win pattern. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7(a-2), the special pattern K is displayed stopped on the second special pattern display device 21. In addition, the performance pattern designation commands "E1H" and "0AH" are generated.

Figure 7 (a-3) is a conceptual diagram of a losing symbol determination table. If the winning jackpot lottery at the time of winning the first starting hole 13 is determined to be a losing jackpot, the stopping symbol data is determined to be "00" (special symbol H). In the above cases, the performance symbol designation commands "E0H" and "00H" are generated. Similarly, if the winning jackpot lottery at the time of winning the second starting hole 14 is determined to be a losing jackpot, the stopping symbol data is determined to be "00" (special symbol H). In the above cases, the performance symbol designation commands "E1H" and "00H" are generated.

Figures 7(b-1) and 7(b-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination table is used when determining the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The above normal symbol determination table is used in common in each game state (non-time-saving game state, first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state).

The normal symbol determination table in this embodiment includes a normal symbol determination table X and a normal symbol determination table Y. The normal symbol determination table X is used when the normal symbol lottery is won (when the second start hole 14 is opened). On the other hand, the normal symbol determination table Y is used when the normal symbol lottery is lost (when the second start hole 14 is not opened).

Figure 7 (b-1) is a conceptual diagram of normal symbol determination table X. When determining a normal symbol, the main CPU 111 obtains a random number value for the normal symbol. The random number range for the random number value for the normal symbol is the numbers "0" to "10." For example, if a normal symbol lottery is won and the random number value for the normal symbol is the number "0" or the number "1," a long opening symbol is determined as the normal symbol. On the other hand, if the random number value for the normal symbol is any of the numbers "2" to "10," a short opening symbol is determined as the normal symbol.

When the main CPU 111 determines a long opening pattern as the normal pattern, it determines the stop pattern data "01" and generates the normal pattern designation commands "E8H" and "01H" when the normal pattern starts to change. Also, when the main CPU 111 determines a short opening pattern, it determines the stop pattern data "02" and generates the normal pattern designation commands "E8H" and "02H" when the normal pattern starts to change.

Figure 7 (b-2) is a conceptual diagram of normal symbol determination table Y. As described above, normal symbol determination table Y is used when the normal symbol lottery is a miss. When the normal symbol lottery is a miss, as shown in Figure 7 (b-2), the missing symbol is determined regardless of whether the random number value for the normal symbol is any value between "0" and "10". When the main CPU 111 determines a missing symbol as the normal symbol, it determines "00" as the stop symbol data, and generates normal symbol designation commands "E8H" and "00H" when the normal symbol starts to change.

Figures 8(a), 8(b-1) and 8(b-2) are diagrams for explaining the variation pattern determination table referenced in each game. The variation pattern determination table is referenced when determining the variation pattern for each game. The main CPU 111 determines the variation pattern for each game and causes the special pattern display devices (first special pattern display device 20, second special pattern display device 21) to vary and display the variation pattern.

The variation pattern determination table referenced in each game after the jackpot game is completed is variable according to the type of jackpot symbol stopped and displayed at the start of the jackpot game. Specifically, in this embodiment, multiple types of table scenarios S corresponding to multiple types of jackpot symbols are provided. The main CPU 111 sets the table scenario S corresponding to the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed at the start of the jackpot game. The main CPU 111 also determines the variation pattern determination table referenced in each game after the jackpot game using the set table scenario S. In the above configuration, the variation pattern determination table referenced in each game becomes variable according to the set table scenario S. Although details will be described later, when the number of games after the jackpot game is completed reaches the number of games specified by the table scenario S, the variation pattern determination table is switched (see FIG. 8 (b-1) described later).

FIG. 8(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the table scenario S. The table scenario S includes table scenario Sa1, table scenario Sa2, table scenario Sa3, table scenario Sb1, table scenario Sb2, table scenario Sb3, and table scenario Sb4. Table scenario Sa1 is set when the special symbol A1 of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. Similarly, table scenario Sa2 is set when the special symbol A2 of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, table scenario Sa3 is set when the special symbol A3 of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, and table scenario SB1 is set when the special symbol B1 of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed.

The table scenario Sb2 is set when the special symbol B2 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B2 is stopped and displayed, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state of 100 times after the jackpot game. In other words, the table scenario Sb2 is set when the game transitions to the first time-saving game state of 100 times after the jackpot game. The table scenario Sb3 is set when the special symbol B3 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state of 799 times after the jackpot game. In addition, the table scenario Sb4 is set when the special symbol B4 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state of 799 times after the jackpot game.

As can be understood from the above explanation, when the special symbol B3 is displayed and when the special symbol B4 is displayed, the number of time-saving times in the first time-saving game state after a jackpot game is the same (799 times), but the table scenarios (Sb3, Sb4) that are set are different. That is, in each of the above cases, the variation pattern determination table referenced in the first time-saving game state is different. As will be described in detail later, the presentation mode in the first time-saving game state is different when the special symbol B3 is displayed and when the special symbol B4 is displayed. In games with different presentation modes, the presentations that can be executed by the image display device 31 are different.

In this embodiment, the fact that a specific fluctuation pattern determination table T is referenced in the fluctuation pattern determination process may be described simply as "the fluctuation pattern determination table T is referenced." Also, the fact that a specific fluctuation pattern determination table T among multiple types of fluctuation pattern determination tables T becomes referable may be described simply as "the specific fluctuation pattern determination table T is set." For example, as an example of "a specific fluctuation pattern determination table T becoming referable," it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern determination table T is read out from the main ROM 112 and stored (expanded) in the main RAM 113.

Figure 8 (b-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table set by table scenario S. Table scenario S specifies multiple triggers for setting (switching) the fluctuation pattern determination table, and the fluctuation pattern determination table that is set at each trigger. When a trigger specified in table scenario S occurs, main CPU 111 sets (switches) the fluctuation pattern determination table.

Figure 8 (b-1) shows the order in which the triggers for setting the fluctuation pattern determination table occur. The fluctuation pattern determination table that is set at each trigger is also shown corresponding to that trigger. The specific example of Figure 8 (b-1) assumes a case in which table scenario Sb2 of table scenario S is set. The specific example of Figure 8 (b-1) also assumes a case in which no jackpot is won in the period from when table scenario Sb2 is set to when the second time-saving gaming state ends.

As shown in FIG. 8(b-1), in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the end of the jackpot game triggers the setting of the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1. Also, in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, when the 91st game starts after the jackpot game ends, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is set. Then, when the 100th game starts after the jackpot game ends, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj1 is set. In the above configuration, in the first time-saving game state (100 times), the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referenced in the first 90th game (the 90th game after the jackpot game ends), the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is referenced in the 91st to 99th games, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj1 is referenced in the 100th game (last).

As shown in FIG. 8 (b-1), when table scenario Sb2 is set, the end of the first time-saving game state triggers the setting of fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1. Furthermore, when the 791st game starts after the end of the jackpot game, fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 is set. In the above configuration, for each game in the non-time-saving game state, fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referenced up to the 11th game before the transition to the second time-saving game state, and fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 is referenced from the 10th game before the transition to the second time-saving game state.

When the second time-saving game state starts, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is set. As shown in FIG. 8(b-1), when the table scenario Sb2 is set, when the 802nd game (the second game in the second time-saving game state) starts after the end of the jackpot game, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is set. Also, when the second time-saving game state ends, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is set. In the above configuration, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referenced in the first game in the second time-saving game state, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referenced in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state. After that, when the second time-saving game state ends, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referenced. As can be understood from the above explanation, during the period when the table scenario S is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table is changed according to the trigger for changing the game state, as well as the number of games since the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the table scenario S is changed when a jackpot game is won, and is not changed at other times. However, when the above-mentioned clear operation process or setting change process is executed, the table scenario S is put into an unset state. For the sake of explanation, the operation in which the setting change process or clear operation process is executed may be referred to as a "clear operation". Furthermore, the period in which the table scenario S is unset may be referred to as a "scenario unset period". The scenario unset period is the period from when the clear operation is executed until the first jackpot game ends. Furthermore, the period in which one of the table scenarios S is set after the jackpot game ends may be referred to as a "scenario set period".

Let us assume a comparison in which the variation pattern determination table is changed according to the number of times the game is played during a period in which a scenario is not set. In this comparison, a variation pattern determination table that is advantageous to the player is referenced from the start of the period in which a scenario is not set until a predetermined number of times the game is played. In the above comparison, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can transition to a state that is advantageous to the player at any time by performing a clear operation. Therefore, inconveniences that impair the fairness of the game may occur. Taking the above circumstances into consideration, this embodiment employs a configuration in which the variation pattern determination table is not changed according to the number of times the game is played during a period in which a scenario is not set.

Figure 8 (b-2) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a variation pattern determination table that is referenced during a period in which a scenario is not set. The specific example in Figure 8 (b-2) assumes a case in which no jackpot is won during the period from when a scenario is not set until the second time-saving game state ends.

As shown in FIG. 8 (b-2), immediately after the clear operation is executed and the scenario unset period begins, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referenced. When the clear operation is executed, the game enters a low-probability non-time-shortened game state. In addition, when 800 games have been played since the clear operation was executed, the game transitions to the second time-shortened game state. As described above, in the scenario setting period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table T referenced in the low-probability non-time-shortened game state changes from the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 to the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 depending on the number of games played. On the other hand, in the low-probability non-time-shortened game state during the scenario unset period, the fluctuation pattern determination table T referenced does not change from the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1.

As shown in FIG. 8 (b-2), when the second time-saving game state starts during a period when a scenario is not set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is set. After that, when the second time-saving game state ends and a transition to a low-probability non-time-saving game state occurs, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is set. In the above configuration, during a period when a scenario is not set, the fluctuation pattern determination table is not changed (only according to the number of times played) except when a trigger for a change in the game state occurs.

Figure 9 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T that is referenced in each game state. In this embodiment, when each game is started, a variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern of that game is sent from the main control board 110 (main CPU 111) to the presentation control board 120 (sub-CPU 121). The sub-CPU 121 is controlled to a presentation mode that corresponds to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command. Figure 9 shows each presentation mode that corresponds to each variation pattern determination table.

As described above, the fluctuation pattern determination table T is referenced, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by lottery. In addition, the time during which the special symbol is displayed may differ for each fluctuation pattern. In the above configuration, the time during which the special symbol is displayed in each game is variable. In this embodiment, for the sake of explanation, the average time during which the special symbol is displayed in each game when playing with normal procedures during the period during which the fluctuation pattern determination table T is referenced may be described as the "average fluctuation time of the special symbol" during that period. In FIG. 9, the average fluctuation time (short, long, fixed) of the special symbol during the period during which the fluctuation pattern determination table T is referenced is shown corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination table T. Note that the above-mentioned "playing with normal procedures" means hitting with the left hand during the period when the right hit lamp 28 is off, hitting with the right hand during the period when the right hit lamp 28 is on, and not performing so-called "stop shots" (including single shots).

As shown in FIG. 9, in the first time-saving game state, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj1, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj2, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax can be referenced. However, the fluctuation pattern determination table T referenced in the first time-saving game state changes according to the table scenario S (i.e., changes according to the jackpot pattern).

Specifically, if the jackpot symbol is the special symbol B2, table scenario Sb2 is set and the first time-saving game state of 100 times is started. In the first time-saving game state (100 times) in which table scenario Sb2 is set, as explained above with reference to FIG. 8 (b-1), the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referenced up to the 90th game (the 90th game after the jackpot game ends), the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is referenced from the 91st to 99th games, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj1 is referenced for the 100th game (the last) game.

In a game where the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referenced, the presentation mode becomes time-saving mode A. In addition, in a game where the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is referenced, the presentation mode becomes time-saving mode A, as in a game where the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referenced. That is, in the first time-saving game state where the table scenario Sb2 is set, the presentation mode does not change from the first to the 99th game, but when the remaining number of times becomes 10, the fluctuation pattern determination table T switches (Ta1 → Ta2). However, the presentation mode may be different between the period where the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referenced and the period where the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is referenced. In the above configuration, when the remaining number of times becomes 10 in the first time-saving game state where the table scenario Sb2 is set, the presentation mode switches.

The fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is easier to determine a long-term fluctuation pattern compared to the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1. With the above configuration, in a game after the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state reaches 10, it becomes easier to secure time to execute an effect (e.g., a countdown effect) that notifies (indicates) that the first time-saving game state is ending. In a game where the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj1 is referenced, the end effect is executed after the judgment effect is executed.

In the judgement performance, for example, the shielding image GF (see FIG. 16(c) above) is displayed first. That is, when the judgement performance starts, the sliding door is displayed in a closed state. In addition, in the judgement performance, it is displayed that the sliding door can be opened by repeatedly pressing the performance button 8, and that if the sliding door is opened, the first time-shortened game state will continue. In the judgement performance when the first time-shortened game state continues, a moving image of the sliding door opening is finally displayed (the shielding image GF is hidden). On the other hand, in the judgement performance when the first time-shortened game state does not continue, the sliding door remains closed. In the end performance, it is announced that the first time-shortened game state will end. Note that a specific example of the end performance will be described in the second embodiment described later (see FIG. 45).

During the period when the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referenced in the non-time-saving game state immediately after the first time-saving game state ends (see FIG. 8 (b-1) above). In a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referenced, the presentation mode becomes the normal mode. In addition, when the 791st game starts after the end of the jackpot game, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 is set. In a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 is referenced, the presentation mode becomes the last mode. In the last mode, a presentation that is not executed in the normal mode can be executed. For example, in the last mode, a presentation that suggests that the second time-saving game state will soon start is executed.

In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, when the second time-saving game state starts, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is set. The fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referenced in the first game of the second time-saving game state. In the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referenced, a break-in effect is executed. The break-in effect is an effect for notifying that the second time-saving game state has started. The average fluctuation time of the special chart in the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referenced is longer than the average fluctuation time of the special chart in the second or subsequent game in the second time-saving game state (game in which Tax is referenced). Specifically, in the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referenced, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is determined for each result of the jackpot lottery. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, a fluctuation pattern of the time required to stop and display the performance pattern GA corresponding to the miss after executing the judgement effect and the end effect is determined. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won, after the judgement and end effects are performed, the fact that a jackpot has been won is announced.

During the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referenced in the second to 1000th (last) play in the second time-saving play state. In the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax, a shorter fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined than in the non-time-saving play state (play in which Tn1 or Tn2 is referenced). In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax, a shorter fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined than in the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 and the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 referenced in the first time-saving play state, and the average fluctuation time of the special chart is shorter. Similarly, in the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx, a shorter fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined than in the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 and the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 referenced in the first time-saving play state, and the average fluctuation time of the special chart is shorter. In play in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referenced, the presentation mode becomes the time-saving mode B.

As shown in FIG. 9, when table scenario Sb3 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination tables T referenced in the order of fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1, fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2, fluctuation pattern determination table Tj2, fluctuation pattern determination table Tax, fluctuation pattern determination table Tnc, and fluctuation pattern determination table Tax are changed. Specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination tables T referenced in each game during the period in which table scenario Sb3 is set will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 11(a).

As shown in FIG. 9, when table scenario Sb4 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table T is changed to reference the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tnc, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax in that order. A specific example of the dynamic pattern determination table T referenced in each game during the period when table scenario Sb3 is set will be described in detail using FIG. 11(b) described later. Also, as shown in FIG. 9, during a period when no scenario is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table T is changed to reference the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx in that order. A specific example of the dynamic pattern determination table T referenced in each game during a period when no scenario is set will be described in detail using FIG. 10(b) described later.

Figure 10 (a-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a variation pattern determination table referenced in each game during the period in which table scenario Sb2 of table scenario S is set. In addition to the variation pattern determination table T at each time point, Figure 10 (a-1) shows the presentation mode at each time point, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state (hereinafter "remaining number of times M"), and the remaining number of times until the second time-saving game state starts (hereinafter "remaining number of times N"). The remaining number of times M and the remaining number of times N are stored in the main RAM 113, for example.

In each game in the time-saving game state, the remaining number of times M is decremented by one, and when the remaining number of times M is decremented to zero, the time-saving game state ends. In addition, in each game in the low-probability game state, the remaining number of times N is decremented by one, and when the remaining number of times N is decremented to zero, the second time-saving game state begins. The remaining number of times N is initialized to an initial value of 800 when a jackpot game is won or when the above-mentioned clear operation is performed. In other words, the second time-saving game state begins when 800 games (low-probability game state) have been played since the jackpot game, and when 800 games (low-probability game state) have been played since the clear operation.

Figure 10 (a-1) shows the start time ts of play and the end time te of the play. As can be seen from Figure 10 (a-1), the remaining number of times M in the time-saving play state is subtracted when play ends. Specifically, the remaining number of times M is subtracted when the fixed period described below ends. Similarly, the remaining number of times N is subtracted when the fixed period ends.

As described above, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referenced up to the 90th game in the first time-saving game state. That is, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referenced up to the game in which the remaining number of times M in the first time-saving game state is the value "11" and the remaining number of times N is the value "711". Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is referenced from the 91st to the 99th game in the first time-saving game state. Both the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 and the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 correspond to the time-saving mode A (see FIG. 9 above). In the above configuration, the first to the 99th game in the first time-saving game state is in the time-saving mode A. As shown in FIG. 10(a-1), during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj1 is referenced in the last game in the first time-saving game state, and the above-mentioned judgment performance is executed, followed by the end performance.

In the specific example of FIG. 10(a-1), it is assumed that the remaining number of times M is subtracted to the value "0" at time ta, and the first time-saving gaming state ends. In the above specific example, the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the value "700" at time ta. As described above, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set when the first time-saving gaming state ends, and the presentation mode becomes the normal mode.

Figure 10 (a-2) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table referenced in each game during another period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. In the specific example of Figure 10 (a-2), as in the specific example of Figure 10 (a-1) described above, it is assumed that the first time-saving game state ends at time ta. As described above, in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set when the first time-saving game state ends, and then, when 690 games are played, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is set. That is, after a jackpot game, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is referenced from the 791st game. The variation pattern determination table Tn2 corresponds to the previous mode (see Figure 9 described above). In the above configuration, after a jackpot game, the previous mode is set from the 791st game.

In the specific example of FIG. 10(a-2), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the value "0" at time tb and the second time-saving game state is started. In the above case, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state is set to the value "1000" at time tb. In addition, in the specific example of FIG. 10(a-2), it is assumed that the number of reserved balls is 1 or more at time tb and the first game starts immediately after the start of the second time-saving game state. As described above, in the first game of the second time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referenced and the entry presentation is executed. In addition, in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referenced and the presentation mode becomes time-saving mode B.

Figure 10(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a variation pattern determination table referenced in each game during a scenario-unset period. As described above, a scenario-unset period begins with a clear operation. When a clear operation is performed, the remaining number of times M is initialized to the initial value "0", and a low-probability non-time-saving game state is entered. In addition, when a clear operation is performed, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is entered is initialized to the numerical value "800". As shown in Figure 10(b), in a low-probability non-time-saving game state during a scenario-unset period, variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referenced, and other variation pattern determination tables T are not referenced.

In the specific example of FIG. 10(b), it is assumed that the remaining number N is subtracted to the value "0" at time tb and the second time-saving game state is started. Also, in the specific example of FIG. 10(b), it is assumed that the number of reserved balls is one or more at time tb when the second time-saving game state starts, and the second time-saving game state starts immediately after time tb, as in the above-mentioned FIG. 10(a-1). When the second time-saving game state starts during a period in which a scenario is not set, a fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is set. The fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referenced until the second time-saving game state ends. The fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx corresponds to the time-saving mode B (see FIG. 9 above). In the above configuration, the presentation mode of the second time-saving game state becomes the time-saving mode B regardless of whether it is a scenario-set period or a scenario-not-set period.

As can be understood from the above explanation, the fluctuation pattern determination table T referenced is different between the first game in the second time-shortened game state in the period when the table scenario Sb2 is set and the first game in the second time-shortened game state in the period when no scenario is set. Specifically, a dedicated fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referenced in the first game in the second time-shortened game state in the period when the table scenario Sb2 is set, whereas the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx that is also referenced in subsequent games is referenced in the first game in the second time-shortened game state in the period when no scenario is set.

In games where the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referenced, a longer fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined than in games where the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referenced and in games where the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referenced. Specifically, in games where the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referenced, various effects (entry effect, mode selection effect, etc.) are executed when the second time-saving game state is started. In games where the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referenced, a fluctuation pattern of a length that allows the above effects to be executed is determined.

On the other hand, in the first game of the second time-saving game state in a scenario-unset period, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referenced. In a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referenced, a shorter fluctuation pattern is more likely to be selected than in a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referenced. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the first game of the second time-saving game state in a scenario-unset period is, in principle, shorter than the time for a break-in effect or the like to be executed in a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referenced.

For the above reasons, in the first game of the second time-saving game state in a period when a scenario is not set, in principle, none of the entry effects and the like executed in the first game of the second time-saving game state in a period when table scenario Sb2 is set cannot be executed. However, as will be explained in detail using Figures 18(a) and 18(b) below, in the first game of the second time-saving game state in a period when a scenario is not set, an effect is executed that omits some of the various effects (mode selection effects) executed in the first game of the second time-saving game state in a period when table scenario Sb2 is set.

In this way, there is a first time-saving game state that goes through a jackpot, and a second time-saving game state that does not go through a jackpot, and when the variable display a predetermined number of times after the first condition is met (RAM cleared) is a miss, and when the variable display a predetermined number of times after the second condition is met (jackpot end) is a miss, the game is controlled to the second time-saving game state for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, by having multiple conditions for entering the second time-saving game state, it is possible to improve the gameplay and increase the interest in the game.
After the RAM is cleared, the game effect is executed by executing a non-exclusive variation pattern, whereas after the big win, the game effect is executed by executing a dedicated variation pattern.

Figure 11 (a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table T referenced in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set. In the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referenced in the first 90 games, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is referenced in the 91st to 99th games, just like in the first time-saving game state (100 times) in which the table scenario Sb2 is set.

However, in the first time-shortened game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tj2 is referenced in the 100th game. In a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tj2 is referenced, a continuation effect is executed after a judgment effect is executed. In the continuation effect, it is notified that the first time-shortened game state will continue. As described above, the first time-shortened game state (100 times) in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the first time-shortened game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set have the same effect mode in the first 100th game. Therefore, in the first time-shortened game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, it is difficult (including cases where it is practically impossible) to know whether the first time-shortened game state will continue to the 101st game or later until the continuation effect is executed.

In the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which table scenario Sb3 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referenced in the 101st to 799th (last) games. As described above, in games in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referenced, the presentation mode becomes time-saving mode B.

When 800 games are played in the low probability game state (non-time shortening, time shortening), the game state transitions to the second time shortening game state. Therefore, when the first time shortening game state of 799 times ends, the second time shortening game state starts through one game in the non-time shortening low probability game state. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, one game played between the first time shortening game state (799 times) and the second time shortening game state may be referred to as "gap game". As shown in FIG. 11(a), the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referenced in the gap game. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referenced, the presentation mode becomes the time shortening mode B, as in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referenced.
In this embodiment, an example in which a gap game is provided is described, but a gap game may not be provided. That is, when 800 games are played in the first time-saving game state, the game may be shifted to the second time-saving game state.

In the specific example of FIG. 11(a), it is assumed that the second time-shortened game state is started at time tb. Also, in the specific example of FIG. 11(a), it is assumed that the number of reserved balls is equal to or greater than the numerical value "1" at time tb. As shown in FIG. 11(a), in the second time-shortened game state in the period in which table scenario Sb3 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referenced, including the first game and the second and subsequent games, and the presentation mode is time-shortened mode B. Also, in the second time-shortened game state in the period in which table scenario Sb3 is set, various presentations (such as entry presentations) that are used when the second time-shortened game state is started in the period in which table scenario Sb2 is set are omitted.

As can be understood from the above explanation, when the table scenario Sb3 is set, the presentation mode becomes time-saving mode B for a series of plays after the transition to time-saving mode B in the first time-saving game state (799 times), via gap play, and the start of the second time-saving game state. With the above configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are a series of time-saving game states. However, during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, a notification may be made that the first time-saving game state has ended (that gap play has started) and that the second time-saving game state has started.

Figure 11(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a variation pattern determination table that is referenced in each game during the period in which table scenario Sb4 is set. Table scenario Sb4 is set when the first time-saving game state of 799 times is started, similar to the case in which table scenario Sb3 is set (see Figure 11(a) above).

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the table scenario Sb4 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referenced from the first play to the last play in the first time-saving game state (799 times), and the presentation mode becomes time-saving mode B. That is, in the period when the above-mentioned table scenario Sb3 is set, the continuation presentation is executed in a play (100th play) in the middle of the first time-saving game state (799 times), and then the mode transitions to time-saving mode B, but in the period when the table scenario Sb4 is set, the mode transitions to time-saving mode B from the first play in the first time-saving game state. In the above configuration, in the period when the table scenario Sb4 is set, the player is essentially notified that the first time-saving game state will continue for 799 times immediately after the start of the first time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), during the period when table scenario Sb4 is set, similar to the period when table scenario Sb3 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tnc is referenced in the gap play, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referenced in the subsequent second time-saving play state. Also, during the period when table scenario Sb4 is set, similar to the period when table scenario Sb3 is set, the presentation mode becomes time-saving mode B throughout the series of play in the first time-saving play state, gap play, and second time-saving play state.

During the period when the above table scenario Sb4 is set, the player can be made to recognize that the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state are a series of time-shortened game states, just as in the period when the table scenario Sb3 is set. During the period when the table scenario Sb4 is set, no entry performance is executed at the start of the second time-shortened game state, just as in the period when the table scenario Sb3 is set.

As can be understood from the above explanation, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table T referenced is variable between a specific game (e.g., the first game) in the second time-saving game state started in a scenario-set period (Tax or Ts is referenced in the first game) and a specific fluctuation display in the second time-saving game state started in a scenario-unset period (Tbx is referenced in the first game).

FIG. 12 and FIG. 13(a) to FIG. 13(c) are conceptual diagrams of specific examples of a variation pattern determination table.
In this embodiment, for each special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21), a variation pattern is determined based on the random number value for special symbol determination (won or lost the jackpot), the random number value for jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol), the number of reserved special symbols, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special symbol variation. Note that the numbers in the "reserved number" column in Figure 12 and Figures 13(a) to 13(c) refer to the reserved number of special symbols corresponding to the column.

The main CPU 111 determines the variation pattern when the special symbol starts to vary. The main CPU 111 also generates a variation pattern designation command that can identify the determined variation pattern. The above variation pattern designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 120 in the output control process.

Figure 12 and Figures 13(a) to 13(c) show the effects (reach, etc.) executed by the effect execution means (e.g. image display device 31) when each variation pattern is determined. In this embodiment, "reach" refers to a state in which after some of the combinations of effect patterns GA that notify the transition to special play (jackpot play) are displayed stationary, the remaining part of the effect patterns GA continue to display variable. For example, consider a case in which the combination of three effect patterns "777" is set as the combination of effect patterns GA that notifies the transition to jackpot play. In the above case, the state in which two effect patterns GA are displayed stationary at "7" and the remaining effect patterns GA are displaying variable is "reach".

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the variation pattern designation command in this embodiment is composed of a first message indicating MODE and a second message indicating DATA. The first message (MODE) of the variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation display of the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 20 is "E6H". On the other hand, the first message (MODE) of the variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation display of the special pattern in the second special pattern display device 21 is "E7H". The second message (DATA) of the variation pattern designation command indicates a specific variation pattern number.

A characteristic shown in FIG. 13 is that an immediate win variation pattern (non-reach, etc.) is more likely to be determined when a jackpot occurs during the second time-saving play state than when a jackpot occurs during the first time-saving play state.

<Variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving gaming state>
FIG. 12 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a variation pattern determination table used in a low-probability non-time-saving game state. As described above, in a low-probability non-time-saving game state, any one of the variation pattern determination tables Tn1, Tn2, and Tnc is referenced. FIG. 12 is a conceptual diagram of the variation pattern determination table Tn1 among the above variation pattern determination tables. Note that the "variation time" shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13(a) to (c) described later means the time from when the variation of the special chart starts to when the fixed period ends.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1, the fluctuation pattern of the special patterns of the first special pattern display device 20 and the second special pattern display device 21 is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern a (1x-3x), fluctuation pattern b (1x-6x), fluctuation pattern c (1x-6x), fluctuation pattern dx, fluctuation pattern ex, fluctuation pattern fx, or fluctuation pattern g.

The main CPU 111 determines one of the variation patterns depending on the type of special pattern display device, the type of special pattern (combination of random number values for special pattern determination and random number values for patterns), the number of reserved special patterns, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special pattern variation. The random number value for reach determination has a random number range of "0 to 99" and is obtained before the variation pattern is determined. The random number value for special pattern variation has a random number range of "0 to 99" and is obtained before the variation pattern is determined.

However, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the reach effect is always executed in a variation pattern in which a big win or small win symbol among the special symbols is stopped and displayed. However, the reach effect may not be executed in a variation pattern in which a small win symbol among the special symbols is stopped and displayed. Therefore, when a special symbol corresponding to a big win or small win is stopped and displayed, the reach determination random number value is not used to determine the variation pattern.

Figure 12 shows the effects executed by the effect execution means such as the image display device 31 when the special symbol display device changes and is displayed in each change pattern. For example, in change pattern a (1x to 3x), a "normal reach effect" is executed. The above "normal reach effect" is a reach effect with a relatively low expectation of winning a jackpot, in which the left and right symbols of the effect symbol GA displayed on the image display device 31 temporarily stop and the center symbol changes.

In variation pattern b (x1 to x6), an "SP reach performance" is executed. The above "SP reach performance" is a reach performance in which the left and right symbols of the performance pattern GA displayed on the image display device 31 temporarily stop, similar to the above-mentioned normal reach performance. However, in the SP reach performance, a specific moving image (reach movie) that is not displayed in the normal reach performance is displayed on the image display device 31. When the above SP reach performance is executed, there is a higher possibility that a jackpot win will be announced (the same three performance patterns GA will be displayed) than in the normal reach performance.

In the variation pattern c (x1 to x6), an "SPSP reach effect" is executed. The above "SPSP reach effect", like other reach effects, is a reach effect in which the left and right symbols of the effect pattern GA displayed on the image display device 31 temporarily stop. However, in the SPSP reach effect, a specific moving image that is not displayed in other reach effects is displayed on the image display device 31. When the above SPSP reach effect is executed, there is a higher chance of a jackpot being announced afterwards than with the SP reach effect.

In this embodiment, in a game in which an SP reach performance is executed, a normal reach performance is executed before the SP reach performance. That is, the normal reach performance develops into an SP reach performance. Also, in a game in which an SPSP reach performance is executed, the normal reach performance develops into an SP reach performance, and the SP reach performance develops into an SPSP reach performance. However, there may be cases in which the normal reach performance develops directly into the SPSP reach performance.

For example, assume that the special pattern A1 (jackpot) is displayed stationary on the first special pattern display device 20. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 12, if the random number value for special pattern variation is any of the numbers "0 to 3", variation pattern a1x is determined. In the above variation pattern a1x, the first special pattern display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 40,000 ms. Also, in variation pattern a1x, a normal reach presentation is executed on the image display device 31, and a presentation announcing a guaranteed jackpot is executed.

When the special symbol A1 is displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display device 20, if the random number value for the special symbol variation is any of the numbers "4 to 15", variation pattern b1x is determined. Also, if the random number value for the special symbol variation is any of the numbers "16 to 34", variation pattern b2x is determined. Furthermore, if the random number value for the special symbol variation is any of the numbers "35 to 65", variation pattern c1x is determined, if the random number value for the special symbol variation is any of the numbers "66 to 98", variation pattern c2x is determined, and if the random number value for the special symbol variation is the number "99", variation pattern g is determined.

In variation pattern b1x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 60,000 ms. Also, in variation pattern b1x, the image display device 31 executes an SP Reach 1 display, and a guaranteed jackpot is announced. Similarly, in variation pattern b2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 60,000 ms, the image display device 31 executes an SP Reach 2 display, and a guaranteed jackpot is announced.

In the variation pattern c1x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 70,000 ms. Also, in the variation pattern c1x, the image display device 31 executes an SPSP reach 1 display, and a guaranteed jackpot is announced. Similarly, in the variation pattern c2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 70,000 ms, the image display device 31 executes an SPSP reach 2 display, and a guaranteed jackpot is announced. In the variation pattern g, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 80,000 ms, the image display device 31 executes a full rotation reach display, and a guaranteed jackpot is announced.

When the special pattern A2 (short win guaranteed jackpot) is displayed on the first special pattern display device 20, the fluctuation pattern dx is determined regardless of the random number value for special pattern fluctuation. In the above fluctuation pattern dx, the first special pattern display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 20,000 ms. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern dx, a short win presentation is executed on the image display device 31. The above short win presentation is a presentation that notifies the user that a small win or a short win (guaranteed jackpot) has been won.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the special pattern A3 (normal jackpot) is displayed on the first special pattern display device 20, if the random number value for special pattern variation is any of the numbers "0 to 3", variation pattern a2x is determined. In the above variation pattern a2x, the first special pattern display device 20 is displayed and varies for approximately 40,000 ms. In addition, in variation pattern a2x, a normal reach presentation is executed on the image display device 31, and a presentation announcing a normal jackpot is executed.

When the special symbol A3 is displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display device 20, if the random number value for the special symbol variation is any of the numbers "4 to 15", variation pattern b3x is determined. Also, if the random number value for the special symbol variation is any of the numbers "16 to 34", variation pattern b4x is determined, if the random number value for the special symbol variation is any of the numbers "35 to 65", variation pattern c3x is determined, and if the random number value for the special symbol variation is any of the numbers "66 to 99", variation pattern c4x is determined.

In variation pattern b3x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 60,000 ms. Also, in variation pattern b3x, the image display device 31 displays an SP Reach 1 effect, and a normal jackpot is announced. Similarly, in variation pattern b4x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 60,000 ms, the image display device 31 displays an SP Reach 2 effect, and a normal jackpot is announced.

In variation pattern c3x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 70,000 ms. Also, in variation pattern c3x, the image display device 31 executes an SPSP reach 1 display, and a normal jackpot is announced. Similarly, in variation pattern c4x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 70,000 ms, the image display device 31 executes an SPSP reach 2 display, and a normal jackpot is announced.

When the special pattern K (small win) is displayed on the first special pattern display device 20, the variation pattern dx is determined regardless of the random number value for the special pattern variation, just as when the special pattern A2 (probable short win) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the special symbol H is displayed stationary on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern is determined according to the combination of the number of reserved first special symbols, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special symbol variation.

For example, assume that the number of reserved first special symbols is "0 to 2". In the above cases, if the random number value for reach determination is "0 to 69", the reach effect is not executed and the variation pattern ex is determined. In the above variation pattern ex, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed in a varying manner for approximately 3000 ms. In addition, in variation pattern ex, after the normal effect (normal variation) is executed, an effect that notifies of a miss is executed.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved first special symbols is "0-2", if the random number value for reaching the target is "70-99", a reaching effect according to the random number value for changing the special symbol is executed. Specifically, if the random number value for changing the special symbol is any of the numbers "0-27", the change pattern a3x is determined. If the random number value for changing the special symbol is any of the numbers "28-48", the change pattern b5x is determined, and if the random number value for changing the special symbol is any of the numbers "49-77", the change pattern b6x is determined. If the random number value for changing the special symbol is any of the numbers "78-88", the change pattern c5x is determined, and if the random number value for changing the special symbol is any of the numbers "89-99", the change pattern c6x is determined.

In the variation pattern a3x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed in a varying manner for approximately 35,000 ms. Also, in the variation pattern a3x, a normal reach performance is executed on the image display device 31, and a miss is notified.

In variation pattern b5x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 55,000 ms. Also, in variation pattern b5x, the image display device 31 executes an SP Reach 1 presentation and notifies the user of a miss. Similarly, in variation pattern b6x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 55,000 ms, the image display device 31 executes an SP Reach 2 presentation and notifies the user of a miss.

In variation pattern c5x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 65,000 ms. Also, in variation pattern c5x, the image display device 31 executes an SPSP reach 1 display, and a miss is announced. Similarly, in variation pattern c6x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 65,000 ms, the image display device 31 executes an SPSP reach 2 display, and a miss is announced.

Also, assume that the number of reserved first special symbols is "3" when the special symbol H is stopped and displayed. In the above cases, if the random number value for reach determination is "0 to 89", the reach effect is not executed, and the fluctuation pattern fx is determined regardless of the random number value for special symbol fluctuation. In the above fluctuation pattern fx, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 2000 ms. In addition, in fluctuation pattern fx, an effect to notify a miss is executed after the normal effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved first special symbols is "3", if the random number value for reaching the target is "90-99", a reaching effect according to the random number value for changing the special symbol is executed. Specifically, if the random number value for changing the special symbol is any of the numbers "0-27", the change pattern a3x is determined. If the random number value for changing the special symbol is any of the numbers "28-48", the change pattern b5x is determined, and if the random number value for changing the special symbol is any of the numbers "49-77", the change pattern b6x is determined. If the random number value for changing the special symbol is any of the numbers "78-88", the change pattern c5x is determined, and if the random number value for changing the special symbol is any of the numbers "89-99", the change pattern c6x is determined. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol display device 21 in the non-time-saving play state is determined in a manner similar to the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol display device 20 described above.

<Variation pattern determination table for time-saving game state>
13(a) to 13(c) are conceptual diagrams of examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table used in the low-probability time-saving game state. As described above, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), any one of the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj1, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj2, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referenced.

Figure 13 (a) is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax. The fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referenced, for example, in the second time-saving game state that is started (via a jackpot game) during the scenario setting period in which the table scenario S is set.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), in a game where the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, one of the variation patterns J1a to J1n is determined by lottery. In the above game, the variation patterns (J1a to J1k) in which "instant hit effect (probable jackpot, normal jackpot)", "straight line effect (probable jackpot, normal jackpot)", "7 symbol reach (probable jackpot)", "short variation (miss)", "straight line false effect (miss)", and "reach teaser (miss)" are executed can be determined as the variation pattern of the second special chart. In addition, in the above game, the variation patterns (J1l to J1n) in which "special 1 hit (probable jackpot, normal jackpot)" and "special 1 miss (miss)" can be determined as the variation pattern of the first special chart. However, in the time-saving game mode, the second special chart changes when played by hitting the right button, so the change pattern J1a to J1k is usually determined.

The instant hit performance is a performance in which the time from when the special chart starts to change until the winning of the jackpot is announced is relatively short. For example, in the instant hit performance, about 0.5 seconds after the special chart starts to change, the performance pattern GA (for example, "777") corresponding to the jackpot pattern is displayed (temporarily stopped). In the instant hit performance after the performance pattern GA stops (after about 0.5 seconds have passed), for example, a performance pattern GA corresponding to the special pattern B2 (normal pattern) is promoted to a performance pattern GA corresponding to the special pattern B1 (probable variable pattern) is executed. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the performance pattern GA corresponding to the jackpot pattern may be described as "performance pattern GA for jackpot". In the above instant hit performance, the reach performance is not executed, and the display of the three pattern images stops almost simultaneously. In addition, the length of the instant hit performance can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the instant win effect, the jackpot effect pattern GA is displayed stationary about 0.5 seconds after the special chart starts to change, and then the jackpot game can start after a confirmation period of about 0.5 seconds.

The direct alignment effect is a performance in which the jackpot effect pattern GA is stopped and displayed without executing a reach effect, just like the instant win effect. However, the time from when the special chart starts to change and when the jackpot game win is announced is longer in the direct alignment effect than in the instant win effect. For example, in the direct alignment effect, the jackpot effect pattern GA is displayed (temporarily stopped) about 15 seconds after the special chart starts to change. The direct alignment false effect is a performance in which the same effect as the direct alignment effect is executed until halfway through, and finally the effect pattern GA corresponding to a miss is stopped and displayed.

The 7-symbol reach is a performance in which a jackpot performance pattern GA (a pattern combination of 777) corresponding to a sure-win jackpot is displayed. Specifically, in the 7-symbol reach, two performance patterns GA representing the number "7" are temporarily stopped, a reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot performance pattern GA representing the pattern combination of "777" is displayed. For example, in the 7-symbol reach, the reach performance is executed about 20 seconds after the special pattern starts to change (a sure-win jackpot is essentially notified), and then about 20 seconds later, the jackpot performance pattern GA is displayed. As can be seen from FIG. 13(a), the 7-symbol reach is the longest (about 50 seconds) among the variation patterns that can be determined in a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referenced. The reach agitation is a performance in which a performance common to the 7-symbol reach is executed until halfway, and finally the reach performance is not executed, and the performance pattern GA corresponding to a miss is stopped and displayed. The above-mentioned reach stimulation can increase the sense of anticipation that a 7 symbol reach may be achieved.

A short variation (miss) is an effect where a reach effect is not executed, and the effect pattern GA corresponding to the miss is displayed as a stopped pattern. Specifically, in a short variation, the effect pattern GA is displayed as a stopped pattern about 0.5 seconds after the special pattern starts to change, and then the state where the effect pattern GA is displayed as a stopped pattern is maintained for a fixed period of 0.5 seconds. A long variation (miss) is an effect where a reach effect is not executed, and the effect pattern GA corresponding to the miss is displayed as a stopped pattern. Specifically, in a long variation, the effect pattern GA is displayed as a stopped pattern about 3.5 seconds after the special pattern starts to change, and then the state where the effect pattern GA is displayed as a stopped pattern is maintained for a fixed period of 0.5 seconds.

As can be seen from FIG. 13(a), the instant hit effect is executed with a probability of about 8/10 in a game in which a special jackpot or a normal jackpot is won. That is, in the second time-saving game state (game in which Tax is referenced), the instant hit effect is executed in the majority (about 80%) of games in which a jackpot is won. However, the probability of the instant hit effect being executed can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be configured so that it is executed with a probability of about 1/10 when a special jackpot is won, and with a probability of about 1/2 when a normal jackpot is won. In the above configuration, the expectation for a special jackpot can be improved when a straight-match effect and a 7-symbol reach are executed, compared to when the instant hit effect is executed. In other words, the longer it takes for the jackpot effect pattern GA to be displayed, the higher the expectation for a special jackpot can be.

The instant hit effect and the direct match effect described above can be executed both when a normal jackpot is won and when a special jackpot is won. On the other hand, the 7 symbol reach can only be executed when a special jackpot is won. In the above configuration, in the time-saving mode B where the variation pattern determination table Tax is referenced (see FIG. 9 above), the special jackpot is essentially notified when the reach effect is executed with the 7 symbol. Therefore, in the time-saving mode B, the entertainment value of the effect (7 symbol reach, reach teasing) that notifies the user whether or not the reach effect is executed can be improved. However, the configuration may also be such that the reach effect can be executed with the 7 symbol in the time-saving mode B game where the jackpot lottery is lost.

Figure 13 (b) is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx. The fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referenced in the second time-saving game state that is started in a period in which a scenario is not set (without going through a jackpot game). Note that in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table T referenced in the second time-saving game state is different depending on whether or not a jackpot game is played through, but the fluctuation pattern determination table T may be the same in each of the above cases.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), in a game where the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referenced, fluctuation patterns J2a to J2g can be determined. In a game where fluctuation pattern J2a is determined, the above-mentioned instant win performance (probable jackpot) is executed. In addition, in a game where fluctuation pattern J2b is determined, the above-mentioned instant win performance (normal jackpot) is executed, in a game where fluctuation pattern J2c is determined, the above-mentioned short fluctuation (miss) is executed, in a game where fluctuation pattern J2d is determined, the above-mentioned long fluctuation (miss) is executed, in a game where fluctuation pattern J2e is determined, the above-mentioned instant win performance (probable jackpot) is executed, in a game where fluctuation pattern J2f is determined, the above-mentioned instant win performance (normal jackpot) is executed, and in a game where fluctuation pattern J2g is determined, the above-mentioned special 1 miss (miss) is executed.

As can be understood from the above explanation, a 7-symbol reach that is executed in a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referenced is not executed in a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referenced. In addition, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referenced in the second time-shortened game state, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is also referenced in the first time-shortened game state (see FIG. 9 above). The above configuration can also be said as the fluctuation patterns that can be determined are variable between the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state.

Figure 13 (c) is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1. The fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referenced from the 1st to 90th play of the first time-saving play state in which the table scenario Sb2 or table scenario Sb3 is set.

As described above, the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 (Ta2) is referenced is the time-saving mode A, and the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax (Tbx) is referenced is the time-saving mode B. Therefore, as can be understood from FIG. 13(a) to FIG. 13(c), the effects that can be executed are different between the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referenced (time-saving mode A) and the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax (Tbx) is referenced (time-saving mode B). Specifically, the effects executed in one of the time-saving modes A and B are not executed in the other. However, effects that are executed in both the time-saving mode A and the time-saving mode B may be provided. In other words, the effects executed in each of the effect modes are different in principle, but specific effects may be configured to be executed in each of the effect modes. In addition, the effects executed in the time-saving mode A and the time-saving mode B may all be configured to be common. Furthermore, while the effects executed in each mode are generally the same, certain effects may be configured to be executed in only one of the modes.

In this embodiment, in each game where the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, the average time (hereinafter, simply "average fluctuation time of the performance pattern GA") during which the performance pattern GA is displayed fluctuatingly (the period during which the pattern image is scrolled and displayed) is shorter than the average fluctuation time of the performance pattern GA in each game where the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to and the average fluctuation time of the performance pattern GA in each game where the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to. That is, the average fluctuation time of the performance pattern GA is shorter in the second time-saving game state than in the first time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. Also, the average fluctuation time of the performance pattern GA during the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to is shorter than the average fluctuation time of the performance pattern GA in each game where the other fluctuation pattern determination tables T are referred to. However, depending on the table scenario S, the average fluctuation time of the performance pattern GA may be shorter in the first time-saving game state than in the second time-saving game state.
In other words, the average fluctuation time during the second time-shortened gaming state is more likely to be shorter than the average fluctuation time during the first time-shortened gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the average fluctuation time of the performance pattern GA is shorter in a game in which a jackpot is won in the second time-saving game state than in a game in which a jackpot is won in the first time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. However, depending on the table scenario S, the average fluctuation time of the performance pattern GA may be shorter in a game in which a jackpot is won in the first time-saving game state than in a game in which a jackpot is won in the second time-saving game state.

As described above, the remaining number of times N stored in the main RAM 113 is decremented by one for each game, and the second time-saving game state begins when the remaining number of times N is decremented to the number "0". The remaining number of times N is maintained by the backup power supply even if the power is cut off. Therefore, when the gaming facility in which the gaming machine 1 is installed opens for business, it is possible to leave the remaining number of times N from the previous day unchanged. However, if a clear operation is performed when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the remaining number of times N is initialized.

In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which whether or not the remaining number of times N before the power outage is fixed is kept secret immediately after the start of play, and can be notified thereafter. This configuration has the advantage of providing the player with the fun of guessing whether or not the remaining number of times N is fixed during the period immediately after the start of play. The above configuration is described in detail below.

Figure 14(a) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31. Specifically, Figure 14(a) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 in a low probability non-time-saving game state. In each game, the image display device 31 displays various images including the performance symbol GA (x, y, w), reserved image GB (x, y), fourth symbol GC (1, 2), reserved number image GD (1, 2), and small symbol Ga.

The performance pattern GA is displayed variably during the period when the special pattern display device (20, 21) is displayed variably, and is displayed stationary during the period when the special pattern display device is displayed stationary. The performance pattern GA also displays a stationary combination of patterns corresponding to the special patterns displayed stationary on the special pattern display device. The specific example in FIG. 14(a) assumes a case where a losing pattern (special pattern H) is displayed stationary on the special pattern display device. In the above case, for example, the performance pattern GA displays the pattern combination "782" stationary.

In addition, when a big win pattern is displayed on the special pattern display device, the effect pattern GA displays a pattern combination (e.g., "777") corresponding to the big win pattern. Similarly, when a small win pattern is displayed on the special pattern display device, the effect pattern GA displays a pattern combination (e.g., "757") corresponding to the small win pattern. The effect pattern GA includes effect pattern GAx (see FIG. 14(a)), effect pattern GAy (see FIG. 17(b)), and effect pattern GAw. The effect pattern GAx is displayed in the normal mode and the previous mode. In addition, the effect pattern GAy is displayed in the time-saving mode A, and the effect pattern GAw is displayed in the time-saving mode B.

The fourth pattern GC indicates the variable state of the special pattern display device (20, 21). Specifically, during the period when the special pattern display device is displayed stationary, the fourth pattern GC is displayed stationary. For example, during the period when the special pattern display device is displayed stationary, the fourth pattern GC is displayed stationary in a first color (e.g., white). On the other hand, during the period when the special pattern display device is displayed variable, the fourth pattern GC is displayed variably. For example, during the period when the special pattern display device is displayed variable, the fourth pattern GC is displayed alternately in the first color and the second color (e.g., red).

The fourth pattern GC includes a fourth pattern GC1 and a fourth pattern GC2. The fourth pattern GC1 indicates the variable mode of the first special pattern display device 20, and the fourth pattern GC2 indicates the variable mode of the second special pattern display device 21. Specifically, the fourth pattern GC1 is variably displayed during the period when the first special pattern display device 20 is variably displayed, and is statically displayed during the period when the first special pattern display device 20 is statically displayed. Similarly, the fourth pattern GC2 is variably displayed during the period when the second special pattern display device 21 is variably displayed, and is statically displayed during the period when the second special pattern display device 21 is statically displayed.

In this embodiment, a common fourth pattern GC is displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state, the low probability time-saving game state, and the high probability time-saving game state. That is, a common fourth pattern GC is displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the high probability time-saving game state. Specifically, a common fourth pattern GC is displayed in each game state except for a jackpot game. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a different fourth pattern GC is displayed depending on the game state. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a fourth pattern GC is displayed in a jackpot game.

The pending number image GD(1,2) displays the pending number (first pending number, second pending number). Specifically, the pending number image GD includes pending number image GD1 and pending number image GD2. The pending number image GD1 displays the first pending number. Furthermore, the pending number image GD2 displays the second pending number. In the specific example of FIG. 14(a), it is assumed that the first pending number is 4 and the second pending number is 0.

The reserved number image GD in this embodiment is common to the low probability non-time-saving game state, the low probability time-saving game state, and the high probability time-saving game state, just like the fourth pattern GC described above. That is, a common reserved number image GD is displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the high probability time-saving game state. Specifically, a common reserved number image GD is displayed in each game state except for a jackpot game. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a different reserved number image GD is displayed depending on the game state. Also, a reserved number image GD may be displayed in a jackpot game.

Small pattern Ga, like performance pattern GA, is composed of three patterns (upper pattern, middle pattern, lower pattern). Small pattern Ga is displayed variably during the period when the special pattern display device (20, 21) is displayed variably, and is displayed statically during the period when the special pattern display device is displayed statically. In this embodiment, performance pattern GA may be temporarily hidden depending on the performance being executed. Even in the above cases, small pattern Ga will in principle continue to be displayed.

When a big win pattern is displayed on the special pattern display device, the small pattern Ga displays a pattern combination corresponding to the big win pattern. Also, when a small win pattern is displayed on the special pattern display device, the small pattern Ga displays a pattern combination corresponding to the small win pattern. Similarly, when a losing pattern is displayed on the special pattern display device, the small pattern Ga displays a pattern combination corresponding to the losing pattern. Also, as a rule, when the performance pattern GA is displayed, the small pattern Ga is displayed in the same manner as the performance pattern GA. For example, when a big win is won and the performance pattern GA is displayed as "7-7-7", the small pattern Ga is also displayed as "7-7-7", and when a small win is won and the performance pattern GA is displayed as "7-5-7", the small pattern Ga is also displayed as "7-5-7".

In this embodiment, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state, the low probability time-saving game state, and the high probability time-saving game state. That is, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the high probability time-saving game state. Specifically, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, a small symbol Ga may be displayed in the jackpot game. In this embodiment, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 and the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21, but a small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may be provided separately from the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20. In this case, the small pattern Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern display device 21 may have a display mode that is common to the small pattern Ga corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern display device 20, or may have a display mode that is different from the small pattern Ga corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern display device 20.

In this embodiment, a different background image GH is displayed for each performance mode. For example, in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode, the background image GHx (an example of the first background image) is displayed (see FIG. 14(a)). However, the background image GH may be common in all or part of each performance mode. The reserved image GB includes the reserved image GBx (see FIG. 14(a)), the reserved image GBy (see FIG. 17(b)), and the reserved image GBw (see FIG. 17(a)). The reserved image GBx is displayed when the above-mentioned random number value (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "judgment information") is stored in the first special pattern reserved memory area (first memory unit to fourth memory unit) in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode. Specifically, a plurality of reserved images GBx corresponding to each judgment information stored in the first special pattern reserved memory area are displayed. The reserved image GBy is displayed when the judgment information is stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area in the time-saving mode A. The reserved image GBw is displayed when judgment information is stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area in time-saving mode B.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), in normal mode and previous mode, a play count image GE is displayed. The play count image GE displays the number of plays in the low-probability play state. Therefore, when the number displayed by the play count image GE ("550" in the specific example of FIG. 14(a)) is incremented to "800", it becomes possible to transition from the low-probability non-time-saving play state to the second time-saving play state. The above configuration has the advantage of making it easier for the player to grasp the number of plays until transition to the second time-saving play state.

However, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then supplied (when the power is turned OFF/ON), the game count image GE displays the number "0" regardless of the value of the remaining number of times N stored in the main RAM 113. In other words, when the power is turned OFF/ON with the remaining number of times N subtracted from the initial value "800", the game count image GE displays the number "0" even though the remaining number of times N is not the initial value. In the above cases, before the game count image GE displays the number "800", the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the number "0", and the second time-saving game state is started. On the other hand, if a clear operation is performed when the power is turned ON, the remaining number of times N is initialized. In the above cases, in a game in which the game count image GE is added to the number "800", the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the number "0", and the second time-saving game state is started.

As can be understood from the above explanation, in the period immediately after the power is turned OFF/ON, it is not possible to know whether the remaining number of times N is left unchanged (whether or not a clear operation has been performed). Specifically, in the period immediately after the power is turned OFF/ON, it is not possible to determine the number of times play up to the second time-saving play state from the play count image GE. With the above configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting whether the remaining number of times N is left unchanged in the period immediately after the start of play.

Figure 14 (b) is a diagram showing a specific example of the fixed number of times notification image GI. The fixed number of times notification image GI is displayed on the condition that the remaining number of times N is fixed before and after the power is turned OFF/ON. The fixed number of times notification image GI is displayed in the area RI of the screen shown in the above-mentioned Figure 14 (a) on the specific number of times of play after the power is turned ON. Specifically, the fixed number of times notification image GI is displayed on the 51st time of play after the power is turned ON (a game in which the number in the number of times of play image GE is added to "50") or the 101st time of play after the power is turned ON (a game in which the number in the number of times of play image GE is added to "100").

According to the above configuration, the fixed number notification image GI notifies that the remaining number N is fixed. The number in the play count image GE is incremented when the game ends (when the confirmation command is received). Therefore, in other words, the upper fixed number notification image GI starts to be displayed when the game starts with the number in the play count image GE being "50", or when the game starts with the number in the play count image GE being "100". For the sake of explanation, "a game starts with the number in the play count image GE being "X"" (a game ends with the number in the play count image GE being incremented to "X+1") may be simply referred to as "a game with the number in the play count image GE being "X".

The fixed notification image GI is displayed on the condition that the remaining number N is equal to or less than the number "200" in a specific game. For example, if the remaining number N is equal to or less than the number "200" in the 51st game since power-on, the fixed notification image GI is displayed in that game. On the other hand, if the remaining number N is greater than the number "200" in the 51st game since power-on, the fixed notification image GI is not displayed in that game. However, even if the fixed notification image GI is not displayed in the 51st game since power-on, if the remaining number N is reduced to equal to or less than the number "200" in the 101st game since power-on, the fixed notification image GI is displayed in the 101st game since power-on. Note that the fixed notification image GI is displayed in the same manner whether it is displayed in the 51st game since power-on or the 101st game since power-on.

If the remaining number of times N is greater than the value "200" even in the 101st game since power-on, the fixed number of times notification image GI will not be displayed even if the remaining number of times N is fixed. Also, the fixed number of times notification image GI is displayed for a predetermined time and then becomes non-displayed (see FIG. 14(d) described below). Furthermore, if the fixed number of times notification image GI is displayed in the 51st game since power-on, it will not be displayed in the 101st game since power-on. It is preferable that a predetermined sound is output when the fixed number of times notification image GI is displayed.

Figure 14 (c) is a diagram showing a specific example of the remaining number of times image GN. The remaining number of times image GN displays the actual number of times remaining until the second time-saving game state is started. In other words, the remaining number of times image GN displays the current value of the remaining number of times N. The remaining number of times image GN is displayed, for example, in the area RN of the screen shown in Figure 14 (a) above. In this embodiment, both the number of times of play image GE and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed simultaneously (parallel). However, in the period immediately after the power is turned on, the remaining number of times image GN is not displayed. With the above configuration, the current value of the remaining number of times N can be kept secret in the period immediately after the power is turned on.

The remaining number of times image GN starts to be displayed from the game in which the above-mentioned fixed notification image GI is displayed, and is displayed in the subsequent normal mode and previous mode games. However, as mentioned above, there are cases in which the fixed notification image GI is never displayed. In the above cases, the remaining number of times image GN starts to be displayed in the 101st game after the power is turned on. Note that the remaining number of times image GN may be temporarily hidden during the period in which a predetermined performance (for example, SP reach or SPSP reach) is executed.

Figure 14(d) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the period during which the fixed notification image GI is displayed and the period during which the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in a game in which the fixed notification image GI is displayed. Figure 14(d) assumes a case in which a game in which the fixed notification image GI is displayed starts at time ts and ends at time te.

As shown in FIG. 14(d), the fixed number notification image GI starts to be displayed immediately after the start of play and is hidden after a predetermined time. In addition, at approximately the same time that the fixed number notification image GI is hidden, the remaining number image GN starts to be displayed. The remaining number image GN continues to be displayed in subsequent games and is hidden after the second time-saving game state is started. In the above configuration, the fixed number notification image GI is displayed prior to the remaining number image GN. Therefore, after the fixed number notification image GI notifies that the remaining number N is fixed, the actual remaining number N is notified by the remaining number image GN.

Let us assume a comparative example in which the remaining number image GN is displayed prior to the fixed number notification image GI. Whether the number image N is fixed or not can be ascertained from the actual number of games played since power-on (the number displayed by the game number image GE) and the number displayed by the remaining number image GN. For example, if the remaining number image GN displays a number other than "700" in the 101st game since power-on, it can be ascertained that the remaining number N is fixed. Therefore, in the above comparative example, whether the remaining number N is fixed or not is essentially notified before the fixed number notification image GI is displayed, which causes the inconvenience of the player not paying attention to the fixed number notification image GI. According to this embodiment, the above inconvenience is suppressed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14(d), the fixed notification image GI starts to be displayed during the early period Pf of the game, and is hidden before the early period Pf ends. The above-mentioned early period Pf is a period of time that is determined in advance from the start of the game. Specifically, when a reach effect is executed in a game in which the fixed notification image GI may be displayed, the early period Pf is a time that is shorter than the period from the start of the game to the execution of the reach effect. With the above configuration, the display period of the fixed notification image GI ends before the reach effect starts. Therefore, the inconvenience that the fixed notification image GI makes it difficult to notice the image displayed in the reach effect is suppressed. Also, the early period Pf is a time that is shorter than the shortest variation pattern determined in the game in which the fixed notification image GI may be displayed.

The display of the fixed play notification image GI and the remaining play count image GN is executed even if a jackpot is won in the current game. Let us assume that in a game in which the remaining play count image GN is to be displayed, the remaining play count image GN is not displayed if a jackpot is won. In the above configuration, there is an inconvenience that the fact that a jackpot has been won is perceived at the point when the remaining play count image GN does not start to be displayed in the early period Pf. Furthermore, a similar inconvenience can occur in a game in which the fixed play notification image GI is to be displayed, but the fixed play notification image GI is not displayed if a jackpot is won. The configuration of this embodiment has the advantage of suppressing the above inconveniences.

Figures 15(a) to 15(d) are diagrams for explaining specific examples of the times when the fixed notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed. In addition to the period during which each of the above images is displayed, Figures 15(a) to 15(d) show the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving gaming state is reached at each point in time.

Figure 15(a) shows the time when the fixed notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed during the period from immediately after the end of the jackpot game to the start of the second time-saving game state. As shown in Figure 15(a), the remaining number of times image GN is displayed immediately after the end of the jackpot game. Also, the remaining number of times image GN is hidden when the second time-saving game state starts. However, if the reserved number is the number "0" at the time the second time-saving game state starts, the remaining number of times image GN continues to be displayed (see Figure 19 described below).

As shown in FIG. 15(a), the fixed number notification image GI is not displayed in any game, including a game in which the number of games played image GE displays the number "50" and a game in which the number of games played image GE displays the number "100" during the period after the end of a jackpot game. In the above configuration, even if the remaining number of games N is fixed, there are cases in which the above images do not notify this even once. For example, if a jackpot game is won within the 50th game after the power is turned on, the fixed number notification image GI is not displayed, and the remaining number of games N at the time of powering on is not notified by the remaining number of games image GN. Therefore, whether or not the remaining number of games N has been fixed is not notified.

Figure 15(b) is a diagram for explaining specific examples of the display period of each image during the period from immediately after power-on until the start of the second time-saving game state. The specific example in Figure 15(b) assumes that the remaining number of plays N is fixed. Specifically, it assumes that the remaining number of plays N is the number "X" when the power is turned on. Also, the specific example in Figure 15(b) assumes that the remaining number of plays N (number "X-50") in a game in which the number of plays image GE displays the number "50" (the 51st game since power-on) is the number "200" or less.

In the specific example of FIG. 15(b) above, in a game in which the play count image GE displays the number "50", the fixed notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed. Specifically, in the above-mentioned early stage period Pf, the fixed notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed. Note that, when the fixed notification image GI is displayed in a game in which the play count image GE displays the number "50", the fixed notification image GI is not displayed in a game in which the play count image GE displays the number "100". As shown in FIG. 15(b), the fixed notification image GI is hidden before the early stage period Pf ends. Meanwhile, the remaining number of times image GN continues to be displayed until the second time-saving game state is started.

Figure 15(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the display period of each image during the period from immediately after power-on until the start of the second time-saving gaming state. In the specific example of Figure 15(c), as in the above-mentioned Figure 15(b), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is fixed. Specifically, it is assumed that the remaining number of times N at power-on is the number "X", and the remaining number of times N (number "X-100") in a game in which the number of times of play image GE displays the number "100" (the 101st game since power-on) is equal to or less than the number "200". In addition, in the above specific example, it is assumed that the remaining number of times N (number "X-50") in a game in which the number of times of play image GE displays the number "50" is greater than the number "200". In the specific example of FIG. 15(c) above, in a game in which the play count image GE displays the number "50," the fixed notification image GI and remaining number image GN are not displayed, and in a game in which the play count image GE displays the number "100," the fixed notification image GI and remaining number image GN are displayed.

Figure 15(d) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the display period of each image during the period from immediately after power-on to the start of the second time-saving game state. In the specific example of Figure 15(d), as in the above-mentioned Figures 15(b) and 15(c), a case is assumed in which the remaining number of times N is fixed. Specifically, a case is assumed in which the remaining number of times N at the time of power-on is the number "X", and the remaining number of times N (number "X-100") in a game in which the number of times of play image GE displays the number "100" (the 101st game since power-on) is greater than the number "200". In the above specific example of Figure 15(d), the fixed notification image GI is not displayed in any game, including a game in which the number of times of play image GE displays the number "50" and a game in which the number of times of play image GE displays the number "100". On the other hand, the remaining number of times image GN starts to be displayed in a game in which the number of times of play image GE displays the number "100".

FIGS. 16(a) to 16(f) are diagrams for explaining the screens M (1 to 7) displayed at the start of the second time-saving game state. Note that, as will be described in detail later, the screens M displayed at the start of the second time-saving game state change depending on whether or not a table scenario S is set. In addition, the screens M displayed at the start of the second time-saving game state also change depending on the type of table scenario S that is set. FIG. 16(a) to 16(f) are schematic diagrams of the screens M displayed during the period when table scenario Sb2 of the table scenarios S is set.

Figure 16(a) is a simulated diagram of screen M1 displayed immediately after the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state. Screen M1 is displayed for a predetermined time after the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state. During the period in which table scenario Sb2 is set, the presentation mode immediately before the start of the second time-saving game state becomes the immediately before mode. As described above, in the immediately before mode, the background image GHx, presentation pattern GAx, reserved image GBx, and number of plays image GE are displayed. As shown in Figure 16(a), in this embodiment, each of the above images displayed in the immediately before mode continues to be displayed immediately after the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in the last mode, the remaining number of times image GN is displayed. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the remaining number of times image GN continues to be displayed even immediately after the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state. Specifically, the remaining number of times image GN displays the number "0" as the number of games remaining until the second time-saving game state starts. The number in the remaining number of times image GN changes color when the number of games remaining until the second time-saving game state starts is reduced to a predetermined number (e.g., 5 games) or less. For example, in a game in which the number of games remaining until the second time-saving game state starts is more than the predetermined number of games, the number in the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in white, and in a game in which the number of games remaining until the second time-saving game state starts is the predetermined number or less, the number in the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in red.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), when the first game in the second time-saving game state starts, the right-hit image GS1 is displayed. Note that, as will be described in detail later, when the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the value "0", the game transitions to the second time-saving game state regardless of whether the next game (the first game in the second time-saving game state) starts immediately or not. Specifically, assume that the number of reserved balls at the time the game in which the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the value "0" ends is "0". In the above cases, the game transitions to a customer waiting state immediately after transitioning to the second time-saving game state. In the above customer waiting state, the right-hit image GS1 is displayed.

Figure 16 (b) is a schematic diagram of screen M2 displayed in the first play of the second time-saving play state. Screen M2 is switched from screen M1 and displayed for a predetermined time. As shown in Figure 16 (b), screen M2 displays the play count image GE, background image GHx, small symbol Ga, and reserved image GBx, just like screen M1. However, when switching from screen M1 to screen M2, the remaining count image GN is hidden and the start notification image Gn is displayed. The start notification image Gn is an image for notifying that the second time-saving play state has started. For example, a message that the second time-saving play state has started is displayed on the start notification image Gn. Also, when switching from screen M1 to screen M2, the performance image GAx is hidden and the start notification image Gn is displayed in the area where the performance image GAx was displayed (approximately the center of the screen).

Figure 16(c) is a schematic diagram of screen M3 displayed during the first play of the second time-saving play state. Screen M3 is switched from screen M2 described above and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. As shown in Figure 16(c), screen M3 displays images including small symbols Ga, similar to screen M2. Also, the effect image GAx is not displayed on screen M3 (similar to screen M2). However, the effect image GA may be displayed on screens M2 and M3.

As shown in FIG. 16(c), the start notification image Gn, right hit image GS1, reserved image GBx, number of plays image GE, and background image GHx displayed on screen M2 are not displayed on screen M3. Specifically, a shielding image GF (GF1, GF2) is displayed on screen M3. The shielding image GF is an image that shields the background image GHx to make it difficult to see (including cases where it is practically impossible). The shielding image GF in this embodiment shields almost the entire area of the background image GHx. However, it is sufficient that the background image GHx is difficult to see when the shielding image GF is displayed, and the shielding image GF may be configured to shield only a portion of the background image GHx.

The shielding image GF is an image representing a sliding door, and is composed of a left shielding image GF1 and a right shielding image GF2. The shielding image GF is displayed in priority (in front of each image) over the start notification image Gn, the right hit image GS1, the reserved image GBx, the number of plays image GE, and the background image GHx. The left shielding image GF1 is displayed by moving from the left side to the center of the image display device 31 when the screen M2 is displayed. Also, the right shielding image GF2 is displayed by moving from the right side to the center of the image display device 31 when the screen M2 is displayed. In other words, when the screen M3 is displayed, the action of closing the sliding door is displayed on the image display device 31. In the screen M3, the position of the right side of the left shielding image GF1 and the position of the left side of the right shielding image GF2 are approximately the same. However, an image representing something other than a sliding door may be used as the shielding image GF.

As described above, in this embodiment, the right-hit image GS1 is not displayed on the screen M2. Meanwhile, the right-hit image GS2 is displayed on the screen M3. The right-hit image GS2, like the right-hit image GS1, is an image for instructing the player to play with a right-hit. In the above configuration, the image display device 31 instructs the player to play with a right-hit on both the screen M2 and the screen M3. Note that the right-hit image GS1 may be displayed on both the screen M2 and the screen M3. Specifically, the right-hit image GS1 may be displayed in front of the shielding image GF, and the right-hit image GS1 may be displayed so that it can be seen even during the period after the shielding image GF is displayed.

Figure 16 (d) is a simulated diagram of screen M4 that is displayed during the first play of the second time-saving play state. Screen M4 is switched from the above-mentioned screen M3 and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, screen M4 is displayed by hiding the shielding image GF of screen M3. For example, the left shielding image GF1 is moved to the right side of the image display device 31, and the right shielding image GF2 is moved to the left side of the image display device 31, and the shielding image GF is hidden. That is, when screen M4 is displayed, the action of a sliding door opening is displayed on the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 16(d), the play count image GE, which is displayed before the shielding image GF is displayed (before the sliding door closes) (see FIG. 16(b) above), is not displayed even if the shielding image GF is hidden (even if the sliding door opens). That is, in this embodiment, the play count image GE is hidden by being shielded by the shielding image GF. If the play count image GE were suddenly hidden, some players may experience an inconvenience that feels unnatural. The configuration of this embodiment has the advantage of being able to suppress the above inconveniences. Also, as shown in FIG. 16(d), the performance pattern GA and reserved image GB are hidden on screen M4.

As shown in FIG. 16(d), various images including a right-hit image GS2 and a small symbol Ga are displayed on screen M4 (similar to screen M3, etc.). Also, on screen M4, an entry effect is executed to notify the player of a transition to time-saving mode B. Specifically, an entry image GT is displayed on screen M4. The entry image GT is an image to notify the player that the effect mode will transition to time-saving mode B, and the name of time-saving mode B ("Chance Time" in the example of FIG. 16(b)) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 16(d), a background image GHz is displayed during the entry effect.

Figure 16 (e) is a schematic diagram of screen M5 displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. Screen M5 is displayed for a predetermined time. Specifically, screen M5 is displayed (in place of screen M4) after the entry effect is executed, and the mode selection effect is executed on screen M5. The time-saving mode B of this embodiment is composed of multiple types of effect modes, time-saving mode B1 to time-saving mode B3. In the mode selection effect, the player can select the effect mode (B1 to B3) by appropriately operating the effect button 8 and the cross key 40. However, regardless of which of time-saving mode B1 to time-saving mode B3 is selected, the fluctuation pattern determination table T in the time-saving mode B is common. Specifically, the effect determined by the sub-CPU 121 changes depending on the effect mode selected in the mode selection effect, but the fluctuation pattern determination table T referred to by the main CPU 111 does not change.

As shown in FIG. 16(e), the small symbol Ga is displayed in the mode selection performance. In addition, the right-hit image GS2 is displayed in the mode selection performance. That is, the right-hit image GS2 is displayed throughout the entry performance and the mode selection performance. In addition, the background image GHz (an example of the second background image) is displayed in the mode selection performance. However, a background image GH dedicated to the mode selection performance may be provided. As described above, the second time-saving game state may be started via a jackpot game (after the table scenario is set) or may be started without a jackpot game (during a period when the scenario is not set). Although the details will be described later, when the second time-saving game state is started via a jackpot game, the mode selection performance is executed (see FIG. 18(a) described later), while when the second time-saving game state is started without a jackpot game, the mode selection performance is not executed (see FIG. 18(b) described later). As shown in FIG. 16(e), the performance symbol GA and the reserved image GB are not displayed in the mode selection performance.

Figure 16 (f) is a simulated diagram of screen M6 displayed during the first play of the second time-saving play state. Screen M6 is switched from screen M5 described above and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. On screen M6, like screen M5 (mode selection effect) described above, an image including small symbol Ga and background image GHz is displayed, and an image including effect symbol GA and reserved image GB is not displayed. Note that the background image GH on screen M6 can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 16(f), a right hit image GS3 is displayed on screen M6 in place of the above-mentioned right hit image GS2. Like right hit image GS1 and right hit image GS2, right hit image GS3 is an image for informing the player that they should play with a right hit. In this embodiment, of the right hit images GS (GS1 to GS3 and GS4 described below), when right hit image GS3 is displayed, the sound "right hit" is played, and when other right hit images GS are displayed, the sound is not played. However, when a right hit image GS other than right hit image GS3 is displayed, the sound "right hit" may be played.

Figure 17(a) is a schematic diagram of the time-saving screen M7 displayed in the second time-saving game state. As will be described in detail later, the time-saving screen M7 is displayed, for example, by switching from the above-mentioned screen M6 (see Figure 16(f)) (see Figure 18(a) described later), and is displayed at the end of the first game in the second time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), on the time-saving screen M7 (time-saving mode B), images including small symbol Ga, effect symbol GAw, right-hit image GS4, background image GHw, reserved image GBw, remaining time-saving image GJ, and activation image GM are displayed. The effect symbol GAw is the effect symbol GA displayed in each game of time-saving mode B. As described above, immediately after the first game of the second time-saving game state is started, the effect symbol GAx (the effect symbol GA of the previous mode) is displayed. After that, the effect symbol GAw is displayed at the end of the game. In other words, the effect symbol GAw starts to be displayed halfway through the game. Therefore, the effect symbol GAw is displayed in a variable manner immediately after it starts to be displayed. The background image GHw (an example of the second background image) is the background image GH displayed in each game of time-saving mode B. The reserved symbol GBw is displayed in time-saving mode B, and the number of reserved symbols GBw displayed corresponds to the number of second reserved symbols. Also, in each game in time-saving mode B, a right-hit image GS4 is displayed.

The time-saving remaining image GJ displays the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state. However, the remaining number of times M stored in the main RAM 113 is decremented by the value "1" when each game in the time-saving game state ends. Meanwhile, the number in the time-saving remaining image GJ is decremented by the value "1" each time each game in the time-saving game state starts. For example, assume that a game is started when the remaining number of times M is the value "X". In the above case, immediately after the game starts, the number in the time-saving remaining image GJ is decremented from the value "X" to the value "X-1". After that, when the game ends, the remaining number of times M stored in the main RAM 113 is decremented to the value "X-1". However, the update time of the remaining number of times M stored in the main RAM 113 and the update time of the time-saving remaining image GJ may be configured to approximately coincide.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in region RJ on the time-saving screen M7. The specific example in FIG. 17(a) assumes the period immediately after the time-saving remaining image GJ starts to be displayed during the first game in the second time-saving game state. During the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state, the number on the time-saving remaining image GJ is subtracted immediately after the game starts. However, the time when the time-saving remaining image GJ starts to be displayed during the first game in the second time-saving game state is the end of the game after the entry performance and the like have ended. In other words, during the first game in the second time-saving game state, the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed for the first time after the original time (immediately after the game starts) for the number on the time-saving remaining image GJ to be subtracted has passed. For the above reasons, the remaining time-saving image GJ will initially display the number "999", which is the number of time-saving times in the second time-saving game state (1000 times) minus the number "1" during the first play of the second time-saving game state.

The activation image GM is an image for notifying that the current game state is the second time-shortened game state. As described above, the presentation mode for the second time-shortened game state is time-shortened mode B. However, there are cases where the first time-shortened game state transitions to time-shortened mode B (see FIG. 11(a)). Therefore, if the configuration does not notify in time-shortened mode B whether the game state is the second time-shortened game state or not, an inconvenience may occur in which it becomes difficult to know whether the current game state is the second time-shortened game state or the first time-shortened game state.

In this embodiment, the activated image GM is displayed in the time-saving mode B of the second time-saving play state, and the activated image GM is not displayed in the time-saving mode B of the first time-saving play state and in the above-mentioned gap play. Specifically, the activated image GM is displayed in the second time-saving play state regardless of whether or not it is a scenario unset period. Also, the activated image GM is displayed in the second time-saving play state regardless of the type of table scenario S (Sb2 to Sb4). Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

Figure 17(b) is a simulated diagram of the time-saving screen M8 that is displayed during each game in the first time-saving game state. Specifically, the time-saving screen M8 is displayed during each game in time-saving mode A. As shown in Figure 17(b), in time-saving mode A, various images are displayed, including the small symbol Ga, the performance symbol GAy, the reserved image GBy, the background image GHy, the right-hit image GS4, and the time-saving remaining image GJ.

In the above embodiment, the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in common in the time-saving mode A (first time-saving game state) and the time-saving mode B (second time-saving game state). Specifically, in the time-saving mode A, the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the region RJ of the image display device 31 as shown in FIG. 17(b). As described above, in the time-saving mode B, the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the region RJ of the image display device 31 as shown in FIG. 17(a). Therefore, the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in a common region (region RJ) in the time-saving mode A (first time-saving game state) and the time-saving mode B (second time-saving game state).
That is, the display position of the remaining number of times display is the same in the advantageous state before the end of the jackpot game (second time-saving game state) and the advantageous state after the end of the jackpot game (first time-saving game state). However, the display position of the remaining number of times display may be different in the advantageous state before the end of the jackpot game (second time-saving game state) and the advantageous state after the end of the jackpot game (first time-saving game state).

In this embodiment, there is a case where the mode transitions directly from time-saving mode A to time-saving mode B. Let us assume that the area in which the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed changes between time-saving mode A and time-saving mode B. In the above configuration, it is expected that some players may have an inconvenience of losing sight of the time-saving remaining image GJ immediately after time-saving mode B is started. The configuration of this embodiment has the effect of suppressing the above inconvenience.

However, in a configuration in which the time-saving mode A is directly switched to the time-saving mode B, some players may not realize that the time-saving mode B has started. In consideration of the above circumstances, the area in which the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed may be made different between the time-saving mode A and the time-saving mode B. An example of the time-saving screen M7 in the second time-saving game state of the modified example employing the above configuration is shown in FIG. 17(c). In the above modified example, the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the area RJ in the first time-saving game state, and the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the area RJ' in the second time-saving game state. According to the above modified example, the area in which the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed has changed, making it easier to recognize that the time-saving mode A has ended and the time-saving mode B has started. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In this way, the presentation style (presentation mode, pattern display style, icon display style, etc.) differs between the advantageous state before the end of the jackpot game (second time-saving game state) and the advantageous state after the end of the jackpot game (first time-saving game state).

In the first time-shortened game state, the remaining number of times N up to the second time-shortened game state is subtracted, just like in the non-time-shortened game state. Therefore, a remaining number of times image GN (see FIG. 14(c)) that displays the current value of the remaining number of times N may be displayed in the first time-shortened game state. Similarly, a play number of times image GE (see FIG. 14(a)) that allows the number of times of play up to the second time-shortened game state to be grasped may be displayed in the first time-shortened game state. In other words, a specific effect according to the remaining number of times N (such as a subtraction display of the remaining number of times image GN) may be executed in the second time-shortened game state.

However, the second time-shortened game state begins after the first time-shortened game state ends. If the above-mentioned specific effects are executed in the first time-shortened game state, some players may become aware in the first time-shortened game state that they will not win a jackpot until the second time-shortened game state begins. In such cases, an inconvenience may occur that reduces the player's motivation to play. Taking the above circumstances into consideration, in this embodiment, a specific effect according to the remaining number of plays N is executed in the non-time-shortened game state, but a specific effect is not executed in the first time-shortened game state. The above-mentioned configuration has the advantage of suppressing the above-mentioned inconveniences.

Figures 18(a) to 18(c) are diagrams for explaining specific examples of the periods during which each image (GF, GT, GH, GS) is displayed at the start of time-saving mode B. Note that the specific examples in Figures 18(a) to 18(c) assume a case in which no jackpot is won at the start of time-saving mode B.

For the sake of explanation, the shielding image GF (see FIG. 16(c)), the entry image GT (see FIG. 16(d)), and the right-hit image GS3 (see FIG. 16(f)) displayed at the start of the time-saving mode B are collectively referred to as the "start images". The above start images are displayed during the period from when the second time-saving game state starts until it switches to the time-saving screen M7 (see FIG. 17(a) above). In this embodiment, the period from when the second time-saving game state starts until it switches to the time-saving screen M7 (the period during which the start images are displayed) may be referred to as the "start notification period Pz (1-3)". As will be described in detail later, the presentation mode during the start notification period Pz changes depending on whether or not the table scenario S is set and the type of table scenario S.

Figure 18 (a) is a specific example of when time-saving mode B starts during the period in which table scenario Sb2 is set. In the above cases, there is a transition from the previous mode (low-probability non-time-saving game state) to time-saving mode B (second time-saving game state). In the previous mode, a background image GHx is displayed. Figure 18 (a) shows the start time ts of the first game in the second time-saving game state, and the end time te of that game.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), when transitioning from the previous mode to the time-saving mode B, the above-mentioned screen M1 (see FIG. 16(a)) and screen M2 (see FIG. 16(b)) are each displayed for a predetermined time, and then screen M3 is displayed and the shielding image GF is displayed. During the period in which the shielding image GF is displayed, the background image GH is shielded (not displayed). In addition, after the shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, an entry performance is executed in which screen M4 (see FIG. 16(d)) is displayed. As described above, in the entry performance, the entry image GT is displayed and the background image GH becomes the background image Gz.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), when the time-saving mode B starts during the period when the table scenario Sb2 is set, after the entry performance is executed, the mode selection performance is executed on the screen M5 (see FIG. 16(e) above). The mode selection performance is executed for a predetermined time, and then the screen M6 is displayed (see FIG. 16(f)). The right-hit image GS3 is displayed on the screen M6. As shown in FIG. 18(a), when the time-saving mode B starts during the period when the table scenario Sb2 is set, the start notification period Pz1 is the period until the time-saving screen M7 is switched to. During the above start notification period Pz1, the screens M1 to M6 are displayed, and the time for which each of the above screens is displayed is predetermined. Therefore, the start notification period Pz1 ends at a predetermined time.

As mentioned above, the fluctuation pattern of the game is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts. In a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, there is only one type of fluctuation pattern that is determined when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss. In other words, the length of the period (hereinafter referred to as the "fluctuation period Px") during which the special chart fluctuates in the fluctuation pattern (miss) determined by the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is invariable (fixed).

As shown in FIG. 18(a), the fluctuation period Px is longer than the start notification period Pz1. In other words, the fluctuation period Px is designed to be long enough to execute various effects, including the entry effect and the mode selection effect. Similarly, in a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referenced, the length of the fluctuation pattern determined when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, and the length of the fluctuation pattern determined when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, are longer than the start notification period Pz1.

According to the above configuration, the start image displayed in the start notification period Pz1 is displayed during the first play of time-saving mode B (second time-saving play state), and is not displayed during the second or subsequent play. Let us assume a configuration in which the start image displayed in the start notification period Pz1 is also displayed during the second or subsequent play of time-saving mode B. In the above configuration, a problem may arise in which the image displayed during the second or subsequent play of time-saving mode B becomes difficult to see (or cannot be displayed) in the start image. According to the configuration of this embodiment, the above inconveniences are suppressed.

However, as mentioned above, in the period when the table scenario Sb is not set, the fluctuation pattern determination table (Tbx) is common to the first game in the second time-shortened game state and each game from the second time onwards (see FIG. 10(b)). Therefore, in the first game in the second time-shortened game state, a random fluctuation pattern is determined, as in the subsequent games. In other words, in the period when the scenario is not set, the length of the period during which the first game in the second time-shortened game state is played (hereinafter referred to as the "fluctuation period Py") is variable.

In the above configuration, if the length of the start notification period Pz is the same for the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the period in which a scenario is not set, there is a possibility that the start notification period Pz will not end before the first game of the second time-saving game state in the period in which a scenario is not set ends. In such a case, an inconvenience occurs in which the start image is displayed in the second or subsequent games in the second time-saving game state. Taking the above circumstances into consideration, in this embodiment, the start notification period Pz3 in the period in which a scenario is not set is configured to be shorter than the start notification period Pz2 in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set.

Figure 18(b) is a specific example of when time-saving mode B starts during a period in which a scenario has not been set. In the above cases, the game transitions from normal mode (low-probability non-time-saving game state) to time-saving mode B (second time-saving game state). As described above, in normal mode, a background image GHx is displayed. Figure 18(b) shows the start time ts of the first game in the second time-saving game state, and the end time te of that game.

As shown in FIG. 18(b), when transitioning to time-saving mode B during a period in which no scenario is set, screens M1 and M2 are displayed for a predetermined time each, similar to the case of transitioning to time-saving mode B during a period in which the above-mentioned table scenario Sb2 is set, and then screen M3 is displayed and shielding image GF is displayed. In addition, after shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, an entry performance is executed in which screen M4 is displayed.

However, when transitioning to time-saving mode B during a period in which table scenario Sb2 is set, the right-hit image GS4 (screen M6) is displayed after the mode selection presentation is executed (after screen M5 is displayed), but when transitioning to time-saving mode B during a period in which no scenario is set, the mode selection presentation is omitted and the right-hit image GS4 (screen M6) is displayed. In other words, the start notification period Pz2 during a period in which no scenario is set omits the period in which the mode selection presentation is executed, compared to the start notification period Pz1 during a period in which table scenario Sb2 is set.

In this way, the presentation of the entry performance differs between after the RAM is cleared and after a big win.
In addition, the effects omitted during the scenario-unset period are not limited to the above example. For example, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, in a game after the remaining number of fluctuations until the second time-shortened game state is controlled becomes less than a predetermined number (for example, less than 10 times), a countdown effect may be executed for each fluctuation effect to notify (suggest) the remaining number of fluctuations until the second time-shortened game state is controlled. Then, during the scenario-unset period, this countdown effect may be omitted. That is, after the RAM is cleared, the specific mode (countdown mode) is not controlled before the second time-shortened game state occurs, but after a jackpot, the specific mode may be controlled before the second time-shortened game state occurs.

In the above configuration, the start notification period Pz2 is shorter than the start notification period Pz1. Specifically, the start notification period Pz2 is designed to be shorter than the shortest variation pattern determined in the first play of the second time-saving play state. In this embodiment, when playing in the normal procedure, the second reserve is 0 at the start of the first play of the second time-saving play state. Therefore, when the second special chart is displayed in the first play of the second time-saving play state, the "long variation (miss)" (about 4 seconds) is the shortest variation pattern among the variation patterns. Also, when the first special chart is displayed in the first play of the second time-saving play state, the "special 1 miss (miss)" (about 7 seconds) is the shortest variation pattern among the variation patterns. Therefore, the start notification period Pz is designed to be shorter than the "long variation (miss)" of about 4 seconds, for example.

As can be understood from the above explanation, according to the configuration of this embodiment, the start notification period Pz2 ends before the first play of the second time-saving play state in the unscenario-set period ends. Note that the start notification period Pz2 may be a time (e.g., about 6 seconds) shorter than the shortest variation pattern (missed special chart 1: about 7 seconds) among the variation patterns of the first special chart in the second time-saving play state.

Furthermore, as can be understood from the above explanation, according to this embodiment, when the background image GHz is displayed in place of the background image GHx at the start of the time-saving mode B (second time-saving gaming state), the shielding image GF can be displayed. According to the above configuration, by shielding the background image GHx in one go, the player can quickly grasp that the time-saving mode A is ending, and then by displaying the background image GHz in one go, the player can quickly grasp that the time-saving mode B is starting. In other words, there is an advantage in that it becomes easier for the player to quickly grasp that the time-saving mode A has been switched to the time-saving mode B.

Figure 18 (c) is a specific example of when time-saving mode B starts during the period in which table scenario Sb4 is set. In the above case, the transition to time-saving mode B occurs immediately after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, when the ending period of the jackpot game ends, the first time-saving game state (799 times) starts, and the presentation mode transitions to time-saving mode B. Figure 18 (c) shows the start time ta and end time tb of the ending period.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), when the ending period starts, the entry effect is executed, in which the above-mentioned screen M4 (see FIG. 16(d)) is displayed. As described above, in the entry effect, the entry image GT is displayed, and the background image GH becomes the background image GHz. After the entry effect is executed, the mode selection effect is executed, and the screen M5 (see FIG. 16(e)) is displayed. The mode selection effect is also executed for a predetermined time, and then the screen M6 is displayed (see FIG. 16(f)). The right-hit image GS3 is displayed on the screen M6. In the specific example of FIG. 18(c), when the ending period (start notification period Pz3) ends, the time-saving mode B (first time-saving game state) is started, and the time-saving screen M7 is displayed.

The length of the ending period when the table scenario Sb4 is set is determined in advance. Specifically, the start notification period Pz3 when the time-saving mode B starts during the period when the table scenario Sb4 is set approximately coincides with the ending period. In other words, the start image displayed when the time-saving mode B starts can be displayed during the ending period.

As can be understood from the above explanation, in this embodiment, the manner of the presentation (start presentation) differs between the case where a transition to time-saving mode B occurs at the start of the first time-saving game state (see FIG. 18(c)) and the case where a transition to time-saving mode B occurs at the start of the second time-saving game state (FIG. 18(b)). For example, when a transition to time-saving mode B occurs at the start of the second time-saving game state, a shielding image GF is displayed, but when a transition to time-saving mode B occurs at the start of the first time-saving game state, a shielding image GF is not displayed. In addition, the length of the start notification period Pz2 and the start notification period Pz3 are different. With the above configuration, it becomes easier to optimally set the presentation when transitioning to time-saving mode B compared to a configuration in which the presentation when transitioning to time-saving mode B is uniform.

However, the length of the start notification period Pz2 and the start notification period Pz3 may be the same, or the shielding image GF may be displayed during the start notification period Pz3. During the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the mode of presentation when transitioning to the time-saving mode A (first time-saving game state) after the end of a jackpot game differs from the mode of presentation when transitioning to the time-saving mode B. Specifically, a presentation notifying the start of the time-saving mode A is executed during the ending period. The ending period differs between when the time-saving mode A starts and when the time-saving mode B starts. Furthermore, when the time-saving mode A starts, the mode selection presentation is not executed. Furthermore, during the entry presentation when transitioning to the time-saving mode A, the name of the time-saving mode A is displayed.

In a configuration in which the remaining number of times N is subtracted at the end of a game, if the number of reserved balls at the end of that game is 0, the customer waiting state begins immediately after the start of the second time-saving game state. Since the above customer waiting state is the second time-saving game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play with a right-handed shot than with a left-handed shot. Taking the above circumstances into consideration, this embodiment employs a configuration in which a right-handed shot is instructed in the customer waiting state before the first game of the second time-saving game state begins. The above configuration is explained in detail below.

Figure 19(a) is a schematic diagram of the customer waiting screen Mx that is displayed when the customer waiting state starts at the time of transition to the second time-shortened gaming state. The specific example of Figure 19(a) assumes that, as with Figure 16(a) above, table scenario Sb2 is set among the table scenarios S. In the above cases, transition occurs from a non-time-shortened gaming state (last-minute mode) in which the background image GHx is displayed to the second time-shortened gaming state (time-shortened mode B). Note that, during a period in which no scenario is set, if the customer waiting state occurs at the start of the second time-shortened gaming state, the customer waiting screen Mx is displayed in the customer waiting state, as in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set.

The customer waiting screen Mx shown in FIG. 19(a) is displayed when the number of reserved balls at the start of the second time-saving game state is 0. Therefore, the performance pattern GAx and small pattern Ga are displayed as stopped on the customer waiting screen Mx. Also, as shown in FIG. 19(a), the customer waiting screen Mx displays a play count image GE and a remaining play count image GN, just like screen M1. Furthermore, the customer waiting screen Mx displays a right-hit image GS1, just like screen M1. According to the above configuration, a right hit is instructed in the customer waiting state before the first play of the second time-saving game state begins.

Figure 19(b) is a diagram for explaining the period during which each image (GF, GT, GH, GS) is displayed when the customer waiting state begins at the time of transition to the second time-saving game state. Figure 19(b) shows the end time te of the game when the remaining number of plays N until the second time-saving game state is subtracted to the numerical value "0", and the start time ts of the first game in the second time-saving game state. In the above specific example, the customer waiting state occurs during the period Pw shown in Figure 19(b), and the customer waiting screen Mx (see Figure 19(a)) is displayed during the period Pw.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), during the period Pw in which the customer waiting screen Mx is displayed, the right-hit image GS1 is displayed and the background image GHx is displayed. After that, when the first play in the second time-saving play state is started, the screens are displayed in the order of screen M1, screen M2, etc., in the same way as when the number of reserved balls in the second time-saving play state is one or more (see FIG. 18(a) and FIG. 18(b) above). Specifically, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the screens are displayed in the order of screen M1 to screen M7 (see FIG. 18(a)). Also, during the period in which no scenario is set, the screens (M1, M2, M3, M4, M6, M7) except for screen M5 are displayed in sequence (see FIG. 18(b)).

Figures 20(a) and 20(b) are diagrams for explaining the details of when to update the number on the remaining number image GN. As described above, the remaining number image GN displays the remaining number N stored in the main RAM 113. However, in this embodiment, the time when the number on the remaining number image GN is subtracted differs from the time when the remaining number N is subtracted. The above configuration will be described in detail below. Note that hereinafter, the time when the number on the remaining number image GN is updated may simply be referred to as the "time when the remaining number image GN is updated."

As described above, in this embodiment, when the game ends (when the special symbol stops), the remaining number N in the main RAM 113 is subtracted. Specifically, one game is provided with a variable period during which the special symbol changes and a fixed period during which the special symbol is displayed stationary after the variable period ends. The length of the variable period in a game is variable depending on the variable pattern of the game. On the other hand, the fixed period in a game is a predetermined time (about 0.5 seconds). The main control board 110 (main CPU 111) transmits a pattern determination command to the sub-CPU 121 at the start of the fixed period. When the performance control board 120 (sub-CPU 121) receives the pattern determination command, it causes the performance symbol GA and small symbol Ga to be displayed stationary on the image control board 150 until the fixed period ends. In other words, the fixed period is approximately the same as the period during which the special symbol and performance symbol GA are displayed stationary.

Figure 20(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of when the remaining number image GN is updated. Figure 20(a) shows the numbers in the remaining number image GN at each time displayed by the performance control board 120 (image control board 150), and the remaining number N stored at each time by the main control board 110 (main RAM 113). Figure 20(a) also shows the start time ts of the game and the end time te of the game. Figure 20(a) also shows the time ta when the variable period in the game ends. The above time ta can also be said as the time when the fixed period begins.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), at the start time ts of a game, a remaining number command is sent from the main control board 110 to the presentation control board 120. The remaining number command is a command that specifies the current value of the remaining number N. In the event of a power outage, the presentation control board 120 of this embodiment restores the number in the remaining number image GN according to the remaining number command sent after the power is restored. In the specific example of FIG. 20(a), it is assumed that the remaining number N at the start of a game is the number "X" (X≧2). The remaining number command sent at the start of the current game indicates the remaining number N that was updated (decremented) at the end of the previous game.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), at time ta when the determination period starts, a pattern determination command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 120. When the performance control board 120 receives the pattern determination command, it freezes the performance pattern GA and subtracts the number in the remaining number image GN. In other words, the number in the remaining number image GN is subtracted at approximately the same time as time ta when the determination period starts. In the specific example of FIG. 20(a), the number in the remaining number image GN is subtracted from "X" to "X-1" and displayed. However, the main control board 110 subtracts the remaining number N in the main RAM 113 at time te when the determination period ends. Therefore, immediately after the number in the remaining number image GN is subtracted to "X-1", the remaining number N in the main RAM 113 is the number "X" as shown in FIG. 20(a).

Let us assume a comparative example in which the number on the remaining number image GN is subtracted at the end of the fixed period. In the above comparative example, the number on the remaining number image GN is subtracted after the game ends. However, for example, when the game ends and the game transitions to a customer waiting state, some players may stop paying attention to the screen of the image display device 31 (including the remaining number image GN) at the end point ta of the game, and end the game. In the above cases, the player may not be able to see the subtraction display of the number on the remaining number image GB. According to this embodiment, the subtraction display of the number on the remaining number image GB is executed before the end point of the game, which has the advantage of suppressing the above inconvenience.

Figure 20(b) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the update time of the remaining number image GN. As with Figure 20(a) above, Figure 20(b) shows the number of the remaining number image GN at each time point, the remaining number of times N stored in the main RAM 113 at each time point, the start time ts of the game, the time ta when the variable period of the game ends, and the end time te of the game. Figure 20(b) also shows the game state at each time point. In the specific example of Figure 20(b), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is reduced to the numerical value "0" at the end time te of the game. Therefore, the second time-saving game state starts from the end time te of the game.

As shown in FIG. 20(b), even in a game in which the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the number "0", the number in the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted when the pattern determination command is received, just like in other games. That is, at the time ta when the determination period starts, the remaining number of times image GN displays the number "0". Also, when the determination period ends after the number "0" is displayed in the remaining number of times image GN, the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the number "0" and the second time-saving game state starts.

In the above configuration, the remaining number image GN displays the number "0" before the second time-saving game state is started. However, some players may mistakenly believe that the second time-saving game state has started at the time ta when the remaining number image GN displays the number "0". In consideration of the above circumstances, in a game in which the second time-saving game state is started, the number in the remaining number image GN may be subtracted at the time when the remaining number N is subtracted (the time when the second time-saving game state starts) without subtracting the number in the remaining number image GN at the start of the fixed period. Specifically, after the remaining number N is subtracted to the number "0", the number "0" may be displayed in the remaining number image GN when a customer waiting command is received, or when a command that specifies that the first game in the second time-saving game state has started (for example, a variable pattern designation command) is received. Note that, in each game, the number in the remaining number image GN may be subtracted at the end of the fixed period.

Figures 21(a), 21(b-1) and 21(b-2) are diagrams for explaining the display of the performance execution means (e.g., image display device 31) during the period before and after a power outage occurs. As described above, the performance mode (display mode of image display device 31) during a specific period corresponds to the variation pattern determination table referenced during that period. In this embodiment, during the period immediately after recovery from a power outage, the image display device 31 may be controlled to a performance mode that does not correspond to the variation pattern determination table. The above configuration will be described in detail below.

21(a) is a schematic diagram of a recovery screen that is displayed when the power is restored. As shown in FIG. 21(a), the recovery screen displays a message indicating that the power is being restored from a power outage. The recovery screen also displays a background image GHf. The background image GHf is a dedicated background image GH that is displayed when the power is restored, and is, for example, a white (monochrome) image. In the specific example of FIG. 21(a), it is assumed that the power is restored during the period when the right hit lamp 28 is lit. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 21(a), the right hit image GS is displayed on the recovery screen. Note that the configuration may be such that an image other than the background image GHf and the right hit image GS is displayed. For example, the recovery screen may be configured to display the pending number image GD (see FIG. 14(a) above).

Figure 21 (b-1) is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode at each point in time before and after a power outage occurs, and a specific example of the variation pattern determination table T that is referenced. Figure 21 (b-1) assumes that a power outage occurs during a jackpot game. Figure 21 (b-1) shows the time ta when the power outage occurs and the time tb when the power supply is resumed. The specific example in Figure 21 (b-1) assumes that the jackpot game ends at time tc, transitions to a customer waiting state (number of reserved balls at the end of the jackpot game = 0), and the first game starts at time td.

In this embodiment, when the power is restored from the power failure, a power failure recovery command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 120. For example, the main CPU 111 sends the power failure recovery command after completing the initialization process when the power is turned on. The power failure recovery command specifies whether the special chart is changing, the number of reserved balls, and the game state. Specifically, the power failure recovery command specifies whether the game state is a jackpot game, a small jackpot game, a low probability non-time-saving game state, a high probability time-saving game state, a first time-saving game state, or a second time-saving game state. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-1), at the time tb when the power is restored, a power failure recovery command is sent that specifies that the current game state is a jackpot game.

As described above, in a jackpot game, the right hit lamp 28 lights up. Therefore, when the game state specified from the power outage recovery command is a jackpot game, the right hit image GS is displayed on the above-mentioned recovery screen. The type of right hit image GS displayed on the recovery screen can be changed as appropriate. For example, whether the game state specified from the power outage recovery command is a jackpot game or a time-saving game state, a common right hit image GS may be displayed on the recovery screen. Also, the right hit image GS that would normally be displayed in the game state specified from the power outage recovery command may be displayed on the recovery screen.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the jackpot game, various images including the current round number and the jackpot performance pattern that is stopped and displayed are displayed. However, the current round number and the jackpot performance pattern cannot be specified from the power failure recovery command. Therefore, if a power failure occurs during a jackpot game and is subsequently restored, the images that should have been displayed during the jackpot game cannot be fully restored. Taking the above circumstances into consideration, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21 (b-1), when the power is cut off during a jackpot game and then restored, a recovery screen is displayed until the jackpot game ends. However, if a power failure occurs during a jackpot game and is subsequently restored, the screen displayed during the jackpot game may be restored. In the above cases, the jackpot game screen after the power is restored is displayed with the images that cannot be restored (for example, the image showing the round number) omitted.

In addition, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), it is assumed that the variation pattern determination table Tax is referenced after the end of a jackpot game. That is, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), it is assumed that the special pattern B4 is stopped and displayed as the jackpot pattern, and the table scenario Sb4 is set. As described above, the presentation mode corresponding to the variation pattern determination table Tax is the time-saving mode B. Therefore, the period during which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referenced is usually the time-saving mode B.

However, the power outage recovery command does not specify the type of variation pattern determination table T (table scenario S) to be referenced after the end of a jackpot game. In addition, the first time-saving game state after the end of a jackpot game can transition to both time-saving mode A and time-saving mode B (see, for example, Figures 11(a) and 11(b)). Therefore, in the period immediately after recovery from a power outage, the presentation control board 120 cannot specify whether the presentation mode in the first time-saving game state after the end of a jackpot game should be time-saving mode A or time-saving mode B.

When a variation pattern designation command is received, the variation pattern determination table referenced by the main control board 110 is identified from the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. In other words, the original presentation mode is identified from the variation pattern designation command. In this embodiment, after recovery from a power outage, the original presentation mode may not be identified on the presentation control board 120 side until the first reception of a variation pattern designation command.

In the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-1), after the jackpot state ends, the state transitions to a customer waiting state. Also, the first time that a variation pattern designation command is received after the jackpot state ends is at time td, when the first game starts after the jackpot game ends. In the above specific example, in the customer waiting state from time tc when the jackpot game ends to time td when the game starts, the performance control board 120 cannot determine whether to switch to time-saving mode A or time-saving mode B.

Let us assume a comparison example in which, when the presentation control board 120 cannot determine whether time-saving mode A or time-saving mode B should be selected, each presentation execution means is controlled in time-saving mode B. As described above, in time-saving mode A, the first time-saving game state may end after 100 turns. On the other hand, in time-saving mode B, the first time-saving game state continues up to 799 turns. Therefore, in the above comparison example, even if the game has transitioned to time-saving mode B, the first time-saving game state may end after 100 turns. In the above cases, depending on the player, inconveniences may occur that cause the player to lose motivation to play.

Taking the above circumstances into consideration, in this embodiment, if the presentation control board 120 cannot determine whether the time-saving mode should be A or B in the first time-saving game state, each presentation execution means (such as the image display device 31) is controlled in time-saving mode A. With the configuration of this embodiment described above, the first time-saving game state will not end after 100 plays, even if it has transitioned to time-saving mode B. Therefore, compared to the above-mentioned comparative example, there is an advantage in that the inconvenience of the player losing motivation to play is suppressed.

As described above, the original presentation mode is identified from the variation pattern designation command. In this embodiment, the presentation mode is changed to the original presentation mode when the original presentation mode becomes identifiable on the presentation control board 120 side. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), the variation pattern designation command is received at time td. From the above variation pattern designation command, it is determined that the original presentation mode is time-saving mode B. Therefore, at time td, the presentation mode is switched from time-saving mode A to time-saving mode B. Note that in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), if it is assumed that the original presentation mode is time-saving mode A (when the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referenced), the presentation mode does not change to time-saving mode A before and after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

Figure 21 (b-2) is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode at each time point in the period before and after the power outage occurs, and other specific examples of the variation pattern determination table that is referenced. Figure 21 (b-2) assumes a case where a power outage occurs during play in time-saving mode B (play in which the variation pattern determination table Tax or the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referenced). Specifically, Figure 21 (b-2) assumes a case where play is started in time-saving mode B at time ts, a power outage occurs during play at time ta, and the power supply is resumed at time tb thereafter. Also, the specific example of Figure 21 (b-2) assumes a case where the play ends at time tc, then transitions to a customer waiting state, and a new play begins at time td.

In the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-2) above, in the period from time tb when the power is restored from the power outage to when the new time td is displayed, the original presentation mode cannot be identified on the presentation control board 120 side. Specifically, from time tb when the power is restored to time tc when the game interrupted due to the power outage ends, in addition to the original presentation mode, the variation pattern in the game and the presentation pattern GA to be displayed as stopped cannot be identified. Taking the above circumstances into consideration, in the period from when the power is restored to when the game interrupted due to the power outage ends, the above-mentioned recovery screen is displayed.

In the specific example of FIG. 21(b-2), in the customer waiting state from time tc to time td when a new game starts, the original presentation mode cannot be identified by the presentation control board 120, so each presentation execution means is controlled in time-saving mode A. Also, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-2), when a variation pattern designation command is received at time td, the presentation mode is switched from time-saving mode A to time-saving mode B.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if a power outage occurs during the time-saving game state, if a variation pattern designation command is subsequently received, the game mode is switched to the original presentation mode. Incidentally, as described above, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state stored on the main control board 110 side is displayed by the time-saving remaining image GJ. However, a command specifying the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state stored on the main control board 110 side is not transmitted during the time-saving game state after the power outage is restored. Therefore, if a power outage occurs during the time-saving game state, the remaining number of times M cannot be displayed in the time-saving remaining image GJ during the time-saving game state after the power outage is restored. In this embodiment, during the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) after the power outage is restored, the time-saving remaining image GJ with the number portion omitted is displayed.

Figures 22(a) to 22(d) are diagrams for explaining other specific examples of the presentation mode at each point in time during the period before and after a power outage occurs. Figures 22(a) to 22(d) show the game state at each point in time in addition to the presentation mode at that point in time.

Figure 22(a) is a specific example of a case where a power outage occurs at the start of the second time-saving game state. Figure 22(a) assumes a case where the second time-saving game state starts during the period in which table scenario Sb2 is set. In the above cases, the presentation mode immediately before the second time-saving game state starts becomes the previous mode. Also, Figure 22(a) assumes a case where, at time ta, the last game in the non-time-saving game state (the 800th game since the jackpot game) ends, the number of reserved balls is 0, and the game transitions to a customer waiting state. The above customer waiting state is the second time-saving game state, and as explained above using Figure 19(a), the right-hit image GS1 is displayed.

Figure 22 (a) assumes that a power outage occurs at time tb during the customer waiting state immediately after the start of the second time-saving gaming state. It also assumes that the power is restored from the power outage at a later time tc. In the above cases, a recovery screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time from time tc. Furthermore, once the recovery screen is displayed, each presentation execution means including the image display device 31 is then controlled to time-saving mode B. Note that the configuration may also be such that control is performed to time-saving mode B when a power outage recovery command is received.

Specifically, when the machine is in a waiting state for customers immediately after recovery from a power outage, the above-mentioned time-saving screen M7 (see FIG. 17(a)) is displayed. The above-mentioned time-saving screen M7 is normally displayed after the end of the period during which the start notification image Gn is displayed (see FIG. 16(b)), the shielding image GF is displayed (see FIG. 16(c)), the entry effect is executed (see FIG. 16(d)), the mode selection effect is executed (see FIG. 16(e)), and the right-hit image GS3 is displayed (see FIG. 16(f)) (hereinafter simply referred to as the "period during which the entry effect, etc. is executed").

In the specific example of FIG. 22(a), it is assumed that the first play in the second time-saving play state is started at time d. In the above case, the period in which the entry performance and the like are executed starts from time td, and then the time-saving play screen M7 is displayed. If no power interruption occurs, the background image GHx (background image GH of the previous mode) is displayed when the start notification image Gn is displayed (see FIG. 16(b) above). On the other hand, in the specific example of FIG. 22(a) in which a power interruption has occurred, the background image GHz (background image GH of the previous mode) is displayed when the start notification image Gn is displayed.

Figure 22(b) is another specific example of a case where a power outage occurs at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. Like Figure 22(a) above, Figure 22(b) assumes that at time ta when the last game in the non-time-saving gaming state (the 800th game since the jackpot game) ends, the number of reserved balls is 0 and the system transitions to a customer waiting state. Figure 22(b) also assumes that a power outage occurs at time tb during the customer waiting state immediately after the start of the second time-saving gaming state, and that the power is restored at a subsequent time tc.

The above-mentioned FIG. 22(a) shows a specific example in which the second time-shortened game state starts in a period in which the table scenario S is set, whereas FIG. 22(b) shows a specific example in which the second time-shortened game state starts in a period in which no scenario is set. In the specific example of FIG. 22(b) above, the presentation mode immediately before the second time-shortened game state starts is the normal mode. Also, in the specific example of FIG. 22(b), in the period after the time tc when the power is restored from the power outage, the time-shortened screen M7 of the time-shortened mode B is displayed (similar to the specific example of FIG. 22(a)).

In the specific example of FIG. 22(b), it is assumed that the first play of the second time-shortened play state begins at time td. As described above, if a power outage does not occur, when the second time-shortened play state begins during a period in which a scenario is not set, an entry effect is executed in which the mode selection effect is omitted (see FIG. 18(b)). However, if a power outage occurs during a period in which a scenario is not set during the customer waiting state from the start of the second time-shortened play state until the start of the first play, all entry effects are omitted (canceled) when the second time-shortened play state begins.

Figure 22(c) is another specific example of a case where a power outage occurs at the start of the second time-saving game state. The specific example in Figure 22(c) assumes that a power outage occurs during the first game of the second time-saving game state. Note that below, Figure 22(c) will be used to explain both the case where table scenario Sb2 is set and the case where no scenario is set.

The specific example in FIG. 22(c) assumes that the first play in the second time-saving play state starts at time ta, and then a power outage occurs at time tb before the play ends. As described above, in the first play in the second time-saving play state, if table scenario Sb2 is set, a start effect and the like are executed. Also, in the first play in the second time-saving play state, if a scenario has not been set during the period, part of the start effect and the like are executed.

As shown in FIG. 22(c), the recovery screen is displayed during the period after the time tc when the power is restored. In other words, any entry effects that were being performed at the time tb when the power was restored are stopped. FIG. 22(c) assumes that the first play in the second time-saving game state ends at time td after the power is restored. In the above cases, the recovery screen is hidden at time td, and each effect execution means (such as the image display device 31) is controlled to time-saving mode B. Specifically, the recovery screen is switched to the time-saving screen M7.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs in the second time-saving game state (including the first game), the second time-saving game state is controlled to the time-saving mode B1 among the time-saving modes B1 to B3. That is, regardless of the time-saving mode B selected on the screen M5, the time-saving mode B1 is selected after the power is restored. In addition, even if a power outage occurs before the time-saving mode B is selected in the mode selection presentation after the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state, the time-saving mode B1 is selected after the power is restored. However, if a power outage occurs in the customer waiting state before the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state (for example, in the case of FIG. 22(a) described above), the time-saving mode B selected in the mode selection presentation is selected thereafter. Note that the configuration may be such that the canceled entry presentation, etc. can be executed in the period after the time td.

Figure 22(d) is another specific example of a case where a power outage occurs at the start of the second time-saving game state. In the specific example of Figure 22(d), it is assumed that a power outage occurs during a game immediately prior to a gap game. In other words, it is assumed that a power outage occurs during the final game of the 799th game of the first time-saving game state. Specifically, in the specific example of Figure 22(d), it is assumed that a 799th game of the first time-saving game state begins at time ta, and then a power outage occurs at time tb before the game ends. In addition, in the specific example of Figure 22(d), it is assumed that the power outage is restored at time tc, and then the game being played when the power outage ended at time td. In the above cases, a recovery screen is displayed during the period from time tc to time td.

As shown in FIG. 22(d), at the end time td of the final play in the first time-shortened play state, the first time-shortened play state ends and transitions to a non-time-shortened play state. As described above, if there is no power interruption, the presentation mode for the gap play becomes time-shortened mode B. In other words, the presentation mode for the series of the final play in the first time-shortened play state, the gap play, and the first play in the second time-shortened play state becomes time-shortened mode B. On the other hand, if there is a power interruption during the final play in the first time-shortened play state, the presentation mode becomes the normal mode after the end of that play until the second special chart is displayed in a variable manner.

In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the number of reserved balls is 0 at the end time td of the final play of the first time-saving play state when the power outage occurred. In the above case, the state of waiting for customers starts from time td. In the above state of waiting for customers, the presentation mode becomes normal mode. Furthermore, the state of waiting for customers is a non-time-saving play state, and in principle the second special chart cannot be displayed in a variable manner. In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the display of the first special chart starts in a variable manner at time te. In other words, it is assumed that the gap play in which the first special chart is displayed in a variable manner starts from time te. Furthermore, in the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the gap play ends at time tf. In the above case, the second time-saving play state starts from time tf.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs during the final game of the first time-saving game state, the presentation mode will be normal mode after the game ends until the second special chart is displayed. Therefore, at the time tf when the second time-saving game state starts, the presentation mode is normal mode in principle. In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the second special chart starts to be displayed at time tg. In the above case, the mode transitions from time tg to time mode B. Note that, if the first special chart is displayed in the game following the gap game, the presentation mode of the game is normal mode. Also, if a power outage occurs during the gap game, the right-hit image GS is not displayed on the recovery screen. After that, when the gap game ends, the mode is controlled to time-saving mode B, even if the game transitions to a customer waiting state or the special chart is displayed.

Figure 23(a) is a diagram for explaining the state of the image (play count image GE) and lamp (performance lamp 33) when a power outage occurs. Figure 23(a) shows the numbers displayed by the play count image GE at each point in time before and after the power outage. Figure 23(a) also shows the state of the performance lamp 33 at each point in time. For the sake of explanation, the state (light-emitting state) of the performance lamp 33 during normal play may be referred to as the "normal state". The normal state is variable depending on the game state and the performance executed in each game.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that a power outage occurs at time ta when the play count image GE displays the number "X", and the power outage is restored at a subsequent time tb. In the above case, a recovery screen is displayed from time tb, and the recovery screen is hidden at the subsequent time tc. As shown in FIG. 23(a), in this embodiment, the performance lamp 33 is displayed in a recovery mode during the period in which the recovery screen is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the number "X" is less than 799, and the game state at time ta is a low probability non-time-saving game state. Note that, as for time tc in FIG. 23(a), if time ta is a customer waiting state, it is assumed that a predetermined time has passed since time tb, and if time ta is a special chart variable period, it is assumed that the variable period ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is reached is greater than the value "0" at time tc when the display period of the recovery screen ends. Specifically, it is assumed that the game state after time tc is a non-time-saving game state. A case in which the remaining number of times N is greater than the value "0" at time tc is assumed to be a case in which a clear operation is performed between the time of power outage and recovery, and the remaining number of times N is initialized to the initial value "800". Another case in which the remaining number of times N is greater than the value "0" at time tc is assumed to be a case in which the remaining number of times N was fixed at a value greater than the value "1" before and after the power outage. As described above, regardless of whether the remaining number of times N was fixed before and after the power outage, the game number image GE displays the number "0" when the power is restored.

In this embodiment, the second time-saving game state is started when the remaining number of times N is subtracted from the value "1" to the value "0". In addition, in the period after the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the value "0", the remaining number of times N does not change from the value "0" until a clear operation is performed or a jackpot game is won. In the above configuration, in the period after the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the value "0", the second time-saving game state is not started again until a clear operation is performed or a jackpot game is won. Specifically, assume that 1000 games are played in the second time-saving game state and then the game transitions to a non-time-saving game state. In the non-time-saving game state after the above second time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state is not started again even if 800 games are played.

Assuming that, during the period when the remaining number N is the number "0", during the period of the low probability non-time-saving game state after the second time-saving game state ends (hereinafter referred to as the "activated period"), the number of plays image GE is incremented from "0" for each play. In addition, in the above-mentioned comparative example, if the power is turned off/on during the activated period, the number of plays image GE displays the number "0" after the power is restored, and thereafter, the number of plays image GE is incremented for each play. In the above-mentioned comparative example, even though the second time-saving game state does not start, the number of plays image GE may be incremented up to "800" during the activated period. Therefore, depending on the player, an inconvenience may occur in which the motivation to play decreases. In consideration of the above circumstances, this embodiment adopts a configuration that can notify whether or not it is an activated period. The above-mentioned configuration will be described in detail below.

Figure 23(b) is a simulated diagram of the screen Mh that is displayed when the power is turned OFF/ON during the activated period. The screen Mh displays images (such as the performance symbol GA) similar to those displayed on the screen in normal mode (see FIG. 14(a) above) before the second time-saving gaming state starts (not yet activated). However, while the play count image GE displays a number indicating the number of plays since the power was turned ON or the number of plays since a jackpot was hit during the period when the second time-saving gaming state has not yet been activated, the play count image GE on the screen Mh does not display the number. Specifically, when the power is turned OFF/ON during the activated period, the play count image GE displays the symbols "???" instead of the numbers, as shown in FIG. 23(b).

Figure 23 (c) is a simulated diagram of a play count image GE in an activated period after the second time-saving game state has ended. The play count image GE shown in Figure 23 (c) is a play count image GE with the numbers omitted that is displayed in a low-probability non-time-saving game state other than the activated period. With the above configuration, the player is essentially notified whether or not the period has been activated.

Figure 23(d) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the state of the play count image GE and the performance lamp 33 when a power outage occurs. Like the above-mentioned Figure 23(a), Figure 23(d) shows the numbers displayed by the play count image GE at each time point and the state of the performance lamp 33. In the specific example of Figure 23(d), it is assumed that the second time-saving play state starts at time point ta, and the last play (1000th play) of the second time-saving play state ends at the following time point tb. In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving play state from time point tb onwards becomes the activated period. In the above case, during the activated period from time point tb onwards, the play count image GE (see the above-mentioned Figure 23(c)) that does not display numbers is displayed.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(d), the power is turned off at time tc after time tb in the activated period, and then turned on at time td. As shown in FIG. 23(d), when the power is turned on, a recovery screen is displayed for a predetermined time. In addition, during the period in which the recovery screen is displayed, the performance lamp 33 is displayed in a recovery mode. In the specific example of FIG. 23(d), the recovery screen is displayed until time te, and then the above-mentioned screen Mh is displayed. As shown in FIG. 23(d), during the activated period after time te when the screen Mh is displayed, the play count image GE displays the symbol "???" instead of a number. In addition, during the period in which the symbol "???" is displayed on the play count image GE, the performance lamp 33 is displayed in a warning mode. During the activated period in which the symbol "???" is displayed on the play count image GE, normal play can be performed. However, even during periods when various effects are being executed in a game, the effect lamp 33 continues to be displayed in a warning mode, rather than in a mode corresponding to that effect (normal mode).

In this embodiment, when the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving play state is initialized to the number "800", the display of the symbol "???" in the play count image GE ends and the number addition display in the play count image GE is executed. Also, when the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving play state is initialized to the number "800", the performance lamp 33 switches from the warning mode to the normal mode. For example, when the performance lamp 33 is in the warning mode, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can switch the performance lamp 33 to the normal mode by executing a clear operation.

As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of a configuration of the present invention in which "when the number of judgments specified from the information reaches a specific number when the power is turned on, the notification means can be controlled to a special mode", a configuration is adopted in which the notification means (presentation lamp 33, image display device 31) can be controlled to a special mode (warning mode, display of the symbol "???") when the remaining number of times N reaches the value "0" (the number of jackpot draws reaches 800), and the game state notified by the main control board 110 to the presentation control board 120 by the power interruption recovery command when the power is restored is a low-probability non-time-saving game state.

Figure 24(a) is a diagram for explaining the images displayed in the non-time-saving game state immediately after the time-saving game state has ended. As described above, the presentation mode becomes normal mode immediately after the non-time-saving game state has started. As shown in Figure 24(a), in the non-time-saving game state immediately after the time-saving game state has ended, the images displayed in normal mode (presentation pattern GAx, etc.) are displayed. Also, in the non-time-saving game state immediately after the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) has ended, in addition to the above images, the left-hit image GL is displayed.

The left hit image GL is an image for informing the player that he should play with a left hit. As described above, in the time-saving play state, playing with a right hit is more advantageous than playing with a left hit, and the right hit image GS (right hit lamp 28) indicates that he should play with a right hit. On the other hand, in the non-time-saving play state, playing with a left hit is more advantageous than playing with a right hit. Therefore, when transitioning from the time-saving play state to the non-time-saving play state, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the player is informed that he should play with a left hit (that is, that he should switch from right hit to left hit). Taking the above circumstances into consideration, the left hit image GL is displayed immediately after the time-saving play state ends.

Figure 24 (b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the period during which the left hit image GL is displayed. The left hit image GL is usually displayed for a predetermined time after transition to a non-time-saving game state. Hereinafter, the period from transition to a non-time-saving game state until the elapse of said time will be referred to as "period Th." The above-mentioned period Th is shown in Figure 24 (b).

Figure 24(b) shows the screen (presentation mode) displayed at each point in time and whether or not the left-hit image GL is displayed. The specific example of Figure 24(b) assumes that the second time-saving game state ends during the scenario setting period. Figure 24(b) shows the period of the final game of the second time-saving game state. During the final game of the second time-saving game state, a presentation similar to that of other games (a presentation to notify the player of whether or not a jackpot has been hit) is executed, and then the above-mentioned end presentation (see Figure 45(b)) may be executed. In the specific example of Figure 24(b), the left-hit image GL is displayed for the period Th.

Figure 24(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the period during which the left-hit image GL is displayed. The specific example in Figure 24(c) assumes that a power outage occurs during the final game of the second time-saving game state. Specifically, it assumes that the final game of the second time-saving game state starts at time ts, then the power outage occurs at time ta (a time before the ending performance), and the power is restored at time tb. It also assumes that the final game of the second time-saving game state is resumed from time tb and ends at time te.

In the specific example of FIG. 24(c) above, the above-mentioned recovery screen (see FIG. 21(a)) is displayed from time tb to time te. In addition, the left hit image GL is displayed for the period Th starting from time tb when the final game ends. However, as can be seen from FIG. 24(c), if a power outage occurs during the final game of the second time-saving game state, the ending effect that would have been executed thereafter is omitted. Similarly, if a power outage occurs during the final game of the first time-saving game state, the ending effect that would have been executed during that final game is omitted.

Figure 24 (d) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the period during which the left-hit image GL is displayed. In the specific example of Figure 24 (d), it is assumed that a power outage occurs during period Th. Specifically, it is assumed that a power outage occurs at time ta during period Th, and the power is restored at a subsequent time tb. In the above cases, the display of the left-hit image GL is stopped. Specifically, even if the power is restored before period Th has elapsed, the left-hit image GL will not be displayed on the recovery screen and normal mode screen that are displayed thereafter.

Figures 25(a-1) and 25(a-2) are diagrams for explaining other specific examples of the customer waiting screen Mx. In Figure 19(a) above, the customer waiting screen Mx displayed in the customer waiting state at the start of the second time-saving gaming state was explained. Figures 25(a-1) and 25(a-2) are specific examples of customer waiting screens Mx (1, 2) displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state.

Figure 25 (a-1) is a mock-up of the customer waiting screen Mx1. As with the customer waiting screen Mx described above in Figure 19 (a), the customer waiting screen Mx1 displays various images (including the performance pattern GA) that are displayed in the normal mode and the previous mode. In addition to the above images, the customer waiting image Mx1 also displays a loading notification image GK. The loading notification image GK is an image for notifying the player that a second time-saving game state is being set. For example, the loading notification image GK displays the message "Second time-saving loaded."

Figure 25 (a-1) is a schematic diagram of the customer waiting screen Mx2. As with the customer waiting screen Mx and customer waiting screen Mx1 described above in Figure 19 (a), the customer waiting screen Mx2 displays various images that are displayed in the normal mode and the last minute mode. However, on the customer waiting screen Mx2, the performance image GA is not displayed, and a demo movie is displayed in place of the background image GHx. The demo movie includes, for example, a movie that is displayed in the reach performance. Furthermore, in addition to the above images, the customer waiting screen Mx2 displays the onboard notification image GK (similar to the customer waiting screen Mx1).

In this embodiment, in the customer waiting state, the customer waiting screen Mx1 and the customer waiting screen Mx2 are displayed alternately. Specifically, when the customer waiting screen Mx1 is displayed for a predetermined time, the customer waiting screen Mx1 switches to the customer waiting screen Mx2. After that, when the customer waiting screen Mx2 is displayed for a predetermined time, the customer waiting screen Mx2 switches to the customer waiting screen Mx1. In the above configuration, in the customer waiting state (non-play period), a notification is given that the gaming machine 1 can transition to the second time-shortened game state. Therefore, there is an advantage that the player can check whether or not the game can transition to the second time-shortened game state before playing. Note that the mounting notification image GK may be displayed on either the customer waiting screen Mx1 or the customer waiting screen Mx2, and not displayed on the other.

However, there may be cases where the manager of the gaming machine 1 wants to check whether or not it is possible to transition to the second time-shortened play state while the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, for example to determine whether or not a clear operation is required. However, the customer waiting screen Mx1 and the customer waiting screen Mx2 are not displayed while the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. Therefore, while the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, it is not possible to check whether or not it is possible to transition to the second time-shortened play state based on the mounted notification image GK.

In consideration of the above circumstances, a configuration that includes a display member that displays (writes) a message that indicates that the second time-shortened gaming state is available is preferable. With a configuration that includes the above-mentioned display member, it is possible to know whether or not the gaming machine 1 can transition to the second time-shortened gaming state even when the power is cut off. Below, a modified example in which a display member is used is described using Figures 25(b-1) and 25(b-2).

Figure 25 (b-1) is a diagram for explaining a modified example in which a display member is used. In Figure 25 (b-1), an area corresponding to the area Rx in the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment shown in Figure 1 is excerpted and shown. The gaming machine 1 is composed of a member including an outer frame 2, an inner frame 3, a glass frame 4, etc. (hereinafter referred to as the "frame member"), and a member including a game board 10, a main control board 110, and a performance control board 120, etc., which are detachable from the frame member (hereinafter referred to as the "board member"). In the modified example in Figure 25 (b-1), a case is assumed in which a frame member is used as a display member. Specifically, a message "2nd time reduction installed" is displayed (written) near the right-side performance lamp 33 of the two performance lamps 33 provided.

Figure 25 (b-2) is a diagram for explaining another modified example in which a display member is used. Figure 25 (b-2) shows an excerpt of an area of the gaming machine 1 in the modified example that corresponds to the area Ry shown in Figure 1. The modified example in Figure 25 (b-2) assumes that a board member is used as the display member. Specifically, a message saying "Second time-saving installed" is displayed below the big prize opening 16 in the play area. According to each of the modified examples above, during a period when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, the display member allows the player to know whether or not it is possible to transition to the second time-saving play state. However, the area in which the message indicating that it is possible to transition to the second time-saving play state is displayed can be changed as appropriate.

By the way, the message indicating that the second time-saving game mode is installed is more likely to be visible from a distance the closer it is to the upper end of the gaming machine 1. In the modified example of FIG. 25(b-1) above, the message is displayed above the center of the frame member (gaming machine 1). This has the advantage that the message is more easily visible from a distance.

In addition, there is a circumstance in which players during play tend to focus on the starting holes (13, 14) of the board member. The starting holes (13, 14) are located below the center of the board member. In other words, there is a circumstance in which players are more likely to focus on the area below the center of the board member. In the modified example of FIG. 25(b-2) described above, the message indicating that the second time-saving game state is activated is displayed below the center of the board member. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the message is displayed above the center of the board member, for example, the modified example of FIG. 25(b-2) has the advantage that it is easier for players to focus on the message.

<Special pattern advance judgment table>
26 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table for determining the result of a jackpot lottery in advance. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole 13 or the second start winning hole 14 (at the time of start winning), winning information is generated by the pre-determination table.

The above winning information is generated to pre-determine the result of the jackpot lottery. Specifically, the winning information is generated based on the type of special symbol display device (the type of start hole detection switch that detects that the game ball has entered the start hole), the type of special symbol, the game state, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special symbol variation. In addition, a start winning designation command that specifies the generated winning information is generated and transmitted to the performance control board 120. The start winning designation command indicating the above winning information allows the result of the pre-determination (miss, jackpot, small win), the type of special symbol, and the variation pattern (whether or not a reach has occurred) to be determined before the special symbol begins to vary. The winning information (start winning designation command) of this embodiment is referenced, for example, when determining the so-called pre-reading performance (hold change performance).

In the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 26, winning information including winning information a (1, 2), winning information b (1-4), winning information c (1-4), winning information d1, and winning information e1 is set as the winning information for the first special pattern display device 20. Also, winning information including winning information a (3, 4), winning information b (5-8), winning information c (5-8), winning information d (1, 2), winning information e (1, 2), winning information f, and winning information g is set as the winning information for the second special pattern display device 21.

For example, if the winning information A1 or winning information A3 is selected at the time of the start winning, in the game that starts with the start winning, a performance of approximately 40,000 ms is executed by the performance control board 120. In the above performance, a long win occurs after the normal reach performance is executed.

When winning information b1 or winning information b5 is selected at the time of the start winning, in the game that is started by the start winning, a performance of approximately 60,000 ms is executed by the performance control board 120. In the above performance, after the normal reach performance is executed, SP reach 1 is executed, resulting in a long win.

When winning information b2 or winning information b6 is selected at the time of the start winning, in the game that is started by the start winning, a performance of approximately 60,000 ms is executed by the performance control board 120. In the above performance, after the normal reach performance is executed, SP reach 2 is executed, resulting in a long win.

When winning information c1 or winning information c5 is selected at the time of the start winning, in the game that is started by the start winning, a performance of approximately 70,000 ms is executed by the performance control board 120. In the above performance, after the normal reach performance is executed, the SPSP reach performance 1 is executed via the SP reach performance or directly, resulting in a long win.

When winning information c2 or winning information c6 is selected at the time of the start winning, in the game that is started by the start winning, a performance of approximately 70,000 ms is executed by the performance control board 120. In the above performance, after executing the normal reach performance, the SPSP reach performance 2 is executed via the SP reach performance or directly, corresponding to the performance that results in a long win.

When winning information d1 or winning information d2 is selected at the time of the start winning, in the game that is started by the start winning, a small win or short win presentation of approximately 20,000 ms is executed by the presentation control board 120.

Of the winning information, winning information e1, winning information a2, winning information b3, winning information b4, winning information c3, winning information c4, winning information e2, winning information a4, winning information b7, winning information b8, winning information c7, winning information c8, and winning information f are determined when the jackpot lottery based on the initial winning that determined the winning information is a miss.

As shown in FIG. 26, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), winning information is not set when the game ball enters the first start hole 13. Specifically, in the time-saving game state, winning information is not set when the game ball enters the first start hole 13, regardless of the special pattern (combination of special pattern determination random number value and pattern random number value), reach determination random number value, and special pattern variation random number value in the first special pattern display device 20. Also, in the time-saving game state, a start winning designation command is not generated when the game ball enters the first start hole 13.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described.
<Main processing of the main control board>
27 is a flow chart for explaining the main processing by the main control board 110. When power is supplied from the power supply board 170, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 111, and the main CPU 111 performs the following main processing.

When the main processing starts, the main CPU 111 executes an initialization process (S10). In the initialization process, the main CPU 111 executes a startup program and initializes a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 113. For example, in the initialization process, a stack pointer is appropriately set. Note that in the initialization process, the various pieces of information for displaying the above-mentioned base values (such as the number of normal outs) are not initialized. In addition, in the initialization process, the game state (high probability flag, time-saving flag) and the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state are not initialized. In addition, the remaining number of times N until the time-saving game state is reached is not initialized in the initialization process.

After executing the initialization process, the main CPU 111 judges whether or not the clear button 30 has been operated (S20). If it is determined that the clear button 30 has not been operated (S20: No), the main CPU 111 advances the process to the game random number value update process (S60). On the other hand, if it is determined that the clear button 30 has been operated (S20: Yes), the main CPU 111 judges whether or not the setting key device 115 has been rotated to a specific position (S30). In other words, the main CPU 111 judges whether or not the setting change switch 115a is in the ON state. If it is determined that the setting key device 115 has been rotated (S30: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the setting change process (S40).

In the above configuration, if both the setting key device 115 and the clear button 30 are operated when the power is turned on, the setting change process is executed. That is, the above-mentioned setting change mode is started. In the setting change process, an operation to change the setting value (operation of the clear button 30) is accepted. In addition, when the setting change switch 115a changes to the OFF state, the setting value displayed by the base display 114 is stored in the main RAM 113 and the setting change process ends.

In the setting change process of this embodiment, various information in the main RAM 113 is initialized. For example, in the setting change process, the game state is initialized to a low-probability non-time-saving game state. Specifically, a high-probability flag and a time-saving flag are stored in the game state storage area of the main RAM 113. The high-probability flag is set to the ON state in a high-probability game state, and is set to the OFF state in a low-probability game state. In addition, the time-saving flag is set to the ON state in a time-saving game state, and is set to the OFF state in a non-time-saving game state. In the setting change process, the high-probability flag and the time-saving flag are initialized to the OFF state.

In addition, in the setting change process, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state is initialized to the value "0", and the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is activated is set to the initial value "800". In the above configuration, the remaining number of times until the second time-saving game state is activated is also said to be initialized in the setting change process. When the setting change process is completed, the main CPU 111 proceeds to the game random number value update process.

In the above-mentioned step S30, when it is determined that the setting key device 115 has not been rotated (S30: No), the main CPU 111 executes the clear operation process. In the clear operation process, the high probability flag and the time-saving flag are initialized to the OFF state, as in the above-mentioned setting change process. Also, in the clear operation process, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state is initialized to the numerical value "0", and the remaining number of times N is initialized to the numerical value "800". Note that in the setting change process and the clear operation process, the information for displaying the above-mentioned base values is not initialized. The information for displaying the base values is not initialized except when an error requiring a cold start (for example, a backup error) occurs.

In the above configuration, the area of the main RAM 113 that is initialized for the setting change process and the clear operation process may be the same or different. Also, a setting confirmation mode may be provided in which the setting value cannot be changed but the current setting value is displayed on the base display 114. For example, if the setting key device 115 is rotated to a specific position after moving to step S60, the configuration may be such that the mode moves to the setting confirmation mode.

When the clear operation process is executed, the main CPU 111 executes a game random number value update process (S60). In the game random number value update process described above, the random number value for special symbol variation and the random number value for reach determination are updated. The game random number value update process described above is executed repeatedly until a specified interrupt occurs.

<Timer interrupt processing on the main control board>
28 is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing by the main control board 110. A reset clock pulse generating circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 ms), thereby executing the timer interrupt processing described below.

When the above timer interrupt process is executed, in step S101, the main CPU 111 saves the information stored in the register to the stack area. After executing step S101, the main CPU 111 executes a time control process (S102). In the above time control process, the main CPU 111 updates various timer counters, such as updating the special symbol time counter, updating the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric role, updating the normal symbol time counter that specifies the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 22, and updating the normal power opening time counter that specifies the opening time of the second start hole 14. Specifically, the main CPU 111 subtracts 1 from the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the normal power opening time counter.

After executing the time control process, the main CPU 111 executes a random number update process (S103). In the random number update process, the main CPU 111 updates the random number values for special symbol determination, big win symbol, small win symbol, and win determination. Specifically, the main CPU 111 adds the value "1" to each random number counter that indicates each random number value.

After executing the random number update process, the main CPU 111 executes an initial random number counter update process (step S104). In this embodiment, when the random number value is incremented to the maximum value, the random number value is set to the value of the initial random number counter. In the initial random number counter update process, the main CPU 111 adds the value "1" to each of the initial random number value counter for special symbol determination, which indicates the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random number value counter for big hit symbols, which indicates the initial random number value for big hit symbols, and the initial random number value counter for small hit symbols, which indicates the initial random number value for small hit symbols.

After executing the initial random number counter update process, the main CPU 111 executes the input control process (S105). In the input control process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not there has been an input to each of the first start hole detection switch 13a, the second start hole detection switch 14a, the gate detection switch 15a, the special prize hole detection switch (16a, 17a), the general prize hole detection switch 18a, and the out ball detection switch 19a.

After executing the input control process, the main CPU 111 executes a special pattern special electricity control process (S106) to control the special pattern display device (20, 21) and the special electric role device (opening/closing door 16b, movable piece 17b). In addition, after executing the special pattern special electricity control process, the main CPU 111 executes a normal pattern normal electricity control process (S107). In the normal pattern normal electricity control process, the normal pattern display device 22 and the normal electric role device (opening/closing door 14b) are controlled.

After executing the normal drawing and normal power control process, the main CPU 111 executes the payout control process (S108). In the payout control process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning hole 16, the first start hole 13, the second start hole 14, or the general winning hole 18. In addition, when the main CPU 111 determines in the payout control process that a game ball has entered a winning hole, it sends a payout number designation command corresponding to that winning hole to the payout control board 130.

Specifically, it checks the general prize opening prize ball counter, the large prize opening prize ball counter, and the start opening prize ball counter, and sends a payout number designation command corresponding to each prize opening to the payout control board 130. It then updates the prize ball counter corresponding to the payout number designation command sent by subtracting a specified data from it.

After executing the payout control process, the main CPU 111 executes a data creation process (S109). In the data creation process, external information data (such as information indicating a jackpot) to be sent to the outside of the gaming machine 1, start port opening/closing solenoid data that defines the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 14b (second start port 14), large prize port opening/closing solenoid data that defines the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 16b and the movable piece 17b (large prize port), special pattern display device data that defines the display pattern of the first special pattern display device 20 and the second special pattern display device 21, and normal pattern display device data that defines the display pattern of the normal pattern display device 22 are created.

After executing the data creation process, the main CPU 111 executes an output control process (S110). In the output control process, the main CPU 111 outputs the various data (such as the start port opening and closing solenoid data) created in the above-mentioned step S109 via a port. The main CPU 111 also executes a command transmission process to transmit a command set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 113. In the above-mentioned performance transmission data storage area, for example, the above-mentioned start winning designation command is stored.

After executing the output control process, the main CPU 111 executes a counting process (S111). In the above counting process, the number of prize balls and the number of outs are counted to calculate the base value B of the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Specifically, when a game ball enters the general prize opening 18 in the low-probability non-time-saving game state (when a game ball is detected by the general prize opening detection switch 18a), the main CPU 111 adds the value "10" (the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize opening 18) to the prize ball counter for base calculation (the number of normal prize balls) in the counting process.

Similarly, in a low-probability non-time-saving game state, if a game ball enters the first start hole 13, the number "3" is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation; if a game ball enters the second start hole 14, the number "3" is added; if a game ball enters the first large prize hole 16, the number "15" is added; and if a game ball enters the second large prize hole 17, the number "15" is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation. On the other hand, in a state other than the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the prize ball counter for base calculation is not incremented.

When the out ball detection switch 19a detects a game ball, the main CPU 111 adds the value "1" to the out counter for base calculation (the normal number of outs) in the counting process for the low-probability non-time-saving game state. On the other hand, in states other than the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the out counter for base calculation is not incremented. Also, when the out ball detection switch 19a detects a game ball, the total out counter is added to the counting process regardless of the game state.

After executing the counting process, the main CPU 111 executes a base display process (S112). In the base display process, a base value is calculated from the number of normal winning balls and the number of normal outs counted in the above-mentioned counting process, and is displayed on the base display 114. After executing the base display process, the main CPU 111 restores the information saved in the above-mentioned step S101 to the register of the main CPU 111 (S113).

<Input control processing>
29 is a flow chart for explaining the input control process (S105 in FIG. 12 described above) by the main control board 110. When the input control process starts, the main CPU 111 executes the general winning opening detection switch input process (S121). In the general winning opening detection switch input process described above, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection switch 18a. In other words, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the general winning opening 18. When the main CPU 111 receives a detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 18a, it adds predetermined data to the general winning opening prize ball counter to update it.

After executing the general prize opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the special prize opening detection switch input process (S122). In the special prize opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal has been input from the special prize opening detection switch (16a, 17a). In other words, it determines whether a game ball has entered the special prize opening (16, 17). If the main CPU 111 receives a detection signal from the special prize opening detection switch, it adds a predetermined data to the special prize opening prize ball counter.

After executing the big win hole detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the first start hole detection switch input process (S123). In the first start hole detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 13a. In other words, it determines whether the game ball has entered the first start hole 13. When it is determined in the above first start hole detection switch input process that the game ball has entered the first start hole 13, predetermined data is set to determine whether a big win has occurred.

After executing the first start hole detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the second start hole detection switch input process. In the second start hole detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 14a. In other words, it determines whether the game ball has entered the second start hole 14. When it is determined in the above second start hole detection switch input process that the game ball has entered the second start hole 14, predetermined data is set to determine whether a jackpot has occurred, in the same way as when the game ball has entered the first start hole 13.

After executing the second start hole detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the gate detection switch input process. In the gate detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal from the gate detection switch 15a has been input. In other words, it determines whether the gaming ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 15. If it is determined in the above gate detection switch input process that the gaming ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 15, predetermined data for performing a normal symbol lottery is set.

<First start port detection switch input processing>
30 is a flow chart explaining the first start hole detection switch input process (S123 in FIG. 29 described above) by the main control board 110. When the first start hole detection switch input process is started, the main CPU 111 judges whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 13a (S131). If it is determined that a detection signal has not been input from the first start hole detection switch 13a (S131: No), the main CPU 111 ends the first start hole detection switch input process.

When it is determined that a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 13a (S131: Yes), the main CPU 111 updates the start hole prize ball counter (S132). Specifically, the main CPU 111 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the first start hole 13 (e.g., the number "3") to the start hole prize ball counter.

After updating the start hole prize ball counter, the main CPU 111 determines whether the reserved number set in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) memory area is less than four (S133). If the reserved number set in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) memory area is not less than four (S133: No), i.e., if the reserved number is four (U1=4), the main CPU 111 ends the first start hole detection switch input process.

If the number of reserved symbols set in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) memory area is less than four (S133: Yes), the main CPU 111 acquires various random number values. Specifically, the main CPU 111 acquires a random number value for determining a special symbol (S134), a random number value for a big win symbol (S135), a random number value for a small win symbol (S136), and a random number value for gameplay (a random number value for special symbol fluctuation and a random number value for reach determination) (S137).

The random number values acquired in steps S134 to S137 above are stored in the first special symbol memory area (first to fourth memory units). Specifically, the first special symbol memory area includes the first to fourth memory units. The main CPU 111 searches for an empty memory unit in the order of the first to fourth memory units, and stores the acquired random number values in the empty memory unit. After acquiring each random number value, the main CPU 111 adds the value "1" to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) memory area (S138).

After adding up the first special symbol reserved number (U1) memory area, the main CPU 111 executes a pre-determination process (S139). In the pre-determination process, the main CPU 111 determines each random number obtained in steps S134 to S137 based on the pre-determination table (see FIG. 26 above) corresponding to the current game state.

When it is determined in the above-mentioned second start hole detection switch input process that the game ball has entered the second start hole 14, the same processing as the first start hole detection switch input process is performed. However, in the above-mentioned first start hole detection switch input process, the first special symbol reserved number (U1) memory area is incremented, whereas in the second start hole detection switch input process, the second special symbol reserved number (U2) memory area is incremented. Also, in the second start hole detection switch input process, each acquired random number value is stored in the second special symbol memory area. That is, the first start hole detection switch input process and the second start hole detection switch input process differ only in the memory areas that are updated (special symbol reserved number memory area, special symbol memory area), and the other processing is basically the same. However, in the first start hole detection switch input process, the start winning designation command is not sent in the time-saving play state, while in the second start hole detection switch input process, the start winning designation command is sent even in the time-saving play state, which is also a difference between the two.

<Preliminary Judgment Processing>
Fig. 31 is a flow chart for explaining the pre-determination process by the main control board 110. The pre-determination process in Fig. 31 is executed in both the first start hole detection switch input process and the second start hole detection switch input process described above. That is, the above pre-determination process is executed both when the game ball enters the first start hole 13 and when the game ball enters the second start hole 14.

In the advance judgment process, the above-mentioned winning information (see FIG. 26) is generated, and a start winning designation command that specifies the winning information can be sent to the performance control board 120. In response to the start winning designation command, a look-ahead performance (e.g., a hold change performance) can be executed on the performance control board 120 side. However, as described above, when a game ball enters the first start hole 13 in the time-saving play state, the winning information is not determined. In the above configuration, the look-ahead performance when a game ball enters the first start hole 13 is essentially prohibited in the time-saving play state.

Specifically, when the pre-determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the pre-determination process was executed when the game ball entered the first start hole 13 (S151). If the main CPU 111 determines that the pre-determination process was executed when the game ball entered the first start hole 13 (S151: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current game state is in a time-saving game state (S152). If the main CPU 111 determines that the current game state is in a time-saving game state (S152: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the pre-determination process without generating winning information (omitting S161 described below). As described above, the pre-reading performance is executed based on the winning information. Therefore, according to the above embodiment, the pre-determination performance when the game ball enters the first start hole 13 is substantially prohibited in the time-saving game state.

When it is determined that the game is not in the time-saving game mode (S152: No), the main CPU 111 executes a tentative jackpot determination process (S153). In the tentative jackpot determination process, the main CPU 111 uses the random number value for special symbol determination written in the special symbol reservation memory area in response to the current start winning to tentatively determine whether a jackpot will be won, a small jackpot will be won, or a miss will be won in the jackpot determination process (S207 in FIG. 33 described below) for the game started by the start winning.

If the above-mentioned step S151 is judged as "No", that is, if the advance judgment process is executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 14, the main CPU 111 skips the above-mentioned step S152 and executes the process following the tentative jackpot judgment process (S153). In the above configuration, when the game ball enters the second start hole 14, regardless of whether the game is in a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state, winning information is generated (S161 described below is executed). In other words, when the game ball enters the second start hole 14, regardless of whether the game is in a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state, a pre-reading performance can be executed.

After executing the provisional jackpot determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a jackpot has been provisionally determined in the provisional jackpot determination process (S154). If a jackpot has been provisionally determined (step S154: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a provisional jackpot pattern determination process (S155). In the provisional jackpot pattern determination process, the random number value for the jackpot pattern obtained in response to the current start winning is used to provisionally determine the jackpot pattern (stop pattern data) that will be stopped in the game that is started by the start winning. After executing the provisional jackpot pattern determination process, the main CPU 111 proceeds to a provisional variation pattern determination process (S158).

On the other hand, if the provisional judgment process of the big win does not provisionally judge that the big win has been won (step S154: No), the main CPU 111 judges whether or not the small win has been provisionally judged to be won (S156). If the provisional judgment process of the small win has provisionally been judged that the small win has been won (S156: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the provisional judgment process of the small win pattern (S157). In the provisional judgment process of the small win pattern, the random number value for the small win pattern obtained in response to the current start winning is used to provisionally judge the small win pattern (stop pattern data) to be stopped in the game started by the start winning. After executing the provisional judgment process of the small win pattern, the main CPU 111 proceeds to the provisional judgment process of the variation pattern (S159). If the result of step S156 is "No," that is, if the process for determining whether or not a jackpot is provisionally determined to be a miss, the main CPU 111 does not execute the provisional symbol determination process (S155, S157 described above) and proceeds to the provisional variation pattern determination process S158.

In the tentative fluctuation pattern determination process (S158), the main CPU 111 tentatively determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol using the game state, the result of the tentative jackpot determination process, the result of the tentative jackpot symbol determination process, the result of the tentative small jackpot symbol determination process, the special symbol fluctuation random number value acquired in response to this start winning, and the reach determination random number value. After that, the main CPU 111 generates winning information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern tentatively determined in the fluctuation pattern tentative determination process (S159). In addition, the main CPU 111 sets a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning information in the performance transmission data storage area (S160) and ends the preliminary determination process.

By the above-mentioned advance judgment process, when the game ball enters the first start hole 13 or the second start hole 14, winning information can be sent to the performance control board 120 as a start winning designation command. Therefore, the sub-CPU 121 of the performance control board 120 that receives the start winning designation command can analyze the start winning designation command and execute a predetermined performance (pre-reading performance) in advance before the special pattern starts to change due to the current start winning.

However, this pre-determination process is based on the game state at the time when the game ball enters each starting hole 13, 14. Therefore, if the game state changes before the first or second reservation reserved by the ball entering is processed, the result of the jackpot determination process described below may differ from the result of the pre-determination process.

<Special chart special signal control processing>
32 is a flowchart explaining the special picture special power control process (S106 in FIG. 12 described above) by the main control board 110. When the special picture special power control process is started, the main CPU 111 loads the current value of the special picture special power processing data (0 to 5) (S181) and refers to the branch address from the loaded special picture special power processing data (S182).

For example, if the special symbol special electric processing data is "0", the main CPU 111 executes a special symbol memory determination process (step S183). As will be described in detail later, in the special symbol memory determination process, the reserved number (U1, U2) is subtracted, the special symbol to be displayed on the special symbol display device and the variable time of the special symbol display device are set, and the variable display of the special symbol display device is started. When the variable display of the special symbol display device is started, the special symbol special electric processing data is set to "1".

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "1", the main CPU 111 executes a special symbol change process (S184). In the special symbol change process, when the change time of the special symbol set in the immediately preceding special symbol memory determination process has elapsed, the special symbol set in the special symbol memory determination process is displayed in a stopped state on the special symbol display device (20, 21). In addition, when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the special symbol special electric processing data is set to "2".

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "2", the main CPU 111 executes the special symbol stop processing (S185). In the special symbol stop processing, the main CPU 111 stops the special symbol displayed in the special symbol variation processing described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). After that, if the stopped special symbol is a big win symbol, the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "3" and sets the opening command and opening time for a big win. Similarly, if the stopped special symbol is a small win symbol, the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "4" and sets the opening command and opening time for a small win. Also, if the stopped special symbol is a losing symbol, the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0".

When the special symbol special signal processing data is "3", that is, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the main CPU 111 executes the jackpot game process (step S186). In the jackpot game process, after the jackpot opening (hereinafter referred to as the "opening period") ends, the jackpot opening 16 is opened according to the jackpot opening opening solenoid data (opening pattern of the jackpot opening 16). In other words, the above-mentioned round starts after the opening period. The jackpot opening opening solenoid data used in the jackpot game is selected according to the jackpot symbol.

After all rounds have ended, ending control (wait control) is executed for a predetermined period of time. In this embodiment, the period during which ending control is executed may be referred to as the "ending period." Also, the period from the end of the opening period to the start of the ending period may be referred to as the "round period" (a period including multiple rounds and intervals). When the ending period ends, the special chart special signal processing data is set to "5."

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "4", that is, when the small win symbol is stopped and displayed in the previous special symbol stop processing, the main CPU 111 executes the small win game processing (step S187). In the small win game processing, the opening control for the small win is executed, and then the large prize opening 16 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, "1.8 seconds") according to the large prize opening opening opening solenoid data for the small win. After that, the ending control is executed for a predetermined period of time, and the special symbol special electric processing data is set to "0". After executing the small win game processing, the main CPU 111 proceeds to the transition determination processing (S225). In the transition determination processing, it is determined whether the start condition of the second time-saving game state is met, and whether the end condition of the time-saving game state is met.

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "5", the main CPU 111 executes the special game end process (S188). In the special game end process, the main CPU 111 sets the game state after the jackpot game to a high probability time-saving game state or a low probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) according to the special symbol stopped and displayed in the immediately preceding special symbol change process and the game state. Specifically, when the game state transitions to the first time-saving game state after the jackpot ends, the first time-saving flag is changed to the ON state. Also, when the game state transitions to the first time-saving game state after the jackpot ends, the initial value "100" or "799" is set to the remaining number M of the first time-saving game state according to the jackpot symbol. After setting the game state after the jackpot game, the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0". Also, when the game state transitions to the high probability game state (high probability time-saving game state), the high probability flag is changed to the ON state.

<Special symbol memory determination process>
33 is a flow chart explaining the special symbol memory judgment process (S183 in FIG. 32 above) by the main control board 110. When the special symbol memory judgment process starts, the main CPU 111 judges whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S201). If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol time counter ≠ 0) (S201: Yes), the special symbol memory judgment process ends. On the other hand, if the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S201: No), the main CPU 111 judges whether the second special symbol reserved number (U2) memory area is 1 or more (S202).

If the second special symbol reserved number (U2) memory area is not 1 or more (S202: No), the main CPU 111 proceeds to step S204. If the second special symbol reserved number (U2) memory area is 1 or more (S202: Yes), the main CPU 111 proceeds to step S203. In the above configuration, the second special symbol memory area is processed with priority over the first special symbol memory area. In step S203, the main CPU 111 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) memory area.

In step S204, the main CPU 111 determines whether the first special symbol reserved number (U1) memory area is equal to or greater than "1". If the first special symbol reserved number (U1) memory area is not equal to or greater than "1" (S204: No), the process proceeds to step S215. If the first special symbol reserved number (U1) memory area is equal to or greater than "1" (S204: Yes), the process proceeds to step S205.

In step S205, the main CPU 111 subtracts "1" from the value of the first special symbol reserved number (U1) memory area. After that, in step S206, the main CPU 111 shifts the random number values (combination of special symbol determination random number values, big win symbol random number values, small win symbol random number values, reach determination random number values, and special symbol fluctuation random number values) stored in the special symbol reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol reserved number (U) memory area subtracted in steps S202 to S205 and the start winning designation command. Specifically, the predetermined random number values and the start winning designation command stored in the first memory section to the fourth memory section in the first special symbol memory area or the second special symbol memory area are shifted to the previous memory section.

For example, the random number value and start winning designation command stored in the first memory unit are shifted to the judgment memory area (0th memory unit). In addition, the predetermined random number value and start winning designation command stored in the first memory unit are written to the judgment memory area (0th memory unit), and the data written to the judgment memory area (0th memory unit) is erased from the special pattern reserved memory area. In other words, the random number value and start winning designation command used in the previous game are erased. In addition, the MODE of the start winning designation command is processed so that it corresponds to the memory area after the shift.

After subtracting the reserved number, the main CPU 111 executes the jackpot determination process (S207). In the jackpot determination process, the main CPU 111 executes the jackpot determination process based on the data (random number value for special symbol determination, random number value for jackpot symbol, random number value for small jackpot symbol) written in the determination memory area (0th memory section) of the special symbol reserved memory area in the above-mentioned step S206.

If a jackpot is won in the jackpot determination process described above, the jackpot pattern to be stopped and displayed on the special pattern display devices 20 and 21 is determined. If a small jackpot is won, a small jackpot special pattern is determined, and if a miss is won, a miss special pattern is determined.

After executing the jackpot determination process, the main CPU 111 executes a variation pattern determination process (S208). In the variation pattern determination process, a variation pattern determination table based on the current game state is used to determine the variation pattern. Specifically, the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern determination table according to the random number value for special symbol determination, the random number value for jackpot symbol, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special symbol variation.

After executing the fluctuation pattern determination process, the main CPU 111 sets a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area (S209). The main CPU 111 also checks the game state at the start of the fluctuation, and sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area (S210).

After setting the game state designation command, the main CPU 111 starts the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (S211). Specifically, if the first reservation (U1) is subtracted in the current special symbol memory determination process, the variable display starts on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the second reservation (U2) is subtracted in the current special symbol memory determination process, the variable display starts on the second special symbol display device 21. After starting the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display device, the main CPU 111 sets the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in step S208 in the special symbol time counter (S212).

After setting the variable time, the main CPU 111 sets the customer waiting judgment flag to "00H" (S213). In other words, it clears the customer waiting judgment flag. The above customer waiting judgment flag is "00H" during the variable display of the special symbol and during special play. On the other hand, in other cases (non-play periods), the customer waiting judgment flag is "01H". When the customer waiting judgment flag is "01H", the customer waiting command notifies the performance control board 120 that it is a non-play period. After clearing the customer waiting judgment flag, the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1" (S214) and ends the special symbol memory judgment process.

If it is determined in step S204 above that the first reservation (U1) is "0", i.e., neither the first reservation (U1) nor the second reservation (U2) is stored, the main CPU 111 determines whether the customer waiting determination flag is set to "01H" (S215).

If the customer waiting determination flag is set to 01H (S215: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the special symbol memory determination process. On the other hand, if the customer waiting determination flag is not set to "01H" (S215: No), the main CPU 111 moves the process to step S216. In step S216, the main CPU 111 sets the customer waiting determination flag to 01H so that the customer waiting command is not set multiple times in step S217, which will be described later. In step S217, the main CPU 111 sets the customer waiting command in the performance transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol memory determination process.

<Special symbol memory determination process>
34A is a flowchart for explaining the special symbol stop processing (S185 in FIG. 32 described above) by the main control board 110. The special symbol stop processing described above is executed immediately after the variable display of the special symbol stops.

When the special symbol stop processing starts, the main CPU 111 sets a symbol determination command in the performance transmission data storage area (S220). After setting the symbol determination command, the main CPU 111 determines whether the determination period has elapsed (S221). The above determination period is set so that the player can recognize that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed in the current game. The determination period is, for example, about 0.5 seconds. Until the above determination period ends, the variable display of the special symbol in the next game is prohibited. Specifically, step S221 is repeatedly executed until the determination period ends (S221: No), and when the determination period ends (S221: Yes), it becomes possible to move to the subsequent step.

When the determination period ends, the main CPU 111 sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area (S222). After setting the game state designation command, the main CPU 111 judges whether the special symbol that stopped in this game is a big win symbol or a small win symbol (hereinafter, may be collectively referred to as a "winning symbol") (S223). If the main CPU 111 judges that it is a winning symbol (S223: Yes), it executes a winning preparation process (S224) and ends the process when the special symbol stops. On the other hand, if it judges that it is not a winning symbol (S223: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a transition judgment process (S225) and ends the process when the special symbol stops.

Figure 34 (b) is a flowchart of the winning preparation process. When the winning preparation process starts, the main CPU 111 judges whether the special symbol that has stopped in the current game is a big win symbol (S230). If it is judged to be a big win symbol (S230: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "3" (big win game processing) (S231). In addition, the main CPU 111 executes a big win initialization process (S233). On the other hand, if it is judged not to be a big win symbol in step S230 (S230: No), the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "4" (small win game processing) (S232).

In the jackpot initialization process, various information is initialized. For example, in the jackpot initialization process, the high probability flag that is ON in the high probability game state is changed to OFF, and a transition to a low probability game state occurs. In addition, the time-saving flag that is ON in the time-saving game state is changed to OFF, and the remaining number M, which indicates the number of remaining plays in the time-saving game state, is initialized to the number "0", and a transition to a non-time-saving game state occurs.

In the jackpot initialization process, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is entered is initialized. In this embodiment, the remaining number of times N is not initialized in principle except when the above-mentioned process is performed when the clear button is operated or when a jackpot game is started. For example, when the remaining number of times N reaches the number of times n (the number "0"), the game moves to the second time-saving game state, but the remaining number of times N is not initialized. In the above configuration, the number of times that the game can move to the second time-saving game state during the period from the current jackpot game to the next jackpot game is one.

After executing the jackpot initialization process, the main CPU 111 executes the jackpot start preparation process (S234). In the jackpot start preparation process, for example, the opening pattern of the large prize winning hole (16, 17) in the jackpot game is determined according to the special symbol (type of jackpot). In addition, the opening pattern of the large prize winning hole (16, 17) in the small prize game is set. After that, the main CPU 111 sets an opening designation command according to the type of win (first special long win, first special short win, first normal long win, second special long win, small win) in the performance transmission data storage area (S235), sets the opening time according to the type of win (S236), and ends the jackpot preparation process.

Figure 35 (a) is a flowchart of the transition judgment process. When the transition judgment process is started, the main CPU 111 judges whether the remaining number of times N is the value "0" or not (S240). If it is judged that the remaining number of times N is the value "0" (S240: Yes), that is, in the second time-saving game state or in the activated period, the main CPU 111 executes the time-saving end judgment process (S245) and then ends the transition judgment process. On the other hand, if it is judged that the remaining number of times N is not the value "0" (S240: No), the main CPU 111 judges whether or not it is in a low-probability game state (S241). Note that in the above-mentioned step S240, in a game in a high-probability time-saving game state, a first time-saving game state, or a low-probability non-time-saving game state other than the activated period, the above-mentioned step S240 is judged as "No".

If it is determined that the game is not in a low probability game state (S241: No), the main CPU 111 sets the special pattern special power processing data to "0" (S246) and ends the transition determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in a low probability game state (S241: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the value "1" from the remaining number of times N (S242). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether the remaining number of times N subtracted in step S242 is the value "0" (S243). If it is determined that the remaining number of times N after subtraction is not the value "0" (S243: No), the main CPU 111 executes the time-saving end determination process, sets the special pattern special power processing data to "0", and ends the transition determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of times N after subtraction is the value "0" (S243: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the second time-saving transition process (S244), sets the special pattern special power processing data to "0", and ends the transition determination process. In the second time-saving transition process, the remaining number M of times in the time-saving game state is set to the value "1000", the second time-saving flag is set to the ON state, and the second time-saving game state is started. In the second time-saving transition process, the fluctuation pattern determination table T is set according to the type of table scenario Sb that has been set. However, in the period when no scenario has been set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is set.

In this embodiment, in the period after the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the value "0", the above-mentioned step S240 is judged to be "Yes", and step S242 of subtracting the remaining number of times N is not executed. In the above configuration, the subtraction of the remaining number of times N stops at the value "0". However, instead of the above configuration, the subtraction of the remaining number of times N may be continued in the period after the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the value "0". The transition determination process of the modified example adopting the above configuration is shown in FIG. 35 (c). The transition determination process of this modified example is the transition determination process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 35 (a)) with step S240 omitted. In the above modified example, step S242 is executed even in the period after the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the value "0", and the remaining number of times N may be subtracted to a negative number. In the modified example, if the remaining number of times N is equal to or greater than the value "1," or if the remaining number of times N is equal to or less than the value "-1," step S243 returns "No," and the second time-saving transition process is not executed.

Figure 35 (b) is a flowchart for explaining the time-saving end determination process. When the main CPU 111 starts the time-saving end determination process, it determines whether the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state is the numerical value "0" (S250). The remaining number of times M is stored in the main RAM 113, and indicates the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state. That is, in this embodiment, the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state and the remaining number of times in the second time-saving game state are stored as common data. The above configuration has the advantage of reducing the amount of data compared to a configuration in which the remaining number of times in each time-saving game state is stored as separate data.

When the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times M is the number "0" (S250: Yes), it ends the time-saving end determination process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times M is not the number "0" (S250: No), it subtracts the number "1" from the remaining number of times M (S251). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether the remaining number of times M after the subtraction is the number "0" (S252). When the remaining number of times M after the subtraction is not the number "0" (S252: No), the main CPU 111 ends the time-saving end determination process. On the other hand, when the remaining number of times M after the subtraction is the number "0" (S252: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the time-saving end determination process after entrusting the execution of the time-saving end process (S253). In the time-saving end process, for example, the time-saving flag is changed to the OFF state, and the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state or second time-saving game state) ends. In the second time-saving transition process, the fluctuation pattern determination table T is set according to the type of table scenario Sb that has been set. However, in a period in which no scenario has been set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is set.

Figure 36 (a) is a flowchart of the GPIB control process. When the GPIB control process starts, the main CPU 111 loads the current value of the GPIB processing data (0 to 3) (S401) and references the branch address from the loaded GPIB processing data (S402).

For example, if the normal symbol/normal power processing data is "0", the main CPU 111 executes a normal symbol memory determination process (step S403). In the normal symbol memory determination process, a normal symbol lottery (win determination process) is executed with a probability according to whether the game is in a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state. In addition, the normal symbol to be displayed as stopped is determined according to the result of the normal symbol lottery. Furthermore, the normal symbol fluctuation time and the operation mode of the opening/closing door 14b (second starting port 14) are determined by lottery according to the current game state (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state). When the main CPU 111 executes a normal symbol lottery, it changes the normal symbol/normal power processing data to "1" when it ends the normal symbol memory determination process.

When the normal symbol/normal power processing data is "1", the main CPU 111 executes normal symbol variation processing (S404). In the normal symbol variation processing, the normal symbol is displayed in a varying time determined in the normal symbol memory determination processing. When the main CPU 111 ends the normal symbol variation processing, it changes the normal symbol/normal power processing data to "2".

When the normal symbol/normal power processing data is "2", the main CPU 111 executes the normal symbol stop process (S405). In the normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol memory determination process is displayed stationary for at least a predetermined wait period (e.g., about 0.5 seconds). When the main CPU 111 ends the normal symbol stop process, it changes the normal symbol/normal power processing data to "3".

When the normal map/normal power processing data is "3", the main CPU 111 executes the opening/closing control process (S405). In the opening/closing control process, when the open pattern is stopped and displayed in the normal pattern stop process, the opening/closing door 14b is opened and closed in the operation mode determined in the normal pattern memory determination process. When the main CPU 111 ends the opening/closing control process, it changes the normal map/normal power processing data to "0".

Figure 36 (b) is a flowchart of the normal symbol memory determination process. The normal symbol memory determination process is executed in the normal symbol normal power control process described above.

When the main CPU 111 starts the normal symbol memory determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether the normal symbol reservation number G (the number of reserved normal symbol lotteries) is equal to or greater than the value "1" (S410). If the main CPU 111 determines that the normal symbol reservation number G is not equal to or greater than the value "1" (G=0) (S410: No), the main CPU 111 ends the normal symbol memory determination process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 111 determines that the normal symbol reservation number G is equal to or greater than the value "1" (S410: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the value "1" from the normal symbol reservation number G (S411) and shifts the memory area (S412).

Specifically, when the game ball passes through the above-mentioned normal symbol gate 15, a random number value for hit determination is obtained and stored in the normal symbol reserved memory area. The normal symbol reserved memory area includes memory units from the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit. When the main CPU 111 obtains the random number value for hit determination, it stores the random number value for hit determination in the free memory units, preferentially from the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit. In the above-mentioned step S412, the random number value for hit determination stored in the first memory unit is stored (shifted) in the judgment memory area (0th memory unit) of the normal symbol reserved memory area. In addition, the random number values for hit determination stored in the second memory unit to the fourth memory unit are stored in the first memory unit to the third memory unit.

When the random number value for hit determination is stored in the determination memory area, the main CPU 111 determines the random number value for hit determination according to the game state (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state) (S413). Specifically, the main CPU 111 determines whether the random number value for hit determination matches a value specified in the hit determination table (see FIG. 6(b)) described above. After that, the main CPU 111 determines the normal symbol to be displayed using the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 7(b-1) and FIG. 7(b-2)) described above according to the game state (S414).

The main CPU 111 also determines the variable time by lottery depending on the game state (S415), and determines by lottery the operation mode of the opening and closing door 14b depending on the normal symbol and the game state determined in step S414 (S416). In the operating state, the opening and closing door 14b operates (opens and closes) in the operation mode determined in S416. After determining the operation mode of the opening and closing door 14b, the main CPU 111 changes the normal symbol and normal power processing data to "1" (S417), and ends the normal symbol memory determination process.

Next, we will explain the processing executed by the sub-CPU 121 of the performance control board 120. As described above, when the performance control board 120 receives a variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110, it determines by lottery and executes the performance that corresponds to the variation pattern designation command.

<Main processing of the performance control board>
37A is a flow chart for explaining the main processing by the performance control board. In step S510, the sub-CPU 121 performs an initialization process. In the initialization process, the sub-CPU 121 reads a program for executing the main processing from the sub-ROM 122 and initializes the sub-RAM 123.

After executing the initialization process, the sub-CPU 121 executes a recovery notification process (S520). In the recovery notification process, a process is executed to notify whether or not the second time-saving game state has already been activated. After executing the recovery notification process, the sub-CPU 121 executes a random number value update process for performance (S530). In the random number value update process for performance, the sub-CPU 121 updates various random number values stored in the sub-RAM 123. The random number value update process for performance is executed repeatedly until the interrupt process is executed.

Figure 37 (b) is a flowchart of the recovery time notification process. When the recovery time notification process is started, the sub-CPU 121 judges whether the game state at the end of the display of the power recovery screen is a high probability game state or a jackpot game (S521). If it is judged to be a high probability game state or a jackpot game (S521: Yes), the sub-CPU 121 decides to control the performance lamp 33 to a normal state (a state corresponding to the game state) (S524) and ends the recovery time notification process. On the other hand, if it is judged not to be a high probability game state or a jackpot game (S521: No), the sub-CPU 121 judges whether the remaining number M at the end of the display of the power recovery screen is the number "0" (S522). If it is judged that the remaining number M is not the number "0" (S522: No), the sub-CPU 121 decides to control the performance lamp 33 to a normal state (S525) and ends the recovery time notification process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of times M is the value "0" (S522: Yes), the sub-CPU 121 determines whether the remaining number of times N at the time when the display of the recovery screen ends is the value "0" (S523).

If the sub-CPU 121 determines that the remaining number N at the end of the display of the recovery screen is not the number "0" (S523: No), it decides to display the number "0" on the number of plays image GE (S524), decides to control the performance lamp 33 to the normal mode, and ends the recovery notification process. On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 121 determines in the above-mentioned step S523 that the remaining number N at the end of the display of the recovery screen is the number "0" (S523: Yes), it decides to display the symbol "???" on the number of plays image GE (S526), decides to control the performance lamp 33 to the warning mode (S527), and ends the recovery notification process.

<Timer interrupt processing of the performance control board>
38 is a flowchart for explaining the timer interrupt process. The sub CPU 121 executes the timer interrupt process approximately every 2 milliseconds. When the timer interrupt process starts, the sub CPU 121 saves information stored in the registers in the stack area (S601).

After saving various pieces of information to the stack area, the sub-CPU 121 updates various timer counters used in the performance control board 120 (S602). After updating the timer counters, the sub-CPU 121 executes a command analysis process (S603). In the command analysis process, the sub-CPU 121 analyzes the commands in the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 123.

After executing the command analysis process, the sub-CPU 121 executes a performance input control process (S604). This will be described in detail later, but in the performance input control process, control is executed in response to the operation of the performance button 8. After executing the performance input control process, the sub-CPU 121 executes a data output process (S605) to transmit various data set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123 to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. In step S606, the sub-CPU 121 restores the information saved in step S601 to the register of the sub-CPU 121.

<Command analysis process>
39 and 40 are flow charts for explaining the command analysis process (S603 in FIG. 38). As shown in FIG. 39, when the command analysis process starts, the sub-CPU 121 judges whether a command has been received (S611). If there is no command in the receive buffer (No in step S611), the sub-CPU 121 ends the command analysis process, and if there is a command in the receive buffer (Yes in step S611), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S621.

In step S621, the sub-CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting command (Yes in step S621), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S622, and if the command is not a customer waiting command (No in step S621), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S631.

In step S622, the sub-CPU 121 performs a customer waiting presentation pattern determination process to determine a customer waiting presentation pattern. Specifically, the sub-CPU 121 determines a customer waiting presentation pattern, sets the determined customer waiting presentation pattern in the presentation pattern storage area, and sets data based on the determined customer waiting presentation pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123 in order to transmit information on the determined customer waiting presentation pattern to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

In step S631, the sub-CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the receive buffer is a start-up winning designation command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is a start-up winning designation command (Yes in step S631), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S632. If the command is not a start-up winning designation command (No in step S631), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S641.

In step S632, the sub-CPU 121 analyzes the received start winning designation command and executes a reserved memory process corresponding to the start winning designation command. The start winning designation command is associated with information related to a big win, a small win, a miss, and a fluctuation pattern provisionally determined by the preliminary determination process. In the reserved memory process, information (winning information) about the newly reserved first reserve (U1) or second reserve (U2) is stored in a specified memory area of the sub-RAM 123.

In step S633, the sub-CPU 121 executes a hold change performance determination process. In the hold change performance determination process, the sub-CPU 121 determines whether to execute a hold change performance described below in accordance with the start winning designation command (winning information). The hold change performance is a so-called pre-reading performance, in which the hold image GB described below (see FIG. 29(a)) is displayed in one of multiple types of special modes (blue, red, gold, rainbow). Specifically, in the hold change performance, the mode of the hold image GB may change stepwise to the final special mode (for example, changing from blue to red). When the sub-CPU 121 determines to execute a hold change performance, it determines in advance the final special mode and the time (scenario) at which the mode of the hold image GB will change.

In step S641, the sub-CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the receive buffer is a variation pattern designation command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is a variation pattern designation command (Yes in step S641), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S642, and if the command is not a variation pattern designation command (No in step S641), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S651.

In step S642, the sub-CPU 121 performs a variable presentation pattern determination process to determine one variable presentation pattern from among multiple variable presentation patterns based on the received variable presentation pattern designation command.

In step S643, the sub-CPU 121 shifts the pending display data stored in the first pending memory area and the second pending memory area and the data corresponding to the start winning designation command, and performs pending display mode update processing to transmit the information of the pending display data after shifting to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

In step S651, the sub-CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a performance pattern designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a performance pattern designation command (Yes in step S651), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S652, and if the command is not a performance pattern designation command (No in step S651), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S661.

In step S652, the sub-CPU 121 performs a pattern determination process to determine the pattern GA to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 31 based on the content of the received pattern designation command. Specifically, the sub-CPU 121 analyzes the pattern designation command, determines the pattern data that constitutes the combination of pattern GA depending on the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot, and sets the pattern command based on the determined pattern data in the pattern storage area.

In step S661, the sub-CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a pattern determination command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a pattern determination command (Yes in step S661), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S662, and if the command is not a pattern determination command (No in step S661), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S671. In step S662, the sub-CPU 121 performs a performance pattern stop process that sets a pattern stop command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123 to stop and display the provisionally stopped performance pattern GA.

In step S671, the sub-CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal map fluctuation pattern designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal map fluctuation pattern designation command (Yes in step S671), the sub-CPU 121 transfers processing to step S672, and if the command is not a normal map fluctuation pattern designation command (No in step S671), the sub-CPU 121 transfers processing to step S681 in FIG. 40. In step S672, the sub-CPU 121 performs a normal map fluctuation presentation pattern determination process to determine one normal map fluctuation presentation pattern from multiple normal map fluctuation presentation patterns based on the received normal map fluctuation pattern designation command.

As shown in FIG. 40, in step S681, the sub-CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the receiving buffer is a long-open start command. If the command stored in the receiving buffer is a long-open start command (Yes in step S681), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S682. If the command stored in the receiving buffer is not a long-open start command (No in step S681), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S700. In step S682, the sub-CPU 121 performs a long-open performance process. Here, a notification performance is executed to notify the player that the second start port 14 will be open for a long time (4.2 seconds) in the non-time-shortened play state.

In step S691, the sub-CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol determination command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol determination command (Yes in step S691), the sub-CPU 121 moves the process to step S692, and if the command is not a normal symbol determination command (No in step S691), the sub-CPU 121 moves the process to step S700. In step S692, the sub-CPU 121 performs a normal symbol variation stop process in which the performance pattern data corresponding to the received normal symbol determination command and a pattern stop command for stopping the normal symbol performance pattern are set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123 in order to stop the normal symbol performance pattern.

In step S700, the sub-CPU 121 determines whether the command stored in the receive buffer is a game state designation command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is a game state designation command (Yes in step S700), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S701. If the command is not a game state designation command (No in step S700), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S711.

In step S701, the sub-CPU 121 executes a game state setting process to set the game state based on the received game state designation command in the game state memory area in the sub-RAM 123. In step S711, the sub-CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the receive buffer is an opening command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is an opening command (Yes in step S711), the sub-CPU 121 transfers the process to step S712, and if it is not an opening command (No in step S711), the sub-CPU 121 transfers the process to step S721.

In step S712, the sub-CPU 121 performs a winning start performance pattern determination process to determine a winning start performance pattern. Specifically, the winning start performance pattern is determined based on the opening command, and the determined winning start performance pattern is set in the performance pattern storage area. At the same time, data based on the determined winning start performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123 in order to transmit information on the determined winning start performance pattern to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

In step S721, the sub-CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a command to open the large prize opening, which indicates the start of a round of play when a large prize is won. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a command to open the large prize opening (Yes in step S721), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S722. If the command is not a command to open the large prize opening (No in step S721), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S731.

In step S722, the sub-CPU 121 performs a mid-round performance pattern determination process to determine the jackpot performance pattern. Specifically, the sub-CPU 121 determines the mid-round performance pattern for each starting round based on the jackpot opening designation command, which contains information about which round of play will start. The determined mid-round performance pattern is then set in the performance pattern storage area, and corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123 to transmit information about the performance pattern to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

In step S731, the sub-CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the receive buffer is a round end command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is a round end command (Yes in step S731), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S732. If the command is not a round end command (No in step S731), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S741. In step S732, the sub-CPU 121 performs pause effect pattern determination processing to determine the effect pattern between each round.

In step S741, the sub-CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the receive buffer is an ending command. If the command stored in the receive buffer is an ending command (Yes in step S741), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S742. If the command is not an ending command (No in step S741), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S751.

In step S742, the sub-CPU 121 performs a winning end presentation pattern determination process to determine a winning end presentation pattern. Specifically, the winning end presentation pattern is determined based on the ending command, and the determined winning end presentation pattern is set in the presentation pattern storage area. At the same time, data based on the determined winning end presentation pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123 in order to transmit information on the determined winning end presentation pattern to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

In step S751, the sub-CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a special prize entry ball command. The special prize entry ball command is sent from the main control board 110 when a game ball enters the special prize entry ball. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a special prize entry ball command (Yes in step S751), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to step S752, and if it is not a special prize entry ball command (No in step S751), the sub-CPU 121 ends the command analysis process. In step S752, the sub-CPU 121 executes a special prize entry ball command transmission process to transmit the special prize entry ball command to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. In the special prize entry ball command transmission process, the special prize entry ball command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123.

<Performance input control process>
41 is a flow chart for explaining the effect input control process by the effect control board. First, in step S831, the sub-CPU 121 judges whether or not there is a valid effect button detection signal from the effect button detection switch 8a based on the effect button detection command from the lamp control board 140. Here, if the sub-CPU 121 judges that there is no effect button detection signal (No in step S831), it ends the process, and if it judges that there is a effect button detection signal (Yes in step S831), it proceeds to the process of step S832.

In step S832, the sub-CPU 121 determines whether or not the button operation performance executable flag = 01 is set in the memory area of the sub-RAM 123. Here, if the button operation performance executable flag = 01 is not set (No in step S832), the sub-CPU 121 ends the processing, and if the button operation performance executable flag = 01 is set (Yes in step S832), the sub-CPU 121 proceeds to the processing of step S833.

The button operation effect execution possible flag is used to determine whether or not a state is available in which an effect corresponding to a button operation can be executed based on that button operation. If the flag is "01", it means that an effect corresponding to that operation can be executed, and if the flag is "00", it means that an effect corresponding to that operation cannot be executed. The flag "01" is set when the effective operation period of the effect button 8 begins, and the flag "00" is set when the effect button 8 is operated or when the effective operation period ends without the effect button 8 being operated.

In step S833, the sub-CPU 121 sets a button operation performance execution command in the transmission buffer. This command is a command for causing the image control board 150 to execute a performance corresponding to the operation of the performance button 8. Here, the sub-CPU 121 transmits the command set in the transmission buffer in step S605 (see FIG. 22) after the performance input control process to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. The image control board 150 operates the image display device 31 and the audio output device 34 based on the received command, and the lamp control board 140 operates the performance movable body 32 and the performance lamp 33 based on the received command.

Next, the image control board 150 will be described. When the image control board 150 receives a command for performance from the performance control board 120, the host CPU 151 reads out an audio output device control program from the host ROM 153 based on the received command for performance and controls the output of audio in the audio output device 34, and the host CPU 151 reads out an animation control program from the host ROM 153 and controls the image display on the image display device 31.

Here, we will explain the processing executed by the host CPU 151 in the image control board 150.

<Host CPU main processing>
42 is a flow chart explaining the main processing by the image control board. When power is supplied from the power supply board 170, a system reset occurs in the host CPU 151, and the host CPU 151 performs the following main processing. First, in step S901, the host CPU 151 performs an initialization process. In this process, in response to power-on, the host CPU 151 reads a main processing program from the host ROM 153 and instructs the initial settings of various modules of the host CPU 151 and the VDP 200.

In step S902, the host CPU 151 performs a performance pattern designation command analysis process to analyze the performance pattern designation command (the command stored in the reception buffer of the host RAM 152) sent from the performance control board 120. When the image control board 150 receives a command sent from the performance control board 120, a command reception interrupt process of the image control board 150 (not shown) occurs, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer.

The performance pattern designation command analysis process checks whether a performance pattern designation command (plus a performance control command) is stored in the receive buffer. If a performance pattern designation command is not stored in the receive buffer, the process proceeds directly to step S903. If a performance pattern designation command (plus a performance control command) is stored in the receive buffer, a new performance pattern designation command is read, and one or more animation groups to be executed are determined based on the read performance pattern designation command, and an animation pattern is determined from each animation group. Then, once the animation pattern is determined, the read performance pattern designation command is erased from the transmit buffer.

In step S903, the host CPU 151 performs animation control processing. In this processing, the addresses of various animation scenes are updated based on the "scene switch counter," "wait frame," and "frame counter" that are updated in step S921 described below, and the animation pattern determined in step S902 above.

In step S904, the host CPU 151 generates a display list from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address, in accordance with the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. Then, when generation of the display list is completed, the host CPU 151 outputs the display list to the VDP 200. The display list output here is stored in the display list storage area 156a of the VRAM 156 via the CPU I/F 203 in the VDP 200.

In step S905, the host CPU 151 determines whether the FB switching flag is 01 or not. Here, as described later in FIG. 43(b), if the previous display list drawing is completed in the V blank interrupt every 1/60th of a second (approximately 16.6 ms), the FB switching flag becomes 01. That is, in step S905, it is determined whether the previous drawing is completed or not. If the FB switching flag is 01 (Yes in step S905), the host CPU 151 proceeds to step S906, and if the FB switching flag is 00 (No in step S905), it waits until the FB switching flag becomes 01.

In step S906, the host CPU 151 sets the FB switching flag = 00 (turns the FB switching flag off) and moves the process to step S906. In step S907, the host CPU 151 performs drawing execution start processing. In this processing, drawing execution start data is set in the drawing register to instruct the VDP 200 to execute drawing for the display list that has already been output. In other words, drawing for the display list output in step S904 above is instructed. Thereafter, the processing of steps S902 to S907 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt occurs.

<Image control board interrupt processing>
The interrupt processing of the image control board 150 will be described with reference to Fig. 43. The interrupt processing of the image control board 150 includes at least a drawing end interrupt processing performed in response to input of a drawing end interrupt signal, and a V blank interrupt processing performed in response to input of a V blank interrupt signal.

<Host CPU drawing end interrupt processing>
43A is a flow chart for explaining the drawing end interrupt process by the image control board. When the VDP 200 finishes drawing a predetermined unit of frames (one frame), it outputs a drawing end interrupt signal to the host CPU 151 via the CPU I/F 203. When the host CPU 151 inputs the drawing end interrupt signal from the VDP 200, it executes drawing end interrupt process. In the drawing end interrupt process, in step S911, the host CPU 151 sets the drawing end flag = 01 (turns the drawing end flag on) and ends the current drawing end interrupt process. That is, the drawing end flag is turned on every time drawing ends.

<Host CPU V Blank Interrupt Processing>
43B is a flow chart for explaining the V blank interrupt processing by the image control board. VDP 200 outputs a V blank interrupt signal (vertical synchronization signal) to host CPU 151 via CPU I/F 203 every 1/60 seconds (approximately 16.6 ms). When host CPU 151 receives the V blank interrupt signal from VDP 200, it executes the V blank interrupt processing.

In step S921, the host CPU 151 performs a process of updating various counters, such as the "scene switch counter," "wait frame," and "frame counter." In step S922, the host CPU 151 determines whether the drawing end flag is 01 or not. That is, it determines whether drawing of a predetermined unit of frames has ended. If the drawing end flag is 01 (Yes in step S922), the host CPU 151 proceeds to step S923, and if the drawing end flag is not 01 (No in step S922), the host CPU 151 ends this V blank interrupt process. That is, even if a V blank interrupt signal is input, if drawing has not ended, the processes from step S923 onwards are not performed.

In step S923, the host CPU 151 sets the drawing end flag = 00 (turns the drawing end flag off). In step S924, the host CPU 151 instructs the memory controller 209 of the VDP 200 to switch between the "display frame buffer" and the "drawing frame buffer". In step S925, the host CPU 151 sets the FB switching flag = 01 (turns the FB switching flag on), releases the standby state in step S905 (see Figure 42) above, and ends the current V blank interrupt process.

Next, a brief overview of the lamp control board 140 will be given. When the lamp control board 140 receives a performance command from the performance control board 120, it reads out a performance movable body operation program based on the received performance command, and controls the operation of the performance movable body 32, and also reads out a performance lighting device control program based on the received performance command, and controls the performance lamp 33 and light guide 60. Furthermore, when the lamp control board 140 receives a performance button command from the image control board 150 via the performance control board 120, it reads out a performance button operation program based on the received performance button command, and controls the performance button 8.

Figure 44 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a variable performance pattern determination table. In the variable performance pattern determination process described above, the sub-CPU 412 refers to the variable performance pattern determination table to determine the variable performance pattern.

In this embodiment, a variable presentation pattern determination table is provided for each game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state). The specific example in FIG. 44 shows a variable presentation pattern determination table referenced in a low-probability non-time-saving game state. In other words, the variable presentation pattern determination table in FIG. 44 is referenced by the sub-CPU 121 when a variable pattern is determined by the main CPU 111 using the variable pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 above.

Specifically, in the variable presentation pattern determination process, the variable presentation pattern is determined by lottery according to the variable presentation pattern determined by the main CPU 111 (the variable presentation pattern specified by the variable presentation pattern designation command) and the random presentation value. The random presentation value has a random number range of "0 to 99" and is obtained by the sub-CPU 121 when the variable presentation pattern determination process starts. For example, if the main CPU 111 determines the variable presentation pattern a1x and any number "0 to 50" is obtained as the random presentation value, variable presentation pattern 1 is determined.

Figure 44 shows an overview of the presentation configuration of each variable presentation pattern. For example, in variable presentation pattern 1, when play begins, a normal presentation is executed, and then a normal reach is executed. On the other hand, in variable presentation pattern 2, when play begins, a normal presentation is executed, and then a pseudo consecutive presentation is executed, and then a normal reach is executed. In the above pseudo consecutive presentation, the image display device 31 temporarily stops (temporarily stops) the presentation pattern GA that was being displayed, and then displays it again. The above pseudo consecutive presentation may be executed multiple times in one game (variation). For example, in variable presentation pattern 5, two pseudo consecutive presentations are executed, and in variable presentation pattern 14, three pseudo consecutive presentations are executed.

Second Embodiment
Other embodiments of the present invention will be described below. In each of the following exemplary embodiments, the elements having the same actions and functions as those of the first embodiment will be designated by the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

Figures 45(a) and 45(b) are diagrams for explaining the end effects that are executed when the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) ends. The end effects notify the player that the time-saving game state is ending. The end effects include a first end effect (see Figure 45(a)) and a second end effect (see Figure 45(b)). As will be described in more detail later, when the time-saving game state ends, either the first end effect or the second end effect may be executed.

Figure 45 (a) is a mock-up of a specific example of a screen displayed in the first end performance. As shown in Figure 45 (a), in the first end performance, various images are displayed, including the small symbol Ga, right hit image GS4, fourth symbol GC, reserved number image GD, and end time image GP1. Also, in the first end performance, the performance symbol GA is not displayed. The above first end performance is executed in the last game of the time-saving game state. As mentioned above, in the last game of the first time-saving game state (100 times), a judgement performance is executed. If a judgement performance is executed in the last game of the time-saving game state, the first end performance is executed after the judgement performance is executed.

In the second embodiment, the end image GP1 displays the number of times the jackpot game has been won in a specific period of time and the number of game balls acquired. For example, assume that after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state, the jackpot game is won again in the first time-saving game state, and then after the second jackpot game, 100 games are played and the first time-saving game state ends. In the above case, the end image GP1 displays the number of times the jackpot game has been won (2 times) and the number of game balls acquired in the period from the first jackpot win to the end of the second first time-saving game state (specific period). The end image GP1 also displays the name of the time-saving mode and a message that the time-saving mode is ending.

Figure 45 (b) is a mock-up diagram of a specific example of a screen displayed in the second end performance. As shown in Figure 45 (b), in the second end performance, various images are displayed, including small symbol Ga, right hit image GS4, fourth symbol GC, reserved number image GD, and end time image GP2. Also, in the second end performance, the performance symbol GA is not displayed. The above second end performance is executed in the last play of the second time-saving play state among the time-saving play states.

The end image GP2 in the second embodiment displays the name of the time-saving mode and a message that the time-saving mode is ending. Furthermore, while the end image GP1 described above displays the number of jackpot wins and the number of game balls acquired during a specific period, the end image GP2 does not display this information. As will be described in more detail later, the end image GP2 is displayed when the second time-saving game state is started from the normal mode and the second time-saving game state ends without winning a jackpot.

Figures 46(a) to 46(e) are diagrams for explaining specific examples of when the end effect is executed. In addition to the time when the end effect is executed, Figures 46(a) to 46(e) show the game state at each time and the variation pattern determination table T.

Figure 46 (a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the timing when the first end effect is executed among the end effects. In the specific example of Figure 46 (a), it is assumed that the first time-saving game state starts 100 times after the end of the big win game, and the first time-saving game state ends. As described above, in the first time-saving game state (100 times), the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referenced in each game in the early stage, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is referenced in each game in the late stage, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj1 is referenced in the final game. In the second embodiment, in a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj1 is referenced, the first end effect is executed after the judgement effect is executed. As shown in Figure 46 (a), in a game after the first time-saving game state ends, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referenced.

Figure 46(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the timing at which the second end effect is executed among the end effects. In the specific example of Figure 46(b), it is assumed that the first time-saving game state is started for 100 times after the end of a jackpot game, and then 700 games are played, and the second time-saving game state is started. In other words, it is assumed that the second time-saving game state is started during the scenario setting period. In the above cases, in the first game of the second time-saving game state, the variation pattern determination table Ts is referenced, and various effects including the entry effect and the mode selection effect are executed.

In the specific example of Figure 46 (b), it is assumed that the second time-saving gaming state ends without winning a jackpot. As shown in Figure 46 (b), in the final game of the second time-saving gaming state in the scenario setting period, the variation pattern determination table Te1 is referenced. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Te1 is referenced, the second ending performance is executed. As shown in Figure 46 (b), in the game after the second time-saving gaming state in the scenario setting period ends, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referenced.

Let us assume a configuration in which the first end effect is executed when the second time-saving game state ends. In the above configuration, it is announced that the number of jackpot games won in the second time-saving game state is zero. In addition, the base value of the time-saving game state is smaller than one. Therefore, in the first end effect when the second time-saving game state ends, an excessively small number of game balls won is announced. Therefore, some players may find the first end effect annoying. In the second end effect of the second embodiment, the number of jackpot wins and the number of game balls won are not announced. The above configuration has the advantage of suppressing the above-mentioned inconveniences.

Figure 46 (c) is a specific example of a case where an end effect is not executed when the time-saving game state ends. Figure 46 (c) is a specific example of a case where a second time-saving game state starts during a period in which a scenario is not set. In the second embodiment, an end effect is not executed when the second time-saving game state during a period in which a scenario is not set ends. Note that in the above-mentioned first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referenced in the second time-saving game state during a period in which a scenario is not set. In the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax referenced in the second time-saving game state during a scenario-set period is also referenced in the second time-saving game state during a scenario-set period.

As shown in FIG. 46(c), in the second time-saving game state during a period in which a scenario is not set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referenced in all games (including the final game). Furthermore, the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referenced ends in a relatively short time. Therefore, if an ending effect is executed in the final game of the second time-saving game state during a period in which a scenario is not set, the time for the ending effect may be too short, which may cause an inconvenience in which the player does not understand the content of the ending effect. According to the configuration of the second embodiment, the above inconveniences are easily suppressed. As shown in FIG. 46(c), in the game after the second time-saving game state during a period in which a scenario is not set ends, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referenced.

In addition, according to the configuration of the second embodiment, during the scenario setting period, the fluctuation pattern determination table Te1 is referenced in the last game of the second time-saving game state, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referenced in the next game of the game (see FIG. 46 (b)). On the other hand, during the scenario not set period, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referenced in the last game of the second time-saving game state, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referenced in the next game of the game (see FIG. 46 (c)). In other words, the fluctuation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving game state (the last game of the second time-saving game state, the next game of the game) may differ between the scenario setting period and the scenario not set period. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the fluctuation pattern at the end of the second time-saving game state is rich in variety, and the fun of the game is improved.

Figure 46(d) is a specific example of a case where the second time-shortened gaming state is started during a period in which no scenario is set, similar to Figure 46(c) described above. However, whereas the specific example of Figure 46(c) assumes that no jackpot is won in the second time-shortened gaming state, the specific example of Figure 46(d) assumes that a jackpot is won in the second time-shortened gaming state. Specifically, the specific example of Figure 46(d) assumes that a jackpot is won in the second time-shortened gaming state, table scenario Sb2 is set, and a transition is made to the first time-shortened gaming state (100). In the above cases, when the first time-shortened gaming state ends, the first ending presentation is executed.

As can be understood from the above explanation, in this embodiment, if a jackpot is not won in the second time-saving game state, the first end effect is not executed (see FIG. 46(c)), and if a jackpot is won in the second time-saving game state, the first end effect is executed (see FIG. 46(d)). The above configuration has the advantage of making the presentation more interesting, compared to a configuration in which, for example, a transition is made to the second time-saving game state, and then the first end effect is not uniformly executed when the time-saving game state ends.

In addition, if a jackpot game is not executed during the advantageous state that began with the establishment of the second time-saving game state and the advantageous state ends, a result display (display of the result image GP) is not executed, but if a jackpot game is executed during the advantageous state that began with the establishment of the second time-saving game state and the advantageous state ends after the jackpot game ends, a result display is executed. This reduces the player's dissatisfaction when a jackpot game is not executed during an advantageous state, while increasing the player's satisfaction when a jackpot game is executed during an advantageous state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Figure 46 (e) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the time when the end performance is executed. Figure 46 (e) assumes the case where table scenario Sb4 is set. In the above case, the first time-saving game state continues for 799 plays, and the second time-saving game state starts via the gap play. In addition, the series of periods of the first time-saving game state, the gap play, and the second time-saving game state becomes the time-saving mode B. In the first embodiment, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are configured to refer to the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tnc is referenced in the gap play. In the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is commonly referenced in the series of periods of the first time-saving game state, the gap play, and the second time-saving game state. However, in the gap play of the second embodiment, a fluctuation pattern determination table T different from the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax may be referenced.

In the specific example of FIG. 46(e), no end effect is executed at the end of the first time-shortened game state (799 times). With the above configuration, it is easier for the player to recognize the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state as a series of time-shortened game states, compared to a configuration in which an end effect is executed in the final play or gap play of the first time-shortened game state. However, in the specific example of FIG. 46(e), the configuration may also be such that an end effect can be executed in the final play or gap play of the first time-shortened game state.

As shown in FIG. 46(e), in the last game of the second time-saving game state, the variation pattern determination table Te2 is referenced and the second end effect is executed. That is, in the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the first end effect is not executed when the second time-saving game state ends (the last game of the second time-saving game state or the game following that game). Also, in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the second end effect is executed when the second time-saving game state ends, and the first end effect is not executed. However, in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 or the table scenario Sb4 is set, the first end effect may be executed when the second time-saving game state ends. Also, in the above period, the end effect (including the second end effect) may not be executed when the second time-saving game state ends.

The configuration may be such that the variation patterns that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving game state (the final game of the second time-saving game state or the game following that game) are common between the scenario-set period and the non-scenario-set period. This configuration has the advantage that the number of types of variation pattern determination table T can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the variation patterns that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving game state are not common between the scenario-set period and the non-scenario-set period.

Figure 46 (f) is a diagram for explaining a modified example that employs a configuration in which the variation patterns that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving gaming state may be the same between a scenario-set period and a scenario-unset period. The specific example of Figure 46 (f) assumes a period in which table scenario Sb2 is set, similar to Figure 46 (b) of the second embodiment. In this modified example, the variation pattern determination table referenced in the period in which table scenario Sb2 is set differs from that of the second embodiment, while the variation pattern determination tables (type, order) referenced in the period in which other table scenarios S are set are the same as those of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 46(f), in this modified example, the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the period in which no scenario is set (see FIG. 46(c)) share the same fluctuation pattern determination table (Tax) for the final game in the second time-saving game state, and the same fluctuation pattern determination table (Tn1) for the game following the final game in the second time-saving game state. The above modified example has the advantage that the number of types of fluctuation pattern determination tables can be reduced compared to, for example, the second embodiment.

Third Embodiment
In the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, multiple types of time-saving game states are provided. Specifically, the time-saving game state of the third embodiment includes a third time-saving game state in addition to the above-mentioned first time-saving game state and second time-saving game state. The third time-saving game state is entered when a predetermined special pattern (a time-saving pattern described later) is stopped and displayed in a low-probability non-time-saving game state. In the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the opening mode of the second start hole 14 is common in each time-saving game state. However, the opening mode of the second start hole 14 may be configured to be different in each time-saving game state.

In the third embodiment, the number of time-saving cycles differs for each time-saving game state. Specifically, the number of time-saving cycles in the first time-saving game state is 100. As in the first embodiment, the number of time-saving cycles in the first time-saving game state may differ depending on the special symbol (jackpot symbol) stopped and displayed when the jackpot game is started. The number of time-saving cycles in the first time-saving game state is not limited to 100, and may be 101 or more, or 99 or less. The number of time-saving cycles in the second time-saving game state is 1000. The number of time-saving cycles in the third game state is 100 or 1000.

When entering the third time-saving game state, a normal miss effect pattern or an effect pattern different from that when entering the second time-saving game state may be displayed. That is, there is a first time-saving game state that goes through a jackpot, and a third time-saving game state that does not go through a jackpot, and when a second miss special pattern different from the first miss special pattern is displayed in the variable display, the game is controlled to the third time-saving game state for a predetermined period different from the first time-saving game state. This allows for a novel gameplay in which the game moves to the time-saving state without going through a jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

<Jackpot Judgment Table>
FIG. 47(a-1) and FIG. 47(a-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of a jackpot determination table in the third embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 47(a-1) is a jackpot determination table A that is referred to when determining whether the stop result of the special pattern variation in the first special pattern display device 20 is a jackpot, a small jackpot, the third time reduction, or a miss (a jackpot lottery). FIG. 47(b-2) is a jackpot determination table B that is referred to when determining the stop result of the special pattern variation in the second special pattern display device 21. Note that the first special pattern display device 20 and the second special pattern display device 21 have different winning probabilities for a small jackpot, but the jackpot probabilities are the same. Also, the first special pattern display device 20 and the second special pattern display device 21 have different winning probabilities for the third time reduction. Specifically, the third time reduction is won on the first special pattern display device 20, but the third time reduction is not won on the second special pattern display device 21.

In the jackpot determination table in the third embodiment, a random number value for determining a special symbol that results in a "jackpot", a random number value for determining a special symbol that results in a "small jackpot", and a random number value for determining a special symbol that results in a "third time reduction" are specified. In the jackpot lottery, the random number value for determining a special symbol obtained when the game ball enters the starting hole is compared with the random number value for determining a special symbol specified in the jackpot determination table, and if the two match, the player wins a jackpot, a small jackpot, or the third time reduction. The jackpot determination tables (A, B) shown in Figures 47(a-1) and 47(a-2) are composed of a low probability random number determination table and a high probability random number determination table, as in the first embodiment. The main CPU 111 determines whether the player wins a "jackpot", a "small jackpot", a "third time reduction", or a "miss" based on the selected table and the extracted random number value for determining a special symbol.

For example, according to the low probability random number determination table shown in FIG. 47 (a-1), two random numbers for determining special symbols are determined as "big wins". On the other hand, according to the high probability random number determination table, 20 random numbers for determining special symbols are determined as "big wins". Also, in the big win determination table of FIG. 6 (a-1), whether the low probability random number determination table or the high probability random number determination table is used, four random numbers for determining special symbols are determined as "small wins" and one random number for determining special symbols is determined as "third time reduction". If a random number value is not determined as either a "big win", "small win", or "third time reduction", it is determined as a "miss".

The random number value for determining the special pattern that is determined to be the third time reduction is different between the jackpot determination table A and the jackpot determination table B. Specifically, the jackpot determination table A determines one random number value for determining the special pattern as the third time reduction, but the jackpot determination table B does not include a random number value for determining the special pattern that is determined to be the third time reduction. In the above configuration, if a game ball enters the first start hole 13, it is possible to win the third time reduction, but if a game ball enters the second start hole 14, it is not possible to win the third time reduction. However, it is also possible to configure it so that if a game ball enters the second start hole 14, it is possible to win the third time reduction. In the above configuration, a configuration in which the probability of winning the third time reduction is lower when a game ball enters the second start hole 14 than when a game ball enters the first start hole 13 is preferable.

<Hit determination table>
Fig. 47(b) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a winning judgment table that is referred to when judging whether or not the stopping result of the normal pattern variation is a winning result in the normal pattern lottery. The winning judgment table shown in Fig. 47(b) is composed of a random number judgment table for non-time-saving game state and a random number judgment table for time-saving game state. The random number judgment table for time-saving game state is commonly referred to in the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state.

<Pattern determination table>
48(a-1) to 48(a-4) are conceptual diagrams of special symbol determination tables for determining special symbols (stop symbols) to be displayed in each game. The special symbol determination table in the third embodiment includes a time-saving symbol determination table in addition to a big win symbol determination table, a small win symbol determination table, and a miss symbol determination table. The time-saving symbol determination table is referred to when determining the stop symbol (time-saving symbol) when the third time-saving symbol is won in the big win lottery. The big win symbol determination table, the small win symbol determination table, and the miss symbol determination table are configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

Figure 48 (a-4) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a time-saving symbol determination table. When the third time-saving symbol is selected, the main CPU 111 refers to the random number value for the time-saving symbol. The random number range for the random number value for the time-saving symbol is the value "0 to 99". For example, when the third time-saving symbol is selected as a result of winning the first starting hole 13, if the main CPU 111 obtains the random number value for the time-saving symbol between "0" and "70", it determines "21" (special symbol J1) as the stop symbol data. In the above case, as shown in Figure 48 (a-4), the special symbol J1 is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display device 20. Also, when the stop symbol data "21" is selected, the performance symbol designation commands "E0H" and "11H" are generated as shown in Figure 48 (a-4).

As shown in FIG. 48(a-4), if the winning entry into the first starting hole 13 results in the third time-saving win, and the acquired random number value for the time-saving symbol is between "71" and "99", then "22" (special symbol J2) is determined as the stopping symbol data. In the above cases, the special symbol J2 is displayed as stopped on the first special symbol display device 20. Furthermore, when the stopping symbol data "22" is determined, the performance symbol designation commands "E0H" and "12H" are generated as shown in FIG. 48(a-4).

When the special symbol J1 or the special symbol J2 is displayed, the game then transitions to the third time-saving game state. Specifically, when the special symbol J1 is displayed, the game transitions to the third time-saving game state of 100 times. Furthermore, when the special symbol J2 is displayed, the game transitions to the third time-saving game state of 1000 times.

Figures 48(b-1) and 48(b-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination table is used when determining the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The above normal symbol determination table is used in common in each game state (non-time-saving game state, first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state).

<Variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving gaming state>
49 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table used in the low probability non-time-saving game state in the third embodiment. In the above fluctuation pattern determination table, any one of fluctuation patterns a (1x to 3x), fluctuation pattern b (1x to 6x), fluctuation pattern c (1x to 6x), fluctuation pattern dx, fluctuation pattern ex, fluctuation pattern fx, fluctuation pattern g, and fluctuation pattern h (1x, 2x) is determined as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21.

However, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the reach effect is always executed in a variation pattern in which a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a time-saving pattern among the special patterns is stopped and displayed. However, the reach effect may not be executed in a variation pattern in which a small win pattern or a time-saving pattern among the special patterns is stopped and displayed. Therefore, when a special pattern corresponding to a big win, a small win, or a third time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed, the reach determination random number value is not used when determining the variation pattern.

When the special symbol J1 is displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, if the random number value for the special symbol variation is any of the numbers "0 to 49", the variation pattern h1x is determined. Also, if the random number value for the special symbol variation is any of the numbers "50 to 99", the variation pattern h2x is determined.

In the variation pattern h1x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 40,000 ms. Also, in the variation pattern h1x, a normal reach effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a transition to the third time-saving mode is announced. Similarly, in the variation pattern h2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed variably for approximately 60,000 ms. Also, in the variation pattern h2x, a normal reach effect and SP reach 1 are executed on the image display device 31, and a transition to the third time-saving mode is announced.

When the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numbers "0 to 49", the above-mentioned variation pattern h1x is determined. Also, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numbers "50 to 99", the above-mentioned variation pattern h2x is determined. Note that in this embodiment, the variation patterns that can be determined are common to the special symbol J1 and the special symbol J2, but they may be different. Also, a configuration may be used in which the variation pattern h2x is more easily determined when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed than when the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed.
In this way, the fluctuation pattern when a jackpot is won is different from the fluctuation pattern when the third time-saving gaming state is won.

<Time-saving game state fluctuation pattern determination table>
FIG. 50 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table used in the low-probability time-saving game state in the third embodiment. The above fluctuation pattern determination table is used in the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state. As shown in FIG. 50, in the above fluctuation pattern determination table, any one of fluctuation patterns a (1y to 3y), fluctuation pattern b (1y to 6y), fluctuation pattern c (1y to 6y), fluctuation pattern dy, fluctuation pattern ey, fluctuation pattern f (1y, 2y), fluctuation pattern g, and fluctuation pattern h (1y, 2y) is determined as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, a transition to the third time-saving game state occurs. On the other hand, when the time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in the high-probability game state or the time-saving game state, a transition to the third time-saving game state does not occur. In other words, in game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the time-saving symbol is invalid.

Let us assume that when an invalid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, a longer variation pattern is more likely to be selected than a normal variation (a variation in which normal reach and SP reach 1 are not executed) in the same way as when a valid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. With the above configuration, some players may find the variation of the special symbol until the invalid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed annoying.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the third embodiment employs a configuration that suppresses the above-mentioned inconveniences. Specifically, as explained in FIG. 8 above, when the time-saving symbols (special symbols J1, J2) are displayed in a stopped state in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the variation pattern h1x or the variation pattern h2x is determined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9, in the low-probability time-saving game state, when the time-saving symbols are displayed in a stopped state, the variation pattern h1y or the variation pattern h2y is determined instead of the variation pattern h1x or the variation pattern h2x.

In a low-probability non-time-saving game state where the time-saving symbol is active, the fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern h1x is approximately 40,000 ms, and the fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern h2x is approximately 60,000 ms. On the other hand, in a low-probability time-saving game state where the time-saving symbol is inactive, the fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern h1y is approximately 2,000 ms, and the fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern h2y is approximately 2,000 ms.

In the above configuration, the change time of the special pattern display device when an invalid time-saving pattern is displayed stopped is shorter than the change time of the special pattern display device when a valid time-saving pattern is displayed stopped. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suppressed compared to a configuration in which the change time of the special pattern display device is the same regardless of whether the time-saving pattern is valid or invalid.

In the third embodiment, in addition to the low-probability time-saving game state, in the high-probability time-saving game state, the variation time of the special pattern display device when the time-saving pattern is displayed is configured to be shorter than in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Note that when an invalid time-saving pattern is displayed, a longer (or the same) variation pattern than when an effective time-saving pattern is displayed may be determined.

<Special pattern advance judgment table>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a pre-judgment table for pre-judging the result of the big win lottery in the third embodiment. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 13 or the second start winning port 14 (at the time of start winning), winning information is generated by the pre-judgment table (similar to the first embodiment). By the start winning designation command indicating the above winning information, the result of the pre-judgment (miss, big win, small win, third time reduction), the type of special symbol, and the change pattern (whether or not a reach occurs) can be determined before the change of the special symbol begins. The winning information (start winning designation command) of the third embodiment is referred to, for example, when determining the so-called pre-reading performance (reserved change performance described later).

In the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 51, winning information including winning information a (1, 2), winning information b (1-4), winning information c (1-4), winning information d1, and winning information e1 is set as the winning information for the first special pattern display device 20. Also, winning information including winning information a (3, 4), winning information b (5-8), winning information c (5-8), winning information d (1, 2), winning information e (1, 2), winning information f, winning information g, and winning information h (1, 2) is set as the winning information for the second special pattern display device 21.

If winning information h1 is selected at the time of the start winning, the game started by that start winning will have a time-saving transition effect 1 of approximately 40,000 ms executed by the performance control board 120. If winning information h2 is selected at the time of the start winning, the game started by that start winning will have a time-saving transition effect 2 of approximately 60,000 ms executed by the performance control board 120. Note that if winning information h(1, 2) is selected at the time of the start winning, the special symbol J (time-saving symbol) will be determined in the game started by that start winning.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state), winning information is not set when the game ball enters the first start hole 13. Specifically, in the time-saving game state, winning information is not set when the game ball enters the first start hole 13, regardless of the special pattern (combination of special pattern determination random number value and pattern random number value), reach determination random number value, and special pattern variation random number value in the first special pattern display device 20. Also, in the time-saving game state, a start winning designation command is not generated when the game ball enters the first start hole 13.

<Preliminary Judgment Processing>
Fig. 52 is a flow chart for explaining the pre-determination process by the main control board 110 in the third embodiment. The pre-determination process in Fig. 52 is executed in both the first start hole detection switch input process and the second start hole detection switch input process described above. That is, the above pre-determination process is executed both when the game ball enters the first start hole 13 and when the game ball enters the second start hole 14.

When the pre-determination process is started, the main CPU 111 judges whether or not the current pre-determination process was executed as a result of a game ball entering the first start hole 13 (S1151). If it is judged that the pre-determination process was executed as a result of a game ball entering the first start hole 13 (S1151: Yes), the main CPU 111 judges whether or not the current game state is in a time-saving game state (S1152). If it is judged to be in a time-saving game state (S1152: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the pre-determination process without generating winning information (omitting S1161 described below).

When it is determined that the game is not in the time-saving game mode (S1152: No), the main CPU 111 executes a tentative jackpot determination process (S1153). In the tentative jackpot determination process, the main CPU 111 uses the random number value for special symbol determination written in the special symbol reservation memory area in response to the current start winning to tentatively determine whether the game started by the start winning will be a jackpot, a small jackpot, a third time-saving game, or a miss in the jackpot determination process.

If the above-mentioned step S1151 is judged as "No", that is, if the advance judgment process is executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 14, the main CPU 111 skips the above-mentioned step S1152 and executes the process following the tentative jackpot judgment process (S1153). In the above configuration, when the game ball enters the second start hole 14, regardless of whether the game is in a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state, winning information is generated (S1161 described below is executed). In other words, when the game ball enters the second start hole 14, regardless of whether the game is in a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state, a pre-reading performance can be executed.

After executing the provisional jackpot determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a jackpot has been provisionally determined in the provisional jackpot determination process (S1154). If a jackpot has been provisionally determined (step S1154: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a provisional jackpot pattern determination process (S1155). In the provisional jackpot pattern determination process, the random number value for the jackpot pattern obtained in response to the current start winning is used to provisionally determine the jackpot pattern (stop pattern data) that will be stopped in the game that is started by the start winning. After executing the provisional jackpot pattern determination process, the main CPU 111 proceeds to a provisional variation pattern determination process (S1160).

On the other hand, if the provisional judgment process does not provisionally judge that a jackpot has been won (step S1154: No), the main CPU 111 judges whether or not a provisional judgment has been made that a third time-saving period has been won (S1156). If a provisional judgment has been made that a third time-saving period has been won (S1156: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a provisional judgment process for a time-saving symbol (S1157). In the provisional judgment process for a time-saving symbol, a random number value for the time-saving symbol obtained in response to the current start winning is used to provisionally judge a time-saving symbol (stop symbol data) that will be stopped in the game that is started by the start winning. After executing the provisional judgment process for a time-saving symbol, the main CPU 111 proceeds to a provisional judgment process for a variation pattern (S1160).

If the third time reduction is not provisionally determined in the provisional big win determination process (step S1156: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a small win has been provisionally determined (S1158). If a small win has been provisionally determined (S1158: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a provisional small win pattern determination process (S1159). In the provisional small win pattern determination process, the random number value for the small win pattern obtained in response to the current start winning is used to provisionally determine the small win pattern (stop pattern data) to be stopped in the game started by the start winning. After executing the provisional small win pattern determination process, the main CPU 111 proceeds to a provisional variation pattern determination process (S1160). If the result of step S1158 is "No," that is, if the process for determining whether or not a jackpot is provisionally determined to be a miss, the main CPU 111 does not execute the provisional symbol determination process (S1155, S1157, and S1159 described above) and proceeds to the provisional variation pattern determination process S1160.

In the tentative fluctuation pattern determination process (S1160), the main CPU 111 tentatively determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol using the game state, the result of the tentative jackpot determination process, the result of the tentative jackpot pattern determination process, the result of the tentative time-saving pattern determination process, the result of the tentative small jackpot pattern determination process, the special symbol fluctuation random number value acquired in response to this start winning, and the reach determination random number value. After that, the main CPU 111 generates winning information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern tentatively determined in the fluctuation pattern tentative determination process (S1161). In addition, the main CPU 111 sets a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning information in the performance transmission data storage area (S1162) and ends the preliminary determination process.

By the above-mentioned advance judgment process, when the game ball enters the first start hole 13 or the second start hole 14, winning information can be sent to the performance control board 120 as a start winning designation command. Therefore, the sub-CPU 121 of the performance control board 120 that receives the start winning designation command can analyze the start winning designation command and execute a predetermined performance (pre-reading performance) in advance before the special pattern starts to change due to the current start winning.

<Processing when special symbols stop>
53 is a flow chart for explaining the special symbol stop processing by the main control board 110 in the third embodiment. When the special symbol stop processing is started, the main CPU 111 executes the second time-saving transition determination process (S1231). In the second time-saving transition determination process, it is determined whether or not a transition opportunity to the second time-saving game state has been established. As described above, it becomes possible to transition to the second time-saving game state when a jackpot is not won a predetermined number of times in the jackpot lottery in the low probability game state.

In the third embodiment, for the sake of explanation, the number of times that a jackpot has not been won in the jackpot determination process since the transition to the low probability game state up to the present time may be referred to as the "accumulated number m". The accumulated number m is counted, for example, by a counter provided in the main RAM 113. When the accumulated number m reaches a predetermined number (hereinafter "number of activations n"), a transition to the second time-saving game state occurs. The number of activations n in the third embodiment is "800 times". Note that the number of activations n can be changed as appropriate.

In the third embodiment, the cumulative number m is added not only when a miss is determined in the jackpot determination process, but also when a small jackpot or the third time-saving game is won. The cumulative number m is also added in both the low-probability non-time-saving game state and the low-probability time-saving game state. In other words, the cumulative number m is added in all games that do not result in a jackpot win, except for the high-probability game state. When the main CPU 111 determines in the second time-saving transition determination process that a transition trigger to the second time-saving game state has been established, it transitions the game state to the second time-saving game state.

After executing the second time-shortened transition determination process, the main CPU 111 executes a third time-shortened transition determination process (S1232). In the third time-shortened transition determination process, it is determined whether or not a transition trigger to the third time-shortened game state has been established. As described above, when a time-shortened symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a low-probability non-time-shortened game state, a transition to the third time-shortened game state is possible. If it is determined in the third time-shortened transition determination process that a transition trigger to the third time-shortened game state has been established, the main CPU 111 transitions the game state to the third time-shortened game state.

After executing the third time-saving transition determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether the determination period has elapsed (S1233). The determination period is set so that the player can recognize that the special symbol has been statically displayed in the current game. The determination period is, for example, about 0.5 seconds. The variable display of the special symbol in the next game is prohibited until the determination period ends. Specifically, step S1233 is repeatedly executed until the determination period ends (S1233: No), and when the determination period ends (S1233: Yes), it becomes possible to transition to the subsequent step.

When the fixed period ends, the main CPU 111 executes a time-saving end determination process (S1234). In the time-saving end determination process, it is determined whether or not a trigger for ending the time-saving game state has occurred. Specifically, in the time-saving end determination process, it is determined whether or not the number of plays in the time-saving game state has reached the time-saving number. If it is determined that the number of plays in the time-saving game state has reached the time-saving number, the time-saving game state ends. When the time-saving end determination process ends, the main CPU 111 sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area (S1235).

After setting the game state designation command, the main CPU 111 determines whether the special symbol that has stopped in the current game is a jackpot symbol (S1236). If the main CPU 111 determines that it is a jackpot symbol (S1236: Yes), it sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "3" (jackpot game processing) (S1237). In addition, the main CPU 111 executes jackpot initialization processing (S1238).

In the jackpot initialization process, various information is initialized. For example, in the jackpot initialization process, the high probability flag that is ON in the high probability game state is changed to OFF, and a transition to a low probability game state occurs. In addition, the time-saving flag that is ON in the time-saving game state is changed to OFF, and the remaining number M, which indicates the number of remaining plays in the time-saving game state, is initialized to the number "0", and a transition to a non-time-saving game state occurs.

The time-saving flags include a first time-saving flag that is ON in a first time-saving play state, a second time-saving flag that is ON in a second time-saving play state, and a third time-saving flag that is ON in a third time-saving play state. In the jackpot initialization process, all time-saving flags are changed to the OFF state. In addition, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving play state is stored in a separate counter for each time-saving play state. Specifically, the remaining number of times M1 in the first time-saving play state, the remaining number of times M2 in the second time-saving play state, and the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-saving play state are stored separately. In the jackpot initialization process, all remaining numbers M are initialized to the value "0".

In the jackpot initialization process, the cumulative number m (number of times stuck) is initialized. In the third embodiment, the cumulative number m is not initialized in principle except when the clear operation process by operating the clear button or when a jackpot game is started. For example, when the cumulative number m reaches the number of activations n, the game moves to the second time-saving game state, but the cumulative number m is not initialized. In addition, the cumulative number m is not initialized when the third time-saving game or a small jackpot is won. Details will be described later, but in the above configuration, the number of times that the game can move to the second time-saving game state during the period from the current jackpot game to the next jackpot game is one.

After executing the jackpot initialization process, the main CPU 111 executes the jackpot start preparation process (S1239). In the jackpot start preparation process, for example, the opening pattern of the large prize winning port (16, 17) during jackpot play is determined according to the special symbol (type of jackpot). After that, the main CPU 111 sets an opening designation command according to the type of jackpot in the performance transmission data storage area (S1240), sets the opening time according to the type of jackpot (S1241), and ends the special symbol stop processing.

In the above-mentioned step S1236, if it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped in the current game is not a big win symbol (S1236: No), the main CPU 111 judges whether the special symbol that has stopped is a small win symbol (S1242). If a small win symbol has stopped (S1242: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "4" (S1243) and ends the processing when the special symbol has stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped in the current game is not a small win symbol (S1242: No), that is, if a losing symbol or a time-saving symbol has stopped, the special symbol special electric processing data is set to "0" (S1244) and ends the processing when the special symbol has stopped.

Figure 54 (a) is a flowchart of the second time-saving transition determination process (S1231 in Figure 53 described above). As described above, the second time-saving transition determination process is executed when a special symbol stops.

When the second time-saving transition determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a jackpot has been won in this game (S1261). If it is determined that a jackpot has been won (S1261: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the second time-saving transition determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that a jackpot has not been won (either a miss, a small win, or a win in the third time-saving mode) (S1261: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the game is in a low-probability game state (low-probability time-saving game state or low-probability non-time-saving game state) (S1262). If it is determined that the game is not in a low-probability game state (it is in a high-probability game state) (S1261: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the second time-saving transition determination process.

When it is determined that the game is in a low probability game state (S1262: Yes), the main CPU 111 adds the value "1" to the cumulative number of times m (S1263). Specifically, the second time-saving transition determination process shown in FIG. 19(a) is executed both when a special pattern stops on the first special pattern display device 20 and when a special pattern stops on the second special pattern display device 21. Therefore, in a game in which a jackpot has not been won and the game is in a low probability game state, the cumulative number of times m is added regardless of the special pattern display device (20, 21) on which the special pattern stops.

After adding the cumulative number m, the main CPU 111 determines whether the cumulative number m matches the number "800" (S1264). That is, it determines whether the cumulative number m matches the activation number n (n = 800) at which the second time-saving game state is activated. If it is determined that the cumulative number m does not match the activation number n (S1264: No), the main CPU 111 ends the second time-saving transition determination process.

When it is determined that the cumulative number m matches the number of activations n (S1264: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "1000" as the remaining number M2 of the second time-saving game state (S1265). After storing the initial value of the remaining number M2, the main CPU 111 updates the second time-saving flag to the ON state (S1266) and ends the second time-saving transition determination process.

In the third embodiment, in play after the second time-saving game state is activated, the cumulative number m continues to be updated from the activation number n. Specifically, the cumulative number m is not initialized in principle except when the clear operation process is performed by operating the clear button described above or when a jackpot game is won. In the above configuration, during the period from the end of the current jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, it is determined that the cumulative number m matches the activation number n only once. In other words, during the period from the end of the current jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, the number of times that it is possible to transition to the second time-saving game state is one.

Figure 54 (b) is a flowchart of the third time-shortening transition judgment process (S1232 in Figure 53 described above) executed by the main CPU 111. The third time-shortening transition judgment process is executed immediately after the second time-shortening transition judgment process described above. When the third time-shortening transition judgment process is started, the main CPU 111 judges whether or not the current game is in a low-probability non-time-shortening game state (S1281). If it is determined that the current game is not in a low-probability non-time-shortening game state (S1281: No), the main CPU 111 ends the third time-shortening transition judgment process.

When it is determined that the game is in a low-probability non-time-saving game state (S1281: Yes), the main CPU 111 judges whether the special symbol stopped in the current game is the special symbol J1 (time-saving symbol) (S1282). When it is determined that the special symbol J1 has stopped (S1282: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "100" as the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-saving game state (1S283).

If it is determined that the special symbol J1 has not been stopped (S1282: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol J2 (another time-saving symbol) has been stopped (S1284). If it is determined that the special symbol J2 has not been stopped (S1284: No), that is, if it is determined that neither of the time-saving symbols (J1, J2) have been stopped, the main CPU 111 ends the third time-saving transition determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol J2 has been stopped (S1284: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "1000" as the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-saving game state (S1285). After storing the initial value of the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-saving game state in step S1283 or step S1285 described above, the main CPU 111 changes the third time-saving flag to the ON state (S1286). Thereafter, the main CPU 111 ends the third time-saving transition determination process.

Figure 54 (c) is a flowchart of the time-saving end determination process (S1234 in Figure 53 described above) executed by the main CPU 111. In the time-saving end determination process, when an end trigger for a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) is established, the time-saving flag (first time-saving flag, second time-saving flag, third time-saving flag) corresponding to that time-saving game state is changed to the OFF state. As described above, when a jackpot game starts, all time-saving flags are uniformly changed to the OFF state (see S1238 in Figure 53 described above).

When the time-saving end determination process starts, the main CPU 111 determines whether the first time-saving flag is ON or not, i.e., whether the first time-saving game state is in (S1301). If the main CPU 111 determines that the first time-saving flag is not ON (S1301: No), the process proceeds to step S1305. On the other hand, if the main CPU 111 determines that the first time-saving flag is ON (S1301: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the value "1" from the remaining number of times M1 in the first time-saving game state (S1302). Thereafter, the main CPU 111 determines whether the remaining number of times M1 has been subtracted to the value "0" (S1303).

If the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times M1 is the value "0" (S1303: Yes), it sets the first time-saving flag to the OFF state and proceeds to step S1305 (S1304). In other words, it ends the first time-saving game state and proceeds to step S1305. On the other hand, if the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times M1 is not the value "0" (S1303: No), it skips step S1304 and proceeds to step S1305.

In step S305, the main CPU 111 determines whether the second time-saving flag is ON or not, i.e., whether the game is in the second time-saving game state. If the main CPU 111 determines that the second time-saving flag is not ON (S1305: No), the main CPU 111 proceeds to step S309. On the other hand, if the main CPU 111 determines that the second time-saving flag is ON (S1305: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the value "1" from the remaining number of times M2 in the second time-saving game state (S1306). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether the remaining number of times M2 has been subtracted to the value "0" (S1307).

If the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times M2 is the value "0" (S1307: Yes), it sets the second time-saving flag to the OFF state (S1308) and proceeds to step S1309. In other words, the second time-saving game state ends and processing proceeds to step S1309. On the other hand, if the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times M2 is not the value "0" (S1307: No), it skips step S1308 and proceeds to step S1309.

In step S1309, the main CPU 111 determines whether the third time-saving flag is ON or not, i.e., whether the game is in the third time-saving game state. If the main CPU 111 determines that the third time-saving flag is not ON (S1309: No), the main CPU 111 ends the time-saving end determination process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 111 determines that the third time-saving flag is ON (S1309: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the value "1" from the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-saving game state (S1310). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether the remaining number of times M3 has been subtracted to the value "0" (S1311).

If the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times M3 is the value "0" (S1311: Yes), it sets the third time-saving flag to the OFF state (S1312) and ends the time-saving end determination process. In other words, it ends the third time-saving game state and ends the time-saving end determination process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times M3 is not the value "0" (S1311: No), it skips step S1312 and ends the time-saving end determination process.

The remaining number of times M (1, 2, 3) is subtracted both when the variable display of the first special pattern display device 20 stops and when the variable display of the second special pattern display device 21 stops. In other words, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving play state is subtracted regardless of the type of special pattern display device that displays a variable display in the current game.

Figures 55(a), 55(b) and 55(c) are schematic diagrams of screens displayed on the image display device 31 in each game of the third embodiment. Specifically, Figure 55(a) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 in a low-probability non-time-saving game state. Also, Figure 55(b) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 in a low-probability time-saving game state. Figure 55(c) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 in a high-probability time-saving game state. The image display device 31 of the third embodiment displays various images including the performance symbols GA (1-3), reserved images GB (1, 2), fourth symbols GC (1, 2), reserved number images GD (1, 2) and small symbols Ga in each game (similar to the first embodiment).

The effect pattern GA in the third embodiment includes effect pattern GA1 (see FIG. 55(a)), effect pattern GA2 (see FIG. 55(b)), and effect pattern GAw3 (see FIG. 55(c)). The effect pattern GA1 is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Also, the effect pattern GA2 is displayed in the low-probability time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the common effect pattern GA2 is displayed in the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state. The effect pattern GA3 is displayed in the high-probability time-saving game state. Note that in this embodiment, the effect pattern GA is different between the low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state, but the effect pattern GA may be the same in each of the above game states.

In the third embodiment, a common fourth pattern GC is displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state, the low probability time-saving game state, and the high probability time-saving game state. That is, a common fourth pattern GC is displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the high probability time-saving game state. Specifically, a common fourth pattern GC is displayed in each game state except for a jackpot game. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a different fourth pattern GC is displayed depending on the game state. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a fourth pattern GC is displayed in a jackpot game.

The reserved number image GD in the third embodiment is common to the low probability non-time-saving game state, the low probability time-saving game state, and the high probability time-saving game state, as with the fourth pattern GC described above. That is, a common reserved number image GD is displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the high probability time-saving game state. Specifically, a common reserved number image GD is displayed in each game state except for a jackpot game. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a different reserved number image GD is displayed depending on the game state. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a reserved number image GD is displayed in a jackpot game.

When a big win pattern is displayed on the special pattern display device, the small pattern Ga displays a pattern combination corresponding to the big win pattern. Also, when a small win pattern is displayed on the special pattern display device, the small pattern Ga displays a pattern combination corresponding to the small win pattern. Similarly, when a time-saving pattern is displayed on the special pattern display device, the small pattern Ga displays a pattern combination corresponding to the time-saving pattern, and when a losing pattern is displayed on the special pattern display device, the small pattern Ga displays a pattern combination corresponding to the losing pattern. Also, as a general rule, when a performance pattern GA is displayed, the small pattern Ga is displayed in the same manner as the performance pattern GA. For example, when a big win is won and the GA effect pattern stops at "7-7-7", the small Ga effect pattern also stops at "7-7-7", when a small win is won and the GA effect pattern stops at "7-5-7", the small Ga effect pattern also stops at "7-5-7", when a third time-saving effect is won and the GA effect pattern stops at "7-9-7" or "7-time-saving (an example of a special pattern described below)-7", the small Ga effect pattern also stops at "7-9-7" or "7-time-saving-7".

In the third embodiment, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state, the low probability time-saving game state, and the high probability time-saving game state. That is, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the high probability time-saving game state. Specifically, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, the small symbol Ga may be displayed in the jackpot game. In this embodiment, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 and the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21, but a small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may be provided separately from the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20. In this case, the small pattern Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern display device 21 may have a display mode that is common to the small pattern Ga corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern display device 20, or may have a display mode that is different from the small pattern Ga corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern display device 20.

As described above, the effect pattern GA (1, 2) differs between the low-probability non-time-saving game state and the low-probability time-saving game state. Meanwhile, a common small pattern Ga is displayed in both the low-probability non-time-saving game state and the low-probability time-saving game state. The above configuration can be said in other words that when a low-probability non-time-saving game state is transitioned to a low-probability time-saving game state (including the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state), the appearance of the effect pattern GA changes, but the appearance of the small pattern Ga does not change. Similarly, when a low-probability non-time-saving game state is transitioned to a low-probability non-time-saving game state, the appearance of the effect pattern GA changes, but the appearance of the small pattern Ga does not change.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the game count image GE is displayed as in the first embodiment. In the third embodiment, the number in the game count image GE is incremented immediately after the game starts. However, the number in the game count image GE may be incremented when the game ends (approximately simultaneously with the increment of the cumulative number m).

The above play count image GE is displayed from the transition to the low-probability non-time-saving play state until the low-probability non-time-saving play state ends. However, the play count image GE may be configured to start displaying after the number of plays in the low-probability play state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 790 times). In addition, the play count image GE of this embodiment displays the number of plays in the low-probability play state, but it may also display the number of plays until the transition to the second time-saving play state. In the above configuration, the displayed number of plays is subtracted for each play. Also, the play count image GE may be configured to be displayed in the low-probability time-saving play state. In addition, the play count image GE of this embodiment is in a form that simply indicates the number of plays, but it may also be configured to display a message that encourages the transition to the second time-saving play state, such as "750 plays left until the start of the second time-saving play state."

As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the low-probability time-saving game state, a remaining time-saving image GJ is displayed. The remaining time-saving image GJ displays the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state. For example, immediately after the first time-saving game state is started, the remaining time-saving image GJ displays the number "100". Immediately after the second time-saving game state is started, the remaining time-saving image GJ displays the number "1000". Immediately after the third time-saving game state is started, the remaining time-saving image GJ displays the number "100" or the number "1000". The number in the remaining time-saving image GJ is decremented by a value of "1" at the start of play.

In addition, gaming machines (so-called "ST machines") that end the high-probability time-saving game state after a predetermined number of times (for example, "100 times") have been known. When adopting the above ST machines, a configuration may be used in which a remaining time-saving image GJ that displays the remaining number of times in the high-probability time-saving game state is displayed. In addition, in a configuration in which both a remaining time-saving image GJ (hereinafter referred to as "remaining time-saving image GJx") that displays the remaining number of times in the low-probability time-saving game state and a remaining time-saving image GJ (hereinafter referred to as "remaining time-saving image GJy") that displays the remaining number of times in the high-probability time-saving game state are displayed, the appearance of the remaining time-saving image GJx and the remaining time-saving image GJy may be made different. For example, the remaining time-saving image GJx displays letters and numbers as shown in FIG. 29(b). In addition, a configuration in which the remaining time-saving image GJy displays letters and numbers, similar to the remaining time-saving image GJx, is assumed. In the above configuration, the remaining time-saving image GJx may display black letters and white numbers, and the remaining time-saving image GJy may display white letters and black numbers.

In this embodiment, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, a background image GHx is displayed (see FIG. 55(a)). In addition, in the low-probability time-saving game state, a background image GHy is displayed (see FIG. 55(b)), and in the high-probability time-saving game state, a background image GHv is displayed (see FIG. 55(c)). In other words, the background image GH is different in each of the above game states. However, the background image GH may be common in all or some of the above game states. For example, the background image GH may be common between the low-probability non-time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state.

In the time-saving play state (first to third time-saving play states), when the remaining number of times M becomes a predetermined number of times (e.g., 5 times) or less, the remaining number of times M is highlighted. For example, a suitable configuration is one in which when the remaining number of times M is reduced to 5 times, a message saying "5 times remaining!" is displayed approximately in the center of the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the low probability time-saving game state, the right hit image Gsy is displayed. As described above, in the time-saving game state (first to third time-saving game states), a right hit is instructed by the right hit lamp 28. The right hit image Gsy is displayed during the period when a right hit is instructed by the right hit lamp 28. In addition, the right hit image Gsy is not displayed during the period when a right hit is not instructed by the right hit lamp 28.

Specifically, the right-hit image Gsy is continuously displayed from the start of the opening period of the big win game, and thereafter, for the period after the first time-saving game state is started. Also, the right-hit image Gsy starts to be displayed when the cumulative number m reaches the number of activations n (the nth losing symbol is displayed in a stopped state) and the game moves to the second time-saving game state. Similarly, the right-hit image Gsy starts to be displayed when the time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state and the game moves to the third time-saving game state. Note that, during the period when the right-hit lamp 28 indicates a right hit, when a predetermined performance (for example, an SP reach) is executed, the right-hit image Gsy may be configured to be temporarily hidden. However, during the period when the right-hit image Gsy is temporarily hidden, it is preferable to configure the game to be played by right-hit by a lamp controlled by the sub-CPU 121 or an image other than the right-hit image Gsy.

The reserved image GB includes reserved image GB1 (see FIG. 55(a)) and reserved image GB2 (see FIG. 55(b) and FIG. 55(c)). Reserved image GB1 is displayed when the above-mentioned random number value (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "judgment information") is stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area (first memory unit to fourth memory unit) or the second special symbol reserved memory area (first memory unit to fourth memory unit) in the low probability non-time-saving game state. Reserved image GB2 is displayed when judgment information is stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area in the low probability time-saving game state and the high probability time-saving game state.

The reserved image GB1 is displayed in the regions R11 to R14 and the regions R21 to R24 of the image display device 31. For example, when the judgment information is stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reserved storage area (when the first reserved number is added to the number "1"), the reserved image GB1 is displayed in the region R11. Similarly, when the judgment information is stored in the second storage section of the first special symbol reserved storage area, the reserved image GB1 is displayed in the region R12, when the judgment information is stored in the third storage section, the reserved image GB1 is displayed in the region R13, and when the judgment information is stored in the fourth storage section, the reserved image GB1 is displayed in the region R14. Also, when the judgment information is stored in the first storage section of the second special symbol reserved storage area, the reserved image GB1 is displayed in the region R21, when the judgment information is stored in the second storage section, the reserved image GB1 is displayed in the region R22, when the judgment information is stored in the third storage section, the reserved image GB1 is displayed in the region R23, and when the judgment information is stored in the fourth storage section, the reserved image GB1 is displayed in the region R24.

When judgment information is stored in the judgment memory area (0th memory section) in the low probability non-time-saving game state, a reserved image GB1 is displayed in region R0. Also, when the first special symbol display device 20 starts to change and the above-mentioned shift process is executed, the reserved images GB1 from region R11 to region R14 are moved to the adjacent region R on the left and displayed. Similarly, when the second special symbol display device 21 starts to change and the above-mentioned shift process is executed, the reserved images GB1 from region R21 to region R24 are moved to the adjacent region R on the left and displayed.

The reserved image GB2 is displayed in areas R11 to R14 of the image display device 31. For example, when judgment information is stored in the first memory section of the second special pattern reserved memory area, the reserved image GB2 is displayed in area R11, when judgment information is stored in the second memory section, the reserved image GB2 is displayed in area R12, when judgment information is stored in the third memory section, the reserved image GB2 is displayed in area R13, and when judgment information is stored in the fourth memory section, the reserved image GB2 is displayed in area R14.

When judgment information is stored in the judgment memory area (0th memory unit) in the low probability time-saving game state or high probability time-saving game state, a reserved image GB2 is displayed in area R0. Also, when the second special symbol display device 21 starts to change and the above-mentioned shift process is executed, the reserved images GB2 in areas R11 to R14 are moved to the adjacent area R to the left and displayed. Note that in the low probability time-saving game state, a reserved image may be displayed when judgment information is stored in the first special symbol reservation memory area.

In the above configuration, the reserved image GB (1, 2) displayed in region R moves to the region R to the left of that region R each time a game is played, and is finally displayed in region R0. Furthermore, when a game in which the reserved image GB is displayed in region R0 (a game in which the judgment information acquired at the start of the display of the reserved image GB is judged by the jackpot judgment process) ends, the reserved image GB becomes hidden. Note that the time when the reserved image GB displayed in region R0 becomes hidden can be changed as appropriate.

When the sub-CPU 121 of the third embodiment receives the start winning designation command, it starts displaying the reserved image GB. The sub-CPU 121 also refers to the start winning designation command to determine whether or not to execute a reserved change performance in the reserved image GB. Specifically, the variation pattern of the special symbol includes a variation pattern that executes a reserved change performance. If the variation pattern (winning information) specified from the start winning designation command is a variation pattern that executes a reserved change performance, the sub-CPU 121 determines to execute a reserved change performance. If the result of the pre-determination specified from the start winning designation command is a jackpot, the reserve change performance is more likely to be executed than if the result of the pre-determination is a miss.

When it is decided to execute the hold change effect, the appearance (e.g., color) of the hold image GB changes to a predetermined appearance. For example, the above-mentioned FIG. 29(a) assumes a specific example in which the hold image GB in region R12 is displayed in a special appearance, and the hold images GB in other regions R are displayed in a normal appearance.

Specifically, if the hold change effect is not executed, the reserved image GB is displayed in a normal state (e.g., white). On the other hand, if it is decided to execute the hold change effect, the reserved image GB changes to a special state (e.g., blue) at some point during the display period of the reserved image GB. Possible times for the reserved image GB to change to a special state include the point at which the reserved image GB is shifted, during play before the reserved image GB is moved to region R0, and during play after the reserved image GB is moved to region R0.

In the hold change performance, the hold image GB changes to one of several types of special modes (in addition to blue, red, gold, and rainbow). Also, during the display period of the hold image GB, the mode of the hold image GB may change several times (in stages). For example, when the sub-CPU 121 decides to execute the hold change performance, it predetermines the final special mode and the time (scenario) at which the mode of the hold image GB will change. Specifically, the final special mode and the time at which the mode of the hold image GB will change are determined according to the result of the pre-determination specified from the start winning designation command and the number of holds. However, in the third embodiment, a limited period may be set, as will be described in detail later. During the above limited period, the hold change performance is not determined (it is limited).

Figure 56 (a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the limited period. As described above, in the limited period, even if the start winning, the reserved change performance is not determined. In the third embodiment, as shown in Figure 56 (a), the limited period is from the start of the game (when the special pattern change starts) when the cumulative number m is added to the value "797" to the end of the game (when the special pattern change stops) when the cumulative number m is added to the value "800". In other words, the limited period is from the start of the game four times before the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state to the start of the second time-saving game state. As described above, the upper limit number of the first reserved number is four. Therefore, the above limited period can be said to be a period during which judgment information to be reserved in the first special pattern reserved memory area until the second time-saving game state can be obtained in the low-probability non-time-saving game state.

Let us assume a comparison in which a reserved change presentation can be determined when the judgment information reserved in the first special symbol reserved memory area until the second time-saving play state is acquired in a low-probability non-time-saving play state. In the above comparison, the player may be able to know that the judgment information that is judged to be a jackpot is stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area at the time of transition to the second time-saving play state. Therefore, in the above comparison, by maintaining the second reserved number at a value of "1" or more in the second time-saving play state, the player can play without intentionally causing a jackpot play while knowing that the right to execute a jackpot play is held. In the above comparison, the inconvenience of significantly encouraging the player's gambling tendency may occur.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the reserved change presentation is not determined during the limited period during which judgment information that is reserved until the second time-saving game state can be obtained during the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Note that even during the limited period, the main CPU 111 generates a start winning designation command by a pre-judgment process, and the start winning designation command is received by the sub-CPU 121. Therefore, the limited period is a period during which the sub-CPU 121 can determine the reserved change presentation, but it can also be said to be a period during which the decision on the reserved change presentation is deliberately restricted. With the above configuration, the player cannot know from the reserved image GB that judgment information that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the first special pattern reserved memory area at the time of transition to the second time-saving game state. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

Figure 56 (b-1) is a diagram for explaining the probability that a reserved change presentation will be determined. Specifically, Figure 56 (b-1) shows the probability that a reserved change presentation will be determined when a start winning occurs during a period other than the limited period (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "non-limited period") in a low-probability non-time-saving game state. Figure 56 (b-1) also shows the probability that a reserved change presentation will be executed for each result of the pre-judgment at the time of the start winning.

In the non-restricted period of the third embodiment, the hold change presentation is more likely to be determined when the pre-determination results in the third time reduction, compared to when the pre-determination results in a miss. Specifically, when the pre-determination results in the third time reduction, the hold change presentation is determined with a probability of approximately 20%. Also, when the pre-determination results in a miss, the hold change presentation is determined with a probability of approximately 5%. However, it is also possible to configure the hold change presentation to always be determined when the pre-determination results in the third time reduction, and not to be determined when the pre-determination results in a miss.

In the non-restricted period of the third embodiment, the hold change presentation is more likely to be determined when the pre-determination results in a jackpot compared to when the pre-determination results in the third time reduction. Specifically, when the pre-determination results in a jackpot, the hold change presentation is determined with a probability of approximately 50%. However, it is also possible to configure the hold change presentation to always be determined when the pre-determination results in a jackpot, and not to determine the hold change presentation when the pre-determination results in the third time reduction. When the pre-determination results in a small jackpot, the hold change presentation is determined with a probability of approximately 10%.

As described above, the main control board 110 transmits an accumulated number command capable of identifying the accumulated number m to the presentation control board 120. From the accumulated number command, the sub-CPU 121 can identify the number of plays until the second time-saving game state is activated. For example, assume that the number of plays until the second time-saving game state is activated is "X times." Also assume that the number of reserved balls is X or more. In the above cases, the sub-CPU 121 can determine that a jackpot will not be won in X plays by analyzing the start winning designation command. In the above configuration, the sub-CPU 121 can determine in advance from the accumulated number command and the start winning designation command that the second time-saving game state will be activated in X plays after.

Therefore, the reserved image GB displayed in region R0 during a game that transitions to the second time-saving game state may be configured to change to a special state that differs from the normal state and the special state. An example of a reserved image GB in a special state may be a reserved image GB that displays the message "Starting second time-saving?". However, with the above configuration, when a reserved change effect is determined to indicate a transition to the second time-saving game state, some players may mistakenly believe that the reserved change effect indicates that the result of the pre-determination is a jackpot.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, a reserved change presentation that notifies the player of a transition to the second time-saving game state is not executed. Specifically, the reserved change presentation does not include a presentation in which the reserved image GB changes to the special mode described above. The above configuration has the advantage that the above-mentioned inconveniences are suppressed. However, a configuration in which the reserved image GB can change to a special mode may also be used.

Figure 56 (b-2) is a diagram for explaining the probability that a hold change presentation will be determined during the limited period. As shown in Figure 56 (b-2), during the limited period, a hold change presentation will not be determined regardless of the result of the pre-determination. However, during the limited period, a hold change presentation may be determined with a lower probability than during the non-limited period. Also, during the limited period, a hold change presentation may be determined only if the result of the pre-determination is a jackpot. Furthermore, during the limited period, a hold change presentation may be determined only if the result of the pre-determination is anything other than a miss.

Figure 56 (c) is a schematic diagram of the screen displayed on the image display device 31 during the limited period. During the limited period, the various images described above using Figure 29 (a) are displayed. Also, during the limited period, as shown in Figure 30 (c), an emphasis image GZ is displayed. The emphasis image GZ is an image for emphasizing the number of remaining plays until the transition to the second time-saving play state.

The above-mentioned emphasis image GZ is displayed, for example, approximately near the center of the screen of the image display device 31. The emphasis image GZ is displayed immediately after the start of the game and is hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed. Specifically, the display time of the emphasis image GZ is shorter than the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be determined within the limited period. With the above configuration, the inconvenience of the emphasis image GZ displayed in the current game being displayed when the next game is started is suppressed.

Specifically, in the game three times before the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state (the game in which the cumulative number m is added to the value "797"), an emphasis image GZ displaying the message "3 more times" is displayed. Similarly, in the game two times before the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state (the game in which the cumulative number m is added to the value "798"), an emphasis image GZ displaying the message "2 more times" is displayed, in the game one time before the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state (the game in which the cumulative number m is added to the value "799"), an emphasis image GZ displaying the message "1 more time" is displayed, and in the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state (the game in which the cumulative number m is added to the value "800"), an emphasis image GZ displaying the message "LAST" is displayed.

However, the games in which the emphasis image GZ is displayed are not limited to the above examples. Specifically, the emphasis image GZ may be displayed from a game before the start of the limited period. For example, the emphasis image GZ may be displayed from a game five times before the game that transitions to the second time-shortened game state. The emphasis image GZ may also be displayed from a game after the limit period has been started. For example, the emphasis image GZ may be displayed only in a game that transitions to the second time-shortened game state. The emphasis image GZ in the third embodiment may also be displayed together with a message that creates anticipation of a transition to the second time-shortened game state, such as "3 more games until the start of the second time-shortened game state."

The above-mentioned emphasis image GZ has the advantage that it is easier for the player to understand that the game will be transitioned to the second time-shortened game state. If the reserve change effect is executed during the period when the emphasis image GZ is displayed, it is expected that the player will pay attention to the reserve change effect and not to the emphasis image GZ. In the configuration of the third embodiment, a limited period is set immediately before the transition to the second time-shortened game state, and the reserve change effect is not executed during the period when the emphasis image GZ is displayed. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed, and the effect of making it easier for the player to understand that the game will be transitioned to the second time-shortened game state is particularly remarkable. Note that the effect of making it easier for the player to understand that the game will be transitioned to the second time-shortened game state is guaranteed to a minimum extent by simply preventing the reserve change effect from being executed during the limited period, so the play count image GE displayed before the limited period may be continuously displayed without displaying the emphasis image GZ during the limited period.

Figures 57(a-1) to 57(a-4) and 57(b-1) to 57(b-4) are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the period during which the normal symbol display device 22 changes the normal symbol and the period during which the opening and closing door 14b operates (the second starting opening 14 is open). Each of the above figures shows the game status at each point in time, in addition to the period during which the normal symbol changes and the period during which the opening and closing door 14b operates. Each of the above figures also shows the number of reserved balls at each point in time.

As mentioned above, in the non-time-saving game state, the change time of the normal pattern is approximately 10 seconds. Also, in the time-saving game state, the change time of the normal pattern is approximately 1 second. For the sake of explanation, the change time of the normal pattern in the non-time-saving game state may be referred to as "change time Ha." Also, the change time of the normal pattern in the time-saving game state may be referred to as "change time Hb." As mentioned above, the change time Hb of the normal pattern is the same in each time-saving game state (first to third time-saving game states).

In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, the total opening time of the opening door 14b when the opening pattern (long opening pattern, short opening pattern) is displayed frozen is about 4.2 seconds or about 0.2 seconds. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the operation mode (total opening time, number of openings) of the opening door 14b when the opening pattern is displayed frozen in the non-time-saving game state may be collectively referred to as "operation mode Da". Similarly, in the time-saving game state, the total opening time of the opening door 14b when the opening pattern is displayed frozen is about 5 seconds or about 3 seconds. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the operation mode of the opening door 14b when the opening pattern is displayed frozen in the time-saving game state may be collectively referred to as "operation mode Db". As mentioned above, the operation mode of the opening door 14b in each time-saving game state is the same.

Figure 57 (a-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, Figure 57 (a-1) assumes a case in which the variable display of a normal symbol that started in a low-probability non-time-saving game state is stopped. In the above case, the normal symbol fluctuates over a variable time Ha. Also, Figure 57 (a-1) assumes a case in which the reserved number for the normal symbol lottery is added to the number "1" before the time ta1 at which the variable display stops.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-1) above, the normal symbol is displayed stationary from time ta1 when the normal symbol stops until time ta2 when the wait period (about 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. In addition, a normal symbol memory determination process (see FIG. 36(b)) for starting the next variable display of the normal symbol is executed immediately after time ta2. When the normal symbol memory determination process is executed, the reserved number is subtracted and a new variable display of the normal symbol is started. In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-1), the game state at time ta2 is a low-probability non-time-saving game state. Therefore, the variable time Ha is determined in the normal symbol memory determination process executed immediately after time ta2.

Figure 57 (a-2) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, Figure 57 (a-2) assumes a case in which the variable display of the normal symbol that started in the low probability non-time-saving game state is stopped, similar to the above-mentioned Figure 57 (a-1). In the above case, the normal symbol fluctuates over the variable time Ha. Also, the specific example of Figure 57 (a-2) assumes a case in which the reserved number of the normal symbol lottery is added to the number "1" before the time ta1 at which the variable display stops. Also, it assumes a case in which the waiting period in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed ends at time ta2. In the above configuration, immediately after time ta2, a normal symbol memory judgment process is executed to start a new game.

The specific example in FIG. 57(a-2) differs from the specific example in FIG. 57(a-1) described above in that a transition from a low-probability non-time-saving game state to a low-probability time-saving game state occurs at time tx. Specifically, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, when the cumulative number m reaches the number of activations n, a transition to a second time-saving game state occurs. Also, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, when a time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed on the special pattern display device, a transition to a third time-saving game state occurs. The specific example in FIG. 57(a-2) assumes that a transition trigger to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state occurs at time tx.

As shown in FIG. 57(a-2), time tx is before the time when a new normal symbol memory determination process is executed (immediately after time ta2). Specifically, time tx is a time in the middle of the changing display of the normal symbol that stops at time ta.

In the third embodiment, even if a transition to the time-saving game state occurs midway through the variable display of normal symbols that started in a non-time-saving game state, the variable display continues until the variable time Ha is reached. In other words, the variable time Ha determined at the start of the variable display of normal symbols does not change even if a transition to the time-saving game state occurs midway through the variable display. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 57(a-2), even if a transition to the time-saving game state occurs midway through the variable display of normal symbols that stops at time ta1, the variable display continues until the variable time Ha is reached. With the above configuration, the already determined variable time Ha is not unnecessarily changed, which suppresses the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the normal symbols (long opening symbol, short opening symbol, and losing symbol) determined at the start of the change are not changed even if the game state changes during the change display. With the above configuration, the normal symbols that have already been determined are not changed unnecessarily, which reduces the inconvenience of harming the fairness of the game.

In the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-2), the winning judgment random number value obtained in the non-time-saving game state is judged in the normal symbol memory judgment process immediately after time ta2. However, the game state at time ta2 is the time-saving game state. Therefore, in the normal symbol memory judgment process, the normal symbol lottery (winning judgment process) is executed with the winning probability in the time-saving game state. Also, in the normal symbol memory judgment process, the time-saving game state fluctuation time Hb is determined as the normal symbol fluctuation time, and the time-saving game state operation mode Db is determined as the operation mode of the opening and closing door 14b.

Figure 57 (a-3) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which an open pattern is stopped and displayed on the normal pattern display device 22. Specifically, like the above-mentioned Figures 57 (a-1) and 57 (a-2), Figure 57 (a-3) assumes a case in which the variable display of a normal pattern that started in a low-probability non-time-saving game state is stopped. In the above cases, the normal pattern fluctuates over the variation time Ha. Also, Figure 57 (a-3) assumes a case in which the reserved number for the normal pattern lottery is added to the number "1" before the time ta1 at which the variable display stops.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-3), it is assumed that the opening pattern is stopped at time ta1 and the opening/closing door 14b is changed to an operating state. Note that in FIG. 57(a-3), the time ta1 at which the opening pattern is stopped and the time at which the opening/closing door 14b is activated are shown to be approximately the same. However, in reality, after the opening pattern is stopped, the opening/closing door 14b is activated after the wait period has ended. In other words, the time at which the opening/closing door 14b is activated is after time ta1. The same is true for FIG. 57(a-4), FIG. 57(b-3), and FIG. 57(b-4) described below. However, the configuration may be such that the time ta1 at which the opening pattern is stopped and the time at which the opening/closing door 14b is activated are approximately the same.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-3), the operation mode Da is determined when the normal symbol starts to change. Also, assume that the operation of the opening and closing door 14b ends at time ta2. In the above case, the normal symbol memory determination process is executed immediately after time ta2, and a new change display of the normal symbol can start. In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-3), the game state at time ta2 is a non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the normal symbol memory determination process, the change time Ha is determined as the change time of the normal symbol.

Figure 57 (a-4) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which an open pattern is stopped and displayed on the normal pattern display device 22. Specifically, Figure 57 (a-4) assumes a case in which the variable display of a normal pattern that started in a low-probability non-time-saving game state is stopped, similar to the above-mentioned Figure 57 (a-3). In the above cases, the normal pattern fluctuates over the variable time Ha. Also, Figure 57 (a-4) assumes a case in which the reserved number for the normal pattern lottery is added to the number "1" before the time ta1 at which the variable display stops.

However, the specific example in FIG. 57(a-4) differs from the specific example in FIG. 57(a-3) above in that the low-probability non-time-saving game state transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state at time tx prior to the time when the new normal symbol memory determination process is executed (immediately after time ta2). Specifically, FIG. 57(a-4) assumes a case where the low-probability non-time-saving game state transitions to the low-probability time-saving game state during the period when the opening/closing door 14b is in an operating state.

In the third embodiment, even if the time-saving game state is entered during the operation of the opening and closing door 14b that was started in the non-time-saving game state, the operation of the opening and closing door 14b continues in the operation mode that has already been determined. In other words, the operation mode Da of the non-time-saving game state that was determined at the start of the fluctuation of the normal pattern is not changed even if the time-saving game state is entered during the operation of the opening and closing door 14b. With the above configuration, the already determined operation mode of the opening and closing door is not changed unnecessarily, thereby suppressing the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game.

In the specific example of FIG. 31 (a-4), in the normal symbol memory judgment process immediately after time ta2, the random number value for winning judgment obtained in the non-time-saving game state is judged. However, the game state at time ta2 is the time-saving game state. Therefore, in the normal symbol memory judgment process, the normal symbol lottery (winning judgment process) is executed with the winning probability in the time-saving game state. Also, in the normal symbol memory judgment process, the fluctuation time Hb is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the operation mode Db is determined as the operation mode of the opening and closing door 14b.

Figure 57 (b-1) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, Figure 57 (b-1) assumes a case in which the variable display of a normal symbol that started in a low-probability time-saving game state (including the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state) stops at time ta1. As described above, in the time-saving game state, the normal symbol fluctuates over a variable time Hb. Also, Figure 57 (b-1) assumes a case in which the reserved number for the normal symbol lottery is added to the number "1" before time ta1 when the variable display stops.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-1) above, the normal symbol is displayed stationary from time ta1 when the normal symbol stops until time ta2 when the wait period (about 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-1), the game state at time ta2 is a low-probability time-saving game state. Therefore, the fluctuation time Hb is determined in the normal symbol memory determination process executed immediately after time ta2.

Figure 57 (b-2) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, like the above-mentioned Figure 57 (b-1), Figure 57 (b-2) assumes a case in which the variable display of a normal symbol that started in a low-probability time-saving game state stops at time ta1. Also, Figure 57 (b-2) assumes a case in which the reserved number for the normal symbol lottery is added to the number "1" before time ta1 when the variable display stops.

However, the specific example in FIG. 57(b-2) differs from the specific example in FIG. 57(b-1) above in that the low-probability time-saving game state transitions to the low-probability non-time-saving game state at time tx before the new normal symbol memory determination process is executed (immediately after time ta2 when the wait period ends). Specifically, the specific example in FIG. 57(b-2) assumes a transition from the low-probability time-saving game state to the low-probability non-time-saving game state at time tx during the variable display of normal symbols. An example of the above case is when the remaining number of times M (2, 3) in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is reduced to the numerical value "0" at time tx.

In the third embodiment, even if the normal symbol variable display that started in the time-saving game state transitions to a non-time-saving game state in the middle of the variable display, the variable display continues until the variable time Hb is reached. In other words, the variable time Hb of the time-saving game state determined at the start of the normal symbol variable is not changed even if the non-time-saving game state transitions in the middle of the variable display. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-2), even if the normal symbol variable display that stops at time ta1 transitions to a non-time-saving game state in the middle of the variable display, the variable display continues until the variable time Hb is reached. In the above configuration, the already determined variable time of the normal symbol is not unnecessarily changed, thereby suppressing the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game.

In the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-2), the winning judgment random number value obtained in the time-saving game state is judged in the normal symbol memory judgment process immediately after time ta2. However, the game state at time ta2 is a non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the normal symbol memory judgment process, a normal symbol lottery is executed with the winning probability of the non-time-saving game state. Also, in the normal symbol memory judgment process, the fluctuation time Ha is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the operation mode Da is determined as the operation mode of the opening and closing door 14b.

Figure 57 (b-3) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which an open symbol is displayed stationary on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, like the above-mentioned Figures 57 (b-1) and 57 (b-2), Figure 57 (b-3) assumes a case in which the variable display of a normal symbol that started in a low-probability time-saving game state stops at time ta1. Also, Figure 57 (b-3) assumes a case in which the reserved number for the normal symbol lottery is added to the number "1" before time ta1 when the variable display stops.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3), it is assumed that the open symbol is displayed stationary at time ta1, and the opening and closing door 14b changes to operating. As described above, in the time-saving game state, the operating mode Db is determined as the operating mode of the opening and closing door 14b. In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3), it is assumed that the operating state of the opening and closing door 14b ends at time ta2. In the above cases, the normal symbol memory determination process for starting a new variable display is executed immediately after time ta2. In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3), the game state at time ta2 is the time-saving game state. Therefore, the normal symbol variable time determined in the normal symbol memory determination process immediately after time ta2 is the variable time Hb.

Figure 57 (b-4) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which the opening pattern is stopped and displayed on the normal pattern display device 22. Like the above-mentioned Figure 57 (b-3), Figure 57 (b-4) assumes a case in which the reserved number of normal pattern lotteries is added to the value "1" before the time ta1 at which the variable display stops, and the operation of the opening and closing door 14b ends at time ta2. However, the specific example of Figure 57 (b-4) differs from the specific example of Figure 57 (b-3) above in that the low-probability time-saving game state transitions to the low-probability non-time-saving game state at time tx before the time at which the normal pattern memory determination process is executed (immediately after time ta2). Specifically, Figure 57 (b-4) assumes a case in which the low-probability time-saving game state transitions to the low-probability non-time-saving game state during the period in which the opening and closing door 14b is in an operating state.

In the third embodiment, even if the operation of the opening and closing door 14b, which has started in the time-saving game state, transitions to a non-time-saving game state midway, the operation of the opening and closing door 14b continues in the operation mode already determined. In other words, the operation mode Db of the time-saving game state determined at the start of the fluctuation of the normal pattern is not changed even if the operation of the opening and closing door 14b transitions to a non-time-saving game state midway. With the above configuration, the already determined operation mode of the opening and closing door is not unnecessarily changed, thereby suppressing the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game.

In the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-4), the winning judgment random number value obtained in the time-saving game state is judged in the normal symbol memory judgment process immediately after time ta2. However, the game state at time ta2 is a non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the normal symbol memory judgment process, a normal symbol lottery is executed with the winning probability of the non-time-saving game state. Also, in the normal symbol memory judgment process, the fluctuation time Ha is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the operation mode Da is determined as the operation mode of the opening and closing door 14b.

Figures 58(a) and 58(b) are other diagrams for explaining the relationship between the period during which the normal symbol display device 22 changes the normal symbol and the period during which the opening and closing door 14b operates. Note that each of the above diagrams shows the game state at each point in time, in addition to the period during which the normal symbol changes and the period during which the opening and closing door 14b operates (similar to Figure 31 above).

Figure 58(a) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which an opening pattern is displayed in a stopped state on the normal pattern display device 22. The specific example in Figure 58(a) assumes a transition from a low-probability non-time-saving game state to a time-saving game state at time tx, and then a stopping display of the opening pattern at time ta. In the above case, as shown in Figure 58(a), the opening door 14b is controlled in operation mode Db immediately after time ta. In other words, even if the variable display of the normal pattern display device 22 starts in a non-time-saving game state, if the state has transitioned to a time-saving game state at the time the opening pattern is stopped and displayed, the opening door 14b is controlled in operation mode Db.

Figure 58(b) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which an opening pattern is displayed in a stopped state on the normal pattern display device 22. The specific example in Figure 58(b) assumes a case in which a time-saving game state transitions to a low-probability non-time-saving game state at time tx, and then the opening pattern is displayed in a stopped state at time ta. In the above case, as shown in Figure 58(b), the opening door 14b is controlled in operation mode Da immediately after time ta. In other words, even if the variable display of the normal pattern display device 22 starts in a time-saving game state, if the state has transitioned to a non-time-saving game state at the time the opening pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the opening door 14b is controlled in operation mode Da.

Figure 59(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of when the second time-saving game state ends. As described above, the second time-saving game state ends when 1000 plays have been played. Furthermore, if a jackpot game is won, the second time-saving game state may end before the number of plays reaches 1000. Figure 59(a) shows a specific example of when the second time-saving game state ends when a jackpot game is won.

Figure 59(a) shows the period during which the second time-saving game state is active, and the remaining number of times M2 in the second time-saving game state at each point in time. Also, Figure 59(a) shows the period during which the first time-saving game state is active, and the remaining number of times M1 in the first time-saving game state. Furthermore, Figure 59(a) shows the period of the jackpot game (including the opening period and the ending period).

In the specific example of FIG. 59(a), it is assumed that a jackpot game starts at time tb1 in the second time-saving game state. Also, the remaining number of times M2 immediately before time tb1 is the value "800". In the above case, the initialization process at the time of the jackpot described above is executed at time tb1. Therefore, the remaining number of times M2 is cleared to the value "0", and the second time-saving game state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 59(a), it is assumed that the jackpot game ends at time tb2. In the above case, at time tb2, the remaining number of times M1 in the first time-saving game state is set to the initial value "100", and the first time-saving game state begins. Furthermore, when the jackpot game ends, the second time-saving game state does not resume.

Figure 59(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of when the third time-saving gaming state ends. As described above, the third time-saving gaming state ends when 100 or 1000 games have been played. The third time-saving gaming state may also end when a jackpot game is won. Figure 59(b) shows a specific example of when the third time-saving gaming state ends when a jackpot game is won.

Figure 59(b) shows the period during which the third time-saving game state is active, and the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-saving game state at each point in time. Also, Figure 59(b) shows the period during which the first time-saving game state is active, and the remaining number of times M1 in the first time-saving game state. Furthermore, Figure 59(b) shows the period of the jackpot game (including the opening period and the ending period).

In the specific example of FIG. 59(b), it is assumed that a jackpot game starts at time tc1 in the third time-saving game state. Also, the remaining number of times M3 immediately before time tc1 is the value "10". In the above case, the initialization process at the time of the jackpot described above is executed at time tc1. Therefore, the remaining number of times M3 is cleared to the value "0", and the third time-saving game state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 59(b), it is assumed that the jackpot game ends at time tc2. In the above case, at time tc2, the remaining number of times M1 in the first time-saving game state is set to the initial value "100", and the first time-saving game state begins. Furthermore, when the jackpot game ends, the third time-saving game state does not resume.

The first time-saving game state ends after 100 plays. If the low-probability game state continues for 800 plays, the second time-saving game state starts. In the above configuration, the first time-saving game state ends before the second time-saving game state starts, so there is no period during which the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state operate in an overlapping manner. However, a configuration in which there may be a period during which the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state operate in an overlapping manner may also be used. For example, a configuration in which a value greater than "800 plays" may be set as the initial value of the remaining number of times M1 in the first time-saving game state is considered. In the above configuration, in the low-probability game state after the first time-saving game state reaches 800 plays, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state operate in an overlapping manner.

In addition, in a time-saving game state including the first time-saving game state, even if the time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the state does not transition to the third time-saving game state. In the above configuration, there is no period during which the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state are operating in an overlapping manner. However, a configuration in which a period during which the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state are operating in an overlapping manner may also be used. For example, when a time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the first time-saving game state, a configuration in which the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state are operating in an overlapping manner during the subsequent period is conceivable. As will be described in detail below, in the third embodiment, the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state may be operating in an overlapping manner.

Figure 59(c) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state are activated at the same time. Figure 59(c) shows the period during which the second time-saving game state is activated and the period during which the third time-saving game state is activated. Figure 59(c) also shows the remaining number of times M2 in the second time-saving game state and the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-saving game state and the cumulative number of times m at each time point. In the specific example of Figure 59(c), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m reaches the activation number "800" at time point td1 in the third time-saving game state. In the above case, the second time-saving game state is activated from time point td1. In the specific example of Figure 59(c), it is assumed that the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-saving game state is the value "X" (where 0<X<1000) immediately after the second time-saving game state starts.

As shown in FIG. 59(c), in the period from time td1 onwards, both the second time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state are activated. In addition, in the period in which both the second time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state are activated, the value "1" is subtracted from each of the remaining number of times M2 and the remaining number of times M3 in each game. In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), it is assumed that the remaining number of times M3 is subtracted to the value "0" at time td2. In the above case, the third time-shortened game state ends at time td2.

In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), the remaining number of times M2 (1000-X) at time td2 is equal to or greater than the value "1." In the above specific example, at time td2, the third time-shortened gaming state ends, while the second time-shortened gaming state continues. In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), at time td3 after time td2, the remaining number of times M2 is subtracted to the value "0," and the second time-shortened gaming state ends.

In the above third embodiment, when the cumulative number m reaches the activation number n, the second time-saving game state is activated even in the third time-saving game state. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the second time-saving game state is not activated depending on the game state in which the cumulative number m reaches the activation number n, the inconvenience of the player being at an excessive disadvantage is suppressed. Also, in the third embodiment, in a period in which two time-saving game states (the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state) are activated in an overlapping manner, the remaining number of times in both time-saving game states is subtracted. Therefore, for example, in a period in which two time-saving game states are activated in an overlapping manner, the subtraction of the remaining number of times in one time-saving game state is stopped, and one time-saving game state is resumed after the other time-saving game state ends, there is an advantage in that the inconvenience of the time-saving game state being excessively prolonged is suppressed.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the normal symbol variation time, the time during which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (the wait period time), and the operation mode of the opening and closing door 14b when the normal symbol lottery is won are common to each time-saving play state. In other words, the opening mode of the opening and closing door 14b is common to each time-saving play state.

Let us assume a comparison in which the opening manner of the opening/closing door 14b differs for each time-saving game state. In the above comparison, when the time-saving game states overlap, the question arises as to which opening manner of the time-saving game state should be prioritized. According to the third embodiment, the above problem is suppressed.

In addition, in the above comparison, it is assumed that a configuration is adopted in which the opening mode of the opening/closing door 14b changes when one time-saving game state ends and the other time-saving game state continues after the time-saving game states overlap. For example, in the above comparison, it is assumed that the time-saving game state A (opening mode is opening mode KA) and the time-saving game state B (opening mode is opening mode KB) overlap. In addition, in the above case, during the period when the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B overlap, the opening/closing door 14b is controlled by the opening mode KA of the time-saving game state A. Furthermore, it is assumed that after the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B overlap, the time-saving game state A ends and the time-saving game state B continues. In the above case, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 14b changes from the opening mode KA to the opening mode KB.

In the above comparison, the opening mode changes even though the time-saving game state continues, which may cause some players to feel uncomfortable. According to the third embodiment, the above inconveniences are suppressed. Note that in the above comparison, if the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B overlap, and then the time-saving game state A ends and the time-saving game state B continues, the opening door 14b may be controlled in the opening mode KA in the subsequent time-saving game state B. In the above configuration, the opening mode does not change when the time-saving game state A ends, which suppresses the above inconveniences.

Figures 60(a) to 60(c) are diagrams for explaining the state (on, off) of the right hit lamp 28 before and after the second time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state. As described above, the right hit lamp 28 is lit during the time-shortened game state, and is turned off when the time-shortened game state ends and transitions to a low-probability non-time-shortened game state. In addition, various external information signals are output from the gaming machine 1 to an external device (e.g., a hall computer). The various external information signals described above include an advantageous period signal.

The advantageous period signal changes to the ON state at the start of a jackpot game (start of the opening period), at the start of the second time-saving game state, and at the start of the third time-saving game state, and is then maintained in the ON state until the game transitions to a low-probability non-time-saving game state. In other words, the above advantageous period signal is turned ON in game states where playing with the right hand is more advantageous than playing with the left hand (jackpot game, low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state).

Figures 60(a) to 60(c) show the state (ON, OFF) of the advantageous period signal at each point in time. Figures 60(a) to 60(c) also show the cumulative number m at each point in time. Note that when a small win game is played in a low-probability non-time-saving game state, the advantageous period signal may be maintained in the OFF state or may be temporarily turned to the ON state.

Figure 60(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the state of the right hit lamp 28 before and after the second time-shortened gaming state. The specific example in Figure 60(a) assumes that at time te1, the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of activations "800", and the game transitions to the second time-shortened gaming state. As shown in Figure 60(a), in the low-probability non-time-shortened gaming state before the transition to the second time-shortened gaming state, the advantageous period signal is in the OFF state, and the right hit lamp 28 is turned off.

In the specific example of FIG. 60(a) above, the right hit lamp 28 starts to light at time te1. That is, the right hit lamp 28 starts to light up at approximately the same time as the start of the second time-saving game state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, the cumulative number m is determined when the special symbol stops (special symbol stop processing), and immediately thereafter, the second time-saving flag is changed to the ON state. The main CPU 111 keeps the right hit lamp 28 off until the second time-saving flag is turned ON (until the special symbol stops), and turns on the right hit lamp 28 immediately (approximately at the same time) after the second time-saving flag is turned ON. In addition, the main CPU 111 keeps the advantageous period signal in the OFF state until the second time-saving flag is turned ON, and changes the advantageous period signal to the ON state immediately after the second time-saving flag is turned ON. In the third embodiment, the main CPU 111 turns on the right hit lamp 28 and turns on the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is zero at the time of transition to the second time-saving game state.

In the specific example of FIG. 60(a), it is assumed that 1000 plays have been played and the second time-shortened game state has ended at time te2. In the above case, a low-probability non-time-shortened game state starts from time te2. The above time te2 is the time when the special symbol stops in the 1000th play in the second time-shortened game state. As shown in FIG. 60(a), the right-hit lamp 28 is lit until the special symbol stops in the 1000th play in the second time-shortened game state, and then goes out. In addition, the advantageous period signal is maintained in the ON state until the special symbol stops in the 1000th play in the second time-shortened game state, and then changes to the OFF state.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol, the third time-saving transition determination process is executed before the time-saving end determination process (see FIG. 53 described above). In the above configuration, let us assume that the time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in the last play of the second time-saving game state. In the above case, the second time-saving game state is in effect when the third time-saving transition determination process is executed (the second time-saving flag is in the ON state). Furthermore, in the third time-saving transition determination process, the game does not transition to the third time-saving game state except in the low-probability non-time-saving state. Therefore, even if the time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in the last play of the second time-saving game state, the game does not transition to the third time-saving game state (the time-saving symbol becomes invalid).

As can be understood from the above explanation, in the third embodiment, even if the time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in the last play of the second time-saving play state, the game does not transition to the third time-saving play state (transition to the low-probability non-time-saving play state), the right hit lamp 28 is turned off, and the advantageous period signal is turned OFF. However, when the special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol, the third time-saving transition determination process may be executed after the time-saving end determination process. In the above configuration, if the time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in the last play of the second time-saving play state, the game then transitions to the third time-saving play state. The main CPU 111 in the third embodiment turns off the right hit lamp 28 and turns the advantageous period signal OFF, even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 at the time the second time-saving play state ends.

Figure 60(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the state of the right hit lamp 28 before and after the third time-shortened game state. The specific example in Figure 60(b) assumes that the time-shortened symbol stops at time tf1 and the game transitions to the third time-shortened game state. As shown in Figure 60(c), in the low-probability non-time-shortened game state before the transition to the third time-shortened game state, the advantageous period signal is in the OFF state and the right hit lamp 28 is turned off.

In the specific example of FIG. 60(b) above, the right hit lamp 28 is turned on at time tf1. That is, the right hit lamp 28 is turned on at approximately the same time as the start of the third time-saving game state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, when the special symbol stops (special symbol stop processing), it is determined whether the time-saving symbol has stopped, and immediately thereafter, the third time-saving flag is changed to the ON state. The main CPU 111 keeps the right hit lamp 28 off until the third time-saving flag is turned on (until the special symbol stops), and turns on the right hit lamp 28 immediately (approximately at the same time) after the third time-saving flag is turned on. In addition, the main CPU 111 keeps the advantageous period signal in the OFF state until the third time-saving flag is turned on, and changes the advantageous period signal to the ON state immediately after the third time-saving flag is turned on. In addition, even if the number of reserved special symbols is zero at the time of transition to the third time-saving game state, the main CPU 111 will light up the right hit lamp 28 and turn on the advantageous period signal.

In the specific example of FIG. 60(b), it is assumed that the special symbol J1 among the time-saving symbols is stopped and displayed at time tf1. In the above case, the initial value of the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-saving game state is "100 times". In addition, in the specific example of FIG. 60(b), it is assumed that 100 games are played and the third time-saving game state ends at time tf2. Furthermore, in the specific example of FIG. 60(b), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m is not the number "1000" (when the transition trigger to the second time-saving game state is not established) at time tf2 when the 100th game in the third time-saving game state ends. In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving game state starts from time tf2. The above time tf2 is the time when the special symbol (excluding the jackpot symbol) stops during the 100th game in the third time-saving game state.

In the specific example of FIG. 60(b) above, the right hit lamp 28 is lit until the special symbol stops in the 100th play in the third time-saving play state, and then goes out. Also, the advantageous period signal is maintained in the ON state until the special symbol stops in the 100th play in the third time-saving play state, and then changes to the OFF state.

In the third embodiment, similarly to when the time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in the final play of the second time-saving play state, when the time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in the final play of the third time-saving play state, the game does not transition to the third time-saving play state (it transitions to a low-probability non-time-saving play state), the right hit lamp 28 goes out, and the advantageous period signal goes to the OFF state. Note that the main CPU 111 turns off the right hit lamp 28 and sets the advantageous period signal to the OFF state even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 at the time the third time-saving play state ends.

Figure 60(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the state of the right-hit lamp 28 before and after the third time-shortened game state. In the specific example of Figure 60(c), similar to the above-mentioned Figure 60(b), it is assumed that the special symbol J1 (time-shortened symbol) stops at time tg1 and a transition to the third time-shortened game state occurs. However, while the above-mentioned specific example of Figure 60(b) assumes that the transition trigger to the second time-shortened game state is not established at time tf2 when the third time-shortened game state ends, the specific example of Figure 60(c) assumes that the transition trigger to the second time-shortened game state is established.

Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 60(c), at time tg2, which is the end time of the final play in the third time-saving play state, the cumulative number m is added to the value "1000". In the above specific example, just before the third time-saving flag is changed to the OFF state in the time-saving end determination process, the second time-saving flag is changed to the ON state in the second time-saving transition determination process. Also, in the time-saving end determination process immediately after the second time-saving transition determination process, the third time-saving flag is changed to the OFF state. In the above case, there is no period during which both the second time-saving flag and the third time-saving flag are in the OFF state before and after time tg. Therefore, before and after time tg2, the right hit lamp 28 is kept lit, and the external information signal is kept in the ON state.

The advantageous period signal may be temporarily changed to the OFF state immediately after time tg2. In the above configuration, even if the second time-shortened game state starts when the third time-shortened game state ends, it is possible to know from the advantageous period signal that the third time-shortened game state has ended. In addition, when the third time-shortened game state ends and the second time-shortened game state starts, a notification that right-hand shots should be continued may be made. In the above configuration, a notification is essentially made that the third time-shortened game state has ended and that the second time-shortened game state will start. In addition, when the third time-shortened game state ends during the second time-shortened game state, a notification that right-hand shots should be continued may be made.

Figures 61(a-1) to 61(a-3) are diagrams for explaining the images displayed when the time-saving game state is started. Figures 61(a-1) to 61(a-3) show the effects executed at each point in time, the period during which the effect pattern GA is displayed, and the background image GH displayed on the image display device 31 at each point in time.

In the third embodiment, when the time-saving game state starts, the entry image GT, prevention image GQ2, and warning image GQ2 described below are displayed. The entry image GT is an image for notifying the player that the time-saving game state is about to start (see FIG. 61(b-1) to FIG. 61(b-3) described below). The prevention image GQ2 is an image displayed to prevent the player from forgetting to take out the card (membership card, visitor card) inserted into the gaming device (see FIG. 61(b-1) described below). The warning image GQ2 is an image for warning the player about game dependence (see FIG. 61(b-2) described below). FIG. 61(a-1) to FIG. 61(a-3) show the period during which the entry image GT, prevention image GQ2, and warning image GQ2 are displayed.

Figure 61 (a-1) is a diagram for explaining the images displayed when the first time-saving game state is started among the time-saving game states. In addition to the images displayed after transitioning to the first time-saving game state, Figure 61 (a-1) also shows the images displayed during the jackpot game before transitioning to the first time-saving game state. As described above, the jackpot game is composed of an "opening period," a "round period," and an "ending period." The specific example of Figure 61 (a-1) assumes that the ending period of the jackpot game starts at time th1 (the round period ends) and the ending period ends at time th2.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a-1), during a round period of a jackpot game, a jackpot performance is executed. During the jackpot performance, for example, a predetermined moving image is displayed. Also, during the jackpot performance, a jackpot background image from the background image GH is displayed. The jackpot background image is, for example, an image corresponding to the moving image described above.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a-1), the effect symbol GA is not displayed during jackpot play. Also, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD are not displayed during jackpot play. However, the effect symbol GA may be hidden during jackpot play, while the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD are displayed. During the round period after the jackpot play, the entry image GT, the prevention image GQ2, and the warning image GQ2 are not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a-1), during the ending period of the jackpot game (the period from time th1 to time th2), a time-saving entry effect is executed. During the time-saving entry effect, a entry image GT is displayed to notify the player of a transition to a time-saving game state (the first time-saving game state in the specific example of FIG. 61 (a-1)). During the time-saving entry effect described above, the entry time background image GHz from the background image GH is displayed.

In addition, during the period in which the time-saving entry performance is being executed, the above-mentioned prevention image GQ2 and warning image GQ2 are displayed. Specifically, the prevention image GQ2 is displayed immediately after the time-saving entry performance starts. In addition, when a predetermined time has passed since the time-saving entry performance started, the warning image GQ2 is displayed in place of the prevention image GQ2. The above warning image GQ2 becomes invisible when the predetermined time has passed.

The period during which the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are displayed is not limited to the above example. For example, the warning image GQ2 may be displayed during (all or part of) the display period of the prevention image GQ2. In addition, the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 may be displayed immediately after the start of the first time-saving game state, or may be displayed immediately before the end of the first time-saving game state.

When the ending period of the jackpot game ends, the first time-saving game state starts, and the time-saving performance is executed. As shown in FIG. 61 (a-1), when the first time-saving game state starts, the performance symbol GA is displayed. Also, when the first time-saving game state starts, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD are displayed, and the time-saving background image GHy is displayed in place of the entry background image GHz.

Figure 61 (a-2) is a diagram for explaining the images displayed when the second time-shortened game state is started. In addition to the images displayed after transitioning to the second time-shortened game state, Figure 61 (a-2) shows the images displayed in the low-probability non-time-shortened game state before transitioning to the second time-shortened game state. The specific example of Figure 61 (a-2) assumes a transition to the second time-shortened game state at time ti1.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a-2), in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the normal effect is executed. Specifically, in a game that transitions to the second time-saving game state, a miss variation effect is executed in which a missing symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that in a game that transitions to the second time-saving game state, a miss variation effect different from that in other low-probability non-time-saving game states may be executed. In the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the effect pattern GAx described above is displayed. Also, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the normal background image GHx described above is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a-2), when the second time-saving game state is started, the above-mentioned time-saving entry effect is executed. When the above time-saving entry effect starts, the entry background image GHz is displayed in place of the normal background image GHx, and the entry image GT is displayed. Also, in the above time-saving entry effect, the effect pattern GAy is displayed. Furthermore, in the above time-saving entry effect, the small pattern Ga, the fourth pattern GC, and the reserved number image GD are displayed.

In the third embodiment, the time-saving entry effect is executed regardless of whether the first play in the second time-saving play state is executed (whether there are any reserved balls when the second time-saving play state is entered). As shown in FIG. 61 (a-2), the time-saving entry effect is executed for a predetermined period of time, and then the time-saving effect is executed. The time-saving effect is an effect that corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and a time-saving background image GHy that corresponds to the fluctuation mode of the effect symbol GA is displayed. When the second time-saving play state is activated, the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are not displayed in the time-saving entry effect and the time-saving effect.

In the third embodiment, in the time-saving entry performance when transitioning to the second time-saving game state, the special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner, and the performance pattern GA may be displayed in a variable manner. In consideration of the above circumstances, the time-saving entry performance may be configured to display the time-saving background image GHy for the time-saving performance. As can be understood from the above explanation, the "background image" displayed when transitioning to the "second game state" of the present invention is a concept that includes both the entry background image GHz and the time-saving background image GHy.

Figure 61 (a-3) is a diagram for explaining the images displayed when the third time-shortened game state is started. In addition to the images displayed after transitioning to the third time-shortened game state, Figure 61 (a-3) shows the images displayed in the low-probability non-time-shortened game state before transitioning to the third time-shortened game state. The specific example of Figure 61 (a-3) assumes a transition to the third time-shortened game state at time tj1.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a-3), in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the normal performance is executed. Specifically, in a game that transitions to the third time-saving game state, a time-saving transition performance is executed in which the time-saving symbol is displayed stationary. As shown in FIG. 61 (a-3), when the third time-saving game state is started, the above-mentioned time-saving entry performance is executed. The above-mentioned time-saving entry performance is executed for, for example, a predetermined period of time. When the above-mentioned time-saving entry performance is started, the entry background image GHz is displayed in place of the normal background image GHx, and the entry image GT is displayed.

When the third time-saving play state is started, the effect symbol GAy is displayed in the time-saving play entry effect. In the above time-saving play entry effects, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD are displayed, and the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are not displayed. In the third embodiment, the time-saving play entry effect is executed regardless of whether the first play in the third time-saving play state is executed (whether there is a reserved number when transitioning to the third time-saving play state).

The time-saving entry effect when the first time-saving game state starts is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. Therefore, there is little need to display the effect symbols GA, small symbol Ga, fourth symbol GC, and reserved number image GD. On the other hand, the period during which the time-saving entry effect is executed when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state starts is not the ending period of the jackpot game. Therefore, there is a high need to display the effect symbols GA, small symbol Ga, fourth symbol GC, and reserved number image GD.

Let us assume a configuration in which, in the time-saving entry presentation when the second or third time-saving game state is started, the prevention image GQ2 is displayed in addition to the above-mentioned images (presentation image GA, etc.). In the above configuration, the inconvenience of an excessive number of images being displayed on the image display device 31 is likely to occur. Furthermore, the above inconveniences can also occur when a configuration is adopted in which the warning image GQ2 is displayed in the time-saving entry presentation when the second or third time-saving game state is started.

Taking the above circumstances into consideration, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the prevention image GQ2 is not displayed in the time-saving entry presentation when the second time-saving game state is started, and in the time-saving entry presentation when the third time-saving game state is started. Also, a configuration is adopted in which the warning image GQ2 is not displayed in the time-saving entry presentation when the second time-saving game state is started, and in the time-saving entry presentation when the third time-saving game state is started. With the above configuration, the above-mentioned inconveniences are suppressed.

In addition, in the time-saving entry effect when the second time-saving game state is started, or in the time-saving entry effect when the third time-saving game state is started, the small symbol Ga may be displayed, and the display of the effect symbol GA may be omitted. With the above configuration, the effect of suppressing the above-mentioned inconveniences is particularly remarkable.

Figures 61 (b-1) and 61 (b-2) are schematic diagrams of screens displayed in the time-saving entry presentation when the first time-saving game state is started. Specifically, Figure 61 (b-1) is a schematic diagram of a screen on which a prevention image GQ2 is displayed. Also, Figure 61 (b-2) is a schematic diagram of a screen on which a warning image GQ2 is displayed. As shown in Figures 61 (b-1) and 61 (b-2), the entry image GT is displayed on each of the above screens. Also, the right-hit image Gsy is displayed on each of the above screens. Note that the right-hit image Gsy is displayed on the image display device 31 during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first time-saving game state.

Figure 61 (b-3) is a simulated diagram of the screen displayed in the time-saving entry presentation when the second time-saving game state begins. As shown in Figure 61 (b-3), in the time-saving entry presentation when the second time-saving game state begins, the entry image GT is displayed. In addition, in the above time-saving entry presentation, the right-hit image Gsy, presentation pattern GAy, small pattern Ga, fourth pattern GC, and reserved number image GD are displayed. In the specific example of Figure 61 (b-3), it is assumed that the reserved number is 0. If the reserved number is 1 or more, the reserved image GB described above is displayed in the time-saving entry presentation when the second time-saving game state begins.

When the third time-saving game state is started, the time-saving entry effect also displays the entry image GT, similar to the time-saving entry effect when the second time-saving game state is started. In addition, in the time-saving entry effect described above, the right-hit image Gsy, effect pattern GAy, small pattern Ga, fourth pattern GC, reserved number image GD, and reserved image GB are displayed.

In the third embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned images (entry image GT, etc.), various images are displayed on the image display device 31 when the time-saving game state is activated. The other images displayed on the image display device 31 will be described in detail using Figures 62 and 63 below.

Figure 62 (a) is a simulated diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 after the second time-saving game state is started. As described above, in the second time-saving game state, various images including the right-hit image Gsy are displayed. In addition, when the second time-saving game state is started, the right-hit start image GR shown in Figure 62 (a) is displayed. The right-hit start image GR is displayed after the above-mentioned entry image GT (see Figure 61 (b-3)) is displayed. However, the display period of the right-hit start image GR and the display period of the entry image GT may be configured to overlap in whole or in part.

The right-hit start image GR, like the right-hit image Gsy, is an image that notifies the player that they should play with a right hit. However, the right-hit start image GR is displayed larger than the right-hit image Gsy. Also, while the right-hit image Gsy is displayed near the top right corner of the screen, the right-hit start image GR is displayed approximately in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), the right-hit start image GR is displayed in priority (toward the player) over the performance symbol GAy. The right-hit start image GR described above makes it easier for the player to recognize that he or she should start playing with a right hit. The right-hit start image GR is also displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) and then becomes hidden. Furthermore, a predetermined sound is output in conjunction with the display of the right-hit start image GR. For example, the sound "right hit" is output.

In the third embodiment, regardless of whether or not play begins immediately after transitioning to the second time-saving play state, the right-hit start image GR is displayed and the sound "right hit" is output. In other words, even if the number of reserved balls is zero when transitioning to the second time-saving play state, the right-hit image GR is displayed and the sound "right hit" is output. Also, even if the number of reserved balls is zero when transitioning to the second time-saving play state, the time-saving background image GHy of the time-saving play state is displayed.

In the second time-saving play state, predetermined background music is output. The above background music starts to be output when the second time-saving play state starts, regardless of whether or not play starts immediately after the transition to the second time-saving play state. However, if the non-play period continues for a predetermined time, the volume of the gaming machine 1 is changed to "0" and the background music can no longer be heard.

In the specific example of FIG. 62(a), it is assumed that the number of reserved symbols is 0 when the second time-saving game state is started. In the above case, immediately after the second time-saving game state is started, the effect symbol GA and small symbol Ga are displayed in a stopped state. Note that the effect symbol GA may be hidden (with the small symbol Ga continuing to be displayed) during the period when the right-hit start image GR is displayed.

When the third time-saving game state is started, similarly to when the second time-saving game state is started, regardless of whether there are any reserved balls or not, the right-hit image Gsy is displayed, the right-hit start image GR is displayed, a sound is output instructing the player to play with a right hit, the BGM for the third time-saving game state starts to be output, and the time-saving background image GHy is displayed. In addition, during the period when the right-hit start image GR of the third time-saving game state is displayed, the effect pattern GA and small pattern Ga are displayed. However, immediately after the start of the second time-saving game state, the effect pattern GA and small pattern Ga corresponding to the losing pattern are displayed, whereas immediately after the start of the third time-saving game state, the effect pattern GA and small pattern Ga corresponding to the time-saving pattern are displayed.

Figure 62 (b) is a simulated diagram of the screen displayed on the image display device 31 immediately after the second time-saving game state ends and transitions to a low-probability non-time-saving game state. As shown in Figure 62 (b), immediately after the second time-saving game state ends, a left-hit image Gsx is displayed. The above left-hit image Gsx is an image that instructs the player to play by hitting with the left hand, and is displayed in place of the above-mentioned right-hit image Gsy. In addition, the left-hit image Gsx is displayed in the same position as the right-hit image Gsy.

As shown in FIG. 62(b), immediately after the second time-saving game state ends, the left hit start image GL is displayed. The left hit start image GL, like the left hit image Gsx, is an image for informing the player that they should play with a left hit. However, the left hit start image GL is displayed larger than the left hit image Gsx. Also, while the left hit image Gsx is displayed near the top right corner of the screen, the left hit start image GL is displayed approximately in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 62(b), the left-hit start image GL is displayed in priority (toward the player) over the performance pattern GAy. The above-described left-hit start image GL makes it easier for the player to recognize that he or she should start playing with a left-hit. The left-hit start image GL is also displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the second time-saving game state ends, and then becomes hidden. Furthermore, a predetermined sound is output in conjunction with the display of the left-hit start image GL. For example, a sound saying "Please return to left-hit" is output.

In the third embodiment, regardless of whether or not play is started immediately after the second time-saving play state ends, the left-hit start image GL is displayed and a voice saying "Please return to left-hit" is output. In other words, even if the number of reserved balls is zero when the second time-saving play state ends, the left-hit image GL is displayed and a voice saying "Please return to left-hit" is output. Also, even if the number of reserved balls is zero when the second time-saving play state ends, the normal background image GHx for the non-time-saving play state is displayed.

In the specific example of FIG. 62(a), it is assumed that the number of reserved balls is 0 when the second time-saving game state is started. In the above case, the effect symbol GA and small symbol Ga are displayed in a stopped state immediately after the second time-saving game state is started.

At the end of the third time-saving play state, just like at the end of the second time-saving play state, regardless of whether there are any reserved balls or not, the left-hand hit start image GL is displayed, a sound is output instructing the player to play with a left hand hit, and the normal background image GHx is displayed.

Figure 63 (a) is a diagram for explaining the result image GP. The result image GP is an image that displays information about the profits earned during a period that is advantageous to the player when that period ends. For example, the number of jackpot games during the period from when the first jackpot game is won until the game transitions to a low-probability non-time-saving game state (the advantageous period described above) and the total number of prize balls paid out during that period are displayed in the result image GP.

In the specific example of Figure 63(a), it is assumed that three jackpots are won during the advantageous period, and 4,515 prize balls are paid out. Note that the number of prize balls displayed in the result image GP in the third embodiment does not include prize balls paid out when game balls enter the start holes (13, 14) and the general prize hole 18. However, prize balls paid out when game balls enter the general prize hole 18 may be included in the number of prize balls displayed in the result image GP.

In addition, even if a jackpot is won in the first time-saving game state, which is controlled from the second time-saving game state via the jackpot game, and prize balls are paid out, the number of prize balls displayed in the result image GP does not include the number of prize balls paid out in the second time-saving game state. In other words, the result display does not include game information (number of prize balls, number of payouts, etc.) in the favorable state (second time-saving game state) before the start of the jackpot game.

Figure 63 (b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the period during which the result image GP is displayed. In the third embodiment, the result image GP is displayed when the first time-saving gaming state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 63(b), it is assumed that the final play of the first time-shortened play state begins at time tk1, and ends at time tk3. In the above case, the first time-shortened play state ends at time tk3, and a transition occurs to a low-probability non-time-shortened play state. In the specific example of FIG. 63(b), it is assumed that the jackpot lottery for the final play of the first time-shortened play state is a miss. FIG. 63(b) shows time tk2 at which the performance pattern GAy corresponding to the miss pattern is temporarily stopped in the final play of the first time-shortened play state.

In the specific example of FIG. 63(b) above, the result image GP is displayed immediately after the above-mentioned time point tk2. As can be seen from FIG. 63(a) above, during the period in which the result image GP is displayed, the small symbol Ga is displayed and the performance symbol GA is not displayed. Furthermore, the result image GP is displayed until the final game in the first time-saving game state is completed.

Let us assume a comparative example in which a result image GP is displayed when the second time-saving game state ends. As described above, the second time-saving game state operates without a jackpot game. Also, in the time-saving game state, game balls do not enter the winning holes (first large winning hole 16, second large winning hole 17) other than the starting hole (13, 14) and the general winning hole 18 as a rule. Therefore, in the above comparative example, if a jackpot game is not won in the second time-saving game state, the number of jackpot games displayed in the result image GP is "0 times," and the number of prize balls paid out is "0." When the above result image GP is displayed, some players may experience inconveniences that reduce their motivation to play.

Taking the above circumstances into consideration, the third embodiment employs a configuration in which the result image GP is not displayed when the second time-shortened game state ends. Figure 63(c) is a diagram for explaining the images displayed before and after the second time-shortened game state ends. Figure 63(c) assumes a case in which the second time-shortened game state ends at time tl and transitions to a low-probability non-time-shortened game state. As shown in Figure 63(c), the above-mentioned result image GP is not displayed before and after the second time-shortened game state ends.

The above-mentioned inconvenience also occurs in the case where the result image GP is displayed when the third time-shortened game state ends. In consideration of the above circumstances, the third embodiment adopts a configuration in which the result image GP is not displayed when the third time-shortened game state ends. FIG. 63(d) is a diagram for explaining images displayed before and after the third time-shortened game state ends. FIG. 63(c) assumes a case in which the third time-shortened game state ends at time tm and transitions to a low-probability non-time-shortened game state. As shown in FIG. 63(d), the above-mentioned result image GP is not displayed before and after the third time-shortened game state ends. Note that, when the second time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state end, an image displaying a message such as "Time-shortened end" may be displayed.

Figures 64(a) to 64(c) are diagrams for explaining the counting period of the base value in the third embodiment. As described above, during the counting period, the out counter for calculating the base value and the prize ball counter for calculating the base value are incremented. In other words, during the counting period, the base value is updated.

Figure 64(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the counting period before and after the second time-saving game state is started. In the specific example of Figure 64(a), it is assumed that the 800th game (variable display of special symbols) in the low-probability non-time-saving game state is started at time tn1. In addition, in the specific example of Figure 64(a), it is assumed that a losing symbol is displayed stationary in the 800th game in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Specifically, it is assumed that a losing symbol is displayed stationary at time tn2, and the cumulative number m reaches the value "800". In the above cases, the low-probability non-time-saving game state before time tn2 becomes the counting period. In addition, the second time-saving game state after time tn2 becomes the non-counting period.

In the specific example of FIG. 64(a), we consider the case where a jackpot game is not won in the second time-saving game state. Also, in the specific example of FIG. 64(a), we consider the case where the final game in the second time-saving game state starts at time tn3, and a losing symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in that game. Specifically, we consider the case where a losing symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol at time tn4, and the remaining number of times M2 is reduced to the value "0". In the above cases, the low-probability non-time-saving game state is entered from time tn4 onwards. Also, the counting period resumes from time tn4.

Figure 64(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the counting period before and after the start of the third time-saving game state. In the specific example of Figure 64(b), it is assumed that a game in which a time-saving symbol is displayed stationary in a low-probability non-time-saving game state is started at time to1. In addition, in the specific example of Figure 64(b), it is assumed that the time-saving symbol is displayed stationary at time to2. In the above cases, the low-probability non-time-saving game state before time to2 becomes the counting period. In addition, the third time-saving game state after time to2 becomes the non-counting period.

In the specific example of FIG. 64(b), we consider the case where no jackpot is won in the third time-saving game state. Also, in the specific example of FIG. 64(b), we consider the case where the final game in the third time-saving game state starts at time to3, and a losing symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in that game. Specifically, we consider the case where, at time to4, a losing symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol, and the remaining number of times M3 is reduced to the value "0".

In the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the cumulative number m is not "800" in the final play of the third time-saving play state. In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving play state occurs from time to4 onwards. The counting period also resumes from time to4. In the third embodiment, if a time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in the final play of the third time-saving play state, the measurement period is resumed in the same way as when a losing symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol. Note that if a small win symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in the final play of the third time-saving play state, the measurement period is resumed after the small win play ends.

Figure 64(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the counting period before and after the start of the third time-saving game state. In the specific example of Figure 64(c), a game in which a time-saving symbol is displayed stationary in a low-probability non-time-saving game state is assumed to start at time tp1. In addition, in the specific example of Figure 64(c), a game in which a time-saving symbol is displayed stationary at time tp2 is assumed. In the above cases, the low-probability non-time-saving game state before time tp2 becomes the counting period. Also, the third time-saving game state after time tp2 becomes the non-counting period (similar to Figure 64(b) above).

In the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the player does not win the big win in the third time-saving game state. In addition, in the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the final game in the third time-saving game state starts at time tp3, and a losing symbol is displayed in the game. Specifically, it is assumed that a losing symbol is displayed in the game at time tp4, and the remaining number M3 is subtracted to the value "0". Furthermore, in the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the cumulative number m is the value "800" in the final game in the third time-saving game state. In the above cases, the second time-saving game state is entered from time tp4 onwards. That is, the non-counting period continues even after time tp4. Note that, if the cumulative number m is added to the value "800" in the final game in the third time-saving game state, the non-counting period continues even if a time-saving symbol or a small winning symbol is displayed in the game. As described above, the first time-saving game state is a non-counting period. Similar to the case where the cumulative number m is added to the value "800" in the final game of the third time-saving game state, if the cumulative number m is added to the value "800" in the final game of the first time-saving game state, the non-counting period continues thereafter.

The configurations of the first and second embodiments described above can also be appropriately adopted in the third embodiment. For example, the update time of the play count image GE in the third embodiment (at the start of play) can be at the end of play, as in the first embodiment. Also, in the third embodiment, a remaining number image GN can be displayed together with the play count image GE.

In the third embodiment, the timing for displaying the remaining number of times image GN can be set appropriately. For example, a configuration can be considered in which the remaining number of times image GN is displayed at the same trigger as in the first embodiment (see Figures 15(a) to 15(d)). Note that in the third embodiment, there is a possibility of transitioning to the third time-shortened game state before the second time-shortened game state is started. In the third time-shortened game state, the remaining number of times image GN may or may not be displayed.

In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the remaining number of times N may be indicated as being fixed. Specifically, the remaining number of times image GN and the fixed number of times notification image GI may be displayed in the third embodiment under the same conditions as in the first embodiment. Also, in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a table scenario S may be set. Also, in the third embodiment, a normal mode and a previous mode may be provided. In the third embodiment, when the second time-saving game state is started, each screen (M1 to M7) may be displayed in a manner similar to that of the first embodiment.

In the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T of the game in which the remaining number N is subtracted to the value "0" may be different or may be common between the scenario setting period and the scenario not setting period. Also, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T of the first game in the second time-saving game state may be different or may be common between the scenario setting period and the scenario not setting period. In a configuration in which the variation pattern determination table T of the first game in the second time-saving game state is different between the scenario setting period and the scenario not setting period, each image (shielding image GF, etc.) displayed in the game may be different between the scenario setting period and the scenario not setting period. Similarly, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T of the last game in the second time-saving game state may be different or may be common between the scenario setting period and the scenario not setting period. In a configuration in which the variation pattern determination table T of the last game in the second time-saving game state is different between the scenario setting period and the scenario not setting period, each image displayed in the game may be different between the scenario setting period and the scenario not setting period. In the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T for the first play after the second time-saving play state ends may be different or the same for a scenario-set period and a scenario-unset period.

In the third embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table T may be different or common between the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state. Furthermore, in a configuration in which the fluctuation pattern determination table T is different between the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state, a configuration in which the average fluctuation time of the special chart is shorter in the second time-shortened game state than in the first time-shortened game state is preferable. Furthermore, a configuration in which the instant win effect is more easily executed in the second time-shortened game state than in the first time-shortened game state is preferable.

In the third embodiment, the area in which the remaining number of times M is displayed may be different or the same for the first time-saving play state and the second time-saving play state. Also, when the power is turned OFF/ON during the activated period in the third embodiment, a notification that the activated period is in progress may be displayed, as in the first embodiment. Also, in the third embodiment, a configuration may be configured to display that the second time-saving play state is installed, similar to the first embodiment, the modified example in FIG. 25(b-1), and the modified example shown in FIG. 25(b-2).

Also, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the number of variations that can be performed in the first time-shortened game state is set to a number that is smaller than the number of variations required to reach the second time-shortened game state. In other words, it has been explained that the first time-shortened game state cannot be switched to the second time-shortened game state, and that when in the first time-shortened game state, the game is not controlled to the second time-shortened game state.
However, the number of variations that can be performed in the first time-shortened game state may be set to a number equal to or greater than the number of variations required to reach the second time-shortened game state. Then, when the number of variations required to reach the second time-shortened game state is performed in the first time-shortened game state, the game state of the gaming machine 1 may be switched from the first time-shortened game state to the second time-shortened game state.
In addition, when the number of fluctuations required to reach the second time-shortened game state is executed in the first time-shortened game state, the game may be controlled (overlapped control) to the second time-shortened game state while in the first time-shortened game state.
Also, even if the number of fluctuations required to reach the second time-shortened game state is executed in the first time-shortened game state, the game may not be controlled to the second time-shortened game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the lottery for the special symbol in the first time-saving game state does not win the third time-saving game state. In other words, it has been explained that when the first time-saving game state is in effect, the game is not controlled to the third time-saving game state.
However, even if the special symbol is drawn in the first time-shortened game state, it may be possible to win the third time-shortened game state. That is, a time-shortened game symbol determination table or a variation pattern determination table may be provided so that the stop symbols in the variation in the first time-shortened game state include the time-shortened game symbols. And, if the result of the special symbol drawing in the first time-shortened game state is a win in the third time-shortened game state, the game state of the gaming machine 1 may be switched from the first time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state.
In addition, if the result of the special pattern lottery in the first time-shortened game state is a winning entry into the third time-shortened game state, the game may be controlled (overlapped control) to the third time-shortened game state while in the first time-shortened game state.
In addition, even if the result of the special symbol lottery in the first time-shortened gaming state is a winning result in the third time-shortened gaming state, the game may not be controlled to the third time-shortened gaming state.

Also, the lottery for the special symbol in the second time-shortened game state may be able to win the third time-shortened game state. That is, a time-shortened game symbol determination table or a variation pattern determination table may be provided so that the stop symbols in the variation in the second time-shortened game state include the time-shortened game symbol. And, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the second time-shortened game state is a win in the third time-shortened game state, the game state of the gaming machine 1 may be switched from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state.
In addition, if the result of the special pattern lottery in the second time-shortened game state is a winning entry into the third time-shortened game state, the game may be controlled (overlapped control) to the third time-shortened game state while in the second time-shortened game state.
In addition, even if the result of the special symbol lottery in the second time-shortened gaming state is a winning result in the third time-shortened gaming state, the game may not be controlled to the third time-shortened gaming state.

In addition, the number of variations that can be performed in the third time-shortened game state may be set to a number equal to or greater than the number of variations required to reach the second time-shortened game state. Then, when the number of variations required to reach the second time-shortened game state is performed in the third time-shortened game state, the game state of the gaming machine 1 may be switched from the third time-shortened game state to the second time-shortened game state.
In addition, when the number of fluctuations required to reach the second time-shortened game state is executed in the third time-shortened game state, the game may be controlled (overlapped control) to the second time-shortened game state when in the third time-shortened game state.
Also, in the third time-shortened gaming state, even if the number of fluctuations required to reach the second time-shortened gaming state is executed, the game may not be controlled to the second time-shortened gaming state.
In addition, when the third time-shortened game state is switched to the second time-shortened game state, or when the third time-shortened game state is controlled to the second time-shortened game state, in order to maintain the time-shortened state, the performance of the second time-shortened game state (the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery, the normal pattern fluctuation time, the time for controlling the second starting hole 14 to the second mode in the case of winning in the normal pattern lottery, etc.) may be made the same as the performance of the third time-shortened game state. In addition, when the third time-shortened game state is switched to the second time-shortened game state, or when the third time-shortened game state is controlled to the second time-shortened game state, the performance of the second time-shortened game state may be made different from the performance of the third time-shortened game state.

Also, the lottery for the special symbol in the third time-saving game state may be a winning one in the third time-saving game state. That is, a time-saving symbol determination table or a variation pattern determination table may be provided so that the stop symbols in the variation in the third time-saving game state include the time-saving symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving game state is a winning one in the third time-saving game state, a new third time-saving game state may be set in which the variation of the number of times according to the winning time-saving symbol can be executed.
In addition, even if the result of the lottery for the special symbol in the third time-saving game state is a winning result for the third time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state in which the variation of the number of times according to the winning time-saving symbol can be executed may not be set.

In addition, when the result of the lottery for the special pattern in the third time-shortened game state is a winning of the third time-shortened game state, whether or not a new third time-shortened game state in which the number of times can be changed may be determined depending on the number of times corresponding to the winning time-shortened pattern.
For example, if the result of the special symbol drawing in the third time-shortened game state in which 100 changes are possible is a winning of the third time-shortened game state in which 100 changes are possible, the winning number of changes may be newly set in the third time-shortened game state in which the changes can be executed. And, if the result of the special symbol drawing in the third time-shortened game state in which 100 changes are possible is a winning of the third time-shortened game state in which 1000 changes are possible, the winning number of changes may not be newly set in the third time-shortened game state in which the changes can be executed, thereby preventing the number of changes that can be executed in the third time-shortened game state from being added.
Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol drawing in the third time-shortened game state in which 1000 changes are possible is a winning of the third time-shortened game state in which 1000 changes are possible, the winning number of changes may be newly set to the third time-shortened game state in which the change of the winning number of times is executable. And, if the result of the special symbol drawing in the third time-shortened game state in which 100 changes are possible is a winning of the third time-shortened game state in which 100 changes are possible, the winning number of changes may not be newly set to the third time-shortened game state in which the change of the winning number of times is executable, thereby preventing the number of changes executable in the third time-shortened game state from being degraded.
Also, for example, if the result of the special pattern lottery in the third time-shortened game state is a win in the third time-shortened game state in which a greater number of changes than the remaining number of changes is possible, the configuration may be such that the won number of changes is not newly set in the third time-shortened game state in which changes can be made, thereby preventing the number of changes that can be made in the third time-shortened game state from being added on.
Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-shortened game state is a win in the third time-shortened game state in which a greater number of changes than the remaining number of changes is possible, the third time-shortened game state in which the winning number of changes is possible may be newly set. And, if the result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-shortened game state is a win in the third time-shortened game state in which a smaller number of changes than the remaining number of changes is possible, the third time-shortened game state in which the winning number of changes is possible may not be newly set, thereby preventing the number of changes possible in the third time-shortened game state from being degraded.

In addition, when the game is controlled to the high probability game state, the game may not be controlled to either the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state.

(About the special symbol fluctuation pattern during time-saving)
In the first to third embodiments, it has been explained that the variation pattern determination table is used according to the state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol used after the jackpot game may be determined according to the game state when the jackpot game is played (when the jackpot opening is activated), the special symbol displayed as a stopped jackpot symbol, and the game state after the jackpot game ends (after the jackpot opening is activated).
For example, if the game state when a jackpot game is played (when the large prize winning opening is activated) is a low-probability non-time-saving game state, the special symbol A1 is displayed as a still image, and the game state after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize winning opening is activated) is a high-probability time-saving game state, the first variation pattern determination table may be used. Also, if the game state when a jackpot game is played (when the large prize winning opening is activated) is a low-probability non-time-saving game state, the special symbol A3 is displayed as a still image, and the game state after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize winning opening is activated) is a low-probability time-saving game state, the second variation pattern determination table may be used.
Also, for example, if the game state when the big win game is played (when the big win opening is activated) is a low-probability time-saving game state, the special symbol A1 is displayed as a still image, and the game state after the big win game ends (after the big win opening is activated) is a high-probability time-saving game state, the third variation pattern determination table may be used. Also, if the game state when the big win game is played (when the big win opening is activated) is a low-probability time-saving game state, the special symbol A3 is displayed as a still image, and the game state after the big win game ends (after the big win opening is activated) is a low-probability time-saving game state, the fourth variation pattern determination table may be used.
Also, for example, if the game state when a jackpot game is played (when the large prize winning opening is activated) is a high probability non-time-saving game state, the special symbol A1 is displayed as a still image, and the game state after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize winning opening is activated) is a high probability time-saving game state, the fifth variation pattern determination table may be used. Also, if the game state when a jackpot game is played (when the large prize winning opening is activated) is a high probability non-time-saving game state, the special symbol A3 is displayed as a still image, and the game state after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize winning opening is activated) is a low probability time-saving game state, the sixth variation pattern determination table may be used.
Also, for example, when the game state when the jackpot game is played (when the large prize winning opening is activated) is a high probability time-saving game state, the special symbol A1 is displayed as a still image, and the game state after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize winning opening is activated) is a high probability time-saving game state, the seventh variation pattern determination table may be used. Also, when the game state when the jackpot game is played (when the large prize winning opening is activated) is a high probability time-saving game state, the special symbol A3 is displayed as a still image, and the game state after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize winning opening is activated) is a low probability time-saving game state, the eighth variation pattern determination table may be used.
The first variation pattern determination table to the eighth variation pattern determination table are each a different variation pattern determination table, and may be any of the variation pattern determination tables described above, or may be a variation pattern determination table different from the variation pattern determination tables described above.

In addition, a change pattern determination table for the special symbols used after a jackpot game may be determined based not only on the game state when the jackpot game is played (when the large prize opening is activated), the special symbol that is displayed as a stopped part of the jackpot pattern, and the game state after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize opening is activated), but also on the number of times the special symbol changes are performed after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize opening is activated).
For example, in a case where the game state when a jackpot game is played (when the large prize opening is activated) is a low-probability non-time-saving game state, the special pattern A1 is displayed stationary, and the game state after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize opening is activated) is a high-probability time-saving game state, if the number of times the special pattern has changed after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize opening is activated) has not reached a first number, the first change pattern determination table may be used, and if the number of times has reached the first number, the second change pattern determination table may be used. In addition, when the game state when a jackpot game is played (when the large prize opening is activated) is a low-probability non-time-saving game state, the special pattern A3 is displayed stopped, and the game state after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize opening is activated) is a low-probability time-saving game state, if the number of times the special pattern has changed after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize opening is activated) has not reached the second number, the third change pattern determination table is used, if the number of times has reached the second number but has not reached the third number which is greater than the second number, the fourth change pattern determination table is used, and if the number of times has reached the third number, the fifth change pattern determination table is used.
Also, for example, when the game state when the big win game is played (when the big win opening is operated) is a low probability time-saving game state, the special symbol A1 is displayed as a stopped symbol, and the game state after the big win game is ended (after the big win opening is operated) is a high probability time-saving game state, the sixth variation pattern determination table may be used regardless of the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the big win game is ended (after the big win opening is operated). Also, when the game state when the big win game is played (when the big win opening is operated) is a low probability time-saving game state, the special symbol A3 is displayed as a stopped symbol, and the game state after the big win game is ended (after the big win opening is operated) is a low probability time-saving game state, if the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the big win game is ended (after the big win opening is operated) has not reached the fourth number, the seventh variation pattern determination table may be used, and if it has reached the fourth number, the eighth variation pattern determination table may be used.
Also, for example, when the game state when the jackpot game is played (when the large prize opening is operated) is a high probability non-time-saving game state, the special symbol A1 is displayed as a still image, and the game state after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize opening is operated) is a high probability time-saving game state, the ninth variation pattern determination table may be used regardless of the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize opening is operated). Also, when the game state when the jackpot game is played (when the large prize opening is operated) is a high probability non-time-saving game state, the special symbol A3 is displayed as a still image, and the game state after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize opening is operated) is a low probability time-saving game state, the tenth variation pattern determination table may be used regardless of the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize opening is operated).
Also, for example, in a case where the game state when a jackpot game is played (when the large prize opening is activated) is a high probability time-saving game state, the special pattern A1 is displayed stopped, and the game state after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize opening is activated) is a high probability time-saving game state, if the number of times the special pattern has changed after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize opening is activated) has not reached the fifth number, the 11th change pattern determination table is used, if the number of times has reached the fifth number but has not reached the sixth number which is greater than the fifth number, the 12th change pattern determination table is used, and if the number of times has reached the sixth number, the 13th change pattern determination table is used. In addition, when the game state when a jackpot game is played (when the large prize opening is activated) is a high probability time-saving game state, the special pattern A3 is displayed stopped, and the game state after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize opening is activated) is a low probability time-saving game state, if the number of times the special pattern has changed after the jackpot game ends (after the large prize opening is activated) has not reached the seventh number, the 14th change pattern determination table is used, if the number of times has reached the seventh number but has not reached the eighth number which is more than the seventh number, the 15th change pattern determination table is used, and if the number of times has reached the eighth number, the 16th change pattern determination table is used.
The first variation pattern determination table to the sixteenth variation pattern determination table are each a different variation pattern determination table, and may be any of the variation pattern determination tables described above, or may be a variation pattern determination table different from the variation pattern determination tables described above.

In addition, a plurality of types of special symbols may be provided to be stopped and displayed as small win symbols. A variation pattern determination table for the special symbols used after a small win game may be determined based on the game state when the small win game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member is operated), the special symbols stopped and displayed among the small win symbols, and the number of variations of the special symbols executed after the end of the small win game.
For example, when the game state when a small win game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member is operated) is a low probability non-time shortening game state, and the first small win symbol is stopped and displayed, if the number of times of variation of the special symbol executed after the end of the small win game has not reached the first number, the first variation pattern determination table may be used, and if the first number of times has been reached, the second variation pattern determination table may be used. Also, when the game state when a small win game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member is operated) is a low probability non-time shortening game state, and the second small win symbol is stopped and displayed, if the number of times of variation of the special symbol executed after the end of the small win game has not reached the second number, the third variation pattern determination table may be used, if the second number of times has been reached and the third number that is greater than the second number has not been reached, the fourth variation pattern determination table may be used, and if the third number of times has been reached, the fifth variation pattern determination table may be used.
Also, for example, when the game state when a small win game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member is operated) is a low probability time-saving game state and the first small win symbol is stopped and displayed, the sixth variation pattern determination table may be used regardless of the number of times the special symbol is changed after the small win game is finished. Also, when the game state when a small win game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member is operated) is a low probability time-saving game state and the second small win symbol is stopped and displayed, if the number of times the special symbol is changed after the small win game has finished has not reached the fourth number, the seventh variation pattern determination table may be used, and if the number of times has reached the fourth number, the eighth variation pattern determination table may be used.
Also, for example, when the game state when a small win game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member is operated) is a high probability non-time-saving game state and the first small win symbol is stopped and displayed, the ninth variation pattern determination table may be used regardless of the number of times the special symbol is changed after the small win game is completed. Also, when the game state when a small win game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member is operated) is a high probability non-time-saving game state and the second small win symbol is stopped and displayed, the tenth variation pattern determination table may be used regardless of the number of times the special symbol is changed after the small win game is completed.
Also, for example, when the game state when a small win game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member is activated) is a high probability time-saving game state and the first small win pattern is displayed stationary, if the number of times the special pattern has changed after the end of the small win game has not reached the fifth number, the 11th change pattern determination table is used, if the number of times has reached the fifth number but has not reached the sixth number which is greater than the fifth number, the 12th change pattern determination table is used, and if the number of times has reached the sixth number, the 13th change pattern determination table is used. In addition, when the game state when a small win game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member is activated) is a high probability time-saving game state and the second small win symbol is displayed stopped, if the number of times the special symbol has changed after the end of the small win game has not reached the seventh number, the 14th change pattern determination table is used, if the number of times has reached the seventh number but has not reached the eighth number which is more than the seventh number, the 15th change pattern determination table is used, and if the number of times has reached the eighth number, the 16th change pattern determination table is used.
The first variation pattern determination table to the sixteenth variation pattern determination table are each a different variation pattern determination table, and may be any of the variation pattern determination tables described above, or may be a variation pattern determination table different from the variation pattern determination tables described above.

In addition, different variation pattern determination tables may be used when the game is controlled to the first time-shortened game state, when the game is controlled to the second time-shortened game state, and when the game is controlled to the third time-shortened game state.
Also, a variation pattern determination table of the special symbol used in the second time-shortened game state may be determined based on the game state of the gaming machine 1 when it is controlled to the second time-shortened game state. For example, if the game state of the gaming machine 1 when it is controlled to the second time-shortened game state is a low-probability non-time-shortened game state, the first variation pattern determination table may be used in the second time-shortened game state. Also, if the game state of the gaming machine 1 when it is controlled to the second time-shortened game state is a low-probability time-shortened game state, the second variation pattern determination table may be used in the second time-shortened game state.
The first variation pattern determination table and the second variation pattern determination table are different variation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the variation pattern determination tables described above, or may be a variation pattern determination table different from the variation pattern determination table described above.

In addition, when the game is controlled to the second time-shortened game state, a special symbol variation pattern determination table to be used in the second time-shortened game state may be determined based on the number of times the special symbol variations are executed in the second time-shortened game state.
For example, when controlled to the second time-shortened game state, regardless of which game state the gaming machine 1 was in when it was controlled to the second time-shortened game state, if the number of times the special pattern has been varied in the second time-shortened game state has not reached the first number, the first variation pattern determination table may be used, and if the number of times has reached the first number, the second variation pattern determination table may be used.
The first variation pattern determination table and the second variation pattern determination table are different variation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the variation pattern determination tables described above, or may be a variation pattern determination table different from the variation pattern determination table described above.

In addition, when the game machine is controlled to the second time-shortened game state, a variation pattern determination table for the special symbols to be used in the second time-shortened game state may be determined based on the game state of the gaming machine 1 when it is controlled to the second time-shortened game state and the number of times the special symbols have been varied in the second time-shortened game state.
For example, when the game is in a low-probability non-time-shortened game state when controlled to the second time-shortened game state, if the number of times the special pattern has been varied in the second time-shortened game state has not reached a first number, the first variation pattern determination table may be used, and if the number of times has reached the first number, the second variation pattern determination table may be used.
Also, for example, when the state is a low-probability time-saving game state when controlled to the second time-saving game state, if the number of times the special pattern has changed in the second time-saving game state has not reached the second number, the third change pattern determination table may be used, and if the number of times has reached the second number, the fourth change pattern determination table may be used.
The first variation pattern determination table to the fourth variation pattern determination table are each a different variation pattern determination table, and may be any of the variation pattern determination tables described above, or may be a variation pattern determination table different from the variation pattern determination tables described above.

In addition, when the game is controlled to the third time-saving game state, a variation pattern determination table for the special symbols used in the third time-saving game state may be determined based on the special symbols that are stopped and displayed among the time-saving symbols.
For example, when the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed, the first variation pattern determination table may be used regardless of the game state of the gaming machine 1 when it is controlled to the third time-saving game state. Also, when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed, the second variation pattern determination table may be used regardless of the game state of the gaming machine 1 when it is controlled to the third time-saving game state.
The first variation pattern determination table and the second variation pattern determination table are different variation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the variation pattern determination tables described above, or may be a variation pattern determination table different from the variation pattern determination table described above.

In addition, a variation pattern determination table for the special symbols used in the third time-saving game state may be determined based on the special symbols that are displayed in a stopped state among the time-saving symbols and the game state of the gaming machine 1 when it is controlled to the third time-saving game state.
For example, when the game is controlled to the third time-shortened game state and the special symbol J1 is displayed in a stopped state in the low-probability non-time-shortened game state, the first variation pattern determination table may be used. Also, when the game is controlled to the third time-shortened game state and the special symbol J2 is displayed in a stopped state in the low-probability non-time-shortened game state, the second variation pattern determination table may be used.
Also, for example, when the game is controlled to the third time-saving game state and the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed in the low-probability time-saving game state, the third variation pattern determination table may be used. Also, when the game is controlled to the third time-saving game state and the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed in the low-probability time-saving game state, the fourth variation pattern determination table may be used.
The first variation pattern determination table to the fourth variation pattern determination table are each a different variation pattern determination table, and may be any of the variation pattern determination tables described above, or may be a variation pattern determination table different from the variation pattern determination tables described above.

In addition, a variation pattern determination table to be used in the third time-shortened gaming state may be determined based on the number of times the special symbol is varied in the third time-shortened gaming state.
For example, regardless of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed among the time-saving symbols and the game state when controlled to the third time-saving game state, if the number of times the special symbol has been changed in the third time-saving game state has not reached a first number, the first change pattern determination table may be used, and if the number of times has reached the first number, the second change pattern determination table may be used.
The first variation pattern determination table and the second variation pattern determination table are different variation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the variation pattern determination tables described above, or may be a variation pattern determination table different from the variation pattern determination table described above.

In addition, a variation pattern determination table to be used in the third time-saving game state may be determined based on the special pattern that is displayed in a stopped state among the time-saving patterns, the game state of the gaming machine 1 when it is controlled to the third time-saving game state, and the number of times the special pattern is varied in the third time-saving game state.
For example, when the game is controlled to the third time-shortened game state, if the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed in the low-probability non-time-shortened game state, the first variation pattern determination table may be used if the number of variations of the special symbol executed in the third time-shortened game state has not reached the first number, and if the first number has been reached, the second variation pattern determination table may be used. Also, when the game is controlled to the third time-shortened game state, if the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed in the low-probability non-time-shortened game state, if the number of variations of the special symbol executed in the third time-shortened game state has not reached the second number, the third variation pattern determination table may be used, if the second number has been reached but has not reached the third number which is greater than the second number, the fourth variation pattern determination table may be used, and if the third number has been reached, the fifth variation pattern determination table may be used.
Also, for example, when the game is controlled to the third time-shortened game state and the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed in the low-probability time-shortened game state, the sixth variation pattern determination table may be used regardless of the number of variations of the special symbol executed in the third time-shortened game state. Also, when the game is controlled to the third time-shortened game state and the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed in the low-probability time-shortened game state, if the number of variations of the special symbol executed in the third time-shortened game state has not reached the fourth number, the seventh variation pattern determination table may be used, and if the number of variations has reached the fourth number, the eighth variation pattern determination table may be used.
The first variation pattern determination table to the eighth variation pattern determination table are each a different variation pattern determination table, and may be any of the variation pattern determination tables described above, or may be a variation pattern determination table different from the variation pattern determination tables described above.

(Regarding the medium probability game state)
Next, the medium probability gaming state will be described.
In this embodiment, it has been described that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, or the third time-saving gaming state. Here, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, or the third time-saving gaming state, it may be controlled to a gaming state in which the winning probability of a jackpot is different from both the low probability gaming state and the high probability gaming state. More specifically, it may be controlled to a gaming state in which the winning probability of a jackpot is higher than that of the low probability gaming state and the winning probability of a jackpot is lower than that of the high probability gaming state. Hereinafter, a gaming state in which the winning probability of a jackpot is higher than that of the low probability gaming state and the winning probability of a jackpot is lower than that of the high probability gaming state may be referred to as a medium probability gaming state. The winning probability of a jackpot in the medium probability gaming state may be any value, but is, for example, 1/100.

In the medium probability game state, the probability of winning in the normal drawing may be different from both the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state. As an example, in the medium probability game state, the probability of winning in the normal drawing may be 2/20, which is higher than in the non-time-saving game state and lower than in the time-saving game state. On the other hand, in the medium probability game state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is the same as in the non-time-saving game state or the time-saving game state. Also, in the medium probability game state, the time for which the second starting hole 14 is controlled to the second mode in the event of a win in the normal drawing is the same as in the non-time-saving game state or the time-saving game state.

The number of time-saving times when a specific jackpot symbol is hit may be varied depending on whether the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state or a medium-probability gaming state. As an example, as described above, when the special symbol A3 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the number of time-saving times in the first time-saving gaming state will be 100. On the other hand, when the special symbol A3 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed in the medium-probability gaming state, the number of time-saving times in the first time-saving gaming state may be 150.

Also, when the time-saving gaming state ends, the gaming machine 1 may be controlled to a medium probability gaming state. In this case, a unique background image GH may be displayed in the medium probability gaming state. Also, when the unique background image GH is displayed, a special effect may be executed to suggest or notify that the medium probability gaming state is in effect. One example of a special effect is an effect that displays the text "CHANCE STAGE."

In addition, when the gaming machine 1 is in the time-saving gaming state and the medium probability gaming state, if the normal drawing is won, the time for which the second starting hole 14 is controlled to the second mode is the same as that in the time-saving gaming state, as described above. In this case, an instruction effect may be executed to instruct the player to launch the gaming ball to the right side of the gaming area 10a. Examples of instruction effects include the display of the right-hit image described above and an audio notification of the right hit.

In addition, when a jackpot is won in the medium probability game state, the game may be controlled to a high probability game state regardless of which jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, a plurality of types of the number of times of change in the medium probability game state may be set. For example, when the game state is controlled from the low probability non-time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, the game state may be controlled to the first medium probability game state or the second medium probability game state, and the number of times of change in the first medium probability game state may be 20 times, whereas the number of times of change in the second medium probability game state may be 1000 times. In this case, the period during which the game state is controlled to the high probability game state when a jackpot is won is longer in the second medium probability game state than in the first medium probability game state.
In addition, when a specific variation is executed, the game may be controlled to a medium probability game state. For example, when a variation effect that does not result in a big win and in which an SPSP reach effect is executed is executed, the game may be controlled to a medium probability game state.
In addition, in the medium probability gaming state, a performance symbol GA having a unique display mode may be used. In addition, in the medium probability gaming state, a reserved image GB having a unique display mode may be used.

Fourth Embodiment
65(a) and 65(b) are diagrams for explaining the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, instead of the above-mentioned start winning designation command, information commands indicating the first information J1 relating to the execution of a big win game specified by the advance judgment of the judgment information and the second information J2 relating to the transition to the second game state specified by the advance judgment of the judgment information are transmitted from the main control board 110 (main CPU 111) to the performance control board 120 (sub CPU 121). The above information commands are generated and transmitted by the main CPU 111 when a start winning occurs during a period in which the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit.

Figure 65 (a) is a diagram for explaining specific examples of the first information J1 and the second information J2. For example, when a random number value for determining a special symbol that is determined to be a "jackpot" is obtained at the time of the start winning, an information command indicating the first information J1 is sent to the sub-CPU 121. When the sub-CPU 121 receives the above-mentioned first information J1, it can understand that a jackpot game will be played thereafter.

In addition, when a random number value for determining a special symbol that is determined to be a "miss" is obtained at the time of the start winning, an information command indicating the second information J2 is sent to the sub-CPU 121. The above second information J2 indicates the cumulative number of times m in the game executed by the start winning. When the sub-CPU 121 receives the above second information J2, it can grasp that the result of the game executed by the start winning that triggered the generation of the second information J2 is a "miss" and the cumulative number of times m in the game. In the fourth embodiment, the sub-CPU 121 determines a look-ahead effect according to the information indicated by the information command (first information J1, second information J2). The above look-ahead effects include the specific effects X1 and X2 described below.

Figure 65 (b) is a diagram for explaining the specific effects X1 and X2. The specific effect X1 is determined by lottery when the sub-CPU 121 receives an information command indicating the first information J1. When the specific effect X1 is determined, the appearance (color) of the reserved image GB corresponding to the game (game in which a jackpot is won) executed by the start winning, which is the trigger for generating the information command indicating the first information J1, changes before the start of the game (similar to the reserved change effect described above). With the above configuration, the fact that a jackpot will be won is notified in advance by the specific effect X1 before the game in which the jackpot is won.

The specific effect X2 is determined by lottery when the sub-CPU 121 receives an information command indicating the second information J2. Specifically, when the sub-CPU 121 receives an information command indicating the second information J2, it determines whether the cumulative number m determined from the second information J2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (e.g., the number "790"). If the cumulative number m determined from the second information J2 is equal to or greater than the threshold, the sub-CPU 121 determines the specific effect X2 by lottery. On the other hand, if the cumulative number m determined from the second information J2 is less than the threshold, the sub-CPU 121 does not determine the specific effect X2.

When the specific effect X2 is determined, the state of the reserved image GB corresponding to the game executed by the start winning, which is the trigger for generating the information command indicating the second information J2, changes before the start of the game (similar to the reserved change effect described above). According to the specific effect X2 described above, the player is notified that the number of games until the second time-saving game state is reached is relatively small. Note that the state of the reserved image GB in which the specific effect X1 is executed and the state of the reserved image GB in which the specific effect X2 is executed may be different or the same.

In the fourth embodiment, similar to the first embodiment described above, when a transition to the second time-saving game state occurs, a time-saving entry effect is executed to notify the player of this. In the time-saving entry effect of the fourth embodiment, images are displayed that are the same as the images displayed in the time-saving entry effect of the first embodiment. Specifically, in addition to the entry image GT, the time-saving entry effect displays the effect pattern GA, small pattern Ga, and fourth pattern GC. Note that the time-saving entry effect in the fourth embodiment may be configured so that some of the effect patterns GA, small pattern Ga, and fourth pattern GC are displayed. In the fourth embodiment described above, the same effect as the first embodiment can be achieved.

<Modification>
The above embodiments can be modified in various ways. Specific modified embodiments are exemplified below. Two or more embodiments selected from the following examples can be appropriately combined.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the timing of updating the numbers in the play count image GE and the remaining number image GN can be changed as appropriate. For example, the numbers in the play count image GE and the remaining number image GN may be configured to be updated at the start of play. Also, the numbers in the play count image GE may be updated at the start of play, and the numbers in the remaining number image GN may be updated at the end of play. Similarly, the numbers in the play count image GE may be updated at the end of play, and the numbers in the remaining number image GN may be updated at the start of play.

(2) In each of the above-mentioned forms, a right hit may be instructed in response to the establishment of a specific instruction condition in the customer waiting state (see FIG. 19(a)) before the start of the first play of the second time-saving play state. For example, a right hit image GS1 may be displayed on the condition that the touch sensor 11a detects that the player has touched the operation handle 11. Also, a right hit image GS1 may be displayed on the condition that the touch sensor 11a does not detect that the player has touched the operation handle 11.

(3) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the configuration for notifying that the second time-saving game state has been activated can be changed as appropriate. For example, instead of the configuration in which the play count image GE shown in FIG. 23(c) is displayed during the activated period, the actual number of plays since the jackpot game may be displayed during the activated period. That is, during the activated period, the number of plays image GE may be displayed by incrementing from "1800". In the above configuration, when the number of plays image GE is "1800" or more, it is essentially notified that the second time-saving game state has been activated. Note that even when the above configuration is adopted, it is preferable that the play count image GE is not displayed during the second time-saving game state.

(4) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the time when the fixed notification image GI is displayed is not limited to the beginning of the game. Specifically, the fixed notification image GI may be displayed in the middle or end of the game. For example, the fixed notification image GI may be displayed when the reach effect starts, or the fixed notification image GI may be displayed during a fixed period. Also, the time at which the fixed notification image GI is displayed during the game may be determined by lottery. Furthermore, the fixed notification image GI may be displayed continuously over multiple games (e.g., 10 games).

(5) In each of the above embodiments, in a game in which the fixed-position notification image GI may be displayed (the 51st and 101st games), the fixed-position notification image GI is always displayed if a predetermined display condition (N≦200) is met. In the above configuration, in a game in which the fixed-position notification image GI may be displayed, the fixed-position notification image GI may be displayed if a predetermined display condition is met and a predetermined lottery is won.

In addition, during the period when the remaining number of times N is fixed, the fixed number of times notification image GI may be displayed regardless of the current value of the remaining number of times N, provided that a lottery is won. In the above configuration, when the fixed number of times notification image GI is displayed (when a fixed number of times is notified), the remaining number of times N may be displayed to directly notify the number of times of play up to the second time-saving game state, or the remaining number of times N may not be displayed directly but may be suggested to indicate the number of times of play up to the second time-saving game state. Also, the configuration may suggest whether the remaining number of times N is fixed or not.

For example, assume a configuration that includes a predetermined lamp (hereinafter, "specific lamp"). The above specific lamp is usually lit in a manner corresponding to the current presentation. On the other hand, in a predetermined game (for example, the first game after the power is turned on), the specific lamp may be lit in the first special mode or the second special mode depending on whether the remaining number N is fixed and the current value of the remaining number N. Specifically, the specific lamp is more likely to be lit in the first special mode or the second special mode when the remaining number N is fixed, compared to when the remaining number N is not fixed. Also, when the remaining number N is fixed and is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, the number "200"), the specific lamp is more likely to be lit in the second special mode, compared to when the remaining number N is fixed and is greater than the predetermined number. With the above configuration, the fun of the notification of whether the remaining number N is fixed or not is improved.

(6) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, multiple types (e.g., six types) of setting values with different ball payout rates may be provided. Specifically, the manager of the gaming machine 1 can change the setting value of the gaming machine 1 by performing a predetermined setting change operation. A jackpot determination table is provided for each setting value, and when the setting value is changed, the probability of winning a jackpot changes.

In the above modified examples, a configuration may be made in which an effect suggesting a set value (hereinafter, "suggested effect") can be executed. However, a configuration in which an effect in which one type of set value is specified can significantly stimulate the player's gambling instincts. Taking the above into consideration, the suggested effect notifies the player that there is a high probability that the set value is one of several types of set values out of all the set values.

For example, assume a configuration in which six different setting values are provided, from setting value "1" to setting value "6". In the above configuration, a configuration can be considered in which a suggestive effect is provided that suggests that a setting value of odd numbers (1, 3, 5) is more likely than a setting value of even numbers (2, 4, 6), and a suggestive effect is provided that suggests that a setting value of even numbers is more likely than a setting value of odd numbers. Also, a suggestive effect may be provided that suggests that a setting value of "4 to 6" (high setting) is more likely than a setting value of "1 to 3" (low setting). Also, a suggestive effect may be provided that makes the setting value of "6" likely (but not confirmed). When the above modified example is adopted, the number of times the game has been played up to the second time-saving game state is definitively notified by the remaining number of times image GN, whereas the setting value is not definitively notified by the suggestive effect. However, in this modified example, a suggestive effect that confirms one setting value may be executed.

(7) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the time-saving game state to which the player transitions after a jackpot game may be changed according to the game state in which the jackpot was won, in addition to the jackpot symbol. For example, a configuration is assumed in which a time-saving game state A and a time-saving game state B, which is more advantageous (has more play times) than the time-saving game state A, are provided. In addition, in the above configuration, if a jackpot game is won in a non-time-saving game state, there is a probability of transitioning to the time-saving game state A of about 99%, and a probability of transitioning to the time-saving game state B of about 1%. In addition, if a jackpot game is won in the time-saving game state A, there is a probability of transitioning to the time-saving game state B of about 50%, and a probability of transitioning to the time-saving game state B of about 50%. Furthermore, if a jackpot game is won in the time-saving game state B, there is a probability of transitioning to the time-saving game state B of about 100%.

In addition, in the above modified examples, the most advantageous time-saving game state may be adopted as the second time-saving game state. For example, in the above specific example, a configuration is considered in which time-saving game state B is adopted as the second time-saving game state. However, in the above configuration, if a jackpot is won just before the second time-saving game state begins, some players may feel dissatisfied. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to adopt a configuration that suppresses the above inconveniences. A specific example of such a configuration is described below.

In each of the above-mentioned forms, a normal mode and a last-minute mode are provided as presentation modes for the low-probability non-time-saving game state. In the last-minute mode of the modified example, a presentation is executed to celebrate the winning of a jackpot game that transitions to time-saving game state B, but a presentation is not executed to celebrate the winning of a jackpot game that transitions to time-saving game state A. Also, in this modified example, the presentation pattern GA is different between the normal mode and the last-minute mode, and the background image GH is also different.

For example, in normal mode, the remaining number of times image GN is displayed, and in the last mode, the special remaining number of times image GNx is displayed instead of the remaining number of times image GN. The special remaining number of times image GNx displays, for example, a message saying "If you can hold out for X number of times left, you will enter time-saving B!" (X indicates the number of times of play up to the second time-saving play state). Also, in the last mode, an image of an ally character facing off against an enemy character is displayed, and in each game, an effect is executed in which the characters fight. In the last mode of this modified example, in a game in which a jackpot that transitions to time-saving play state B is won, an effect is executed in which the ally character wins, and the message "Congratulations!" is displayed. On the other hand, in a game in which a jackpot that transitions to time-saving play state A is won, an effect is executed in which the ally character loses, and the message "Too bad" is displayed.

These modified examples also provide the same effect as the above-mentioned forms. However, in this modified example, as in the above-mentioned forms, the variation pattern determination table is not switched according to the number of plays during the period when a scenario is not set. If the variation pattern determination table is not switched from the normal mode and each of the effects of the previous mode described above (such as an effect in which characters fight) is executed, an inconvenience may occur in which appropriate time cannot be secured to execute the effect. Therefore, in the modified example as well, a configuration in which the previous mode is not provided during the period when a scenario is not set is preferable.

(8) In the first embodiment described above, the variation pattern determination table that can be referenced during play in a non-time-shortened play state that transitions to the second time-shortened play state (hereinafter simply referred to as "transition play") is different between the scenario-set period (Tn2 or Tnc) and the scenario-unset period (Tn1). Also, the variation pattern determination table that can be referenced during the first play in the second time-shortened play state is different between the scenario-set period (Ts or Tax) and the scenario-unset period (Tbx). That is, in the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the variation pattern determination table that can be referenced at the start of the second time-shortened play state (including transition play and the first play in the second time-shortened play state) is different between the scenario-set period and the scenario-unset period.

However, at the start of the second time-saving game state, a common fluctuation pattern determination table may be referenced in the scenario-set period and the unset scenario period. For example, in a configuration in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referenced in the transition game of the unset scenario period, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 may also be referenced in the transition game of the scenario-set period. Note that in the above configuration, it is sufficient that the fluctuation pattern determination table T that can be referenced in the transition game of the scenario-set period includes the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1, and a configuration in which a table other than the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 can be referenced may also be used. The above configuration has the advantage that the number of fluctuation pattern determination tables that can be referenced at the start of the second time-saving game state is easier to reduce, compared to a configuration in which the fluctuation pattern determination tables that can be referenced are different between the scenario-set period and the unset scenario period.

The variation pattern determination table that can be referenced at the start of the second time-saving game state may be completely common between the scenario-set period and the non-scenario-set period. With the above configuration, the effect of reducing the number of variation pattern determination tables is particularly remarkable.

(9) In the first embodiment described above, the variation pattern determination table that can be referenced in a predetermined number of plays in the second time-saving play state is configured to be variable between a scenario-set period and a scenario-unset period. For example, the variation pattern determination table that can be referenced in the first play in the second time-saving play state is variable between a scenario-set period (Ts, Tax) and a scenario-unset period (Tbx).

However, the variation pattern determination table that can be referenced in a predetermined number of plays in the second time-saving game state may be configured to be common between the scenario-set period and the scenario-unset period. For example, the variation pattern determination table Tbx that can be referenced in the first play in the second time-saving game state may be configured to be common between the scenario-set period and the scenario-unset period. Also, the variation pattern determination table that can be referenced in the 900th play (100 plays remaining) in the second time-saving game state may be common between the scenario-set period and the scenario-unset period, or the variation pattern determination table that can be referenced in the final play in the second time-saving game state may be common.

(10) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state may be highlighted. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the number of remaining times M is displayed in white in a game in which the remaining number of times M is the number "5" or more, and the number of remaining time-saving image GJ is displayed in red in a game in which the remaining number of times M is less than the number "5". In addition, the remaining number of times M at which highlighting of the remaining number of times M begins may be the same or different between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. For example, in the first time-saving game state (100 times), the number of remaining time-saving image GJ is displayed in white in a game in which the remaining number of times M is the number "5" or more, and the number of remaining time-saving image GJ is displayed in red in a game in which the remaining number of times M is less than the number "5". On the other hand, in the second time-saving game state (1000 times), the number of the remaining time-saving image GJ may be displayed in white when the remaining number of times M is equal to or greater than the number "10," and the number of the remaining time-saving image GJ may be displayed in red when the remaining number of times M is less than the number "10."

(11) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the jackpot game may be executed when the game ball passes through a specific area in addition to when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. Also, in the above-mentioned configuration, the game ball may be allowed to enter a specific area in a small jackpot game (so-called type 1, type 2 game machine may be used). In other words, the jackpot game may be executed when a small jackpot is won and the game ball enters a specific area in the small jackpot game. In the above-mentioned modified example, the remaining number of times N is not initialized when a small jackpot is won, but is initialized when the game ball enters a specific area. In this case, a movable specific area opening and closing member (not shown) may be provided so as to make it possible for the game ball to enter the specific area in the small jackpot game and to make it impossible for the game ball to enter the specific area after the small jackpot game ends.

In addition, in this modified example, a high probability game state is not provided, and the probability of winning a jackpot is the same when a game ball enters the first start port 13 and when a game ball enters the second start port 14. In addition, the probability of winning a small jackpot when a game ball enters the second start port 14 is higher than the probability of winning a jackpot, and a small jackpot is not won when a game ball enters the first start port 13. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state, it is easier for a game ball to enter the second start port 14. With the above configuration, it is easier to execute a jackpot game in the time-saving game state compared to a non-time-saving game state.

In this modified gaming machine, if the number of reserved second special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "remaining reserved symbols") is one or more when the time-saving play state ends, there is a high probability of winning a small jackpot even in play after the time-saving play state ends. Specifically, in the non-time-saving play state immediately after the time-saving play state ends, there is a high probability of winning a jackpot over a maximum of four plays.

In the above configuration, the above-mentioned first end effect (see FIG. 45(a)) may be executed during the period when the game is played with the remaining reserved balls. Also, the first end effect may be executed during the period when the game is played with the remaining reserved balls immediately after the end of the first time-saving game state, and the end effect may not be executed during the period when the game is played with the remaining reserved balls immediately after the end of the second time-saving game state. In other words, the "end of the second game state (when it ends)" of the present invention includes the period when the game is played with the remaining reserved balls. Depending on the number of times the game is played in the second time-saving game state, the probability of not winning a jackpot in the second time-saving game state may be about 0% (the probability of winning is about 100%). In the above cases, even if the design does not execute the end effect in the second time-saving game state, it is rare for the final game in the second time-saving game state to be executed. Therefore, it is unlikely that a problem will occur in which the player feels dissatisfied because the end effect is not executed in the final game in the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in a type 1/2 gaming machine, the transition determination process for updating the remaining number of times N (S224 in FIG. 32, S242 in FIG. 35(a)) is preferably configured to be executed after the small win game process (S187 in FIG. 32) as in the first embodiment described above. According to the above configuration, if the game ball does not enter the specific area in the small win game process, the remaining number of times N is updated in the transition determination process, while if the game ball enters the specific area, a big win game is executed, so the transition determination process can be omitted. In addition, in a type 1/2 gaming machine, a configuration may be adopted in which the first time-saving game state is transitioned to the second time-saving game state via a gap game. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the number of times of play in the gap game is four. In addition, it is preferable that the above gap game is configured to execute a performance different from that in the normal mode and the previous mode.

(12) In each of the above-mentioned forms, when transitioning from the first time-shortened game state to the second time-shortened game state via gap play, the above-mentioned left-hit image GL may not be displayed. Specifically, when playing according to the normal procedure, the presentation mode when transitioning from the first time-shortened game state to the second time-shortened game state via gap play is time-shortened mode B. In the above cases, it is preferable that the left-hit image GL is not displayed when transitioning to gap play (non-time-shortened game state).

(13) In each of the above-mentioned configurations, the right hit lamp 28 is turned off during gap play. Therefore, even if the presentation mode before and after the gap play does not change to time-saving mode B, it is preferable that the right hit image GS is not displayed during gap play.

(14) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the process of determining whether or not the start condition of the second time-shortened gaming state has been met (hereinafter referred to as the "first determination process") and the process of determining whether or not another condition for transitioning the gaming state (e.g., the start condition of the high probability gaming state) has been met (hereinafter referred to as the "second determination process") may be included in a common module or in separate modules.

...

(15) When the present invention is applied to the above-mentioned V-ST machine, even if a V win, which is a condition for transitioning to a high-probability game state, does not occur during a jackpot game, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the machine transitions to a time-saving game state with the same number of plays as if a V win had occurred. For example, in a configuration in which a V win occurs during a jackpot game and the machine transitions to a high-probability time-saving game state of 120 plays, a configuration in which the machine transitions to a low-probability time-saving game state of 120 plays even if a V win does not occur during the jackpot game can be considered.

In addition, in this modified example, it is preferable that the presentation mode after the jackpot game is common regardless of whether or not a V is won in the jackpot game. In the above configuration, the presentation mode after the jackpot game is common when transitioning to a high probability time-saving game state and when transitioning to a low probability time-saving game state. In addition, in the above modified example, it is preferable that the screens displayed are common and the presentation mode after recovery is common when a power outage occurs in a high probability time-saving game state and when a power outage occurs in a low probability time-saving game state and when recovery is performed. In other words, it is preferable that the screen does not indicate whether or not a V was won in the previous jackpot game before and after the power outage. In addition, in this modified example, as in the first embodiment, the presentation mode in the time-saving game state may be selected by the player. In addition, when a power outage occurs during a jackpot game and when a power outage occurs during a time-saving game state, the time-saving game state after recovery may be controlled to a common presentation mode.

(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, if the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined time, a demo screen is displayed. However, it is preferable that the demo screen is not displayed when the customer waiting screen Mx is displayed.

(17) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, at the start of the second time-saving game state, the shielding image GF, the rush-in image GT, and the right-hit image GS3 (start images) are displayed. The timing at which the above start images are displayed may be changed as appropriate.

Figure 66(a) is a diagram for explaining the display timing of the start image in the modified example. Figure 66(a) shows the period during which each start image is displayed. Figure 66(a) also shows the transition game to transition to the second time-shortened game state, the fixed period in the transition game, and the period during which the start image is displayed in the first game in the second time-shortened game state. Figure 66(a) shows the start time tx of the second time-shortened game state. In this modified example, as in the first embodiment described above, the second time-shortened game state starts when the fixed period for the transition game ends.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), immediately after the transition game starts, the display of the shielding image GF begins. The shielding image GF continues to be displayed until the fixed period starts, at which point it becomes hidden. As shown in FIG. 66(a), during the fixed period of the transition game, the entry image GT is displayed. After that, when the fixed period ends and the first game of the second time-saving game state starts, the entry image GT becomes hidden and a right-hit image GS3 (large right-hit image GS) is displayed. The above right-hit image GS3 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then becomes hidden.

In the first embodiment described above, the determination period for each game is approximately 0.5 seconds. If the determination period for the transition game in this modified example were approximately 0.5 seconds, there would be an inconvenience in that the time for which the entry image GT is displayed would be too short. Taking the above circumstances into consideration, this modified example adopts a configuration in which the determination period for the transition game is extended compared to the game immediately preceding the transition game. Specifically, the determination period for the transition game is extended to approximately 5 seconds. With the above configuration, the above-mentioned inconveniences are suppressed.

However, in the first embodiment described above, in order to prevent inconveniences that may undermine the fairness of the game, a configuration was adopted in which the time of one game (variable period + fixed period) does not change depending on the number of games played during the period in which a scenario is not set. In consideration of the above, even in this modified example, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the fixed period is extended during transitional play during a scenario-set period, while the fixed period does not change during transitional play during a period in which a scenario is not set.

Figures 66(b-1) and 66(b-2) are diagrams for explaining the display period of the start image in another modified example. The specific examples of Figures 66(b-1) and 66(b-2) assume that the transition game ends at time tx and a transition occurs to the second time-saving game state. Specifically, Figure 66(b-1) assumes that there is one or more reserved balls at time tx. Meanwhile, Figure 66(b-2) assumes that there is zero reserved balls at time tx. As will be explained in more detail below, in this modified example, the period during which the start image is displayed changes depending on whether there is a reserved ball at the start time tx of the second time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 66 (b-1), if the number of reserved balls at time tx is one or more, the first play of the second time-saving game state begins immediately after time tx. In the above cases, the right-hit image GS3 is displayed for a predetermined time immediately after the second time-saving game state begins. After that, the shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the entry image GT is displayed. The above entry image GT is displayed for a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 66 (b-2), if the number of reserved balls at time tx is 0, the customer waiting state starts immediately after the second time-saving game state starts. In the above cases, when the customer waiting state starts, the right-hit image GS3 is displayed. In this modified example, the right-hit image GS3 is displayed until the customer waiting state ends, and when the first game of the second time-saving game state starts, the right-hit image GS3 is hidden. After that, the shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, and the entry image GT is displayed. The entry image GT is displayed for a predetermined time. As can be understood from the above explanation, in this modified example, the time when the right-hit image GS3 is displayed changes depending on whether there are reserved balls at time tx.

In the above modified example, the right-hit image GS3 may be displayed from the start of the customer waiting state until the second special symbol changes. In other words, when the first special symbol changes, the display of the right-hit image GS3 may continue.

Figure 66(c) is a diagram for explaining the display period of the start image in another modified example. In the specific example of Figure 66(c), it is assumed that the transition game ends at time tx and the game transitions to the second time-saving game state. In addition, in the above specific example, it is assumed that the number of reserved balls at time tx is 0. As shown in Figure 66(c), in this modified example, a shielding image GF is displayed during the transition game, and then a rush image GT is displayed. Furthermore, when the transition game ends and the customer waiting state begins, a right-hit image GS3 is displayed.

Note that if the number of reserved balls is 1 or more at the start time tx of the second time-saving game state, a customer waiting state is not provided between the end of the transition game and the start of the first game of the second time-saving game state. In the above case, there is an inconvenience that the right-hit image GS3 cannot be displayed. In consideration of the above circumstances, in this modified example, if the number of reserved balls is 1 or more at the start time tx of the second time-saving game state, the reserved balls may be invalidated (the number of reserved balls is set to 0). In the above configuration, the customer waiting state is always started at the start of the second time-saving game state. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed. Note that the configuration of setting the number of reserved balls to 0 at the start of the second time-saving game state is not limited to this modified example, and may also be adopted in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and other modified examples.

As shown in FIG. 66(c), when the first play in the second time-saving play state starts, the right-hit image GS3 is hidden. In the above modified example, the right-hit image GS3 may be displayed from the start of the customer waiting state until the second special symbol changes. In other words, when the first special symbol changes, the display of the right-hit image GS3 may continue.

Furthermore, the time when the start image is displayed is not limited to the above modified examples. For example, the configuration may be such that the shielding image GF and the entry image GT are displayed in the transition game, and the right-hit image GS3 is displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. Similarly, the configuration may be such that the shielding image GF is displayed in the transition game, and then the right-hit image GS3 is displayed during the determination period of the game or in the customer waiting state, and the entry image GT is displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. The entry image GT may be displayed in the transition game, and then the shielding image GF and the right-hit image GS3 are displayed during the determination period of the game or in the customer waiting state. The configuration may be such that the entry image GT is displayed in the transition game, and then the shielding image GF is displayed during the determination period of the game or in the customer waiting state, and the right-hit image GS3 is displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state.

The configuration may be such that the shielding image GF, the entry image GT, and the right-hit image GS3 are displayed during the determination period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state. The configuration may be such that the shielding image GF and the right-hit image GS3 are displayed during the determination period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the entry image GT is displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. The configuration may be such that the shielding image GF and the entry image GT are displayed during the determination period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the right-hit image GS3 is displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. The configuration may be such that the shielding image GF is displayed during the determination period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the entry image GT and the right-hit image GS3 are displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. The configuration may be such that the entry image GT and the right-hit image GS3 are displayed during the determination period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the shielding image GF is displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state.

The right-hit image GS3 may be displayed during the determined period of the transition game or in the waiting state for customers, and the entry image GT and the shielding image GF may be displayed during the first play of the second time-saving game state.The entry image GT may be displayed during the determined period of the transition game or in the waiting state for customers, and the right-hit image GS3 and the shielding image GF may be displayed during the first play of the second time-saving game state. Furthermore, in each of the above modified examples, the display order of the start images displayed during the transition game, the display order of the start images displayed during the determined period of the transition game or in the waiting state for customers, and the display order of the start images displayed during play in the second time-saving game state may be changed as appropriate.

In the above modified examples, two or more start images may be displayed in parallel. In addition, in a configuration in which a shielding image GF is displayed in a customer waiting state, it is preferable that the shielding image GF is displayed throughout the customer waiting state, and that the shielding image GF becomes invisible when the second special chart starts to change.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the display of all start images (GF, GT, GS3) is completed by the time the first game in the second time-saving game state ends. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the start images can be displayed from the second game onwards in the second time-saving game state. For example, a configuration may also be adopted in which the time for which the start images are displayed is predetermined, and multiple games can be executed before that time has elapsed.

(19) In each of the above-mentioned forms, in the game at the start of the second time-saving game state (transition game, the first game of the second time-saving game state), the start image (part or all of the shielding image GF, the entry image GT, and the right-hit image GS3) was displayed, and then the performance pattern GA was displayed stationary. Specifically, in the game at the start of the second time-saving game state (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "start game"), if the result of the jackpot lottery was a miss, the start image was displayed and then the performance pattern GA corresponding to the miss was displayed stationary.

Let us assume that if a jackpot is won in the start game, the start image (part or all) that would normally be displayed in the start game is not displayed. In this configuration, the inconvenience of being able to tell whether or not the jackpot has been won in the start game based on whether or not the start image is displayed can arise. Taking the above into consideration, this modified example employs a configuration that allows the start image to be displayed regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery in the start game.

For example, assume that this modified example is adopted in the first embodiment described above. In the first embodiment, in the start game (the first game in the second time-saving game state), screen M1 is displayed, then the shielding image GF is displayed, the entry effect is executed (entry image GT is displayed), the mode selection effect is executed, and the right-hit image GS3 is displayed (see Figs. 18(a) and 18(b)). After the right-hit image GS3 is displayed, the screen switches to the time-saving screen M7 in the second time-saving game state (see Fig. 17(a)), and the effect image GA is displayed in a stopped state. Specifically, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, the effect pattern GA corresponding to the miss is displayed in a stopped state.

In this modified example, regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery in the start-time game in the first embodiment, the screen M1 is displayed, then the shielding image GF is displayed, the entry effect is executed, the mode selection effect is executed, and the right-hit image GS3 is displayed. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, then the effect pattern GA corresponding to the miss is displayed (similar to the first embodiment). Also, in this modified example, if a jackpot game is won in the start-time game, the effect pattern GA corresponding to the jackpot is displayed after the right-hit image GS3 is displayed. For example, when the screen M7 is switched to during the time reduction after the right-hit image GS3 is displayed, the effect movable body 32 moves to the appearance position. After that, when the effect movable body 32 moves to the evacuation position, the effect pattern GA corresponding to the jackpot is displayed. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the start-time game, the effect pattern GA corresponding to the jackpot is displayed at once without going through the reach effect. However, in the start-up mode, after a series of start-up images are displayed, an effect (such as a reach effect) that can also be performed in other time-saving modes B is performed, and then a jackpot is announced in the same way as in other time-saving modes B.

In the above modified example, since a predetermined start image is displayed regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery, the result of the jackpot lottery is difficult to guess based on whether the start image is displayed. In the start game, a configuration in which the reach effect is not executed regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery is preferable. If the reach effect is executed in the start game, the reach effect starts after the above-mentioned entry effect and mode selection effect. Therefore, it is expected that the start game will be excessively prolonged. In a configuration in which the reach effect is not executed in the start game, there is an advantage in that the above-mentioned inconveniences are suppressed. Alternatively, in the start game, the reach effect may be executed with a lower probability than other games in the time-saving mode B regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery. However, in the modified example, in the start game in which the jackpot lottery is won, the start image may not be displayed (for example, when the premium effect is won).

Furthermore, in a start game in which a jackpot is won, a part of the start image displayed in a losing start game may be displayed, while the other part is not. For example, in a losing start game, a configuration is assumed in which the occupant shielding image GF, the entry image GT, and the right-hit image GS3 are displayed in that order. In the above configuration, in a start game in which a jackpot is won, the occupant shielding image GF may be displayed in the same manner as in a losing start game, and the entry image GT and the right-hit image GS3 may not be displayed.

In other words, it is possible to control the time-saving mode (second time-saving game state; third time-saving game state) for a predetermined period of time without going through a jackpot, and it is also possible to execute an entry effect. If the first time-saving fluctuation is a miss, the entry effect is executed during that fluctuation, but if the first time-saving fluctuation is a jackpot, the entry effect is not executed during that fluctuation.
Also, it is possible to control the time-saving mode (second time-saving game state; third time-saving game state) for a predetermined period of time without going through a jackpot, and to execute an entry effect, and if the first time-saving change is a miss, the entry effect is executed in a first mode in that change, and if the first time-saving change is a jackpot, the entry effect is executed in a second mode that is less appealing than the first mode in that change. Examples of the second mode include a mode in which the execution time of the entry effect is shorter than that of the first mode, and a mode in which fewer effects are displayed in the entry effect.
In this case, the player's sense of loss caused by the game ending so quickly despite reaching the second time-shortened game state (third time-shortened game state) can be alleviated, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

(20) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the number in the remaining number image GN was displayed as being subtracted in each game. In the above configuration, in a game in which a jackpot is won, the remaining number N is not subtracted, and therefore the subtraction display of the number in the remaining number image GN may be omitted. Similarly, in a game in which a jackpot is won, the remaining number M in the time-saving game state is not subtracted, and therefore the subtraction display of the number in the time-saving remaining image GJ may be omitted.

However, when the above configuration is adopted, in a configuration in which the number on the remaining number image GN is subtracted immediately after the start of a game, the result of the jackpot lottery may be guessed from the presence or absence of the subtraction display immediately after the start of a game. Specifically, in a configuration in which the number on the remaining number image GN is subtracted in a game in which a jackpot is won immediately after the start of a game, and the number on the remaining number image GN is not subtracted in a game in which a loss occurs, the fact that a jackpot has been won will be guessed at the point when the subtraction display is not made. In consideration of the above circumstances, a configuration in which the number on the remaining number image GN is subtracted regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery (regardless of whether the remaining number N is subtracted or not) is preferable. Similarly, a configuration in which the number on the time-saving remaining image GJ is subtracted regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery (regardless of whether the remaining number M is subtracted or not) is preferable.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the number of songs corresponding to the time-saving mode A may be one or more than one. Also, the number of songs corresponding to the time-saving mode B may be one or more than one. For example, in the first embodiment, the time-saving mode B in the first time-saving game state and the time-saving mode B in the second time-saving game state may play a common song, or different songs. Also, the time-saving mode A in the first time-saving game state and the time-saving mode B in the second time-saving game state may play a common song, or different songs.

(22) In each of the above-mentioned forms, in time-saving mode A of the first time-saving play state, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referenced in the early game, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is referenced in the late game. In the above configuration, if the power is cut off in time-saving mode A, it is preferable that the images that can be displayed upon recovery are the same regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination tables (Ta1, Ta2). Also, even if a configuration is adopted in which the fluctuation pattern determination table T is switched between the early game and the late game in the second time-saving play state, it is preferable that the images that can be displayed upon recovery are the same when the power is cut off at the early game of the second time-saving play state and when the power is cut off at the late game.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the table scenario S may be changed when a small win is won.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state may be confirmed by the manager of the gaming machine 1 at any time. For example, in the above first embodiment, the remaining number of times N was kept secret during the period when the gaming machine 1 can play immediately after the power was turned on. In the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which information specifying the current value of the remaining number of times N (hereinafter, "remaining number of times information") is displayed by operating an operation unit provided in a position where the player cannot operate it. For example, the main control board 110 may be used as the location where the above operation unit is provided. In the above configuration, for example, a configuration in which the remaining number of times information is displayed on the base display 114 or (and) the image display device 21 may be used. In addition, for example, a location where the operation unit is provided may be used on the performance control board 120. In the above configuration, for example, a configuration in which the remaining number of times information is displayed on the image display device 21 may be used.

As the above operation unit, a dedicated operation unit may be newly adopted, or an existing operation unit may be adopted. For example, the clear button 30 may be adopted as the operation unit. In the above configuration, when the clear button 30 is operated outside the period when the clear operation can be accepted, the remaining number of times information is displayed. In addition, the remaining number of times information may be displayed in response to the operation of the cross key 40 and the effect button 8. In the above configuration, when the cross key 40 or the effect button 8 is operated in a predetermined manner during a period when the operation of the cross key 40 and the effect button 8 by the player is invalid (for example, the period immediately after the power is turned on), the remaining number of times information is displayed. As with the remaining number of times information, whether or not the activation period has been started may be confirmed at any time by the administrator of the gaming machine. In addition, both the remaining number of times information and whether or not the activation period has been started may be confirmed at any time by the administrator of the gaming machine.

(25) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the opening mode of the second start opening 14 in each time-shortened game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the opening mode of the second start opening 14 in the second time-shortened game state may be made less favorable than the opening mode of the second start opening 14 in the first time-shortened game state. Specifically, the opening mode of the second start opening 14 in the first time-shortened game state may be more favorable than the non-time-shortened game state, while the opening mode of the second start opening 14 in the second time-shortened game state may be configured to be substantially the same as (slightly favorable to) the non-time-shortened game state.

As a specific example of the above modification, for example, a jackpot pattern A and a jackpot pattern B are provided, and after the jackpot game that starts when jackpot pattern A is displayed and stops, the machine enters a low probability game state, and after the jackpot game that starts when jackpot pattern B is displayed and stops, the machine transitions to a high probability game state of 30 tries (a so-called "ST machine"). The probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/300 in the low probability game state, and approximately 1/100 in the high probability game state.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol A is displayed still in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state or second time-saving game state), the game transitions to a 30-time time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends. The 30 time-saving game states above are low-probability game states. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol B is displayed still in the time-saving game state, the game transitions to a 60-time time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 60 time-saving game states above, the first 30 are high-probability game states, and the latter 30 are low-probability game states. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state ends after a maximum of 30 low-probability non-time-saving game states have been played, regardless of the type of jackpot symbol.

However, if the jackpot symbol A is displayed as a stopped symbol in the non-time-saving game state, the game will transition to a 1000-time time-saving game state after the jackpot ends. Also, if the jackpot symbol B is displayed as a stopped symbol in the non-time-saving game state, the game will transition to a 1000-time time-saving game state after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, if the jackpot symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in the 1000-time time-saving game state, the game will transition to a 1000-time time-saving game state again after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the type of jackpot symbol. The opening mode of the second starting hole 14 in the first time-saving game state is more advantageous than in the non-time-saving game state.

The initial value of the remaining number of times N in the second time-saving game state is the number "30", and when 30 plays (misses) are played in the low-probability game state, the game then transitions to the second time-saving game state. The opening mode of the second start port 14 in the second time-saving game state is substantially the same as the opening mode of the second start port 14 in the non-time-saving game state. The second time-saving game state continues until a maximum of 500 plays have been played, and then the game transitions to the non-time-saving game state.

In the above modified example, the second time-shortened game state of 500 times begins immediately after the above-mentioned 30 times of the low-probability non-time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state) ends. However, if a jackpot is won in the above time-shortened game state, it is not possible to transition to the time-shortened game state of 1000 times. Therefore, the player plays with the goal of not winning a jackpot until the second time-shortened game state ends and transitions to the low-probability non-time-shortened game state (until 530 times of play are completed after transitioning to the low-probability game state).

However, in this modified example, in the jackpot lottery in the non-time-saving game state, the "third time-saving" may be won. The probability of winning the third time-saving is, for example, about 1/300. When the third time-saving is won, the time-saving pattern is displayed frozen on the special chart, and the game state transitions to the third time-saving game state. However, if the time-saving pattern is displayed frozen in the time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state does not start. The third time-saving game state continues for a maximum of 500 plays, similar to the second time-saving game state, and the opening mode of the second start hole 14 is substantially the same as in the non-time-saving game state. Also, when a jackpot is won in the third time-saving game state, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state for 30 or 60 plays, similar to when a jackpot is won in another time-saving game state. In the above configuration, in the non-time-saving game state, the player plays with the aim of winning a jackpot before the third time-saving game state.

The above modified example makes it possible to provide new gameplay features to the player. It is also possible to provide multiple types of time-saving symbols, and to configure the number of plays in the third time-saving game state to change depending on the type of time-saving symbol.

(26) In each of the above-described embodiments, a screen that may be displayed during the gaming period (e.g., the screen shown in FIG. 23(b)) is displayed immediately after the recovery screen is displayed when power is restored. However, if the machine is in a customer waiting state immediately after the recovery screen is displayed, a screen that is only displayed in the customer waiting state (e.g., a demo screen) may be displayed.

(27) In each of the above-mentioned configurations, the customer waiting screen may be displayed even in the time-saving play state. However, it is preferable that the above-mentioned mounting notification image GK is not displayed on the customer waiting screen in the time-saving play state.

(28) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the average fluctuation time of the special chart may be shorter in the last-minute mode than in the normal mode. Specifically, in the case of a miss in the jackpot lottery, it is preferable that the average time of the fluctuation pattern of a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 (last-minute mode) is referenced is shorter than that of a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 (normal mode) is referenced. In the above-mentioned configuration, when shifting from the normal mode to the last-minute mode, the average time of each game is shortened. In other words, the average time of each game is shortened in the period immediately prior to the start of the second time-saving game state.

For example, consider a comparison in which the average fluctuation time of the special chart does not change between normal mode and last-minute mode. In the above comparison, depending on the determined fluctuation pattern, the last-minute mode may be prolonged. In the above case, a player who wants to start the second time-saving game state early may experience inconvenience that causes stress. In the above-mentioned modified example, since the average fluctuation time of the special chart in last-minute mode is shorter than in normal mode, there is an advantage that the above inconveniences can be suppressed compared to, for example, the comparison.

(29) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the frequency of execution of each effect in the normal mode and the last-minute mode can be changed as appropriate. However, some players may wish to transition to the second time-saving game state in the last-minute mode rather than winning a jackpot. Such players may find effects in the last-minute mode that have a high expectation of a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "high expectation effects") annoying. In other words, the high expectation effects that are originally anticipated by players can be found annoying, which is an inconvenience.

Taking the above into consideration, a configuration may be adopted in which, in a game in which the jackpot lottery is lost, high expectation effects are less likely to be executed in the last-minute mode than in the normal mode. For example, a configuration is assumed in which a mini-game effect, instructed to operate the effect button 8 in a specified manner, is provided as a high expectation effect. In the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which, in a game in which the jackpot lottery is lost, a mini-game effect is less likely to be selected in the last-minute mode than in the normal mode. This modified example reduces the above-mentioned inconveniences. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which high expectation effects other than mini-game effects are less likely to be selected in the last-minute mode.

(30) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a first jackpot game of a first number of rounds (e.g., 10 rounds) and a second jackpot game of a second number of rounds (e.g., 4 rounds) less than the first number of rounds may be provided, and the expectation of winning the first jackpot game may be indicated by the fluctuation pattern. For example, in the second time-saving game state, a configuration may be conceived in which the instant win effect is less likely to be executed in a game in which the first jackpot game is won than in a game in which the second jackpot game is won.

(31) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the type of time-saving game state is appropriately notified. For example, the background image GH may be different in each time-saving game state. Also, the BGM may be different in each time-saving game state, and the performance pattern GA may be different. The time when the type of time-saving game state is notified can be set appropriately. For example, a configuration may be considered in which the type of time-saving game state is notified when each time-saving game state is started.

As a specific example of this modified example, a small symbol Ga may be displayed in the time-saving entry performance regardless of which time-saving game state is started. In the above configuration, a small symbol Ga corresponding to a big win symbol is displayed in the time-saving entry performance when the first time-saving game state is started. Also, a small symbol Ga corresponding to a losing symbol is displayed in the time-saving entry performance when the second time-saving game state is started, and a small symbol Ga corresponding to a time-saving symbol is displayed in the time-saving entry performance when the third time-saving game state is started. Therefore, there is an advantage that the player can understand the type of time-saving game state that is started by the small symbol Ga displayed in the time-saving entry performance.

(32) In each of the above-mentioned forms, in the time-saving entry performance in the second time-saving game state, the performance pattern GA may be hidden, and the small pattern Ga, reserved image GB, and fourth pattern GC may be displayed, and then the entry image GT may be displayed. The above configuration has the advantage that the time-saving entry performance in the first time-saving game state and the time-saving entry performance in the second time-saving game state are easily distinguished while improving the visibility of the entry image GT. Note that it is sufficient that the time-saving entry performance in the first time-saving game state and the time-saving entry performance in the second time-saving game state can be distinguished, and the image displayed in the time-saving entry performance in the second time-saving game state may be any of the performance image GA, small pattern Ga, reserved image GB, and fourth pattern GC, and it is sufficient that at least one of each pattern is displayed. Similarly, in the time-saving entry effect in the third time-saving game state, the effect symbol GA may be hidden, and the small symbol Ga, reserved image GB, and fourth symbol GC may be displayed, followed by the entry image GT.

(33) In each of the above-mentioned configurations, a result image GP may be displayed when the second time-shortened game state ends. The above configuration has the advantage of making it easier for the player to recognize that the second time-shortened game state has ended, compared to a configuration in which a result image GP is not displayed when the second time-shortened game state ends. Similarly, a result image GP may be displayed when the third time-shortened game state ends. The above configuration has the advantage of making it easier for the player to recognize that the third time-shortened game state has ended, compared to a configuration in which a result image GP is not displayed when the third time-shortened game state ends.

(34) In each of the above-mentioned forms, in a game state in which the time-saving symbol is active (low-probability non-time-saving game state), it is preferable that a special effect symbol GA (hereinafter, "time-saving effect symbol") is displayed as a stopped symbol when the time-saving symbol stops. On the other hand, in a game state in which the time-saving symbol is inactive, it is preferable that a effect symbol GA corresponding to a miss is displayed as a stopped symbol when the time-saving symbol stops.

However, in a game state in which the time-saving pattern is disabled, when the time-saving pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the time-saving effect pattern may also be displayed in a stopped state. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the time-saving effect pattern displayed in a game state in which the time-saving pattern is disabled is different from the time-saving effect pattern displayed in a game state in which the time-saving pattern is enabled.

(35) The symbol combinations corresponding to the time-saving symbols are not limited to the examples of each of the above forms. For example, a configuration is assumed in which the performance symbols GA include "special symbols" that are different from the numbers "1 to 9." In the above configuration, for example, "7, special symbol, 7" may be adopted as the symbol combination corresponding to the time-saving symbols.

In the above modified examples, it is preferable that the special symbol is the last of the three symbols to be stopped and displayed. In addition, it is preferable that the special symbol be a symbol that displays text indicating a transition to a time-saving game state (for example, the string "Time Saving"). Furthermore, it is preferable that the special symbol is not included in any symbol combination other than the one that corresponds to the time-saving symbol.

In the above modified examples, the variable display of the performance pattern GA may not include special patterns during the period when the reach performance is not executed, and the special patterns may be displayed during the period after the reach performance is executed. In the above configuration, the special patterns may be displayed in a variable manner during a game in which the time-saving pattern is not displayed in a stopped state. In the above configuration, even in a game in which the time-saving pattern is not displayed in a stopped state, it is possible to increase the expectation that the time-saving pattern will be displayed in a stopped state. All or some of the above configurations may be adopted.

(36) In each of the above-mentioned forms, in the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state (the final game in the low-probability non-time-saving game state), a normal effect pattern GA corresponding to a miss is displayed. Instead of the above configuration, a special effect pattern GA may be displayed in the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which an effect pattern GA displaying the words "Time-saving game start!" is stopped and displayed in the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state. However, it is preferable that the special effect pattern GA displayed in the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state is configured to be distinguishable (different) from the effect pattern GA corresponding to the time-saving pattern, the effect pattern GA corresponding to the big win pattern, and the effect pattern GA corresponding to the small win pattern. In other words, an effect pattern different from the normal miss effect pattern may be stopped and displayed when entering the second time-saving game state.

(37) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the period during which the result image GP is displayed can be changed as appropriate. For example, the result image GP may be configured to start being displayed when the final game in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) ends, and then the result image GP may be hidden after the second reserved number is subtracted to 0 and the variable display of the second special pattern display device 21 stops. In other words, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the result image GP may be configured to continue being displayed until the first variable display of the first special pattern display device 20 can start.

(38) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a limited period may not be set before transitioning to the second time-shortened game state. In the above-mentioned configuration, even if the judgment information (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "first judgment information") acquired when the game ball enters the first starting hole 13 is reserved in the second time-shortened game state (can be judged in the second time-shortened game state), a reserved change presentation based on the first judgment information is executed in the non-time-shortened game state.

However, if the player continues to be notified in the second time-saving play state that he or she has the right to win a jackpot, this may cause an inconvenience of excessively encouraging the player's gambling spirit. Therefore, in a configuration in which no time limit is set before the transition to the second time-saving play state, it is preferable that the reserve change presentation in the reserved image GB is canceled when the player transitions to the second time-saving play state. In the above configuration, the reserved image GB that was displayed in a special mode in the non-time-saving play state is displayed in a normal mode in the second time-saving play state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the reserved image GB that was displayed in a special mode immediately before the transition to the third time-saving play state is displayed in a normal mode in the third time-saving play state.

(39) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a limited period may be set before the transition to the third time-saving game state. Specifically, a limited period may be set from when it is determined in advance that the third time-saving game state will be won until the transition to the third time-saving game state.

(40) In the above embodiment, when transitioning to the second time-saving game state, the right-hit start image GR was displayed regardless of whether the first game in the second time-saving game state was executed or not (regardless of the number of reserved balls). In addition, regardless of whether the first game in the second time-saving game state was executed or not, a sound instructing the player to start right-hit game was output, and background music for the second time-saving game state was output.

Instead of the above configuration, a right-hit start image GR may be displayed, a sound instructing the player to start right-hit play may be output, and background music for the second time-saving play state may be output, on the condition that the first play in the second time-saving play state is executed. Also, a right-hit start image GR may be displayed, a sound instructing the player to start right-hit play may be output, and background music for the third time-saving play state may be output, on the condition that the first play in the third time-saving play state is executed.

(41) In the above-described embodiment, when transitioning from the second time-shortened play state to the low-probability non-time-shortened play state, the left-hand hit start image GL was displayed regardless of whether the first play in the low-probability non-time-shortened play state was executed (regardless of the presence or absence of reserved numbers). In addition, regardless of whether the first play in the low-probability non-time-shortened play state was executed, a sound was output instructing the player to start left-hand hit play.

Instead of the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which, on the condition that the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving game state is executed, a left-hit start image GL is displayed and a sound is output instructing the player to start left-hit game. Also, when transitioning from the third time-saving game state to the low-probability non-time-saving game state, on the condition that the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving game state is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which a left-hit start image GL is displayed and a sound is output instructing the player to start left-hit game.

(42) In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot game may be executed when the game ball passes through a specific area in addition to when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery (so-called type 1, type 2 gaming machines may be used). The specific areas above are where the game ball can win a small jackpot game. In other words, when a small jackpot is won and the game ball wins a specific area in the small jackpot game, the jackpot game is executed. In the above modified examples, the cumulative number m is not initialized when a small jackpot is won, but is initialized when the game ball wins a specific area.

In the above modified example, a high probability game state is not provided, and the probability of winning a jackpot is the same when a game ball enters the first start port 13 and when a game ball enters the second start port 14. Also, the probability of winning a small jackpot when a game ball enters the second start port 14 is higher than the probability of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state, it is easier for a game ball to enter the second start port 14. With the above configuration, it is easier to execute a jackpot game in the time-saving game state compared to the non-time-saving game state.

In this modified example, a second time-saving game state may be provided. In the above configuration, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of times n that the game is activated, the game essentially transitions to a state with a high probability of winning a jackpot. Also, in this modified example, a third time-saving game state may be provided. In the above configuration, when the time-saving pattern stops, the game essentially transitions to a state with a high probability of winning a jackpot.

(43) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the number of time-saving times N3 in the third time-saving game state may be changed depending on the game state in which the time-saving symbol is displayed stationary. For example, when the time-saving symbol is displayed stationary in the time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times N3 may be longer than when the time-saving symbol is displayed stationary in the non-time-saving game state. Also, when the time-saving symbol is displayed stationary in the time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times N3 may be shorter than when the time-saving symbol is displayed stationary in the non-time-saving game state.

(44) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the time-saving game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the fluctuation pattern between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state may be different. Also, the fluctuation pattern between the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state may be different, and the fluctuation pattern between the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state may be different.

(45) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the cumulative number m reaches the activation number n in the third time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state is activated, the fact may be notified. If the opening state of the second start port 14 does not change when the second time-shortened game state is activated in the third time-shortened game state, it is expected that the player will not know that the second time-shortened game state has been activated. According to this modified example, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed. For example, by displaying the cumulative number m in the third time-shortened game state, the presence or absence of a transition to the second time-shortened game state is essentially notified. The fact that the second time-shortened game state has been activated is notified at an appropriate timing. For example, the fact that the second time-shortened game state has been activated may be notified when the third time-shortened game state ends.

(46) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the opening manner of the second start opening 14 in the third time-saving game state may be different for each time-saving symbol. In the above-mentioned configuration, the entertainment value of the game is improved compared to a configuration in which the opening manner of the second start opening 14 in the third time-saving game state does not change according to the time-saving symbol.

(47) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the hold change effect was shown as an example of a special effect, but the special effect is not limited to the hold change effect. For example, a special effect in which a predetermined lamp in the gaming machine 1 lights up in a specific manner may be adopted. Also, a special effect in which a special image is displayed on the image display device 31 may be adopted. For example, a special effect may be an effect in which a text image saying "Super Hot Zone" is displayed. In the above configuration, the text image saying "Super Hot Zone" is more likely to be displayed when a jackpot is determined in advance than when a miss is determined in advance.

(48) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the reserved change effect (specific effect) that can be determined may be different when the result of the pre-determination is a jackpot and when the result of the pre-determination is the third time reduction. For example, the final special mode of the reserved image GB that can be determined may be different when the result of the pre-determination is a jackpot and when the result of the pre-determination is the third time reduction. As an example of the above configuration, when the result of the pre-determination is a jackpot, the reserved image GB may change to rainbow colors, but when the result of the pre-determination is the third time reduction, the reserved image GB does not change to rainbow colors.

(49) In each of the above embodiments, the time during which the right-hit start image GR is displayed can be changed as appropriate. Also, the time during which the right-hit start image GR is displayed may be changed for each time-shortened game state. For example, in the above first embodiment, a configuration in which the right-hit start image GR is displayed for a longer period in the second time-shortened game state than in the first time-shortened game state is preferable. Also, a configuration in which the right-hit start image GR is displayed for a longer period in the third time-shortened game state than in the first time-shortened game state is preferable. In the above configurations, the right-hit start image GR may be different between the first time-shortened game state and the other time-shortened game states. Note that a configuration in which the right-hit start image GR is not displayed when the first time-shortened game state starts may also be used.

(50) The time-saving game state of each of the above forms ends when the total number of times the first special pattern display device 20 has displayed a variable number of times and the second special pattern display device 21 has displayed a variable number of times reaches the time-saving number N. However, the trigger for ending the time-saving game state is not limited to the example of the first embodiment. For example, the time-saving game state may be configured to end when the first of the following events occurs: when the total number of times the first special pattern display device 20 has displayed a variable number of times and the second special pattern display device 21 has displayed a variable number of times reaches 50, when the second special pattern display device 21 has displayed a variable number of times reaches 5, or when a small win is won once.

Also, the termination trigger may be different for each time-saving game state. For example, the first time-saving game state is terminated when the first special pattern display device 20 and the second special pattern display device 21 reach a total of 50 times of variable display, when the second special pattern display device 21 reaches a total of 5 times of variable display, and when a small win is won once. The second time-saving game state is terminated when the first special pattern display device 20 and the second special pattern display device 21 reach a total of 500 times of variable display, when the second special pattern display device 21 reaches a total of 20 times of variable display, and when a small win is won four times. Furthermore, the third time-saving game state can be configured to end when the first of the following occurs: the total number of times the first special pattern display device 20 has displayed a change and the number of times the second special pattern display device 21 has displayed a change reaches 30; the number of times the second special pattern display device 21 has displayed a change reaches 6; or three small wins are won.

(51) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the presentation mode (background image GH, BGM, presentation that can be determined) in each time-saving game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the presentation mode of the third time-saving game state may be made different depending on the number of time-saving times N3 (100 times, 1000 times). Also, in the third time-saving game state where the number of time-saving times N3 is 1000 times, the presentation mode for the first 100 times may be the same as the presentation mode of the third time-saving game state where the number of time-saving times N3 is 100 times, and the presentation mode may change in the 101st game and thereafter. Furthermore, in the above configurations, a configuration in which the presentation mode of the first time-saving game state and the presentation mode of the third time-saving game state (the presentation mode before and after the change) are different is preferable.

(52) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the remaining number of times image GF that displays the remaining number of times M in the time-shortened play state may be omitted. Also, the remaining number of times image GF may be displayed in some time-shortened play states (e.g., the first time-shortened play state), and the remaining number of times image GF may not be displayed in other time-shortened play states (e.g., the second time-shortened play state). Furthermore, the remaining number of times image GF may be hidden in the early stage of the time-shortened play state, and the remaining number of times image GF may be displayed in the latter stage of the time-shortened play state.

A specific example of the above modified example is a configuration in which the remaining number of times image GF is displayed in the first time-saving play state and the third time-saving play state, the remaining number of times image GF is not displayed in the early stage of the second time-saving play state, and the remaining number of times image GF starts to be displayed after the remaining number of times M2 in the second time-saving play state is subtracted to a predetermined value (e.g., 100). In the above configuration, the remaining number of times image GF may also be not displayed even after the early stage of the second time-saving play state.

(53) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the type of time-saving symbol can be changed as appropriate. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of time-saving symbols for transitioning to the third time-saving game state of 1000 times and/or a time-saving symbol for transitioning to the third time-saving game state of 100 times are provided. For example, a configuration may be conceived in which a transition is made to the third time-saving game state of 100 times occurs both when the first time-saving symbol is stopped and when the second time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed.

(54) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the effect pattern GA corresponding to the time-saving pattern may be different depending on the time-saving pattern, or may be common to the time-saving pattern. For example, the effect pattern GA displayed when the time-saving pattern for transitioning to the third time-saving game state of 1000 times is displayed may be the same or different when the time-saving pattern for transitioning to the third time-saving game state of 100 times is displayed.

(55) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the period during which the time-saving entry effect is executed is changed as appropriate. For example, the fixed period when the time-saving symbol is displayed stopped is extended longer than the normal fixed period. Specifically, the length of the fixed period when the time-saving symbol is displayed stopped is extended to approximately the same length as the ending period of the jackpot game.

In the above configuration, a time-saving entry effect may be executed in the determined period when the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed, in order to transition to the third time-saving game state. Also, the configuration may transition to the third time-saving game state after the determined period has ended. Furthermore, in a configuration in which a time-saving entry effect is executed in a determined period, when a configuration is adopted in which the third time-saving game state is transitioned to after the determined period has ended, the effect pattern GA and small pattern Ga may or may not be displayed during the determined period.

(56) In each of the above-mentioned configurations, the frequency at which the specific effects are executed may be changed (customized) by the player at will. However, regardless of the frequency at which the specific effects are executed, it is preferable that the frequency at which the specific effects are executed is less during the above-mentioned restricted period than during periods other than the restricted period.

(57) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the first special pattern display device 20 and the second special pattern display device 21 may be configured to simultaneously (in parallel) display changing special patterns. In the above-mentioned configuration, the first reserved number is consumed regardless of whether or not the second special pattern display device 21 displays a changing pattern, and the second reserved number is consumed regardless of whether or not the first special pattern display device 20 displays a changing pattern.

In the above configuration, as in the first embodiment described above, it is assumed that the cumulative number m is added when the special symbol stops. It is also assumed that the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variable display during the nth play, and the second special symbol display device 21 displays a variable display during the n+1th play. It is further assumed that the n+1th play ends before the nth play (the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 stops before the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20). In the above cases, the cumulative number m is updated to the value "n" at the end of the n+1th play. Therefore, a configuration in which the transition to the second time-saving play state occurs at the end of the n+1th play is preferable.

Assume a configuration in which the cumulative number m is added when the variable display of the special pattern begins. Also assume a case in which the first special pattern display device 20 displays a variable display during the nth play, and the second special pattern display device 21 displays a variable display during the n+1th play. Furthermore, assume a case in which the n+1th play ends before the nth play (the variable display of the second special pattern display device 21 stops before the variable display of the first special pattern display device 20). In the above cases, the cumulative number m is updated to the value "n" at the start of the nth play. Therefore, a configuration in which the transition to the second time-saving play state occurs at the start of the nth play is preferable.

(58) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol in the nth actuation game may be configured to be different from the variation pattern in other games. For example, it is preferable that when the variation pattern of the special symbol in the nth actuation game is determined, the image display device 31 notifies the player that the game will transition to the second time-saving game state. It is also preferable that the fixed period of the special symbol is extended in the nth actuation game from the game before the nth actuation. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the time-saving entry performance when transitioning to the second time-saving game state is executed in the fixed period in the nth actuation game. It is also preferable that the game transitions to the second time-saving game state after the extended fixed period ends.

However, it is preferable that the cumulative number m is initialized at the start of a jackpot game, and the variation pattern of the special symbol in the game is changed when the nth activation game is played after that, and the cumulative number m is initialized by a trigger other than the start of a jackpot game (for example, by operating the clear button 30), and the variation pattern in the game is not changed (does not change from the previous game) when the nth activation game is played after that. It is also preferable that the cumulative number m is initialized at the start of a jackpot game, and the fixed period in the game is extended when the nth activation game is played after that, and the cumulative number m is initialized by a trigger other than the start of a jackpot game (for example, by operating the clear button 30), and the fixed period in the game is not extended when the nth activation game is played after that. In the above configuration, the manager of the gaming machine cannot arbitrarily change the variation time and fixed period of the special symbol, which suppresses the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game.

(59) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a configuration in which the time-saving game state ends before the fixed period ends has been described as a specific example of ending the time-saving game state when a special symbol is stopped and displayed. However, in a configuration in which the time-saving game state ends when a special symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving game state may also be ended before the fixed period ends.

For example, in the above-mentioned special pattern stop processing (FIG. 18), the time-saving end determination processing (S234 in the same figure) may be configured to be set before step S233 for setting the fixed period. Specifically, the time-saving end determination processing may be set between step S233 and the third time-saving transition determination processing (S232). In addition, the time-saving end determination processing may be set between the third time-saving transition determination processing and the second time-saving transition determination processing (S231), or the time-saving end determination processing may be set immediately before the second time-saving transition determination processing.

In addition, in this modified example, it is preferable that the determined period of play in which the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) ends is longer than the longest time that the opening and closing door 14b is controlled to the operating mode Db. In the above configuration, when the non-time-saving game state starts after the time-saving game state ends, the opening and closing door 14b will never be in the operating state Db. Therefore, in the non-time-saving game state, the situation in which the game ball enters the second starting hole 14 is suppressed.

(60) In each of the above embodiments, the timing for transmitting the cumulative count command may be at the start of a game or at the end of a game. In addition, the cumulative count command may be transmitted in all games, or may be transmitted in some games (e.g., every 100 games).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned forms, a command indicating the remaining number of times "n-m" up to the number of activations n may be sent to the performance control board 120 instead of the cumulative number command indicating the cumulative number m. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which neither the command indicating the remaining number of times up to the number of activations n nor the cumulative number command is sent to the performance control board 120. In the above configuration, the sub-CPU 121 can notify the current value of the cumulative number m or the remaining number of times up to the number of activations n by counting the number of times it receives a command (e.g., a pattern determination command) that is sent when the special pattern stops (when the cumulative number m is added).

(61) In the above-mentioned embodiment, immediately after the second time-saving game state ends, a configuration may be made in which a transition to a dedicated presentation mode (a mode in which a dedicated presentation can be executed) is possible. In addition, a configuration in which dedicated background music is output in the above-mentioned dedicated presentation mode is preferable. Similarly, immediately after the third time-saving game state ends, a configuration may be made in which a transition to a dedicated presentation mode (a mode in which a dedicated presentation can be executed) is possible. In addition, a configuration in which dedicated background music is output in the above-mentioned dedicated presentation mode is preferable. In addition, a configuration in which a transition to a common special presentation mode is possible after each time-saving game state ends.

(62) In each of the above-mentioned forms, when the second time-shortened game state ends and transitions to the low-probability non-time-shortened game state, there is no transition to the second time-shortened game state even if the number of plays in the low-probability non-time-shortened game state reaches the number of activations n. In the above configuration, it is preferable that in the low-probability non-time-shortened game state after the second time-shortened game state ends, a configuration is provided in which a notification is given that the second time-shortened game state has already ended. Specifically, a configuration is considered in which the cumulative number m is displayed in the low-probability non-time-shortened game state after the second time-shortened game state ends. If the displayed cumulative number m is greater than the numerical value "800", it is understood that the second time-shortened game state has already ended.

(63) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a specific effect (such as a reserve change effect) that notifies (suggests) in advance that a transition to the second time-shortened play state will occur is not executed depending on the result of the advance determination. However, a specific effect that notifies (suggests) in advance that a transition to the second time-shortened play state will occur may also be executed.

(64) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the time-saving symbol may be active in the time-saving game state. For example, consider a case where the time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the second time-saving game state. In the above case, the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state may both be configured to operate in parallel. However, in the time-saving game state after the time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the second time-saving game state, it is preferable that the open state of the opening and closing door 14b in the second time-saving game state is maintained.

(65) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the game state transitions to the second time-saving game state when the special symbol stops during the period after the number of times it is determined that a jackpot has not been won in the jackpot lottery in the low-probability game state has reached the number of activations n. However, the timing of the transition to the second time-saving game state can be changed as appropriate during the period after the number of times it is determined that a jackpot has not been won in the jackpot lottery in the low-probability game state has reached the number of activations n.

For example, the number of times it has been determined that a jackpot has not been won (the cumulative number m) may be updated (added or subtracted) immediately after the jackpot lottery (immediately after game play begins). In the above configuration, it is possible to transition to the second time-saving game state immediately after game play begins. When adopting a configuration in which the second time-saving game state is transitioned to immediately after game play begins, it is preferable that the right hit lamp 28 is lit immediately after game play begins and the above-mentioned advantageous period signal (external information signal) is turned ON. In the above configuration, the above-mentioned non-counting period begins when the second time-saving game state is transitioned to immediately after game play begins.

In the above modified examples, it is preferable that the above-mentioned time-saving entry effect is executed when the second time-saving game state is entered immediately after the start of play. It is also preferable that when the second time-saving game state is entered immediately after the start of play, an image notifying the player that they should play by hitting to the right (for example, the above-mentioned right-hit image Gsy) is displayed and the background image GH of the time-saving game state is displayed. Note that, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the second time-saving game state is entered before the fixed period for the special pattern ends, but the second time-saving game state may be entered after the fixed period ends.

(66) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state is decremented at the end of play, but a configuration in which the remaining number of times M is decremented at the start of play may also be adopted. In the above configuration, the time-saving game state ends at the start of play. For example, the second time-saving game state ends immediately after the start of the 1000th game. In the above case, when the 1000th game of the second time-saving game state starts, the right hit lamp 28 goes out and the above-mentioned counting period begins.

(67) In each of the above-mentioned forms, a game state in which the high probability game state and the non-time-saving game state are both in the state (high probability non-time-saving game state) may be provided. However, in the high probability non-time-saving game state, the time-saving symbol is invalid. In other words, the time-saving symbol is only valid in the low probability game state. Also, in the high probability non-time-saving game state, the cumulative number m is not incremented (it is maintained at the initial value "0").

(68) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of setting values (e.g., 1 to 6) are provided, and the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot lottery (e.g., the probability of winning a jackpot in a low-probability game state) changes depending on the setting value. However, the probability of winning the third time-saving mode is the same for each setting value. Also, the probability of winning a small jackpot is the same for each setting value. The above setting values are changed by a setting change process that is executed in response to a setting change operation by the administrator of the gaming machine 1.

In the above modified examples, the number of times n the second time-saving game state is activated is the same for each setting value. Specifically, if the probability of winning a jackpot in a low-probability game state is "ML" (0<M<1), it is preferable that the number of times n the second time-saving game state is activated is within the range "2.5/ML≦n≦3.0/ML" for all setting values.

In the above modified examples, it is preferable that the number of times of play in the time-saving play state (hereinafter, the time-saving play number N) is common to all the set values. Specifically, it is preferable that the number of times of time-saving play N1 in the first time-saving play state is common to all the set values, the number of times of time-saving play N2 in the second time-saving play state is common to all the set values, and the number of times of time-saving play N3 in the third time-saving play state is common to all the set values. Furthermore, if the minimum jackpot probability of the jackpot probability "ML" in the low probability play state of each set value is "MLmin" (the jackpot probability of the set value "1"), it is preferable that the number of times of time-saving play N2 is equal to or less than the value "3.8/MLmin" and the number of times of time-saving play N3 is equal to or less than the value "3.8/MLmin".

(69) In each of the above embodiments, the cumulative count m may be configured not to be initialized by the setting value change process by changing the setting value and the clear operation process by operating the clear button 30, but may be configured to be initialized when a dedicated operation unit (hereinafter, the "accumulation clear button") is operated.

(70) In each of the above embodiments, the cumulative number m may not be initialized in the clear operation process, and may be initialized in the setting value change process. Also, the cumulative number m may not be initialized when the clear button 30 is operated in a normal manner, and may be initialized when the clear button 30 is operated in a special manner. For example, a configuration may be considered in which, when the clear button 30 is operated once, the specified information is initialized but the cumulative number m is not initialized, and when the clear button 30 is operated twice consecutively, both the specified information and the cumulative number m are initialized.

(71) In each of the above-mentioned forms, a presentation suggesting a set value may be executed. For example, a configuration may be considered in which a presentation suggesting a set value is executed when the time-saving game state ends. However, when the time-saving game state transitions to the second time-saving game state and a jackpot is not won in the second time-saving game state, it is highly likely that the setting value has a low probability of winning a jackpot. Therefore, a configuration in which a presentation suggesting a set value is executed when the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends, and a presentation suggesting a set value is not executed when the second time-saving game state ends is preferable.

(72) In each of the above-mentioned low-probability non-time-saving game states, multiple types of effect patterns GAx may be displayed according to the presentation mode in which the game is progressing and the background image GH. Similarly, in the low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, multiple types of effect patterns GAy may be displayed according to the presentation mode in which the game is progressing and the background image GH.

Also, a different effect pattern GAy may be displayed in each of the first time-shortened game state, the second time-shortened game state, and the third time-shortened game state. Specifically, an effect pattern GAy common to the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state may be displayed, and an effect pattern GAy different from the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state may be displayed in the third time-shortened game state. Also, an effect pattern GAy common to the second time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state may be displayed, and an effect pattern GAy different from the second time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state may be displayed in the first time-shortened game state. Furthermore, an effect pattern GAy common to the first time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state may be displayed, and an effect pattern GAy different from the first time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state may be displayed in the second time-shortened game state.

(73) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the configuration when transitioning to the second time-saving play state can be modified as appropriate. For example, assume that the number of reserved plays when transitioning to the second time-saving play state is the numerical value "0". In other words, assume that a transition is made to a customer waiting state (non-play state) immediately after transitioning to the second time-saving play state. In this modified example, in the above customer waiting state, the right hit lamp 28 is lit and a right hit image Gsy is displayed. Also, in this modified example, in the above customer waiting state, an emphasis image GZ indicating the string "0 plays remaining" is displayed.

In this modified example, when a start win occurs in the above-mentioned customer waiting state and the first game of the second time-saving game state begins, the right hit lamp 28 continues to be lit and the right hit image Gsy continues to be displayed during that game. However, in this modified example, the highlight image GZ is not displayed during the first game of the second time-saving game state. Furthermore, in this modified example, the time-saving entry effect is not executed in the customer waiting state immediately after transitioning to the second time-saving game state, and then the time-saving entry effect is executed during the first game of the second time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls is equal to or greater than the value "1" at the time of transition to the second time-shortened play state, in this modified example, immediately after transition to the second time-shortened play state (at the first play in the second time-shortened play state), the right hit lamp 28 lights up, the right hit image Gsy is displayed, the highlighted image GZ is hidden, and the time-shortened play entry effect is executed. Note that the above modified example may also be configured so that the time-shortened play entry effect is executed in the customer waiting state. Also, the play count image GE may be displayed throughout the above-mentioned customer waiting state, and the play count image GE may be hidden at the first play in the second time-shortened play state.

(74) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the magnitude relationship between the remaining number of times M1 in the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times M2 in the second time-saving game state, and the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-saving game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the remaining number of times M1 may be longer than the remaining number of times M2, or the remaining number of times M1 and the remaining number of times M2 may be equal. Also, the remaining number of times M3 may be longer than the remaining number of times M2, or the remaining number of times M3 and the remaining number of times M2 may be equal. Similarly, the remaining number of times M1 may be longer than the remaining number of times M3, or the remaining number of times M1 and the remaining number of times M3 may be equal, or the remaining number of times M3 may be longer than the remaining number of times M1.

(75) In the above-mentioned second embodiment, the "first information J1" is exemplified as the "first information related to the execution of the special game specified by the advance judgment" of the present invention. However, the "first information" of the present invention is not limited to the above example. For example, the "winning information (start winning designation command) generated when the random number value for determining the special symbol of the big win is obtained" in the first embodiment is included in the "first information" of the present invention. Also, in the above-mentioned second embodiment, the "second information J2" is exemplified as the "second information related to the transition to the second game state specified by the advance judgment" of the present invention. However, the "second information" of the present invention is not limited to the above example. For example, when the random number value for determining the special symbol of the loss is obtained a cumulative number m, it becomes possible to transition to the second time-saving game state (second game state). Therefore, the "winning information (start winning designation command) generated when the random number value for determining the special symbol of the loss is obtained" is included in the "second information" of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, a specific example was shown in which the present invention was applied to a pachinko machine, but the present invention may also be applied to a pachislot machine.

The gaming machine of the present invention is, for example, the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes an acquisition means (S139 in FIG. 30) for acquiring judgment information when an acquisition condition is satisfied, a judgment means (S207 in FIG. 33) for judging whether a special game has been won or not based on the judgment information when the judgment condition is satisfied, a start means (S244 in FIG. 35) for starting a second game state in which it is easier to satisfy the acquisition condition than the first game state when the number of times it has been judged that the special game has not been won reaches a predetermined specific number of times, and a shielding image that shields the background image and the background image to make it difficult to see according to the progress of the game. and an image display means (image display device 31) capable of displaying various images including the background image, which includes a first background image (GHx) displayed in the first game state and a second background image (GHw, GHz) displayed in the second game state. When the number of times that the special game is determined to be a non-win reaches a predetermined specific number of times, the image display means makes the first background image difficult to see by using a shielding image, and then makes the shielding image non-display so that the second background image can be seen (see FIG. 16).

According to the above configuration, the second game state can be started when the number of judgments, which is the number of times it has been judged that the special game has not been won, reaches a predetermined specific number. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the second game state is not started by this trigger, the trigger for starting the second game state is more interesting. In addition, the occlusion image of the present invention has the advantage of being able to emphasize that the first game state has ended (that the second time-saving game state has started).

Fifth Embodiment
Hereinafter, the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. For the sake of convenience, each component will be newly designated with a reference symbol. In other words, the same reference symbols may be used for different components in the first to fourth embodiments, the fifth embodiment, and the sixth and seventh embodiments described below.

The above-mentioned configuration may correspond to the configuration described later. More specifically, the above-mentioned gaming machine 1 corresponds to the gaming machine 1 described later. The above-mentioned main control board 110 corresponds to the main control board 110 described later. The above-mentioned main RAM 113 corresponds to the main RAM 110c described later. The above-mentioned performance control board 120 corresponds to the performance control board 130 described later. The above-mentioned outer frame 2, inner frame 3, and glass frame 4 correspond to the outer frame 2, game board mounting frame 3, and glass frame 4, respectively, described later. The above-mentioned game board 10 corresponds to the game board 5 described later. The above-mentioned game area 10a corresponds to the game area 5a described later. The above-mentioned reserved image GB corresponds to the reserved icon HI described later. The above-mentioned reserved image GB corresponds to the icon TI described later. The above-mentioned reserved number image GD corresponds to the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F described later. Moreover, the above-mentioned regions R11, R12, R13, R14, R21, R22, R23, and R24 correspond to the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, the third display section 70B3, the fourth display section 70B4, the first display section 70D1, the second display section 70D2, the third display section 70D3, and the fourth display section 70D4, respectively, which will be described later. Moreover, the above-mentioned region R0 corresponds to the icon display region 70C, which will be described later. Moreover, the above-mentioned small symbol Ga corresponds to the special symbol TZ, which will be described later. Moreover, the above-mentioned low probability non-time-saving game state corresponds to the normal game state, which will be described later. Moreover, the above-mentioned first time-saving game state corresponds to the normal time-saving game state, which will be described later. Moreover, the above-mentioned second time-saving game state corresponds to the special time-saving game state, which will be described later. The start notification image Gn and the entry image GT described above correspond to the notification logo LG and the text image of "START" described later. The customer waiting screen Mx, the customer waiting screen Mx1, and the customer waiting screen Mx2 described above correspond to the customer waiting demo background described later. The first start gate 13 described above corresponds to the first start gate 45 described later. The second start gate 14 described above corresponds to the second start gate 47 described later. The open/close door 14b described above corresponds to the second start gate opening/closing member 48 described later. The gate 15 described above corresponds to the normal gate 44 described later. The first large prize gate 16 described above corresponds to the first large prize gate 50 described later. The second large prize gate 17 described above corresponds to the second large prize gate 56 described later. The general prize gate 18 described above corresponds to the general prize gate 43 described later. The out gate 19 described above corresponds to the out gate 39 described later. The special symbols described above correspond to the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The above-mentioned performance pattern GA corresponds to the performance pattern 70a described later. The above-mentioned sound output device 34 corresponds to the sound output device 9 described later. The above-mentioned performance lamp 33 corresponds to the frame lighting device 10 described later. The above-mentioned performance button 8 corresponds to the performance button 17 described later. The above-mentioned cross key 40 corresponds to the cross key 19 described later. The above-mentioned performance movable body 32 corresponds to the movable performance device 73 described later. The above-mentioned light-emitting body corresponds to the board performance device 74 described later. The above-mentioned background image GH corresponds to the background image described later. The above-mentioned right hit image GS1, right hit image GS2, right hit image GS3, right hit image GS4, right hit image Gsy, and right hit start image GR correspond to the first right hit image MG1, second right hit image MG2, third right hit image MG3, and fourth right hit image MG4 described later. The above-mentioned background image GHf corresponds to the power-on notification described later. The above-mentioned prevention image GQ1 corresponds to the forget-to-take caution image TG described later. The above-mentioned warning image GQ2 corresponds to the get-in-the-way caution image NG described later. The above-mentioned end image GP2 corresponds to the shutter image SY described later. The above-mentioned shielding image GF corresponds to the dark image described later. The above-mentioned end image GP1 and result image GP correspond to the result display described later. The above-mentioned emphasis image GZ corresponds to the number image. The above-mentioned image display device 31 corresponds to the first image display device 70 described later. The above-mentioned clear switch 30a corresponds to the RWM clear switch 111a described later. The above-mentioned clear operation corresponds to the RWM clear operation described later. The above-mentioned variation pattern determination table corresponds to the special chart variation pattern determination table described later. The above-mentioned game count image GE corresponds to the game count GK described later. The above-mentioned fixed notification image GI corresponds to the fixed notification character SC and notification logo LG described later. The above-mentioned remaining number image GN corresponds to the text image of the activation counter display described later. In addition, the remaining time-saving image GJ described above corresponds to the remaining number of times for time-saving image KG described later. In addition, the left hit image GL and the left hit start image GL described above correspond to the left hit image HG described later. In addition, the loading notification image GK described above corresponds to the guide image AN described later.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 in the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to Figures 67 to 69. Figure 67 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, Figure 68 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and Figure 69 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 2, a gaming board mounting frame 3 that is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 that is rotatably supported relative to the gaming board mounting frame 3, and a gaming board 5 that has a gaming area 5a formed therein through which gaming balls (gaming media) flow down.

The outer frame 2 is made up of a rectangular base frame 2a with a central opening in the front-rear direction, to which a decorative plate 2b is attached at the lower front. The outer frame 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement arcade via fastening members (e.g., nails, fasteners, etc.).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door relative to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, making it possible to perform maintenance on various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door relative to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-to-rear direction is formed in the approximate center near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or acrylic plate) is attached to cover the opening 8 from the rear, making it possible to see the play area 5a through this opening 8 and transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are provided an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having multiple decorative LEDs, an upper tray 11 for storing multiple game balls, such as game balls paid out from a payout device 95 described below based on the establishment of the awarding conditions, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and flow into the overflow ball flow path described below, and a launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch the game balls.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations spaced apart on the top of the glass frame 4, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to create a sound (music, voice) effect. In addition, multiple frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and create a lighting effect by changing the direction of light irradiation and the color of light emitted by each lamp (LED). In addition, the frame lighting device 10 is equipped with an alarm LED 10a that is controlled to light up/blink when the glass frame 4 opens or a payout abnormality occurs in which game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

The bottom surface of the storage section 11a of the upper tray 11 for the game balls slopes downward toward the direction (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. When the game balls stored in the storage section 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the ball feed solenoid 11b operates to send the game balls out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3.

In addition, in the central front part of the upper tray 11, a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see Figure 67 or Figure 68) are arranged side by side and function as input devices for performing decision operations and selection operations related to various performances described below.

The effect button device 16 is provided with an effect button 17 capable of performing operations such as decision operations (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the effect button 17, an effect button drive device 17b equipped with a button drive motor for changing the effect button 17 between a normal state and a protruding state positioned higher than the normal state and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 between the normal state and a vibration state in which the effect button 17 vibrates in a predetermined manner, and a button lamp 17c for changing the effect button 17 between an off state and a lit state in which the effect button 17 emits light in a predetermined manner, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The selection button device 18 is provided with a cross key 19 (upper button 191A, left button 192A, lower button 193A, right button 194A) that can be used to perform operations such as selection, and a cross key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 71) for detecting the operation of the cross key 19, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

In addition, a lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11, which allows the lending of game balls and the return of storage media such as cards that store the remaining balance. When the lending button 20a on the lending operation unit 20 is operated, a ball lending machine (not shown) installed next to the gaming machine 1 subtracts the remaining balance stored in the storage media and lends out game balls, and when the return button 20b on the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage media is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed to receive game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guide them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 71) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls, and while the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full, the payout device 95, which will be described later, stops paying out game balls.

The launch operation device 13 is provided with a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a launch handle 15 rotatably mounted on the base 14, a touch sensor 15a (see FIG. 71) that detects whether the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, and a launch volume 15b (see FIG. 71) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated and the game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting portion for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 (see FIG. 71) for launching game balls toward the game area 5a, a locking mechanism (not shown) for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an opening detection switch 31a (see FIG. 71) for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4.

The game board mounting section 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape that opens to the front at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. At the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting section 25, an opening that opens in the front-to-rear direction is provided, and through this opening, various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the rear of the gaming machine 1.

The launching device 26 is provided with a launching member for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 71) for driving the launching member, a launching rail that slopes upward from the launching member toward the lower left end of the game board, and a stopper that stops the game ball at the launch position, which is the lower end of the slope of the launching rail. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball sending solenoid 11b (see FIG. 71) is received at the launch position, the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launching member.

The locking mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

Curved inner and outer rails 35 and 36 are provided near the outer edge of the game board 5, and the area surrounded by the inner and outer rails 35 and 36 forms a game area 5a into which game balls can flow. A launched ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner and outer rails 35 and 36, which guides game balls launched by the launching device 26 to the upstream part of the game area 5a. An outlet 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a to guide the game balls that have flowed down outside the game area (to the collection part of the game board mounting frame 3).

A decorative frame 40 is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a, which is a frame-shaped area known as a center case that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior. This decorative frame 40 divides the play area 5a into a left play area where game balls launched with a first launch force flow down, and a right play area where game balls launched with a second launch force that is stronger than the first launch force flow down, and the left play area and the right play area are connected below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to guide the game balls flowing down the left side game area into the interior of the decorative frame 40, and a stage section 42 is provided on the bottom of the decorative frame 40 to roll the game balls introduced into the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41 and cause them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

Three general winning openings 43 through which game balls can always win (enter) are provided at intervals at the lower left side of the decorative frame 40, and one general winning opening 43 through which game balls can always win (enter) is provided at the lower right side of the decorative frame 40. When a game ball that wins (enters) this general winning opening 43 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 71) (awarding condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., five) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 69) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarding prize value).

Below the stage section 42 is a first start hole 45 (first special symbol start winning area) where game balls can always enter (enter), and when a game ball that has entered (entered) this first start hole 45 is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 71) (awarding conditions are met), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 69) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot game) is to be played is granted (special symbol determination information, described later, is stored).

Directly below the first starting hole 45 is a starting hole lamp 75 that lights up in a predetermined manner when the lamp light-emitting effect described below is executed, and a lens member 75a (object) is provided covering the front of the starting hole lamp 75, on which an "!! (double exclamation mark)" object, which is a motif of the gaming machine 1 model, is formed.

The object with the model motif may be provided directly on the front side of the first start hole 45, or may be provided separately near the first start hole 45 and the start hole lamp 75. In this way, by providing an object with the model motif in a position corresponding to the first start hole 45 where the player's gaze is likely to be drawn, it becomes possible to make an impression of the model of the gaming machine 1 on the player.

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally below and to the right of the first starting hole 45, there is a variable starting section 46 that can be changed from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter (slot in), to an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a winning result in the winning judgment described below).

The variable starting section 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 67) to form a flow path for the game ball, and is provided with a second starting hole opening/closing member 48 that can move in the forward/backward direction, a second starting hole 47 (starting winning area of the second special pattern) that opens upward directly below the second starting hole opening/closing member 48, a second starting hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 71) that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting hole 47, and a second starting hole opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 71) that converts the second starting hole 47 to a closed state by moving the second starting hole opening/closing member 48 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the second starting hole 47 to an open state by moving the second starting hole opening/closing member 48 backward (winning allowance position).

When a game ball enters the second start hole 47, which is opened during the auxiliary game described below, and this game ball is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 71) (awarding condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 69) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special chart determination information described below is stored).

In the right-side game area, which is to the right of the decorative frame 40, there is an upstream flow path 91a into which all game balls launched toward the right-side game area flow, a central flow path 91b into which almost all game balls flowing out from the upstream flow path 91a flow, a left-side flow path 91c into which game balls that do not flow into the central flow path 91b but bounce to the left flow, a right-side flow path 91d into which game balls that do not flow into the central flow path 91b but bounce to the right flow, a first downstream flow path 91e into which almost all game balls that flow out from the central flow path 91b and the right-side flow path 91d flow, and a second downstream flow path 91f into which game balls that do not flow into the first downstream flow path 91e but bounce to the left flow and game balls that flow out from the left-side flow path 91c flow.

At the upstream end of the central flow path 91b, a normal gate 44 (normal starting area) through which game balls can always pass is provided. When a game ball that has passed through the normal gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a, no prize balls are awarded, but the player is given the right to make an auxiliary game judgment (win judgment) to determine whether or not to execute a winning game (normal game judgment information, described later, is stored).

A first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) is provided in the middle of the central flow path 91b. This can be changed from a closed state, in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the ball), to an open state, in which it is possible or easy to win, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination).

The first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (forming part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b), and is provided with a first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move in the front-back direction, a first large winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51, a first large winning opening detection switch 50a that detects game balls that have won (entered) the first large winning opening 50, and a first large winning opening opening opening solenoid 51b (see Figure 71) that converts the first large winning opening 50 to a closed state by moving the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the first large winning opening 50 to an open state by moving the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 backward (winning permitted position).

Then, during the small prize game described below, when the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward and the first large prize opening 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state, the game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51 or that have reached the first large prize opening 50 enter the first large prize opening 50, and when these game balls are detected by the first large prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see Figure 69) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

In addition, downstream of the first large winning hole detection switch 50a, there is a specific area opening/closing member 52 whose upper surface slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls and which can move in the front-back direction, a specific area 53 that opens upward directly below the specific area opening/closing member 52, a specific area detection switch 53a (see Figure 71) that detects game balls that have flowed into (entered) the specific area 53, a flow path switching solenoid 52b that converts the specific area 53 into a closed state by moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the specific area 53 into an open state by moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 backward (winning permission position), and an outlet 54 into which game balls that have not flowed into the specific area 53 flow.

When a game ball passes through (enters) the specific area 53 that is open during the small win game described below and is detected by the specific area detection switch 53a, no prize balls are awarded, but the big win game described below is executed after the small win game ends.

In addition, instead of providing the specific area opening/closing member 52, the specific area 53, and the specific area detection switch 53a, the first large prize opening detection switch 50a may be set as the specific area, and the game ball that flows into the first large prize opening that is opened during the small prize game described below may be detected by the first large prize opening detection switch 50a, so that the large prize game described below is executed after the small prize game ends.

In this embodiment, the big win game and the small win game that convert the big prize opening into an open state are treated as special games that are advantageous to the player, but there are cases where the big win game is treated as a special game and the small win game is treated as a specific game.

A second variable winning section 55 (second variable winning device) is provided in the middle of the first downstream flow path 91e. This can be changed from a closed state, in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the ball), to an open state, in which it is possible or easy to win, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination).

The second variable prize winning section 55 (first variable prize winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (forming part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e), and is provided with a second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 that can move in the front-back direction, a second large prize winning opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57, a second large prize winning opening detection switch 56a that detects game balls that have won (entered) the second large prize winning opening 56, and a second large prize winning opening opening opening solenoid 57b (see FIG. 71) that converts the second large prize winning opening 56 to a closed state by moving the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the second large prize winning opening 56 to an open state by moving the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 backward (winning permitted position).

When the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 moves backwards during a jackpot game and the second large prize opening 56 is converted from a closed state to an open state, the game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the second large prize opening opening opening/closing member 57 or that have reached the second large prize opening 56 enter the second large prize opening 56, and when these game balls are detected by the second large prize opening detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see Figure 69) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

The front of the right game area is covered with a decorative member 91 that allows the rear to be seen through, and on the back side of the decorative member 91, in a position in front of the central flow passage 91b (directly above the first large prize opening opening member 51), multiple front protrusions 91b2 protruding toward the rear are provided at intervals. Furthermore, on the back wall of the central flow passage 91b (directly above the first large prize opening opening member 51), multiple rear protrusions 91b1 are provided so as to alternate with the front protrusions 91b2, and the rear protrusions 91b1 and the front protrusions 91b2 form a serpentine flow passage, which attenuates the flow speed (flow force) of the game balls in the central flow passage 91b (especially the upper surface of the first large prize opening opening member 51). Therefore, it takes one second for the game balls to flow down the upper surface of the first large prize opening opening member 51 from the upstream end to the downstream end.

Furthermore, on the back surface of the decorative member 91, in front of the first downstream flow passage 91e (directly above the second large prize opening opening member 57), multiple front protrusions 91c2 protruding toward the rear are provided at intervals. Furthermore, on the back wall of the first downstream flow passage 91e (directly above the second large prize opening opening member 57), multiple rear protrusions 91c1 are provided so as to alternate with the front protrusions 91c2, and the rear protrusions 91c1 and the front protrusions 91c2 form a serpentine flow passage, thereby attenuating the flow speed (flow force) of the game ball in the first downstream flow passage 91e (especially the upper surface of the second large prize opening opening member 57). Therefore, it takes one second for the game ball to flow down the upper surface of the second large prize opening opening member 57 from the upstream end to the downstream end.

The game balls launched into the left-hand game area will either flow directly down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flow into the warp device 41 and then flow down through the stage section 42, and will win one of the three general winning openings 43 or the first starting opening 45 located below the decorative frame 40, or will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, the game balls will not win (pass through) the general winning gate 44, general winning opening 43, first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), or second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56) located in the right-hand game area.

In addition, a game ball launched into the right-side play area flows through the upstream flow path 91a, then down the central flow path 91b (regular gate 44), the left-side flow path 91c, the right-side flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e, the second downstream flow path 91f, etc., and enters one of the general winning openings 43, the variable starting section 46 (second starting opening 47), the first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), or the second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56) provided in the right-side play area, or flows into the outlet 39. Therefore, the game ball will not enter the general winning opening 43 or the first starting opening 45 provided in the left-side play area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is an out-ball flow path that receives and collects out-balls, which are game balls that have won in the general winning port 43, the first starting port 45, the second starting port 47, the first large winning port 50, and the second large winning port 56, as well as game balls that have flowed into the outlet 39, and allows them to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see Figure 71) is provided at the most downstream part of the out-ball flow path. Game balls detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a are discharged from the outlet on the back side of the game machine 1 to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment).

Outside the play area 5a, there is a pattern display device consisting of a first special pattern display 60, a second special pattern display 61, and a normal pattern display 62, a reserved display device consisting of a first special pattern reserved display 63, a second special pattern reserved display 64, and a normal pattern reserved display 65, and a main information display 69 consisting of a round number display 66, a right hit display 67, and a status confirmation display 68.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a first special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the first starting hole 45, the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a second special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the second starting hole 47, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a hit determination for a normal symbol, which is made based on the passage (entry) of a game ball into the normal gate 44.

The jackpot determination corresponds to obtaining special symbol determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for special symbol determination, random number value for reach determination, random number value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) when the game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game or a small jackpot game based on the obtained special symbol determination information.

When a jackpot is determined based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a varying manner, and after a predetermined time has passed, the first special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination. When a jackpot is determined based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 47, the second special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination, and after a predetermined time has passed, the second special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at a predetermined interval or sequence when each special symbol changes. When the special symbol is displayed stationary, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the big win determination (big win, small win, or miss).
An example of the display on the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 will be described. The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 display a losing special symbol with the leftmost LED lit as the first display mode after power-on. After that, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the second LED from the leftmost is lit, and the LED lighting position changes to the right in sequence every 32 ms. After the rightmost LED is lit, the leftmost LED is lit again, and the display mode in which the LED lighting position changes in sequence is repeated thereafter.

In this embodiment, a "jackpot" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the jackpot determination that a jackpot game (special game) will be played. A "jackpot game" refers to a game state that is advantageous to a player who plays a round game in which the big prize openings (first big prize opening 50, second big prize opening 56) are converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner a predetermined number of times (e.g., four times, ten times, etc.) with intervals between them, making it easier for the player to win prize balls.

The maximum number of times the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) can be opened and the maximum opening time for each round of play are preset, but if a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the large prize openings (balls enter the opening) even before the maximum number of times or maximum opening time are reached, one round of play ends. In this embodiment, it is possible to play one of several types of large prize games (special games) that differ in the degree of advantage given to the player.

"Small win" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the big win determination that a small win game (special game) will be played. "Small win game" refers to a game state that is advantageous to players who play a game in which the big win opening (second big win opening 56) is converted from a closed state to an open state in a less favorable manner than in a big win game, making it easier for the player to win prize balls.

The maximum opening time of the large prize opening during a small prize game (1.8 seconds) is a preset time, but if a certain number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the large prize opening before the maximum opening time is reached, the small prize game ends. Unlike a large prize game, the game status does not change just because a small prize game has been played.

The auxiliary game judgment corresponds to obtaining normal game judgment information (random number value for winning judgment, random number value for normal pattern judgment, random number value for normal pattern variation pattern judgment, etc.) based on the passage (entry) of the game ball into the normal game gate 44, and judging whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the obtained normal game judgment information. When the auxiliary game judgment is made, the normal pattern display 62 displays the variation of the normal pattern, and after a predetermined time has passed, a stationary display of the normal pattern is made to notify the judgment result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of multiple LEDs, and the LEDs flash at a predetermined interval or sequence when displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner. When displaying a normal symbol in a static manner, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the auxiliary game judgment (win or miss).

In this embodiment, "win" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the auxiliary game judgment that an auxiliary game (a winning game) will be executed. "Auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The maximum number of times the second start hole 47 can be opened and the maximum opening time during the auxiliary game (winning game) are preset, but the auxiliary game (winning game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the second start hole 47 even before the maximum number of times the balls can be opened and the maximum opening time are reached. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are likely to be met. In this embodiment, multiple types of auxiliary games (winning games) with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the first reserved number (U1), which is the number of special symbol judgment information (first reserved) stored when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved. Note that, although a maximum of four first reserved symbols can be stored, the number may be less than or more than four.
An example of a display mode in the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 will be described. In the first special symbol reserved indicator 63, when the reserved number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the reserved number is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the reserved number is "2", the left LED flashes and the right LED is turned on when the reserved number is "3", and when the reserved number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The second special symbol reserved indicator 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the second reserved number (U2), which is the number of special symbol judgment information (second reserved) stored when the game ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 47, and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reserved. Note that, although a maximum of four second reserved pieces are stored, the number may be less than or more than four, or no second reserved pieces may be stored.
An example of a display mode in the second special symbol reserved indicator 64 will be described. In the second special symbol reserved indicator 64, when the reserved number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the reserved number is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the reserved number is "2", the left LED flashes and the right LED is turned on when the reserved number is "3", and when the reserved number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The normal symbol reserve indicator 65 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the number of reserved normal symbols, which is the number of normal symbol judgment information (reserved normal symbols) stored when a game ball enters (passes through) the normal symbol gate 44, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of reserved normal symbols. Note that up to four reserved normal symbols can be stored, but the number may be less or more than four, or no reserved normal symbols may be stored.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured with a seven-segment LED. For example, if a big win is determined in the big win determination, numbers such as "3" or "7" are displayed as static numbers, if a small win is determined, alphabets such as "A" or "C" are displayed as static numbers, and if a miss is determined, a static "-" is displayed as static numbers, and during the varying display, the light is turned off and the "-" is alternately displayed.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of multiple LEDs and is intended to display the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. When a jackpot game starts, the LEDs start to light up in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds, the LEDs continue to light up during the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game ends, the LEDs are turned off. For example, if the jackpot game has four rounds, only the leftmost LED is lit, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all LEDs are lit.

The right-hit indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and is used to display a right-hit display that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-side game area (so-called right hit) during a jackpot state (special game) or during a time-limited game state. The LED lights up during a jackpot state (special game) and during a time-limited game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED and is intended to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later is set. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the LED goes out. In this way, the status confirmation indicator 68, which indicates that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, so that it is possible to easily check whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. The status confirmation indicator 68 may be installed on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1, or may be installed in other locations.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same display mode (illuminated display) is used regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the display may be made so that it is possible to recognize which mode is set. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be flashed, or vice versa.

In addition, in this embodiment, a status confirmation indicator 68 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may be used in combination with other indicators. For example, in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol indicator 60, the second special symbol indicator 61, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63, the second special symbol reserved indicator 64, the round number indicator 66, the right hit indicator 67, etc. are turned off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

A first image display device 70 (main LCD) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the performance space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, a second image display device 71 (sub LCD) consisting of a liquid crystal display formed with a smaller size and display area than the first image display device 70 is provided at the bottom of the performance space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70, a movable performance device 73 for executing action performances is provided at the top of the performance space 40a, and a change notification LED 59 for reporting the changing display status of the special pattern is provided at the right part of the performance space 40a.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 display various effects according to the progress of the game. The effects include a customer waiting demo effect that is performed when the variable display of the special pattern is not being executed, a variable effect that accompanies the variable display of the performance pattern 70a that is executed when the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, and a jackpot effect that is executed during the execution of a jackpot game. In addition, the first image display device 70 is provided with multiple layers, and multiple images may be displayed on different layers.

The second image display device 71 can also perform a moving effect by moving using a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, motor, etc. while the first image display device 70 is performing a moving effect.

Specifically, the movement effect is achieved by vertical movement (rising and descending) between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a performance position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. Note that the movement direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD) may be left-right or front-back, or the movement effect may be achieved by operating the performance button 17.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) is formed with a variable display area for displaying three performance patterns 70a (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) and a mode display area showing the performance mode related to the execution of the variable performance.

The performance pattern 70a is composed of patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", for example, and starts to change in response to the start of the changing display of the special pattern executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61, and stops in response to the stop of the changing display of the special pattern. The performance pattern 70a may be a pattern showing the alphabet such as "A" to "F".

The performance symbols 70a are displayed stationary for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a manner that indicates the result of the jackpot determination (miss appearance, jackpot appearance, small win appearance). The jackpot appearance and small win appearance are combinations of the same performance symbols 70a, such as "777" and "555," while the miss appearance is any other appearance.

The display of the effect pattern 70a changes in a vertical scroll mode, but it may also scroll horizontally, or it may switch on the spot or rotate (spin).

In addition, during the changing display (changing performance) of the performance pattern 70a, various performance images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 depending on the result of the jackpot determination, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the execution of the jackpot game (special game).

The first image display device 70 is formed with a first hold icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first hold icons (first hold information) corresponding to the first hold number (U1) in the normal game state described below, a second hold icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second hold icons (second hold information) corresponding to the second hold number (U2) in the time-saving game state described below, an icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) indicating that a variable performance is being executed, a first hold number display area 70E for displaying the first hold number (U1) numerically, and a second hold number display area 70F for displaying the second hold number (U2) numerically.

The first hold icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1 (first area), a second display section 70B2 (second area), a third display section 70B3 (third area), and a fourth display section 70B4 (fourth area) from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, and the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 display a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold number (U1).

Specifically, the first display unit 70B1 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed first, the second display unit 70B2 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed second, the third display unit 70B3 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed third, and the fourth display unit 70B4 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed fourth.

The second hold icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1 (first area), a second display section 70D2 (second area), a third display section 70D3 (third area), and a fourth display section 70D4 (fourth area) from the left, and the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 display the number of second hold icons corresponding to the second hold number (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed first, the second display unit 70D2 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed second, the third display unit 70D3 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed third, and the fourth display unit 70D4 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above a pedestal image to clearly distinguish it from the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D, and the icon is displayed as if it is sitting or floating on top of this pedestal image.

Specifically, as the display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins to change, the first reserved icons displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the first reserved icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C and becomes that icon, and when the display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends, the icon disappears (is erased).

In addition, as the display of the second special pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins, the second reserved icons displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the second reserved icon displayed in the first display section 70D1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon, and when the display of the second special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends, the icon disappears (is erased). Note that the icon may be made to disappear during the display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the first image display device 70 displays the changing effect pattern 70a, but the changing effect pattern 70a may be displayed by either the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71, or by both.

The movable performance device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and can perform a motion performance by making the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b perform a predetermined motion while the variable display of the performance pattern 70a executed by the first image display device 70 is being executed. In addition, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board lighting device 74 having multiple decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined manner while the motion performance is being executed. The board lighting device 74 is provided with a board lamp 74b that illuminates the game board 5, and a movable member lamp 73c that illuminates the movable performance device 73.

Specifically, the first movable member 73a moves (rising and descending) between a standby position (first position) located toward the end (upper) of the first image display device 70 and a performance position (second position) located toward the center (lower) of the first image display device 70. The second movable member 73b moves between a standby position (first position) that covers a portion of the front of the first movable member 73a and a performance position where it retreats from the front of the first movable member 73a.

The change notification LED 59 is composed of a full-color LED, and includes a first change notification LED 59a corresponding to the first special symbol and a second change notification LED 59b corresponding to the second special symbol. The first change notification LED 59a starts changing color (displaying the change of the first special symbol) in response to the start of the change display of the first special symbol, and stops changing color (displaying the change of the first special symbol) in response to the stop of the change display of the first special symbol, thereby notifying whether the first special symbol is changing. The second change notification LED 59b starts changing color (displaying the change of the second special symbol) in response to the start of the change display of the second special symbol, and stops changing color (displaying the change of the second special symbol) in response to the stop of the change display of the second special symbol, thereby notifying whether the second special symbol is changing.

The result of the first special pattern change display (jackpot determination) may be notified by the combination of the stopped performance pattern 70a and the first special pattern, and the result of the second special pattern change display (special play range) may be notified by the combination of the stopped performance pattern 70a and the second special pattern. Also, the result of the first special pattern change display (jackpot determination) may be notified only by the stopped first special pattern, and the result of the second special pattern change display (jackpot determination) may be notified only by the stopped second special pattern.

In addition, instead of displaying the changes in the first special pattern and the second special pattern using the first change notification LED 59a and the second change notification LED 59b, the first special pattern and the second special pattern may be displayed in a changing manner on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there are a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball loans), a game ball storage section 96 for storing game balls supplied from island equipment etc. and supplying them to the payout device 95, a main control device 110A incorporating a main control board 110, a payout control device 120A incorporating a payout control board 120, a performance control device 130A incorporating a performance control board 130, a power supply device 160A incorporating a power supply board 160, a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collection device such as a hall computer), etc.

In addition, a cover member 23 with an opening and closing door is provided, which opens and closes in the left and right direction on one side around a rotation axis set on the left or right side to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire performance control device from the rear, and the performance control device 130A is provided with a changeover switch 22, covered by the cover member 23, for switching adjustment modes related to adjusting the volume of the performance sound output from the audio output device 9 and the light intensity of the image display device and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74).

On the front side of the main control board 110, there are mounted a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, an RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal to clear the memory contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or to update a setting value which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game (the probability of being judged as a jackpot in the jackpot judgment), a setting key switch 112a for inputting a signal to switch to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode which will be described later by operating the setting key, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values which enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic components.

The information display 113 is composed of four seven-segment displays (113a to 113d) aligned horizontally. The two seven-segment displays from the left, 113a and 113b, form an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two seven-segment displays from the right, 113c and 113d, form a numeric segment for displaying numeric information indicating setting values and numerical values of the performance information (see FIG. 115).

(Game Board Configuration)
Next, the configuration of the game board 5 in the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to Fig. 70. Fig. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5.

The game board 5 is composed of a board surface unit 500 that forms the front side of the game board 5, and a back surface unit 501 that forms the rear side of the game board 5.

The board unit 500 has a play area 5a formed on its surface by the inner rail 35 and outer rail 36 described above, and a play board 500a made of transparent resin with a window that allows visibility to the rear.

Then, inside the play area 5a of the play board 500a, there are the above-mentioned decorative frame 40, general winning opening 43, general map gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), first start opening 45 (first start opening detection switch 45a), variable start section 46 (second start opening 47, second start opening detection switch 47a, second start opening opening opening solenoid 48b), first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50, first large winning opening detection switch 50a, first large winning opening A mouth opening/closing member 51, a first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, a specific area 53, a specific area detection switch 53a, a flow path switching solenoid 52b, an outlet 54), and a second variable prize section 55 (second large prize opening 56, a second large prize opening detection switch 56a, a second large prize opening opening opening member 57, a second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) are provided, and the above-mentioned main information display 69 is provided outside the play area 5a.

In addition, a stamp plate 502, on which a stamp bearing unique identification information for the gaming machine 1 is affixed, is provided at the lower right of the gaming board 500a in a state that allows it to rotate left and right around the left side as an axis, and at each of the four corners of the gaming board 500a, fixing devices 503a are provided for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501.

The fixture 503a located at the bottom right of the game board 500a is normally covered by the stamp plate 502, but is exposed when the right side of the stamp plate is pinched with the fingertips and rotated to the left.

The fixing device 503a has an operating section located on the front side of the game board 500a, a shaft section extending from the operating section to the back side of the game board 500a, and an engagement piece provided at the tip of the shaft section and located on the back side of the game board 500a. By operating the operating section, the engagement piece changes between a first state (non-engaged position) and a second state (engaged position).

The rear unit 501 has a unit base 501a formed in a recessed chamber with an open front and a window that allows the rear to be seen. The second image display device 71, the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b), etc. are provided inside the recessed chamber, and the first image display device 70 is provided behind the window. In addition, the performance control device 130A is provided behind the first image display device 70, and the main control device 110A is provided below the performance control device 130A.

At each of the four corners of the unit base 501a, there is a fixed receiving portion 503b that engages with the engaging piece of the fixing device 503a described above to detachably attach the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501.

When attaching the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the certificate plate 502 is opened and the engagement pieces of the four fixing devices 503a are in the first state (non-engaged position). Then, the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN leading from the various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided in the panel unit 500 is passed through the through hole HA provided on the right side of the back unit 501. After that, when the back surface of the panel unit 500 and the front surface of the back unit 501 are abutted against each other, the engagement pieces of the fixing devices 503a enter the interior of the fixed receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the operating parts of the four fixing devices 503a are rotated to place the engaging pieces in the second state (engaged posture), the engaging pieces engage with the fixed receiving parts 503b, and the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 are fixed together. After that, the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN leading from the various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A, and the certificate plate 502 is closed, completing the installation of the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501.

On the other hand, when removing the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A is pulled out to open the certificate plate 502. After that, the operating parts of the four fixing devices 503a are turned to set the engagement pieces to the first state, and the engagement between the engagement pieces and the fixed receiving parts 503b is released.

In this state, when the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 are separated, the engagement pieces of the four fasteners 503a retract from the fixed receiving portions 503b. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the removal of the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 is completed.

In this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the game board 5 (a set of the game board unit 500 and the back unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the game board unit 500 from the perspective of like-new of the game machine 1. Therefore, although the attachment and detachment of the game board unit 500 and the back unit 501 when the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described here, it is also possible to replace only the game board unit 500 from the game board 5 attached to the game board mounting frame 3.

Specifically, when the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via a locking mechanism, and the locking mechanism prevents the board surface unit 500 from being fixed, making it possible to replace (like new) only the board surface unit 500. Therefore, when replacing only the board surface unit 500, it is recommended to open the glass frame 4 and then perform the removal work described above.

(Overall block diagram of the gaming machine)
Next, the control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in Fig. 71. Fig. 71 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that controls the overall progress of the game (basic operations), a payout control board 120 that controls the payout of game balls based on the receipt of a payout control command from the main control board 110, a presentation control board 130 that controls the presentation related to the game based on the receipt of a presentation control command from the main control board 110, and a power supply board 160 that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the presentation control board 130.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to enable bidirectional transmission and reception of commands, while the communication between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 is configured to enable unidirectional transmission of commands from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

The main control board 110 is equipped with a main CPU 110a that performs calculation processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and a main control unit 110m that is a one-chip microcomputer equipped with input/output ports, etc.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 110m include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general winning hole detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting hole detection switch 45a, a second starting hole detection switch 47a, a second starting hole opening/closing solenoid 48b, a first large winning hole detection switch 50a, a first large winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b, a flow path switching solenoid 52b, a specific area detection switch 53a, a second large winning hole detection switch 56a, a second large winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b, a magnetic detection The output sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, round number display 66, right hit display 67, status confirmation display 68, game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120, and performance control board 130 are connected.

The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs calculation processing related to the game while using the main RAM 110c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing in response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, displays, etc.), control processing for sending and receiving various control commands, and control processing for sending game information to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) via the game information output terminal board 90.

The "game information" includes a start hole entry signal output each time a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, a pattern determination signal output each time the varying display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is stopped, a jackpot signal output throughout the jackpot game, an open signal output throughout the round game (opening of the jackpot entry hole), a time-saving state signal output throughout the time-saving game state described below, and a security signal output when a situation occurs that is problematic (threatening) in terms of the security of the gaming machine 1 (RWM clear, error, etc.).

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory areas of the main ROM 110b are, in order, a game ROM area in which programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, an information ROM area in which programs and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored, an unused area of 16 bytes or more in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored, a ROM comment area in which data such as the program title and version are stored, a vector table area in which the start address of the timer interrupt processing described below is set, and a HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access prohibited area are set.

The game ROM area is arranged in the following order: a game program area in which programs related to the game progress are stored; a first unused area in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored; a game data area in which data related to the game progress is stored; and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored.

The information ROM area is arranged in the following order: an information program area in which programs related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and in which "0" is stored, and an information data area in which data related to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 110c is arranged in the following order: a game RWM area used as a work area when executing a game program, and an information RWM area used as a work area when executing an information program.

The game RWM area is arranged in the following order: a game work area used by the game program as a work area; a first unused area that is prohibited from being accessed and in which "0" is stored; a game stack area for temporarily saving data being processed by the game program; and a second unused area that is prohibited from being accessed and in which "0" is stored.

The game work area is arranged in the following order: a setting value area for storing setting values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum described below) for determining abnormalities in the RWM area, and a game data area for storing game data that changes as the game progresses (variation count, various time-saving status flags, various time-saving counts, etc. described below).

The information RWM area is arranged in the following order: an information work area used by information programs as work, an unused area where access is prohibited and where "0" is stored, and an information stack area where information programs can temporarily save data being processed.

The information work area is arranged, in order, with a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1, and an error information area for storing information related to various error judgments.

The following explains the relationship between the game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) that performs processing based on the game program and the information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) that performs processing based on the information program.

When the main CPU 110a performs processing based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area, and refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as work. Also, when the main CPU 110a performs processing based on an information program, it basically refers to the information data area, and refers to and updates the contents of the information RWM area while using the information RWM area as work.

However, in processing based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referenced. Also, in processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referenced.

When processing based on the information program is performed, the flag register is saved to the game RWM area during processing based on the game program, and then the information program is called to execute processing based on the information program, and the flag register is restored from the game RWM area immediately after processing based on the information program ends and returns to the game program.

In addition, immediately after the information program starts, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved to the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, all registers used in the game program are saved to the information RWM area, and immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are restored from the information RWM area and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing this, data used by the game program can be protected when performing processing based on the information program, and no inconvenience occurs when returning from the information program to the game program.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The input/output port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting game balls being paid out from the payout device 95, a payout motor 95b for paying out game balls from the payout device 95, and a ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that game balls are stored in the game ball storage unit 96.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs calculation processing related to the payout of game balls while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for paying out game balls from the payout device 95 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for sending a command based on the result of the calculation processing to the main control board 110, etc.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit and an input/output port, which are not shown.
The input/output ports of the launch control unit 122 are connected to the ball feeding solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the launch volume 15b, and the launch solenoid 28b.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows current to flow to the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b, and when it detects a change in the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 by a detection signal from the launch volume 15b, it drives the ball feed solenoid 11b and drives the launch solenoid 28b so that the launch strength corresponds to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15, thereby launching the game balls (99.9 balls/min).

The performance control board 130 is equipped with a performance control unit 130m that performs overall control of the progress of the performance based on the performance control commands received from the main control board 110, a display control unit 140 that performs control processing of image display and audio output based on the performance control commands received from the performance control unit 130m, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing of various light-emitting components (LEDs, etc.) and various driving sources (motors, etc.) based on the performance control commands received from the performance control unit 130m.

The performance control unit 130m includes a sub-CPU 130a that performs calculation processing, a sub-ROM 130b that stores the performance control program, a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output port of the performance control unit 130m.

The sub-CPU 130a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the performance control program stored in the sub-ROM 130b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the sub-RAM 130c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for determining the performance mode of the variable performance, control processing for sending a performance control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, control processing in response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.), etc.

The display control unit 140 receives commands from the performance control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a specified image, and controls the audio output device 9 to output a specified voice or sound.

The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that performs general control of image display and audio output based on reception of a performance control command from the performance control unit 130m, an image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on reception of a display control command (display list) from the general control unit 141, a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on reception of an audio control command from the general control unit 141, and an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs calculation processing, an overall ROM 141b in which an overall control program is stored, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports to which an image control unit 145 (VDP) and an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) are connected.

The general CPU 141a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the general control program stored in the general ROM 141b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the general RAM 141c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for generating display control commands (display lists) that indicate the performance images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and sending them to the display control unit 140, and control processing for generating audio control commands that indicate the performance sounds to be output from the audio output device 9 and sending them to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores the lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 are connected to the frame lighting device 10, the performance button drive device 17b (performance button drive motor, performance button vibration motor), the button lamp 17c, the starter lamp 75, the movable performance device 73, and the board lighting device 74.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for the frame lighting device 10, performance button drive device 17b, button lamp 17c, starter lamp 75, movable performance device 73, and board lighting device 74.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power supply (operating power supply) required for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) (corresponding to a power supply supply means). The power supply board 160 is equipped with a power interruption detection circuit 162 that detects whether the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (a power outage has occurred) and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the drop in power supply voltage (occurrence of a power outage), and a backup power supply circuit 163 that supplies backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power interruption (power outage).

The power supply board 160 also has a power switch that can be operated by an arcade staff member to switch between an ON state that supplies main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, presentation control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state that stops the supply. When the power switch is turned ON, the supply of main power begins and the gaming machine 1 starts operating. Note that the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is turned OFF.

The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, and stops outputting the voltage drop detection signal when the power supply voltage exceeds the predetermined value while the voltage drop detection signal is being output.

The backup power circuit 163 is equipped with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and in the event of a power outage (blackout), the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. This allows the contents stored in the main RAM 110c to be retained even in the event of a power outage (blackout), and after recovery from the power outage (blackout), the game control state can be restored to the state before the power outage (blackout).

Although backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m, backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m so that the memory contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub-RAM 130c are retained even in the event of a power outage. Backup power may also be supplied to only one of the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, there are a "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" and a "time-saving game state" as states related to the ease of a game ball entering the second starting hole 47.

The initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "normal game state." Also, during a jackpot game, the game state is set to the "normal game state," but since a jackpot game is being played, the game state is different from the normal game state.

Here, "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" refers to a game state in which the probability of a win being determined in the auxiliary game judgment, which is performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44, is set low at 1/256, the average time for the normal symbol fluctuation display is set to approximately 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second start hole 47 in the event of a win is set to 0.180 seconds.

In contrast, the "time-saving game state" refers to a game state that is advantageous to the player in that the consumption of game balls is reduced compared to the normal game state, with the probability of being determined to be a win set high at 255/256, the average time for the variable display of normal symbols set to about 3 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting hole 47 when a win is determined to be a win set to 6 seconds. The transition from the normal game state to the time-saving game state takes place after the big win game has ended.

The "time-saving game state" includes a normal time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of a jackpot game (via a jackpot game), which will be described later, and a special time-saving game state that is controlled when the number of times the special symbol changes display after a specified condition is met (executing an RWM clear, clearing the number of changes based on the end of a jackpot game to 0) reaches a specified number (500 times in this embodiment).

The "time-saving game state" is set to be more favorable than the "normal game state" in terms of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start hole 47, and the probability of being determined to be a win, but it may be set to be more favorable in terms of only one of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start hole 47, and the probability of being determined to be a win.

The probability of a win being determined in the normal game state is 1/256, but the probability of a win being determined may be set to 0/256 so that no win is determined. In this case, the auxiliary game is not executed in the normal game state, and the game ball does not enter the second starting hole 47 (win).

(Various storage areas in the main RAM)
Figure 72 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, Figure 72 (a) is a diagram showing a special chart judgment information storage area in which special chart judgment information acquired when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and/or the second starting hole 47 is stored, Figure 72 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special chart judgment information storage area, Figure 72 (c) is a normal chart judgment information storage area in which normal chart judgment information acquired when a game ball passes through the normal chart gate 44 is stored, and Figure 72 (d) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the normal chart judgment information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), the special chart determination information storage area is divided into a first special chart determination information reserve memory area in which special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is stored, a second special chart determination information reserve memory area in which special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 47 is stored, and a special chart determination information storage area in which special chart determination information during variable display is stored, and the first special chart determination information reserve memory area and the second special chart determination information reserve memory area are each divided into a first memory section to a fourth memory section.

The first memory unit, second memory unit, third memory unit, and fourth memory unit of the first special pattern determination information reserved memory area correspond to the first display unit 70B1, second display unit 70B2, third display unit 70B3, and fourth display unit 70B4 of the first reserved icon display area 70B, respectively. Also, the first memory unit, second memory unit, third memory unit, and fourth memory unit of the second special pattern reserved memory area correspond to the first display unit 70D1, second display unit 70D2, third display unit 70D3, and fourth display unit 70D4 of the second reserved icon display area 70D, respectively.

The number of special pattern judgment information (reserved information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special pattern judgment information storage area becomes the first reserved number (U1), and the number of first reserved icons corresponding to these special pattern judgment information are displayed in the first display unit 70B1 to the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first reserved icon display area 70B. Also, the number of special pattern judgment information (reserved information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second special pattern judgment information becomes the second reserved number (U2), and the number of reserved icons corresponding to these judgment information are displayed in the first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 of the second reserved icon display area 70D.

The 0th memory unit, which is the special chart determination information execution memory area, corresponds to the icon display area 70C. The icon corresponding to the special chart determination information stored in the 0th memory unit is then displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), each memory unit is divided into a random number memory area for determining a jackpot for storing random numbers for determining a jackpot, a random number memory area for determining a special symbol for storing random numbers for determining a special symbol, a random number memory area for determining a reach for a chance for storing random numbers for determining a reach for a chance ...

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and special pattern determination information is acquired, the acquired special pattern determination information is stored in the smallest-numbered memory section in the first special pattern determination information reserve memory area in which special pattern determination information is not stored. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 and special pattern determination information is acquired, the acquired special pattern determination information is stored in the smallest-numbered memory section in the second special pattern determination information reserve memory area in which special pattern determination information is not stored.

When the start condition for the variable display of the first special pattern is satisfied, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory unit of the first special pattern determination information reserve memory area is shifted to the 0th memory unit, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, and is referenced to execute the variable display of the first special pattern. Also, when the start condition for the variable display of the second special pattern is satisfied, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory unit of the second special pattern determination information reserve memory area is shifted to be referenced to execute the variable display of the second special pattern.

As shown in FIG. 72(c), the normal map judgment information storage area is divided into a normal map judgment information storage area in which normal map judgment information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal map gate 44 is stored, and a normal map judgment information storage area in which normal map judgment information during execution of the variable display is stored, and the normal map judgment information reserve storage area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section. Note that the number of normal map reserves is the number of normal map judgment information stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the normal map judgment information reserve storage area.

As shown in FIG. 72(d), each memory unit is divided into a random number memory area for hit determination for storing random number values for hit determination, a random number memory area for normal pattern determination for storing random number values for normal pattern determination, and a random number memory area for normal pattern variation pattern determination for storing random number values for normal pattern variation pattern determination.

When the game ball passes through the normal map gate 44 and normal map judgment information is acquired, the acquired normal map judgment information is stored in the smallest-numbered memory section in the normal map judgment information reserve memory area in which no normal map judgment information is stored.

When the conditions for starting the display of changes in the normal pattern are met, the 0th memory unit, which is the normal pattern determination information execution memory area, shifts the normal pattern determination information stored in the 1st memory unit of the normal pattern determination information reserve memory area, and the information is referenced to execute the display of changes in the normal pattern.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of the game on the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of the main control board)
The main processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 73. Fig. 73 is a flow chart showing the main processing in the main control board 110. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs an initial setting process in step S10. Specifically, the initial setting process includes a preparation process for starting game control, a setting change process for changing the setting value based on a setting change operation, an RWM clear process for initializing a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on an RWM clear operation, a setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value based on a setting confirmation operation, and a drive source initial operation process for initializing the various drive sources (second start opening opening solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500. Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random number value for determining the special symbol and the random number value for determining the reach, and in step S51, updates the initial random number value for determining the jackpot, the initial random number value for determining the special symbol, the initial random number value for determining the hit, and the initial random number value for determining the normal symbol.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a determines whether a voltage drop detection signal indicating a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, a voltage drop from 24 volts to less than 18 volts) has been input from the power interruption detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160. If a voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S50, and if a voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 milliseconds). If the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for the predetermined period, it is assumed that a complete power outage has occurred and the process proceeds to step S54. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input for the predetermined period, it is assumed that a momentary power outage has occurred, in which the voltage of the power supply drops for just a moment, and the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and in step S55, sends a power cutoff designation command to the payout control board 120 to notify it that the power cutoff process has begun. As a result, the payout control board 120, which has received the power cutoff designation command, sends a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c to be paid out.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a remaining payout number designation command has been received. If a remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57. If a remaining payout number designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether the waiting time for receiving the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the waiting time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56. If the waiting time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58, assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 is not possible.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the payout number in a payout counter set in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if a remaining payout number designation command has been received, the remaining payout number specified by the remaining payout number designation command is saved, and if a remaining payout number designation command has not been received, "0" is saved as the remaining payout number. The remaining payout number saved here is referenced in the timer interrupt payout control process described below, and after the power is restored, a payout number designation command corresponding to the remaining payout number is sent to the payout control board 120.

In step S59, the main CPU 110a clears the output port. This initializes the output state of the output port and stops the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motors, solenoids).

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a specified area of the gaming RWM area. By doing this, it becomes possible to perform an abnormality determination of the data in the gaming RWM area using the checksum the next time the power is turned on.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 110c has been backed up (power has been restored) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S62, prohibits RWM access and waits thereafter until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 begins, the initial setting process is performed, but when the supply of operating power resumes following a momentary power outage (voltage drop to less than 18 volts), the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if a setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, or RWM clear operation is being performed due to some factor when a momentary power outage occurs, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process will not be executed, so the gaming machine will not perform unintended operations, and it is possible to ensure the reliability of the gaming machine.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 74. Fig. 74 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as setting built-in registers in step S12, and performs processing to wait for the startup of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and performance control board 130 to start up so that no commands from the main control board 110 are missed.

In step S14, the main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S15, sends a launch permission command to the payout control board 120. This causes the payout control unit 121 to carry out processing to permit the launch device 26 to launch game balls.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored has been saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S17 assuming that power has been restored, and if the backup flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S18 assuming that power has been turned on for the first time or that power has been restored irregularly (power has been restored after a power outage during execution of steps S18 to S35).

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c and clears the backup flag saved in the gaming RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are ON. If a setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19 to transition to setting change mode, and if a setting change operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, it changes (updates) a setting value, which is the stage of the game's advantageous degree (the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination), based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, and performs a process to confirm the setting value by operating the setting key switch 112a. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S24.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), processing proceeds to step S21; if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), processing proceeds to step S22.

If the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that this is the first time the power has been turned on or that the power has been restored irregularly as described above, and the checksum is determined to be abnormal, and processing proceeds to step S22.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value in the setting value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value area is within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S23, and if it is determined that the setting value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S22.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a performs an irrecoverable error process (game program). Specifically, it displays error information "E" indicating an irrecoverable error on the information display 113, sends an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, then sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interruption, clears the output port, and then outputs an irrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an irrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process to execute an irrecoverable error notification indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred.

An "irrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (there is no transition to game control), and it cannot be released unless a setting change process is performed. Therefore, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the error will not be released even if the power switch on the power supply board 160 is turned OFF and then turned ON without a setting change operation; it is necessary to turn the power switch ON while performing a setting change operation. Note that during an irrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from the various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Irrecoverable error notification" refers to displaying an irrecoverable error screen ("This is an irrecoverable error. Please change the settings.") on the image display device to make the user aware that an irrecoverable error has occurred, or turning on all of the frame lighting devices 10 and board lighting devices 74 in a specified light color (e.g. red) until the power is turned off, or outputting an irrecoverable error sound ("This is an irrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred until the power is turned off.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If an RWM clear operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S24 to perform RWM clearing, and if an RWM clear operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs an RWM clear process (game program). Specifically, it performs a process to initialize the game control state (initialize everything other than the set value area of the game RWM area) based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process for initializing the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are activated by the main control board 110 as the game progresses, for a predetermined period of time. The initial operation of the various drive sources will be described in detail later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on command to the payout control board 120 and the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, the non-time-saving game state as the normal game state), and moves processing to step S33. As a result, the presentation control board 130 performs processing to execute a power-on notification indicating that the game control state has been initialized.

The "power-on notification" refers to displaying the initial screen (background image and initial performance pattern "135") on the image display device when the power is turned on to allow the user to recognize that the game control state has been initialized, turning on the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), and outputting from the audio output device 9 a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) indicating that the RWM area has been initialized for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds).
In addition, when notifying the power-on, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, a display notifying that the RWM area has been cleared may be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a is ON. If a setting confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S28 to transition to setting confirmation mode, and if a setting confirmation operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S30 to return the game control state to the state before the power was turned off.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program). Specifically, it displays the setting values saved in the setting value (during play) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113, and performs a process to end confirmation of the setting values by operating the setting key switch 112a.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, it performs a process for initializing the various drive sources described above (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for a predetermined period of time. Details of the initial operation of the various drive sources will be described later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area for when power is restored, such as clearing (clearing to 0) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This returns (restores) the game progress state (control state) to the state before the power was cut off, making it possible to resume play from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration command to the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power outage occurred. This causes the presentation control board 130 to perform processing to end setting confirmation notifications, etc., and execute a power restoration notification indicating that the game control state has returned to the state before the power outage.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen on the image display device for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to notify the user that the game control state has returned to the state before the power was cut off, turning on all of the frame lighting devices 10 and board lighting devices 74 in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), or outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to indicate that power has been restored (from a power outage).

In step S32, the main CPU 110a sends other commands (such as a special symbol storage command and a normal symbol storage command, which will be described later) to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the number of special symbols on hold, and also performs processing to display the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the image display device.

In step S33, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the current setting value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the performance control board 130 before the power-on designation command or power-restoration designation command is transmitted. The setting value designation command may also be transmitted each time the display of the special pattern begins to change, or each time a jackpot game begins.

In step S34, the main CPU 110a starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S35, it starts controlling the progress of the game (timer interrupt of the main control board 110) by allowing all interrupts, and ends this initial setting process.

In other words, from when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the machine is in a pre-start state before game progress control begins, and after the initial setting process is completed, the machine is in a playable state in which game progress control is performed.

In this way, when the setting is being changed (in setting change mode) or when the setting is being confirmed (in setting confirmation mode), it is possible to know that the setting is being changed on the front (front side) of the gaming machine 1 by checking the status confirmation display 68, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74, and it is possible to know that the setting is being changed on the back (rear side) by checking the information display 113. In other words, it is possible to know whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (front side) or the back (rear side) of the gaming machine 1.

The power-on command and power restoration command are transmitted together with information indicating the current game status. However, after transmitting the power-on command or power restoration command, a game status command indicating the current game status may be transmitted.

Also, by not judging whether the setting change in progress flag is set or not, irrecoverable error processing may be prevented even if the previous power outage occurred during a setting change.

In addition, when a power outage occurs or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but it is also possible to calculate the checksum of the entire RWM area, or to calculate the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area separately, and transition to unrecoverable error processing if either checksum is abnormal.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process (game program and information program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 75. Fig. 75 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process in the main control board 110.

This timer interrupt process is executed after the main processing initialization process is completed, by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generating circuit provided on the main control board 110, and controls the progress of the game.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area, and in step S110, it performs time control processing (game program). Specifically, it performs processing to update various timer counters, such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric roles.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific random number value update process (game program) in step S120. Specifically, it updates the random number value for determining a big win, the random number value for determining a special symbol, the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, the random number value for determining a win, the random number value for determining a normal symbol, and the random number value for determining a normal symbol variation pattern. Specifically, it performs a process of updating each random number value and the random number counter by adding +1. Note that if the incremented random number counter value exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (if the random number counter has completed one revolution), it resets the random number counter to 0, and if the random number counter has returned to the initial value for the revolution, it sets the corresponding initial random number value as a new initial value for the revolution and updates the random number value.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process (game program). Specifically, similar to step S30, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the initial random number value for determining a big win, the initial random number value for determining a special symbol, the initial random number value for determining a win, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing (game program) in step S200. Specifically, it determines whether or not there has been input to various switches such as the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the first large prize opening detection switch 50a, the second large prize opening detection switch 56a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, and the specific area detection switch 53a, and performs processing to set predetermined data if there has been input. Details of the input control processing will be described later.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol special electricity control processing (game program). Specifically, it performs processing such as judging the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, displaying the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, opening and closing the large prize hole (first large prize hole 50, second large prize hole 56), and setting the game state. Details of the special symbol special electricity control processing will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol and normal power control process (game program). Specifically, it performs processes such as judging the normal symbol judgment information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 44, displaying the normal symbol fluctuations, and opening and closing the second starting hole 47 (auxiliary game). The details of the normal symbol and normal power control process will be described later.

The types of winning and losing normal symbols determined as a result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol and normal power control process remain the same regardless of the setting value. This prevents the game from becoming too complicated, allowing players to play with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratios of various winning normal symbols and various losing normal symbols, which are determined as a result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol/normal power control process, are fixed and do not change depending on the setting value. By doing this, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

In step S500, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process (game program). Specifically, it refers to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, and performs a process to send a payout number designation command corresponding to the various winning ports (general winning port 43, first start port 45, second start port 47, first large winning port 50, second large winning port 56) to the payout control board 120. This causes the payout control board 120 to execute a process to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process (game program). Specifically, it determines whether various errors have occurred (illegal winning errors such as a game ball winning the second start port 47 when not in auxiliary play or a game ball winning the large winning port when not in special play, an abnormal winning error in which the number of game balls winning the various winning ports does not match the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow down, a magnetic error in which the magnetic detection sensor 57a detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time, a radio wave error in which the radio wave detection sensor 58a detects abnormal radio waves for a predetermined period of time, a door opening error in which the opening detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an operation error in which the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a is operated while the game progress control is being performed), and performs processing to transmit an error designation command corresponding to the error that has occurred to the performance control board 130. This causes the performance control board 130 to execute processing to notify the error.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a performs data creation processing (game program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to create data such as start opening/closing data to be output to the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, large prize opening opening/closing data to be output to the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b, special pattern display data to be output to the first special pattern display 60 and the second special pattern display 61, normal pattern display data to be output to the normal pattern display 62, special pattern reserved display data to be output to the first special pattern reserved display 63 and the second special pattern reserved display 64, and normal pattern reserved display data to be output to the normal pattern reserved display 65.

In step S720, the main CPU 110a performs an external information data creation process. Specifically, it performs a process to create game information data to be output from the game information output terminal board 90. The external information data creation process will be described in detail later.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing (game program). Specifically, port output processing is performed to output signals such as the start opening/closing data and the large winning opening/closing data created in step S700, and to output signals such as the game information data created in step S720, and display output processing is performed to output signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reserved display data, and normal symbol reserved display data, and processing is performed to send a payout status confirmation designation command to the payout control board 120 to check the payout status of the payout control board 120, and to send a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning port to the payout control board 120 by referring to the prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) described later. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control to pay out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs processing when an information program is called. Specifically, after prohibiting interrupts, the flag register is saved to the game RWM area, and processing is performed to call the target information program using the CALL command.

In step S810, the main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to count game performance information such as the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into various winning ports (general winning port, large winning port start port) during the normal game state, the normal out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a during the normal game state, and the total out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state.

The total number of outs, number of payouts during normal play, and number of outs during normal play are game performance information that are not affected by changes to the setting value (are unrelated to the setting value), so by counting these, it is possible to calculate performance information that eliminates the influence of the setting value (the normal base value, described below), which can be used to understand the performance of the gaming machine 1.

In step S830, the main CPU 110a performs a normal base value calculation process (information program). Specifically, it calculates the normal base value ((normal payout number ÷ normal out number) × 100) in the current play section, which is divided by the total number of outs, and performs a process of saving the normal base value rounded off to the first decimal place in the first area of the base memory area set in the information RWM area.

The play section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base memory area is provided with a first area in which the normal base value for the current play section is stored, a second area for storing the normal base value for the play section one period before, a third area for storing the normal base value for the play section two periods before, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value for the play section three periods before, and the normal base values for four play sections including the current one are saved in each area.

In step S850, the main CPU 110a performs a performance display data setting process (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process of setting performance display data for displaying on the information display 113 the normal base values (performance information) for the four play intervals calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base memory area while switching them every five seconds. The performance display data setting process will be described in detail later.

In step S870, the main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to create test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

In step S880, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing (information program). Specifically, it performs display output processing to output signals such as the performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various displays, and processing to output signals such as the test data created in step S870 above.

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing for returning to the game program. Specifically, it performs processing to return the flag register from the game RWM area, permit interrupts, and return to the game program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a and ends this timer interrupt process.

In this way, in the pre-start state before game progress control begins (during setting change mode, RWM clear mode, and setting confirmation mode), timer interrupts are not executed, so the number of payouts and outs are not counted, the normal base value is not calculated, and the normal base value is not displayed, which reduces the control burden on the main control board.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 76. Fig. 76 is a flow chart showing the input control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and then performs processing to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening detection switch input process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first large prize opening detection switch 50a or the second large prize opening detection switch 56a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the first large prize opening 50 or the second large prize opening 56, and then performs a process to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs a first start hole detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 45, and performs a process to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95, as well as a process to obtain and store special game determination information. The details of the first start hole detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs second start hole detection switch input processing in step S240. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 47, and performs processing to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95, as well as processing to obtain and store special game determination information. Details of the second start hole detection switch input processing will be described later.

In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, i.e., whether the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44, and performs processing to obtain and store normal gate determination information.

In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs specific area detection switch input processing and ends the current input control processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 53a, i.e., whether the game ball has passed through the specific area 53, and performs processing to set predetermined data. Details of the specific area detection switch input processing will be described later.

(First start port detection switch input processing of the main control board)
The first start hole detection switch input process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 77. Fig. 77 is a flow chart showing the first start hole detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a. If a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the process proceeds to step S230-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3 prize ball counter used for the 3 prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, obtains special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining special symbols, random number value for determining reach, random number value for determining special symbol fluctuation pattern).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first reserved number (U1) is less than 4. If the first reserved number (U1) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5, and if the first reserved number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first reserved number (U1) to update it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, sets the first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the first special symbol storage designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) is displayed on the image display device.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for available storage units in the first special pattern determination information storage area, starting from the first storage unit, and stores the special pattern determination information acquired in step S230-3 in the available storage unit.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a normal game state (normal game state). If the game is in a normal game state, the process proceeds to step S230-9 to perform pre-reading processing of the special chart determination information obtained based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 45, and if the game is not in a normal game state, the process does not perform pre-reading processing of the special chart determination information obtained based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 45, and ends the first start hole detection switch input process.

The main CPU 110a performs a first look-ahead process (pre-determination process) in step S230-9. In this first look-ahead process, a pre-determination table (see FIG. 89(a) or FIG. 89(b)) is selected for pre-reading (pre-determination) the special pattern determination information, and the currently acquired special pattern determination information is pre-determined before the first special pattern variation display is performed, and a process is performed to generate a first look-ahead designation command for notifying the performance control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (special pattern planned variation pattern). The pre-determination table will be described in detail later.

This "first look-ahead specification command" is information that can identify the planned variation pattern of the special symbol, so the performance control board 130 can use the first look-ahead specification command to specify the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, the type of jackpot game or small jackpot game (number of rounds), and the number of times (J1, J2, J3) that the time-saving game will play in the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first pre-reading designation command generated in step S230-9 above in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first pre-reading winning designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and a pre-reading notice (continuous notice display, icon change display) is executed, which gives the player the expectation that a jackpot game will be played over one or more display changes, even before the first special symbol corresponding to the first pre-reading designation command starts to change.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the first reserved number (U1) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Also, the upper limit of the second reserved number may be less than the upper limit of the second reserved number. Furthermore, the first reserved memory itself may be eliminated by storing the special pattern determination information only in the 0th memory section of the first special pattern determination information storage area.

(Main control board second start port detection switch input processing)
The second start hole detection switch input process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 78. Fig. 78 is a flow chart showing the second start hole detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a. If a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, the process proceeds to step S240-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, the current second start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the two prize ball counter used for two prize balls by adding data indicating two prize balls, and in step S240-3, obtains special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining special symbols, random number value for determining reach, random number value for determining special symbol fluctuation pattern).

In step S240-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second reserved number (U2) is less than 4. If the second reserved number (U2) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S240-5, and if the second reserved number (U2) is not less than 4, the current second start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second reserved number (U2) to update it (U2←U2+1), and in step S240-6, sets a second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second reserved number (U2) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the second special symbol storage designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second reserved number (U2) is displayed on the image display device.

In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a searches for available storage units in the second special pattern determination information storage area, starting from the first storage unit, and stores the special pattern determination information acquired in step S240-3 in an available storage unit.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a time-saving game state. If the game is in a time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S240-9 to perform pre-reading processing of the special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 47, and if the game is not in a non-time-saving game state, the process does not perform pre-reading processing of the special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 47, and ends the current second start hole detection switch input process.

In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the remaining number of time-saving times (here, the second number of time-saving times (J2), not the first number of time-saving times (J1) or the third number of time-saving times (J3)) is a predetermined number (e.g., 5 times) or more. If the remaining number of time-saving times is the predetermined number or more, the process proceeds to step S240-10. If the remaining number of time-saving times is not the predetermined number or more, the process ends the current second start hole detection switch input process, assuming that the special chart determination information obtained based on the winning of the game ball into the second start hole 47 will not be pre-read.

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a performs a second look-ahead process (pre-determination process). In this second look-ahead process, a pre-determination table (see FIG. 92(c)) is selected for looking ahead (pre-determination) the special pattern determination information, the currently acquired special pattern determination information is pre-determined before the second special pattern variation display is performed, and a process is performed to generate a second look-ahead designation command for notifying the performance control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (special pattern planned variation pattern, look-ahead information).

This "second look-ahead specification command" is information that can identify the result of the special symbol determination information, so the performance control board 130 can use the second look-ahead specification command to identify the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, the type of jackpot game or small jackpot game (number of rounds), and the number of times (J1, J2, J3) that the game will be played in the normal time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends.

In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a sets the second pre-reading designation command generated in step S230-9 in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the second look-ahead command is sent to the performance control board 130, and a look-ahead notice (continuous notice performance, icon change performance) is executed, which gives the player the expectation that a jackpot game will be played over one or more display changes, even before the second special symbol corresponding to the second look-ahead command starts to change.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the second reserved number (U2) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Also, the upper limit of the second reserved number may be less than the upper limit of the first reserved number. Furthermore, the second reserved memory itself may be eliminated by storing the special pattern determination information only in the 0th memory section of the second special pattern determination information storage area.

(Specific area detection switch input processing on main control board)
The specific area detection switch input processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 79. Fig. 79 is a flow chart showing the specific area detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S260-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 53a. If a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 53a, the process proceeds to step S260-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the specific area detection switch 53a, the current specific area detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S260-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time is within a specific area effective period during which the passage of the gaming ball into the specific area 53 is valid. Specifically, it determines whether or not a small win game (conversion game) is in progress. If a small win game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S260-3. If the current time is not within the specific area effective period, the process proceeds to step S260-5.

In step S260-3, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passing flag indicating that the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during a small win game, and game state information at the time of passing the specific area indicating the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 53 (information indicating that the game is in the normal game state if the current game state is the normal game state, and information indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state if the current game state is the time-saving game state) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S260-4, sets a specific area passing designation command indicating that the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during the specific area effective period in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this specific area detection switch input process.

As a result, a specific area passage designation command is sent to the presentation control board 130, and a passing notification presentation is executed to notify the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (a big win game is being executed). This allows the player to know that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during a small win game, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In step S260-5, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passage error designation command, indicating that the game ball passed through the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing, in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this specific area detection switch input process.

As a result, a specific area passing error designation command is sent to the presentation control board 130, and a passing error notification presentation is executed to notify the player of the occurrence of a passing error in which the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing. This allows the game center's employees to recognize the occurrence of a passing error and take appropriate measures.

(Special diagram special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special chart special electricity control process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 80. Fig. 80 is a flowchart showing the special chart special electricity control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special chart special power processing data, and in step S302, references the branch destination address from the loaded special chart special power processing data, executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, and ends the current special chart special power control process.

Specifically, if the special pattern special electric processing data = 0, a special pattern memory determination process (step S310) is executed to perform processing to start the variable display of the special pattern based on the pending memory (special pattern determination information) and processing to change the special pattern special electric processing data to "1", etc.
If the special pattern special electric processing data = 1, a special pattern change process (step S320) is executed to perform processes such as stopping the display of the special pattern as the change time passes and sending a pattern confirmation command to the performance control board 130 and changing the special pattern special electric processing data to "2".
If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, then as the stop time of the special symbol elapses, if it is a losing special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0", if it is a big win special symbol, the opening time of the big win game is set and the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "3", and if it is a small win special symbol, the opening time of the small win game is set and the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "4", a special symbol stop process (step S330) is executed.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 3, a jackpot game process (step S340) is executed to perform processing to execute a jackpot game and processing to change the special symbol special electric processing data to "5" based on the end of the final round of play.
If the special chart special electric processing data = 4, a small win game process (step S350) is executed to perform processing to execute a small win game and processing to change the special chart special electric processing data to "0" or "3" based on the completion of the ending of the small win game.
If the special chart special electric processing data = 5, a jackpot game end process (step S360) is executed to perform processes such as ending the jackpot game and changing the special chart special electric processing data to "0" based on the completion of the ending of the jackpot game.

(Special pattern memory determination process of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 81. Fig. 81 is a flow chart showing the special symbol memory determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state. If the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, the main CPU 110a ends the current special symbol memory determination process, and if the special symbol is not being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second reserved number (U2) is 1 or greater. If the second reserved number (U2) is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-3, and if the second reserved number (U2) is not 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second reserved number (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, sets a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second reserved number (U2) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the second special pattern determination information storage area, shifting the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special pattern determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area. In addition, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, and the special pattern determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first reserved number (U1) is 1 or greater. If the first reserved number (U1) is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-5, and if the first reserved number (U1) is not 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first reserved number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and sets a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S310-6. This causes the special symbol storage designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the first special symbol reserve memory area, shifting the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit to the previous memory unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area, and the special symbol determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

In addition, in conjunction with the shifting process of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, special symbol reserved display data indicating the first reserved number (U1) and the second reserved number (U2) after subtraction is set in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. This updates the display contents of the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 and the second special symbol reserved indicator 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special chart determination information reserve memory area is shifted in priority over the first special chart determination information reserve memory area in steps S310-2 to S310-8 (the second reserved number is subtracted in priority over the first reserved number), but the first special chart determination information reserve memory area or the second special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted in the order in which the game balls enter the starting hole (the first reserved number and the second reserved number are subtracted in the order of winning), or the first special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted in priority over the second special chart determination information reserve memory area (the first reserved number is subtracted in priority over the second reserved number).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a executes a jackpot determination process to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached and the special symbol stop data for the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the big win determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special symbol designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be displayed in a stopped state as a result of the variable performance.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special pattern change pattern determination process to determine the change pattern (change time) of the special pattern based on the special pattern determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area. The details of the special pattern change pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special pattern change pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special pattern change pattern determined in the special pattern change pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special pattern change pattern designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the change performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the change performance performed during the special pattern change display.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol fluctuation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 starts displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol. As a result, the data creation process in step S700 creates LED lighting data for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process in step S800, thereby displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag to end the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "1" and ends this special symbol memory determination process.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2. Note that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbol changing display and special game (jackpot game) are not being executed, but the requirement may also include that the normal symbol changing display and auxiliary game are not being executed.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the machine is in a customer waiting state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this special symbol memory determination process. This causes the customer waiting state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demo performance to encourage the player to play.

(Main control board jackpot determination process)
The big win determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 82. Fig. 82 is a flow chart showing the big win determination process in the main control board 110.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting value stored in the setting value area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-2, selects a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 83) for determining whether or not a jackpot has been reached (or whether or not a small jackpot has been reached). Details of the jackpot determination table will be described later.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a compares the current setting value and the random number value for determining a jackpot with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached (whether or not a small jackpot has been reached). If it is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S311-4; if it is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S311-6.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets the game status information at the time of winning the jackpot in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-5, selects a special jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 84(a)) for determining the type of special jackpot symbol, and proceeds to step S311-9. Details of the special jackpot symbol determination table will be described later.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a compares the current setting value and the random number value for determining a big win against the big win determination table to determine whether or not a small win has occurred. If it has, the process proceeds to step S311-7. If it has not, the process proceeds to step S311-8, assuming that it has not occurred.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for small wins (see FIG. 84(b)) for determining the type of special symbol for small wins, and proceeds to step S311-9. Details of the special symbol determination table for small wins will be described later.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for losing (see FIG. 84(c)) for determining the special losing symbol, and proceeds to step S311-9. Details of the special symbol determination table for losing will be described later.

In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a compares the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) for which a jackpot determination is to be made and the random number value for special symbol determination with the special symbol determination table to determine the special symbol that will be displayed as a result of the variable display executed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

In step S311-10, the main CPU 110a sets the special stop symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-9 in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this jackpot determination process.

(Special symbol determination table)
Figure 7(a) is a special pattern determination table for big wins that is referenced when determining the stopping pattern of the special pattern when a big win is determined, Figure 7(b) is a special pattern determination table for small wins that is referenced when determining the stopping pattern of the special pattern when a small win is determined, and Figure 84(c) is a special pattern determination table for misses that is referenced when determining the stopping pattern of the special pattern when a miss is determined.

As shown in Figures 84 (a) to (c), the special symbol determination table associates the type of special symbol that determines the stop symbol, the random number value for special symbol determination, the result of the special symbol determination, the stop special symbol data indicating the result of this determination, and the special symbol designation command indicating the result of the special symbol determination, and for reference, the lighting state of the LED in the special symbol display is described in the rightmost column.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are the losing special symbols that do not execute the big win game. The special symbol "01" is the big win special symbol that executes the first big win game consisting of three rounds of play, the special symbol "02" is the big win special symbol that executes the second big win game consisting of three rounds of play, the special symbol "03" is the big win special symbol that executes the first big win game consisting of three rounds of play, and the special symbol "11" is the big win special symbol that executes the fourth big win game consisting of ten rounds of play. The special symbol "12" is the big win special symbol that executes the fifth big win game consisting of ten rounds of play, the special symbol "13" is the small win special symbol that executes the first small win game, the special symbol "14" is the small win special symbol that executes the second small win game, and the special symbol "15" is the small win special symbol that executes the third small win game.

Details will be given later, but the degree of advantage of each type of jackpot game is 3rd jackpot game < 1st jackpot game < 2nd jackpot game < 4th jackpot game = 5th jackpot game.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 is that the types of big win special symbols, small win special symbols, and losing special symbols are the same and do not change depending on the setting value. By doing so, the gameplay does not become too complicated, and players can play with peace of mind. Note that at least one of the big win special symbols and small win special symbols may be one type.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 is that the selection ratio of various losing symbols, the selection ratio of various special big win symbols, and the selection ratio of various small win symbols are constant and do not change depending on the setting value. By doing this, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

A third feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 is that the number of LEDs (light-emitting components) of the special symbol display that are lit when displaying a small win special symbol or a losing special symbol is fewer than the number of LEDs (light-emitting components) of the special symbol display that are lit when displaying a big win special symbol. This makes it easier to understand the type of special symbol being displayed, which can increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 is that the number of LEDs (light-emitting components) of the special symbol display that are lit when displaying a losing special symbol is fewer than the number of LEDs (light-emitting components) of the special symbol display that are lit when displaying a small win special symbol. This makes it easier to understand the type of special symbol being displayed, making the game more interesting.

The fifth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 is that the LEDs (light-emitting members) of the special symbol display that light up when displaying the small win special symbol include the same LEDs (light-emitting members) of the special symbol display that light up when displaying the losing special symbol. This makes it easier to know that it is a small win special symbol or a losing special symbol, rather than a big win special symbol, and makes the game more interesting.

The sixth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 is that when the special symbol determination information (first special symbol) obtained based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 45 is determined to be a jackpot (first result), any of the first to third jackpot games can be played, and when the special symbol determination information (second special symbol) obtained based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 47 is determined to be a jackpot (first result), any of the fourth to fifth jackpot games can be played. In this way, the type of jackpot game that can be played changes depending on the type of special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but multiple losing special symbols may be associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The number of LEDs on the special pattern display that light up when displaying the big win special pattern may be more than three or less than three. The number of LEDs on the special pattern display that light up when displaying the small win special pattern may be more than two or less than two, but even in this case, the number may be different from the number of LEDs on the special pattern display that light up when displaying the big win special pattern.

Also, the LED of the special pattern display that lights up when displaying the small win special pattern and the LED of the special pattern display that lights up when displaying the losing special pattern may not be the same (they may be completely different).

In addition, the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol does not allow a small jackpot to be won, but it may be possible to make it so that a small jackpot is won. In this case, it is preferable to make the probability of winning lower than that of the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.

(Main control board special chart variation pattern determination process)
The special chart variation pattern determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 85. Fig. 85 is a flowchart showing the special chart variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current game state is normal. If the current game state is normal, the process proceeds to step S313-2. If the current game state is not normal, the process proceeds to step S313-3, assuming that the current game state is time-saving.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects the appropriate table (matching the game situation) from the normal special pattern variation determination table (see FIG. 86) for determining the special pattern variation pattern in the normal game state, and moves the process to step S313-4. Details of the normal special pattern variation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a selects the relevant table (matching the game situation) from the time-saving special chart fluctuation pattern determination table (see Figures 87 to 25) for determining the special chart fluctuation pattern in the time-saving game state, and moves the process to step S313-4. Details of the time-saving special chart fluctuation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a compares the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random number value for reach determination, the reserved number (U1 or U2), and the random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination against the special symbol variation pattern determination table to determine the special symbol variation pattern.

In step S313-5, the main CPU 110a sets the change time corresponding to the determined special chart change pattern in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S313-6, sets a special chart change pattern designation command corresponding to the determined change pattern in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special chart change pattern designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the change performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the change performance.

In step S313-7, the main CPU 110a increments by +1 the number of times the special symbol has changed since the specified condition was met (RWM cleared, the number of times the special symbol has changed since the end of the jackpot game was cleared to 0) stored in the main RAM 110c. Note that the number of times the special symbol has changed is incremented by +1 regardless of whether the game is in a normal game mode, a time-saving game mode, or whether the first special symbol or second special symbol has changed. Note that this number of times the special symbol has changed is referenced in the special symbol change process described below.

In step S313-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a time-saving game state. If the game is not in a time-saving game state, the current special chart variation pattern determination table is terminated, and if the game is in a time-saving game state, in step S313-9, a time-saving count designation command corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving times is set in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the time-saving count designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the remaining number of time-saving times is notified. When this process is completed, the current special chart variation pattern determination process is terminated.

(Normal special chart variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 86 is a normal special symbol variation pattern determination table that is referenced when determining the variation pattern of special symbols in the normal game state.

Specifically, FIG. 86(a) is a normal special pattern change pattern determination table 1 that is referenced when a change display is executed (presentation modes A to C) when there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, or when there is jackpot history information and the number of changes until the special time-saving play state is 51 or more, FIG. 86(b) is a normal special pattern change pattern determination table 2 that is referenced when a change display is executed (during the countdown mode described below) when there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and the number of changes until the special time-saving play state is 50 or less, and FIG. 86(c) is a normal special pattern change pattern determination table 3 that is referenced when a change display corresponding to the remaining reserved second special pattern after the transition from the time-saving play state to the normal play state is executed.

(Special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time reduction)
87 to 90 are special symbol variation pattern determination tables for normal time-saving play that are referenced when determining the variation pattern of special symbols during normal time-saving play.

Specifically, FIG. 87(a) is a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for normal time-saving that is referenced when executing a fluctuation display before the final time of the time-saving when 7 times are selected as the number of time-saving times (J2) for the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time-saving play state and the number of small wins remaining is 1 (during the entry battle mode described later), and FIG. 87(b) is a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for normal time-saving that is referenced when executing a fluctuation display for the final time of the time-saving when 7 times are selected as the number of time-saving times for the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time-saving play state and the number of small wins remaining is 1 (during the entry battle mode described later).

Figure 88(a) is a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for normal time-saving that is referenced when executing a fluctuation display before the final time-saving turn when 55, 95, or 496 times is selected as the number of times for time-saving turns (J2) for the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time-saving play state and the number of small wins remaining is 1 (during the Ranbu mode described later), and Figure 88(b) is a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 4 for normal time-saving that is referenced when executing a fluctuation display for the final time-saving turn when 55, 95, or 496 times is selected as the number of times for time-saving turns (J2) for the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time-saving play state and the number of small wins remaining is 1 (during the Ranbu mode described later).

Figure 89(a) is a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 5 for normal time-saving that is referenced when executing a fluctuation display before the final time-saving turn when 95 times is selected as the number of times for the second special symbol to be shortened (J2) at the time of transition to the normal time-saving play state and the number of small wins remaining is 2 (during the super wild dance mode described later), and Figure 89(b) is a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 6 for normal time-saving that is referenced when executing a fluctuation display for the final time-saving turn when 95 times is selected as the number of times for the second special symbol to be shortened (J2) at the time of transition to the normal time-saving play state and the number of small wins remaining is 2 (during the super wild dance mode described later).

Figure 90(a) is a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 7 for normal time-saving that is referenced when executing a fluctuation display before the final time-saving turn when 496 times is selected as the number of times for the time-saving turn (J2) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time-saving play state and the number of small wins remaining is 2 (in the infinite mode described below), and Figure 90(b) is a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 8 for normal time-saving that is referenced when executing a fluctuation display for the final time-saving turn when 496 times is selected as the number of times for the time-saving turn (J2) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time-saving play state and the number of small wins remaining is 2 (in the infinite mode described below).

(Special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for special time reduction)
FIG. 91 is a special symbol change pattern determination table for normal time-saving play that is referenced when determining the change pattern of special symbols in the special time-saving play state.

Specifically, FIG. 91(a) is a special time-saving special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 1 that is referenced when the special time-saving game state is in a special time-saving game state and there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, or when there is jackpot history information and the remaining number of small wins is two, and the second or subsequent fluctuation display is executed from the start of the special time-saving game state (in the infinite mode described below). FIG. 91(b) is a normal time-saving special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 2 that is referenced when the special time-saving game state is in a special time-saving game state and there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and the remaining number of small wins is two, and the first fluctuation display of the time-saving game state is executed (in the infinite mode). FIG. 91(c) is a special time-saving special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 3 that is referenced when the special time-saving game state is in a special time-saving game state and there is one remaining small win (in the wild dance mode described below) and the fluctuation display is executed.

As shown in Figures 86 to 91, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table associates the type of special symbol (starting hole) that performs the fluctuation display, the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination (stop special symbol data), a random number value for reach determination, the first reserved number (U1) or the second reserved number (U2), a random number value for determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern, the special symbol fluctuation pattern as the determination result, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the contents of the fluctuation performance are listed for reference.

Therefore, a "special symbol variation pattern" can be said to be capable of identifying at least the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, as will be described in detail later, since a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can also be said to be capable of identifying the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game or small jackpot game. In addition, since the number of time-saving game states (time-saving number of times) is set at the end of a jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can also be said to be capable of identifying the number of time-saving times.

The "normal variation", "shortened variation", and "ultra-shortened variation" as the performance contents shown in the special pattern variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 86 to 91 mean that the three performance patterns 70a vary independently at high speed and stop without reaching a reach.

"Reach" refers to a variation mode that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be played, such as when some of the combinations of performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot temporarily stop and other performance symbols 70a change. For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a, "777," is set as the combination of performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot (jackpot result mode), the same performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at "7" in the left and right areas, and the remaining performance symbols 70a change in the center area.

Note that a "temporary stop" refers to a state in which the performance pattern 70a slightly shakes or deforms, making it appear to the player that the performance pattern 70a is stopped (but is not completely stopped).

"Normal reach" refers to a reach effect in which the same effect symbol 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the center area, and is the reach with the lowest expectation of a jackpot. Note that in this embodiment, a "normal reach" does not result in a jackpot, but it may be configured so that a jackpot occurs with a "normal reach".

In addition, an "SP reach" is a super reach that occurs after a normal reach and has a higher chance of resulting in a jackpot than a normal reach.

The "SPSP Reach" is a special reach that occurs after a normal reach or a super reach and has a higher chance of winning than a super reach. For example, the three performance symbols 70a shrink and move to the corners of the image display device, creating a more special performance than the "SP Reach" using almost the entire display area of the image display device.

The "full rotation reach" is a reach that occurs after a normal reach or a super reach and guarantees a big win. For example, from a blackout effect, the three effect patterns 70a all move slowly while being identical, and a more special effect than the "SPSP reach" is produced using almost the entire display area of the image display device.

The "Revival Long Fluctuation" is a presentation that appears to transition to the normal game mode, but actually results in a jackpot. For example, a special presentation is performed using almost the entire display area of the image display device.

The "revival variation" is a presentation that appears to transition to the normal game mode, but actually results in a small win. For example, a special presentation is performed using almost the entire display area of the image display device for a period of time that is shorter than that of the long revival variation.

The "enter battle reach" is a reach effect in which an ally character and an enemy character battle to determine whether or not the game will enter the Ranbu mode, Super Ranbu mode, or Infinite mode (which will result in a miss, big win, or small win). The modes that are most advantageous to the player are Ranbu mode < Super Ranbu mode < Infinite mode.

The "Final Battle Reach" is a reach effect that indicates whether or not the friendly character and enemy character will have a final battle and enter the Ranbu Mode, Super Ranbu Mode, or Infinite Mode (which will result in a miss, big win, or small win) as described below.

The "Promotion Battle Reach" is a reach effect in which an ally character and an enemy character battle each other to indicate whether or not the player will be promoted from Ranbu Mode (described below) to Super Ranbu Mode or Infinite Mode (either a miss, big win, or small win).

In addition, the "promotion battle teaser change" is a scene in which an ally character and enemy character tease each other about whether or not they will battle, but then the battle does not take place.

"Result change" refers to a display that, in the final change display of the normal time-saving game state, displays the results of the game during a series of advantageous periods during which the time-saving game state continues, triggered by a jackpot game from the normal game state, known as the first win. Note that the result display may be made during a series of advantageous periods during which a state advantageous to the player continues, rather than from the first win.

"Result revival change" refers to a display that revives the previous result display during the final change display of the normal time-saving game mode, suggesting that the result is favorable to the player (a big win or a small win).

The "Continuous Battle Reach" is a reach effect in which an ally character and an enemy character battle each other, indicating whether or not the Super Ranbu Mode or Infinite Mode described below will continue (either a miss, big win, or small win).

The "Unbeatable Battle Reach" is a reach effect in which a friendly character and an enemy character battle each other, and the friendly character always wins, resulting in a favorable outcome for the player (a big win or a small win).

"Unbeatable Battle Hyping Fluctuation" is a performance in which an ally character and enemy character hype up the possibility of a battle, and then the battle does not take place.

A "(entry effect) long fluctuation" is an effect that, if it is the first fluctuation of the special time-saving play state, results in a miss after the entry effect that suggests entering the special time-saving play state is performed, and if it is not the first fluctuation of the special time-saving play state (if it is the second or subsequent fluctuation display), then the entry effect is not performed and results in a miss.

"(Entry effect) immediate win change" refers to a change that, if it is the first change to the special time-saving play state, will result in an entry effect suggesting entry into the special time-saving play state, followed by a notification that the player will get a favorable result (a big win or a small win) without going through a reach, and if it is not the first change to the special time-saving play state (if it is the second or subsequent change display), the entry effect will not be performed and the player will get a favorable result (a big win or a small win) without going through a reach.

"(Entry effect) Unbeaten Battle Reach" is a reach effect in which, when the special time-saving play state changes for the first time, an entry effect is performed that suggests entering the special time-saving play state, followed by the aforementioned Unbeaten Battle Reach.

"Long change in entry effect" refers to an effect that ends in a miss after an entry effect that suggests entering a special time-saving game state is performed.

"Entry effect immediate win change" refers to an effect in which, after an entry effect that suggests entering a special time-saving game state is performed, the player is notified that a favorable result (a big win or a small win) will occur without going through a reach.

The first feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 86 to 91 is that during the variation display that is the final round of the normal time-saving game state (series of advantageous periods), a variation effect is executed in which the result is displayed. This allows the player to check the results of the game during the series of advantageous periods, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 86 to 91 is that during the variation display that is the final round of the special time-saving game state, a special presentation is performed without displaying the results. This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming dissatisfied by the results of a series of advantageous periods being displayed even when a jackpot game has not been played, and makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The third feature of the special chart variation pattern determination tables shown in Figures 86 to 91 is that different special chart variation pattern determination tables are used for the normal time-saving play state and the special time-saving play state. By doing so, even if the time-saving play state is the same, the presentation content can be made different between the normal time-saving play state and the special time-saving play state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special chart change pattern determination table shown in Figures 86 to 91 is that, for the first change during the special time-saving game state, a different special chart change pattern determination table is used depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history (RWM clear). By doing this, the presentation content during the first change display during the special time-saving game state can be made different depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figures 86 to 91 is that a common special chart fluctuation pattern determination table (special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for special time-saving) is used for the second to final fluctuations during the special time-saving game state, regardless of whether or not there is a jackpot history (RWM clear). This makes it possible to reduce data volume and achieve efficient control, which in turn makes it possible to shorten development time.

The sixth feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 86 to 91 is that a variation pattern with a short variation time (instant win variation where no reach effect is executed) is more likely to be determined when a jackpot occurs during a special time-saving game state than when a jackpot occurs during a normal game state. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction in situations where a jackpot game that would cause a special time-saving game state is not executed for a long period of time, and it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The seventh feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 86 to 91 is that a variation pattern with a short variation time (instant win variation where no reach effect is executed) is more likely to be determined when a jackpot occurs during a special time-saving game state than when a jackpot occurs during a normal time-saving game state. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction in situations where a jackpot game that would cause a special time-saving game state is not executed for a long period of time, and it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The eighth feature of the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figures 86 to 91 is that the average fluctuation time is shorter when the fluctuation display is executed during a special time-saving game state than when the fluctuation display is executed during a normal time-saving game state. This can reduce the player's dissatisfaction in situations where a jackpot game that would cause a special time-saving game state has not been executed for a long period of time, and can increase the player's interest in the game.

Note that different special chart fluctuation pattern determination tables are used during the normal time-saving play state and during the special time-saving play state. However, for example, when executing fluctuation display other than the initial fluctuation or final fluctuation in the special time-saving play state, a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time-saving (for example, special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for normal time-saving, or special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 5 for normal time-saving, or special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 7 for normal time-saving, etc.) may be used. In this way, it is possible to reduce the data volume and realize efficient control, which in turn makes it possible to shorten the development period.

In addition, for the first change during the special time-saving game state, a different special chart change pattern determination table is used depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history (RWM clear), but the same special chart change pattern determination table (for example, special chart change pattern determination table 1 for special time-saving or special chart change pattern determination table 2 for special time-saving) may be used. In this way, it is possible to reduce the data volume and achieve efficient control, which in turn makes it possible to shorten the development period.

In addition, the same special chart change pattern determination table is used for the final change during the special time-saving game state regardless of whether there is a jackpot history (RWM clear), but a different special chart change pattern determination table may be used. By doing this, the presentation content during the final change display during the special time-saving game state can be made different depending on whether there is a jackpot history, making the game more interesting.

In addition, during the normal time-saving play state and during the special time-saving play state, different special chart change pattern tables can be used to determine the special chart change pattern, and during the specified period after the normal time-saving play state ends (remaining reserved amount of the second special pattern) and during the specified period after the special time-saving play state ends (remaining reserved amount of the second special pattern), the same special chart change pattern table can be used to determine the special chart change pattern. Therefore, by varying the presentation depending on the type of time-saving, the presentation effect can be improved, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity related to the change pattern and to make the control at the end of the time-saving state more efficient.

In addition, it has been explained that the special chart change pattern is determined using the same special chart change pattern table for the change based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol after the end of the normal time-saving game state and the change based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol after the end of the special time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. The special chart change pattern may be determined using different special chart change pattern tables for the change based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol after the end of the normal time-saving game state and the change based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol after the end of the special time-saving game state. In other words, the special chart change pattern can be determined using different special chart change pattern tables during the normal time-saving game state and during the special time-saving game state, and the special chart change pattern can be determined using different special chart change pattern tables during the specified period after the end of the normal time-saving game state (remaining reservation of the second special symbol) and during the specified period after the end of the special time-saving game state (remaining reservation of the second special symbol). In this case, the presentation effect can be improved by giving changes during and after the end of the time-saving depending on the type of time-saving, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 7(b-1) and FIG. 7(b-2), the same normal pattern change pattern table is used in the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state). In other words, the special pattern change pattern can be determined using different special pattern change pattern tables in the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), and the normal pattern change pattern can be determined using the same normal pattern change pattern table in the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state). Therefore, by making changes during and after the time-saving depending on the type of time-saving, it is possible to improve the presentation effect and increase the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity related to the normal pattern change pattern and to make the control during the time-saving more efficient.

Although it has been described that the same normal symbol variation pattern table is used in the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), this is not limited to this. Different normal symbol variation pattern tables may be used in the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state). That is, in the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), a special symbol variation pattern can be determined using different special symbol variation pattern tables, and in the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), a normal symbol variation pattern can be determined using different normal symbol variation pattern tables. In this case, the effect of the presentation can be improved by providing changes during and after the time-saving depending on the type of time-saving, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, the average fluctuation time of the regular pattern during the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state) may tend to be shorter than the average fluctuation time of the special pattern during the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state).

Also, in the fifth embodiment, it was explained that the opening mode of the second start hole 14 is common in each time-saving game state. That is, in the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), the special symbol change pattern can be determined using different special symbol change pattern tables, and even if the same winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), the electric chute (second start hole) can be opened in different opening patterns (time, number of times). Therefore, by providing changes during and after the time-saving depending on the type of time-saving, it is possible to improve the presentation effect and increase the interest in the game. In addition, the degree of advantage of the player can be changed depending on the type of time-saving, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, it was explained that the opening mode of the second start hole 14 may be different in each time-saving game state. In other words, the special symbol change pattern can be determined using different special symbol change pattern tables in the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), and even if the same winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), the electric chute (second start hole) may be opened in the same opening pattern (time, number of times). In this case, by making changes during and after the time-saving depending on the type of time-saving, it is possible to improve the presentation effect and increase the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity related to the opening pattern of the electric chute and to make the control during the auxiliary game more efficient.

(Pre-judgment table)
Figure 92 is a pre-determination table which is referenced when pre-determining (reading ahead) special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole.

As shown in FIG. 92, the pre-determination table associates the game state, the type of special symbol (starting hole), the result of the jackpot determination (random number value for jackpot determination), the result of the special symbol determination (random number value for special symbol determination), the random number value for reach determination, the random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, and the special symbol planned variation pattern as the determination result.

Therefore, the "special symbol planned change pattern" and "preview information" can be said to be capable of identifying at least the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the planned special symbol change pattern. In addition, as will be described in detail later, since a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can also be said to be capable of identifying the type (number of rounds) of a jackpot game or a small jackpot game. In addition, since the number of time-saving game states (time-saving number of times) is set at the end of a jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can also be said to be capable of identifying the number of time-saving number of times.

(Special pattern change processing on the main control board)
The special symbol variation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 93. Fig. 93 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the change time set in the special symbol change pattern determination process described above has elapsed. If the change time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S320-2, and if the change time has not elapsed, the current special symbol change process is terminated.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stops the display of the special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process described above, and in step S320-3, sets the stop time according to the game status in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the display shows the final variation in the time-saving game state, 8.0 seconds is set, and if the display shows any other variation, 0.5 seconds is set.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a time-saving flag is set in the main RAM 110c. If the time-saving flag is set, the process moves to step S320-5 to update the remaining number of time-saving times, and if the time-saving flag is not set, the process moves to step S320-13 to not update the remaining number of time-saving times.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current variable display of the special symbol is the first special symbol. If it is the first special symbol, in step S320-6, the first time-saving number (J1), which is the number of time-saving times for the first special symbol saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the third time-saving number (J3), which is the total number of time-saving times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are decremented by one each. If it is not the first special symbol (it is the second special symbol), in step S320-7, the second time-saving number (J2), which is the number of time-saving times for the second special symbol saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the third time-saving number (J3) mentioned above are decremented by one each.

In step S320-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether any one of the first time-saving count (J1), the second time-saving count (J2), and the third time-saving count (J3) has become "0." If it has become "0," the process moves to step S320-12 to end the time-saving game state, and if it has not become "0," the process moves to step S320-9.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a small win special symbol has stopped and been displayed. If it is not a small win special symbol, the process proceeds to step S320-13. If it is a small win special symbol, in step S320-10, the remaining number of small wins (Z) until the time-saving game state is terminated, which is saved in the game RWM area, is decremented by 1.

In step S320-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the remaining number of small wins has reached "0." If the remaining number of small wins has reached "0," the time-saving game state is terminated and processing proceeds to step S320-12. If the remaining number of small wins has not reached "0," processing proceeds to step S320-13.

In step S320-12, the main CPU 110a clears the time-saving flag and the various time-saving counts (J1, J2, J3) saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the time-saving gaming state.

In step S320-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special jackpot symbol has stopped and been displayed. If it is not a special jackpot symbol, processing proceeds to step S320-15. If it is a special jackpot symbol, processing proceeds to step S320-14, where the time-saving flag and the various time-saving counts (J1, J2, J3) saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c are cleared to end the time-saving gaming state (start the normal gaming state). Once this processing is completed, processing proceeds to step S320-19.

In step S320-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of times of change saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c has reached a specified number (496 times, which is the maximum number of times of time-saving in the normal time-saving game state, plus 500 times, which is set to the remaining number of reserved balls of 4). If the number of times of change has reached the specified number, the process moves to step S320-16 as a special time-saving game state will be started, and if the number of times of change has not reached the specified number, the process moves to step S320-18 as a special time-saving game state will not be started.

In step S320-16, the main CPU 110a saves the number of times the special time-saving feature is activated (J1=60, J2=750, J3=750) and the number of remaining small wins (Z=2) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S320-17, sets a special time-saving flag in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c to transition to the special time-saving game state.

In step S320-18, the main CPU 110a sets the time-saving count designation command corresponding to the various time-saving counts (J1, J2, J3) saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the time-saving count designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, which notifies the user of the remaining number of time-saving counts.

In step S320-19, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "2" and sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state (the game state identified from the presence or absence of the time-saving flag) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the game state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing to update the game state is performed on the performance control board 130. When this processing is completed, the current special symbol variation processing ends.

In this way, when a small win symbol is stopped and displayed (a small win game is executed) during the time-saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47, even if the time-saving number of times (J1, J2, J3) remains, the time-saving game state ends when the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0." Therefore, even if the player tries to play advantageously by referring to the combination of the pre-reading performance or the performance pattern 70a stopped and displayed (whether to pass the game ball through the specific area 53 in the small win game and aim for an advantageous big win), it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage depending on the playing method during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.
In addition, when the number of small wins reaches a specified number, the game state transitions to a normal game state before the small win game is executed (at the time when the small win special symbol stops).

In addition, even if there are remaining small wins (Z), the time-saving game state ends when the time-saving count (J1, J2, or J3) becomes "0." This prevents the time-saving game state from continuing until the small win symbol is stopped and displayed, giving the player an excessive advantage, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, the advantageous game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled after a big win can be ended (transitioned to the normal game state) when the number of fluctuations reaches a specified number, or when the number of small wins reaches a specified number (including 1 time). Therefore, the number of fluctuations that the advantageous game state continues can be changed according to the progress of the game, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of times the special symbol changes display after a certain condition is met (executing RWM clear, clearing the number of changes to 0 based on the end of a jackpot game) reaches a specified number of times, a special time-saving game state is generated, so the player can be surprised that the time-saving state occurs without going through a jackpot game, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the number of times (500) at which the special time-saving game state occurs is greater than the maximum number of times (496) set in the normal time-saving game state. This means that the special time-saving game state will not occur during the normal time-saving game state, eliminating the inconvenience of players losing track of the game's progress, and making the game more interesting.

In addition, the number of times (500 times) at which the special time-saving play state occurs is greater than the maximum number of time-saving times (496 times) set in the normal time-saving play state by the upper limit number of the second reserved number (4 pieces). Therefore, when the maximum number of time-saving times (496 times) is set in the normal time-saving play state, it can be felt as if the player has moved directly from the normal time-saving play state to the special time-saving play state, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when the special time-saving game state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not reset to 0. Therefore, the special time-saving game state will not occur again between big win games (after the special time-saving game state starts or ends), which ensures a balance of profits between the gaming facility and the player, and also makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.
That is, when the prescribed number of times is reached (when entering the special time-saving game state), a first predetermined image (such as a shutter image SY described later) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again in the first performance. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, a second performance is performed in which the decorative pattern 700 indicating a jackpot is displayed. In addition, the number of times of operation n (number of times of change) is set, and an update process is performed to update the number of times of operation n every time the special pattern changes, and when the first performance is performed, n is not cleared and an update process is performed every time the special pattern changes even after the first performance is performed, and when the second performance is performed, n is cleared. In this case, by not clearing n even when the first performance is performed, it is possible to perform a process of "always" adding. In addition, when performing a subtraction process, it is not necessary to switch the process before and after the special time-saving game state, so that the processing load and capacity can be reduced.

In addition, rather than setting the maximum number of time-saving times in the normal time-saving game state (496 times) to a number less than the number of fluctuations at which the special time-saving game state occurs (500 times), the maximum number of time-saving times in the normal time-saving game state and the number of fluctuations at which the special time-saving game state occurs may be set to the same number. In this way, the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state are seamlessly connected, making it feel as if the normal time-saving game state has been extended, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when a special time-saving game state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c may be cleared to 0, and a special time-saving game state occurring flag indicating that the special time-saving game state has occurred may be set in the main RAM 110c (game RWM). In this case, if the special time-saving game state occurring flag does not exist when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number (500 times), the number of fluctuations may be cleared to 0 to cause the special time-saving game state to occur, and if the special time-saving game state occurring flag exists, the number of fluctuations may be cleared to 0 to prevent the special time-saving game state from occurring.

(Special pattern stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 94. Fig. 94 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stop time set in the special symbol variation process described above has elapsed. If the stop time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S330-2, and if the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop process is terminated.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special jackpot symbol is displayed. If it is, the process proceeds to step S330-3. If it is not (it is) a special jackpot symbol (it is) a special small jackpot symbol or a special miss symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-5.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot opening transition process, such as selecting jackpot game control data (maximum number of rounds, maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.) corresponding to the stop special symbol data (special jackpot symbol) from the jackpot game jackpot opening control data determination table (see FIG. 95(a)) for executing a jackpot game, and in step S330-4, sets "3" to the special symbol special power processing data in order to transition to jackpot game processing, and proceeds to step S330-8. Details of the jackpot game jackpot opening control data determination table will be described later.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a small win special symbol is displayed. If it is a small win special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-6. If it is not a small win special symbol (if it is a losing special symbol), the process proceeds to step S330-10.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a performs a small win opening transition process, such as selecting control data (maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.) for the small win game corresponding to the stopped special symbol data (special small win symbol) from the large win port control data determination table for small win game (see FIG. 95(b)) for executing the small win game, and in step S330-7, sets "4" to the special symbol special power processing data to transition to the small win game, and proceeds to step S330-8.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the selected control data in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-9, sets the opening designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the opening designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute the opening performance of the big win game or small win game. When this processing is completed, the current special pattern stop processing ends.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "0" to move processing to the special symbol memory determination process, and ends this special symbol stop process.

(Control Data Table)
Figure 95(a) is a diagram showing a large prize opening control data judgment table for jackpot play for controlling the large prize opening during jackpot play (special play), Figure 95(b) is a diagram showing a large prize opening control data judgment table for small prize play for controlling the large prize opening during small prize play, and Figure 95(c) is a diagram showing a specific area control data judgment table for small prize play for controlling a specific area during small prize play.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), the big prize opening control data judgment table for big prize play corresponds to the special stop pattern data, the maximum number of rounds in a big prize play, the maximum number of winning balls in a big prize opening in one round play, the opening time from the start of a big prize play until the first round play is executed, the type of big prize opening that opens in each round play, the maximum number of openings of the big prize opening in each round play, the opening time of the big prize opening for one opening of each round play, the interval time during which the big prize opening is closed after the end of a round play (the time required to eject the game balls from the big prize opening), and the ending time from the end of the final round play until the end of the big prize play.

When the special stop data is "01", a first jackpot game is played in which three rounds of play are played, when the special stop data is "02", three rounds of play are played and a second jackpot game is played in which the state after the jackpot game is more favorable to the player than the first jackpot game, when the special stop data is "03", three rounds of play are played and a third jackpot game is played in which the state after the jackpot game is more unfavorable to the player than the first jackpot game.

In addition, when the stop special data is "11", 10 rounds of play are played and a fourth jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more favorable to the player than the third jackpot game, and when the stop special data is "12", 10 rounds of play are played and a fifth jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more favorable to the player than the third jackpot game (with the same degree of favorability as the fourth jackpot game).

In addition, when the stop special data is "13", the first V jackpot game is executed, in which the remaining two rounds of play are played via the first small jackpot game, which is the first round of play; when the stop special data is "14", the remaining nine rounds of play are played via the second small jackpot game, which is the first round of play, and the second V jackpot game, which is more advantageous to the player than the first V jackpot game, is executed; when the stop special data is "15", the remaining two rounds of play are played via the third small jackpot game, which is the first round of play, and the third V jackpot game, in which the jackpot game conditions may be more disadvantageous to the player than the first V jackpot game, is executed.

The big prize winning hole control data judgment table for big prize games shown in FIG. 95(a) has the following features: when a big prize game (first to third big prize games) based on winning in the first starting hole 45 is executed, the maximum number of rounds (10 rounds) of big prize games are not executed, whereas when a big prize game (fourth to fifth big prize games) based on winning in the second starting hole 47 is executed, the maximum number of rounds (10 rounds) of big prize games can be executed. By doing this, it is possible to differentiate the playability when a game ball wins in the first starting hole 45 from when a game ball wins in the second starting hole 47, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 95(b), the large prize opening control data judgment table for small prize play associates the special stop data of the special pattern (type of small prize play), the maximum number of times the large prize opening can be opened in a small prize play, the maximum number of prizes won into the large prize opening in a small prize play, the opening time until the large prize opening is converted to an open state, the type of large prize opening to be opened, the opening time of the large prize opening for one opening, the interval time during which the large prize opening is closed (the time required to eject the game balls from inside the large prize opening), and the ending time from the final closure of the large prize opening to the end of the small prize play.

If the stop special data is "13", the first small win game is executed, if the stop special data is "14", the second small win game is executed, and if the stop special data is "15", the third small win game is executed.

The large prize opening control data judgment table for small prize games shown in FIG. 95(b) has the following feature: the interval time during which the first large prize opening 50 is closed is set to a time during which at least one game ball is rolling on the top surface of the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 from the start to the end of the interval (0.82 seconds for an interval of 0.67 seconds). By doing this, the opening time of the first large prize opening 50 can be shortened, and the number of times the first large prize opening is opened can be increased within the predetermined maximum opening time of the large prize opening in small prize games (1.8 seconds), making the game more interesting.

As shown in FIG. 95(c), the specific area control data judgment table for small win games associates the special stop data of the special pattern (type of small win game), the maximum number of times the specific area 53 opens in a small win game, the opening timing of the specific area 53, and the closing timing of the specific area 53.

In a small win game, regardless of the type of small win game, the specific area 53 is converted to an open state when the large prize winning opening is opened in the small win game, and the specific area 53 is converted to a closed state when the large prize winning opening is closed.

The specific area control data judgment table for small win games shown in Figure 95 (c) has the following feature: the timing for opening and closing the specific area 53 is set so that a game ball that enters the first large winning port 50 during a small win game passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of almost 100% (1/1). This allows the player to play the small win game with peace of mind, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, instead of opening and closing the specific area 53 so that the game ball that enters the first large winning port 50 during a small win game passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of almost 100% (1/1), the specific area 53 may be opened and closed with a probability of 50% (1/2) or 25% (1/4).

In addition, depending on the type of small prize game, there may be a case where the specific area 53 is opened or closed so that a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening 50 has a probability of passing through the specific area 53 of approximately 100% (1/1) (e.g., the second small prize game), and a case where the specific area 53 is opened or closed so that a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening 50 has a probability of passing through the specific area 53 of 25% (1/4) (e.g., the third small prize game).

(Jackpot Game Processing on the Main Control Board)
The big win game process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 96. Fig. 96 is a flow chart showing the big win game process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether or not the opening time set in the special symbol stop process described above is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-5.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the special symbol stop process described above has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3. If the opening time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a round play transition process. Specifically, it adds "1" to the number of round play times (R) stored in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and sets a round in progress flag indicating that a round play is in progress in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds played (R) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game processing. This causes the round designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a round performance corresponding to the current round of play.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a round of play is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether or not a round-of-play flag is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If a round of play is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-6. If a round of play is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-12.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for opening the large prize opening have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the time elapsed since the start of the current round of play has reached the timing for opening the large prize opening specified by the control data for the large prize game. If the conditions for opening the large prize opening have been met, the process proceeds to step S340-7. If the conditions for opening the large prize opening have not been met, the process proceeds to step S340-8.

The main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening process in step S340-7. Specifically, it identifies the type of large prize opening to be opened (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) and the opening time of the current large prize opening (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) from the control data for the large prize game, and sets the opening time of the large prize opening and the drive data for the large prize opening opening solenoid (first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b or second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This converts the large prize opening into an open state.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for closing the large prize opening have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the current opening of the large prize opening is the opening before the final opening in the current round of play, and whether that opening time has elapsed. If the conditions for closing the large prize opening have been met, processing proceeds to step S340-9, and if the conditions for closing the large prize opening have not been met, processing proceeds to step S340-10.

The main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening closing process in step S340-9. Specifically, it identifies the interval time (closing time) of the current large prize opening (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) from the control data for the large prize game, sets the interval time (closing time) of the large prize opening in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the drive data for the large prize opening opening solenoid set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This converts the large prize opening to a closed state.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the condition for transitioning to an interval has been met. Specifically, it determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) in the current round of play has reached the maximum number of winning balls or whether the opening time for the final opening of the large prize opening in the current round of play has elapsed. If the condition for transitioning to an interval has been met, processing proceeds to step S340-11, and if the condition for transitioning to an interval has not been met, processing for the current large prize game is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs interval transition processing in step S340-11. Specifically, it identifies the current interval time (the time when the large prize opening is closed) from the control data for the large prize game, sets the interval time in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the drive data for the large prize opening solenoid set in the main RAM 110c. This converts the large prize opening into a closed state. It also sets an interval in progress flag, indicating that an interval is in progress, in place of the round in progress flag stored in the main RAM 110c. When the interval transition processing is completed, the current large prize game processing is terminated.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time is during an interval. Specifically, it determines whether or not an interval flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the current time is during an interval, the process proceeds to step S340-13. If the current time is not during an interval, the process proceeds to step S340-19.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the interval time has elapsed. If the interval time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-14. If the interval time has not elapsed, the process for this jackpot game ends.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether the final round of play in the current jackpot game has ended. If the final round of play has ended, the process proceeds to step S340-17. If the final round of play has not ended, the process proceeds to step S340-15.

The main CPU 110a performs a round play transition process in step S340-15. Specifically, it adds "1" to the number of round play times (R) stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. It also sets a round play in progress flag in place of the interval in progress flag stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds played (R) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game processing. This causes the round designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a round performance corresponding to the current round of play.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S340-17. Specifically, it identifies the current ending time from the control data for the big win game, and sets the ending time in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. It also sets an ending in progress flag, indicating that the game is now ending, in place of the interval in progress flag stored in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that this is the ending of the jackpot game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game processing. This causes the ending designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute the ending performance corresponding to the current jackpot game.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether the game is currently ending. Specifically, it determines whether the ending flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the game is currently ending, the process proceeds to step S340-20. If the game is not currently ending, the current jackpot game process ends.

In step S340-20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game processing is terminated. If the ending time has elapsed, in step S340-21, the special chart special signal processing data is set to "5" to move processing to the jackpot game termination processing, and the current jackpot game processing is terminated.

(Small win game processing of the main control board)
The small win game process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 97. Fig. 97 is a flow chart showing the small win game end process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether or not the opening time set in the special symbol stop process described above is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process proceeds to step S350-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S350-4.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the special symbol stop processing described above has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, in step S350-3, an open/close game in progress flag is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, indicating that an open/close game in which the large prize opening is opened and closed is in progress, and if the opening time has not elapsed, the current small prize game processing is terminated.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special prize opening is being opened or closed. If it is being opened or closed, the process proceeds to step S350-5. If it is not being opened or closed, the process proceeds to step S350-21.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for opening the large prize opening have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the opening or interval of the small prize game has ended. If the conditions for opening the large prize opening have been met, the process proceeds to step S350-6. If the conditions for opening the large prize opening have not been met, the process proceeds to step S350-7.

The main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening process in step S350-6. Specifically, it specifies the type of large prize opening to be opened (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) and the opening time of the current large prize opening (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) from the control data for the small prize game shown in FIG. 76(c), and sets the opening time of the large prize opening and the drive data for the large prize opening opening solenoid (first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b or second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the large prize opening to be converted into an open state.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for opening the specific area 53 have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the timing for opening the specific area 53 specified by the control data for the specific area shown in FIG. 76(c) (here, the timing for opening the large prize opening) has arrived. If the conditions for opening the specific area 53 have been met, processing proceeds to step S350-8, and if the conditions for opening the specific area 53 have not been met, processing proceeds to step S350-9.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific area opening process in step S350-8. Specifically, the drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the specific area 53 to be converted to an open state.

In step S350-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for closing the specific area 53 have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the timing for closing the specific area 53 (here, the timing for closing the large prize opening) specified by the control data for the specific area shown in FIG. 76(c) has arrived. If the conditions for closing the specific area 53 have been met, processing proceeds to step S350-10; if the conditions for closing the specific area 53 have not been met, processing proceeds to step S350-11.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific area closing process in step S350-10. Specifically, it clears the drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b that is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the specific area 53 to be converted to a closed state.

In step S350-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for closing the large prize opening have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the opening time for the large prize opening has elapsed and whether the number of prizes won through the large prize opening has reached the maximum number of prizes. If the conditions for closing the large prize opening have been met, processing proceeds to step S350-12; if the conditions for closing the large prize opening have not been met, processing proceeds to step S350-13.

The main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening closing process in step S350-12. Specifically, it identifies the interval time (closing time) from the control data for the small prize game shown in FIG. 76(c), sets the interval time for the large prize opening in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the drive data for the large prize opening opening solenoid set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This converts the large prize opening to a closed state.

In step S350-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the final interval time in the small win game has elapsed. If the final interval time has elapsed, in step S350-14, the open/close game in progress flag set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared, and if the final interval time has not elapsed, the current small win game processing is terminated.

In step S350-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the above-mentioned specific area passing flag is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the specific area passing flag is saved, the process proceeds to step S350-16 assuming that a jackpot game will be executed when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the open/close game, and if the specific area passing flag is not saved, the process proceeds to step S350-19 assuming that an ending will be executed when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during the open/close game.

In step S350-16, the main CPU 110a clears the specific area passing flag saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S350-17, performs a process to transition to a big win game. Specifically, the main CPU 110a selects control data (maximum number of rounds, maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.) corresponding to the stopped special symbol data (stopped special symbol) from the big win port control data judgment table for big win games shown in FIG. 76(a), and performs processes such as clearing the time-saving flag and various time-saving numbers (J1, J2, J3) saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-18, the main CPU 110a sets the special chart special electric processing data to "3" to move processing to the big win game processing, and ends this small win game processing.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S350-19. Specifically, it identifies the current ending time from the control data for the small win game, and sets the ending time in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-20, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that this is the ending of the small win game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current small win game processing. This causes the ending designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute an ending performance corresponding to the current small win game (such as a disappointment notification performance that notifies players that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small win game, more specifically during the open/close game).

In step S350-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. Specifically, it determines whether or not the ending time set in step S350-19 is equal to or greater than "0". If the game is currently ending, the process proceeds to step S350-22. If the game is not currently ending, the current small win game process ends.

In step S350-22, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time set in step S350-19 described above has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the current small win game processing is terminated, and if the ending time has elapsed, in step S350-23, the special symbol special power processing data is set to "0" to move processing to the special symbol memory determination processing, and then the current small win game processing is terminated.

In this way, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during a small win game, the big win game will not be executed until the small win game (conversion game) ends (the first big win opening is opened ten times or ten game balls win). Therefore, the player will not be put at a disadvantage depending on the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 53, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during a small win game, the big win game is executed without ending the small win game. This prevents the time between the small win game and the big win game from being prolonged, making the game more interesting. Note that the big win game may be executed after the ending of the small win game.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The big win game end process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 98. Fig. 98 is a flow chart showing the big win game end process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 110a obtains the special stop symbol data saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-2, determines whether the special stop symbol data is a special jackpot symbol. If it is a special jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S360-3, and if it is not a special jackpot symbol (it is a special small jackpot symbol), the process proceeds to step S360-5.

In step S360-3, the main CPU 110a acquires the game status information at the time of winning the jackpot that is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-4, selects a first game status setting table (see FIG. 99(a)) for setting the game status after the jackpot based on the game status information at the time of winning the jackpot, and proceeds to step S360-7. Details of the first game status setting table will be described later.

In step S360-5, the main CPU 110a acquires the game state information at the time of passing the specific area saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-6, selects a second game state setting table (see FIG. 99(b)) for setting the game state after the big win based on the game state information at the time of passing the specific area, and proceeds to step S360-7. Details of the second game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-7, the main CPU 110a compares the acquired game status information, etc. with the selected game status setting table, determines the game status flag, the number of time-saving times (J1 to J3), and the number of remaining small wins (Z) as the game status after the big win, and sets them in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-8, sets a game status designation command corresponding to the game status flag in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the game status designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing to update the game status is performed on the performance control board 130.

In step S360-9, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "0" to move processing to the special symbol memory determination process, and ends the current jackpot game end process.

In this way, at the end of a big win game that is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during a small win game, it is possible to perform a predetermined process (specifically, a process of determining the game conditions after the big win game (game state, number of time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) and setting the determined game conditions in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c) based on the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area during the small win game. Therefore, it is possible to control the game (set the game conditions) by utilizing events that occur during the actual game, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small jackpot game, it is possible to carry out a predetermined process (specifically, a process of determining the game conditions after the jackpot game (game state, number of time-saving rounds, number of remaining small jackpots) and setting the determined game conditions in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c) based on the game state when the jackpot game was judged to be a jackpot game). Therefore, it is possible to make the gameplay different depending on whether it is a jackpot game that goes through a small jackpot game or a jackpot game that does not go through a small jackpot game, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a big win game that does not involve a small win game, a predetermined process may be performed based on the game state when the big win special symbol is displayed, rather than performing a predetermined process based on the game state when the big win is determined.

(Game Status Setting Table)
Figure 99(a) is a diagram showing a first game status setting table for setting the game status after the end of a jackpot game that does not involve a small jackpot game, and Figure 99(b) is a diagram showing a second game status setting table for setting the game status after the end of a jackpot game that involves a small jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), the first game state setting table corresponds to the special stop data of the jackpot special symbol, the game state information at the time of winning the jackpot indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the game state flag to be set (time-saving flag indicating the time-saving game state), the first time-saving number (J1) which is the number of times the first special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, the second time-saving number (J2) which is the number of times the second special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, the third time-saving number (J3) which is the number of times the combined first special symbol and second special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, and the remaining number of small wins (Z) which is the number of times the small win changes to end the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 99(b), the second game state setting table corresponds to the stop special symbol data of the small win special symbol, game state information at the time of passing a specific area indicating the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area 53, the game state flag to be set (time-saving flag indicating the time-saving game state), the first time-saving number (J1) which is the number of times the first special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, the second time-saving number (J2) which is the number of times the second special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, the third time-saving number (J3) which is the number of times the combined first special symbol and second special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, and the remaining number of small wins (Z) which is the number of times the small win changes to end the time-saving game state.

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 99 is that there are jackpot games (first jackpot game, third jackpot game) in which the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the time-saving game state is greater than the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the normal game state. In this way, the second time-saving number of times (J2) set can be made different depending on the type of jackpot game, improving playability and making the game more interesting.

The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 99 is that there are jackpot games (second jackpot game, fourth jackpot game, fifth jackpot game) in which the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the normal game state is the same as the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the time-saving game state, and the second time-saving number of times (J2) of these jackpot games is greater than the second time-saving number of times (J2) of the other jackpot games (first jackpot game, third jackpot game). In this way, the value of the jackpot game can be differentiated by the number of time-saving times, rather than by the difference in the prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game, making it possible to improve the playability and increase the interest in the game.

A third feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 99 is that there are jackpot games (first jackpot game, second jackpot game, third jackpot game) in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) set when played in the time-saving game state is greater than the remaining number of small wins (Z) set when played in the normal game state. In this way, the remaining number of small wins (Z) set can be made different depending on the type of jackpot game, improving playability and making the game more interesting.

The fourth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 99 is that there are jackpot games (fourth jackpot game, fifth jackpot game) in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) set when executed in the normal game state is the same as the remaining number of small wins (Z) set when executed in the time-saving game state, and in the normal game state, the remaining number of small wins (Z) of that jackpot game is greater than the remaining number of small wins (Z) of the other jackpot games (first jackpot game, second jackpot game, third jackpot game). In this way, the value of the jackpot game can be differentiated by the remaining number of small wins, rather than by the difference in the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game, making it possible to improve the playability and increase the interest in the game.

The fifth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 99 is that there are jackpot games (first V jackpot game, third V jackpot game) in which the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the time-saving game state is greater than the second time-saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the normal game state, among the jackpot games executed via the small jackpot game. In this way, the second time-saving number of times (J2) set can be made different depending on the type of jackpot game that is executed via the small jackpot game, which improves the playability and makes the game more interesting.

The sixth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 99 is that the number of remaining small wins (Z) set for a jackpot game that is executed via a small win game in the time-saving game state is greater than the number of remaining small wins (Z) set when the jackpot game is executed in the normal game state. In this way, the value of a jackpot game that passes through a small win game can be made different depending on the game state, improving the gameplay and making the game more interesting.

In addition, in the case of a specific direct jackpot (fourth jackpot, fifth jackpot), the number of times that the advantageous game state (time-saving game state) that is controlled after the end of the jackpot does not change regardless of the game state, whereas in the case of a jackpot via a small jackpot, the number of times that the advantageous game state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot can be changed depending on the game state. This increases the player's expectations as to whether the jackpot is a direct jackpot or a jackpot via a small jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, the game state when a small jackpot is reached can cause the player to feel happy or sad, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of time-saving times set for a specific direct jackpot (fourth jackpot, fifth jackpot) is greater than the number of time-saving times set for a small jackpot. Also, the number of time-saving times set for a jackpot via a small jackpot in a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) is greater than the number of time-saving times set for a jackpot via a small jackpot in a normal gaming state. Also, the number of time-saving times set for a special time-saving gaming state is greater than the number of time-saving times set for a direct jackpot (fourth jackpot, fifth jackpot).

In addition, the number of small wins that are the end condition of the advantageous game state (time-saving game state) is set to a value less than the number of fluctuations that are the end condition of the advantageous game state. Also, the number of small wins that ends the advantageous game state changes depending on the type of jackpot (special pattern).

(Game state referenced at the end of a big win game without going through a small win game)
Figure 100 is a diagram showing the game state referenced at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small jackpot game, where Figure 100(a) is a timing chart when a jackpot fluctuation display is executed in a normal game state, Figure 100(b) is a timing chart when a jackpot fluctuation display is executed in a time-saving game state (before the final fluctuation), and Figure 100(c) is a timing chart when a jackpot fluctuation display is executed in a time-saving game state (final fluctuation).

The game state that is referenced to set the game conditions (game state, number of time-saving rounds, number of remaining small wins) at the end of a jackpot game that does not involve a small win game is the timing at which a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot (when the jackpot is won).

As shown in FIG. 100(a), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the normal game state, at the end of the jackpot game at T4, the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving turns, number of remaining small wins) are set by referring to the game state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, at the time when the jackpot was won. In this case, the timing of T1 is the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 100(b), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving game state (before the final fluctuation), at the end of the jackpot game at T4, the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) are set by referring to the game state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, at the time when the jackpot was won. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 100(c), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving game state (final fluctuation), at the end of the jackpot game at T4, the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) are set by referring to the game state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, at the time when the jackpot was won. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

(Game state referenced at the end of a big win game via a small win game)
Figure 101 is a diagram showing the game state referenced at the end of a jackpot game that has passed through a small jackpot game, where Figure 101(a) is a timing chart when a small jackpot variable display is executed in a normal game state, Figure 101(b) is a timing chart when a small jackpot variable display that does not satisfy the time-saving end condition is executed in a time-saving game state, and Figure 100(c) is a timing chart when a small jackpot variable display that satisfies the time-saving end condition is executed in a time-saving game state.

The game state that is referenced to set the game conditions (game state, number of time-saving rounds, number of remaining small wins) at the end of a big win game that has gone through a small win game is the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small win game (when transitioning to the big win game).

As shown in FIG. 101(a), when the small win variable display is executed in the normal game state, at the end of the big win game of T6, the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during the small win game of T4 is referenced and the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) are set. In this case, since the normal game state has been in place since the start of the small win variable display, the timing of T4 is the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 101(b), when a small win variable display that does not satisfy the time-saving end condition is executed in the time-saving game state, the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during the small win game of T4 is referenced at the end of the big win game of T6, and the game conditions (game state, various time-saving number of times, remaining number of small wins) are set. In this case, when the small win variable display of T2 is stopped, the various time-saving number of times and the remaining number of small wins are not "0" and the time-saving game state is maintained, so the timing of T4 is the time-saving game state. Note that when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at the timing of T4, the big win game starts and the game transitions to the normal game state, but when the game ball passes through the specific area 53, the game is in the time-saving game state before transitioning to the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 101(c), when a small win variable display that satisfies the time-saving end condition is executed in the time-saving game state, at the end of the big win game of T6, the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during the small win game of T4 is referenced and the game conditions (game state, various time-saving number of times, remaining number of small wins) are set. In this case, when the small win variable display of T2 stops being displayed, one of the time-saving number of times becomes "0", the time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state, so the timing of T4 is the normal game state.

As shown in Figures 100 and 101, the sampling timing (acquisition timing) of the game state referenced to set the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) at the end of a jackpot game differs between when a jackpot variation display is executed and a jackpot game is played, and when a small win variation display is executed and a jackpot game is played. Therefore, the gameplay can be made different depending on whether it is a jackpot or a small win, making the game more interesting.

(Mode flow showing the transition of game modes)
Figure 102(a) shows the mode flow when a jackpot game is executed in the normal game state, Figure 102(b) shows the mode flow when a jackpot game is executed in the rush battle mode or Ranbu mode (normal time-saving game state), and Figure 102(c) shows the mode flow when a jackpot game is executed in the super Ranbu mode or infinite mode (normal time-saving game state).

As shown in FIG. 102(a), in the normal game state, when a jackpot determination for the first special symbol determines a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 01 is stopped and displayed, a first jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, and then the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times and the remaining number of small jackpots (Z) is set to 1 time, transitioning to the Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 02 is stopped and displayed, a second jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving plays (J2) is set to 95 and the remaining number of small wins is set to 1, transitioning to the Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 03 is stopped and displayed, a third jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving plays (J2) is set to seven, and the game transitions to the Ranbu mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to one.

In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 11 is stopped and displayed, a fourth jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed, after which the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 496 times and the remaining number of small jackpots is set to 2 times, transitioning to an infinite mode.
In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, a fifth jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving plays (J2) is set to 496, and the remaining number of small wins is set to 2, transitioning to an infinite mode.

Furthermore, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 13 is stopped and displayed, a first V jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times and the remaining number of small wins is set to 1 time, transitioning to the Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, a second V jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed, after which the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 95 times and the remaining number of small wins is set to 1 time, transitioning to the Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 15 is stopped and displayed, a third V jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times and the remaining number of small wins is set to 1 time, transitioning to the Ranbu mode.

As shown in FIG. 102(b), in the entered battle mode or Ranbu mode (normal time-saving play state) where the remaining number of small wins is 1, when the jackpot determination for the first special pattern determines a jackpot (first result) and the special jackpot pattern 01 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is not subtracted (it remains 1) and a first jackpot game consisting of 3 rounds is executed, after which the second time-saving number (J2) is set to 95 times and the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to 2 times, transitioning to the Super Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 02 is stopped and displayed, the number of remaining small wins is not subtracted (it remains at 1), and a first jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving plays (J2) is set to 95, and the number of remaining small wins (Z) is set to 2, transitioning to the Chou Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 03 is stopped and displayed, the number of remaining small wins is not subtracted (it remains at 1), and a first jackpot game consisting of three rounds is executed, after which the second number of time-saving rounds (J2) is set to 95, and the number of remaining small wins (Z) is set to 2, and the game transitions to the Super Ranbu mode.

In addition, when a jackpot determination for the second special symbol indicates a jackpot (first result) and the special jackpot symbol 11 is stopped and displayed, a fourth jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed without subtracting the number of remaining small jackpots (remaining at 1), and then the second number of time-saving plays (J2) is set to 496 and the remaining number of small jackpots is set to 2, transitioning to an infinite mode.
In addition, when a jackpot determination for the second special symbol indicates a jackpot (first result) and the special jackpot symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small jackpots is not subtracted (it remains at 1), and a fifth jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving rounds (J2) is set to 496, and the remaining number of small jackpots is set to 2, transitioning to an infinite mode.

Furthermore, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 13 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is reduced to 0 and the game enters a normal game state, where a first V jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving plays (J2) is set to 55, and the game transitions to a Ranbu mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 1.
In addition, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is reduced to 0 and the game enters a normal game state, where a second V jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed, after which the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 95 times and the game transitions to a Ranbu mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 1 time.
In addition, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 15 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is reduced to 0 and the game enters a normal game state, in which a third V jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving plays (J2) is set to 55, and the game transitions to the Ranbu mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 1.

As shown in FIG. 102(c), in the Chou Ranbu mode or the Infinite mode (normal time-saving play state) where the remaining number of small wins is two, when the first special jackpot determination determines a jackpot (first result) and the special jackpot pattern 01 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is not subtracted (it remains at two) and a first jackpot game consisting of three rounds is executed, after which the second time-saving number (J2) is set to 95 and the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to two, transitioning to the Chou Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a jackpot determination for the first special symbol determines that a jackpot (first result) has occurred and the jackpot special symbol 02 is stopped and displayed, a second jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed without subtracting the number of remaining small jackpots (it remains at two), and then the second number of time-saving rounds (J2) is set to 95 and the remaining number of small jackpots (Z) is set to two, transitioning to the Super Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 03 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is not subtracted (it remains at 2), and a third jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving plays (J2) is set to 95, and the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to 2, transitioning to the Chou Ranbu mode.

In addition, when a jackpot determination for the second special symbol indicates a jackpot (first result) and the special jackpot symbol 11 is stopped and displayed, a fourth jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed without subtracting the number of remaining small jackpots (it remains at 2), and then the second number of time-saving play (J2) is set to 496 and the game transitions to an infinite mode in which the number of remaining small jackpots is set to 2.
In addition, when a jackpot determination for the second special symbol indicates a jackpot (first result) and the special jackpot symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small jackpots is not subtracted (it remains at 2), and a fifth jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed, after which the second number of time-saving rounds (J2) is set to 496, and the remaining number of small jackpots is set to 2, transitioning to an infinite mode.

Furthermore, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 13 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is reduced to 1, but the normal time-saving play state is maintained and a first V jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second time-saving play count (J2) is set to 95 times and the remaining number of small wins is set to 2 times, transitioning to the Chou Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is reduced to 1, but the normal time-saving play state is maintained and a second V jackpot game consisting of 10 rounds of play is executed, after which the second time-saving play count (J2) is set to 95 times and the remaining number of small wins is set to 2 times, transitioning to the Chou Ranbu mode.
In addition, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 15 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is reduced to 1, but the normal time-saving play state is maintained and a third V jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, after which the second time-saving play count (J2) is set to 95 times and the remaining number of small wins is set to 2 times, transitioning to the Chou Ranbu mode.

In this way, when the third jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game) is executed as a result of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol in the normal game state, the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 7 times, and the normal time-saving game state (corresponding to the first specific game state) is controlled to be in which the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times or 95 times, which is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game, is controlled to be in which the normal time-saving game state (corresponding to the second specific game state) is controlled to be in which the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times or 95 times, which is more advantageous to the player than 7 times, as a result of the jackpot game (the jackpot special symbol stopped and displayed) executed as a result, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is a jackpot (first result), a third jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game) can be played, if the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is a minor jackpot (second result), a second V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game) that is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game can be played, and if the result of the jackpot determination for the second special symbol is a jackpot (first result), a fourth or fifth jackpot game (corresponding to the third special game) that is more advantageous to the player than the second V jackpot game can be played. Therefore, the type of jackpot game can be varied depending on the type of special symbol and the type of determination result, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the controlled Ranbu mode or Cho Ranbu mode (specific game state: normal time-saving game state) after the second V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game), which is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game), is executed, if the result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result), the fourth or fifth jackpot game (corresponding to the third special game), which is more advantageous to the player than the second V jackpot game, can be executed, and if the result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a small jackpot (second result), the second V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game) can be executed. Therefore, even if a jackpot determination related to the same second special symbol is performed, the type of jackpot game executed can be changed depending on the type of the determination result, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the infinite mode (specific game state: normal time-saving game state) controlled after the fourth or fifth jackpot game (corresponding to the third special game), which is more advantageous to the player than the second V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game), which is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game), is executed, if the result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result), the fourth or fifth jackpot game (corresponding to the third special game) can be executed, and if the result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a small jackpot (second result), the second V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game) can be executed. Therefore, even if a jackpot determination related to the same second special symbol is performed, the type of jackpot game executed can be made different depending on the type of the determination result, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the game is in the battle mode or the wild dance mode (normal time-saving game mode), if the special jackpot symbol is displayed as the first special symbol and a jackpot game is executed, the game conditions (number of second time-saving games, number of remaining small jackpots, presentation mode, etc.) are ranked up (improved). This makes it possible to increase the value of the jackpot game in the normal time-saving game mode, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when the game is in the battle mode (normal time-saving game state), if a small win special symbol is displayed as the second special symbol and a big win game is executed that requires the game ball to pass through a specific area 53 during the small win game, the game conditions (number of second time-saving games, number of remaining small wins, presentation mode, etc.) are ranked up (improved). This makes it possible to increase the value of the small win game in the normal time-saving game state and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the Chou Ranbu mode (normal time-saving game state), when a jackpot special symbol is displayed as the first special symbol and a jackpot game is executed, and when a small jackpot special symbol is displayed as the second special symbol and a jackpot game is executed on the condition that the game ball passes through a specific area 53 during a winning game, the game conditions (number of second time-saving times, number of remaining small jackpots, presentation mode, etc.) are maintained without being ranked down. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of players being disappointed by a jackpot or small jackpot in the normal time-saving game state, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, regardless of the game mode (normal game mode, normal time-saving game mode), when the jackpot special symbol is displayed as the second special symbol and a jackpot game is executed, the game conditions (number of second time-saving times, number of remaining small jackpots, presentation mode, etc.) are set to the highest rank in the normal time-saving game mode. Therefore, the value of a jackpot with the second special symbol can be increased, and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, when a jackpot special pattern is stopped and displayed as the second special pattern and a jackpot game is executed, the game conditions (number of second time-saving times, number of remaining small wins, presentation mode, etc.) are not ranked at the highest level regardless of the type of jackpot game, but rather, for example, when a fourth jackpot special game is executed, the game conditions may be set to Chou Ranbu mode, and when a fifth jackpot special game is executed, the game conditions may be set to Infinite mode. In this case, the rate at which the fifth jackpot special game is executed may be higher than the rate at which the fourth jackpot special game is executed, or vice versa.

(Main control board general-purpose power control processing)
103, the normal map normal power control process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the normal map normal power control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the normal map normal power processing data, and in step S402, references the branch destination address from the loaded normal map normal power processing data, executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, and ends the current normal map normal power control process.

Specifically, if the normal pattern normal electricity processing data = 0, a normal pattern change process (step S410) is executed to perform a process for executing a change display of the normal pattern based on the reserved memory (normal pattern determination information) and a process for changing the normal pattern normal electricity processing data to "1". Details of the normal pattern change process will be described later.

If the normal map/normal power processing data = 1, auxiliary game processing (step S420) is executed to execute a process for executing an auxiliary game that opens the second starting hole 47 in a predetermined manner, or to change the normal map/normal power processing data to "0", etc.

(Main control board normal pattern change processing)
The normal symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 104. Fig. 104 is a flow chart showing the normal symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal pattern is being displayed in a changing state. If the normal pattern is being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S410-12. If the normal pattern is not being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is 1 or more. If the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S410-3, and if the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal symbol change process is terminated.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a updates the number of reserved normal symbols (G) by subtracting "1", and in step S410-4, shifts the data stored in the reserved normal symbol memory area, shifting the normal symbol determination information stored in the first to fourth memory units to the previous memory unit.

For example, the special map judgment information stored in the fourth memory section of the regular map judgment information holding memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the regular map judgment information holding memory area. In addition, the regular map judgment information stored in the first memory section of the regular map judgment information holding memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the regular map judgment information execution memory area, and the regular map judgment information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

The main CPU 110a performs a win determination process in step S410-5. Specifically, using a win determination table for normal symbols (see FIG. 105(a)), it determines whether or not a win has occurred based on the game state and the win determination random number value stored in the normal symbol execution memory area. Details of the win determination table for normal symbols will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing in step S410-6. Specifically, using a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 105(b)), it determines the stop normal symbol data of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display, based on the game state, the win determination result, and the normal symbol determination random number value. Details of the normal symbol determination table will be described later.

In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol designation command corresponding to the type of normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the normal symbol designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to grasp the stop normal symbol data.

The main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process in step S410-8. Specifically, using a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 105(c)), it determines a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for displaying a normal symbol in a fluctuating manner based on the game state, the win determination result, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number value. Details of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a sets a normal map fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the normal map fluctuation pattern determined in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to grasp the normal map fluctuation pattern.

In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a sets the normal pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-11 starts the normal pattern fluctuation display and ends this normal pattern fluctuation process. As a result, LED lighting data for executing the normal pattern fluctuation display is created in the data creation process of step S700 above, and is output in the output control process of step S800 above, causing the normal pattern fluctuation display to be performed on the normal pattern display 62.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal pattern change time has elapsed. If the change time has not elapsed, the current normal pattern change process is terminated, and if the change time has elapsed, in step S410-13, the change display of the normal pattern is stopped, and in step S410-14, a normal pattern confirmation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the normal pattern confirmation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible to know that the normal pattern has stopped being displayed on the performance control board 130.

In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stopped normal symbol is a winning normal symbol (a winning win). If it is not a winning normal symbol, the current normal symbol variation process is terminated, and if it is a winning normal symbol, in step S410-16, auxiliary game control data for controlling the auxiliary game is obtained from the auxiliary game control table (see FIG. 105(d)). Details of the auxiliary game control table will be described later.

In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of auxiliary game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM. This causes the opening designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to recognize that the opening of the auxiliary game has begun.

In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the auxiliary game control data acquired in step S410-16 of the auxiliary game in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-19, sets the normal symbol/normal power processing data to "1", terminating this normal symbol variation process.

(Winning judgment table for normal symbols)
Figure 105 (a) is a hit determination table for normal symbols that is referenced when determining a hit based on normal symbol determination information obtained based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 105(a), the hit determination table for normal symbols associates the game state when a hit determination is made, the random number value for hit determination, and the result of the hit determination (win, miss), and for reference, the approximate probability of winning is listed in the rightmost column.

A "win" is a judgment result in which the auxiliary game will be executed, and a "lose" is a judgment result in which the auxiliary game will not be executed. Note that the win judgment only includes misses, and there are no special misses (time reduction).

The first feature of the hit determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 105(a) is that the probability (proportion) of a hit being determined is the same regardless of whether the game state is a non-time-saving state (normal game state) or a time-saving state (time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state, special time-saving game state)). By doing this, it is possible to make the player look forward to the execution of the auxiliary game regardless of the game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the winning determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 105(a) is that the winning probability remains constant and does not change depending on the setting value. By doing this, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

The probability (proportion) of determining that a win is made in the normal time-saving play state or the special time-saving play state may be higher than in the non-time-saving play state (normal play state) (generating a normal probability variation). In this case, the probability (proportion) of determining that a win is made in the normal time-saving play state and the special time-saving play state may be the same, or the probability (proportion) of determining that a win is made in the special time-saving play state may be higher than in the normal time-saving play state, or the probability (proportion) of determining that a win is made in the normal time-saving play state may be higher than in the special time-saving play state.

(Normal symbol determination table)
Figure 105 (b) is a normal symbol determination table which is referenced when determining the normal symbol stopping symbol based on the normal symbol determination information obtained based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 105(b), the normal symbol determination table associates the game state when the determination is made, the result of the win determination (win, miss), a random number value for winning symbol determination, the result of the normal symbol determination, stopping normal symbol data indicating this determination result, and a normal symbol designation command indicating the result of the normal symbol determination.

The normal symbol "0" is a losing normal symbol that does not result in an auxiliary game being executed.
The normal symbol "1" is a winning normal symbol that causes an auxiliary game to be executed in which the second starting hole 47 is opened once.
The normal symbol "2" is a winning normal symbol that causes an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 47 is opened twice.

The first feature of the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105(b) is that two types of normal symbols are set that will result in auxiliary games with different numbers of openings of the second starting hole 47. This makes it possible to increase the playability of the auxiliary games and to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105(b) is that the selection rate of normal symbols is constant and does not change depending on the set value. By doing this, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

(Normal map fluctuation pattern determination table)
Figure 105 (c) is a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table which is referenced when determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern based on the normal symbol determination information obtained based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 105(c), the normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table associates the game state when the judgment is made, the judgment result of the hit judgment, the normal map fluctuation pattern random number value, the fluctuation time that is the judgment result of the normal map fluctuation pattern judgment, and the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command that indicates this judgment result.

The first feature of the normal game fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 105(c) is that a relatively long fluctuation time is determined in the non-time-saving state (normal game state), whereas a relatively short fluctuation time is determined in the various time-saving game states (normal time-saving game state, special time-saving game state). In other words, a short fluctuation time is more likely to be determined in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. By doing this, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47 in the various time-saving game states than in the non-time-saving state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 105(c) is that the selection ratio of each normal map fluctuation pattern is the same and does not change depending on the setting value. This makes it difficult to determine the setting value from the normal map fluctuation pattern, making it possible to provide fair play.

(Auxiliary Game Control Table)
FIG. 105(d) is an auxiliary game control table used to control the auxiliary game based on the type of winning normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 105(d), the auxiliary game control table associates the game state when the auxiliary game occurs, the stop map data, the number of times the second start opening 47 is opened, the opening time of the auxiliary game, the first opening time of the second start opening 47, the interval time between openings, the second opening time of the second start opening 47, and the ending time of the auxiliary game.

The first feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 105(d) is that the second start hole 47 is opened for a longer period of time when an auxiliary game is played in various time-saving game states (normal time-saving game state, special time-saving game state) than when an auxiliary game is played in a non-time-saving game state (normal game state). By doing this, it becomes easier for a game ball to enter the second start hole 47 in various time-saving game states than in a non-time-saving game state, making the game more interesting.

The second feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 105(d) is that there is no difference in the performance of the auxiliary game (opening time, the number of times the second start port 47 opens, and the time value for which the second start port 47 opens) in the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state. By doing this, the player has an advantage in any time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. Also, when it is set to generate a special time-saving game state during a normal time-saving game state, since the performance of the time-saving states before and after is the same, it is not necessary to carry out complex control, and it is possible to realize a pure increase in the number of time-saving times.

The third feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 105(d) is that the performance of the auxiliary game in the auxiliary game (opening time, the number of times the second start port 47 opens, and the time value for which the second start port 47 opens) is constant and does not change depending on the setting value. This makes it difficult to detect the setting value from the progress of the auxiliary game, making it possible to provide a fair game.

The performance of the auxiliary game (at least one of the opening time, the number of times the second start opening 47 opens, and the time value for which the second start opening 47 opens) may be made different depending on whether the game is in a normal time-saving game state or a special time-saving game state.

In addition, if the performance of the auxiliary game (at least one of the opening time, the number of times the second start port 47 opens, and the time value for which the second start port 47 opens) is made different depending on whether the game is in the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state, when the special time-saving game state occurs during the normal time-saving game state, the performance of the auxiliary game in the normal time-saving game state may be inherited in the special time-saving game state.

(Main control board external information data creation process)
The external information data creation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 106. Fig. 106 is a flow chart showing the external information data creation process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S720-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 45 or the second start port 47. If there has been no win, the process proceeds to step S720-3, and if there has been a win, in step S720-2, external information data of a start port winning signal indicating that a game ball has entered the start port is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether the changing display of the special pattern has stopped. If the changing display has not stopped (either during the changing display, during the waiting state for customers, or during the jackpot game), the process proceeds to step S720-5. If the changing display has stopped, in step S720-4, external information data of a pattern determination signal indicating that the changing display of the special pattern has stopped is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S720-5 whether or not a jackpot game has started. If a jackpot game has not started, the process proceeds to step S720-7. If a jackpot game has started, in step S720-6, the external information data of a special game signal indicating that a jackpot game state is in progress is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the jackpot game has ended. If the jackpot game has not ended, the process proceeds to step S720-9. If the jackpot game has ended, the process proceeds to step S720-8, where the external information data of the special game signal set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c is cleared.

In step S720-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an advantageous state (including a jackpot game or a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state has started. If an advantageous state has not started, the process proceeds to step S720-11. If an advantageous state has started, in step S720-10, an advantageous state signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the advantageous state has ended. If the advantageous state has not ended, processing proceeds to step S720-13. If the advantageous state has ended, processing proceeds to step S720-12, where the external information data for the advantageous state signal that is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c is cleared.

In step S720-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether frame opening has begun, which opens the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4. If frame opening has not begun, the process proceeds to step S720-15. If frame opening has begun, in step S720-14, external information data for a frame opening signal indicating that the frame is being opened is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not frame opening has finished (the game board mounting frame 3 and glass frame 4 are closed). If frame opening has not finished, processing proceeds to step S720-17, and if frame opening has finished, in step S720-16, the external information data for the frame opening signal set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c is cleared.

In step S720-17, the main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear or a security error (various abnormalities) has occurred. If an RWM clear or security error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S720-19. If an RWM clear or security error has occurred, in step S720-18, the external information data of a security signal indicating that an RWM clear or security error has occurred is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for the payout of a predetermined unit of prize balls (10 in this case) have been met. If the conditions for the payout have not been met, the process proceeds to step S720-21. If the conditions for the payout have not been met, in step S720-20, the external information data of the prize ball schedule signal indicating that the conditions for the payout of a predetermined unit of prize balls have been met is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the payout of a predetermined unit of prize balls (here, 10 balls) has been completed. If the payout of prize balls has not been completed, the current external information data creation process is terminated. If the payout of prize balls has been completed, in step S720-22, the external information data of a prize ball payout signal indicating that the payout of a predetermined unit of prize balls has been completed is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c, and the current external information data creation process is terminated.

The various external information data set in the external information data output area will be output as game information from the various terminals of the game information output terminal board to the outside of the gaming machine 1 by the output control process of step S750 described above.

(Description of Various Signals Output as Game Information)
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the types of various signals output as game information from the various output terminals of the game information output terminal board 90, the output timing of the various signals, and the output period of the various signals.

A start hole entry signal is output from the first terminal for 100 ms when a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47.
A symbol determination signal is output from the second terminal for 500 ms when a special symbol is displayed in a stopped state.
A special game signal is outputted from the third terminal from the start of the big win game through the duration of the big win game.
The fourth terminal is configured to output an advantageous state signal from the start of the advantageous state throughout the duration of the advantageous state.

A frame open signal is output from the fifth terminal from the time when the opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is detected for as long as the frame remains open.
A security signal is output from the sixth terminal for 200 ms from the occurrence of any of the various abnormalities (RWM clear, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality, payout abnormality).
A payout schedule signal is output from the seventh terminal for 100 ms from the time when it is decided to pay out a predetermined number of gaming balls.
A payout completion signal is output from the eighth terminal for 100 ms from the completion of the payout of a predetermined number of game balls.

In this way, the game information is output to the outside of the gaming machine 1 via the game information output terminal board 90, making it possible to monitor the operating status of the gaming machine 1 and perform performance analysis using an information collection device such as a hall computer.

(Main control board performance display data setting process)
The performance display data setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 108. Fig. 108 is a flow chart showing the performance display data setting process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the display switching time counter saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c is a display switching value of "0" in order to determine whether the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is to be switched. If the display switching value is "0", the process proceeds to step S850-2 assuming that the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 will be switched, and if the display switching value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 will not be switched. Note that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the value of the display switching time counter is set to the display switching value of "0".

In step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether a lighting confirmation flag has been saved in the information RWM area to determine whether lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed. If the lighting confirmation flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S850-4 with the intention of displaying the normal base value on the information display 113, and if the lighting confirmation flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S850-3 with the intention of checking whether the information display 113 is lit. Note that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the lighting confirmation flag has not been saved.

In step S850-3, the main CPU 110a determines display data for lighting confirmation to light all segments (including the decimal point) of the four seven-segment displays (113a to 113d) that make up the information display 113.

In step S850-4, the main CPU 110a obtains a normal base value (for display on the information display 113) corresponding to the data selection counter value from a base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is obtained; if the data selection counter value is "1", the normal base value saved in the second area of the base storage area is obtained; if the data selection counter value is "2", the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area is obtained; and if the data selection counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is obtained.

In step S850-5, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown) to determine the display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the information display 113 based on the interval counter value, the number of normal outs indicated by the normal out count counter, and the obtained normal base value.

In step S850-6, the main CPU 110a sets the determined display data in the output data area of the information RWM area as display information for the information display 113. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area in the output control process of step S880 described above is referenced, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. The display information of the information display 113 in each play area will be described later.

In step S850-7, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the display switching time counter described above, and in step S850-8, it determines whether the display switching time counter is greater than an upper limit value (e.g., 5 seconds). If the display switching time counter is not greater than the upper limit value, it is determined that the time to switch the display on the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S850-15. If the display switching time counter is greater than the upper limit value, it is determined that the time to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113 has elapsed, and in step S850-9, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialized).

In step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the above-mentioned lighting confirmation flag is present in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the lighting confirmation flag is present, processing proceeds to step S850-12. If the lighting confirmation flag is not present, in step S850-11, the lighting confirmation flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S850-12, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the data selection counter described above, and in step S85-13, it determines whether the data selection counter is greater than an upper limit (e.g., 3). If it is not greater than the upper limit, it moves to step S850-15, and if it is greater than the upper limit, it clears (initializes) the data selection counter to 0 in step S850-14.

In step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the registers that were saved to the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c during the above-mentioned game ball counting process, and in step S850-16, it restores the game stack pointers that were saved to the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c during the above-mentioned game ball counting process, and ends this performance display data setting process.

In this way, after the gaming machine 1 is powered on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed, all segments of the four seven-segment displays of the information display 113 are lit (lighting confirmation is performed), making it possible to check whether the information display 113 is malfunctioning and which segments are malfunctioning, etc.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence, making it possible to compare the performance information (normal base value) of the most recent four play sections, and to confirm the actual performance of the gaming machine and identify the possibility of fraudulent activity.

(Display information of the information display in each game area)
Next, the display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to Fig. 109. In the table of display information in Fig. 109, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of outs during normal play, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113 includes "bL.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the current play section, "b1.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section one period before, "b2.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section two periods before, and "b3.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section three periods before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 includes "--", which indicates that no normal base value has been calculated; "00", which indicates that the normal base value is "0" or the normal out count is "0"; "01" to "99", which indicate that the normal out count is "1" or greater and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and "99.", which indicates that the normal base value is "100" or greater. Note that if the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information will always be "0" and it will be displayed in two digits.

The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical segment does not change (it is displayed as a lit light) regardless of the play area or the number of outs during normal play, but the display mode of the identification information displayed in the identification segment changes (it is displayed as a flashing light or a lit light) depending on the play area or the number of outs during normal play (whether or not a calculated normal base value is present, and whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth play zones, when displaying the identification information of a play zone in which there is no calculated normal base value, the identification information will be displayed in a blinking manner. In addition, in the second play zone and onwards, when displaying the identification information of the current play zone ("bL."), if the period in which the reliability of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of normal outs is between 0 and 5999), the identification information will be displayed in a blinking manner. In all other cases, the identification information will be displayed in a lit manner.

Here, as an example of the display on the information display 113, if the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, the data selection counter value is "0", and the normal base value stored in the first area of the base memory area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 113 will flash "bL." and the numeric segment will light up and display "35".

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information displayed in the numeric segment does not use the decimal point DP of the seven-segment display, i.e., "00" to "99", whereas when the normal base value is "100" or more, the performance information displayed in the numeric segment uses the decimal point DP of the seven-segment display, i.e., "99.", making it easier to know that the normal base value is abnormal.

Also, when the base value is normally less than "10", a "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numeric segment, resulting in a two-digit display (e.g. "01"), making it possible to effectively use the two seven-segment displays as numeric segments and provide an easy-to-understand display.

In addition, when the normal base value for the current play area is displayed, if the number of normal outs for the current play area is between 0 and 5999, which is not enough to calculate the normal base value, the identification information "bL." displayed in the identification segment will flash, making it easier to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is unreliable information.

In addition, if no normal base value has been calculated, a non-numeric "- - " will be displayed in the numerical segment, making it easier to understand that no normal base value has been calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment.

In addition, rather than executing the game ball counting process, performance information calculation process, and performance display data setting process as information programs, it is also possible to execute one or two of them as game programs (for example, execute the game ball counting process within the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while executing the rest as information programs.

In addition, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display 113 may be executed by the performance program, rather than by the output control process, which is the game program.

In addition, instead of using the out ball detection switch 39a to detect out balls consisting of game balls that have entered the general winning hole 43, the first start hole 45, the second start hole 47, the first large winning hole 50, and the second large winning hole 56, and game balls that have flowed into the out hole 39, the out ball detection switch 39a may be configured to detect only game balls that have flowed into the out hole. In that case, the number of outs (total number of outs, number of outs during normal play) may be incremented by one each time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the first start hole detection switch 45a, the second start hole detection switch 47a, the first large winning hole detection switch 50a, and the second large winning hole detection switch 56a.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after changing settings)
A specific example of initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings will be described with reference to Fig. 110. Fig. 110 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, specific area 53, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty level), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize slot LEDs that illuminate the large prize slots (first large prize slot 50, second large prize slot 56) in a specified manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information displays 69 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and a setting change operation (setting key switch 112a is ON, RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed, the setting change mode is started on the main control board 110, and the state becomes a pre-start state before control of the progress of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the setting change notification described above is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed, the setting change mode and setting change notification are terminated, the initial operation of the various drive sources is started, and the setting value displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and an initial operation notification (display of an initial operation in progress screen, output of an initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is initiated to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the operation of the various drive sources stops and the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the main control board 110 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the main information display 69, and the power-on notification described above begins. In addition, the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the performance control board 130 begins, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are fully lit to begin confirmation of their illumination. Note that when a predetermined period has elapsed, the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 ends.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Example of initial operation of various drive sources after checking the settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources after setting confirmation will be described with reference to Fig. 111. Fig. 111 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources after setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, specific area 53, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty level), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize slot LEDs that illuminate the large prize slots (first large prize slot 50, second large prize slot 56) in a specified manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information displays 69 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and a setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned ON) is performed, the setting confirmation mode is started on the main control board 110, and the state becomes a pre-start state before control of the progress of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed, the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification are ended, the initial operation of the various drive sources is started, and the setting value displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is ended, and an initial operation notification (display of an initial operation in progress screen, output of an initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is started to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

Note that the specific example from timing T3 to timing T10 is the same as the specific example from timing T3 to timing T10 in the specific example of initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings shown in FIG. 115, so a description of it will be omitted here.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies that affect the game outcome (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening opening member 57) are initialized, so that when the game machine 1 (including the case where only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are being initially operated (in the pre-start state), the main information displays 69 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67) except for the status confirmation display 68 are in a non-display (non-operating) state, which prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of a game are initially operated, an initial operation notification is issued to prompt the operator to check the operation of the various drive sources. This notifies the operator (factory worker, game store staff) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, enabling the operator to check the operation appropriately.

In addition, even in the pre-start state before game progress control begins, various drive sources for operating movable objects that affect the game outcome are initialized after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) ends, so there is no need to carry out complex operations such as checking the operation of various drive sources while changing settings (checking settings), and operation checks can be carried out appropriately.

In addition, after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) ends, the operation of the various drive sources for operating the movable objects that affect the outcome of the game begins after an operation standby time has elapsed. This allows for ample time between the end of the setting change (setting confirmation) and the start of the operation check of the various drive sources, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, the same initial operation notification is given regardless of whether the initial operation of the various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome occurs after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, so control of the initial operation notification can be simplified, making it possible to reduce the development costs of the gaming machine 1 (shortening the development period, etc.).

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are being initially operated, the large prize opening LED is kept off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, various initial operations of the drive sources are performed to operate movable bodies that affect the game outcome, and in the playable state in which the game progress control is performed, initial operations of the movable presentation device 73 that do not affect the game outcome are performed. Therefore, two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operations.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operating, no open signal is output even though the first large prize opening 50 and the second large prize opening are open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device, such as a hall computer, which collects information output from the gaming machine 1 collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, from the time the gaming machine is turned on until game progress control begins, the information display 113 does not display the gaming machine's performance information (normal base value) (the display of performance information is restricted), so it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after the game progress control has started, it is possible to check whether the game progress control has started and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, during the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, by not displaying performance information on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d that displays the current setting value, the current setting value can be properly notified, and convenience for the gaming establishment can be ensured.

In addition, during the initial operation of the various drive sources, the information display 113 does not display setting values or performance information of the gaming machine, so that the attention of the employees of the gaming facility can be focused on checking the initial operation of the various drive sources, and it becomes possible to accurately determine the malfunction of the various drive sources.

After the game progress control is started, all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on to check whether they are on or off. However, after the setting change mode or setting check mode, the lighting check may not be performed.

(Operation comparison table)
Using Figure 112, the operation of the various driving sources (second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize port opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize port opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 at various operating timings (initial operation, large prize game operation, small prize game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time-saving game state) is compared.

The number of times the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven is the same during auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state and during initial operation. Therefore, during initial operation, it is possible to check whether the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, which makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the operation check.

The time for one drive of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during initial operation than during auxiliary game operation during normal game mode. Therefore, it is possible to check during initial operation whether or not auxiliary game operation can be performed during normal game mode, which improves the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the total drive time of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is shorter during initial operation than during auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

The driving time of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b is longer during initial operation than during small prize game operation. Therefore, it is possible to check whether the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b can perform a small prize game operation during initial operation, which makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the total drive time of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b is shorter during initial operation than during small prize game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b.

The number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven is greater during initial operation than during small win game operation. Therefore, whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform a small win game operation can be confirmed during initial operation, which makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

In addition, the total drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b is shorter during initial operation than during small win game operation. This makes it possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the flow path switching solenoid 52b.

The total drive time of the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b is shorter during initial operation than during the large prize game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during auxiliary game operation during normal game mode. In this way, it is possible to check during initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform auxiliary game operation during normal game mode, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the number of times the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during auxiliary game operation during normal game play. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second large prize opening/closing solenoid 57b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the number of times the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to check during initial operation whether the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time for one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to a value greater than the number of times the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time for one drive, and the total drive time during auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to check during initial operation whether the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the number of times the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the number of times the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during small prize game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b is capable of performing a small prize game operation during initial operation, which makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b is driven and the total driving time during initial operation may be set to a value greater than the number of times the first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b is driven and the total driving time during small prize game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b can perform a small prize game operation during initial operation, which makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is driven and the total driving time during initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the driving time of one time of the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during small prize game operation. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven, the time required for one drive, and the total drive time during small win game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b is capable of performing a small win game operation during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, at least one of the drive time and the total drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the initial operation may be set to a value greater than the drive time and the total drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the small win game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform the small win game operation during the initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during small win game operation. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the flow path switching solenoid 52b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b is driven, the duration of one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the duration of one drive and the total drive time during a jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). In this way, it is possible to check whether the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b is capable of performing a jackpot game operation during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b is driven, the duration of one drive, and the total drive time during initial operation may be set to a value greater than the duration of one drive and the total drive time during jackpot game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b is capable of performing jackpot game operation during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

(First Modification)
The first modified example of the fifth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to Figures 113 to 116. Note that the first modified example differs from the fifth embodiment in that the RWM clear process continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again, that the drive source initial operation process is performed during the execution of the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, or the RWM clear process, and that the RWM clear is performed during the execution of the setting change process. Therefore, only the differences from the fifth embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 113. Fig. 113 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.
Here, the same reference numerals are used for the parts that are the same as those in the initial setting process of the main control board of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 8, and the description is omitted, and only the different parts and their surroundings will be described.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program). Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, it performs a process to change (update) the setting value (probability of determining a jackpot in the jackpot determination), which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game, and the drive source initial operation process (game program) described above, and then proceeds to step S26.

The main CPU 110a performs an RWM clear process (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, it performs a process to initialize the game control state (initialize everything other than the set value area of the game RWM area) and the drive source initial operation process (game program) described above, and then proceeds to step S26. Details of the RWM clear process will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program). Specifically, it performs a process for displaying the setting value saved in the setting value (during game play) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113, and the drive source initial operation process described above, and then proceeds to step S30.

(Main control board RWM clear processing)
The RWM clear process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 114. Fig. 114 is a flow chart showing the RWM clear process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a sends an RWM clear preparation command to the performance control board 130 and transitions to the RWM clear preparation mode. This causes the performance control board to carry out processing to notify the RWM clear preparation.

"RWM clear preparation notification" refers to displaying a clear preparation screen on the image display device to notify the user that preparation for RWM clear is in progress, and outputting an audio notification from the audio output device 9 for a specified period of time saying "Please press the RWM clear switch again."

The main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (game program) in step S24-2. Specifically, it performs processing to initialize the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are to be operated by the main control board 110 as the game progresses until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. Details of the initial operation of the various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is ON. If an RWM clear approval operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S24-4 to end the RWM clear preparation mode and perform RWM clear; if an RWM clear approval operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S24-2.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) everything in the main RAM 110c except for the setting value area of the gaming RWM area. This initializes the game progress state to the initial state (the state when the gaming machine 1 was shipped), and the data in the gaming RWM area before the RWM was cleared is not carried over.

In step S24-5, the main CPU 110a performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM has been cleared from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a sends an RWM clear command indicating that the game control state has been initialized to the payout control board 120 and the presentation control board 130. This causes the presentation control board 130 to carry out processing to end the RWM clear preparation notification described above.

In step S24-7, the main CPU 110a performs processing to stop the initial operations of various drive sources as the RWM clear preparation mode ends due to the RWM clear approval operation, and then ends this RWM clear processing.

(Specific example of initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing RWM)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing the RWM will be described with reference to Fig. 115. Fig. 115 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing the RWM.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, specific area 53, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty level), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize slot LEDs that illuminate the large prize slots (first large prize slot 50, second large prize slot 56) in a specified manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information displays 69 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and an RWM clear operation (the RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110, and the game goes into a pre-start state before the control of the game progress is started.

At this time, the status confirmation display 68 displays a status confirmation display indicating that preparations are being made to clear the RWM, and the various drive sources start operating (drive sources = ON) as their initial operation. In addition, an RWM clear preparation notification is started to inform the user that preparations are being made to clear the RWM and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (display of the clear preparation screen, alternating output of the notification voice saying "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and the initial operation confirmation voice saying "Please check the operation of the solenoid").

At the time T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

At time T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at time T9 has elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation notification will end, and the operation of the various drive sources will immediately stop (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources will end, and the main control board 110 will transition from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the main information display 69, and the power-on notification described above begins. In addition, the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the performance control board 130 begins, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are fully lit to begin confirmation of their illumination. Note that the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 ends after a predetermined period has elapsed.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, all illumination of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies that affect the game outcome (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening opening member 57) are initialized, so that when the game machine 1 (including the case where only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are being initially operated (in the pre-start state), the main information displays 69 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67) except for the status confirmation display 68 are in a non-display (non-operating) state, which prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of a game are initially operated, a setting change notification is issued to indicate that a setting change is being made and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (a setting confirmation notification is issued to indicate that a setting confirmation is being made and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources). This notifies the worker (factory worker, game store staff) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, enabling the user to check the operation appropriately.

In addition, in the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode), various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are initialized, so there is no need to create multiple pre-start states before game progress control begins, making it possible to reduce the development costs of the gaming machine 1 (shortening development time, etc.).

In addition, when the pre-start state ends with a setting value confirmation operation (confirmation end operation), the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. This means that the initial operation of the various drive sources is not performed to a playable state, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusing the operation of the various drive sources with the operation of the various drive sources according to the progress of the game.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, various initial operations of the drive sources are performed to operate movable bodies that affect the game outcome, and in the playable state in which the game progress control is performed, initial operations of the movable presentation device 73 that do not affect the game outcome are performed. Therefore, two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operations.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are being initially operated, the large prize opening LED is kept off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operating, no open signal is output even though the first large prize opening 50 and the second large prize opening are open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device, such as a hall computer, which collects information output from the gaming machine 1 collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, from the time the gaming machine is turned on until game progress control begins, the information display 113 does not display the gaming machine's performance information (normal base value) (the display of performance information is restricted), so it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after the game progress control has started, it is possible to check whether the game progress control has started and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, during the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, by not displaying performance information on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d that displays the current setting value, the current setting value can be properly notified, and convenience for the gaming establishment can be ensured.

In the setting change notification in the setting change mode, a setting change screen was displayed displaying the text "Settings being changed." However, in addition to the text "Settings being changed," a setting change screen may be displayed displaying the text "Drive source initial operation in progress" or "Check solenoid operation" to encourage visual confirmation of the initial operation of the various drive sources.

(Operation comparison table)
Using Figure 116, the operation of the various driving sources (second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize port opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize port opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 at various operating timings (initial operation, large prize game operation, small prize game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time-saving game state) is compared.

The time for one drive of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during initial operation than during auxiliary game operation during normal game mode. Therefore, it is possible to check during initial operation whether or not auxiliary game operation can be performed during normal game mode, which improves the accuracy of the operation check.

The driving time of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b is longer during initial operation than during small prize game operation. Therefore, it is possible to check whether the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b can perform a small prize game operation during initial operation, which makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the operation check.

The time taken for one drive of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the time taken for one drive during auxiliary game operation during normal game mode. In this way, it is possible to check whether the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform auxiliary game operation during normal game mode during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the time required for one drive of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b during initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the time required for one drive of the auxiliary game operation during normal game mode. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time required for the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b during initial operation.

In addition, the time for one drive of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the time for one drive during auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to check whether the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the time for one drive of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b during initial operation may be set to a value greater than the time for one drive during auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to check during initial operation whether the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the driving time of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the driving time of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b during small prize game operation and the total driving time. In this way, it is possible to check whether the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b can perform a small prize game operation during initial operation, which makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the driving time of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b during initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the driving time of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b during small prize game operation. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b.

In addition, the time for one drive of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the time for one drive of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during small win game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform a small win game operation during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the time for driving the flow path switching solenoid 52b once during initial operation may be set to a value greater than the time for driving the flow path switching solenoid 52b once during small win game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform a small win game operation during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the time for one drive of the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the time for one drive during a jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). In this way, it is possible to check whether the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b can perform a jackpot game operation during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the time for one drive of the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b during initial operation may be set to a value greater than the time for one drive during jackpot game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the second large prize opening opening solenoid 57b can perform a jackpot game operation during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

(Second Modification)
The second modified example of the fifth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to Figures 117 to 118. Note that the second modified example differs from the fifth embodiment in that it does not have a setting change function or a setting confirmation function, does not have the status confirmation indicator 68, and the RWM clear process continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again. Therefore, only the differences from the fifth embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the second modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 117. Fig. 117 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as setting built-in registers in step S12, and performs processing to wait for the startup of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and performance control board 130 to start up so that no commands from the main control board 110 are missed.

In step S14, the main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S15, sends a launch permission command to the payout control board 120. This causes the payout control unit 121 to carry out processing to permit the launch device 26 to launch game balls.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is ON. If an RWM clear operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S23 to transition to the RWM clear preparation mode, and if an RWM clear operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored has been saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S18 assuming that power has been restored, and if the backup flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S23 assuming that power has been turned on for the first time.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S19, determines whether the checksum is normal or not. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S18. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step S20, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step S23 to transition to the RWM clear preparation mode.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and sets the RWM area when power is restored. This returns (restores) the game progress state (control state) to the state before the power was cut off, making it possible to resume gameplay from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration command to the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power outage occurred. This causes the presentation control board 130 to carry out processing to execute a power restoration notification indicating that the game control state has returned to the state before the power outage.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a sends other commands (such as a special symbol storage command and a normal symbol storage command, which will be described later) to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the number of special symbols on hold, and performs processing to display the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the image display device. When this processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S30.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a sends an RWM clear preparation command to the performance control board 130 and transitions to the RWM clear preparation mode. This causes the performance control board 130 to perform processing to notify the RWM clear preparation.

"RWM clear preparation notification" refers to displaying a clear preparation screen on the image display device to notify the user that preparation for RWM clear is in progress, and outputting an audio notification from the audio output device 9 for a specified period of time saying "Please press the RWM clear switch again."

In step S24, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If an RWM clear approval operation has been performed, the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and the RWM is cleared, and processing proceeds to step S25. If an RWM clear approval operation has not been performed, processing in step S24 is repeated.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This initializes the game progress state to the initial state (the state when the gaming machine 1 was shipped), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM was cleared is not carried over.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM has been cleared from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, it performs a process for initializing the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500. Details of the initial operation of the various drive sources will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on command to the payout control board 120 and the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, the non-time-saving game state as the normal game state), and moves processing to step S30. As a result, the presentation control board 130 performs processing to execute a power-on notification indicating that the game control state has been initialized.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S31, starts controlling the progress of the game by allowing all interrupts, and ends this initial setting process.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after clearing RWM)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources after clearing the RWM will be described with reference to Fig. 118. Fig. 118 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources after clearing the RWM.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, specific area 53, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty level), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) in a specified manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and an RWM clear operation (the RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110, and the game goes into a pre-start state before the progress control of the game starts. At this time, the above-mentioned RWM clear preparation notification is started.

When the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed at timing T2, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operation of the various drive sources is started. At this time, an initial operation notification is started to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (display of an initial operation screen and output of an initial operation confirmation voice saying "Please check the operation of the solenoids").

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the operation of the various drive sources stops and the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the main control board 110 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the main information display 69, and the power-on notification described above begins. In addition, the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the performance control board 130 begins, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are fully lit to begin confirmation of their illumination. Note that the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 ends after a predetermined period has elapsed.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies that affect the game outcome (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening opening member 57) are initialized, so that when the game machine 1 (including the case where only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are being initially operated (pre-start state), the main information displays 69 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67) are in a hidden (non-operated) state, which prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of a game are initially operated, an initial operation notification is issued to prompt the operator to check the operation of the various drive sources. This notifies the operator (factory worker, game store staff) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, enabling the operator to check the operation appropriately.

In addition, even in the pre-start state before game progress control begins, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game results are initialized after the RWM clear preparation mode ends, so there is no need to carry out complicated operations such as checking the operation of various drive sources while performing the RWM clear approval operation, and operation checks can be carried out appropriately.

In addition, after the RWM clear preparation mode ends, the operation of various drive sources for operating movable objects that affect the outcome of the game begins after an operation standby period has elapsed. This allows for ample time between the end of the RWM clear approval operation and the checking of the operation of the various drive sources, making it possible to carry out the operation check appropriately.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are being initially operated, the large prize opening LED is kept off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, various initial operations of the drive sources are performed to operate movable bodies that affect the game outcome, and in the playable state in which the game progress control is performed, initial operations of the movable presentation device 73 that do not affect the game outcome are performed. Therefore, two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operations.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operating, no open signal is output even though the first large prize opening 50 and the second large prize opening are open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device, such as a hall computer, which collects information output from the gaming machine 1, collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, from the time the gaming machine is turned on until game progress control begins, the information display 113 does not display the gaming machine's performance information (normal base value) (the display of performance information is restricted), so it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after the game progress control has started, it is possible to check whether the game progress control has started and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, the comparison of the operation of the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 in the second modified example at various operation timings (initial operation, large prize game operation, small prize game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time-saving game state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in Figure 112, so the explanation will be omitted here.

(Third Modification)
The third modified example of the fifth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to Figures 119 to 120. The third modified example differs from the fifth embodiment in that it does not include a setting change function or a setting confirmation function, and that the RWM clear process continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again, and is considered to be a second modified example in that it performs drive source initial operation process during the RWM clear preparation mode.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the third modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 119. Fig. 119 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.
Here, the same reference numerals are used for the parts that are the same as those in the initial setting process of the main control board in the second modified example shown in FIG. 117, and the explanation is omitted, and only the parts that are different are explained.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, it performs a process for initializing the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are operated by the main control board 110 as the game progresses until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. Details of the initial operation of the various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later. When this process ends, the process proceeds to step S25.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If an RWM clear approval operation has been performed, the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and the RWM is cleared, and processing proceeds to step S26. If an RWM clear approval operation has not been performed, processing proceeds to step S24.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs processing to stop the initial operations of various drive sources, and in step S27, initializes (clears to 0) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This initializes the game progress state to the initial state (the state when the gaming machine 1 was shipped), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM was cleared is not carried over.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM has been cleared from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on command to the payout control board 120 and the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, the non-time-saving game state as the normal game state), and moves processing to step S30. As a result, the presentation control board 130 performs processing to execute a power-on notification indicating that the game control state has been initialized.

(Specific example of initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing RWM)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing the RWM will be described with reference to Fig. 120. Fig. 120 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing the RWM.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, specific area 53, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty level), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) in a specified manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and an RWM clear operation (the RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110, and the game goes into a pre-start state before the control of the game progress is started.

At this time, operation (driving source = ON) is started as the initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, an RWM clear preparation notification is started to inform the user that RWM clear preparation is in progress and to prompt the user to check the operation of various driving sources (display of the clear preparation screen, alternating output of the notification voice saying "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and the initial operation confirmation voice saying "Please check the operation of the solenoid").

At the time T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

At time T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at time T9 has elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation notification will end, and the operation of the various drive sources will immediately stop (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources will end, and the main control board 110 will transition from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the main information display 69, and the power-on notification described above begins. In addition, the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the performance control board 130 begins, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are fully lit to begin confirmation of their illumination. Note that the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 ends after a predetermined period has elapsed.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, all illumination of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies that affect the game outcome (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening opening member 57) are initialized, so that when the game machine 1 (including the case where only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are being initially operated (pre-start state), the main information displays 69 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67) are in a hidden (non-operated) state, which prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of a game are initially operated, an RWM clear preparation notification is issued to indicate that preparations for RWM clear are being made and to prompt the operator to check the operation of the various drive sources. This notifies the operator (factory worker, game store staff) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, enabling the operator to check the operation appropriately.

In addition, in the RWM clear preparation mode, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are initially operated, so there is no need to create multiple pre-start states before the game progress control begins, making it possible to reduce the development costs of the gaming machine 1 (shortening the development period, etc.).

In addition, when the RWM clear approval operation is performed and the pre-start state ends, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. This means that the initial operation of the various drive sources is not performed to a playable state, making it possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusing the operation of the various drive sources with the operation of the various drive sources according to the progress of the game.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, various initial operations of the drive sources are performed to operate movable bodies that affect the game outcome, and in the playable state in which the game progress control is performed, initial operations of the movable presentation device 73 that do not affect the game outcome are performed. Therefore, two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operations.

In addition, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are being initially operated, the large prize opening LED is kept off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57, and makes it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operating, no open signal is output even though the first large prize opening 50 and the second large prize opening are open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device, such as a hall computer, which collects information output from the gaming machine 1 collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, from the time the gaming machine is turned on until game progress control begins, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of performance information is restricted), so it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after the game progress control has started, it is possible to check whether the game progress control has started and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

In the RWM clear preparation mode, the RWM clear preparation notification was displayed on a clear preparation screen displaying the text "Preparing to clear RWM", but it would also be possible to display a clear preparation screen displaying the text "Initial operation of drive sources" or "Please check the operation of solenoids" in addition to the text "Preparing to clear RWM", which encourages visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources.

In addition, the comparison of the operation of the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 at various operation timings (initial operation, large prize game operation, small prize game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time-saving game state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in Figure 116, so the explanation will be omitted here.

(Fourth Modification)
The fourth modified example of the fifth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to Figures 121 and 122. Note that the fourth modified example differs from the fifth embodiment in that it does not include a setting change function or a setting confirmation function, and differs from the second modified example in that RWM clear is performed without going through the RWM clear preparation mode. Therefore, only the differences from the fifth embodiment and the second modified example will be described here.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the fourth modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 121. Fig. 121 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.
Here, the same reference numerals are used for the parts that are the same as those in the initial setting process of the main control board in the second modified example shown in FIG. 117, and the explanation is omitted, and only the parts that are different are explained.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This initializes the game progress state to the initial state (the state when the gaming machine 1 was shipped), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM was cleared is not carried over.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM has been cleared from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process for initializing the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are activated by the main control board 110 as the game progresses, for a predetermined period of time. The initial operation of the various drive sources will be described in detail later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on command to the payout control board 120 and the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, the non-time-saving game state as the normal game state), and moves processing to step S30. As a result, the presentation control board 130 performs processing to execute a power-on notification indicating that the game control state has been initialized.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after clearing RWM)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources after clearing the RWM will be described with reference to Fig. 122. Fig. 122 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources after clearing the RWM.

First, at timing T0, the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, specific area 53, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty level), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) in a specified manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and an RWM clear operation (the RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed, the RWM is cleared on the main control board 110, and the game returns to the pre-start state before control of the game progress begins. At this time, an initial operation notification is started (display of an initial operation screen and output of an initial operation confirmation voice saying "Please check the operation of the solenoid") to prompt the user to check the operation of various drive sources.

At the timing of T2, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T3, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T4, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T5, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At time T6, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T7, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T8, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the main control board 110 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the main information display 69, and the power-on notification described above begins. In addition, the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the performance control board 130 begins, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are fully lit to begin confirmation of their illumination. Note that the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 ends after a predetermined period has elapsed.

At timing T9, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies that affect the game outcome (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening opening member 57) are initialized, so that when the game machine 1 (including the case where only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are being initially operated (pre-start state), the main information displays 69 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67) are in a hidden (non-operated) state, which prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of a game are initially operated, an initial operation notification is issued to prompt the operator to check the operation of the various drive sources. This notifies the operator (factory worker, game store staff) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, enabling the operator to check the operation appropriately.

In addition, according to this modified example, after the RWM clear operation, the operation of various drive sources for operating movable objects that affect the outcome of the game is started after an operation standby time has elapsed, so there is enough time between the end of the RWM clear operation and checking the operation of the various drive sources, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are being initially operated, the large prize opening LED is kept off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is performed, various initial operations of the drive sources are performed to operate movable bodies that affect the game outcome, and in the playable state in which the game progress control is performed, initial operations of the movable presentation device 73 that do not affect the game outcome are performed. Therefore, two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operations.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operating, the above-mentioned open signal is not output even though the first large prize opening 50 and the second large prize opening are open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device, such as a hall computer, which collects information output from the gaming machine 1 collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, from the time the gaming machine is turned on until game progress control begins, the information display 113 does not display the gaming machine's performance information (normal base value) (the display of performance information is restricted), so it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after the game progress control has started, it is possible to check whether the game progress control has started and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, the comparison of the operation of the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 at various operation timings (initial operation, large prize game operation, small prize game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time-saving game state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in Figure 112, so the explanation will be omitted here.

(Timing chart when normal time-saving game state occurs)
FIG. 123 is a timing chart when the normal time-saving game state occurs.

First, at timing T1, the display of the special symbols that will result in a jackpot starts to change. At this time, since the game is in normal play mode, all information is collected (counted), such as the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs to calculate the normal base value, and the total number of outs to set the play area.

Next, at the timing of T2, the display of the winning normal symbol begins. This display uses a relatively long normal symbol pattern (change time of 60 or 80 seconds) for the non-time-saving state.

After that, at the timing of T3, the display of the special symbol starts to stop, and at the timing of T4, when the stop time N of the special symbol (0.5 seconds for a jackpot) has elapsed, the jackpot game (opening) starts, the right-hit indicator 67 lights up, and the output of a special game signal indicating that a jackpot game is in progress and an advantageous state signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state starts. In addition, the tallying (counting) of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value stops, and the tallying (counting) of the total number of outs for setting the play period continues (the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value also continue).

Then, at the timing T5, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing T6, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the normal game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a short opening time for the non-time-saving state.

Also, at the timing of T7, the auxiliary game ends and the display of the normal symbols that will become the winning symbols begins. Since this display of the symbols begins during a big win game (low probability non-time-saving game state), the display of the symbols is based on a relatively long normal symbol display pattern (with a display time of 60 or 80 seconds) for the non-time-saving state.

Next, at the timing of T8, the normal symbols start to be displayed in a stopped state, and at the timing of T9, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts. However, because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the big win game, the second start hole 47 opens in a short opening time for the non-time-saving state.

After that, at the timing of T10, the auxiliary game ends and the display of the normal symbols begins. Since this display began during a jackpot game, it is performed in a relatively long normal symbol display pattern for a non-time-saving state. Then, at the timing of T11, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the normal time-saving game state begins and the output of the special game signal is stopped.

In addition, at the timing of T12, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T13, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts. However, because the variable display of the normal symbols started during a jackpot game (low probability non-time-saving game state), the second start hole 47 opens in the short opening time for the non-time-saving state.

Next, at the timing of T14, the auxiliary game ends and the display of the normal symbols that will be the winning symbols begins. This display of the symbols begins during the normal time-saving game mode, so it is performed in a relatively short normal symbol display pattern for the time-saving mode.

After that, at the timing of T15, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T16, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the normal time-saving game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a long opening time for the time-saving state. Then, at the timing of T16, when the auxiliary game ends, the variable display of the normal symbols that will be the winning symbols starts.

Here, we have shown an example where the normal time-saving game state occurs while the normal symbol is changing, but even if the normal time-saving game state occurs while the normal symbol is stopped or during auxiliary play, the next normal symbol will display a relatively short normal symbol change pattern for the time-saving state.

In this way, when the normal time-saving game state occurs, it occurs a predetermined period of time after the special symbol that results in a jackpot has stopped displaying (after the jackpot game ends). This prevents players from gaining an excessive advantage during jackpot play, and ensures a balance of benefits between the gaming establishment and the player.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) occurs, the right-hit indicator 67 is turned on a predetermined period of time before the normal time-saving game state occurs (when the stop time of the losing special symbol has elapsed and the jackpot game, which is a low-probability time-saving game state, begins). This makes it possible to prevent the player from suffering disadvantages related to the occurrence of the normal time-saving game state, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when a normal time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) occurs, the tallying (counting) of the normal payout number and normal out number for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted) a predetermined period of time before the normal time-saving game state occurs (when the stop time of the losing special symbol has elapsed and the jackpot game, which is a low-probability time-saving game state, begins). This makes it possible to calculate an appropriate normal base value, and to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even when the tallying (counting) of the normal payout number and normal out number for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value continue, making it possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when a normal time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) occurs, an advantageous state signal is output from a predetermined period before the normal time-saving game state occurs (at the start of the jackpot game, which is a low-probability time-saving game state). Therefore, an advantageous state signal can be output accurately throughout the advantageous state period, making it possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine externally.

In addition, if a normal time-saving game state occurs during the normal symbol variable display, regardless of whether or not auxiliary play is being performed, the next normal symbol variable display will be displayed using a relatively short normal symbol variable pattern for the time-saving state. This makes it possible to reduce the processing burden by eliminating the need for complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol variable display midway due to the occurrence of the normal time-saving game state.

In addition, if a normal time-saving game state occurs during the execution of an auxiliary game, the next normal symbol change display will be followed by a relatively short normal symbol change pattern for the time-saving state, and the second start opening 47 will open with a long opening time for the time-saving state from the next auxiliary game. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol change display or the auxiliary game control midway due to the occurrence of a normal time-saving game state, which makes it possible to reduce the processing burden.

(Timing chart when the normal time-saving game mode ends)
FIG. 124 is a timing chart showing when the normal time-saving gaming state ends.

First, at timing T1, the display of the special symbols that will be the final round in the normal time-saving play state, that is, the display of the special symbols that will be the losing symbols, begins. At this time, since the normal time-saving play state is in effect, the right-hit indicator 67 is lit and an advantageous state signal is being output. Also, since the normal time-saving play state is in effect, the information collection (counting) of the normal payout number and normal out number for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), while the information collection (counting) of the total out number for setting the play period is being executed.

Next, at the timing of T2, the display of the winning normal symbol begins. Because this display begins during the normal time-saving game mode, it is performed in a relatively short normal symbol display pattern for the time-saving mode.

Then, at the timing T3, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing T4, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the normal time-saving game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a long opening time for the time-saving state.

After that, at the timing of T5, when the auxiliary game ends, the display of the normal winning symbols begins. Because this display of the symbols begins during the time-saving mode, it is done in a relatively short normal symbol display pattern for the time-saving mode.

In addition, at the timing of T6, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T7, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the normal time-saving game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a long opening time for the time-saving state.

Next, at the timing of T8, when the auxiliary game ends, the display of the normal winning symbols begins. Because this display of the symbols begins during the normal time-saving game state, it is performed in a relatively short normal symbol display pattern for the time-saving game state. Then, at the timing of T9, when the display of the special symbols begins, the normal time-saving game state ends and the normal game state begins, the right-hit indicator 67 goes out, and the output of the advantageous state signal stops. Also, because the game is now in the normal game state, the tallying (counting) of the normal payout number and the normal out number for calculating the normal base value resumes. Also, the display of the normal symbols begins to stop.

After that, at the timing of T10, the stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed and the auxiliary game starts, but because the variable display of the normal symbol has started during the normal time-saving game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a long opening time for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the auxiliary game ends, the display of the normal winning symbols begins. Because this display of the symbols begins during normal game play, the display of the symbols is based on a relatively long normal symbol display pattern (the display time is 60 or 80 seconds) for non-time-saving modes.

After that, at the timing of T12, when the stop time M of the special symbol (8.0 seconds when the time-saving feature ends) has elapsed, the display of the next losing special symbol begins. Then, at the timing of T13, the display of the stopped normal symbol is revealed, and at the timing of T14, when the stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed, the auxiliary game begins; however, because the display of the normal symbol began during the normal game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a long opening time for the non-time-saving state. Then, at the timing of T15, when the auxiliary game ends, the display of the normal symbol beginning to change, which is the winning symbol, begins.

Here, we have shown an example in which the normal time-saving game state ends while a normal symbol is stopped and displayed, but even if the normal time-saving game state ends while a normal symbol is changing or during auxiliary play, the next normal symbol will change and a relatively long normal symbol change pattern (change time is 60 or 80 seconds) for non-time-saving state will be displayed.

In addition, when the special symbols change and are displayed a specified number of times after the start of the normal time-saving play state, the losing special symbol is displayed stationary, and the normal time-saving play state ends. The right-hit indicator 67 goes out, the output of the advantageous state signal stops, and the tallying (counting) of the normal payout number and the normal out number for calculating the normal base value is resumed.

In this way, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times since the start of the normal time-saving game state, the normal time-saving game state that is advantageous to the player ends. This ensures a balance of profits between the gaming facility and the player, and provides players with unprecedented gameplay in the normal time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving play state, the normal time-saving play state ends and the right-hit display 67 goes out. This makes it possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantages related to the end of the normal time-saving play state, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times since the start of the normal time-saving game state, the normal time-saving game state ends and the tallying (counting) of the normal payout number and the normal out number for calculating the normal base value is resumed. Therefore, the appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving game state, the normal time-saving game state ends and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately throughout the advantageous state period, making it possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine externally.

In addition, if the normal time-saving game state ends while the normal symbol is being displayed, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is being played, the next normal symbol will be displayed in a relatively long normal symbol display pattern for the non-time-saving state. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol display when the normal time-saving game state ends.

In addition, if a normal time-saving game state occurs during the execution of an auxiliary game, the next normal symbol change display will be followed by a relatively long normal symbol change pattern for the time-saving state, and the second start opening 47 will open with a short opening time for the non-time-saving state from the next auxiliary game. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol change display or the auxiliary game control midway due to the occurrence of a normal time-saving game state, which makes it possible to reduce the processing burden.

(Timing chart from before the start of the special time-saving game state to after it ends)
FIG. 125 is a timing chart showing the period from before the start to the end of the special time-saving game state when the varying display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times (500 times).

First, at the timing of T1, when a predetermined condition is met (RWM clear is executed, the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0), the display of the special symbol that will be a losing symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) begins. Also, at the timing of T2, the display of the normal symbol that will be a winning symbol begins. In this display of fluctuations, a relatively long normal symbol fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time of 60 or 80 seconds) for the non-time-saving state is displayed.

After that, at the timing of T3, when the display of the special symbol starts, a special time-saving game state starts regardless of whether the player is in a waiting state or not, the right-hit indicator 67 lights up, and the output of an advantageous state signal that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state starts. Also, since the special time-saving game state has started, the tallying (counting) of the normal payout number and the normal out number for calculating the normal base value stops (interrupts), and the tallying (counting) of the total out number for setting the game period continues (the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value also continue).

Then, at the timing of T4, when the stop time N of the special symbol (normally 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the display of the losing special symbol begins to change.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T6, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the normal game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a short opening time for the non-time-saving state.

Next, at the timing of T7, the auxiliary game ends and the display of the normal symbols that will be the winning symbols begins. This display of the symbols begins during the special time-saving game state, so it is performed in a relatively short normal symbol display pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing T8, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing T9, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts. However, because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the special time-saving game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a long opening time for the time-saving state. Also, the stopped display of the losing special symbols starts.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time N of the special symbol (0.5 seconds for a loss) has elapsed, the display of the next losing special symbol begins. At the timing of T11, the auxiliary game ends and the display of the normal symbol, which will be the winning symbol, is revealed. This display of the change is performed in a relatively short normal symbol change pattern for the time-saving state, because it was started during the special time-saving game state.

After that, at the timing of T12, the display of the special symbols that will be the last in the special time-saving game state, that is, the display of the special symbols that will be the losing symbols, begins. Also, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but because the display of the normal symbols was started during the special time-saving game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a long opening time for the time-saving state.

Next, at the timing of T13, the auxiliary game ends and the display of the normal symbols that will be the winning symbols begins. This display of the symbols begins during the special time-saving game state, so it is performed in a relatively short normal symbol display pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T14, the stopped display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T15, when the stopped time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but because the variable display of the normal symbols started during the special time-saving game state, the second start hole 47 opens with a long opening time for the time-saving state.

In addition, at the timing of T16, when the stop display of the losing special symbol (M for the final variation of the time-saving mode) starts, the special time-saving mode ends and the normal mode starts, the right-hit indicator 67 goes out, and the output of the advantageous mode signal stops. Also, since the normal mode has started, the counting of the normal payout number and the normal out number for calculating the normal base value resumes.

Furthermore, at the timing of T17, the auxiliary game ends and the display of the normal symbols that will result in a win begins. This display of the symbols begins during the normal game mode (non-time-saving mode), so it is performed in a relatively long normal symbol display pattern for the non-time-saving mode.

In addition, at the timing of T18, when the stop time M of the losing special symbol (8.0 seconds for the final time-saving change) has elapsed, the display of the changing special symbol that will be the losing symbol begins, and at the timing of T19, the display of the losing special symbol begins to stop.

Then, at the timing of T20, the display of the special symbols that will result in a loss begins. Also, when the auxiliary play ends, the display of the normal symbols that will result in a win begins. This display of the symbols begins during the normal play state (non-time-saving state), so it is performed in a relatively long normal symbol display pattern for the non-time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T21, when the stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but because the variable display of the normal symbol has started during the normal game state, the second start hole 47 opens in the short opening time for the non-time-saving state.

Here, we have shown an example in which a special time-saving game state begins while a normal symbol is changing, but even if a special time-saving game state occurs while a normal symbol is stopped or during auxiliary play, the next normal symbol will start changing and a relatively short normal symbol change pattern for the time-saving state will be displayed.

Also, although an example was given in which the special time-saving game state ended while the auxiliary game was being played, even if the special time-saving game state ended while the normal symbol was changing or the normal symbol was still displayed, the next normal symbol change display will be followed by a relatively long normal symbol change pattern for the non-time-saving state.

In addition, although an example was given in which the special symbol change display that is the final time in the special time-saving game state is a miss, even if it is a small win, the next normal symbol change display will be a relatively long normal symbol change display for non-time-saving game states.

In this way, when the losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times (500 times) after the establishment of a specified condition (executing RWM clear, clearing the variable number of times based on the end of the jackpot game) a special time-saving game state advantageous to the player is generated (initiated) regardless of whether or not the player is in a waiting state for customers. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with unprecedented gameplay in which a time-saving state occurs even when the player has lost, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when the special symbol is displayed as a stop (the stop time starts) as a result of the special symbol changing display a prescribed number of times (500 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (executing RWM clear, clearing the number of changing times based on the end of the jackpot game), a special time-saving game state occurs (starts) and the right-hit display 67 lights up. This makes it possible to prevent the player from suffering disadvantages related to the occurrence of the special time-saving game state, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the special symbol is displayed frozen (the freeze time begins) as a result of the special symbol changing display a prescribed number of times (500 times) after a specified condition is met (the RWM is cleared, the number of changes based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0), a special time-saving game state occurs (starts) and the counting of the normal payout number and the normal out number for calculating the normal base value is stopped; in other words, the calculation of the normal payout number and the normal out number continues until just before the special time-saving game state occurs. This makes it possible to calculate an appropriate normal base value, and to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even when the counting of the normal payout number and normal out number for calculating the normal base value is stopped, the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value continue, making it possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when the special symbol is displayed as a stop (the stop time starts) as a result of the special symbol changing display a specified number of times (500 times) after a specified condition is met (the RWM is cleared, the number of changes is cleared to 0 based on the end of the jackpot game), a special time-saving game state occurs (starts) and an advantageous state signal is output. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately throughout the advantageous state period, making it possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine externally.

In addition, if a special time-saving game state occurs during the display of normal symbols, regardless of whether or not auxiliary play is being performed, the display of the next normal symbol will be based on a relatively short normal symbol display pattern for the time-saving state. This makes it possible to reduce the processing burden by eliminating the need for complex processing such as changing the control of the display of normal symbols midway due to the occurrence of a special time-saving game state.

In addition, if a special time-saving game state occurs during the execution of an auxiliary game, the next normal symbol change display will be followed by a relatively short normal symbol change display for the time-saving state, and the second start opening 47 will open with a long opening time for the time-saving state from the next auxiliary game. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol change display or the auxiliary game control midway due to the occurrence of a special time-saving game state, which makes it possible to reduce the processing burden.

In addition, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the changing display of the special symbol in the final round (750th round) during the special time-saving game state, the special time-saving game state that is advantageous to the player ends. This ensures a balance of profits between the gaming facility and the player, and provides players with unprecedented gameplay in the special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the changing display of the special symbol in the final round (750th round) in the special time-saving game state, the special time-saving game state ends and the right-hit display 67 goes out. This makes it possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantages in connection with the end of the special time-saving game state, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the final (750th) variation of the special symbol during the special time-saving game state, the special time-saving game state ends and the counting of the normal payout number and normal out number for calculating the normal base value resumes; in other words, the calculation of the normal payout number and normal out number resumes from the end of the special time-saving game state. This allows the calculation of an appropriate normal base value, and makes it possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when a losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the changing display of the special symbol in the final round (750th round) in the special time-saving game state, the special time-saving game state ends and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately throughout the advantageous state period, making it possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine externally.

In addition, if the special time-saving game state ends while the normal symbol is being displayed, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is being played, the next normal symbol will be displayed in a relatively long normal symbol display pattern for non-time-saving states. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol display when the special time-saving game state ends.

In addition, if a special time-saving game state occurs during the execution of an auxiliary game, the next normal symbol change display will be followed by a relatively long normal symbol change pattern for the time-saving state, and the second start opening 47 will open with a short opening time for the non-time-saving state from the next auxiliary game. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complex processing such as changing the control of the normal symbol change display or the auxiliary game control midway due to the occurrence of a special time-saving game state, which makes it possible to reduce the processing burden.

The losing special symbol that is displayed as a result of the special symbol changing display a specified number of times (500 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (executing RWM clear, clearing the number of changes to 0 based on the end of the jackpot game) may be displayed for a longer period than the normal stopping time (0.5 seconds). In this way, the length of the stopping time can make the player aware that a special time-saving game state has occurred, and time can be secured to create the effect of a special time-saving game state occurring, making the game more interesting.

In addition, if the losing special symbol that is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times (500 times) is displayed for a period longer than the normal stop time, a presentation may be executed that suggests that a special time-saving game state will occur during the stop time. In this way, the occurrence of the special time-saving game state can be immediately notified to the player, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the production control section)
The main processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 126. Fig. 126 is a flowchart of the main processing in the performance control unit 130m.

First, the sub-CPU 130a disables all interrupts in step E1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting internal registers in step E2, and allows access to the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c in step E3.

In step E4, the sub-CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub-RAM 130c, in step E5 it starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step E6 it enables all interrupts.

In step E7, the sub-CPU 130a performs a sub-random number update process. Specifically, it performs a process to update the various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interruption process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 127. Fig. 127 is a flowchart of the timer interruption process in the performance control unit 130m. This timer interruption process is executed by inputting a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generating circuit provided in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E100, the sub-CPU 130a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area of the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c, and in step E200, performs timer update processing. Specifically, it performs processing to update various timer counters required for the execution of the performance.

In step E300, the sub-CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing to analyze the commands (sent from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the receive buffer in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Details of the command analysis processing will be described later.

The sub-CPU 130a performs customer waiting control processing in step E400. Specifically, in a customer waiting state where no special symbol variation display or special games (big win game, small win game) are being executed, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether or not the customer waiting time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed, and performs processing to execute a customer waiting demo performance to stimulate the player's desire to play based on the elapse of the customer waiting time.

In step E500, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing for executing the operation-based presentation. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a executes a promotion presentation that prompts the player to operate the presentation button 17 during a valid period that occurs during the variable presentation, and executes a jackpot advance presentation of the operation-based presentation that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot game being played (provides the player with the expectation that a jackpot game will be played) in response to the operation of the presentation button 17 during this valid period.

There are four types of "operation-related jackpot prediction effects": line prediction effects that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot game being played based on the type of line or display mode displayed on the image display device; roulette prediction effects that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot game being played based on the result of a roulette played on the image display device; cut-in prediction effects that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot game being played based on the type of cut-in image or display mode displayed on the image display device; and winning/losing determination effects that suggest whether or not a special game will be played based on a success effect where the likelihood of a jackpot game being played is 100% or a failure effect where the likelihood of a jackpot game being played is 0%.

In step E600, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing for executing a lamp light-emitting effect. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing for executing a lamp light-emitting effect that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot game being played by changing the light-emitting state of the start-gate lamp 75 in response to changes in the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the display state of the icon.

In step E700, the sub-CPU 130a performs a presentation mode update process. Specifically, it determines whether or not an update condition (change in game state, winning a mode update lottery, execution of a SP/SPSP reach presentation that results in a loss, etc.) for the presentation mode (presentation stage) that specifies the presentation elements (background image, presentation image, presentation sound, etc.) in the sound output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc., has been met, and if the update condition has been met, it performs a process to update the presentation mode to one of the multiple presentation modes.

The "presentation modes" include presentation modes A to C and countdown mode, which are set in the normal gameplay state (non-time-saving gameplay state), and battle mode, wild dance mode, super wild dance mode, infinite mode, etc., which are set in the normal time-saving gameplay state. Note that the presentation mode that is first set when the game is controlled to the normal gameplay state when the power is turned on (for example, after changing the settings, clearing the RWM, checking the settings, etc.) is always presentation mode A, and the presentation mode that is first set when the game is controlled to the time-saving game state when the power is turned on is either battle mode, wild dance mode, super wild dance mode, or infinite mode.

"Presentation modes A to C" are presentation modes that are set when the normal special chart change pattern determination table 1 shown in Figure 86 is selected (when there is no jackpot history or there is a jackpot history and the number of changes until the special time-saving game state is started is 51 or more).
The "countdown mode" is a presentation mode that is set when the normal special chart change pattern determination table 2 shown in Figure 86 (b) is selected (when there is a jackpot history and the number of changes until the special time-saving game state is started is 50 or less).

The "entering battle mode" is a presentation mode that is set when the special chart change pattern determination table 1 or 2 for normal time-saving play shown in Figure 87 is selected (when the game is in a normal time-saving play state in which 7 times is selected as the second time-saving number of times).
The "Ranbu mode" is a presentation mode that is set when the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 3 or 4 for normal time-saving shown in FIG. 88 is selected (when the normal time-saving game state is in which 55, 95 or 496 times is selected as the second time-saving number of times and the remaining number of small wins is 1 (including the case where this has been subtracted to 1)), or when the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for special time-saving shown in FIG. 91 is selected (when the special time-saving game state is in which 750 times is selected as the second time-saving number of times and the remaining number of small wins has been subtracted to 1).

The "Super Ranbu Mode" is a presentation mode that is set when the special chart change pattern determination table 5 or 6 for normal time-saving play shown in Figure 89 is selected (when the normal time-saving play state has 95 times selected as the second time-saving play count and the remaining number of small wins is 2).
The "infinite mode" is a presentation mode that is set when special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 7 or 8 for normal time-saving shown in FIG. 90 is selected (when the normal time-saving game state has 496 times selected as the second time-saving number of times and the remaining number of small wins is 2), or when special chart fluctuation pattern determination table 1 or 2 for special time-saving shown in FIG. 91 is selected (when the special time-saving game state has 750 times selected as the second time-saving number of times and the remaining number of small wins is 2).

The sub-CPU 130a performs special time-saving effect processing in step E750. Specifically, it performs processing such as judging whether or not to execute special time-saving effect processing to suggest information related to the occurrence of a special time-saving game state (such as an RWM clear negation effect indicating that the RWM has not been cleared (is stationary), which will be described later, and an activation counter display indicating the number of times the game will change before entering a special time-saving game state). Details of the special time-saving effect processing will be described later.

In step E800, the sub-CPU 130a performs output control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to transmit various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the general control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E900, the sub-CPU 130a restores the registers that were saved to the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c in step E100 described above, and ends this timer interrupt process.

(Command analysis process of the production control unit)
The command analysis process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 128. Fig. 128 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process proceeds to step E302; if a command has not been received, the current command analysis process is terminated.

In step E302, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting change command. If it is a setting change command, the process proceeds to step E303. If it is not a setting change command, the process proceeds to step E304.

In step E303, the sub-CPU 130a performs a setting change notification process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in a transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the setting change notification.

In step E304, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting confirmation command. If it is a setting confirmation command, the process proceeds to step E305. If it is not a setting confirmation command, the process proceeds to step E306.

In step E305, the sub-CPU 130a performs a setting check notification process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-mentioned setting check notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the setting check notification.

In step E306, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on command or a power restoration command. If it is a power-on command or a power restoration command, the process proceeds to step E307. If it is not a power-on command or a power restoration command, the process proceeds to step E308.

In step E307, the sub-CPU 130a performs a power-on notification process. Specifically, if the received command is a power-on command, the sub-CPU 130a sets a notification command for executing the above-mentioned power-on notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the received command is a power restoration command, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification command for executing the above-mentioned power restoration notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the power-on notification or power restoration notification, and processing is performed to execute an initial operation for operating the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) in a predetermined manner and an initial light emission for emitting light from the board lighting device 74 in a predetermined manner.

In step E308, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an error-related command. If it is an error-related command, the process proceeds to step E309. If it is not an error-related command, the process proceeds to step E310.

"Error-related designation commands" include commands for designating unrecoverable errors, commands for designating improper winning errors, commands for designating abnormal winning errors, commands for designating magnetic errors, commands for designating radio wave errors, commands for designating the start of door opening errors, commands for designating the end of door opening errors, and commands for designating operational errors.

The sub-CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, it performs processing to set a notification instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c in order to execute an error notification (unrecoverable error notification, improper winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door open error notification, operation error notification, etc.) according to the type of error specification command received. As a result, the notification instruction command is sent to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute various types of error notifications.

In step E310, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a game state designation command. If it is a game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E311. If it is not a game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E312.

In step E311, the sub-CPU 130a performs a game state setting process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to update the game state stored in the sub-RAM 130c to a game state corresponding to the game state designation command.

In step E312, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol storage command. If it is a special symbol storage command, the process proceeds to step E313. If it is not a special symbol storage command, the process proceeds to step E314.

In step E313, the sub-CPU 130a performs a reserved number update process. Specifically, it performs a process of setting a performance instruction command to update the reserved number of special drawings stored in the sub-RAM 130c and increase or decrease the reserved icons displayed on the image display device in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process is performed to increase or decrease the reserved icons displayed on the image display device.

In step E314, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a look-ahead command. If it is, the sub-CPU 130a sets the received look-ahead command (special chart planned variation pattern) in a look-ahead memory area of the sub-RAM 130c (described later) and then proceeds to step E315. If it is not, the sub-CPU 130a proceeds to step E318.

The "look-ahead memory area" is divided into a first look-ahead memory section for sequentially storing look-ahead information (such as a planned special chart change pattern) based on a first look-ahead designation command, a second look-ahead memory section for sequentially storing pending information based on a second look-ahead designation command, and a memory section (the 0th memory section) for storing look-ahead information corresponding to the change display (change performance) currently being executed, and the first look-ahead memory section and the second look-ahead memory section are each divided into the 1st to 4th memory sections.

The first to fourth memory sections of the first look-ahead memory section correspond to the first to fourth memory sections of the first special symbol determination information reservation memory area described above, respectively, and when the first look-ahead designation command is received, the look-ahead information is stored in the memory section corresponding to the first reservation number. The look-ahead information stored in each memory section is moved (shifted) to the memory section with the next lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth memory sections of the second look-ahead memory section correspond to the first to fourth memory sections of the second special symbol determination information reservation memory area described above, respectively, and when a second look-ahead designation command is received, the look-ahead information is stored in the memory section corresponding to the second reservation number. The look-ahead information stored in each memory section is moved (shifted) to the memory section with the next lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol is executed.

This memory unit (the 0th memory unit) corresponds to the special pattern determination information execution memory area described above, and when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the pre-reading information moved (shifted) from the first memory unit of the first pre-reading memory unit is stored, and when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the pre-reading information moved (shifted) from the first memory unit of the second pre-reading unit is stored.

In step E315, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine whether or not to execute an icon change effect that suggests the expectation (possibility) of a special game being executed by displaying the pending icon or the icon displayed on the image display device in a special display mode (special icon, specific icon) that is different from the normal display mode (normal icon), and the effect mode of the icon change effect to be executed. Details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process for determining the light-emitting effect to be used when a winning ball enters the starting hole. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process for determining whether or not to perform a light-emitting effect when a winning ball enters the starting hole, the light-emitting effect indicating the likelihood of a special game being played by illuminating the top lamp 10b located at the top center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 in a special light-emitting mode different from the normal light-emitting mode, and the mode of the light-emitting effect to be performed when a winning ball enters the starting hole.

In step E317, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of determining the look-ahead continuous performance. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead continuous performance that creates the expectation that a jackpot game will be played (indicates the possibility that a jackpot game will be played) by executing a predetermined performance over the variable display (variable performance) of one or more special symbols, and determines the type of look-ahead continuous performance to be executed, and performs a process of setting a performance instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to execute the look-ahead continuous performance. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process is performed to execute the look-ahead continuous performance. The details of the look-ahead continuous performance determination process will be described later.

In step E318, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E319. If it is not a special symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E320.

In step E319, the sub-CPU 130a performs a pattern data determination process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine the effect patterns to be displayed on the image display device as a result of the variable effect, i.e., the arrangement (combination) of the effect patterns to be displayed on a predetermined pay line.

In step E320, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special chart variation pattern designation command. If it is a special chart variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E321. If it is not a special chart variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E325.

In step E321, the sub-CPU 130a performs a variable performance pattern determination process. Specifically, based on the contents of the received special chart variable pattern designation command, the variable performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the variable performance executed by the performance device including the image display device, is determined, and a performance instruction command indicating the variable performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the variable performance. The variable performance pattern determination process will be described in detail later.

In step E322, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process for determining the big win preview effect. Specifically, based on the variable presentation pattern determined in step E321, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute a big win preview effect that suggests the likelihood of a special game being played (to generate anticipation that a big win game will be played), and the presentation mode (pattern) of the big win preview effect to be executed, and sets execution information for the big win preview effect in a specified area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E323, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon display mode update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to start the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process in step E315, and to change the display mode of the pending icon or the icon that is already displayed.

In step E324, the sub-CPU 130a performs a look-ahead continuous performance execution process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a performance instruction command for starting the look-ahead continuous performance determined in the look-ahead continuous performance determination process in step E317 or for changing the performance mode in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead continuous performance.

In step E325, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a pattern determination command. If it is a pattern determination command, the process proceeds to step E326. If it is not a pattern determination command, the process proceeds to step E327.

In step E326, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of stopping the effect symbols. Specifically, the process performs a process of setting an effect instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to stop the display of the effect symbols that are in a temporarily stopped state and end the variable effect. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process of ending the variable effect is performed.

In step E327, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special game command. If it is a special game command, the process proceeds to step E328. If it is not a special game command, the sub-CPU 130a ends the current command analysis process.

"Special game designation commands" include a big win opening designation command, a big win round designation command, a big win ending designation command, a small win opening designation command, a small win ending designation command, etc.

In step E328, the sub-CPU 130a performs a special game performance determination process. Specifically, in the case of an opening designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining an opening performance for a big win game or a small win game and executing the opening performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. In the case of a round designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining a round performance for a round game and executing the round performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. In the case of an ending designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining an ending performance for a big win game or a small win game and executing the ending performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current command analysis process is terminated. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the opening performance, round performance, or ending performance.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 129. Fig. 129 is a flowchart showing the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E315-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead command received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, determines whether or not the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed. If the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E315-3. If the current time is not a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E315-7, assuming that the icon change performance based on the currently received look-ahead command will not be performed.

The "period during which the icon change effect can be executed" refers to a period during which a jackpot game is not being played, a normal game state is being played when a look-ahead command based on a win at the first start port 45 is received, and a time-saving game state (specific game state) is being played when a look-ahead command based on a win at the second start port 47 is received, etc.

In step E315-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a change scenario in the advance pending (pending memory corresponding to the previously received look-ahead specification command), that is, whether or not a change scenario has been set in the look-ahead information storage area. If there is a change scenario, the process proceeds to step E315-7 assuming that the icon change performance based on the currently received look-ahead specification command will not be executed, and if there is no change scenario, the process proceeds to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub-CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and in step E315-5, selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 130) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

In step E315-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 106, and determines one of the multiple final icon display modes based on the type of start-gate winning designation command and the selection rate (%) of each final icon display mode.

In step E315-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E315-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a special icon (either a blue icon, a red icon, or a rainbow icon) that executes an icon change performance. If it is a special icon that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E315-9, and if it is not a display mode that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E315-12.

In step E315-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 131) for determining the change scenario of the icon change presentation. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the reserved icon appears to when it disappears.

In step E315-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the read-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the reserved memory number counter. Specifically, the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 107 is referenced, and one change scenario is determined from among multiple change scenarios based on the final icon display state, the reserved memory number of special symbols corresponding to the start-gate winning designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario.

In step E315-11, the sub-CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the display mode of the icon that is first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), from the determined change scenario, sets the icon display command for that winning icon in the transmission buffer, and ends this icon change presentation determination process.

As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon in a display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), and a predetermined sound effect (a first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, and a second winning sound when displayed as a special icon or a specific icon) is output.

In step E315-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which no icon change performance is performed, and sets this in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the pending memory number counter.

In step E315-13, the sub-CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer and ends the icon change presentation determination process. This causes the icon display command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a reserved icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of this embodiment, an icon change effect (pending icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the advance hold, but an icon change effect may be executed when the advance hold does not perform a reach effect, and an icon change effect may not be executed when the advance hold performs a reach effect. In this way, no change in the display mode of the pending icon occurs during the change effect corresponding to the advance hold in which a reach effect is executed, and a change in the display mode of the pending icon occurs during the change effect corresponding to the advance hold in which a reach effect is not executed, so that the icon change effect will not hinder the reach effect, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, even if the advance holds include one that performs a reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) when the advance holds do not include one that performs a reach effect than when the advance holds include one that performs a reach effect.

In addition, when a look-ahead command for the second special symbol is received during the time-saving play state, an icon change effect is executed, but it is also possible not to execute the icon change effect even when a look-ahead command for the second special symbol is received during the time-saving play state. In this case, the icon may be displayed but the icon change effect may not be executed, or the icon itself may not be displayed and the icon change effect may not be executed.

(Icon Final Display Mode Determination Table)
FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table which is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the type of look-ahead command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode, and for reference, the performance content of the planned change pattern corresponding to the look-ahead command is also listed.

The final icon display modes are set to normal icons (white icons) that do not indicate the likelihood of a big or small win, and special icons (blue icons, red icons, rainbow icons) that indicate the likelihood of a big or small win. The likelihood of a big or small win associated with the special icons increases in the following order: (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon (guaranteed big win).

The first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 130 is that when the look-ahead designation command indicates a big win, a rainbow icon may be determined as the icon final display mode, whereas when the look-ahead designation command indicates a small win, a rainbow icon is not determined as the icon final display mode. By doing this, players will not be given false joy when they receive a small win when it is not yet certain that a big win game will be played, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

The second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 130 is that the percentage of times a red icon is determined when the pre-read designation command for the second special symbol, which is sent only during the time-saving game mode, indicates a big win, compared to the percentage of times a red icon is determined when the pre-read designation command indicates a small win. By doing this, it is possible to differentiate between a big win and a small win, which is not confirmed to result in a big win game, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

When the look-ahead command indicates a small win, the rainbow icon is not determined as the final icon display mode. However, in this embodiment, as long as the game ball is hit to the right, there is a nearly 100% chance that the game ball will pass through the specific area 53 and a big win game will be executed, so the rainbow icon may be determined as the final icon display mode. This can increase the player's awareness of the small win game and make the game more interesting.

In addition, if the rainbow icon is determined when the pre-read designation command for the second special symbol, which is sent only during the time-saving play state, indicates a small win, it is preferable to make the rate at which the rainbow icon is determined to indicate a big win higher than the rate at which the rainbow icon is determined to indicate a small win.

(Change Scenario Decision Table)
FIG. 131 shows a variation scenario determination table which is referred to when determining a variation scenario.

The change scenario determination table associates the final display mode of the icon, the reserved number of special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected, and for reference, the prior changes in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in that change are listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that was stored before the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command.

The change scenarios include scenarios (e.g., scenario 01, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon does not change while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is not executed) but changes while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is executed), scenarios (e.g., scenario 04, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is executed) but does not change while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is not executed), and scenarios (e.g., scenario 15, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed and while the change is being performed (the pending icon change performance and the relevant icon change performance are executed).

The change scenario is determined regardless of whether the game is in a normal game state (icon with a first special symbol) or a specific game state (icon with a second special symbol). For example, in a specific game state (icon with a second special symbol), the rate at which the icon changes due to the change may be higher than the rate at which the icon changes due to a prior change (e.g., 20:80 or 0:100). Also, the rate at which the icon changes due to the change may be higher in a specific game state (icon with a second special symbol) than in a normal game state (icon with a first special symbol).

(Winning light-emitting effect determination process of the effect control unit)
The process of determining the light-emitting effect to be used when a prize is won by the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 132. Fig. 132 is a flow chart showing the process of determining the light-emitting effect to be used when a prize is won by the effect control unit 130m.

In step E316-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead command received from the main control board 110, and in step E316-2, determines whether or not the current time is a time when the light-emitting effect at the time of winning can be executed. If the current time is a time when the light-emitting effect at the time of winning can be executed, the process proceeds to step E316-3. If the current time is not a time when the light-emitting effect at the time of winning can be executed, the process ends, assuming that the light-emitting effect at the time of winning based on the look-ahead command received this time will not be executed.

The "period during which the light-emitting effect can be executed when a winning jackpot is not in progress, the normal game state is in effect when a look-ahead command based on a winning jackpot is received at the first starting port 45, and the time-saving game state is in effect when a look-ahead command based on a winning jackpot is received at the second starting port 47.

In step E316-3, the sub-CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining the winning light-emitting performance pattern to be executed by the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10, and in step E316-4, selects a winning light-emitting performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 133) for determining the winning light-emitting performance pattern. Details of the winning light-emitting performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E316-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines the winning light-emitting performance pattern. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the winning light-emitting performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 133, and determines one winning light-emitting performance pattern from among multiple winning light-emitting performance patterns based on the type of special symbol, the type of pre-read command, and the selection rate (%) of each winning light-emitting performance pattern.

In step E316-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined winning light-emitting effect pattern is a pattern that executes a winning light-emitting effect. If it is a pattern that executes a winning light-emitting effect, the process proceeds to step E316-7. If it is a pattern that does not execute a winning light-emitting effect, the process ends.

In step E316-7, the sub-CPU 130a sets the winning light-emitting effect execution command corresponding to the determined winning light-emitting effect pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends this winning light-emitting effect determination process. This causes the winning light-emitting effect execution command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the winning light-emitting effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the winning light-emitting effect execution command.

(Winning Light Emitting Pattern Determination Table)
FIG. 133 shows a winning light-emitting effect pattern determination table that is referenced when determining a winning light-emitting effect pattern.

The winning light-emitting performance pattern determination table associates the type of special symbol, the type of pre-reading command (planned change pattern), the selection rate (%) of each winning light-emitting performance pattern, and the winning light-emitting performance pattern to be selected, and for reference, the performance format for each winning light-emitting performance pattern is also listed.

The winning light-emitting performance patterns include winning light-emitting performance pattern 00, which does not execute the winning light-emitting performance, and winning light-emitting performance patterns 01 and 02, which execute the winning light-emitting performance. In winning light-emitting performance patterns 01 and 02, the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10 emits white or yellow light and a specified sound effect is output from the audio output device 9.

The first feature of the winning light-emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 133 is that a winning light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed with a look-ahead command (planned fluctuation pattern) with a high probability of winning a jackpot than with a look-ahead command (planned fluctuation pattern) with a low probability of winning a jackpot. This makes it easier to heighten the player's expectations for the execution of a fluctuation effect with a high probability of winning a jackpot, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the winning light effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 133 is that the winning light effect is more likely to be executed in the event of a big win than in the event of a loss. This can heighten the player's anticipation of a big win, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The third feature of the winning light pattern determination table shown in FIG. 133 is that, unlike the icon final display mode shown in FIG. 130, there is no winning light presentation pattern (presentation mode) that guarantees a jackpot (a sure win). By doing this, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation from the time the game ball enters the starting hole until the result of the variable presentation is derived, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

It is also possible to provide a winning illumination pattern that guarantees a jackpot (for example, the top lamp 10b illuminates in rainbow colors and the audio output device 9 outputs a confirmation sound). In this case, it is advisable to determine the winning illumination pattern that guarantees a jackpot with the lowest probability when a full rotation reach is executed.

(Preview read-ahead continuous performance decision processing of the performance control unit)
The read-ahead continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 134. Fig. 134 is a flowchart showing the read-ahead continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E317-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a look-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a look-ahead designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E530-2, and if a look-ahead designation command has not been received, the process for determining the look-ahead continuous performance is terminated.

In step E317-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received look-ahead command and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, the type of jackpot game, and the presentation content (planned variation pattern).

In step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is one in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed. If the current period is one in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed, processing proceeds to step E317-4. If the current period is not one in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed, processing proceeds to step E317-6, assuming that the look-ahead zone performance based on the currently received look-ahead designation command will not be executed.

The "look-ahead zone effect" is an effect that continuously suggests the expectation of a special game being executed by using background images, text information, and color information (expectation value information) by performing in-zone effects (displaying a look-ahead zone background image, displaying a blue zone image or a red heat zone image, and outputting zone BGM or heat zone BGM) across one or more variable effects, and is a type of look-ahead continuous effect.

The "period during which the look-ahead zone effect can be executed" includes a period when there is no pre-emption that executes the look-ahead zone effect, when a jackpot is not being played, when the normal game mode is in effect, etc. Therefore, while the look-ahead zone effect can be executed in the normal game mode, the look-ahead zone effect cannot be executed in the time-saving game mode.

In step E317-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table (see FIG. 135) for determining the scenario of the look-ahead zone performance. Details of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E317-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines the look-ahead zone performance scenario. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 135, and determines one look-ahead zone performance scenario from among multiple look-ahead zone performance scenarios based on the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of expected fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each preview scenario.

In step E317-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario for the look-ahead zone presentation as a presentation scenario in which the look-ahead zone presentation is not executed.

In step E317-7, the sub-CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead zone performance scenario in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, which corresponds to the reserved number counter. As a result, the look-ahead zone performance scenario is referenced in the look-ahead continuous performance execution process of step E324 described above, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead zone performance.

In step E317-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is one in which the look-ahead countdown performance can be executed. If the current period is one in which the look-ahead countdown performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-9. If the current period is not one in which the look-ahead countdown performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-11, assuming that the look-ahead countdown performance based on the currently received look-ahead designation command will not be executed.

The "pre-reading countdown effect" is an effect that uses text and sound information to intermittently indicate the likelihood of a special game being played by performing a countdown effect (displaying a counting image and outputting a counting sound) over one or more variable effects, and is a type of pre-reading continuous effect.

The "period during which the look-ahead countdown effect can be executed" includes periods when there are no reserved balls that execute the look-ahead countdown effect, when a jackpot game is not in progress, when the game is in a time-saving game mode, etc. Therefore, the look-ahead countdown effect is not executed in the normal game mode, but the look-ahead countdown effect can be executed in the time-saving game mode.

In step E317-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects a look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table (see FIG. 136) for determining the scenario for the look-ahead countdown performance. Details of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E317-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines a look-ahead countdown performance scenario. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 136, and determines one look-ahead countdown performance scenario from among multiple look-ahead countdown performance scenarios based on the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of expected variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each performance scenario.

In step E317-11, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario for the look-ahead countdown performance as a performance scenario in which the look-ahead countdown performance is not executed.

In step E317-12, the sub-CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead countdown performance scenario in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, which corresponds to the reserved number counter. This causes the look-ahead countdown performance scenario to be referenced in the look-ahead continuous performance execution process of step E324 described above, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead countdown performance. When this process ends, the current look-ahead continuous performance determination process ends.

In this way, the types of pre-reading continuous effects executed in the normal game mode and the time-saving game mode are different. This makes it possible to differentiate between the normal game mode and the time-saving game mode, and to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, where the number of reserved balls is more likely to increase than in the normal game state and a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be determined, the look-ahead zone effect, which is executed continuously across one or more fluctuation effects, is not executed. This prevents inconveniences such as a decrease in the effect of the look-ahead zone effect, which aims to ensure a long presentation time for one fluctuation effect, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving game state, where the number of reserved balls is more likely to increase than in the normal game state and a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be determined, a look-ahead countdown effect is executed intermittently across one or more fluctuation effects. Therefore, the look-ahead countdown effect, which requires a short performance time for each fluctuation effect, makes it easier to heighten the player's expectations and increases the enjoyment of the game.

The look-ahead zone effect may be performed even in the time-saving game mode, and the look-ahead countdown effect may be performed even in the normal game mode.

(Look-ahead zone performance scenario decision table)
FIG. 135 shows a look-ahead zone presentation scenario determination table that is referenced when determining a look-ahead zone presentation scenario.

The look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table associates the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead zone performance, and the performance scenario of the selected look-ahead zone performance, and for reference, the advance changes in each performance scenario and the performance mode of the look-ahead zone performance in that change are listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that was stored before the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command.

"Zone" refers to the execution of normal zone effects (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a blue zone image, output of zone background music), while "hot zone" refers to the execution of heat zone effects (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a red heat zone image, output of heat zone background music) which have a higher chance of winning than normal zone effects.

The look-ahead zone performance scenarios include a non-execution scenario in which the look-ahead zone performance is not executed (e.g., scenario 00), a scenario in which the zone performance is not executed during pre-change but is executed during the change (e.g., scenario 01), and a scenario in which the zone performance is executed during both pre-change and the change (e.g., scenario 02).

The first feature of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 135 is that it sets a performance scenario in which the performance mode of the performance during the zone does not progress (change) to a performance mode with a high expectation of special play, and a performance scenario in which the performance mode of the performance during the zone progresses (changes) to a performance mode with a high expectation of special play. By doing so, it is possible to make the player anticipate whether or not the performance mode of the performance during the zone will progress (change), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the look-ahead zone presentation scenario determination table shown in FIG. 135 is that the presentation mode of the look-ahead zone presentation is more likely to progress (change) with the current change than with prior change. This makes it easier to maintain the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and can bring the player's sense of expectation to a climax with the current change, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Preview countdown performance scenario decision table)
FIG. 136 shows a look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table that is referenced when determining a look-ahead countdown performance scenario.

The look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table associates the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead countdown performance, and the performance scenario for the look-ahead countdown performance that will be selected, and for reference, the advance changes in each performance scenario and the performance mode of the look-ahead countdown performance in that change are also listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that was stored before the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command.

"Count 3" means that a count image showing "3" is displayed and a count sound is output, "Count 2" means that a count image showing "2" is displayed and a count sound is output, "Count 1" means that a count image showing "1" is displayed and a count sound is output, and "Count 0" means that a count image showing "0" is displayed and a count sound is output.

The first feature of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 136 is that it is possible to execute the look-ahead countdown performance not only in the case of a big win, but also in the case of a small win (a predicted fluctuation pattern that leads to the expectation of a small win). In this way, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation as to whether or not a small win game will be executed, in which a big win game is executed when the game ball enters the specific area 53, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 136 is that the maximum count is "3" regardless of whether it is a big win or a small win. This allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation without being aware of whether it is a big win or a small win, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

The third feature of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 136 is that the look-ahead countdown performance is performed in the same manner regardless of whether it is a big win or a small win. This allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation without being aware of whether it is a big win or a small win, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

When the expected variation pattern is a small win, the countdown effect is executed in a specific or unpredictable manner for the number of rounds or the number of time-saving times of the jackpot game to which the game transitions when the game ball enters the specific area 53 during a small win game. However, the countdown effect may be executed in a specific or predictable manner for the number of rounds or the number of time-saving times of the jackpot game to which the game transitions when the game ball enters the specific area 53 during a small win game. For example, the font or size of the count image may be different between a case where the number of rounds or the number of time-saving times is relatively small and a case where the number of rounds or the number of time-saving times is relatively large, and the type or volume of the count sound may be different.

(Variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit)
The variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 137. Fig. 137 is a flow chart of the variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E321-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E321-2, determines whether or not the current state is normal gameplay. If it is normal gameplay, the process proceeds to step E321-3. If it is not normal gameplay (time-saving gameplay), the process proceeds to step E321-7.

In step E321-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation is the remaining reserved portion of the second special pattern at the time of transition to the normal game state. If it is the remaining reserved portion of the second special pattern, the process proceeds to step E321-4, and if it is not the remaining reserved portion of the second special pattern (variable display of the first special pattern), the process proceeds to step E321-6.

In step E321-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the remaining reserved second special symbol is in the normal time-saving play state. If it is not in the normal time-saving play state (if it is in the special time-saving play state), the process proceeds to step E321-6. If it is in the normal time-saving play state, in step E321-5, the variable presentation pattern determination table for the remaining reserved symbol (see FIG. 138(c)) is selected, and the process proceeds to step E321-14. Details of the variable presentation pattern determination table for the remaining reserved symbol will be described later.

In step E321-6, the sub-CPU 130a selects the normal variable performance pattern determination table (not shown) and proceeds to step E321-14.

In step E321-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current state is the normal time-saving game state. If the current state is not the normal time-saving game state (if the current state is the special time-saving game state), the sub-CPU 130a proceeds to step E321-13. If the current state is the normal time-saving game state, the sub-CPU 130a proceeds to step E321-8, where it determines whether or not the current variation effect is the pre-final variation effect in the normal time-saving game state (the number of remaining time-saving times is 1 or more). If the current variation effect is not the pre-final variation effect (it is the final variation effect), the sub-CPU 130a proceeds to step E321-10. If the current variation effect is the pre-final variation effect, the sub-CPU 130a proceeds to step E321-9, where it selects a variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) for the variation effect before the final of the normal time-saving game state, and proceeds to step E321-14.

In step E321-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current mode is the entry battle mode. If the current mode is the entry battle mode, in step E321-11, the variable presentation pattern determination table 1 for the final variation of the normal time-saving mode (see FIG. 138(a)) is selected and the process proceeds to step E321-14. If the current mode is not the entry battle mode, in step E321-12, the variable presentation pattern determination table 2 for the final variation of the normal time-saving mode (see FIG. 138(b)) is selected and the process proceeds to step E321-14. Details of the variable presentation pattern determination table for the final variation of the normal time-saving mode will be described later.

In step E321-13, the sub-CPU 130a selects a variable presentation pattern determination table for special time-saving (not shown in the figure) and proceeds to step E321-14.

In step E321-14, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the selected variable presentation pattern determination table to determine one variable presentation pattern from among the multiple variable presentation patterns, and sets it in a specified area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E321-15, the sub-CPU 130a sets the variable performance pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable performance pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and ends this variable performance pattern determination process. This causes the variable performance pattern instruction command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the variable performance.

(Fluctuation performance pattern determination table for time-saving final fluctuation)
Figure 138(a) is a diagram showing a variation presentation pattern determination table 1 for final variation in time-saving mode, which is referenced when determining the variation presentation pattern in the final variation presentation in the normal time-saving game state (entering battle mode), and Figure 138(b) is a diagram showing a variation presentation pattern determination table 2 for final variation in time-saving mode, which is referenced when determining the variation presentation pattern in the final variation presentation in the normal time-saving game state (other than entering battle mode).

As shown in Figures 138(a) and 138(b), the variation presentation pattern determination table for the final variation of the time-saving function associates the type of special pattern variation corresponding to the special pattern variation pattern designation command, the result of the advance reading of the remaining reserved second special pattern, the selection rate (%) of each variation presentation pattern, and the variation presentation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the presentation configuration for each variation presentation pattern is listed.

The "final battle introduction effect" is an introduction effect to the final battle effect in which the player faces off against an enemy character for a chance to win a big or small prize in the variable effect at the end of the time-saving game state.
The "Final Battle SP Reach" is a special SP reach presentation that produces the above-mentioned final battle presentation, in which the two presentation patterns 70a that form the reach state shrink and move to both upper corners of the image display device, producing a battle presentation in which the player confronts an enemy character.
The "final battle SP reach with guaranteed victory" is a special SP reach presentation that produces the final battle presentation described above, in which the two performance patterns 70a that form the reach state shrink and move to both upper corners of the image display device, producing a battle presentation in which victory over the enemy character is guaranteed.

The "defeat effect" is an effect that suggests that the character has been defeated by the enemy character in the final battle effect.
The "victory performance" is a performance that suggests victory over the enemy character in the final battle performance.

The "result display" is a presentation that displays the results of play during a series of advantageous periods during which the time-saving play state continues, triggered by a jackpot play from a normal play state, known as the first hit.
The "special result display" is basically the same as the result display described above, but it is a result display that acts as a kind of pre-reading effect that suggests that a big win or a small win will occur in the variable effect related to the remaining reserve of the second special pattern when the normal game state is transitioned to.

An "end suggestion effect" is an effect that suggests that the normal time-saving game mode is coming to an end. Specifically, the shutter image closes to block the effect images such as the background image, making it look to the player as if they have lost.
A "revival effect" is an effect that notifies (suggests) that a jackpot or small jackpot has occurred after a previous miss. Specifically, the shutter image is broken open to reveal a combination of jackpot effect symbols.

The first feature of the variation presentation pattern determination table 1 for the time-saving final variation shown in FIG. 138(a) is that a variation presentation pattern that always results in a final battle presentation is selected. By doing this, it is possible to efficiently increase the player's expectations for the final variation presentation in the time-saving game state, and to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variation presentation pattern determination table 1 for the time-saving final variation shown in FIG. 138(a) is that a battle presentation to confirm victory may be executed if the final variation presentation in the time-saving game state is a small win or a big win. By doing this, it is possible to give the player a sense of security from the start of the battle presentation (final battle SP reach), and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The third feature of the variation presentation pattern determination table 1 for the final variation of the time-saving mode shown in FIG. 138(a) is that when the variation presentation related to the remaining reserved second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game mode is a small win or a big win, even if the final variation presentation of the time-saving game mode is a miss, a battle presentation of a guaranteed victory may be executed as a type of pre-reading presentation. By doing so, it is possible to execute a variation presentation with an element of surprise, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the variation presentation pattern determination table 1 for the final variation of the time-saving mode shown in FIG. 138(a) is that a special result display may be executed as a kind of pre-reading presentation that suggests that a big win or a small win will occur in the variation presentation related to the remaining reserved second special symbol when the normal game mode is entered. By doing so, it is possible to stir up the joy of the player by making it appear as if the time-saving game mode has ended, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The first feature of the time-saving final variation variation presentation pattern determination table 2 shown in FIG. 138(b) is that it always selects a variation presentation pattern in which a result display is executed from an end suggestion presentation. By doing so, it is possible to inform the player of the results of the game during a series of advantageous periods, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variation presentation pattern determination table 2 for the final variation of the time-saving mode shown in FIG. 138(b) is that a revival presentation is executed when the final variation presentation of the time-saving game state is a small win or a big win. By doing this, it is possible to surprise the player by making him or her think that the normal time-saving game state has ended, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variation presentation pattern determination table 2 for the final variation of the time-saving mode shown in FIG. 138(b) is that a special result display may be executed as a kind of pre-reading presentation that suggests that a big win or a small win will occur in the variation presentation related to the remaining reserved second special symbol when the normal game mode is entered. By doing so, it is possible to stir up the joy of the player by making it appear as if the time-saving game mode has ended, and to increase the interest of the game.

(Variable performance pattern determination table for remaining reservations)
Figure 138 (c) is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for remaining reservations which is referenced when determining the variable presentation pattern in the variable presentation related to the remaining reservations of the second special pattern when transitioning to the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 138(c), the variable presentation pattern determination table for remaining reserves associates the type of special chart variable presentation pattern corresponding to the special chart variable presentation pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variable presentation pattern, and the variable presentation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the presentation configuration for each variable presentation pattern is listed.

"Result continuation" refers to a presentation that continues the result display at the final change presentation in the time-saving play state.
The "revival effect" is an effect that suggests that the player will revive from the result display in the final variable effect of the time-saving game state and win a big win or a small win.
The "long revival effect" is an effect that suggests a revival from the result display in the final variable effect of the time-saving game state and a big or small win, and is carried out for a longer period of time than the revival effect described above.

The first feature of the remaining reserve variable presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 138(b) is that the result display may continue by inheriting the result display from the final variable presentation of the time-saving play state. By doing so, a series of presentations can be performed from the final variable presentation of the time-saving play state, making it possible to improve the presentation effect before and after the end of the time-saving play state.

The second feature of the remaining reserve variable presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 138(b) is that it executes a revival presentation or long revival presentation by inheriting the presentation content (result display) from the final variable presentation of the time-saving play state. By doing so, a series of presentations can be performed from the final variable presentation of the time-saving play state, making it possible to improve the presentation effect before and after the end of the time-saving play state.

(Special time-saving production processing of the production control unit)
The special time-saving performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 139. Fig. 139 is a flowchart of the special time-saving performance processing in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E750-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the game is currently in a time-saving game state. If the game is not in a time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step E750-2. If the game is in a time-saving game state, the process ends with the special time-saving game effect processing not being executed (the RWM clear negation effect, which indicates that the RWM has not been cleared (is fixed), as described below, and the activation counter display, which indicates by counting down the number of changes until the game transitions to the special time-saving game state).

In step E750-2, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a variable performance has started. If a variable performance has not started, processing proceeds to step E750-16. If a variable performance has started, processing proceeds to step E750-3, where it is determined whether or not an RWM clear was performed when the power was turned on (whether a power-on command was received). If an RWM clear was performed, processing proceeds to step E750-13 as if an RWM clear negation performance was not to be executed, and if an RWM clear was performed, processing proceeds to step E750-4.

In step E750-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a history of a jackpot game being played from when the power was turned on until the present. If there is a history of a jackpot game, the process proceeds to step E750-13 assuming that the RWM clear negation effect will not be executed, and if there is no history of a jackpot game, the process proceeds to step E750-5.

In step E750-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the number of changes before transitioning to the special time-saving game state is within a predetermined number (here, 100 times). If it is not within the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step E750-16, assuming that the special time-saving effects (RWM clear negation effect, activation counter display) will not be executed, and if it is within the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step E750-6.

In step E750-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the number of changes since power restoration (reception of the power restoration designation command) is the first number (here, 50). If the number of changes is not the first number, the process proceeds to step E750-10. If the number of changes is the first number, in step E750-7, it determines by lottery (for example, at a rate of 1/2) whether to execute the RWM clear negation effect and whether to display the activation counter.

The sub-CPU 130a determines in step E750-8 whether it has been decided to execute an RWM clear negation effect or an activated counter display. If it has been decided not to execute an RWM clear negation effect or an activated counter display, processing proceeds to step E750-16. If it has been decided to execute an RWM clear negation effect or an activated counter display, in step E750-9, a performance execution command according to the decision result is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. This causes the performance execution command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the special time-saving performance (RWM clear negation effect and/or activated counter display).

In step E750-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the number of changes since power restoration (reception of the power restoration designation command) is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of changes is not the second number, the process proceeds to step E750-16, and if the number of changes is the second number, it determines whether or not to execute the RWM clear negation performance and whether or not to display the activation counter. Specifically, if the RWM clear negation performance has not been executed, it determines to execute the RWM clear negation performance, and if the display of the activation counter has not been executed, it determines to display the activation counter.

The sub-CPU 130a sets an effect execution command corresponding to the result of the determination in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. This causes the effect execution command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the special time-saving effect (the RWM clear negation effect and/or the display of the activation counter).

In step E750-13, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the number of changes since power ON is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of changes is the second number, the process proceeds to step E750-15. If the number of changes is not the second number, the process proceeds to step E750-14, determining whether a transition has occurred from the normal time-saving play state to presentation mode A (whether all the variable presentations corresponding to the remaining reserved second special symbols have ended). If a transition has occurred from the normal time-saving play state to presentation mode A, the process proceeds to step E750-15. If a transition has not occurred from the normal time-saving play state to presentation mode A, the process proceeds to step E750-16.

In step E750-15, the sub-CPU 130a sets the activation counter display command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. This causes the effect execution command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the special time-saving effect (here, displaying the activation counter).

In step E750-16, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the effect symbol is displayed as stopped (whether the symbol determination command has been received). If the effect symbol is displayed as stopped, the process proceeds to step E750-17, and if the effect symbol is not displayed as stopped, the process for this special time-saving effect ends.

In step E750-17, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the activation counter is currently being displayed. If the activation counter is not being displayed, the current special time-saving performance processing is terminated. If the activation counter is being displayed, in step E750-18, an activation counter subtraction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. This causes the activation counter subtraction command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to subtract the value of the activation counter. When this processing is completed, the current special time-saving performance processing is terminated.

In this way, during the execution of the variable effect a predetermined number of times from when the power is turned on (a certain number of times before the special time-saving game state is activated), it is possible to execute an RWM clear negation effect that suggests that the RWM clear (clearing the number of variable effects) was not executed (left as it is) when the power was turned on. Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the special time-saving game state is generated by referring to the number of variable effects on the previous day, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, multiple execution timings for the RWM clear denial effect are set, and once it is executed at one of the timings, it will not be executed again at any other timing. This increases the player's anticipation as to when the RWM clear denial effect will be executed, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, it is possible to display an activation counter (an activation countdown effect can be executed) that indicates the number of changes until the special time-saving game state is entered by counting down. This allows the player to know when the special time-saving game state will occur, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. It is also possible to motivate the player to continue playing, making it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, the activation counter is not displayed during the time-saving game mode. This prevents the player from being distracted by the special time-saving game mode even when the game is in the normal time-saving game mode, and increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the decrement (countdown) of the activation counter is performed when the performance pattern stops, when it is less likely that a jackpot preview or pre-reading effect will be executed (started) than when the fluctuation effect starts, rather than when the fluctuation effect starts, making it easier for the player to recognize the decrement of the activation counter, which makes the game more interesting.

In addition, instead of decrementing (counting down) the activation counter when the performance pattern stops, the activation counter may be decremented (counted down) when the variable performance begins. In this case, the activation counter may be decremented by the time the performance pattern 70a starts to vary and completely transitions to high-speed variation (becomes constant speed), or the performance pattern may be made to perform a pre-variation action such as floating up before scrolling (varies) during the variable performance, and the activation counter may be decremented by the time the pre-variation action ends.

(Example of a performance when a pre-reading performance is executed during normal game play)
An example of a performance when a look-ahead performance is executed during a normal game state will be described with reference to Fig. 140. In this example, it is assumed that an icon change performance and a look-ahead zone performance are executed.

As shown in FIG. 140(a), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the variable display (execution of the variable performance) of the first special symbol, which is a losing symbol, and the first reserved number increases from "1" to "2", the number in the first reserved number display area 70E increases from "1" to "2", and a white icon (reserved icon HI) that is the subject of a foresight performance (icon change performance, predictive zone performance here) is additionally displayed in the second display section 70B2 of the first reserved icon display area 70B. Note that the game count GK, which is the number of variable displays (variable performances) that have been executed since the power was turned on or the end of the jackpot game, is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the first image display device 70.

Next, after the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 140(b), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed stopped at a losing number ("814"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the stop time has elapsed and the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol, which is a miss, begins, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ begins, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the number of games GK is incremented by 1.

At this time, the icon change effect starts, and the reserved icon shifted and displayed in the first display section 70B1 changes to a blue icon (special icon). Also, the look-ahead zone effect starts, and the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, and the blue zone image ZG is displayed. Next, when the change time has passed, as shown in FIG. 140(d), the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern stop displaying a losing result ("531"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the stop time has elapsed and the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol, which is the jackpot, begins, as shown in FIG. 140(e), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ begins, the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C and is displayed as the icon TI, changing into a red icon (special icon). Also, the number of games GK is incremented by 1.

After that, when a predetermined time has passed, as shown in FIG. 140(f), the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in a reach-forming state, and a normal reach performance is executed. Furthermore, when a predetermined time has passed, an advanced performance is executed, and as shown in FIG. 140(g), a SP reach performance is started in which friendly character C2 and enemy character C3 battle, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are hidden (erased), and the look-ahead zone performance is interrupted.

Then, when the SP reach performance reaches its final stage (the timing for executing the performance to determine whether or not it is a miss), the performance of successful performance starts and the friendly character C2 launches a final attack on the enemy character C3. After that, as shown in FIG. 140(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the performance position, and the sound output device 9 outputs a "queen, queen" notification sound (in this case, announcing that a jackpot has been reached).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the performance position to the standby position and the successful decision performance ends, as shown in FIG. 140(i), the performance pattern 70a temporarily stops at the special number ("555") common to both small and big wins, and the look-ahead zone performance resumes, while the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed. After that, when the temporary stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the performance pattern 70a stops at the special number ("555") common to both small and big wins, and the special pattern TZ stops at the big win number ("555") that does not include the "V" that indicates a small win. In addition, as the look-ahead zone performance ends, the icon TI is erased and the icon change performance ends.

On the other hand, in the case of a variable display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, when the final stage of the SP reach performance (the execution timing of the deciding performance to determine whether it is a miss or not) is reached, a decision failure performance is started and a performance is performed in which friendly character C2 loses to enemy character C3. After that, a screen with the text "Defeat" is displayed to notify the user of a miss and the decision failure performance ends, at which point the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ will stop and be displayed with a reach miss result (for example, "565").

In this way, when a jackpot occurs during normal gameplay, it is possible to execute look-ahead effects (icon change effects, look-ahead zone effects, etc.). This effectively heightens the player's sense of anticipation when a jackpot game is executed, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

(Example of a change effect that occurs after switching to battle mode)
Using Figure 141, we will explain an example of a presentation when a variable presentation is executed after transitioning to the battle mode.

When the ending of the third jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 130(a), a time-saving entry effect is executed to indicate that the game will enter a time-saving game state, and a warning notification is issued to draw the player's attention. Specifically, a forget-to-remove warning image TG is displayed from the lending device that communicates with the gaming machine 1 to lend game balls, warning the player not to forget to remove the card (storage medium) that can identify the remaining value.

After that, when the display period of the forget-to-remove warning image has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 141(b), an addiction warning image NG is displayed to warn against excessive addiction to the game. Then, when the ending time of the third big win game has elapsed, the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 7 times, the first reserved number (U1) is "2" and the second reserved number (U2) is "0", and the normal time-saving game state is started, and the entry battle mode background image, the first right-hit image MG1 that prompts the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a, and the time-saving remaining number image KG that indicates the remaining number of times of the second time-saving number (J2) are displayed as "7 times remaining". Also, the number of games GK is displayed as "0". In other words, the first time-saving number of times (J1), the third time-saving number of times (J3), and the remaining number of small wins (Z) are not displayed.

Then, when the first special symbol starts to change (changing performance), as shown in FIG. 141(c), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start to change, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the icon is instantly displayed in the icon display area 70C. However, because the first special symbol is changing, the remaining number of time-saving times image KG, which indicates the remaining number of times of the second time-saving times (J2), maintains the state of "7 times remaining". However, because the first special symbol is changing (changing performance), the battle reach performance will not be executed.

At this time, when three game balls enter the second starting hole 47 and the second reserved number increases from "0" to "3", the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "0" to "3", and three white icons (reserved icons HI) are additionally displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D, as shown in FIG. 141 (d).

When the variation time has elapsed and the first special symbol stops and displays as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. 141(e), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop and display as a losing number ("513"). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 141(f), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ start, the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "3" to "2", the three reserved icons HI displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the remaining number of time-saving plays image KG changes from "7 plays remaining" to "6 plays". In addition, the number of games GK is incremented by 1 to become "1".

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 141(g), the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in a reach-forming state, and a normal reach performance is executed. After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 141(h), an entry battle reach performance begins in which friendly character C2 and enemy character C3 battle, and the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are hidden (erased). At this time, a text image saying "First Battle" is displayed, indicating the number of times the entry battle reach performance has been executed.

At this time, two game balls enter the second starting hole 47, and the second reserved number increases from "2" to "4", but because the second reserved icon display area 70D is not displayed (erased), no additional reserved icons are displayed.

After that, when the final stage of the attacking battle reach performance (the execution timing of the deciding performance to determine whether it is a miss or not) is reached, a fail-to-decide performance starts and an performance is performed in which friendly character C2 loses to enemy character C3, and then, as shown in FIG. 141(i), a screen with the text "Defeat" is displayed to inform the user that it has been a miss.

After that, when the variation time has passed and the second special symbol stops and displays as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. 141(j), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop and display as a losing number ("565"). In addition, the second reserved icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, each time the display of the second special symbol changes (changing effect) begins, the effects shown in Figures 141(f) to 141(j) are repeated, and with each repetition, the remaining time-saving count image KG is decremented, and the number in the text image indicating the number of times the battle reach effect has been executed is updated.

In this way, when the normal time-saving game state is triggered, the normal time-saving entry effect is executed during the ending of the big win game. This makes it possible to inform the player that the normal time-saving game state is occurring, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state is triggered, a right-hit notification is made before the normal time-saving game state is triggered (during a jackpot). This prevents the player from suffering a disadvantage by hitting left when the normal time-saving game state is triggered, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, when a normal time-saving game state is generated, a presentation mode (here, a battle mode) corresponding to the time-saving state is set when the ending of the big win game ends, regardless of whether there is a reserved memory or not, and a background image corresponding to that presentation mode is displayed. This makes it possible to inform the player that a normal time-saving game state has occurred, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state is generated, the normal time-saving entry effect is executed with the effect pattern 70a and special pattern TZ hidden. This allows the player to play through the time-saving state with a fresh feeling without worrying about the results of the previous variable effect, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state is triggered, warning effects are displayed to alert the player (display of a forget-to-recover warning image TG, display of an addiction warning image NG) before effects corresponding to the time-saving state are performed (change of background image, display of remaining time-saving number image KG, right-hit notification, variable effects corresponding to the time-saving state, output of background music corresponding to entering battle mode, etc.). This makes it possible to effectively alert the player.

In addition, at the start of the normal time-saving game mode, even if there is no reserved memory and the game is waiting for customers, background music corresponding to the time-saving game mode is audibly output, but is muted (audible output is stopped) after a specified period of time has passed. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of an immediate and drastic decrease in the presentation effect even when there is no reserved memory and the game is waiting for customers, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the advantageous game state (time-saving game state) that is controlled after a jackpot can be ended (transitioned to the normal game state) when any of a number of ending conditions (number of remaining special 1 time-savings, number of remaining special 2 time-savings, total number of remainings, number of remaining small wins) is met, and although the specified ending condition (number of small wins) in the advantageous game state is not announced, the specified ending condition is suggested by the mode presentation (change in background image, display of remaining time-savings image KG). This creates a sense of excitement about whether the advantageous game state will end, and the fun of guessing the ending condition can be added by the mode presentation, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The advantageous game state (time-saving game state) that is controlled after a big win can be ended (transitioned to the normal game state) when the first ending condition (remaining number of time-saving wins, remaining number of special 2 time-saving wins) is met, or when the second ending condition (remaining number of small wins, remaining number of special 1 time-saving wins, total remaining number of wins) is met. During the advantageous game state, information related to the first ending condition (remaining number of time-saving wins, remaining number of special 2 time-saving wins) can be notified, but information related to the second ending condition (remaining number of small wins, remaining number of special 1 time-saving wins, total remaining number of wins) is not notified. This creates a sense of excitement about whether the advantageous game state will end, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, the remaining number of times the time-saving feature is activated for Special 1 is not announced, but the remaining number of times the time-saving feature is activated for Special 2 is. In addition, the remaining number of times the small win feature is not announced, but the remaining number of times the time-saving feature is activated for Special 2 is. Also, there are more types of ending conditions that are not announced (remaining number of times the time-saving feature is activated for Special 1, remaining number of small win features) than there are types of ending conditions that are announced (remaining number of times the time-saving feature is activated for Special 2). Also, there are ending conditions that are not suggested by the mode presentation.

If the machine is in a customer waiting state at the start of the normal time-saving game state transitioned from the jackpot game, the background music corresponding to the presentation mode of the normal time-saving game state may be muted without being audibly output. In this case, when a game ball enters the start hole from the customer waiting state, a reserved memory is generated and a variable presentation is started, and the background music corresponding to the presentation mode of the normal time-saving game state may be audibly output.

In addition, the warning effect is performed during the ending of the jackpot game, but it may be performed from the ending of the jackpot game until the normal time-saving game state, or it may be performed immediately after the start of the normal time-saving state (during the first variable effect), or the warning effect may be displayed in sequence, with the forgotten item warning image TG and the getting-sunk warning image NG displayed (either may be displayed first).

In addition, in the first special symbol variation display that is executed when there is no second reserved memory but there is a first reserved memory at the start of the normal time-saving game state, the variation display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is performed, but it is also possible to only display the variation display of the special symbol TZ without displaying the variation display of the performance symbol 70a. In this way, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort caused by the second time-saving count (J2) not being subtracted, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the first special pattern variation display that is executed when there is no second reserved memory but there is a first reserved memory at the start of the normal time-saving game state, if the variation display of the performance pattern 70a is not executed and only the variation display of the special pattern TZ is executed, the variation display may be executed with a relatively short variation time (for example, shortened variation or ultra-shortened variation) if it is a miss, and a special presentation may be executed with a longer variation time than in the case of a miss.

In addition, while a right-hit notification is not given during the time-saving entry performance, the first right-hit image MG1 may be displayed so that a right-hit notification is always given from the jackpot play to the normal time-saving play state.

(Example of the final variation in the battle mode that results in a jackpot)
Using Figure 142, we will explain an example of a presentation that occurs when a jackpot occurs in the final variable presentation of the battle mode.

As shown in FIG. 142(a), when the time for changing the display (changing effect) of the second special symbol before the final one in the entering battle mode has elapsed and the second special symbol stops and displays as a losing special symbol, the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ stop and display as a losing number ("676") as shown in FIG. 142(a). In addition, the second reserved icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display (variable performance) of the second special pattern, which is the final round of the entry battle mode, begins, as shown in FIG. 142(b), the variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ begins, the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "2" to "1", and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI.

Also, as this is the final change in the time-saving feature, the remaining time-saving number image KG changes from "1 remaining" to "Last," and a storage promotion image SG is displayed to encourage the player to save the second reserved memory (increase the second reserved number) by hitting the right button. This storage promotion image SG is displayed so as not to interfere with the visibility of the changing display of the performance pattern 70a as much as possible, and a count image (here, "09:99") that is shorter than the time until the reach performance begins is displayed, and a countdown is displayed as time passes. Also, the number of games GK is incremented by 1.

After that, when one game ball enters the second starting hole 47, as shown in FIG. 142(c), the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "1" to "2", and a white icon (reserved icon HI) is additionally displayed in the second display section 70D2 of the second reserved icon display area 70D. At this time, the pre-read result of the stored second reserved memory (special chart determination information) is a jackpot, so the light-emitting effect at the time of winning is started, the top lamp 10b lights up yellow, and the sound output device 9 outputs the sound effect "beep♪".

When two game balls enter the second starting hole 47, the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "2" to "4", and a white icon (reserved icon HI) is additionally displayed in the third display section 70D3 and the fourth display section 70D4 of the second reserved icon display area 70D, as shown in FIG. 142(d). In addition, the text "Save by hitting to the right" in the second reserve promotion image SG2 changes to "MAX!!", indicating that the upper limit ("4") of the second reserved number (U2) has been reached. After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the count image in the reserve promotion image SG becomes "00:00", the countdown ends, and then the reserve promotion image SG is erased, as shown in FIG. 142(e).

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 142(f), the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in a reach-forming state, and a normal reach performance is executed. Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed, an advanced performance is executed, and as shown in FIG. 142(g), a final battle reach performance is started in which friendly character C2 and enemy character C3 engage in a final battle, and the second reserved icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are hidden (erased). At this time, a text image saying "Final Battle" is displayed, indicating the number of times the battle reach performance has been executed. Furthermore, the number of games GK is hidden as the advanced performance is executed.

After that, when the final stage of the special SP reach performance (the timing for executing the decisive performance to see if it is a miss or not) is reached, the decisive success performance starts and the ally character C2 launches a final attack on the enemy character C3. Then, as shown in FIG. 142(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the performance position, and a "cuincuin" notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify the player that the final attack has hit the enemy character.

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the presentation position to the standby position and the successful decision presentation ends, as shown in FIG. 142(i), the word "WIN" is displayed to notify a jackpot (or a small jackpot). Then, when the variable time has elapsed and the second special symbol stops to display the jackpot special symbol, as shown in FIG. 142(j), the presentation symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop to display the jackpot result ("555"). Additionally, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, in the final variable presentation during the normal time-saving play state, a storage promotion presentation (display of a storage promotion image SG, countdown display) is executed to encourage the player to store the second reserved memory (increase the second reserved number) by hitting the right. This makes it possible to ensure that the second reserved memory is stored before the time-saving play state ends, making it possible to prevent the player from suffering losses.

In addition, in the accumulation promotion performance, a countdown display is performed, which strongly reminds the player to accumulate second reserved memory by hitting to the right (increasing the second reserved number), making it possible to prevent the player from suffering losses.

In addition, when the second reserved number (U2) reaches the upper limit in the storage promotion performance, the text "Save by hitting to the right" changes to a display mode ("MAX!!") indicating that the second reserved number (U2) has reached the upper limit. This makes it possible to prevent the player from firing game balls unnecessarily, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the battle mode, which is the normal time-saving play state, when the final second special symbol that ends the normal time-saving play state is displayed, the final battle reach effect is always executed. Therefore, even if the normal time-saving play state ends with a miss, the player can be sufficiently entertained, and the excitement of the game can be increased.

In addition, during a time-saving game state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 47, if the pre-read result of the second reserved memory (special chart determination information) based on the entry into the second starting hole 47 is a small win, it is possible to execute a winning light-up effect (pre-read effect) targeting the reserved memory that will be a small win. Therefore, it is possible to build up the player's anticipation as to whether or not a small win game that has the potential to lead to a big win game will be executed in a specific game state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, while a countdown display is executed in the accumulation promotion performance, a display performance may be executed in which a gauge image is displayed for a period shorter than the time until the reach performance starts, and the length of the gauge is shortened as time passes. Also, a light-emitting performance may be executed in which a specific light-emitting means is turned on for a period shorter than the time until the reach performance starts, and the light-emitting color is changed as time passes (for example, blue light → yellow light → red light).

(Example of the effect when the normal time-saving game mode ends)
Using Figure 143, we will explain an example of the presentation when the number of time-saving plays (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the normal time-saving game state ends.

Here, together with the start of the losing variation display of the second special symbol, which is the final variation of the time-saving feature, a series of effects is started that make it look as if one variation effect is being executed across multiple variation displays, and as shown in FIG. 143(a), it is assumed that a losing final battle reach effect is being executed.

After that, when the final battle reach performance reaches its final stage (the timing for executing the performance to determine whether it is a miss or not), a performance of failure to make a miss starts and an performance is performed in which friendly character C2 loses to enemy character C3, and then, as shown in FIG. 143(b), a screen with the text "Defeat" is displayed to inform the user that it has been a miss.

Then, when the specified time has elapsed, the decision failure presentation ends, and as shown in FIG. 143(c), a result display is displayed showing the results of the game during the series of advantageous periods during which the time-saving game state has continued since the first jackpot game. Specifically, the number of jackpot games played (here, "1 win") and the total number of balls paid out (here, 450 pts) are displayed as the match results. In addition, the special symbol TZ stops and displays a reach miss result ("565"), and when the stopping time has elapsed, the time-saving game state ends with four second reserved memories remaining, the game transitions to the normal game state, and the first right-hit image MG1 is erased.

After that, when the first second special symbol change display (miss change effect) based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state starts, the special symbol TZ change display starts while the result display continues, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", as shown in FIG. 143(d). Then, after the change time has passed, the special symbol TZ stops and displays a losing number ("749"), as shown in FIG. 135(e). Note that the game count GK remains hidden throughout the period in which the result display is being performed, and even if the change effect is executed, the game count is only added internally, and cannot be grasped visually.

Then, when the pause time has elapsed and the second display of the second special symbol (missing display) based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state begins, the display of the special symbol TZ begins to change while the result display continues, as shown in FIG. 143(f), and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "3" to "2". Then, when the change time has elapsed, the special symbol TZ stops and displays a missing number ("349"), as shown in FIG. 143(g).

Furthermore, when the stop time has elapsed and the third display of the second special symbol (missing display) based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, the display of the special symbol TZ starts to change while the result display continues, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "2" to "1". Then, when the change time has elapsed, the special symbol TZ stops and displays a missing number.

After that, when the fourth (last) second special symbol change display (miss change presentation) starts based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state, the change display of the special symbol TZ starts while the result display continues, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "1" to "0". Then, after the change time has passed, as shown in FIG. 143(h), the special symbol TZ stops displaying a losing number ("749"), and when the stop time has passed, the result display ends and the series of presentations described above ends.

After that, when the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 143(i), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C and is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, a performance mode A background image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, and a left-hit image HG that encourages the player to launch the game ball to the left of the game area 5a is displayed. Also, the number of games GK is redisplayed in the state after the increment.

Note that, although an example has been shown here in which the normal time-saving game state ends when the player is in the battle mode, regardless of whether the presentation mode is the wild dance mode, super wild dance mode, or infinite mode in which the normal time-saving game state ends, the game will basically proceed as shown in Figures 143(a) to 143(i).

In this way, a series of effects is executed that makes it look as if one change effect is being executed from the change display of the second special symbol, which is the final change of the time-saving mode, to the change display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved number of the second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game mode. Therefore, the player can experience a novel effect that does not make them strongly aware of the remaining reserved number of the second special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, during the display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved second special symbol in the series of effects, the display of the special symbol TZ is the only one that is changed, without displaying the change of the performance symbol 70a. This makes it easier to recognize multiple change performances as a series of effects, and improves the effect of the series of effects.

In addition, by displaying the results from the display of the second special symbol change, which is the final change in the time-saving mode, to the display of the second special symbol change based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game mode, it becomes easier to recognize the multiple change effects as a series of effects, making it possible to improve the presentation effect of the series of effects.

In addition, instead of displaying a left-hit image HG that encourages the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a when transitioning to the normal game state, the left-hit image HG is displayed at the end of a series of effects. This prevents the player from shooting unnecessary game balls, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the display mode of the end suggestion screen changes depending on the number of special 2 reservations (second reservation memories). On the other hand, even if there is a special 1 reservation (first reservation memory), the display period of the end suggestion screen does not change.

Although a series of effects is executed from the display of the second special symbol, which is the final change in the time-saving mode, to the display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game mode, the series of effects may not be started in the display of the second special symbol, which is the final change in the time-saving mode, but may be executed from the display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game mode. In this case, a special SP reach effect or result display may be performed in the first display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game mode.

(Example 1 of a small win with the remaining reserve of the second special symbol when transitioning to normal game mode)
Using Figure 144, we will explain example 1 of the presentation when a small win occurs with the remaining reserved second special pattern (second reserved memory) when transitioning to the normal game state.

Here, as the second special symbol, which is the final time-saving variation, begins to change, a series of effects is started that make it look as if one variation effect is being performed over multiple times, and as shown in FIG. 144(a), a final battle reach effect, which is a loss, is being performed. At this time, the winning light-up effect, which predicts the second reserved memory (small win), continues, and the top lamp 10b is lit in yellow.

After that, when the final battle reach performance reaches its final stage (the timing for executing the performance to determine whether it is a miss or not), a performance of failure to make a miss starts and an performance is performed in which friendly character C2 loses to enemy character C3, and then, as shown in FIG. 144(b), a screen with the text "Defeat" is displayed to inform the user that it has been a miss.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the decision failure presentation ends, and as shown in FIG. 144(c), a result display is displayed showing the results of the game during the series of advantageous periods during which the time-saving game state continues from the first small win game or big win game. Specifically, the number of big win games played (here, "1 win") and the total number of balls paid out (here, 450 pts) are displayed as the match results. In addition, the special symbol TZ stops and displays the reach miss result ("565").

However, since the remaining reserved second special symbols (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state include ones that will result in a small win, the result display executed here is a special result display (a type of pre-reading effect) that suggests that the remaining reserved second special symbols (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state include ones that will result in a small win. Specifically, multiple star images YG are displayed in a position that avoids the text images in the result display. Then, when the stopping time has elapsed, the normal time-saving game state ends with four second reserved memories remaining, the game transitions to the normal game state, and the first right-hit image MG1 is erased.

After that, when the first second special symbol change display (miss change effect) based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state starts, the special symbol TZ change display starts while the result display continues, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", as shown in FIG. 144(d). Then, after the change time has passed, the special symbol TZ stops and displays a losing number ("749"), as shown in FIG. 144(e). Note that the game count GK remains hidden throughout the period in which the result display is being performed, and even if the change effect is executed, the game count is only added internally, and cannot be grasped visually.

Then, when the second display of the second special symbol (small win display) based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state starts, the display of the special symbol TZ starts to change, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "3" to "2", as shown in FIG. 144(f). At this time, a revival display starts, and a text image saying "Not yet!" is displayed, followed by a display in which ally character C2 counterattacks enemy character C3.

When ally character C2 launches a final attack, as shown in FIG. 144(g), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the performance position, and the audio output device 9 outputs a "queen, queen" notification sound (indicating that the current variable display of the second special symbol will result in a small win). At this time, the top lamp 10b goes out, and the winning light-emitting performance ends.

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the performance position to the standby position and the revival performance ends, the performance pattern 70a temporarily stops at the special number ("555") common to both small and big wins, and when the temporary stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 144(h), the performance pattern 70a stops at the special number ("555") common to both small and big wins, and the special pattern TZ stops at the small win number ("5V5") including the "V" indicating a small win. Also, the number of games GK is redisplayed after the increment.

Then, when the stop time has elapsed, the series of effects described above ends, and the opening of the small win game begins. As shown in FIG. 144(i), a "BONUS" image is displayed to indicate that the small win game is being played, and a first right-hit image MG1 is displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball to the right of the game area 5a.

After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 144(j), the "BONUS" image is replaced with a second right-hit image MG2 that prompts the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, when a jackpot game is executed, a "jackpot" image indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is displayed at the opening of the jackpot game, and a first right-hit image MG1 is displayed encouraging the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a. After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the "jackpot" image is replaced with a second right-hit image MG2 encouraging the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a.

In this way, if the remaining reserved second special symbols (second reserved memory stored during the specific game state) at the time of transition to the normal game state include one that is a small win as a result of the pre-reading, it is possible to execute a special result display (pre-reading effect) that confirms that it will be a small win. Therefore, while the result display gives the player a sense of loss, it is also possible to give the player a sense of security, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when a small win occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol when the normal game state is entered (the second reservation memory stored during the specific game state), the first movable member 73a operates in the same manner as when a big win occurs. This makes it possible to effectively present the execution of a small win game, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a small win occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (the second reserved memory stored during the specific game state) when the normal game state is entered, the same notification sound ("queen, queen") as in the case of a big win is output from the sound output device 9. This makes it possible to effectively present the fact that a small win game is being played, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a small win occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory stored during the specific game state) when the normal game state is entered, the same result as that of a big win (a special result of three of the same numbers in a row) is displayed as the performance symbol 70a. This makes the player aware that a small win game can lead to a big win game, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the change time of the change performance based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol may be shorter than the stop time of the special symbol TZ stopped in the change performance that is the final change of the time-saving. In other words, it is possible to display the end suggestion screen (result display, shutter image SY display) during the execution of the final change performance in the advantageous state, and to continue displaying the end suggestion screen until a predetermined number of change performances (the number of remaining reservations of the second special symbol) are executed after the advantageous state ends, and it is possible to shorten the change time of the change performance performed while the display of the end suggestion screen continues to be displayed than the pattern stop time of the final change performance in the advantageous state. In this case, when a revival performance is executed in the change performance executed from the end of the advantageous state to the end of the display of the end suggestion screen, it is possible to suppress the delay until the revival performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, the change presentation performed while the end suggestion is displayed is performed in a special change pattern (change of only the special symbol TZ) that is not performed in the normal game state.

In addition, if a jackpot occurs during a variable presentation executed while the end suggestion screen (result display) is displayed, the execution rate of a reach presentation is lower than when a jackpot occurs while the end suggestion screen is not displayed. Note that "if a jackpot occurs during a variable presentation executed while the end suggestion screen is displayed, the execution rate of a reach presentation is lower than when a jackpot occurs while the end suggestion screen is not displayed" also includes the case where a reach presentation is not executed (0%) when a jackpot occurs during a variable presentation executed while the end suggestion screen is displayed. In addition, if a jackpot occurs during a variable presentation executed while the end suggestion screen is displayed, and if a jackpot occurs while the end suggestion screen is not displayed, the jackpot notification is executed while the end suggestion screen is displayed.

The special result display is executed when the remaining reserved second special symbols at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reserved memory stored during the specific game state) include a small win, but the special result display may be executed in the same display mode as in the case of a small win even if the remaining reserved second special symbols at the time of transition to the normal game state include a big win. Also, a special result display with a different display mode may be executed for a small win and a big win.

In addition, when a small win occurs in the variable display of the second special pattern based on the remaining reserved second special pattern (second reserved memory stored during the specific game state) when transitioning to the normal game state, the same result as in the case of a big win (a special result of three identical numbers in a row) is displayed as the performance pattern 70a, but even when the same result occurs, the colors of the numbers may be different, and it may be possible to vary whether or not a specific image (specific letters or decorative images) is added to the numbers.

In addition, if the remaining reserved second special symbols at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reserved memory stored during the specific game state) include one that will result in a small win, the same special result display is performed regardless of the type of small win game (= special stop symbol data), but different types of special result display may also be performed depending on the type of small win game.

(Example 2 of a small win with the remaining reserve of the second special symbol when transitioning to the normal game state)
Using Figure 145, we will explain example 2 of the presentation when a small win occurs with the remaining reserved second special pattern (second reserved memory) when transitioning to the normal game state.

Here, as the second special symbol, which is the final time-saving variation, begins to change, a series of effects is started that make it look as if one variation effect is being performed over multiple times, and as shown in FIG. 145(a), a final battle reach effect, which is a loss, is being performed. At this time, the winning light-up effect, which predicts the second reserved memory (small win), continues, and the top lamp 10b is lit in yellow.

After that, when the final battle reach performance reaches its final stage (the timing for executing the performance to decide whether it is a miss or not), the pre-reading successful performance starts and the ally character C2 launches a final attack on the enemy character C3. Then, as shown in FIG. 145(b), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the performance position, and the sound output device 9 outputs a "queen queen" notification sound (this notifies the player that the second special pattern to be executed after this will result in a small win).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the presentation position to the standby position and the successful decision presentation ends, as shown in FIG. 145(c), the word "WIN" is displayed to notify the player that a small win or a big win has been achieved. Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 145(d), the word "WIN" continues to be displayed and the special pattern TZ stops at the reach miss result ("565"). Then, when the stopping time has elapsed, the time-saving game state ends with four second reserved memories remaining, and the game transitions to the normal game state, and the first right-hit image MG1 is erased.

After that, when the first display of the second special pattern (display of a miss) based on the remaining reserved second special pattern (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state begins, as shown in FIG. 145(e), the display of the text image "WIN" continues, the display of the special pattern TZ begins, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3".

Next, when the variation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 145(f), the special symbol TZ stops at a losing number ("938") while the text image "WIN" continues to be displayed. After that, when the stop time has elapsed, the second variation display (small win variation display) of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state begins, and as shown in FIG. 145(g), the variation display of the special symbol TZ begins while the text image "WIN" continues to be displayed, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "3" to "2."

After that, when the change time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at the special number ("555") common to both small and big wins, and when the temporary stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 145(h), the performance symbol 70a stops at the special number ("555") common to both small and big wins, and the special symbol TZ stops at the small win number ("5V5") including the "V" indicating a small win. Also, the number of games played GK is displayed again.

When the stop time has elapsed, the series of effects described above ends, and the opening of the small win game begins. As shown in FIG. 145(i), a "BONUS" image is displayed to indicate that the small win game is being played, and a first right-hit image MG1 is displayed to encourage the player to launch the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a. After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, a second right-hit image MG2 is displayed to encourage the player to launch the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a, in place of the "BONUS" image, as shown in FIG. 145(j).

On the other hand, when a jackpot game is executed, a "jackpot" image indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is displayed at the opening of the jackpot game, and a first right-hit image MG1 is displayed encouraging the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a. After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the "jackpot" image is replaced with a second right-hit image MG2 encouraging the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a.

In this way, if the variable effect related to the remaining reserved second special symbol during the transition to the normal game state is a small win or a big win, even if the final variable effect in the time-saving game state is a miss, a battle effect of victory confirmation (pre-reading decision successful effect) is executed as a type of pre-reading effect. Therefore, it is possible to execute a variable effect with an element of surprise, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the presentation style of the opening performance when a small win game is played is different from the presentation style of the opening performance when a big win game is played. Therefore, it is possible to know from the opening performance whether it is a small win game or a big win game, which makes the game more interesting.

In addition, in FIG. 144 and FIG. 145, the content of the variable presentation when a small win game is executed and when a big win game is executed are the same, but the content of the variable presentation when a small win game is executed and when a big win game is executed may be different. In this case, the time that the first movable member 73a is in the presentation position may be different between when a small win game is executed and when a big win game is executed, and the light emission mode of the first movable member 73a may be different.

(Example of a small win in the Super Ranbu mode)
Using Figure 146, an example of the presentation when a small win game is played in Chou Ranbu mode will be described.

Here, as a result of the variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol executed in Chou Ranbu mode, the small win special symbol is displayed stationary, the first small win game is started, and the opening of the first small win game is started.

When the opening of the first small win game ends and the opening and closing game begins in which the first large win opening and closing member 51 and the specific area opening and closing member 52 are changed in state, as shown in FIG. 146(a), a third right-hit image MG3 is displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball at the specific area 53, and a limit notification effect is started according to the remaining period of the opening and closing game (the remaining time the game ball can pass through the specific area 53). Specifically, a count image CG (here, "09:99") is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and the display size expands as the time passes while counting down. At this time, the number of games GK is hidden in response to the start of the small win game.

Immediately after that, when the gaming ball passes (enters) the specific area 53, as shown in FIG. 146(b), a passing notification effect is started to indicate that the gaming ball has passed (entered) the specific area 53. Specifically, a passing notification image TH consisting of the letter "V" is displayed, and a passing notification sound "Vakkuun♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

After that, as shown in FIG. 146(c), the passing notification effect (here, the display of the winning notification image NH) continues until the timing of the end of the opening and closing game (state conversion of the first large winning opening opening member 51 and the specific area opening and closing member 52), that is, until the end of the small winning game (conversion game). After that, when the first small winning game ends and the opening of the big winning game (first V big winning game) starts, as shown in FIG. 146(d), a "V-BONUS" image is displayed indicating that the big winning game (first V big winning game) will be executed. Then, after a predetermined time has passed, as shown in FIG. 146(e), the round game starts and the big winning performance is executed. In addition, the total number of paid balls "660pt" according to the total number of game media paid out during the small winning game is displayed, and the total number of paid balls is updated every time a game ball enters the second large winning opening 56 during the first V big winning game.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time (here, 8 seconds) elapses after the start of the small win game without the gaming ball passing (winning) the specific area 53, the count image CG becomes "01:99" and is displayed in a larger size than in FIG. 146(a), as shown in FIG. 146(f). If the gaming ball passes (enters) the specific area 53 immediately after that, the above-mentioned passing notification effect starts, as shown in FIG. 146(b), the passing notification image TH is displayed, and the passing notification sound "Bam!" is output from the audio output device 9.

After that, as shown in FIG. 146(c), the passing notification effect (here, the display of the winning notification image NH) continues until the timing of the end of the opening and closing game (state conversion of the first large winning opening opening member 51 and the specific area opening and closing member 52), that is, until the end of the small winning game (conversion game). After that, when the first small winning game ends and the opening of the big winning game (first V big winning game) starts, as shown in FIG. 146(d), a "V-BONUS" image is displayed indicating that the big winning game (first V big winning game) will be executed. Then, after a predetermined time has passed, as shown in FIG. 146(e), the round game starts and the big winning performance is executed. In addition, the total number of paid balls "660pt" according to the total number of game media paid out during the small winning game is displayed, and the total number of paid balls is updated every time a game ball enters the second large winning opening 56 during the first V big winning game.

When the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 (win) and the remaining time of the opening and closing game becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 146(g), the count image CG displayed in a larger size than FIG. 146(f) becomes "00:00". At the end of the first small win game, a disappointment notification effect is executed to notify the player that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small win game (more specifically, during the opening and closing game), and a "disappointment" text image and a fainted character are displayed, and a disappointment sound effect "ding" is output from the audio output device 9.

After that, when the ending of the first small win game is completed, as shown in FIG. 146 (h), the remaining number of small wins (Z) is reduced to 1, and the presentation mode is downgraded from Super Ranbu Mode or Infinite Mode to Ranbu Mode. Then, the Ranbu Mode background corresponding to the Ranbu Mode is displayed, and the presentation pattern 70a and special pattern TZ are redisplayed. Furthermore, the second reserved icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the time-saving remaining number image KG is also redisplayed. Furthermore, the number of games GK is redisplayed.

Then, when the variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 146(i), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ start, the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", the four reserved icons HI displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the time-saving remaining number image KG changes from "80 times remaining" to "79 times remaining". Also, the number of games GK is incremented by 1.

In this way, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during a small win game (more specifically, an open/close game), a passing notification effect is executed to indicate that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53. Therefore, even if it is difficult to see inside the first large prize opening 50 (around the specific area 53), the player can be sure that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (that a large win game is being executed), which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during a small win game (more specifically, an opening and closing game), the passing notification effect continues until the small win game (more specifically, an opening and closing game) ends, regardless of the timing of the passing through the specific area 53. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the player not being able to notice the passing notification effect, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the small win game (conversion game), a limit notification effect is executed according to the remaining time of the opening and closing game (the remaining time during which the game ball can pass through the specific area 53). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately encourage the player to launch the game ball so that it passes through the specific area 53, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of missing the chance to win the big win game.

In addition, the notification mode of the limit notification effect (count numbers, size of the count image) changes (to increase appeal to the player) according to the remaining time of the opening and closing game (the remaining time during which the game ball can pass through the specific area 53). Therefore, it is possible to increase the appeal to the player as time passes, and to avoid inconveniences such as missing a chance to win a jackpot game.

In addition, the limit notification performance includes a countdown display that allows the player to determine the remaining time for the opening and closing game, allowing the player to accurately grasp the time when he or she has a chance to win the jackpot, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, in a small win game (conversion game), if the opening and closing game execution period elapses without the game ball passing through the specific area 53, a disappointment notification effect is executed to notify the player that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small win game (more specifically, during the opening and closing game). This makes it possible to accurately inform the player that he or she was unable to win a big win game, and makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the player feeling dissatisfied because the result of the small win game is unknown.

In addition, in a small win game (opening and closing game) executed as a result of a variable effect (variable display of special symbols) executed in the super wild dance mode (same for the infinite mode), if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 and the execution period of the open and closing game elapses and the small win game ends, the remaining number of small wins is reduced to 1 when the small win special symbol stops, and the game is downgraded to the wild dance mode, which corresponds to the remaining number of small wins being 1. Therefore, by switching to a performance mode according to the remaining number of small wins, game conditions that are consistent with the player's understanding when a big win game or small win game is executed thereafter are set, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during a small win game executed during the time-saving game state, if the remaining number of small wins (Z) is not "0" (the number of time-saving games is also not "0"), the time-saving game state will continue. Therefore, even if the game ball cannot be launched during a small win game due to a malfunction of the launching device or ball jamming, the player will not suffer an extreme disadvantage, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the limit notification effect is set according to the remaining time of the open/close play, but it may also be set according to the remaining time until the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 is finally closed, or according to the remaining time of the small prize play.

In addition, a countdown display is executed as a limit notification effect, but a gauge image may be displayed for the remaining period of the opening and closing game, and a display effect may be executed in which the length of the gauge is shortened as time passes. In addition, a specific light-emitting means may be turned on for the remaining period of the opening and closing game, and a light-emitting effect may be executed in which the light-emitting color is changed as time passes (for example, blue light → yellow light → red light).

In addition, in a small win game executed during the time-saving game state, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 but the time-saving game state continues, the time-saving remaining number of times image KG is displayed in a state in which the remaining number of times can be known (e.g., 80 times remaining), but it may also be displayed so that the remaining number of times cannot be known (is unknown), such as "??? times."

In addition, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during a small win game executed during the time-saving game state but the time-saving game state continues, a suggestion effect may be executed to suggest that the super-ranbu mode or the infinite mode will not continue by displaying a text image such as "Maybe going to Ranbu mode."

(Example of a presentation when the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of a small win in the Ranbu mode)
Using Figure 147, we will explain an example of the presentation when the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of a small win game in the Ranbu mode.

Here, as a result of the variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol executed in the Ranbu mode, the small win special symbol is displayed stationary, the first small win game is started, and the opening of the first small win game is started. At this time, the number of games GK is hidden in response to the start of the small win game.

When the opening of the first small prize game ends and the opening and closing game begins in which the first large prize opening and closing member 51 and the specific area opening and closing member 52 are changed in state, as shown in FIG. 147(a), a third right-hit image MG3 is displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball at the specific area 53, and a limit notification effect is started according to the remaining period of the opening and closing game (the remaining time the game ball can pass through the specific area 53). Specifically, a count image CG (here, "09:99") is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and the display size expands as the time passes while counting down.

After that, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 (win) and the remaining time of the opening and closing game becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 147(c), the count image CG displayed in a larger size than FIG. 147(a) becomes "00:00". Also, at the ending of the first small win game, a disappointment notification effect is executed to notify the player that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small win game (more specifically, during the opening and closing game), and a "disappointment" text image and a fainted character are displayed, and a disappointment sound effect "ding" is output from the audio output device 9.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 147(c), an end suggestion effect is executed to suggest that the time-saving game state is ending. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the shutter image SY closes to block the background image, the "Sorry" text image, and the fainted character, and when the ending period ends, as shown in FIG. 147(d), the special symbol TZ "5V5" for the small win mode is redisplayed, and the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F are redisplayed.

After that, when the first second special symbol change display (miss change display) based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state starts, as shown in FIG. 147(e), the shutter image SY (obstructed image) continues to be displayed and the special symbol TZ change display starts, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3". Note that the game count GK remains hidden throughout the period that the shutter image SY is displayed, and even if a change performance is executed, the game count is only added internally and cannot be grasped visually.

In addition, during the period when the variable display based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is being executed, that is, during the period when the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot preview effect and the look-ahead effect are not executed.

Furthermore, after the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 147(f), the special symbol TZ is displayed as a stop with a losing result ("346") while the shutter image SY (obscuring image) continues to be displayed. After that, the change and stop display of the special symbol TZ is repeated while the shutter image SY (obscuring image) is displayed until the remaining reserved number (second reserved memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state reaches 0.

Then, when the remaining reserved number (second reserved memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state has reached 0, the time for the special symbol TZ to change has elapsed, and the special symbol TZ will stop and display a losing number ("559") while the shutter image SY (obstructed image) continues to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 147(g).

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol TZ has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 147(h), the shutter image SY (blocking image) disappears, and the presentation mode A background image is displayed, along with the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C, and a left-hit image HG that prompts the player to shoot the game ball is displayed on the left side of the game area 5a. Also, the number of games GK is redisplayed after being incremented.

Then, when the display of the first special pattern based on the remaining reserved number of the first special pattern (first reserved memory) starts, the display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ starts, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C and is displayed as the icon TI.

In this way, in the small win game (opening and closing game) executed as a result of the variable effect (variable display of special symbols) executed in the Ranbu mode (including the case of the entering battle mode), if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 and the execution period of the open and close game elapses and the small win game ends, the remaining number of small wins is reduced to 0 when the small win special symbol stops, and the time-saving game state ends, and the game is downgraded to the effect mode A corresponding to the normal game state (the player is notified that the game is in the normal game state). Therefore, the game state is set in a way that is consistent with the player's perception, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the case where the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during a small win game and the execution period of the open/close game elapses, and the small win game ends (the time-saving game state does not continue), the result display is not executed before the fact that the game state is normal is notified (various presentation images corresponding to presentation mode A are displayed). Therefore, the game can be progressed without giving the player a sense of loss for having missed out on the big win game and the time-saving game state, making the game more interesting.

In addition, a series of effects is executed to make it look as if one change effect is being executed from the change display of the second special symbol, which is the final change of the time-saving mode, to the change display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved number of the second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game mode. Therefore, the player can experience a novel effect that does not make them strongly aware of the remaining reserved number of the second special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, during the display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved second special symbol in the series of effects, the display of the special symbol TZ is the only one that is changed, without displaying the change of the performance symbol 70a. This makes it easier to recognize multiple change performances as a series of effects, and improves the effect of the series of effects.

In addition, instead of displaying a left-hit image HG that encourages the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a when transitioning to the normal game state, the left-hit image HG is displayed at the end of a series of effects. This prevents the player from shooting unnecessary game balls, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the advantageous game state (time-saving game state) controlled after the big win can be ended when the number of small wins reaches a specified number, and if the game medium does not pass through a specific area during the small win game that is executed as the specified number of small wins, a screen suggesting the end of the advantageous game state (result display, shutter image SY) is displayed, and the display period of the end suggestion screen changes depending on whether there is a special 2 reservation (second reservation memory) or not when the small win game ends. Therefore, if the game medium does not pass through a specific area during the small win game, it is possible to inform the player that the advantageous game state has ended, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of the progress of the game being unclear and to increase the interest of the game. In addition, by changing the display period of the end suggestion screen depending on the presence or absence of a special 2 reservation, it is possible to execute an end suggestion performance in a manner that reflects the progress of the game, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

If the first end condition (number of time-saving wins) or the second end condition (number of small wins) is met during the advantageous state, it is possible to end the advantageous state, and if the advantageous state (time-saving game state) ends due to the first end condition being met (the number of time-saving wins being consumed), a result display is executed, and if the advantageous state ends due to the second end condition being met (the number of small wins being consumed), a result display is not executed. This makes it possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction when the advantageous state ends, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, during the period when the variable display based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is being executed, that is, during the period when the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot preview performance and the look-ahead performance are not executed, but the execution of the jackpot preview performance may be permitted and the execution of the look-ahead performance may be restricted, or vice versa. Also, the execution of a specific preview performance among the jackpot preview performances (e.g., a winning/losing performance or a jackpot confirmation performance, etc.) may be permitted and the execution of other preview performances (e.g., a dialogue preview performance, a roulette preview performance, a cut-in preview performance, etc.) may be restricted, or the execution of a specific performance among the look-ahead performances (e.g., a winning light-emitting performance, etc.) may be permitted and the execution of other performances (e.g., a look-ahead zone performance or a look-ahead countdown performance, etc.) may be restricted.

(Example of a special time-saving effect)
148, a description will be given of an example of a special time-saving effect that is executed due to the fact that the RWM has not been cleared at the start of power supply. The special time-saving effect includes an RWM clear negation effect that suggests that the RWM has not been cleared (is stationary), and an activation counter display that suggests the number of changes until the game transitions to a special time-saving game state.

Here, assume that 395 special symbol changes (changing effects) have been performed since the end of the jackpot game, the power supply is stopped (power OFF) during normal game mode, and when the power supply is resumed (power ON), the game control state is restored, and then 48 special symbol changes (changing effects) have been performed.

As shown in FIG. 148(a), the first special symbol variable display (variable display) has started in the normal game state (display mode A) as the 49th special symbol variable display since the power supply was resumed (the game control state was restored), and a "2" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E, a "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area 70F, two hold icons HI are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, 49 times is displayed as the number of games GK.

After that, when the time for the first special symbol to change has elapsed and the first special symbol stops and displays as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. 148(b), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop and display as a losing number ("814"). In addition, the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the first special symbol variable display (variable performance) starts as the variable display of the special symbol for the 50th time since the power supply was resumed and there are less than 100 times remaining until the special time-saving play state, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, as shown in FIG. 148(c), the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK increases from 49 to 50.

At this time, if it is decided to perform the RWM clear negation effect and the activation counter display, as shown in FIG. 148(d), a fixed notification character SC is displayed as the RWM clear negation effect, and an activation counter display is displayed with a notification logo LG including the text "Help Time", which means a special time-saving game state, and a text image of "66 remaining", which indicates the remaining number of changes. In addition, a game ball enters the first start hole 45, the first reserved number display area 70E increases from "1" to "2", and a reserved icon HI is additionally displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, the fixed notification character SC and the activation counter display are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the screen so as not to obstruct the visibility of the performance pattern 70a, as shown in FIG. 148(e).

After that, when the first special symbol has stopped displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("624"), as shown in FIG. 148(f). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the text image of the activation counter display is updated to "65 remaining."

In addition, when the first special symbol variable display (variable performance) begins as the 51st special symbol variable display since the power supply was resumed, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ begins, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI, as shown in FIG. 148(g). At this time, the number of games GK increases from 50 to 51.

Then, the first special symbol is repeatedly changed (changed) and stopped. When the special symbol is changed for the 60th time since the power supply was resumed and the 10th time since the start of the RWM clear negation effect, the special symbol is stopped as a losing number ("294") as shown in FIG. 148(h). The icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the text image of the activation counter display is updated to "55 remaining", and the fixed notification character SC that is executed over the 10 change displays is erased, ending the execution of the RWM clear negation effect.

If the execution of the RWM clear negation effect is not determined when the special symbol changes for the 50th time since the power supply was resumed (the game control state was restored) and there are less than 100 times remaining until the special time-saving game state is reached, then the execution of the RWM clear negation effect will be determined when the special symbol changes for the 100th time since the power supply was resumed, on the condition that the special time-saving game state is not reached (the game is in normal game state).

In addition, if the execution of the activation counter display is not determined when the special symbol variation display is performed for the 50th time since the power supply is resumed (the game control state is restored) and there are less than 100 times remaining until the special time-saving game state is entered, the execution of the activation counter display will be determined when the special symbol variation display is performed for the 100th time since the power supply is resumed, provided that the special time-saving game state is not entered (the game is in the normal game state).

In this way, if the RWM is not cleared when the power supply starts, the RWM clear negation effect (display of the stationary notification character SC) is executed during the variable display (variation effect) of the special pattern that is the specified number of times (50th or 100th) since the power supply is resumed. This makes it easier for the player to visually grasp that the machine is in a stationary state where the RWM has not been cleared, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The RWM clear negation effect is also executed from the start of the RWM clear negation effect until the special symbol variable display (variable effect) is executed multiple times (here, 10 times). Therefore, even if the player misses the start of the RWM clear negation effect, the player can be reliably informed that the RWM clear negation effect is being executed, which makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if the RWM is not cleared when the power supply starts, an activation counter display (display of a notification logo LG including the text "Help Time", which means a special time-saving game state, and a text image of "66 remaining", which indicates the number of remaining changes) is executed during the special symbol changing display (changing presentation) that occurs a predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) since the power supply is resumed. This allows the player to know the number of times the special symbol changing display (changing presentation) will occur before the special time-saving game state is entered, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the text image showing the remaining number of changes as an activation counter display is made up of only numbers and does not include unit indications such as times or number of times. This increases the likelihood that the player will look up what the numbers mean, and by increasing the opportunities for players to see the model information, it is possible to deepen their understanding of the gaming machine and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the text image showing the remaining number of fluctuations as the activation counter display is updated not at the start of the fluctuation performance, when it is more likely that a jackpot preview performance or a look-ahead performance will be executed (started), but at the time when the performance pattern stops and is less likely to be executed (started) than at the start of the fluctuation performance. This makes it easier for players to recognize the decrement in the activation counter, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the timing for executing the RWM clear negation effect and the timing for displaying the activation counter are set to the same time (the 50th or 100th time after the power supply is restarted). This effectively informs the player of the transition to the special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if the power is cut off during normal play after the normal time-saving play state ends and then restored, a specific notification regarding whether or not the RAM has been cleared (such as an RWM clear denial display) can be executed, but if the power is cut off during normal play after the special time-saving play state ends and then restored, no specific notification regarding whether or not the RAM has been cleared is executed. This makes it possible to notify the player of useful information, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, a specific notification (such as a RWM clear denial effect) can be executed over multiple fluctuations. Furthermore, if the number of fluctuations up to the special time-saving game state is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (denominator of the probability of a big win), the specific notification is not executed.
In addition, a specific notification is executed at the same time as displaying the number of fluctuations until the special time-saving game state is reached.
In addition, there are cases where a special notification is executed simultaneously with the display of the number of fluctuations until the special time-saving game state is reached, and cases where only the special notification is executed.

The timing for executing the RWM clear negation effect and the activation counter display is during the variable display (variation effect) of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (50th or 100th) after the power supply is resumed (the game control state is restored), but the RWM clear negation effect and the activation counter display may be executed during the variable display (variation effect) of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (for example, 50th or 100th) before the transition to the special time-saving game state, or one of the RWM clear negation effect and the activation counter display may be during the variable display (variation effect) of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (for example, 50th or 100th) after the power supply is resumed (the game control state is restored), and the other may be during the variable display (variation effect) of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (for example, 50th or 100th) before the transition to the special time-saving game state. In such a case, it may be executed at a predetermined rate 50 times before the transition to the special time-saving game state, and if it has not been executed 50 times before, it may be executed 100 times without fail.

(Example of a presentation when the machine is in a waiting state when it transitions to a special time-saving game mode)
Using Figure 149, an example of the presentation when the machine transitions to a special time-saving game state and enters a customer waiting state will be described.

Here, the 496th special symbol change display (changing performance) has been completed since the end of the jackpot game, and the activation counter display has already been executed.

As shown in FIG. 149(a), the first special symbol change display (change presentation) has begun as the 497th special symbol change display since the end of the jackpot game, and "3" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F, three reserved icons HI are displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, the number of games played GK is displayed as 112, and the activation counter display is "4 remaining."

At this time, as shown in FIG. 149(a), when the number of remaining fluctuations until the special time-saving game state is reached reaches three in response to the start of the fluctuation effect, a countdown effect is started and an image of the number "3" is displayed, indicating that there are three remaining fluctuations.

After that, when the first special symbol has stopped displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("814") as shown in FIG. 149(b). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the text image of the activation counter display is updated to "3 remaining."

In addition, when the first special symbol change display (change display) starts as the 498th special symbol change display from the end of the jackpot game, the display of the display pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ starts changing as shown in FIG. 149(c), the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK increases from 112 to 113, and the number image of "2" indicating two games remaining is displayed as a countdown display.

When the first special symbol has stopped displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("594"), as shown in FIG. 149(d). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the text image of the activation counter display is updated to "2 remaining."

After that, when the first special symbol change display (change display) starts as the 499th special symbol change display from the end of the jackpot game, the display of the display pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ starts changing as shown in FIG. 149(e), the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 113 to 114, and the number image of "1" indicating one remaining game is displayed as a countdown display.

When the first special symbol has stopped displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("634"), as shown in FIG. 149(f). The icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the text image of the activation counter display is updated to "1 remaining."

Then, when the first special symbol variable display (variable effect) starts as the variable display of the 500th special symbol, which is the specified number of times since the end of the jackpot game, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, as shown in FIG. 149(g), the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C and is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 114 to 115, and a number image of "0" indicating 0 remaining games is displayed as a countdown effect.

After that, when the first special symbol stops displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("234"), as shown in FIG. 149(h). The icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the text image of the activation counter display is updated to "0 remaining." In addition, because the special time-saving game state has started due to the stopping display of the losing special symbol, a first right-hit image MG1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, encouraging the player to shoot the game ball to the right of the game area 5a.

In addition, when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 149(i), the reserved memory becomes "0" and the customer waiting state is initiated, but the display of the Mode A background image and the activation counter display corresponding to the normal gaming state is maintained, and the transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state is awaited.

After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., 90 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the waiting-for-customers state, the waiting-for-customers demo performance begins as shown in FIG. 149(j), and a guide image AN is displayed saying "Help Time Equipped," indicating that the machine is equipped with Help Time, which is the name of the special time-saving game state. After that, when the execution period of the waiting-for-customers demo performance has elapsed, the machine returns to the state shown in FIG. 149(i), and the machine repeatedly transitions between the state in FIG. 149(i) and the state in FIG. 149(j) until the variable display of the special symbol (variable performance) begins.

In this way, a countdown effect is executed suggesting a transition to the special time-saving game state from the changing display (changing effect) of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (here, three times) before the transition to the special time-saving game state. This allows the player to clearly grasp when the special time-saving game state will occur, and also increases the player's anticipation for the occurrence of the special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the right hit notification is sent via the first right hit image MG1 when the time for the special symbol to change display has elapsed for the specified number of times (500 times) since the end of the big win game and the special symbol is displayed stationary, entering the special time-saving game state, that is, during the time when the special symbol is stopped. This makes it possible to prompt the player to make a right hit as early as possible, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the time for the special symbol to change display 500 times (the specified number of times) has elapsed since the end of the jackpot game and the special symbol is displayed stationary, entering the special time-saving game state, the presentation mode is set to wait for a transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as the stationary display of the presentation symbol becoming difficult to see, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, even if the special time-saving game state is entered, if the machine is waiting for customers, the activation counter display will remain on. For example, if a player leaves their seat and then returns, the player can be informed of the progress of the game, making the game more interesting.

In addition, during the customer waiting demo performance, a guide image AN is displayed saying "Help Time Equipped," indicating that the machine is equipped with Help Time, which is the name of the special time-saving game state. This allows the player to understand that the special time-saving game state will prevent excessive investment and provide relief, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, instead of displaying the information image AN saying "Help Time Included" throughout the entire period of the customer waiting demo performance, for example, the information image AN may not be displayed while the demo display of the model information (various performances, character introductions, etc.) is being displayed, and the information image AN may be displayed while the model name is being displayed, or vice versa. Even in this case, it is preferable not to display the information image AN while the manufacturer name is being displayed.

In addition, rather than displaying a guide image AN saying "Help Time Equipped" on the image display device, "Help Time Equipped" may be written on the surface of the game board (which may be inside or outside the game area) or on a part of the glass frame 4, or the image display device may display a guide image AN saying "Help Time Equipped" and also write "Help Time Equipped" on the surface of the game board or on a part of the glass frame 4, etc.

(Example of a performance when a variable performance is executed after transitioning to a special time-saving game state)
Using Figure 150, an example of a presentation in which a variable presentation is executed after transition from presentation mode A to a special time-saving game state will be described.

Here, as a result of the 500th display of the special symbol since the end of the jackpot game, the special losing symbol is displayed stationary, a special time-saving game state is generated, and a right-hit notification is given by the first right-hit image MG1.

In this state, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47 and the variable display of the second special symbol starts as the first variable display in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 150(a), the variable display starts and the variable display of the display symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, the number of games GK is increased from 115 to 116.

After that, if the change display of the second special symbol is a miss, as shown in FIG. 150(b), a change display pattern dedicated to the entry display is determined and the entry display of the special time-saving game state (here, a long entry display) is executed. Specifically, the notification logo LG of the activation counter display that was displayed in the lower right of the screen is moved to the center of the screen and enlarged, a text image of "START" indicating the start of the special time-saving game state is displayed, and a fourth right-hit image MG4, which is larger than the first right-hit image MG1, is displayed.

Then, after a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed, a blackout effect is executed in which the screen is covered by a dark image, as shown in FIG. 150(c), and after a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed, an infinite mode entry display is displayed, suggesting that the player is entering an infinite mode corresponding to a special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 150(d).

After that, when the display time of the infinite mode entry display has elapsed and the special time-saving play state entry presentation has ended, the special time-saving play state entry presentation image ends, and the infinite mode background image and the time-saving remaining number image KG, which indicates the remaining number of times of the second time-saving number (J2), are displayed as "749 times remaining." In addition, the number of games GK is displayed again.

In addition, when the time for the second special symbol to change has elapsed and the second special symbol stops and displays as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. 150(e), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop and display as a losing number ("234"). In addition, the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

On the other hand, if the changing display of the second special symbol is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 150(f), the activation counter display is erased and the special time-saving play state entry effect is not executed, and the effect of the effect mode A corresponding to the normal play state (such as the display of the mode A background image) continues, and the changing display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

After that, when a predetermined time has passed and the left performance pattern 70a tentatively stops at "3", as shown in FIG. 150(g), a reach teasing performance is performed to tease whether or not the right performance pattern 70a will also stop at "3". After the reach teasing performance period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 150(h), a reach state is formed and a text image saying "Completed" is displayed to indicate that the reach state has been completed, and then the middle pattern immediately tentatively stops at "3".

Then, when the time for the second special symbol to change has elapsed and the second special symbol stops to show the big win special symbol, as shown in FIG. 150(i), the performance symbol 70a stops to show the special number ("333") that is common to both the small win and the big win, and the special symbol TZ stops to show the big win number ("333") that indicates a big win, and the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

When the first variable display during the special time-saving game state is a small win for the second special symbol, the presentation will basically progress as shown in Figure 150(f) to Figure 150(i), but the result displayed as the special symbol TZ will be the small win result ("3V3").

In addition, when the first special symbol is displayed as the first display change during the special time-saving game mode, the presentation will basically progress as shown in Figures 150(a) to 150(i).

In this way, when the special symbol stops being displayed in the variable display of the special symbol a set number of times (500 times) after the end of a jackpot game, and the game transitions to a special time-saving game state, a special variable display pattern is determined for the entry effect, and the entry effect (long entry effect) of the special time-saving game state can be executed. This allows the player to recognize that the game has entered the special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, the infinite mode entry effect is executed after a blackout effect in which the screen is covered by a dark image (blocking image) as an effect to enter the special time-saving play state. This allows the player to transition from the normal play state to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving play state without feeling out of place, and also allows the player to recognize that they have transitioned to the special time-saving play state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the first special symbol change display starts in the special time-saving game state, a right-hit notification is issued by the fourth right-hit image MG4 (during the blackout effect and the infinite mode entry effect). Therefore, even players who have no knowledge of the special time-saving game state can understand that they will be making a right hit, which makes the game more interesting.

In addition, the special time-saving game state entry presentation is executed in a presentation mode different from that used when transitioning to the normal time-saving game state. This notifies the player that a time-saving game state different from the normal time-saving game state has occurred, and notifies the player that a special time-saving game state has occurred in a novel manner, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if the first special symbol change display after the transition to the special time-saving game state is a jackpot, the special time-saving game state entry performance is not executed. This prevents the player from feeling like they've lost out by quickly hitting a jackpot after transitioning to the special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Note that if the first special symbol change display after the transition to the special time-saving play state is a big win or a small win, the special time-saving play state entry effect is not executed, but it may be executed in the same way as if it is a miss.

In addition, if the first special pattern change display after transitioning to the special time-saving play state is a change display of the first special pattern, a special time-saving play state entry effect may be executed, and if the first special pattern change display is a change display of the second special pattern, the special time-saving play state entry effect may not be executed, or vice versa.

In addition, instead of performing the special time-saving play state entry effect during the first special symbol variable display after transitioning to the special time-saving play state, the special symbol static display period in the special symbol variable display in the normal play state that is a specified number of times after the end of the jackpot play may be set longer than the normal static display period, and the special time-saving play state entry effect may be executed during that static display period. In this case, the effect mode may not be set to infinite mode when the entry effect ends, but may be set to infinite mode when the next special symbol variable display (variable effect) begins.

(Example of a performance when countdown mode is activated)
151 and 152, a presentation example in which the countdown mode is executed due to the RWM being cleared at the start of power supply will be described. The countdown mode is a presentation mode that is set when the number of fluctuations until the transition to the special time-saving game state in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number (here, 50 times), and displays a countdown to raise expectations of the transition to the special time-saving game state.

Here, as shown in FIG. 151(a), the first special symbol change display (change display) has started in the normal game state (display mode A) as the 450th change display of the special symbol since the RWM was cleared when the power supply was started, and "4" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E, "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area, four hold icons HI are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, 450 times is displayed as the number of games GK.

After that, when the first special symbol has stopped displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("814") as shown in FIG. 151(b). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the first special symbol changing display (changing performance) starts as the 450th special symbol changing display since the RWM was cleared when the power supply was started, the performance pattern 70a and special symbol TZ changing display starts as shown in FIG. 151(c), the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "4" to "3", and the four reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK increases from 450 to 451.

At this time, since the condition for activating the countdown mode of 50 times until the special time-saving game state is met, the introduction effect for the countdown mode is executed as shown in FIG. 151(d). Specifically, an effect is executed in which the door image TO (obstructing image) closes so as to obscure the background image and various icons, and as shown in FIG. 151(e), a text image is displayed stating "Entering countdown mode. If you can hold out until the count reaches 0, you will enter infinite mode."

When the mode switches to countdown mode, as shown in FIG. 151(f), the door image TO disappears, the countdown mode background image is displayed, and the countdown mode icon IC is displayed in the bottom right of the screen to indicate (notify) that the mode is countdown mode, and the text image "49 remaining" is displayed in the top left of the screen as the countdown display CD, indicating that there are 49 remaining times. Also, the performance pattern 70a changes from a display mode including characters and numbers to a display mode of numbers only.

After that, when the first special symbol has stopped displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("673") as shown in FIG. 151(g). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 151(h), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK increases from 451 to 452, and the countdown display CD is reduced to "48 remaining", indicating that 48 games remain.

Then, the first special symbol is repeatedly displayed changing (changing effect) and stopped. When the first special symbol has been displayed stopping as a losing special symbol for the 496th time since the RWM was cleared and the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 151(i), the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed stopping as a losing number ("175"). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. At this time, the number of games GK is displayed as "496 times", and the countdown display CD is displayed as "4 remaining", indicating that there are 4 games remaining.

After that, when the first special symbol change display (change display) starts as the 497th special symbol change display after the RWM is cleared, the display of the change display of the display pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, as shown in FIG. 152(j), the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "4" to "3", the four reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 496 to 497, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "3 remaining", and when the number of remaining changes until the special time-saving play state becomes 3 in response to the start of the change display, the countdown display starts and the character image of "3" indicating 3 remaining is displayed.

After that, when the time for the first special symbol to change has elapsed and the first special symbol stops at the losing special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop at the losing number ("763") as shown in FIG. 152(k). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In addition, when the first special symbol change display (change performance) starts as the 498th special symbol change display after the RWM is cleared, the performance pattern 70a and special symbol TZ change display starts as shown in FIG. 152(l), the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, with one icon being displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK increases from 497 to 498, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "2 remaining", and the text image of "2" indicating two games remaining is displayed as a countdown performance.

When the first special symbol has stopped displaying the losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying the losing number ("813") as shown in FIG. 152(m). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the first special symbol change display (change performance) starts as the 499th special symbol change display after the RWM is cleared, the performance pattern 70a and special symbol TZ change display starts as shown in FIG. 152(n), the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 498 to 499, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "1 remaining", and the text image of "1" indicating one remaining is displayed as a countdown performance.

When the first special symbol has stopped displaying the losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying the losing number ("273") as shown in FIG. 152(o). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In addition, when the first special symbol change display (changing performance) starts as the 500th special symbol change display, which is the specified number of times after the RWM is cleared, the performance pattern 70a and special symbol TZ change display starts as shown in FIG. 152(p), the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C and is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 499 to 500, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "0 remaining", and the number image of "0" indicating 0 remaining is displayed as a countdown performance.

After that, when the first special symbol stops displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the first special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("134"), as shown in FIG. 152(q). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. Because the special time-saving game state has started due to the stopping display of the losing special symbol, a first right-hit image MG1 is displayed in the right-hit corner of the screen, encouraging the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area 5a.

In addition, when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 152(r), the reserved memory becomes "0" and the customer waiting state begins, but the Mode A background image and countdown display corresponding to the normal gaming state are maintained, and the transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state is awaited.

After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., 90 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the waiting-for-customers state, the waiting-for-customers demo performance begins as shown in FIG. 152(s), and a guide image AN is displayed saying "Help Time Equipped," indicating that the machine is equipped with Help Time, which is the name of the special time-saving game state. After that, when the execution period of the waiting-for-customers demo performance has elapsed, the machine returns to the state shown in FIG. 152(r), and the machine repeatedly transitions between the state in FIG. 152(r) and the state in FIG. 152(s) until the variable display of the special symbol (variable performance) begins.

In this way, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner a predetermined number of times (here, 50 times) before the transition to the special time-saving play state is made, the game transitions from one of the presentation modes A to C corresponding to the normal play state to the countdown mode. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that there is a chance to transition to the special time-saving play state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, even in countdown mode, a countdown effect is executed that suggests a transition to the special time-saving game state, starting with a changing display (changing effect) of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (here, three times) before the transition to the special time-saving game state. This allows the player to clearly grasp when the special time-saving game state will occur, and also increases the player's anticipation for the occurrence of the special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, after the RWM is cleared, the specified number of times (500 times) the special symbol's variable display time has elapsed, and the special symbol is displayed stationary, entering the special time-saving game state, in other words, the right hit notification is given by the first right hit image MG1 from the time the special symbol is stopped. This makes it possible to prompt the player to hit to the right as early as possible, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the time for the special symbol to change display has elapsed for the specified number of times, 500 times, since the RWM was cleared, and the special symbol is displayed stationary, entering the special time-saving game state, the presentation mode is set to wait for a transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as the stationary display of the presentation symbol becoming difficult to see, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, even if the machine is in a special time-saving game mode, if it is waiting for customers, the countdown display will be maintained. For example, if a player leaves their seat and then returns, the player can be informed of the progress of the game, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The countdown display is set to decrement when the changing display (changing performance) of the special symbol starts, but it may also be set to decrement when the special symbol stops being displayed.

(Example of a performance when a variable performance is executed after transitioning to a special time-saving game state)
Using Figure 153, we will explain an example of a presentation when a variable presentation is executed after transitioning from the countdown mode to a special time-saving game state.

Here, as a result of the 500th time the special symbol has changed since the RWM was cleared, a missing special symbol has stopped being displayed, creating a special time-saving game state, and a right-hit notification has been issued by the first right-hit image MG1.

In this state, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47 and the variable display of the second special symbol starts as the first variable display in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 153(a), the variable display starts, the variable display of the display symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, the number of games GK is increased from 500 to 501.

After that, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a miss, a variable display pattern that is not exclusive to the entry display is determined and a special time-saving game state entry display (here, a short entry display) is executed, as shown in FIG. 153(b). Specifically, an effect image (obscuring image) of a size that covers the background image, etc., is displayed along with a text image that reads "Achievement," and a fourth right-hit image MG4, which is larger than the first right-hit image MG1, is displayed.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, one second) has elapsed, an infinite mode entry display is displayed, suggesting that the player will enter the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 153(c). Furthermore, when the display time of the infinite mode entry display has elapsed and the special time-saving game state entry presentation ends, the special time-saving game state entry presentation image ends, and the infinite mode background image and the remaining time-saving number image KG, which indicates the remaining number of times of the second time-saving number (J2), are displayed as "749 times remaining." Additionally, the number of games GK is displayed again.

In addition, when the second special symbol has stopped displaying the losing special symbol after the time for changing the second special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying the losing number ("234") as shown in FIG. 153(d). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

On the other hand, if the changing display of the second special symbol is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 153(e), the special time-saving play state entry effect is not executed, and the countdown mode effect corresponding to the normal play state (such as the display of the countdown mode background image) continues, and the changing display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

After that, when a predetermined time has passed and the left performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at "3", as shown in FIG. 153(f), the right performance symbol 70a also temporarily stops at "3" to form a reach state, and a reach performance (reach variation without entry performance) is executed as shown in FIG. 153(g).

Then, when the time for the second special symbol to change has elapsed and the second special symbol stops to show the big win special symbol, as shown in FIG. 153(h), the performance symbol 70a stops to show the special number ("333") that is common to both the small win and the big win, and the special symbol TZ stops to show the big win number ("333") that indicates a big win, and the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

When the first variable display during the special time-saving game state is a small win for the second special symbol, the presentation will basically progress as shown in Figures 153(e) to 153(h), but the result displayed as the special symbol TZ will be the small win result ("3V3").

In addition, when the first special symbol is displayed as the first display change during the special time-saving game mode, the presentation will basically progress as shown in Figures 153(a) to 153(i).

In this way, when the special symbol stops being displayed during the variable display of the special symbol the specified number of times (500 times) after the RWM is cleared, and the game transitions to the special time-saving game state, a variable display pattern that is not exclusive to the entry display is determined, and the entry display for the special time-saving game state (short entry display) can be executed. This allows the player to recognize that the game has entered the special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The short entry effect is set to a time that is shorter than the time it takes for the shortest special pattern among multiple special pattern patterns that may be determined in the special pattern change display a set number of times (500 times) after the RWM is cleared. Therefore, no matter what special pattern is determined, the entry effect can be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the first special symbol change display after the transition to the special time-saving game state is a jackpot, the special time-saving game state entry performance is not executed. This prevents the player from feeling like they've lost out by quickly hitting a jackpot after transitioning to the special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Note that if the first special symbol change display after the transition to the special time-saving play state is a big win or a small win, the special time-saving play state entry effect is not executed, but it may be executed in the same way as if it is a miss.

In addition, if the first special pattern change display after transitioning to the special time-saving play state is a change display of the first special pattern, a special time-saving play state entry effect may be executed, and if the first special pattern change display is a change display of the second special pattern, the special time-saving play state entry effect may not be executed, or vice versa.

In addition, instead of performing the special time-saving play state entry effect during the first special symbol variable display after transitioning to the special time-saving play state, the special symbol static display period in the special symbol variable display in the normal play state that is a specified number of times after the end of the jackpot play may be set longer than the normal static display period, and the special time-saving play state entry effect may be executed during that static display period. In this case, the effect mode may not be set to infinite mode when the entry effect ends, but may be set to infinite mode when the next special symbol variable display (variable effect) begins.

In addition, in the countdown mode, an effect may be executed in which an ally character and an enemy character battle each other. In this case, a text image such as "Entering countdown mode. If the ally character can withstand the enemy character's attacks until the count reaches 0, enter infinite mode" may be displayed in the introductory effect to the countdown mode. In addition, when the game transitions to the special time-saving game state, an effect may be executed in which the ally character can withstand the enemy character's attacks until the final special pattern is displayed (the effect is changed), and in the case where the game does not transition to the special time-saving game state (the special jackpot pattern is displayed stationary and a jackpot game is executed), an effect may be executed in which the ally character cannot withstand the enemy character's attacks and loses (an effect that is the opposite of the effect in which the ally character wins against the enemy character executed as a reach effect when a jackpot game is executed when the game is not in the countdown mode).

(Example of the effect when the special time-saving game mode ends)
Using Figure 154, we will explain an example of the presentation when the number of time-saving plays (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the special time-saving game state ends.

Here, a countdown effect is executed suggesting the end of the special time-saving game state from the changing display (changing effect) of the special symbol three times before the special time-saving game state ends. Specifically, it is assumed that a number image of "3" → "2" → "1" is displayed each time the changing display (changing effect) of the special symbol is executed.

As shown in FIG. 154(a), when the time has elapsed in the variable display of the second special symbol one time before the special time-saving game state ends and the second special symbol stops and displays as a losing special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop and display as a losing number ("234"). The icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is also erased. The remaining number of time-saving games image KG, which is displayed in the same position and in the same display mode as in the normal time-saving game state, shows "1 time remaining," and the number of games GK shows "1249 times," which is the number of times that the variable display has continued from before the special time-saving game state occurred.

Then, when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol, which will end the special time-saving game state, begins, as shown in FIG. 154(b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ begins, the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", and the three reserved icons HI displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, with one being displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the time-saving remaining number image KG changes from "1 remaining" to "0 remaining", the number of games GK is increased from 1249 to 1250, and a number image of "0" indicating 0 remaining is displayed as a countdown effect.

After that, when the second special symbol has stopped displaying as a losing special symbol after the time for changing the second special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop displaying as a losing number ("134"), as shown in FIG. 154(c). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the first right-hit image MG1 is erased, since the normal game state has started due to the stopping display of the losing special symbol.

After that, when a predetermined time has passed, an end suggestion effect is executed to indicate that the time-saving game state is about to end. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the shutter image SY closes to block the background image, various icons, etc.

Then, when the first second special symbol variation display (miss variation display) based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state begins, as shown in FIG. 154(d), the shutter image SY (obstructed image) continues to be displayed, the special symbol TZ variation display begins, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "3" to "2". Note that the game count GK remains hidden throughout the period that the shutter image SY is displayed, and even if a variation presentation is executed, the game count is only added internally, and cannot be grasped visually.

In addition, during the period when the variable display based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is being executed, that is, during the period when the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot preview effect and the look-ahead effect are not executed.

In addition, after the time for the second special symbol to change has elapsed, the special symbol TZ will stop and display a losing number ("326") while the shutter image SY (obstructed image) continues to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 154(e).

Furthermore, when the first display of the second special symbol (display of a miss) based on the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state begins, as shown in FIG. 154(f), the display of the special symbol TZ begins and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "2" to "1" while the shutter image SY (obstructed image) continues to be displayed.

After that, the special symbol TZ will repeatedly change and stop while the shutter image SY (obstructed image) is displayed until the remaining reserved number (second reserved memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state reaches zero.

Then, when the remaining reserved number (second reserved memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state reaches 0, the time for the second special symbol to change has elapsed, and the special symbol TZ stops and displays a losing number ("559") while the shutter image SY (obstructed image) continues to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 154(g).

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol TZ has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 154(h), the shutter image SY (blocking image) disappears, and the presentation mode A background image is displayed, along with the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C, and a left-hit image HG that prompts the player to launch the game ball is displayed to the left of the game area 5a. Also, the number of games GK is displayed again.

Then, when the display of the first special pattern based on the remaining reserved number of the first special pattern (first reserved memory) starts, the display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ starts, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C and is displayed as the icon TI.

In this way, when the number of time-saving turns (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the special time-saving game state ends, the result display is not executed before the fact that the game state is normal is notified (various presentation images corresponding to presentation mode A are displayed). Therefore, the game can be progressed without giving the player a sense of loss for missing out on the jackpot game and time-saving game state, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the shutter image SY is displayed from the display of the second special symbol, which is the final change of the time-saving mode, to the display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved number of the second special symbol (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game mode, and only the special symbol TZ is displayed. This allows the player to experience a novel presentation that does not make them strongly aware of the remaining reserved number of the second special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of displaying a left-hit image HG that encourages the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a when transitioning to the normal game state, the left-hit image HG is displayed at the end of a series of effects. This prevents the player from shooting unnecessary game balls, making the game more interesting.

In addition, in the special time-saving play state, the remaining time-saving play count image KG is displayed in the same position and in the same display manner as in the normal time-saving play state. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that they are in the time-saving play state and the number of remaining time-saving play counts, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, during the period when the variable display based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is being executed, that is, during the period when the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot preview performance and the look-ahead performance are not executed, but the execution of the jackpot preview performance may be permitted and the execution of the look-ahead performance may be restricted, or vice versa. Also, the execution of a specific preview performance among the jackpot preview performances (e.g., a winning/losing performance or a jackpot confirmation performance, etc.) may be permitted and the execution of other preview performances (e.g., a dialogue preview performance, a roulette preview performance, a cut-in preview performance, etc.) may be restricted, or the execution of a specific performance among the look-ahead performances (e.g., a winning light-emitting performance, etc.) may be permitted and the execution of other performances (e.g., a look-ahead zone performance or a look-ahead countdown performance, etc.) may be restricted.

In addition, instead of displaying the time-saving remaining number image KG in the special time-saving game state in the same position and in the same display manner as in the normal time-saving game state, the time-saving remaining number image KG may be displayed in a different position and/or in a different display manner than in the normal time-saving game state. In this way, it becomes easier to recognize whether the game is in the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, since there is no transition to the special time-shortened game state once the time-shortened count (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the special time-shortened game state ends, when the power supply that was stopped after the special time-shortened game state ends is resumed and the game control state is restored, the game count GK may be displayed as "???" so that the number of changes until the transition to the special time-shortened game state is unknown. In this way, the player can recognize that the special time-shortened game state has ended, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of time-saving times (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the special time-saving game state ends, and the power supply that was stopped is resumed and the game control state is restored, a specific light-emitting element (e.g., top lamp 10b) may be made to emit light in a specific light-emitting mode (e.g., flashing red every 750 ms) different from the light-emitting mode during an error (e.g., flashing red every 250 ms). In this way, the player can recognize that the special time-saving game state has ended, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when a specific light-emitting portion (e.g., top lamp 10b) is caused to emit light in a specific light-emitting mode that is different from the light-emitting mode in the event of an error, the blinking period in the specific light-emitting mode may be made faster than the blinking period in the light-emitting mode in the event of an error, or may be made the same.

Sixth Embodiment
Hereinafter, the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
In the sixth embodiment, the normal time-saving play state ends when a specific small win special pattern is displayed, even if there are remaining small wins, and the remaining number of small wins set for each big win is different. Therefore, here, only the differences from the fifth embodiment will be described.

(Game Status Setting Table)
Figure 155(a) is a diagram showing a first game status setting table for setting the game status after the end of a jackpot game without a small jackpot game, and Figure 155(b) is a diagram showing a second game status setting table for setting the game status after the end of a jackpot game that has involved a small jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), the first game state setting table corresponds to the special stop data of the jackpot special symbol, the game state information at the time of winning the jackpot indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the game state flag to be set (time-saving flag indicating the time-saving game state), the first time-saving number (J1) which is the number of times the first special symbol changes and displays that end the time-saving game state, the second time-saving number (J2) which is the number of times the second special symbol changes and displays that end the time-saving game state, the third time-saving number (J3) which is the number of times the combined first and second special symbols change and displays that end the time-saving game state, the remaining number of small wins (Z1) which is the number of times the small win changes and displays that end the time-saving game state, and the third remaining number of small wins which is the number of times a specific small win changes and displays that end the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 155(b), the second game state setting table corresponds to the stop special symbol data of the small win special symbol, the game state information at the time of passing the specific region 53 indicating the game state when the game ball passes through the specific region 53, the game state flag to be set (time-saving flag indicating the time-saving game state), the first time-saving number (J1) which is the number of times the first special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, the second time-saving number (J2) which is the number of times the second special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, the third time-saving number (J3) which is the number of times the combined first special symbol and second special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, the remaining number of small wins (Z1) which is the number of times the small win changes to end the time-saving game state, and the third remaining number of small wins which is the number of times the specific small win changes to end the time-saving game state.

The first feature of the game status setting table shown in FIG. 155 is that in addition to the remaining number of small wins (Z1), which is the number of all types of small win variation displays, the remaining number of third small wins (Z2), which is the number of specific small win variations (variation displays that will result in the execution of a third small win game), is set. In this way, it is possible to get the player interested in the types of small win variations as well, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 155 is that there are cases where the remaining number of small wins (Z1) and the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) are set to the same number, and cases where the remaining number of small wins (Z1) and the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) are set to different numbers. By doing this, it is possible to create cases where the time-saving game state ends regardless of the type of small win fluctuation, and cases where the time-saving game state ends only with a specific small win fluctuation, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

(Special pattern change processing on the main control board)
The special symbol variation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 156. Fig. 156 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process in the main control board 110. Note that only the differences from the special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 in the fifth embodiment shown in Fig. 93 will be described here, and the description of the common parts will be omitted.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a small win special symbol has stopped and been displayed. If it is not a small win special symbol, the process proceeds to step S320-13. If it is a small win special symbol, in step S320-10, the remaining number of small wins (Z1) until the time-saving game state is terminated, which is saved in the game RWM area, is decremented by 1.

In step S320-10A, the main CPU 110a determines whether the small win special symbol is the third small win special symbol (special symbol 15). If it is not the third small win special symbol, the process proceeds to step S320-11. If it is the third small win special symbol, the process proceeds to step S320-10B, where the remaining number of second small wins (Z2) is decremented by 1.

In step S320-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the remaining number of small wins (Z1) or the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) has become "0." If the remaining number of small wins (Z1) or the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) has become "0," the time-saving game state is terminated and processing proceeds to step S320-12. If the remaining number of small wins has not become "0," processing proceeds to step S320-13.

In this way, when a small win symbol is displayed in a time-saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47 (a small win game is being played), even if the number of time-saving times (J1, J2, J3) remains, the time-saving game state ends when the remaining number of small wins (Z1) or the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) becomes "0". Therefore, even if the player tries to play advantageously by referring to the combination of the pre-reading effects or the stopped-displayed effect patterns 70a (whether or not to aim for an advantageous jackpot by passing the game ball through the specific area 53 in a small win game), it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage depending on the playing method during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a small win symbol is displayed in a stopped state during the time-saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47 (a small win game is executed), even if the remaining number of small wins (Z1) remains, the time-saving game state ends when the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) becomes "0". Therefore, even if the player tries to play advantageously by referring to the combination of the pre-reading performance or the performance symbols 70a displayed in a stopped state (whether to pass the game ball through the specific area 53 in the small win game and aim for an advantageous big win), it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage depending on the playing method during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, in the case of a specific small win, the advantageous game state (time-saving game state) ends even before the number of small wins reaches a specified number.

(Content 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
◆Here, in conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a big win game advantageous to a player based on the judgment information obtained based on the winning of a gaming medium in the starting area, and to execute a game presentation according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there are some that have a movable body (a starting opening opening/closing member, a big winning opening opening/closing member, a specific area opening/closing member, etc.) that operates with a driving source (solenoid, etc.) controlled by a main control board, and operate the movable body by operating the driving source according to the progress of the game (for example, see JP 2018-118109 A). However, in such gaming machines, there is a problem that it is difficult to check the operation of the driving source controlled by the main control means when the gaming machine 1 (including the case of only the gaming board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at a gaming store (including replacement of only the gaming board 5 or only the board unit 500).

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, which includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening/closing member 57) that are operated by drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) controlled by the main control means, and the main control means can initialize (ON⇔OFF) the drive sources in a predetermined manner in the pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from when power supply is started until the control of the progress of the game is started. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, which includes a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening/closing member 57) operated by drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) controlled by the main control means, and and a value imparting means (main control board 110, payout control board 120) capable of imparting prize value (prize balls, prize ball data) based on the establishment of a given condition (entry of game balls into the prize slot, start slot, or large prize slot). The main control means can initialize (ON⇔OFF) the drive source in a predetermined manner in the pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from when power supply is started until control of the progress of the game begins, and in the pre-start state, the awarding of the prize value by the value imparting means is invalid. This makes it easy to check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, which includes a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening/closing member 57) operated by drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) controlled by the main control means, and the main control means controls the start condition Based on the establishment of the above (entry of a game ball into the starting hole or normal gate), the display means (special pattern display, normal pattern display) displays a varying pattern, and it is possible to execute advantageous games (special games, auxiliary games) by operating the drive source according to the results of the varying display, and in the pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from when power supply is started until control of the progress of the game begins, it is possible to initialize (ON⇔OFF) the drive source in a predetermined manner, and in the pre-start state, the execution of the varying display and the execution of the advantageous games are regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening/closing member 57) operated by drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) controlled by the main control means, and the main control means controls the drive sources to initial operation (ON) in a predetermined manner. The device has an initial operation means capable of turning the power on and off (OFF), and an information display means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on game results (number of payouts during normal play, number of outs during normal play) and displaying the specific information on an information display means (performance display monitor), and the initial operation is performed by the initial operation means in a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from when power supply is started until control of the progress of the game is started, and the display of the specific information by the information display means is restricted during the execution of the initial operation. This makes it easy to check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing games, which comprises a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) operated by drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening opening solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large winning opening opening opening solenoid 57b) controlled by the main control means, and value granting means (main control board 110, payout control board 120) capable of granting prize value (prize balls, prize ball data) based on the establishment of a granting condition (entry of game balls into the winning opening, start opening, or large winning opening). ), and in the pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from when power supply is started to when control of the game progress is started, the awarding of the prize value by the value awarding means is invalidated, and the main control means has an initial operation means capable of initializing the drive source in a predetermined manner (ON⇔OFF), and an information display means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on game results (normal payout number, normal out number) and displaying the specific information on an information display means (performance display monitor), and in the pre-start state, the initial operation by the initial operation means is executed, and during the execution of the initial operation, the display of the specific information by the information display means is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, which includes a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and movable bodies (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large prize opening opening/closing member 57) operated by a drive source (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large prize opening opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) controlled by the main control means, and the main control means controls a variable display means (special pattern display, normal pattern display) capable of displaying a variable pattern based on the establishment of a start condition (a game ball entering the start opening or normal gate), and a variable display means for operating the drive source based on the result of the variable display. The game device has an advantageous game means capable of executing advantageous games (small win games, big win games) that are generated by the player, an initial operation means capable of initializing the drive source in a predetermined manner (ON⇔OFF), and an information display means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on game results (normal payout number, normal out number) and displaying the specific information on an information display means (performance display monitor). In a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from when power supply is started until control of the progress of the game is started, the initial operation is executed by the initial operation means, and during the execution of the initial operation, the execution of the variable display by the variable display means, the execution of the advantageous game by the advantageous game means, and the display of the specific information by the information display means are restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

(Content 2 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines that determine whether to execute a special game or a specific game advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a starting condition. Among such gaming machines, there are some that execute a special game based on the fact that a gaming medium passes through a specific area provided inside a winning device during the execution of a specific game (for example, see JP 2018-057968 A). However, there is a problem in that such gaming machines have low interest in the game.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means for determining whether to execute a special game (jackpot game) or a specific game (small jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a start condition (entry of a game ball into a start hole), a game state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, a prize-winning device (large prize winning hole) that changes the game medium from a state in which it is difficult to win a prize to a state in which it is easy to win a prize during the execution of the specific game, and a special game execution means for executing the special game based on the game medium passing through a specific area (specific area 53) provided inside the prize-winning device during the execution of the specific game, and it is possible to perform a predetermined process (such as a process for setting game conditions after a jackpot game) based on the game state when the game medium passes through the specific area during the execution of the specific game. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a start condition (a game ball entering a start hole), and a game state control means that can control between a normal game state and a specific game state (a time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and the determination means has a first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole) and a second determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole). The special games include a first special game (e.g., a first jackpot game, a third jackpot game) and a second special game (e.g., a second jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the first special game, and when the first determination means determines that the special game is to be executed, either the first special game or the second special game can be executed, and the specific game state includes a specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled via the special game, and a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled without via the special game. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big win game, small win game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a start condition (entry of a game ball into a start hole), a game state control means capable of controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, a prize-winning device (big prize winning hole) that changes the game medium from a state in which it is difficult to win a prize to a state in which it is easy to win a prize while the special game is being played, and a game state determination means capable of determining the game state to be controlled thereafter based on the game medium passing through a specific area (specific area 53) provided inside the prize-winning device while the special game is being played. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game, small jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a start condition (entry of a game ball into a start hole), and a game state control means capable of controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and the determination means has a first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a first start condition (entry of a game ball into a first start hole) and a second determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a second start condition (entry of a game ball into a second start hole), and the special games include a first special game (e.g., a third jackpot game) and a second special game (e.g., a first jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the first special game. The determination results of the determination means include a first result (jackpot) and a second result (small jackpot) different from the first result. When the first determination means determines the first result (jackpot), either the first special game or the second special game can be executed. The specific game state includes a first specific game state (a normal time-saving game state in which the second time-saving number is set to 7 times: Battle mode) that is controlled after the end of the first special game, and a second specific game state (a normal time-saving game state in which the second time-saving number is set to 55 times: Ranbu mode, a normal time-saving game state in which the second time-saving number is set to 95 times: Ranbu mode) that is controlled after the end of the second special game. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game, small jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a start condition (entry of a game ball into a start hole), and a game state control means capable of controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, the judgment means having a first judgment means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a first start condition (entry of a game ball into a first start hole) and a second judgment means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a start condition (entry of a game ball into a second start hole), and the special game includes a first special game (e.g., a third jackpot game) and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game. There are a first special game (e.g., a second V jackpot game) and a third special game (e.g., a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the second special game, and the judgment results of the judgment means include a first result (jackpot) and a second result (small jackpot) that is different from the first result. When the first judgment means judges the first result (jackpot), either the first special game or the second special game can be executed, when the second judgment means judges the second result (small jackpot), the second special game can be executed, and when the second judgment means judges the first result (jackpot), the third special game can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game, small jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a start condition (entry of a game ball into a start hole), and a game state control means capable of controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and the determination means has a first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a first start condition (entry of a game ball into a first start hole) and a second determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a second start condition (entry of a game ball into a second start hole), and the special games include a first special game (e.g., a third jackpot game) and a special game that is more advantageous than the first special game. There is a second special game (e.g., a second V jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the first special game, and a third special game (e.g., a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the second special game, and the judgment results of the judgment means include a first result (jackpot) and a second result (small jackpot) that is different from the first result, and in the specific game state (Ranbu mode, Choranbu mode) controlled after the second special game is executed, if the second judgment means judges the first result (jackpot), the third special game can be executed, and if the second judgment means judges the second result (small jackpot), the second special game can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆A seventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game, small jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a start condition (entry of a game ball into a start hole), and a game state control means capable of controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and the judgment means has a first judgment means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a first start condition (entry of a game ball into a first start hole) and a second judgment means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a second start condition (entry of a game ball into a second start hole), and the special game includes a first special game (e.g., a third jackpot game) and the first special game. There is a second special game (e.g., a second V jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the first game, and a third special game (e.g., a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the second special game, and the judgment results of the judgment means include a first result (jackpot) and a second result (small jackpot) that is different from the first result, and in the specific game state (infinite mode) controlled after the third special game is executed, if the second judgment means judges the first result (jackpot), the third special game can be executed, and if the second judgment means judges the second result (small jackpot), the second special game can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game, small jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a start condition (a game ball entering a start hole), a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a pattern based on the determination of the determination means, a game state control means capable of controlling to a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and a presentation control means capable of controlling to a first presentation mode (presentation modes A to C) and a second presentation mode (countdown mode) different from the first presentation mode, and the determination means has a first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a first start condition (a game ball entering a first start hole) and a second determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a second start condition (a game ball entering a second start hole), and the special The separate games include a first special game (e.g., a third jackpot game) and a second special game (e.g., a first jackpot game, a third jackpot game, a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the first special game, and the game state control means can control the specific game state until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed after the special game ends, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled via the special game, and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled without going through the special game, and the presentation control means controls from the first presentation mode (any of presentation modes A to C) to the second presentation mode (countdown mode) when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) before the control to the second specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed simultaneously (in parallel), and the second special symbol is displayed preferentially. However, the gaming machine may be configured to display the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), or the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed in the order of the winning balls entering the first start hole 45 and the second start hole 47.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured not to generate a probability variable game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal game state after the end of a jackpot game, but a probability variable game state may be generated depending on the type of special jackpot pattern. In this case, a process may be performed to generate a probability variable game state on the condition that the game ball passes through a specific area 53 provided inside the first large prize opening 50 in a specific round of play during a jackpot game (for example, the second round of play or the final round of play), or a process may be performed to determine the number of variable displays that will result in a probability variable game state based on the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area 53.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used in a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine) that can award a player a predetermined amount of prize medals (prize medal data) when a winning symbol is displayed stopped on an active line by playing with medals (gaming media) (satisfying the awarding conditions). Furthermore, it can also be used in a Jankyu gaming machine or an Arrange Ball gaming machine.

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

Seventh Embodiment
The seventh embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. Note that in the following, differences from the above-mentioned embodiments will be mainly described, and descriptions of points common to any of the above-mentioned embodiments may be omitted.

In addition, the configurations described above in the first to sixth embodiments may correspond to the configurations described later. More specifically, the reserved image GB and the reserved icon HI described above correspond to the reserved image 702 described later. In addition, the reserved image GB and the icon TI described above correspond to the variable image 701 described later. In addition, the reserved number image GD, the first reserved number display area 70E, and the second reserved number display area 70F described above correspond to the reserved number display 703 described later. In addition, the above-mentioned areas R11, R12, R13, R14, R21, R22, R23, and R24, the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, the third display unit 70B3, and the fourth display unit 70B4, the first display unit 70D1, the second display unit 70D2, the third display unit 70D3, and the fourth display unit 70D4 correspond to the reserved pedestal 702P described later. Moreover, the above-mentioned area R0 and the icon display area 70C correspond to the variable base 701P described later. Moreover, the above-mentioned small symbol Ga and special symbol TZ correspond to the small symbol 704 described later. Moreover, the above-mentioned start notification image Gn, rush image GT, notification logo LG, and "START" character image correspond to the special time-saving start image 733 and mode start image 736 described later. Moreover, the above-mentioned customer waiting screen Mx, customer waiting screen Mx1, customer waiting screen Mx2, and customer waiting demo background correspond to the customer waiting image 710 described later. Moreover, the above-mentioned background image GH and background image correspond to the stage image 706 described later. In addition, the above-mentioned right hit image GS1, right hit image GS2, right hit image GS3, right hit image GS4, right hit image Gsy, right hit start image GR, first right hit image MG1, second right hit image MG2, third right hit image MG3, and fourth right hit image MG4 correspond to the first right hit image 720, second right hit image 725, and third right hit image 737 described later. In addition, the above-mentioned background image GHf and power-on notification correspond to the recovery image 742 described later. In addition, the above-mentioned prevention image GQ1 and forgetting to take card attention image TG correspond to the card attention image 739 described later. In addition, the above-mentioned warning image GQ2 and addiction attention image NG correspond to the game attention image 740 described later. In addition, the above-mentioned end image GP2 and shutter image SY correspond to the first transition image 728 described later. In addition, the above-mentioned shielding image GF and dark color image correspond to the first transition image 728 described later. The above-mentioned end image GP1, result image GP, and result display correspond to the result image 729 described later. The above-mentioned emphasis image GZ and number image correspond to the countdown image 732 described later. The above-mentioned number of games played image GE and number of games played GK correspond to the execution number image 705 described later. The above-mentioned fixed notification image GI, fixed notification character SC, and notification logo LG correspond to the clear negation image 744 described later. The above-mentioned remaining number of times image GN and the text image of the activation counter display correspond to the reached remaining number of times image 708 described later. The above-mentioned remaining time-saving image GJ and time-saving remaining number of times image KG correspond to the special time-saving remaining number of times image 738 described later. The above-mentioned left hit image GL, left hit start image GL, and left hit image HG correspond to the left hit image 730 described later.
Corresponding configurations of one embodiment and another embodiment may be interchanged, or a configuration included in one embodiment may be added to a configuration of another embodiment that corresponds to this configuration.

[Production image]
FIG. 157 is a diagram showing one aspect of the presentation performed by the presentation control unit 130m using the first image display device 70 and the like.
Next, the performance image that the performance control unit 130m causes to be displayed on the first image display device 70 will be described.
As shown in Fig. 157, the performance control unit 130m controls the first image display device 70 to display the performance image. In this embodiment, the performance image displayed on the first image display device 70 includes a decorative pattern 700, a variable image 701, a variable base 701P, a reserved image 702, a reserved base 702P, a reserved number display 703, a small pattern 704, an execution count image 705, and a stage image 706. In addition, the first image display device 70 displays a first front image 707, a remaining number of times reached image 708, a second front image 709, a clear negation image 744, a customer waiting image 710, a first emphasis image 711, an SP reach image 712, an SPSP reach image 713, a button operation image 714, a first eye-catching image 715, an adjustment image 716, a menu image 717, a second emphasis image 718, an opening image 719, a first right hit image 720, a promotion image 721, an in-round image 722, a number of rounds image 723, a normal time-saving selection image 745, a normal time-saving opening image 746, a normal time-saving opening image 747, a normal time-saving opening image 748, a normal time-saving opening image 749, a normal time-saving opening image 750, a normal time-saving opening image 751, a normal time-saving opening image 752, a normal time-saving opening image 753, a normal time-saving opening image 754, a normal time-saving opening image 755, a normal time-saving opening image 756, a normal time-saving opening image 757, a normal time-saving opening image 758, a normal time-saving opening image 759, a normal time-saving opening image 760, a normal time-saving opening image 761, a normal time-saving opening image 762, a normal time-saving opening image 763, a normal time-saving opening image 764, a normal time-saving opening image 765, a normal time-saving opening image 765, a normal time-saving opening image 766, a normal time-saving opening image 767, a normal time-saving opening image 768, a normal time-saving opening image 769, a normal time-saving opening image 770, a normal time- A start image 724, a card warning image 739, a game warning image 740, a second right hit image 725, a normal time-saving remaining number image 726, a switching image 727, a first transition image 728, a result image 729, a left hit image 730, a second eye-catching image 731, a countdown image 732, a special time-saving start image 733, a second transition image 734, a special time-saving selection image 735, a mode start image 736, a third right hit image 737, a special time-saving remaining number image 738, a magnetic error notification image 741, a recovery in progress image 742, and a zone notification image 743 may be displayed.

(Decorative design 700)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), three decorative patterns 700 are displayed on the first image display device 70. When the three patterns constituting the decorative pattern 700 are described individually, the pattern arranged on the left side may be referred to as the "left decorative pattern 700", the pattern arranged in the center as the "middle decorative pattern 700", and the pattern arranged on the right side as the "right decorative pattern 700". When the left decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 are described together, they may be referred to as the "left and right decorative patterns 700". When the left decorative pattern 700, the middle decorative pattern 700, and the right decorative pattern 700 are described together, they may be referred to as the "three decorative patterns 700". Furthermore, the three decorative patterns 700 with matching numbers may be referred to as the "double number decorative pattern 700".

In this embodiment, the display modes of the decorative pattern 700 include a highly decorative display mode (see FIG. 157(1)) in which character images and the like are displayed in addition to letters such as numbers, and a less decorative display mode (see FIG. 167(10), FIG. 172(23), etc.) in which letters such as numbers are the main display. The images of characters and the like provided in the highly decorative decorative pattern 700 are different for each letter of the decorative pattern 700, and the image of the characters and the like can also be used to identify which pattern it is.
Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern 700 is switched according to the change in the game state or the progress of the performance. Details will be described later, but for example, the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness is displayed in the SP reach performance, the SPSP reach performance, the normal time-saving game state, and the special time-saving game state, and the decorative pattern 700 with high decorativeness is displayed in other cases. In addition, the display mode and display size of the decorative pattern 700 may be different between the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state.
In addition, in addition to letters such as numbers, images such as pictures and characters may be displayed in the low-decorative decorative pattern 700. That is, the "low-decorative decorative pattern 700" shown in FIG. 167 (10) and FIG. 172 (23) may have a higher ratio of the area of the letters in the decorative pattern 700 than the "high-decorative decorative pattern 700". The low-decorative decorative pattern 700 may be a pattern consisting of letters only. The decorative pattern 700 is an example of a performance pattern.

In the decorative pattern 700 changing performance, the performance control unit 130m changes the display of the three decorative patterns 700, for example by vertical scrolling (scrolling downwards), and then first temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 700 (for example, the number "0"), then temporarily stops the right decorative pattern 700 (for example, the number "9"), and then temporarily stops the center decorative pattern (for example, the number "2"). In this way, after all the decorative patterns 700 have been temporarily stopped, all the decorative patterns 700 are finally stopped in accordance with the stopped display of the special patterns. The combination "029" of the stopped decorative patterns 700 shown in Figure 157 (1) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss.

(Variation image 701)
As shown in FIG. 157(4), the first image display device 70 displays a variable image 701 indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed (the decorative symbol 700 is being variably displayed) by the main CPU 110a of the main control unit 110m. That is, the variable image 701 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbol during the variable display of the special symbol. The variable image 701 is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol starts, and disappears when the special symbol is displayed stationary. In addition, as will be described later in detail, the variable image 701 is displayed in a display mode according to the stage, game state, etc., which will be described later. In the illustrated example, the variable image 701 is formed in a circular shape and has a cross-shaped mark.

Furthermore, the variable image 701 changes its display mode, such as its display color, to notify or suggest the likelihood of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, it is set so that a color with a higher likelihood of winning is displayed when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, rather than a miss. For example, when the colors of the variable image 701 are set to white, blue, green, red, and rainbow, it may be set so that the later the order, the higher the likelihood of winning. Furthermore, the likelihood of winning a rainbow-colored variable image 701 may be 100%.

(Variable pedestal 701P)
As shown in Fig. 157 (1), the variable pedestal 701P is an area where the variable image 701 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the variable pedestal 701P is displayed in the lower center of the display area of the first image display device 70. However, the variable pedestal 701P may be displayed at any position in the display area of the first image display device 70.
In the illustrated example, the variable pedestal 701P is displayed regardless of whether the variable image 701 is displayed or not, but this is not limited to the above. The variable pedestal 701P may be displayed when the variable image 701 is displayed, and may not be displayed when the variable image 701 is not displayed. Also, the variable pedestal 701P may not be displayed even when the variable image 701 is displayed. In other words, the variable pedestal 701P may not be used.

(Reserved image 702)
As shown in FIG. 157(3), the first image display device 70 displays a reserved image 702 based on the current reserved information in the main RAM 110c (sub-RAM 130c). In other words, the reserved image 702 is an image indicating that the right to judge the big win is reserved. In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 702 on the screen is determined based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process.
The reserved image 702 has a smaller display size than the variable image 701. The reserved image 702 is displayed in a display mode according to the stage, game state, etc., which will be described later in detail. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is formed in a circular shape and has a cross-shaped mark. The reserved image 702 changes its display mode, such as a display color, to notify or suggest the expectation of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, the reserved image 702 is set to display a color of a type with a higher expectation when the judgment result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot than when it is a miss. For example, when white, blue, green, red, and rainbow are set as the colors of the reserved image 702, the expectation may be set to be higher the later the order. The expectation of the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 may be 100%. In the following, the display mode of the variable image 701, which is white, and the display mode of the reserved image 702, which is white, may be referred to as the normal display mode. In addition, in the following, the display mode of the variable image 701 which is a color other than white, i.e., a color which has a higher expectation than white, and the display mode of the pending image 702 which is a color which has a higher expectation than white, may be referred to as the expected color display mode.

As described above, a maximum of four pending images are generated by winning the first starting port 45. Therefore, a maximum of four pending images 702 are displayed on the first image display device 70 by winning the first starting port 45. In this embodiment, the multiple pending images 702 generated by winning the first starting port 45 are displayed in the area to the left of the variable image 701, in order from a position closer to the variable image 701 to a position farther away, that is, from the right side to the left side.

Although detailed description is omitted, a maximum of four reserved images are also generated by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 47. Therefore, a maximum of four reserved images 702 are displayed on the first image display device 70 by the entry into the second starting hole 47. In this embodiment, the multiple reserved images 702 generated by the entry into the second starting hole 47 are displayed in an area to the right of the variable image 701 in order from a position closer to the variable image 701 to a position farther away, that is, from the left side to the right side.
In addition, in this embodiment, the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 are basically configured with the same or similar display form (display size, form, transparency, etc.). However, the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 may be configured with different display forms. In addition, the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 displayed by winning the first start port 45 and the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 displayed by winning the second start port 47 may be the same display form or different display forms.

In addition, in the following description, the four pending images 702 displayed at maximum may be referred to as the "first pending image 702," the "second pending image 702," the "third pending image 702," and the "fourth pending image 702," in order of proximity to the variable image 701.

(Retention pedestal 702P)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), the reserved pedestal 702P indicates an area in which the reserved image 702 is displayed. The reserved pedestal 702P is displayed in a manner different from that of the variable pedestal 701P. However, the reserved pedestal 702P may be displayed in the same manner as the variable pedestal 701P. In addition, the reserved pedestal 702P corresponding to the reserved image 702 based on winning the first starting gate 45 is displayed on the lower side of the display area of the first image display device 70 and on the left side of the variable pedestal 701P (see FIG. 157(1)). In addition, the reserved pedestal 702P corresponding to the reserved image 702 based on winning the second starting gate 47 is displayed on the lower side of the display area of the first image display device 70 and on the right side of the variable pedestal 701P (see FIG. 172(23)).
In the illustrated example, the reserved pedestal 702P is displayed regardless of whether the reserved image 702 is displayed, but this is not limiting. The reserved pedestal 702P may be displayed when the reserved image 702 is displayed, and may not be displayed when the reserved image 702 is not displayed. Furthermore, the reserved pedestal 702P may not be displayed even when the reserved image 702 is displayed. In other words, the reserved pedestal 702P may not be used.
In addition, in the following description, the holding bases 702P may be referred to as the "first holding base 702P," the "second holding base 702P," the "third holding base 702P," and the "fourth holding base 702P," in order of proximity to the variable base 701P.

(Number of reserved calls displayed 703)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), the first image display device 70 displays a reserved number display 703 based on the reserved information in the main RAM 110c (sub-RAM 130c). This reserved number display 703 is an image showing the reserved number. Here, the reserved image 702 displayed on the first image display device 70 changes in number according to the reserved number for winning at the first start port 45 and the second start port 47. In the reserved number display 703, the reserved number for winning at the first start port 45 is displayed on the left side, and the reserved number for winning at the second start port 47 is displayed on the right side.

(Small design 704)
As shown in Fig. 157 (1), the first image display device 70 displays a small symbol 704 indicating that the special symbol is being displayed variably (the decorative symbol 700 is being displayed variably) based on the winning of the first start port 45 or the second start port 47. The small symbol 704 is controlled by the performance control unit 130m, and is displayed variably in accordance with the display of the special symbol, and is displayed stationary in accordance with the display of the special symbol.

In the illustrated example, the small patterns 704 are three images each corresponding to the decorative pattern 700, and are displayed on the right side of the image display area of the first image display device 70. The small patterns 704 are displayed as images smaller in size than the decorative pattern 700. As described above, the decorative pattern 700 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or a less decorative display mode, but the small patterns 704 are displayed only in a less decorative display mode that mainly consists of characters. However, the small patterns 704 may be displayed in a display mode in which images such as pictures and characters are displayed in addition to characters. The small patterns 704 may also be patterns consisting of only characters. The small patterns 704 are also considered to be performance patterns.

The small pattern 704 is displayed (e.g., scrolled vertically) in a manner that indicates that the special pattern is being displayed in a changing manner in response to a winning entry into the first starting gate 45 or the second starting gate 47. During scrolling, the small pattern 704 displays number images incrementing by one from "1" to "9," and then repeats the display incrementing by one from "1" again. Then, when the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the small pattern 704 is displayed in a stopped state. In the illustrated example, the number indicated by the stopped small pattern 704 matches the number indicated by the decorative pattern 700. To explain further, in the example of FIG. 157(1), a number corresponding to "029" of the decorative pattern 700 is displayed as the small pattern 704.

(Execution count image 705)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), the first image display device 70 displays an execution count image 705. This execution count image 705 is an image showing the number of newly performed variable displays (the number of variable performances of the decorative pattern 700) after the number of variable displays of the special pattern is reset. The display content of the execution count image 705 is updated every time a variable performance is performed. In the illustrated example, the execution count image 705 shows the text "99 GAME" including the number of times the variable performance has been performed. Note that the number of variable performances shown in the execution count image 705 may be the number of times that have been performed as a variable performance, or may be the number of variable performances including not only the number of times that have been performed but also the number of variable performances that are being performed. In addition, the timing at which the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated may be during the execution of the variable performance, or after the end of the variable performance. The execution count image 705 is displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 700. However, the execution count image 705 may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700.

(Stage image 706)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), a stage image 706 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The stage image 706 is an image that suggests or notifies the stage in the currently executed performance. The stage is the stage in the performance of the gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of stages are provided, and the stage image 706 having a display mode corresponding to the currently executed stage is displayed. The stage image 706 is displayed on a layer behind (lower than) the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, and the like, among the plurality of layers provided on the first image display device 70. That is, the stage image 706 is displayed as a background image on the first image display device 70. The stage image 706 may also be a moving image. In the illustrated example, a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 706.
The stage image 706 is switched, for example, when a variation performance in one stage is performed a predetermined number of times. In addition, when a specific variation performance is performed, the stage image 706 may be switched in the variation performance next to this specific variation performance. Examples of the specific variation performance include a variation performance in which an SP reach performance is performed, and a variation performance in which an SPSP reach performance is performed. Furthermore, the stage image 706 is switched for each game state of the gaming machine 1. More specifically, the stage image 706 is displayed in a different display mode in the normal game state, the normal time-saving game state, and the special time-saving game state. The background of the stage image 706 can also be regarded as the performance mode of the gaming machine 1.

(First front image 707)
As shown in FIG. 157 (6), the first image display device 70 displays the first front image 707. The first front image 707 is displayed in a layer in front (higher) of the layer in which the decorative pattern 700 is displayed, among the multiple layers provided in the first image display device 70. The first front image 707 may be displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In this case, the first front image 707 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the execution count image 705, the stage image 7006, the remaining number of times reached image 708 described later, etc., and in a layer behind (lower) the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc. However, the first front image 707 may be displayed in a layer in front of the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702. The first front image 707 is displayed during the execution of the variable performance.

(Remaining number of times reached image 708)
As shown in FIG. 157 (5), the first image display device 70 displays a remaining number of times image 708. This remaining number of times image 708 is an image showing the number of times of change performance required until the special time-saving game state is reached. The display content of the remaining number of times image 708 is updated every time a change performance is performed. In the illustrated example, the remaining number of times image 708 shows a text "400 more" including the number of change performances required until the special time-saving game state is reached. Note that the number of change performances shown in the remaining number of times image 708 may include the change performance being performed, or may exclude the change performance being performed. In addition, the timing at which the display content of the remaining number of times image 708 is updated may be during the execution of the change performance, or after the end of the change performance. The remaining number of times image 708 is displayed in a layer behind the decorative pattern 700. However, the remaining number of times image 708 may be displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700.

(Second front image 709)
As shown in FIG. 162(4), the first image display device 70 displays the second front image 709. The second front image 709 is displayed in a layer in front (higher) of the layer in which the decorative pattern 700 is displayed, among the multiple layers provided in the first image display device 70. The second front image 709 is displayed in a display mode different from that of the first front image 707. The second front image 709 may be displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In this case, the second front image 709 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and in a layer behind (lower) the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc. However, the second front image 709 may be displayed in a layer in front of the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702. In addition, the second front image 709 is executed in a variable performance of a variable performance pattern in which the first front image 707 is not executed.

(Clear Negative Image 744)
As shown in Fig. 162 (4), the first image display device 70 displays a clear negation image 744. The clear negation image 744 is displayed when a RWM clear negation effect is executed. The display of the clear negation image 744 suggests to the player that the RWM has not been cleared. In the illustrated example, a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 is displayed as the clear negation image 744.

(Customer waiting image 710)
As shown in FIG. 166(1), the first image display device 70 displays a customer waiting image 710. The customer waiting image 710 is an image for advertising the gaming machine 1 when it is in a customer waiting state. The customer waiting image 710 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. However, the customer waiting image 710 may be displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70 and not in the other part. In the illustrated example, a moving image related to the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 is displayed as the customer waiting image 710. The customer waiting image 710 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and in a layer behind (lower) the reserved number display 703, etc. However, the customer waiting image 710 may be displayed in a layer behind the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the small pattern 704, etc.

(First emphasized image 711)
As shown in FIG. 167 (9), the first image display device 70 displays a first emphasis image 711. The first emphasis image 711 is an image that emphasizes the performance by the first movable member 73a. The first emphasis image 711 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In the illustrated example, the first emphasis image 711 is a radial image. More specifically, the first emphasis image 711 is a radial image of a specific color centered on the position of the first movable member 73a. The specific color may be any color, for example, red. The first emphasis image 711 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(SP reach image 712)
As shown in FIG. 167 (10), the first image display device 70 displays an SP reach image 712. This SP reach image 712 is an image indicating that the SP reach performance is being executed. The SP reach image 712 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 plays a mini-game. In addition, in the SP reach image 712, a background different from that of the stage image 706 is displayed. In addition, the SP reach image 712 is displayed in a layer in front of the variable image 701, the variable base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and is displayed in a layer behind the decorative pattern 700, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(SPSP reach image 713)
As shown in FIG. 167 (11), the first image display device 70 displays an SPSP reach image 713. This SPSP reach image 713 is an image indicating that the SPSP reach performance is being executed. The SPSP reach image 713 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 fight. In addition, in the SPSP reach image 713, a background different from the stage image 706 and the SP reach image 712 is displayed. In addition, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed in a layer in front of the variable image 701, the variable base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and is displayed in a layer behind the decorative pattern 700, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(Button operation image 714)
As shown in FIG. 167 (12), a button operation image 714 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The button operation image 714 is an image that is displayed when a promotion effect is being executed. By displaying this button operation image 714, the player can recognize that it is time to operate the effect button 17. In the illustrated example, an image that imitates the effect button 17 is displayed as the button operation image 714. In this embodiment, the button operation image 714 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and if the effect button 17 is operated before the predetermined period has elapsed since the button operation image 714 was displayed, a predetermined effect is executed. That is, in the promotion effect, the effective period for operating the effect button 17 is determined as the display period of the button operation image 714.

(First eye-catching image 715)
As shown in FIG. 168 (14), the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The first eye-catching image 715 is an image showing a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1. The first eye-catching image 715 is displayed when the SPSP reach effect ends in a variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a miss or a revival variation is performed in a normal game state. In addition, when the SP reach effect is executed but not executed, the first eye-catching image 715 may be displayed when the SP reach effect ends. The first eye-catching image 715 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In addition, the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the changing image 701, the changing base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times to be reached image 708, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(Adjusted image 716)
As shown in FIG. 169(1), an adjustment image 716 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The adjustment image 716 is an image for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the audio output device 9 and the light intensity of various lamps. When the player operates the cross key 19 while the adjustment image 716 is displayed, the volume and the light intensity of various lamps are adjusted. In the illustrated example, the adjustment image 716 shows an image imitating a speaker, an image imitating a lamp, and an image imitating the cross key 19. The adjustment image 716 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700.

(Menu image 717)
As shown in FIG. 169(1), a menu image 717 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The menu image 717 is an image for displaying a menu screen (not shown) for setting the gaming machine 1 on the first image display device 70. In other words, the menu image 717 is an image for notifying the player that the menu screen can be displayed. When the player operates the effect button 17 while the menu image 717 is displayed, the menu screen is displayed on the first image display device 70. In the illustrated example, an image imitating the effect button 17 and the text "display menu with button" are displayed as the menu image 717. In addition, the menu image 717 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700.

(Second emphasized image 718)
As shown in FIG. 171 (15), the first image display device 70 displays the second emphasis image 718. The second emphasis image 718 is an image that emphasizes the performance by the first movable member 73a. The second emphasis image 718 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In the illustrated example, the second emphasis image 718 is a radial image centered on the position of the first movable member 73a. The second emphasis image 718 is displayed in a color different from the first emphasis image 711. The color of the second emphasis image 718 may be any color, for example, rainbow color. The second emphasis image 718 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(Opening image 719)
As shown in FIG. 171 (18), an opening image 719 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This opening image 719 is an image for notifying the player of the start of a big win game or a small win game. In the illustrated example, the opening image 719 displays the text "BIG Bonus! Congratulations," which indicates the start of a big win game. This opening image 719 indicates the type of big win (e.g., the total number of rounds) and the game status after the end of the big win game.

(First right-hit image 720)
As shown in FIG. 172 (19), the first right hit image 720 on the first image display device 70 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a. The first right hit image 720 is displayed when a big win game is being played. In the illustrated example, the first right hit image 720 is displayed as an arrow mark pointing to the right side.

(Promotional image 721)
As shown in FIG. 172 (19), a promotion image 721 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The promotion image 721 is an image for encouraging the player to launch the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a. In the illustrated example, the promotion image 721 includes the text "Aim to the right!!", an image of the game area 5a, and an arrow mark pointing from the left side to the right side in the image of the game area 5a.

(Round image 722)
172 (20), a round-in-progress image 722 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This round-in-progress image 722 is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1. The round-in-progress image 722 is displayed during a round in a big win game.

(Round number image 723)
As shown in Fig. 172 (20), a round number image 723 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This round number image 723 is an image for notifying the player of the round number currently being executed in the big win game. In the illustrated example, the text "Round 1" is displayed as the round number image 723.

(Normal time-saving selection image 745)
As shown in FIG. 172 (21), a normal time-saving selection image 745 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The normal time-saving selection image 745 is an image for allowing the player to select a mode of presentation in the normal time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, two modes, "A" and "B", are selectable in the normal time-saving selection image 745. When the normal time-saving selection image 745 is displayed, the player can select one of the modes by operating the presentation button 17. Also, in the illustrated example, the "A" mode is selected.

(Normal time-saving start image 724)
As shown in FIG. 172 (22), a normal time-saving start image 724 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This normal time-saving start image 724 is an image that notifies the start of a normal time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the text "Entering A mode!!" is displayed as the normal time-saving start image 724. The "A mode" displayed in the normal time-saving start image 724 is the mode selected in the normal time-saving selection image 745 (see FIG. 172 (21)).

(Card warning image 739)
172 (22), a card warning image 739 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The card warning image 739 is an image for warning a player not to forget to take a card that can identify the remaining value from a lending device (not shown) that communicates with the gaming machine 1 to lend game balls. In the illustrated example, the card warning image 739 displays the text "Be careful not to forget to take your card."

(Game warning image 740)
As shown in Fig. 172 (22), a gaming warning image 740 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The gaming warning image 740 is an image for warning the player not to get addicted to the game. In the illustrated example, the gaming warning image 740 displays the text "Pachinko is a game that should be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to get addicted."

(Second right-hand shot image 725)
As shown in FIG. 172 (23), the first image display device 70 displays a second right-hit image 725. This second right-hit image 725 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a. The second right-hit image 725 is continuously displayed during the normal time-saving game state and during the special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the second right-hit image 725 is displayed as an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "right hit".

(Normal time-saving remaining number image 726)
As shown in FIG. 172 (23), a normal time-saving remaining number image 726 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This normal time-saving remaining number image 726 is an image showing the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in the normal time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the normal time-saving remaining number image 726 displays the text "100 times", which shows that the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in the normal time-saving game state is 100 times.

(Switching image 727)
As shown in FIG. 177 (9), the first image display device 70 displays a switching image 727. The switching image 727 is an image for switching the background displayed on the first image display device 70. The switching image 727 is displayed when the SPSP reach effect ends in a change effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a miss or a revival change is performed in a normal time-saving game state. In addition, when the SP reach effect is executed and the SPSP reach effect is not executed, the switching image 727 may be displayed when the SP reach effect ends. In the illustrated example, an image imitating darkness is shown as the switching image 727. In addition, the switching image 727 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the change image 701, the change base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the normal time-saving remaining count image 726, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(First transition image 728)
As shown in FIG. 177 (12), the first image display device 70 displays a first transition image 728. The first transition image 728 is an image displayed when the stage image 706 is switched. In this embodiment, the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal time-saving game state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state via the first transition image 728. Also, the stage image 706 corresponding to the special time-saving game state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state via the first transition image 728. In the illustrated example, an image imitating a door is displayed as the first transition image 728. The first transition image 728 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70. However, the first transition image 728 may be displayed on a part of the first image display device 70 and not on the other part. In addition, the first transition image 728 displayed when the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal time-saving game state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state and the first transition image 728 displayed when the stage image 706 corresponding to the special time-saving game state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state may have the same display mode or different display modes. The first transition image 728 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the variable base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, the remaining number of times of normal time-saving game image 726, etc., and in a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(Result image 729)
As shown in FIG. 178 (13), the first image display device 70 displays a result image 729. The result image 729 is an image showing the result of a jackpot game. The result image 729 is displayed when the first transition image 728 is displayed in the case where a jackpot game is played. In addition, when multiple jackpot games are played before the first transition image 728 is displayed, the result image 729 shows the cumulative result of the multiple jackpot games. In the illustrated example, the result image 729 displays the text "A mode" indicating that the game was in a normal time-saving game state, the text "TOTAL 3 times" indicating that three jackpot games have been played, and the text "3024 points acquired" according to the prize balls in the jackpot game.

(Left-handed image 730)
As shown in FIG. 179 (20), a left-hit image 730 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The left-hit image 730 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area 5a. In the illustrated example, an arrow mark pointing to the left and the text "left hit" are displayed as the left-hit image 730. The left-hit image 730 is displayed when the game state is switched from the normal time-saving game state to the normal game state or when the game state is switched from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state.

(Second eye-catching image 731)
As shown in FIG. 180 (29), the first image display device 70 displays the second eye-catching image 731. The second eye-catching image 731 is an image showing a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1, and is an image different from the first eye-catching image 715. However, the second eye-catching image 731 may be the same image as the first eye-catching image 715. The second eye-catching image 731 is displayed when switching the stage, that is, when changing the display mode of the stage image 706. More specifically, the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed when the variable performance is started when changing the display mode of the stage image 706. In addition, the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the variable pedestal 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved pedestal 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc., and in a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(Countdown image 732)
As shown in FIG. 187(2), the first image display device 70 displays a countdown image 732. The countdown image 732 is an image that notifies the remaining number of times (number of times of variable performance) of the variable display of the special symbol executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the number of times of variation) until the special time-saving game state is reached as a countdown. The countdown image 732 is started when the number of times of variable display until the special time-saving game state is reached reaches a specific number. The specific number may be any number, but is, for example, three times. The display content of the countdown image 732 is updated for each variable performance. In the illustrated example, an image of "1" is displayed as the countdown image 732, which indicates that the number of times of variable performance required until the special time-saving game state is reached is one.

(Special time-saving start image 733)
As shown in FIG. 188(7), the first image display device 70 displays a special time-saving start image 733. The special time-saving start image 733 is an image that notifies the start of a special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the special time-saving start image 733 includes the text "TIME-SHORTENED GAME START!" and an arrow mark pointing to the right.

(Second transition image 734)
As shown in FIG. 188 (9), the first image display device 70 displays a second transition image 734. The second transition image 734 is an image displayed when the stage image 706 is switched. In this embodiment, the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the special time-saving game state via the second transition image 734. In the illustrated example, an image imitating a shutter is displayed as the second transition image 734. The second transition image 734 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70. However, the second transition image 734 may be displayed on a part of the first image display device 70 and not on the other part. The second transition image 734 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the changing image 701, the changing base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times to be reached image 708, etc., and on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc.

(Special time-saving selection image 735)
As shown in FIG. 188 (10), the first image display device 70 displays a special time-saving selection image 735. The special time-saving selection image 735 is an image for allowing the player to select a mode of presentation in the special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the special time-saving selection image 735 allows the player to select one of two modes, "a" and "b." When the special time-saving selection image 735 is displayed, the player can select one of the modes by operating the presentation button 17. In the illustrated example, the "a" mode is selected.

(Mode start image 736)
As shown in Fig. 188 (11), a mode start image 736 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The mode start image 736 is an image that notifies the start of the performance of a mode in the special time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the text "CHANCE MODE ENTERED!!" is displayed as the mode start image 736.

(Third right-hand shot image 737)
As shown in FIG. 188 (12), a third right hit image 737 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This third right hit image 737 is an image for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a. The third right hit image 737 is displayed in the first variable presentation in the special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the third right hit image 737 is displayed as an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "right hit".

(Special time-saving remaining number image 738)
As shown in FIG. 188 (12), the first image display device 70 displays a special time-saving remaining number image 738. The special time-saving remaining number image 738 is an image that indicates the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the special time-saving remaining number image 738 displays the text "749" indicating that the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving game state is 749.

(Magnetic error notification image 741)
As shown in Fig. 206 (2), a magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The magnetic error notification image 741 is an image that notifies a magnetic error. When an abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, the magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "Magnet detected" is displayed as the magnetic error notification image 741.

(Recovery image 742)
As shown in FIG. 216(4), the first image display device 70 displays a recovery image 742. The recovery image 742 is an image indicating that the gaming machine 1 is recovering from a power-off state. In this embodiment, after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the recovery image 742 is displayed before the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, the stage image 706, and the like are displayed. The recovery image 742 is also displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. The recovery image 742 is also displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable base 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved base 702P, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, and the like. In the illustrated example, the text "Recovering" is displayed as the recovery image 742.

(Zone notification image 743)
As shown in Fig. 226 (2), a zone notification image 743 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This zone notification image 743 is an image that notifies that a zone effect is being executed. Furthermore, the zone notification image 743 displays information for identifying which of a plurality of zone effects is being executed. In the illustrated example, the text "Chance Zone" is displayed as the zone notification image 743 for identifying the zone effect being executed.

(Example of variation 1)
Next, referring to Fig. 157 to Fig. 159, a detailed explanation will be given of the variation presentation (variation presentation example 1) of the decorative pattern 700 performed by the presentation control unit 130m using the first image display device 70, etc. The variation presentation example 1 is a variation presentation example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 45 in the normal game state. Also, the variation presentation example 1 is a variation presentation example in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 157(1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 700 is fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the performance control unit 130m when the previous special pattern is stopped and displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable base 701P, the reserved base 702P, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, and the stage image 706 are displayed in the first image display device 70. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning the first start port 45, and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 shows "0", which is the reserved number for winning the second start port. In addition, the execution count image 705 shows the text "99 GAME". In addition, a background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The first stage is a stage corresponding to the normal game state.
In addition, the top lamp 10b in the frame lighting device 10, the board lamp 74b in the board lighting device 74, the movable member lamp 74c in the board lighting device 74, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first mode. The first mode is, for example, a mode of emitting light that lights up in white. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output background music according to the previous variable performance.

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 157(2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the special pattern. In this embodiment, the left decorative pattern 700, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, and the small pattern 704 display the numbers "1" to "9" in order, respectively. That is, in this embodiment, the left decorative pattern 700, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, and the small pattern 704 can change the numbers individually. Note that the left decorative pattern 700, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, and the small pattern 704 may display characters other than numbers, such as English letters. In addition, with the start of the variation, the decorative pattern 700 is displayed to vary slowly downward, while the small pattern 704 is displayed to vary quickly.
In addition, when the decorative pattern 700 or the small pattern 704 is displayed (scrolled) particularly quickly in the drawings, the target pattern is displayed with an arrow (↓) for easy understanding. The decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 that are displayed at high speed are more transparent than when they are not displayed. In addition, the target pattern that is displayed at high speed may be invisible or difficult to be seen by the player, or may be visible to the player. In addition, the operation of the decorative pattern 700 when the change starts, such as the display of the decorative pattern 700 at a low speed, may be referred to as the change start operation below.

In addition, as a result of the game ball entering the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 157 (2), the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 displays "1". At this time, a step-by-step display effect of the reserved image 702 is started. The step-by-step display effect is an effect in which the reserved image 702 is displayed while the display mode of the reserved image 702 is changed step by step. The step-by-step display effect is executed when the display of the reserved image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the first reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. The step-by-step display effect will be described in detail later.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 157 (2), when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound to notify the player of the entry into the first starting hole 45. At this time, the light emission modes of the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c change to light emission modes corresponding to the variable presentation. More specifically, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all change from the first mode to the second mode. The second mode is a light emission mode in which the lights are lit in blue, and is different from the first mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (3), the decorative pattern 700 moves further downward due to the start of the fluctuation operation. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed on the first reserved base 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 157 (2). The display mode of this reserved image 702 is a display mode corresponding to the first stage. The winning sound that notifies the winning of the first starting hole 45 continues to be output until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed.

Although not shown in the example shown in FIG. 157(3), when the step-by-step display performance is completed, the action performance of the reserved image 702 starts. The action performance is a performance that displays the variable image 701 or the reserved image 702 in an action. The action performance is executed according to the progress of the performance. More specifically, the action performance is executed while the variable performance is being executed. Also, the action performance does not have to be executed when the variable performance is not being executed, and the action performance may be executed even when the variable performance is not being executed. By executing the action performance, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable image 701 or the reserved image 702. The action performance will be described in detail later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (4), the operation at the start of the change ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. The pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Although not shown in the figure, while the change performance is being performed, background music corresponding to the change performance being performed is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

In the example shown in Fig. 157 (1) to (4), the left decorative pattern 700, the center decorative pattern 700, and the right decorative pattern 700 are arranged in a left-right direction, and move (scroll) in a vertical direction when displayed in a variable manner, but this is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the left decorative pattern 700, the center decorative pattern 700, and the right decorative pattern 700 may be arranged in a left-right direction and each of them may move (scroll) in a left-right direction.
In addition, the state in which the decorative pattern 700 or the small pattern 704 is displayed by an arrow (↓) in the drawing is not limited to the state in which the target pattern is displayed. For example, the state in which the target pattern is displayed by an arrow (↓) in the drawing may be a state in which the target pattern is hidden and therefore cannot be seen by the player.

157(1) to (4), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 in a state where no reservation has been made for the winning of the first starting hole 45 and the special symbol has not changed, "1" is displayed in the reservation number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 and the reservation image 702 is displayed. Then, the reservation image 702 moves to the display position of the change image 701 and "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 703 of the first starting hole 45.
However, in a state where no reservation has been made for the winning of the first starting hole 45 and the special symbol has not changed, when a game ball wins the first starting hole 45, the reservation number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 may remain at "0". In this case, the reservation image 702 may be displayed, and then the reservation image 702 may move to display the variable image 701, or the variable image 701 may be displayed without displaying the reservation image 702.

Also, although not shown, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 in a state where no reservation has been made for the winning of the second starting hole 47 and the special symbol has not changed, the reservation number display 703 of the second starting hole 47 may display "1" and the reservation image 702 may be displayed. Then, the reservation image 702 may move to the display position of the change image 701 and the reservation number display 703 of the second starting hole 47 may display "0".
However, in a state where no reservation has been made for the winning of the second starting hole 47 and the special symbol has not changed, when a game ball wins the second starting hole 47, the reservation number display 703 of the second starting hole 47 may remain at "0". In this case, the reservation image 702 may be displayed and then the reservation image 702 may move to display the variable image 701, or the variable image 701 may be displayed without displaying the reservation image 702.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (5), the display of the first front image 707 begins. When the display of the first front image 707 begins, the transparency of the first front image 707 is high, and the decorative pattern 700 displayed on the layer behind the first front image 707 is visible to the player. Also, at this time, the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 displays the text "400 more."

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (6), the transparency of the first front image 707 is reduced, and the decorative pattern 700 displayed on the layer behind the first front image 707 becomes invisible or difficult to see by the player.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 displays "1" as shown in FIG. 158 (7). At this time, a step-by-step display effect is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the first reserved base 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.

Next, as shown in Fig. 158(8), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed on the first reserved pedestal 702P in a display size larger than the example shown in Fig. 158(7). Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 is started. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 158(9), the first front image 707 becomes invisible, and the decorative pattern 700, which is being displayed in a rapidly changing manner, becomes visible to the player again.
The display period of the first front image 707 is, for example, three seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (10), the left decorative pattern 700 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it had been fixed until the start of the change. More specifically, the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops.
In addition, when showing that the decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped in the drawings, in order to make it easier to understand, a mark similar to a double quotation mark is used around the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 700.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (11), as the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 displays "2". At this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the second reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound to notify the player of the entry into the first starting hole 45. This winning sound is a different sound from the winning sound that is output when the reserved image 702 (see FIG. 158 (8)) in the normal display mode is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (12), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a large display size in the expected color display mode on the second reserved pedestal 702P. In the illustrated example, the second reserved image 702 is displayed in blue. More specifically, the second reserved image 702 is displayed in a mode having a circular part made of blue and formed in a circular shape, and an aura part located above the circular part and imitating an aura. In addition, when the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the second reserved image 702 is started. In addition, the winning sound that notifies the winning of the first starting hole 45 is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the stage display performance is completed. This predetermined time is, for example, 1 second. In other words, the output time of the winning sound when the blue reserved image 702 is displayed is longer than the output time of the winning sound when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (13), the right decorative pattern 700 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it had been fixed until the start of the fluctuation. More specifically, the number "1" which is the right decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (14), the middle decorative pattern 700 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it was fixed and stopped until the start of the change. More specifically, the number "2" which is the middle decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops. Then, after the three decorative patterns 700 temporarily stop, as the special pattern stops changing, the three decorative patterns 700 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 159 (15). The combination "421" of the decorative patterns 700 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss. In addition, as the special pattern stops changing, the three small patterns 704 are also fixed and stopped. In other words, all of the small patterns 704 are fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the combination "421" of the small patterns 704 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 700. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "100 GAME". The execution time of this variable effect is, for example, 8 seconds.

(Step-by-step display of the circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode)
Next, a step-by-step display effect by the circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. Fig. 160 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect by the circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages as a stage display performance. When the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, first, as shown in FIG. 160(1), a highly transparent reserved image 702 is displayed in white as the first stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is semicircular. In addition, this reserved image 702 is displayed at a position above and away from the reserved base 702P. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 157(2) and FIG. 158(7).

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(2), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed as the second stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is circular and has a cross mark. In addition, this reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the reserved base 702P than the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 160(3), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed as the third stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the second stage and is displayed at a position closer to the reserved base 702P than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(4), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the third stage is displayed as the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is displayed with a larger display size than the third stage. Also, this reserved image 702 is displayed at a position closer to the reserved pedestal 702P than the third stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 157(3) and FIG. 158(8). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 157(2) and FIG. 158(7) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the stage display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the stage display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 157(3) and FIG. 158(9) is displayed.

Hereinafter, the display mode of reserved image 702 in the final stage may be referred to as the completed display mode. In particular, the display size of reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed display size. Furthermore, the form of reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed form. Furthermore, the transparency of reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed transparency. Furthermore, the display position of reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed display position.
Moreover, the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first to third stages, i.e., not the final stage, may be referred to as an incomplete display mode hereinafter. In particular, the display size of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as an incomplete display size. Furthermore, the form of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as an incomplete form. Furthermore, the transparency of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as an incomplete transparency. Furthermore, the operation mode of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as an incomplete operation mode. Furthermore, the display position of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as an incomplete display position.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance is started to when the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, i.e., the execution time of the step-by-step display performance using the reserved image 702 in the circular normal display mode, is 0.2 seconds.

When the stepwise display performance is completed, as shown in FIG. 160 (5), the motion performance of the reserved image 702 begins. The circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically rotates in a clockwise direction as a motion performance. The rotation period in this motion performance is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

As described above, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a stepwise display performance while the display size is gradually changed. More specifically, the reserved image 702 is displayed so that the display size is gradually increased. Also, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a stepwise display performance while the display position is gradually changed. More specifically, the reserved image 702 is displayed so that it gradually moves toward the reserved pedestal 702P (completed display position). Also, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a stepwise display performance while the transparency is gradually changed. More specifically, the reserved image 702 is displayed so that the transparency is gradually decreased. Also, the reserved image 702 is displayed so that the form is gradually changed. More specifically, the reserved image 702 is displayed so that the form is gradually approaching the completed form.
When the reserved image 702 is displayed, if the reserved image 702 is switched from a non-display state to a completed display state without a step-by-step display effect, the player may feel uncomfortable with the display of the reserved image 702. Therefore, in this embodiment, the reserved image 702 is displayed step by step by a step-by-step display effect, thereby suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, the step-by-step display effect allows the player to enjoy the change in the display state of the reserved image 702.

(Step-by-step display of the blue reserved image 702)
Next, a description will be given of a step-by-step display effect using the blue reserved image 702. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect using the blue reserved image 702.
The blue reserved image 702 performs a four-stage performance as a stage display performance. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, first, as shown in FIG. 161 (1), a highly transparent reserved image 702 is displayed in white as the first stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is semicircular. In addition, this reserved image 702 is displayed at a position above and away from the reserved base 702P. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 158 (11). In addition, the display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) of the blue reserved image 702 in the first stage is the same display mode as the display mode of the first stage in the stage display performance by the circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(2), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed in blue as the second stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is displayed in a manner having a circular portion 702a made of blue and formed in a circular shape, and an aura portion 702b located on top of the circular portion 702a and imitating an aura. In addition, this reserved image 702 has a display size larger than that of the first stage, and is displayed in a position closer to the reserved base 702P than that of the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 161(3), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed as the third stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than the second stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the reserved pedestal 702P than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(4), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the third stage is displayed as the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is displayed with a display size larger than that of the third stage. Also, this reserved image 702 is displayed at a position closer to the reserved pedestal 702P than that of the third stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 158(12). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 158(11) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the stage display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the stage display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 158(12) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance starts to when the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, that is, the execution time of the step-by-step display performance by the blue reserved image 702, is 0.3 seconds. In other words, the execution time of the step-by-step display performance by the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is longer than the execution time of the step-by-step display performance by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.

Furthermore, when the staged display performance is completed, the motion performance of the pending image 702 begins, as shown in FIG. 161 (5). As a motion performance, the blue circular pending image 702 periodically rotates in a clockwise direction at the circular portion 702a, and periodically swings from side to side at the aura portion 702b. The rotation period in this motion performance is, for example, 2.0 seconds. The swing period in this motion performance is, for example, 1.5 seconds.

As described above, the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode have the same display mode in the first stage of the step-by-step display presentation. In this case, when the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the step-by-step display presentation is displayed, the player cannot distinguish whether the displayed reserved image 702 is in the normal display mode or the expected color display mode. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to which display mode the reserved image 702 will be displayed in.
It has been described that the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode have the same display mode in the first stage of the stage display performance, but this is not limited to the above. The reserved image 702 in the normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode may have the same display mode in at least one of the display color, shape, display size, transparency, and display position in the first stage, while the other display modes may be different. Even in this case, when the reserved image 702 in the first stage is displayed, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the displayed reserved image 702 is in the normal display mode or the expected color display mode. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to which display mode the reserved image 702 will be displayed in.

In addition, in the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode, the display mode other than the display color (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) may be the same regardless of the display color, or may be different for each display color. In addition, in the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode, the display mode other than the display color (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) is the same for specific multiple colors (e.g., blue and red), and the display mode other than the display color (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) for a special color (e.g., rainbow color) may also be different from the specific multiple colors.
In addition, in the pending image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode, when the display mode other than the display color (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) differs depending on the display color, the display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) of each stage in the step-by-step display performance may also be different. In addition, in the pending image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode, when the display mode other than the display color (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) is the same regardless of the display color, the display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) of each stage in the step-by-step display performance may also be the same.

The action mode in the action presentation by the pending image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode may be the same regardless of the display color, or may be different for each display color. In addition, in the pending image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode, the action mode in the action presentation may be the same for certain multiple colors (e.g., blue and red), and the action mode in the action presentation for a special color (e.g., rainbow) may be different from the certain multiple colors.

(Example of variation 2)
FIG. 162 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable presentation example 2) of the variable presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 162. The variable presentation example 2 is a variable presentation example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 45 in the normal game state. The variable presentation example 2 is also a variable presentation example in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed. In the following explanation, the differences from the above variable presentation example 1 will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as the variable presentation example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 162(1), as the previous special symbol changes, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the performance control unit 130m. At this time, four reserved images 702, a number of executions image 705, and a stage image 706 are displayed. At this time, the number of executions display 703 of the first starting gate 45 displays "4". The number of executions image 705 displays the text "49 GAME". The background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second state. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous change performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (2), as the display of the next special pattern begins to change, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 begin to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 in the first starting port 45 switches to "3". Also, at this time, the second reserved image 702, the third reserved image 702, and the fourth reserved image 702 move toward the first reserved base 702P, the second reserved base 702P, and the third reserved base 702P, respectively. Also, the first reserved image 702 moves toward the variable base 701P and expands, causing the variable image 701 to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (3), the display of the second front image 709 begins. When the display of the second front image 709 begins, the transparency of the second front image 709 is high, and the decorative pattern 700 displayed on the layer behind the second front image 709 is visible to the player.

Next, as shown in Fig. 162 (4), the transparency of the second front image 709 is reduced, and the decorative pattern 700 displayed on the layer behind the second front image 709 becomes difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, a clear negation image 744 and a remaining number of times reached image 708 are displayed. The remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text "200 more".
Next, as shown in FIG. 162(5), the second front image 709 becomes non-displayed, and the decorative pattern 700, which is being displayed in a rapidly changing manner, becomes visible to the player again.
The display period of the second front image 709 is, for example, two seconds.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "853", are displayed together and fixed, as shown in Fig. 162 (6). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "50 GAMES".
The execution time of this variable effect is, for example, 4 seconds.

(Example of variation 3)
163 and 164 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 3) of the variation performance of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 163. Variable performance example 3 is a variation performance example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 45 in the normal game state. Also, variable performance example 3 is a variation performance example in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and a reach performance is executed. Also, in the following explanation, differences from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 163(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the performance control unit 130m as the variation of the previous special pattern ends. At this time, "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45. The execution number image 705 shows the text "200 GAME". The remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text "300 more". A background corresponding to the second stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The second stage is a stage corresponding to the normal game state and is different from the first stage.
In addition, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first state. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output background music corresponding to the previous variable performance.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 163 (2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 changes and is displayed at high speed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 displays "1". At this time, the reserved image 702 starts to be displayed in a step-by-step manner. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved base 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound as the game ball enters the first starting hole 45. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first state to the second state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (3), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and a star-shaped reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 163 (2). The display mode of this reserved image 702 is a display mode corresponding to the second stage. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed. Although not shown in the figure, when the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (4), the operation at the start of the change ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. In addition, the pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Although not shown in the figure, while the change performance is being performed, background music corresponding to the change performance being performed is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(5), the left decorative pattern 700, "4", temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 163(6), the right decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach performance begins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 164(7), the middle decorative pattern 700, “3”, is temporarily stopped.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, three decorative symbols 700 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 164 (8). The combination of decorative symbols 700 "434" is an example of a combination when the special symbol lottery result is a miss. Also, as the special symbols stop varying, the small symbols 704 "434" are also fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "201 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is updated to "299 more".

(Step-by-step display of the star-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode)
Next, a step-by-step display effect using the star-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. Fig. 165 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect using the star-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is a star-shaped reserved image that performs a four-stage display performance. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, a highly transparent reserved image 702 is displayed in white as the first stage of the stage display performance, as shown in FIG. 165(1). This reserved image 702 is a star-shaped image with the top part missing. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 163(2).

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(2), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed as the second stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is star-shaped. In addition, this reserved image 702 is displayed with a larger display size than the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 165(3), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed as the third stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than the second stage. Also, in the third stage, an action display using the reserved image 702 is performed. More specifically, in the third stage, an action display in which the reserved image 702 emits light is performed. In the illustrated example, an image simulating light is displayed moving from the center of the reserved image 702 toward the periphery of the reserved image 702.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(4), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the third stage is displayed as the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the staged display performance. This reserved image 702 is displayed with a display size larger than that of the third stage. Note that the action display by the reserved image 702 performed in the third stage of the staged display performance is not performed in the final stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the staged display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 163(3). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 163(2) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the staged display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the staged display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 163(3) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance starts until the reserved image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode, i.e., the execution time of the step-by-step display performance by the reserved image 702 in the star-shaped normal display mode, is 0.2 seconds. In other words, the execution time of the step-by-step display performance by the reserved image 702 in the star-shaped normal display mode is the same as the execution time of the step-by-step display performance by the reserved image 702 in the circular normal display mode.

When the stepwise display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 starts, as shown in FIG. 165 (5). The star-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically rotates counterclockwise as a motion performance. The rotation period in this motion performance is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

(Example of variation 4)
166 to 168 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 4) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Figs. 166 to 168. Variable performance example 4 is a variable performance example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 45 in the normal game state. Also, variable performance example 4 is a variable performance example in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss, and a reach performance, an SP reach performance, and an SPSP reach performance are executed. Also, in the following explanation, differences from each of the above variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 166 (1), a customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Also, "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting gate 45. Also, at this time, the fluctuation of the special pattern has stopped, and no fluctuation performance is being performed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the third state. The third state is a state in which they are turned off. Also, at this time, no sound is being output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 166 (2), the customer waiting image 710 becomes invisible as the special symbol starts to change and display. Also, at this time, the decorative symbol 700, the small symbol 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 start to change. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 starts to change at the start of its change, and the small symbol 704 is displayed to change at high speed. Also, at this time, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45. Also, the execution count image 705 shows the text "250 GAMES", and the remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text "250 more". Also, as the stage image 706, a background corresponding to the second stage is displayed. Also, at this time, the stage display performance of the reserved image 702 starts. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the third mode to the second mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (3), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved base 702P. The winning sound is also output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed. Although not shown in the figure, when the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (4), the operation at the start of the change ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. In addition, the pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Although not shown in the figure, while the change performance is being performed, background music corresponding to the change performance being performed is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 166 (5), the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 displays "1". At this time, the staged display performance of the reserved image 702 begins. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (6), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. The winning sound is also output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed. Although not shown in the figure, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(7), the left decorative pattern 700, "6", temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 167(8), the right decorative pattern 700 "6" temporarily stops, and the reach performance begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (9), a development performance is executed. The development performance is a performance that notifies the player that the reach performance will progress to the SP reach performance. In the development performance, the movable performance is executed and the first emphasis image 711 is displayed. The movable performance is a performance that operates the first movable member 73a. In the illustrated example, as the movable performance, the first movable member 73a moves to a position where it overlaps with the first image display device 70. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be easily visible for the player. Also, when the development performance is executed, the state of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c is switched. More specifically, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second state to the fourth state. The fourth state is a light emission state in which the lamps are lit in green, and is different from any of the first to third states.
In addition, when a game ball enters the first start hole 45 while the development performance is being executed, the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 45 switches to "2". Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 continues to be invisible to the player. In addition, at this time, the winning sound accompanying the winning in the first start hole 45 is not output.

Next, the development performance and the movable performance are finished, and the first movable member 73a is retreated to a position where it does not overlap with the first image display device 70, and then, as shown in FIG. 167 (10), the SP reach performance is executed. During the execution of the SP reach performance, the SP reach image 712 is displayed. At this time, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are in a state where they are difficult or impossible to see for the player. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be in a state where they are easy to see for the player. Also, at this time, the first image display device 70 displays an image of the background according to the SP reach performance. Also, when the SP reach performance is executed, the left and right decorative patterns 700 are displayed in a smaller display size and in a less decorative display mode. Also, the left and right decorative patterns 700 are displayed on the upper side of the first image display device 70. In the illustrated example, the left decorative pattern 700 is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and the right decorative pattern 700 is displayed in the upper right corner of the first image display device 70. The display positions of the left and right decorative patterns 700 when the SP reach performance is being performed are not limited to the illustrated example. When the SP reach performance is being performed, the left and right decorative patterns 700 may be displayed in any position on the first image display device 70 as long as they are different from the display positions (see FIG. 167 (8)) before the execution of the SP reach performance.
In addition, when a game ball enters the first start hole 45 while the SP reach performance is being executed, the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 45 switches to "3." In addition, a winning sound accompanying the winning of the first start hole 45 is output from the audio output device 9. Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 continues to be invisible to the player.

Next, as shown in Fig. 167 (11), the SPSP reach performance is executed. During the execution of the SPSP reach performance, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays a background image corresponding to the SPSP reach performance.
In addition, when a game ball enters the first start hole 45 while the SPSP reach performance is being executed, the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 45 is switched to "4". Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 continues to be invisible to the player. In addition, the winning sound accompanying the winning in the first start hole 45 is not output.
In addition, the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness displayed when the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is executed may be displayed on a layer different from the decorative pattern 700 with high decorativeness (see FIG. 167 (8)). For example, the decorative pattern 700 with high decorativeness may be displayed on a layer behind the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702, whereas the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness may be displayed on a layer in front of the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (12), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.
When the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, the number "5" of the center decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped as shown in Fig. 168 (13). At this time, the center decorative pattern 700 is displayed in a less decorative display mode and in a larger display size than the decorative patterns 700 on the left and right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (14), the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become difficult or impossible for the player to see. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be easily visible to the player.
The time from when the variable effect starts to when the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed is, for example, 60 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (15), the display area of the first eye-catching image 715 in the first image display device 70 becomes smaller. More specifically, the display area of the first eye-catching image 715 becomes smaller by sliding the first eye-catching image 715 to the right. At this time, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the first eye-catching image 715 is not displayed, the third reserved image 702, the fourth reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the provisional stop display of the highly decorative left decorative pattern 700 becomes easily visible to the player. Also, the part of the second reserved image 702 that does not overlap with the first eye-catching image 715 becomes visible or easily visible to the player. Also, the part of the stage image 706 that does not overlap with the first eye-catching image 715 becomes easily visible to the player. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, and the first reserved image 702 continue to be in a state where they are difficult or impossible to see for the player. In addition, the part of the stage image 706 that overlaps with the first eye-catching image 715 continues to be in a state where they are difficult or impossible to see for the player. In addition, the part of the second reserved image 702 that overlaps with the first eye-catching image 715 continues to be in a state where they are difficult or impossible to see for the player. Also, at this time, the action presentation of the fourth reserved image 702, the third reserved image 702, and the second reserved image 702 is being executed, and the action display of the fourth reserved image 702, the third reserved image 702, and the second reserved image 702 becomes visible or easily visible for the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (16), the first eye-catching image 715 is not displayed. At this time, the provisional stop display of the three highly decorative decorative patterns 700 is easily visible to the player. Also, the variable image 701 and the first reserved image 702 are easily visible to the player. Furthermore, the entire stage image 706 and the entire second reserved image 702 are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, four reserved images 702 in the normal display mode are displayed in the completed display mode. That is, for the second reserved image 702, the third reserved image 702, and the fourth reserved image 702, the reserved images 702 in the completed display mode are displayed without the stage display performance being visible to the player.
The display time of the first eye-catching image 715 is, for example, 2.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 168 (17), three decorative symbols 700 and small symbols 704 are fixed and stopped with the stop of the special symbols. The combination "656" of the decorative symbols 700 and small symbols 704 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a miss. Also, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "251 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times reached image 708 is updated to "249 left". Also, at this time, the variable image 701 is not displayed. The execution time of this variable performance is, for example, 70 seconds.
In this variation performance, the time from when the left decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops to when the right decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops is, for example, 5 seconds. The time from when the right decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops to when the center decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops is, for example, 20 seconds.
The timing of updating the display contents when the execution count image 705 is redisplayed may be the same as the timing of updating the display contents when the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is redisplayed. In this case, both the execution count image 705 and the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 may be redisplayed with the updated display contents or with the display contents before the update.

As described above, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the execution of a development effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, etc., the reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode will not be visible to the player, but the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode will become visible.
In this way, the change in display mode of the reserved image 702 from the incomplete display mode is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from drawing excessive attention from the player, and the player can be made to focus on the image unique to the performance being executed.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the execution of the notification effect, a winning sound is not output to notify the player of the entry into the first starting hole 45. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by the entry into the first starting hole 45 and losing attention to the notification effect.
In addition, sound effects for the notification performance may be output while the notification performance is being executed.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during execution of the SP reach performance, a winning sound is output to notify of the entry into the first starting hole 45, whereas when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during execution of the SPSP reach performance, no winning sound is output.
Thus, the priority between making the player recognize the winning of the first starting hole 45 and making the player pay attention to the performance being executed when the winning is switched according to the progress of the performance, and a sharp performance can be realized.

In addition, in both cases where a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while the notification performance is being executed and while the SP reach performance is being executed, a winning sound is output to notify of the entry into the first starting hole 45, and it is also possible to configure so that no winning sound is output when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while the SPSP reach performance is being executed.
In addition, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while the notification effect is being executed, a winning sound is output to notify of the entry into the first starting hole 45, and in either case, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while the SP reach effect is being executed or the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the winning sound may not be output.

In addition, as the display area of the first eye-catching image 715 gradually becomes smaller over time, some of the multiple reserved images 702 become visible or easily visible to the player, while the other parts become difficult or invisible to the player. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the first eye-catching image 715 is switched from being displayed across the entire surface of the first image display device 70 to being hidden, it is possible to quickly make the player aware that the hidden reserved images 702 are still there, while minimizing the awkward feeling of the stage image 706 and the like being displayed again.

Also, when the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70, a part of the one reserved image 702 is visible to the player, and another part of the one reserved image 702 is difficult or impossible to see by the player (see FIG. 168 (15)). In this state, the action presentation by the one reserved image 702 is being executed.
In this case, even if only a part of the reserved image 702 is visible to the player, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the existence of the reserved image 702. Therefore, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the hidden reserved image 702 is still there.

In the case of a reach variation, after the middle decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops and the reach is lost, a first performance is performed in which a first predetermined image (first eye-catching image 715) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again. In the case of a loss variation, a second predetermined image (first front image 707, second front image 709) appears during the scroll variation of the decorative pattern 700, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again to notify a loss. The variation time is longer when the first performance is performed than when the second performance is performed.
In this case, in the first performance, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden by the display of the first predetermined image after the decorative pattern 700 stops in a losing mode, so that the player can have hope that the temporary loss may develop into some kind of performance. Also, in the second performance, the decorative pattern 700 is suddenly hidden during the variable display, which gives an element of surprise and makes the player excited. Although a common event of hiding the decorative pattern 700 occurs, the predetermined image appears from a different state. This makes it possible to diversify the variations in the performance and improve the interest.

Moreover, the small symbol 704 continues to be displayed while the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are being displayed.
In this case, even when the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, the small pattern 704 is displayed, so that the changing state of the special pattern can be confirmed.

Furthermore, the display time of the first predetermined image is different from the display time of the second predetermined image. In particular, the display time of the second predetermined image is longer than the display time of the first predetermined image (second foreground image 709).
In this case, the transition from a missed reach to the next performance can be made smoother by shortening the display time of the first predetermined image, and the player can be made to have high expectations by lengthening the display time of the second predetermined image.

In addition, a reserved image 702 (variable image 701) can be displayed, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is hidden while the first specified image is being displayed, and is redisplayed together with the appearance of the decorative pattern 700, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is displayed (not hidden) while the second specified image is being displayed.
In this case, since neither the decorative pattern 700 nor the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is displayed while the first predetermined image is being displayed, the player can be more conscious of the first predetermined image. Since the decorative pattern 700 is not displayed while the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is displayed while the second predetermined image is being displayed, the player can be made aware of the current state (whether it is being varied, how many reserved images are present, etc.).

In addition, a specific performance (such as a SP reach performance) with a high expectation is executed before the first predetermined image is displayed, and no specific performance is executed before the second predetermined image is displayed.
In this case, the player's expectations can be increased by the special effects, and even if a special effect shows a loss, the player's expectations can be maintained by the appearance of the first predetermined image. On the other hand, the second predetermined image is displayed without going through the special effects, so that the player's expectations can be increased immediately.

When the first performance is performed, the background image is switched before and after the first predetermined image is displayed (in the order of background in the SP reach performance, first predetermined image, first stage or second stage). When the second performance is performed, the background image is not changed before and after the second predetermined image is displayed (in the order of first stage or second stage, second predetermined image, first stage or second stage).
In this case, when the first performance is performed, the first predetermined image is displayed when switching from the specific background to the normal background, so that the background transition can be made smoothly, whereas in the case of the second performance, the normal background is suddenly switched to the second predetermined image, so that the player's expectations can be heightened.

In addition, depending on the judgment result, it is possible to stop the multiple decorative patterns 700 in a predetermined order, and when the second performance (display of the second front image 709) is executed, the multiple decorative patterns 700 are not stopped in the predetermined order, and when the first performance is executed, the multiple decorative patterns 700 are stopped in a predetermined order, and the time from when the first pattern (left decorative pattern 700) stops to when the second pattern (right decorative pattern 700) stops is different from the time from when the second pattern (right decorative pattern 700) stops to when the third pattern (middle decorative pattern 700) stops.
In this case, when the first performance is executed, the decorative symbols 700 stop in order, and there is a time until the third decorative symbol 700 stops, so that the player can be excited. In addition, even if the third decorative symbol 700 stops, the first predetermined image is displayed, so that the player's disappointment can be reduced, and the possibility of development to further performance can be left. In addition, when the second performance is executed, the decorative symbols 700 do not stop in order, so that the performance can be unexpected, and the interest can be improved.

Furthermore, the appearance of the decorative pattern 700 is different before and after the first predetermined image appears, and the appearance of the decorative pattern 700 is the same before and after the second predetermined image appears.
In this case, when the first performance is performed, the appearance of the decorative pattern 700 changes via the first predetermined image, so that it is possible to smoothly change the appearance of the decorative pattern 700. Also, when the second performance is performed, although there is no change in the appearance of the decorative pattern 700 before and after the display of the second predetermined image, the second predetermined image suddenly appears, so that it is possible to provide an unexpected performance and improve interest.

In addition, in the variable performance example 4, it has been explained that the variable image 701 is displayed after the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance end (see FIG. 168 (16)), but this is not limited to this. The variable image 701 does not have to be displayed after the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance end.

(Example of variation 5)
169 to 172 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable presentation example 5) of the variable presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Figs. 169 to 172. Variable presentation example 5 is a variable presentation example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 45 in the normal game state. Also, variable presentation example 5 is a variable presentation example in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. Also, in the following explanation, differences from the above variable presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 169(1), an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed. Also, "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting gate 45. Also, at this time, the special symbol is displayed as stopped, and no variable performance is being performed. Also, a background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as a stage image 706. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the fifth mode. The fifth mode is a light emission mode in which the lights are lit in yellow, and is a mode different from any of the first to fifth modes. Also, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 169 (2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the special pattern. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change at the start of the variable display, and the small pattern 704 is displayed variable at high speed. At this time, the winning light-emitting performance is executed. In the winning light-emitting performance, a notification sound of the winning light-emitting performance is output from the audio output device 9, which is different from the winning sound output when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode or the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed. The notification sound of the winning light-emitting performance can also be regarded as a winning sound that notifies the winning of the first starting hole 45. In addition, in the winning light-emitting performance, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the sixth mode. The sixth mode is a mode in which the red light periodically flashes. The blinking period is, for example, 0.5 seconds. At this time, the hold number display 703 of the first starting port 45 displays "1." At this time, the staged display presentation of the hold image 702 begins. In the illustrated example, the hold image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first hold pedestal 702P.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169 (3), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the step-by-step display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed in a completed display mode on the first reserved base 702P. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed in blue. Although not illustrated, when the step-by-step display performance is completed, the operation performance of the first reserved image 702 begins. The notification sound for the winning light-emitting performance is no longer output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the step-by-step display performance is completed. This predetermined time is, for example, two seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169 (4), the operation at the start of the change ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. The pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Although not shown in the figure, while the change performance is being performed, background music corresponding to the change performance being performed is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 169 (5), the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 displays "1". At this time, the staged display performance of the reserved image 702 also begins. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound.

Next, when the stage display performance by the first reserved image 702 is completed and the game ball enters the first start hole 45, as shown in FIG. 169 (6), "2" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 45. At this time, the stage display performance of the second reserved image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the second reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first start hole 45, the output of the winning sound from the sound output device 9 is started. More specifically, before the output of the winning sound corresponding to the first reserved image 702 is completed, the output of the winning sound corresponding to the second reserved image 702 is started. In addition, the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, although not illustrated, when the stage display performance is completed, the action performance of the first reserved image 702 is started.

If the output of the current winning sound starts before the output of the previous winning sound ends, the output of the previous winning sound may be stopped when the output of the current winning sound starts. Also, even if the output of the current winning sound starts before the output of the previous winning sound ends, the previous winning sound may be output until the end. In other words, the previous winning sound and the current winning sound may be output simultaneously. Also, if the output of the winning sound notifying the current winning start starts before the output of the previous winning sound ends, the current winning sound may not be output until the output of the previous winning sound ends.

Next, when the stage display performance of the second reserved image 702 is completed and the game ball enters the first start hole 45, as shown in FIG. 170 (7), "3" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 45. At this time, the stage display performance of the third reserved image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the third reserved base 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first start hole 45, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound. In addition, the reserved image 702 in the normal game state is displayed in a completed display mode on the second reserved base 702P. In addition, although not illustrated, when the stage display performance is completed, the action performance of the second reserved image 702 starts.

Next, as shown in FIG. 170 (8), the stage display performance of the third reserved image 702 is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the third reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the action performance of the third reserved image 702 is started. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 170(9), the left decorative pattern 700, "4", is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 170 (10), the right decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach performance begins.
Next, as shown in Fig. 170 (11), the development performance is executed. In the development performance, the movable performance is executed and the first emphasized image 711 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the sixth state to the fourth state.

Next, as shown in Fig. 170 (12), the SP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SP reach effect, the SP reach image 712 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the second mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 171 (13), the SPSP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SPSP reach effect, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (14), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, a jackpot notification effect is executed as shown in FIG. 171 (15). The jackpot notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. In the jackpot effect, a moving effect is executed and a second emphasis image 718 is displayed. In the illustrated example, as a moving effect, the first movable member 73a moves to a position overlapping with the first image display device 70. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be easily visible to the player. In addition, when the big win notification performance is executed, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c switch from the second mode to the seventh mode. The seventh mode is a light emission mode in which the lights are turned on in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple over time. In other words, the seventh mode is a light emission mode in which the lighting colors are switched to seven colors over time to light up in rainbow colors. The seventh mode can also be considered as a mode that suggests or notifies that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up in red, the board lamp 74b lights up in orange, the movable member lamp 74c lights up in yellow, and the button lamp 17c lights up in green. In addition, when the big win notification performance is executed, the sound effect of the big win notification performance is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the big win notification effect ends and the second emphasis image 718 is not displayed, the decoration pattern 700 of the double number is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 171 (16). In the illustrated example, the decoration pattern 700 is displayed in a combination of "444". At this time, the decoration pattern 700 is larger in display size than the display mode during the execution of the SPSP reach effect (see FIG. 171 (13)). On the other hand, the small pattern 704 continues to be in a variable display state. At this time, the execution count image 705 and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are redisplayed. On the other hand, the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 continue to be in a state that is difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up in orange, the board lamp 74b lights up in yellow, the movable member lamp 74c lights up in green, and the button lamp 17c lights up in blue. At this time, the first image display device 70 again displays a background corresponding to the SPSP reach performance.
In addition, the background of the first image display device 70 when the repeating number decorative pattern 700 is displayed may be a background corresponding to the stage currently being stayed in, i.e., a background corresponding to the first stage.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 displays "4". Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 continues to be difficult or impossible for the player to see. In addition, no winning sound is output.

Then, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 is fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 171 (17). Also, "444" is fixed and stopped as the small symbol 704. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 matches the combination of "444". Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "351 GAMES". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of times reached image 708 is updated to "149 left". Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up yellow, the board lamp 74b lights up green, the movable member lamp 74c lights up blue, and the button lamp 17c lights up in indigo blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (18), an opening image 719 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all change from the seventh state to the second state. Although not shown, during the execution of the big win game, background music according to the progress of the big win game is output from the sound output device 9.
172(19), a first right hit image 720 and a promotion image 721 are displayed. The display time of the promotion image 721 is, for example, five seconds.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the promotion image 721, a round in progress image 722 and a round number image 723 are displayed, as shown in Fig. 172 (20). In the illustrated example, the round number image 723 displays the text "Round 1".
Next, when the final round is over, as shown in Fig. 172 (21), a normal time-saving selection image 745 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is set to the "A" mode in the normal time-saving selection image 745.
Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal time-saving selection image 745 was displayed, a normal time-saving start image 724 is displayed as shown in Fig. 172 (22). At this time, a card warning image 739 and a game warning image 740 are also displayed.

Next, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 172 (23), the first image display device 70 displays the less decorative decorative pattern 700, "444". The decorative pattern 700 displayed at this time corresponds to the sequence of numbers that was finally displayed before the big win game was executed, that is, when the big win was won. The small pattern 704 is also displayed as the sequence of numbers "444" like the decorative pattern 700. At this time, a background corresponding to the third stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The third stage is a stage corresponding to the normal time-saving game state. At this time, the second right-hit image 725 and the normal time-saving remaining number image 726 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "100 times" indicating the remaining number of times of the special pattern lottery in the normal time-saving game state is displayed as the normal time-saving remaining number image 726. Additionally, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 shows "4," and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 shows "0." Note that neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. Note that the time from when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is displayed (see FIG. 171 (16)) until the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state is, for example, 150 seconds.

As described above, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is not visible to the player. In this case, by making the change in display mode from the incomplete display mode of the reserved image 702 difficult or impossible for the player to see, it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the reserved image 702 while the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, and to allow the player to focus on the fact that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot.
In addition, if the game ball enters the first start hole 45 while the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, no winning sound is output. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by the game ball entering the first start hole 45 and losing track of the fact that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
However, even if the game ball enters the first start hole 45 when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, the stage display performance may be executed and the reserved image 702 of each stage may be visible or easily visible to the player. Also, even if the game ball enters the first start hole 45 when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, a winning sound may be output.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute suggestive effects (display of execution count image 705, display of remaining number of times reached image 708, display of countdown image 732 described later) that suggest a time when a special time-saving game state may occur, and during a specified miss variation effect (miss without reach), there is an execution period during which the suggestive effect is executed, but there is no non-execution period during which the suggestive effect is not executed, and during a jackpot variation effect, there is an execution period during which the suggestive effect is executed (before the SP reach effect) and a non-execution period during which the suggestive effect is not executed (during the SP reach effect, during the SPSP reach effect). Therefore, while the suggestive effect makes the player hope that a special time-saving game state will occur, the non-execution period during the jackpot variation effect during which the suggestive effect is not executed allows the player to focus their attention on the variation effect, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to execute suggestive effects (display of the execution count image 705, display of the remaining number of times reached image 708, display of the countdown image 732 described later) that suggest a time when a special time-saving game state may occur, and during the first reach variation effect (reach effect), there is an execution period during which the suggestive effect is executed, but there is no non-execution period during which the suggestive effect is not executed, and during the second reach variation effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), which has a higher expectation than the first reach variation effect, there is an execution period during which the suggestive effect is executed (before the SP reach effect) and a non-execution period during which the suggestive effect is not executed (during the SP effect, during the SPSP reach effect). Therefore, while the suggestive effect makes the player expect that a special time-saving game state will occur, the non-execution period during the second reach variation effect, which has a higher expectation than the first reach variation effect, allows the player to focus on the variation effect, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, during a jackpot fluctuation performance in which a suggestive performance is executed, multiple periods during which the suggestive performance is not executed can occur (during a development performance, during an SPSP reach performance, etc.). In addition, during a jackpot fluctuation performance in which a suggestive performance is executed, multiple periods during which the suggestive performance is executed can occur (before an SP reach performance, after the temporary stopping of the decorative pattern 700 of the double numbers, etc.).

In addition, during a specific reach with a miss variation performance in which a suggestive performance is executed, multiple periods in which the suggestive performance is not executed can occur (during a development performance, during an SPSP reach, etc.).In addition, during a specific reach with a miss variation performance in which a suggestive performance is executed, multiple periods in which the suggestive performance is executed can occur (before a reach performance, after the temporary stopping of the three decorative patterns 700, etc.).

In addition, even during the execution of the development performance, the SP reach performance, and the SPSP reach performance, the display of the execution count image 705 and the reached remaining number image 708 may be continued. Even in this case, the reserved image 702 is not displayed during the execution of the development performance, the SP reach performance, and the SPSP reach performance. That is, it is possible to execute a suggestive performance (display of the execution count image 705, display of the reached remaining number image 708, display of the countdown image 732 described later, etc.) that suggests a time when a special time-saving game state may occur, and during a specific performance (development performance, SP/SPSP reach, etc.) that expects the execution of a jackpot game, the reserved icon is not displayed, but the b time-saving suggestive performance can be executed continuously. In this case, the suggestive performance makes the player expect the special time-saving game state to occur, and the player can be made aware of the occurrence of the special time-saving game state even during the specific performance, and even if the specific performance is executed and fails, the player's dissatisfaction can be reduced, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.
The suggestive effect is executed a predetermined period (a predetermined change) before the special time-saving game state occurs. There are a plurality of types of suggestive effects.

In addition, when the normal time-saving play state is entered, a suggestion effect (display of the normal time-saving start image 724) can be executed to confirm in advance that the normal time-saving play state will be entered.

(Example of variation 6)
173 and 174 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 6) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Figs. 173 and 174. Variation presentation example 6 is a variation presentation example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the second start hole 47 in the normal time-saving game state. Also, variation presentation example 6 is a variation presentation example in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and the reach presentation is not executed. Also, in the following explanation, differences from each of the above variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as each of the variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 173(1), as the variation of the previous special pattern ends, the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped by the performance pattern 130m in the first image display device 70. At this time, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the second right hit image 725, and the normal time reduction remaining number image 726 are displayed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45, and "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47. In addition, the background corresponding to the third stage is displayed as the stage image 706. In addition, the execution count image 705 shows the text "10 GAME", and the normal time reduction remaining number image 726 shows the text "90 times".
In addition, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first state. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output background music corresponding to the previous variable performance.

Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 47, as shown in FIG. 173 (2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the display of the special pattern. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed to change at high speed. At this time, the display content of the normal time reduction remaining number image 726 is updated to "89 times". At this time, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 47. At this time, the stage display performance of the reserved image 702 starts. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved pedestal 702P. At the same time, as the game ball enters the second start hole 47, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound that notifies the winning of the second start hole 47. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first state to the second state.

In addition, in the normal time-saving game state, the operation at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 700 may not be performed. That is, in the normal time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 700 may be displayed to vary at high speed as soon as the variation starts.
In addition, the winning sound notifying the winning of a prize at the second starting hole 47 may be the same as the winning sound notifying the winning of a prize at the first starting hole 45, or it may be a different sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (3), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and a triangular reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. This reserved image 702 has a display size larger than the example shown in FIG. 173 (2). The display mode of this reserved image 702 is a display mode corresponding to the third stage. The winning sound that notifies the winning of the second starting hole 47 continues to be output until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed. Although not shown in the figure, when the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (4), the operation at the start of the change ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. In addition, the pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the second start port 47 switches to "0."

Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 47, as shown in FIG. 173 (5), the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 47 displays "1". At this time, the staged display of the reserved image 702 begins. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved base 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the second start hole 47, the sound output device 9 begins to output a winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (6), the stage display performance is completed, and a triangular reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 173 (5). The winning sound is also output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed. Also, although not shown in the figure, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 174 (7), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "412", are displayed together and are fixed. At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "11 GAMES."

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute suggestive effects (such as displaying the execution count image 705, displaying the remaining number of times reached image 708, and displaying the countdown image 732 described later) that suggest a time when a special time-saving game state may occur, and during the variable effects executed in the normal game state, there are execution periods (before the SP reach effect) during which suggestive effects are executed and non-execution periods (during the SP effect, during the SPSP reach effect, etc.) during which suggestive effects are not executed, and during the variable effects executed in the specific game state (time-saving game state), there are no execution periods during which suggestive effects are executed, but there are non-execution periods during which suggestive effects are not executed. Therefore, while the suggestive effects create anticipation that a special time-saving game state will occur, the suggestive effects are not executed in the specific game state, allowing the player to focus their attention on the effects in the specific game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Step-by-step display of the triangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode)
Next, a step-by-step display effect using the triangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. Fig. 175 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect using the triangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The triangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages as a stage display performance. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 47, a highly transparent reserved image 702 is displayed in white as the first stage of the stage display performance, as shown in FIG. 175(1). This reserved image 702 is a triangle with the upper part missing. In addition, the upper part of this reserved image 702 is displayed on the reserved base 702P, and the lower part is displayed below the reserved base 702P. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 173(2) and FIG. 173(5).

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(2), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed as the second stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 has a triangular shape. In addition, this reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage and is displayed higher than the first stage.
Next, as shown in Fig. 175 (3), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed as the third stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the second stage and is displayed higher than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(4), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the third stage is displayed as the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is displayed with a display size larger than that of the third stage. Also, the entire reserved image 702 is displayed on the reserved pedestal 702P. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 173(3) and FIG. 173(6). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 173(2) and FIG. 173(5) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the stage display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the stage display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 173(3) and FIG. 173(6) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance starts to when the reserved image 702 in the completed display state is displayed, i.e., the execution time of the step-by-step display performance using the reserved image 702 in the triangular normal display state, is 0.2 seconds.

Furthermore, when the step-by-step display presentation is completed, as shown in FIG. 175 (5), the motion presentation of the reserved image 702 begins. The triangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically moves up and down as a motion presentation. The period of the up and down movement in this motion presentation is, for example, 2.0 seconds. In other words, the period of the motion presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the normal time-saving play state is the same period as the period of the motion presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the normal play state.

(Example of change performance 7)
176 to 181 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 7) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 176 to FIG. 181. The variable performance example 7 includes a variable performance based on winning the second start port 47 in the normal time-saving game state, a variable performance based on winning the second start port 47 in the normal game state, and a variable performance based on winning the first start port 45 in the normal game state. In addition, in the variable performance example 7, six variable performances are performed. The first variable performance of these six variable performances is a variable performance based on winning the second start port 47 in the normal time-saving game state. In addition, the second to fourth variable performances of the six variable performances are variable performances based on winning the second start port 47 in the normal game state. In addition, the fifth and sixth variable performances of the six variable performances are variable performances based on winning the first start port 45 in the normal game state.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 176 (1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the performance control unit 130m as the variation of the previous special pattern ends. At this time, four reserved images 702, an execution count image 705, a stage image 706, a second right-hit image 725, and a normal time-saving remaining count image 726 are displayed. Also, "4" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second starting hole 47. Also, a background corresponding to the fourth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The fourth stage is a stage corresponding to the normal time-saving game state and is a stage different from the third stage. The fourth stage is a stage that is set when the "B" mode is selected in the normal time-saving selection image 745 (see FIG. 172 (21)). Also, the display mode of the four reserved images 702 is a display mode corresponding to the fourth stage, and is the same display mode as the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode displayed in the third stage. Additionally, the execution count image 705 displays the text "99 GAMES," and the remaining normal time-saving count image 726 displays the text "1 time." Additionally, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all in the second state. Although not shown, the audio output device 9 continues to output background music that corresponds to the previous variable performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the change display of the next special pattern. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 switches to "3".
Next, as shown in FIG. 176(3), the left decorative pattern 700, "4", temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 176(4), the right decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach performance begins.

Next, as shown in Fig. 176 (5), the SP reach performance is executed. That is, in the normal time-saving gaming state, the SP reach performance is executed without executing the development performance. During the execution of the SP reach performance, the SP reach image 712 is displayed. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays a background corresponding to the SP reach performance, which is different from the background during the execution of the SP reach performance in the normal gaming state.
In addition, even in the normal time-saving game state, the SP reach effect may be executed after the development effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (6), the SPSP reach performance is executed. While the SPSP reach performance is being executed, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays a background corresponding to the SPSP reach performance, which is different from the background displayed during the execution of the SPSP reach performance in the normal game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(7), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, the number "5", which is the middle decorative pattern 700, is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 177 (8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (9), a switching image 727 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, variable image 701, reserved image 702, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times for normal time reduction image 726 become difficult or impossible for the player to see. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703, small pattern 704, and second right hit image 725 continue to be easily visible to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(10), when the switching image 727 is hidden, the temporary stop display of the three decorative symbols 700, "454", becomes easily visible to the player. Also, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times of normal time reduction image 726 become easily visible to the player.
Then, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "454", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 177 (11). At this time, the variable image 701 is not displayed. The display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "100 GAMES". As the special symbols stop varying, the game state of the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (12), the first transition image 728 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, and the stage image 706 are difficult or impossible to see for the player. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be easily visible for the player. Also, the second right hit image 725 and the normal time reduction remaining count image 726 are not displayed.
Next, a result image 729 is displayed as shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (14), the small symbol 704 starts to change with the start of the change display of the next special symbol. This change is based on winning the second start port 47 in the normal game state. In addition, the decorative symbol 700 is not displayed in this change. That is, in this change, the change performance is performed using the small symbol 704 without using the decorative symbol 700. In addition, the change image 701 and the reserved image 702 are not displayed in this change. In addition, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 switches to "2".
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three small symbols 704, "721", are displayed in a line and are fixed, as shown in FIG. 178 (15).

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (16), the variation of the small symbol 704 starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 switches to "1".
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three small symbols 704 are displayed together and are fixed as shown in FIG. 178 (17). The combination of the small symbols 704, "658", is an example of a combination when the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (18), the variation of the small symbol 704 starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 switches to "0".
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three small symbols 704, "421", are displayed in a line as shown in FIG. 179 (19) and are fixed.

Then, when the variable performance based on winning the second start port 47 ends without any reserved balls based on winning the second start port 47, the highly decorative decorative pattern 700 "421" is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70 as shown in FIG. 179 (20). That is, the combination of the decorative pattern 700 and the combination of the small pattern 704 match. At this time, the background corresponding to the fifth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The fifth stage is a stage corresponding to the normal game state and is different from any of the first stage to the fourth stage. At this time, the execution count image 705 and the left hit image 730 are displayed. The execution count image 705 displays the text "100 GAME" including the number of new variable performances performed since the number of times the special pattern variable display was reset. At this time, the number displayed in the execution count image 705 is the number of variable performances performed since the gaming machine 1 was controlled to the normal time-saving game state. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second state to the first state. At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a voice saying, "Please return to left hand hitting."

When a predetermined time has elapsed without any winnings in the first starting hole 45, the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed as shown in FIG. 179 (21). At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first state to the fifth state.

Next, when the game ball enters the first start hole 45, as shown in FIG. 179 (22), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the special pattern change display. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change and the small pattern 704 changes and displays at high speed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 45 displays "1". At this time, the reserved image 702 starts to be displayed in a staged manner. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the first reserved base 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound as the game ball enters the first start hole 45. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth state to the second state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (23), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and a square-shaped reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved base 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 179 (22). This reserved image 702 is in a display mode corresponding to the fifth stage. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the reserved image 702 begins. The winning sound continues to be output until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (24), the operation at the start of the change ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. In addition, the pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Although not shown in the figure, while the change performance is being performed, background music corresponding to the change performance being performed is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 displays "1" as shown in FIG. 180 (25). At this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output the winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (26), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P in a display size larger than the example shown in FIG. 180 (25). Also, although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 begins. Also, the winning sound continues to be output until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, after the three decorative symbols 700 have temporarily stopped, the special symbols stop varying, and the three decorative symbols 700 are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 180 (27). This combination of decorative symbols 700, "712", is an example of a combination that occurs when the special symbol lottery result is a miss. Also, as the special symbols stop varying, the three small symbols 704, "712", also stop and are fixed. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "101 GAME". Also, at this time, the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is displayed. The text "399 more" is displayed in the remaining number of times to be reached image 708.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (28), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the change display of the next special pattern. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 switches to "0".
Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (29), the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are in a state where they are difficult or impossible to see for the player. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be in a state where they are easy to see for the player. Also, at this time, when the game ball enters the first start hole 45, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 45. On the other hand, the reserved image 702 continues to be in a state where it is difficult or impossible to see for the player. Also, as the game ball enters the first start hole 45, a winning sound that notifies the player of the entry into the first start hole 45 is output from the audio output device 9. Also, at this time, a sound effect that the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed is output from the audio output device 9. That is, the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound and the sound effects at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (30), the second eye-catching image 731 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700, variable image 701, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 are easily visible to the player. The background corresponding to the first stage is shown as the stage image 706. At this time, the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode. In other words, the reserved images 702 of each stage in the stage display performance are not visible to the player, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is easily visible to the player.

Next, after the three decorative symbols 700 temporarily stop, the special symbols stop varying, and as shown in FIG. 181 (31), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "412", stop for a certain period. At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "102 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is updated to "398 more".

As described above, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while the second eye-catching image 731 is being displayed, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is not visible to the player, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is easily visible to the player. In this way, by not allowing the player to see the change in display mode from the incomplete display mode of the reserved image 702, the reserved image 702 is prevented from drawing excessive attention from the player while the second eye-catching image 731 is being displayed, and the player can be made to pay attention to the change in stage.
Furthermore, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while the second eye-catching image 731 is being displayed, a winning sound is output to notify the player of the entry into the first starting hole 45. Therefore, even if the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is not visible to the player, the player can be made to recognize that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 45.

In the normal time-saving game state, when the reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode, the display mode of the reserved image 702 is the same regardless of the stage as described above, but this is not limited to the above. Even in the normal time-saving game state, when the reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode, the display mode of the reserved image 702 may differ for each stage.

(Step-by-step display of the square-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode)
Next, a step-by-step display effect by the square-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. Fig. 182 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect by the square-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The square reserved image 702 in the normal display mode performs three stages as a stage display performance. When the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, a highly transparent reserved image 702 is displayed in white as the first stage of the stage display performance, as shown in FIG. 182 (1). This reserved image 702 is a rectangle extending to the left and right. In addition, this reserved image 702 is displayed at a position above and away from the reserved base 702P. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 179 (22) and FIG. 180 (25).

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(2), in the second stage of the stage display performance, a square reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed in a square shape. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the reserved pedestal 702P than the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 182(3), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed as the third stage, i.e., the final stage, of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 has a display size larger than that of the second stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the reserved pedestal 702P than that of the second stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 179(23) and FIG. 180(26). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 179(22) and FIG. 180(25) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the stage display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the stage display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 179(23) and FIG. 180(26) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance starts to when the reserved image 702 in the completed display state is displayed, i.e., the execution time of the step-by-step display performance using the reserved image 702 in the square-shaped normal display state, is 0.2 seconds.

When the stepwise display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 is started, as shown in FIG. 182 (4). The square-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically rotates halfway in the clockwise direction and then halfway in the counterclockwise direction as a motion performance. The rotation period in this motion performance is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

(Example of variation 8)
183 to 185 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 8) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figs. 183 to 185. Variable performance example 8 is a variable performance example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 47 in the normal time-saving game state. Also, variable performance example 8 includes four variable performances. The first to third variable performances out of these four variable performances are variable performances in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a miss. Also, the fourth variable performance out of the four variable performances is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 183(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the performance control unit 130m as the variation of the previous special pattern ends. At this time, three reserved images 702 are displayed in the normal display mode. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 shows "3". The number of times of execution image 705 shows the text "50 GAMES", and the remaining number of times of normal time reduction image 726 shows the text "50 times". The background corresponding to the fourth stage is shown as the stage image 706. The top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous variation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (2), the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 start to change as the display of the next special pattern begins to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "2." Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of times for normal time reduction image 726 is updated to "49 times."

Next, as the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting hole 47 displays "3" as shown in FIG. 183 (3). At this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and a reserved image 702 is displayed on the third reserved base 702P. This third reserved image 702 shows a triangular portion and a lightning bolt mark. At this time, the audio output device 9 starts to output a winning sound to notify the player of the entry into the second starting hole 47. This winning sound is different from any of the winning sounds mentioned above.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(4), the step-by-step display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed on the third reserved base 702P. This third reserved image 702 is composed of a triangular portion displayed in rainbow colors and a circular portion surrounding this triangular portion. This third reserved image 702 is the reserved image 702 that is displayed when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. Although not shown, when the step-by-step display performance is completed, the operation performance of the third reserved image 702 begins. In addition, the winning sound that notifies the winning of the second starting hole 47 is no longer output when a predetermined time has passed since the step-by-step display performance was completed. This predetermined time is, for example, 2.5 seconds.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "412", are displayed together and fixed, as shown in FIG. 183 (5). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "51 GAME". Although not shown in the figure, during the execution of the varying performance, background music corresponding to the varying performance being executed is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(6), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the change display of the next special pattern. In addition, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 switches to "2". In addition, the display content of the remaining number of times of the normal time reduction image 726 is updated to "48 times".
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "721", are displayed together and fixed, as shown in Fig. 184 (7). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "52 GAME".

Next, as shown in FIG. 184(8), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the change display of the next special pattern. In addition, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 switches to "1". In addition, the display content of the remaining number of times of the normal time reduction image 726 is updated to "47 times".
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "563", are displayed together and fixed, as shown in Fig. 184 (9). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "53 GAME".

Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (10), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 in the second starting port 47 switches to "0". Also, the display content of the remaining number of times for normal time reduction image 726 is updated to "46 times". Also, the first reserved image 702 moves toward the changing base 701P and expands, causing the rainbow-colored changing image 701 to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (11), a reach prompting effect is executed. A reach prompting effect is an effect that prompts whether or not a reach effect will be executed. In the example shown, after the "7" which is the left decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops, the "7" which is the right decorative pattern 700 is swung up and down to prompt whether or not a reach effect will be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (12), the right decorative pattern 700 "7" temporarily stops, and the reach effect starts. At this time, a sound effect indicating that the left and right decorative patterns 700 "7" are lined up is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in Fig. 185 (13), the SP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SP reach effect, the SP reach image 712 is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 185 (14), the SPSP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SPSP reach effect, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (15), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.

When the player operates the performance button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, a jackpot notification performance is executed as shown in FIG. 185 (16). During the execution of this jackpot notification, the movable performance is executed and the second emphasis image 718 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the normal time reduction remaining count image 726 continue to be in a state where they are difficult or impossible to see for the player. In addition, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, and the second right hit image 725 continue to be in a state where they are easy to see for the player. In addition, when the jackpot notification performance is executed, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second mode to the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up red, the board lamp 74b lights up orange, the movable member lamp 74c lights up yellow, and the button lamp 17c lights up green. Also, when the big win notification performance is being executed, the sound effect of the big win notification performance is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the big win notification effect ends and the second emphasis image 718 goes invisible, the repeated number decorative pattern 700 "777" temporarily stops as shown in FIG. 185 (17). At this time, the execution count image 705 and the remaining number of times for normal time reduction image 726 are displayed again. At this time, the top lamp 10b lights up orange, the board lamp 74b lights up yellow, the movable member lamp 74c lights up green, and the button lamp 17c lights up blue.

As the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 is fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 185 (18). In addition, "777" is fixed and stopped as the small symbol 704. In other words, the display of the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 matches the combination of "777". At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "54 GAME". At this time, the top lamp 10b lights up yellow, the board lamp 74b lights up green, the movable member lamp 74c lights up blue, and the button lamp 17c lights up indigo.

Although not shown, the jackpot game is then executed in the same manner as in the variable presentation example 6. That is, an opening image 719 (see FIG. 171 (18)) is displayed, followed by a first right-hit image 720 and a promotion image 721 (see FIG. 172 (19)). After a predetermined time has elapsed, a round-in-progress image 722 and a round number image 723 (see FIG. 172 (20)) are displayed, and when the final round is completed, a normal time-saving selection image 745 (see FIG. 172 (21)) is displayed, followed by a normal time-saving start image 724 (see FIG. 172 (22)). The number of remaining times for the special symbol lottery in the normal time-saving game state becomes 100 (see FIG. 172 (23)).

(Step-by-step display of rainbow-colored reserved images 702)
Next, a description will be given of a step-by-step display effect using the rainbow-colored reserved image 702. FIG. 186 is a diagram showing a step-by-step display effect using the rainbow-colored reserved image 702.
The rainbow-colored reserved image 702 performs four stages of stage display performance. When the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, first, as shown in FIG. 186 (1), a reserved image 702 with low transparency is displayed in white on the reserved base 702P as the first stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is triangular. In addition, in the first stage of the stage display performance, an action display using the reserved image 702 is performed. More specifically, a lightning mark is displayed as falling on the triangular part of the reserved image 702. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the third reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 183 (3).

Next, as shown in FIG. 186(2), as the second stage of the stage display performance, a highly transparent circular image is newly displayed on the reserved image 702. This circular image is shown to surround a triangular portion of the reserved image 702.
Next, as shown in FIG. 186 (3), as the third stage of the stage display performance, a circular image in the pending image 702 is displayed with a lower transparency than the second stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 186(4), in the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the staged display performance, the circular image in the reserved image 702 is displayed with a lower transparency than in the third stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the staged display performance is the display mode of the third reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 183(4). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 183(3) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the staged display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the staged display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 183(4) is displayed.
In this way, as the stages in the staged display performance progress, only the transparency of a portion of reserved image 702 may change. Such a change in the transparency of only a portion of reserved image 702 is also regarded as a change in the form of reserved image 702. In this embodiment, the time from the start of this staged display performance to the completion display state, i.e., the execution time of the staged display performance using rainbow-colored reserved image 702, is 0.5 seconds.

In addition, when the stepwise display performance is completed, as shown in FIG. 186 (5), the motion performance of the reserved image 702 is started. The rainbow-colored reserved image 702 periodically rotates in a clockwise direction as a motion performance. The rotation period in this motion performance is, for example, 3.0 seconds. In other words, the period of the motion performance by the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 is longer than the period of the motion performance by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
In addition, in the action presentation using the rainbow-colored reserved image 702, the triangular portion may periodically rotate in a clockwise direction, and the circular portion may periodically rotate in a counterclockwise direction. In this case, the period of each action may be the same or different.

As described above, in this embodiment, the execution time of the step-by-step display effect of the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is longer than the execution time of the step-by-step display effect of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. In this case, by making the player feel the sense of expectation of the reserved image 702 with higher expectation than the normal display mode being displayed for a longer period of time, the player can be given a sense of elation when the reserved image 702 with high expectation is displayed.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is different depending on the stage. Here, the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode may also be different depending on the stage, like the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. On the other hand, the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 may have the same display mode regardless of the stage. In this case, the step-by-step display performance by the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 may include an action display that is not performed in either the step-by-step display performance by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in each stage or the step-by-step display performance by the blue reserved image 702 in each stage (see FIG. 186(1)). In this case, the step-by-step display performance allows the player to feel the rarity of the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 more strongly.
In addition, the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 may have more stages in which the display mode changes in the step-by-step display presentation than the reserved image 702 in a normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode consisting of a specific color (blue, green, red, etc.).

(Example of variation 9)
187 to 192 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 9) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Figs. 187 to 192. The variation presentation example 9 includes seven variation presentations. The first of the seven variation presentations is a variation presentation based on winning the first start hole 45 in the normal game state. The second variation presentation is a variation presentation based on winning the first start hole 45 in the special time-saving game state. The third and fourth variation presentations are variation presentations based on winning the second start hole 47 in the special time-saving game state. The fifth to seventh variation presentations are variation presentations based on winning the game ball in the second start hole 47 in the normal game state.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 187(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the performance control unit 130m when the previous special pattern variation ends. At this time, four reserved images 702 are displayed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting gate 45 shows "4". The number of times played image 705 shows the text "499 GAMES", and the remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text "1 more". The background corresponding to the first stage is shown as the stage image 706. The top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second state. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous variation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (2), the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 start to change as the display of the next special pattern begins to change. In addition, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "3". At this time, the countdown image 732, "1", is also displayed.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "421", are displayed together and fixed, as shown in FIG. 187 (3). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "500 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times reached image 708 is updated to "0 more". In other words, the number of variation effects that have been executed reaches the number of variation effects required to enter the special time-saving game state. As a result, the game state of the gaming machine 1, which was in the normal game state, is controlled to the special time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (4), the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 start to change as the display of the next special pattern begins to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 switches to "2". Also, at this time, the second right-hit image 725 is displayed. Also, at this time, the countdown image 732, "0", is displayed.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 187(5), the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 displays "3". At this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the third reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.
Next, as shown in FIG. 187(6), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the third reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 is started. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (7), a special time-saving start image 733 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188(8), the display of the second transition image 734 is started. More specifically, the second transition image 734 is displayed so as to slide from the right side to the left side on the first image display device 70, so that the second transition image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70. Also, at this time, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transition image 734 is not displayed, the left decorative pattern 700, the third reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, and the remaining number of times reached image 708, which are rapidly changing, continue to be visible or easily visible to the player. Also, the second reserved image 702 and the stage image 706 are in a state where the parts not overlapping with the second transition image 734 are visible or easily visible to the player, and the parts overlapping with the second transition image 734 are difficult or invisible to the player. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, the first reserved image 702, and the variable image 701 are in a state where they are difficult or impossible to see for the player. In addition, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transition image 734 is displayed, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, and the second right hit image 725 continue to be in a state where they are easy to see for the player. In addition, at this time, the action display by the second reserved image 702 and the third reserved image 702 is being executed, and the action display of the second reserved image 702 and the third reserved image 702 is in a state where it is visible or easy to see for the player. In addition, the time from the start of the variable display to the display of the second transition image 734 is, for example, 5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (9), the second transition image 734 is displayed on the entire first image display device 70. At this time, the left decorative pattern 700, the third reserved image 702, the second reserved image 702, the number of executions image 705, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are also in a state where they are difficult or impossible to see for the player. Also, at this time, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, a "4" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45. On the other hand, the fourth reserved image 702 is in a state where it is difficult or impossible to see for the player. Also, at this time, a winning sound announcing the entry into the first starting hole 45 is not output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 188 (10), a special time-saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "a" mode in the special time-saving selection image 735.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188(11), a mode start image 736 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (12), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are not displayed, and the low-decorative decorative pattern 700 "125" is temporarily stopped on the first image display device 70. At this time, the background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The sixth stage is a stage corresponding to the special time-saving game state. At this time, the third right-hit image 737 and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the special time-saving remaining number image 738 displays the text "749" indicating the remaining number of special pattern lotteries in the special time-saving game state. In addition, "4" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45, and "0" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47. Note that neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. At this time, a sound such as "Please hit to the right" may be output from the sound output device 9 to encourage the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a.
Moreover, the display period of the second transitional image 734 is, for example, 10 seconds.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 stop as shown in FIG. 189 (13). The combination of the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704, "125," is an example of a combination that occurs when the special symbol lottery results in a losing combination.

Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 47, as shown in FIG. 189 (14), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 changes and displays at high speed. At this time, the display content of the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is updated to "748". At this time, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 47. At this time, the reserved image 702 starts to be displayed in a step-by-step manner. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the first reserved base 702P. At the same time, as the game ball enters the second start hole 47, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound that notifies the player of the winning at the second start hole 47.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (15), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and a trapezoid reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved base 702P. This reserved image 702 has a display size larger than the example shown in FIG. 189 (14). This reserved image 702 is in a display mode corresponding to the sixth stage. The winning sound that notifies the winning of the second starting hole 47 continues to be output until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed. Although not shown in the figure, when the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (16), the operation at the start of the change ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. In addition, the pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the second start port 47 switches to "0."

Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 47, as shown in FIG. 189 (17), the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 47 displays "1". At this time, the reserved image 702 starts to be displayed in stages. In the example shown, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above and away from the first reserved base 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the second start hole 47, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (18), the stage display performance is completed, and a trapezoid reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 189 (17). The winning sound is also output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed. Also, although not shown in the figure, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 begins.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "463" are displayed in a fixed manner as shown in FIG. 190 (19).
In this way, each time a variable presentation is executed in the special time-saving play state, the number of remaining times for special pattern selection in the special time-saving play state is reduced, and the value shown in the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is subtracted by one.

When the 750th variable performance starts in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 190 (20), the decorative pattern 700 and small patterns are displayed variable at high speed. At this time, the special time-saving remaining number image 738 shows the text "0". The reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 shows "4", and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 shows "3". At this time, the variable image 701 and three reserved images 702 are displayed. The stage image 706 shows the background corresponding to the sixth stage.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "254", are displayed together and are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 190 (21). At this time, the variable image 701 is not displayed. When the special symbols stop varying, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, which was in the special time-saving gaming state, is controlled to the normal gaming state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (22), the first transition image 728 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, and the stage image 706 are difficult or impossible to see for the player. The second right-hit image 725 and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 are not displayed. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be easily visible for the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (23), the small symbol 704 starts to change with the start of the change display of the next special symbol. This change is based on winning the second start port 47 in the normal game state. In addition, in this change, the decorative symbol 700 is not displayed. That is, in this change, the change performance is performed using the small symbol 704 without using the decorative symbol 700. In addition, in this change, the change image 701 and the reserved image 702 are not displayed. In addition, at this time, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 is switched to "2". In addition, at this time, the result image 729 (see FIG. 178 (13)) is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three small symbols 704 are displayed together and are fixed as shown in FIG. 191 (24). The combination of the small symbols 704, "755", is an example of a combination when the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (25), the variation of the small symbol 704 starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 switches to "1".
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, three small symbols 704 are displayed together and are fixed as shown in FIG. 191 (26). The combination of the small symbols 704, "127", is an example of a combination when the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (27), the variation of the small symbol 704 starts with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 switches to "0".
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three small symbols 704, "421", are displayed in a line as shown in FIG. 191 (28) and are fixed.

Then, when the variable presentation based on winning at the second starting port 47 ends with no reserved balls based on winning at the second starting port 47, the highly decorative decorative pattern 700 "421" is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70, as shown in FIG. 191 (29). In other words, the combination of decorative patterns 700 matches the combination of small patterns 704. At this time, a background corresponding to the fifth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the execution count image 705 and the left hit image 730 are also displayed. The execution count image 705 shows the text "1253 GAME" including the total value of the number of times of the variable performance newly performed after the number of times of the variable display of the special pattern was reset, that is, the number of times of the variable performance based on the winning of the first start hole 45 in the normal game state, which is 500 times, the number of times of the variable performance based on the winning of the first start hole 45 in the special time-saving game state, which is 1 time, the number of times of the variable performance based on the winning of the second start hole 47 in the special time-saving game state, which is 749 times, and the number of times of the variable performance based on the winning of the second start hole 47 in the normal game state, which is 3 times. In addition, four reserved images 702 are displayed at this time. The four reserved images 702 include three reserved images 702 (see FIG. 187(3)) that were displayed just before the gaming machine 1 was controlled to the special time-saving game state. Although not shown, all of the four reserved images 702 are performing operation performance. On the other hand, the variable image 701 is not displayed. At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a voice message saying, "Please return to left-handed hitting."

Next, as shown in FIG. 192 (30), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the special pattern change. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 switches to "3". At this time, the second reserved image 702, the third reserved image 702, and the fourth reserved image 702 move toward the first reserved base 702P, the second reserved base 702P, and the third reserved base 702P, respectively. In addition, the first reserved image 702 moves toward the variable base 701P and expands, so that the variable image 701 is displayed. Although not shown, after that, as the special pattern stops changing, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped, and the variable image 701 is not displayed.
In this way, when the gaming machine 1 that was in the normal gaming state is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state and then controlled back to the normal gaming state, the reserved image 702 (see FIG. 187 (4)) that was displayed when it was controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is re-displayed when it is controlled back to the normal gaming state.

In the variation presentation example 9, it has been described that the second transition image 734 is displayed during the high-speed variation (scroll) of the decorative pattern 700 in the first variation presentation in the special time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the second transition image 734 may be displayed when the first variation presentation in the special time-saving game state starts. Also, the second transition image 734 may be displayed just before the special time-saving game state, that is, when the final variation presentation in the normal game state stops. In this case, the time from when the second transition image 734 is displayed until the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving game state is, for example, 10 seconds.

In addition, in the variation performance example 9, it has been explained that the result image 729 (see FIG. 178 (13)) is not displayed when the first transition image 728 is displayed, but this is not limited to this.
Even if the result of the special pattern lottery in the special time-saving game state does not result in a jackpot and the game state transitions to the normal game state, the result image 729 may be displayed when the first transition image 728 is displayed.

(Step-by-step display of the trapezoidal reserved image 702 in the normal display mode)
Next, a step-by-step display effect using the trapezoidal reserved image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. Fig. 193 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect using the trapezoidal reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The trapezoid reserved image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages as a stage display performance. When the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, first, as shown in FIG. 193 (1), a highly transparent reserved image 702 is displayed in white at a position above and away from the reserved base 702P as the first stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is square-shaped. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 189 (14) and FIG. 189 (17).

Next, as shown in FIG. 193(2), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed as the second stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is trapezoidal. In addition, this reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the reserved base 702P than the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 193(3), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed as the third stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the second stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the reserved pedestal 702P than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 193(4), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the third stage is displayed as the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 has a display size larger than that of the third stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the reserved pedestal 702P than that of the third stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 189(15) and FIG. 189(18). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 189(14) and FIG. 189(17) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the stage display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the stage display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 189(15) and FIG. 189(18) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from when the step-by-step display performance starts to when the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, i.e., the execution time of the step-by-step display performance using the reserved image 702 in the trapezoidal normal display mode, is 0.2 seconds.

Furthermore, when the step-by-step display presentation is completed, the motion presentation of the reserved base 702 begins, as shown in FIG. 193 (5). The trapezoid reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically moves left and right as a motion presentation. The period of the left and right movement in this motion presentation is, for example, 2.0 seconds. In other words, the period of the motion presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the special time-saving play state is the same period as the period of the motion presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the normal time-saving play state, and the period of the motion presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the normal play state.

Figure 194 is an explanatory diagram of each effect in variable effect example 9.
As shown in FIG. 194, at time T1 of the variation performance example 9, the first variation performance in the special time-saving game state is started. At this time, the variation of the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 has started, and the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are in a state where they are easily visible to the player. At this time, the variation image 701 and the two reserved images 702 are performing an action performance, and the variation image 701 and the two reserved images 702 are in a state where they are easily visible to the player. At this time, the background corresponding to the first stage is shown as the stage image 706. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. At this time, the BGM corresponding to the variation performance being performed is output from the sound output device 9. The state at time T1 is the state shown in FIG. 187 (4).

After that, at time T2, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45.
After that, at time T3, the third reserved image 702 is displayed in the display mode in the first stage of the stage display performance, and the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes visible or easily visible to the player. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound that notifies the player of the winning of the first starting hole 45. The state at time T3 is the state shown in FIG. 187 (5).
After that, the staged display performance of the third reserved image 702 progresses, and at time T4, the staged display performance ends, and the third reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode. At this time, the action performance of the third reserved image 702 starts. The state at time T4 is the state shown in FIG. 187 (6).
After that, at time T5, the winning sound notifying the winning of the first starting hole 45 is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Thereafter, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state, and at time T6, the display of the second transition image 734 begins.
After that, when the display area of the second transition image 734 on the first display device 70 becomes larger, at time T7, the left decorative pattern 700 is visible or easily visible to the player, while the middle decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 are difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the variable image 701 is difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the third reserved image 702 is visible or easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, a part of the second reserved image 702 is visible or easily visible to the player, while another part of the second reserved image 702 is difficult or invisible to the player. Also, the first reserved image 702 is difficult or invisible to the player. At this time, a part of the stage image 706 is visible or easily visible to the player, while another part of the stage image 706 is difficult or invisible to the player. The state at time T7 is the state shown in FIG. 188(8).

After that, when the second transition image 734 is displayed over the entirety of the first display device 70, at time T8, the three decorative patterns 700 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. At this time, the variable image 701 is not displayed. At this time, all three reserved images 702 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. At this time, the entire stage image 706 becomes difficult or impossible to see for the player. The state at time T8 is the state shown in Figure 188 (9).

After that, at time T9, when the second transition image 734 is no longer displayed, the three decorative symbols 700 are temporarily stopped, and the three decorative symbols 700 are easily visible to the player. Also, the background corresponding to the sixth stage is shown as the stage image 706. The state at time T9 is the state shown in FIG. 188 (12).
After that, at time T10, the first variable presentation in the special time-saving game state ends. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped. The state at time T10 is the state shown in FIG. 189 (13).

Thereafter, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal gaming state, at time T11, the first transition image 728 is hidden and the four reserved images 702 are easily visible. The four reserved images 702 include the reserved images 702 that were difficult to see or impossible to see at time T8. At this time, the reserved images 702 perform an action presentation. The state at time T11 is the state shown in FIG. 191 (29).
After that, at time T12, the next variation performance starts. The state at time T12 is the state shown in FIG. 192 (30).

As described above, in this embodiment, the main control board 110 can be controlled to a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. For example, the first mode is a normal game state. For example, the second mode is a special time-saving game state. In this embodiment, when the first variable performance in the second mode is started while the reserved image 702 is displayed, the performance control board 130 makes the operation display of the reserved image 702 difficult to see or invisible, and does not make it easy to see, and makes the operation display of the decorative pattern 700 difficult to see or invisible, and then makes it easy to see. For example, the operation display of the reserved image 702 is an operation display in the operation performance. For example, the operation display of the decorative pattern 700 is a variable operation or a temporary stop operation display.
In this case, after the start of the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state, the performance of the reserved image 702 that was being executed before the start of the first variable performance is prevented from still being noticed by the player, and it is possible to make the player more likely to notice the action display of the decorative pattern 700 that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute a highly entertaining performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the first variable performance in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 is being displayed, the performance control board 130 can make the pending image 702 difficult to see or impossible to see after the start of the first variable performance, and start the next variable performance after the first variable performance before making the pending image 702 easily visible.
In this case, when the next variable performance after the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state starts, the performance of the reserved image 702 that was being executed before the start of the first variable performance is prevented from still being focused on by the player, and it is possible to make the player more likely to focus on the variable performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the first variable performance in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 is being displayed, the performance control board 130 makes the pending image 702 difficult to see or impossible to see in the first variable performance and does not make it easily visible, and makes the decorative pattern 700 difficult to see or impossible to see and then makes it easily visible.
In this case, after the start of the first variable presentation in the special time-saving game state, the presentation of the reserved image 702 that was being executed before the start of the first variable presentation is prevented from still being focused on by the player, and it is possible to make the player more likely to focus on the presentation using the decorative pattern 700 that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the first variable performance in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 is being displayed, the performance control board 130 does not make the small pattern 704 difficult or impossible to see in the first variable performance, but makes the pending image 702 difficult or impossible to see.
In this case, even if the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state starts, the performance of the reserved image 702 that was being executed before the start of the first variable performance can still be prevented from being noticed by the player. On the other hand, since the small pattern 704 continues to be visible or easily visible, the player can be made to recognize that the variable performance is continuing even when the reserved image 702 becomes difficult or impossible to see, and it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the variable performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute a highly entertaining performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first variable performance in the second mode is started while the reserved image 702 is displayed, the performance control board 130 does not make the reserved image 702 difficult or impossible to see in the first variable performance and then makes it easy to see, and when a special performance is executed while the reserved image 702 is displayed, the performance control board 130 makes the reserved image 702 difficult or impossible to see and then makes it easy to see. Examples of special performances include SP reach performances and SPSP reach performances.
In this case, even if the first variable effect in the special time-saving game state starts, the effect of the reserved image 702 that was being executed before the start of the first variable effect can still be prevented from being noticed by the player. On the other hand, when a special effect is executed, the first image display device 70 can execute an effect unique to the special effect using a wide display area including the display area of the reserved image 702, and the reserved image 702 can be made easily visible again, so that the player can recognize that the right to judge the big win has not been lost. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing an effect with high interest can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first variable performance in the second mode is started while the reserved image 702 and the changing image 701 are displayed, the performance control board 130 makes the reserved image 702 and the changing image 701 difficult to see or impossible to see in the first variable performance, and then makes neither of them easy to see, and when a special performance is executed while the reserved image 702 and the changing image 701 are displayed, the performance control board 130 makes the reserved image 702 and the changing image 701 difficult to see or impossible to see, and then makes both of the reserved image 702 and the changing image 701 easy to see.
In this case, even if the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state starts, the performance of the reserved image 702 that was executed before the start of the first variable performance can still be prevented from being noticed by the player. On the other hand, when the special performance is executed, the first image display device 70 can execute a performance unique to the special performance using a wide display area including the display area of the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702, and by making the reserved image 702 easily visible again, the player can be made to recognize that the right to judge the big win has not been lost, and by making the variable image 701 easily visible again, the player can be made to recognize that the next variable performance has not started when the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 are in a state where they are difficult to see or cannot be seen. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining performance can be provided.

In addition, when the display of the second transition image 734 begins, the display area of the second transition image 734 gradually becomes larger over time, so that some of the multiple reserved images 702 are easily visible to the player, while the other parts are not. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the state switches from one in which the second transition image 734 is not displayed to one in which the second transition image 734 is displayed over the entire first image display device 70, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the reserved image 702 existed, while reducing the sense of incongruity caused by the stage image 706 becoming hidden.

Furthermore, when the second transition image 734 is displayed in a portion of the display area of the first image display device 70, a portion of the one reserved image 702 is visible to the player, and another portion of this one reserved image 702 is not visible to the player (see Figure 188 (8)).In this state, an action presentation is being executed using this one reserved image 702.
In this case, even if only a portion of the reserved image 702 is visible to the player, it is possible to make the player more easily aware of the existence of the reserved image 702.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first start hole 45 while the second transition image 734 is being displayed, the reserved image 702 is in a state where it is difficult or impossible for the player to see, and a winning sound to notify the player of the winning in the first start hole 45 is not output. Therefore, in a special time-saving game state where a game ball is likely to enter the second start hole 47, the player is prevented from being overly aware that a game ball has entered the first start hole 45, and the player can be made to focus on the presentation unique to the special time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute suggestive effects (such as displaying the execution count image 705, the remaining number of times reached image 708, and the countdown image 732) that suggest when a special time-saving game state may occur, and in the case of a jackpot, suggestive effects that confirm a jackpot in advance (such as a look-ahead effect or a jackpot advance notice effect, such as displaying the rainbow-colored reserved image 702) can be executed, but in the case of a special time-saving game state, suggestive effects (look-ahead effects) that confirm the special time-saving game state in advance (two or more fluctuations in advance) are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the special time-saving game state not occurring even though a suggestive effect that confirms the special time-saving game state has been executed, while increasing the interest in the game by the confirmation effect of the jackpot.

In addition, a specific suggestive effect (display of countdown image 732) that indicates a time when a special time-saving game state may occur can be executed, and during the first period of the normal game state (before the countdown image 732 starts to be displayed), the probability of executing a suggestive effect that confirms a jackpot (such as displaying the rainbow-colored hold image 702) is higher than the probability of executing the specific suggestive effect, and during the second period of the normal game state (after the countdown image 732 starts to be displayed), the probability of executing the specific suggestive effect is higher than the probability of executing a suggestive effect that confirms a jackpot. Here, "the probability of executing a suggestive effect that confirms a jackpot is higher than the probability of executing a specific suggestive effect" includes the case where a specific suggestive effect is not executed (0%). Also, "the probability of executing a specific suggestive effect is higher than the probability of executing a suggestive effect that confirms a jackpot" includes the case where a specific suggestive effect is always executed (100%).

In addition, in the variable presentation example 9, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving play state to the normal play state, it is set to the fifth stage, which is the same as when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the normal time-saving play state to the normal play state, but this is not limited to this. When the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving play state to the normal play state, it may be controlled to the first stage. In other words, it can be set to multiple presentation modes, and it is possible to make the presentation mode set based on the end of the normal time-saving play state different from the presentation mode set based on the end of the special time-saving play state. In this case, by increasing the presentation variation at the end of the time-saving play depending on the type of time-saving play, it is possible to improve the presentation effect and increase the interest in the game.

Also, as described above, when either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, after the end, the game mode transitions to a dedicated mode (fifth stage) and then to the normal mode (first stage).
When the gaming machine 1 is controlled from a special time-saving gaming state to a normal gaming state, even when it is controlled to the first stage, the left hit image 730 may be displayed in the same display position as when it is controlled to the fifth stage. That is, the left hit notification when the game machine 1 transitions from either the normal time-saving gaming state or the special time-saving gaming state to the dedicated mode (fifth stage) after the end of the game, and the left hit notification when the game machine 1 transitions from either the normal time-saving gaming state or the special time-saving gaming state to the normal mode (first stage) are executed in the same notification manner.
When the normal time-saving game state ends, a result display (display of result image 729) is executed and then a transition to a dedicated mode (fifth stage) is made, and when the special time-saving game state ends, a transition to the normal mode (first stage) is made without executing a result display.
Also, in the fifth embodiment, it has been explained that the normal time-saving game state can be ended (transitioned to the normal game state) when the number of fluctuations reaches a specified number of times, or when the number of small wins reaches a specified number of times (including 1 time). Here, even in the special time-saving game state, it may be ended (transitioned to the normal game state) when the number of small wins reaches a specified number of times (including 1 time). Furthermore, when the special time-saving game state is controlled to the normal game state based on the number of fluctuations reaching a specified number of times, it may be transitioned to the fifth stage, and when the special time-saving game state is controlled to the normal game state based on the number of small wins reaching a specified number of times, it may be transitioned to the first stage. That is, the end of the special time-saving game state with the time-saving number and the end of the special time-saving game state with the small win number may be transitioned to different presentation modes.

In addition, in both cases where the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the normal time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state and where the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the left-hit image 730 is displayed after the end of the variable presentation based on the reservation (remaining reservation) for the winning into the second starting hole 47, but this is not limited to the above. When the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the normal time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the left-hit image 730 may be displayed even before the end of the variable presentation based on the reservation (remaining reservation) for the winning into the second starting hole 47. In other words, when the first time-saving (for example, the special time-saving gaming state) ends, a predetermined left-hit notification (display of the left-hit image 730, audio notification of left-hit) can be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (remaining reservation has been consumed) from the end of the time-saving, and when the second time-saving (normal time-saving gaming state) ends, a predetermined left-hit notification (display of the left-hit image 730, audio notification of left-hit) can be executed before a predetermined period has elapsed (remaining reservation has been consumed) from the end of the time-saving. In this case, by changing the timing of the left hit notification depending on the type of time reduction, it is possible to vary the gameplay and increase the interest in the game.
In addition, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from a special time-saving gaming state to a normal gaming state, the left-hit image 730 may be displayed even before the end of the variable presentation based on the reservation (remaining reservation) for a winning entry into the second starting port 47.

Furthermore, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, if the left-hit image 730 is displayed from when it is controlled to the normal gaming state until the end of the variable presentation based on the reservation (remaining reservation) for the winning at the second starting port 47, the display period of the left-hit image 730 differs depending on the number of times the variable presentation based on the reservation (remaining reservation) for the winning at the second starting port 47 is executed. In other words, when either the normal time-saving gaming state or the special time-saving gaming state ends, the length of the predetermined period for the left-hit notification changes (changes according to the number of remaining reservations).
In addition, when either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, a left-hit notification may be issued even if the state after the end is a customer waiting state. In addition, when either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, execution of a left-hit notification may be put on hold when the state after the end is a customer waiting state, and a left-hit notification may be issued when a variable display starts.
In addition, the left hit notification after the normal time-saving game state ends and the left hit notification after the special time-saving game state ends may be executed in the same notification mode (notification image, notification period).

In addition, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the left hit image 730 is displayed after the end of the variation presentation based on the reservation (remaining reservation) for the winning in the second starting port 47, and when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the normal time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the left hit image 730 is displayed at the time when it is controlled to the normal gaming state (the time when the final variation in the normal time-saving gaming state stops). In this case, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the display timing of the left hit image 730 differs depending on the number of remaining reservations, whereas when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the display timing of the left hit image 730 does not change. That is, when the first time-saving mode (e.g., a special time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left-hit notification (display of left-hit image 730, audio notification of left-hit) can be executed at one of multiple timings (timing corresponding to the number of remaining reserved balls), and when the second time-saving mode (e.g., a normal time-saving game state) ends, a predetermined left-hit notification (display of left-hit image 730, audio notification of left-hit) can be executed at timing 1 (immediately after the stop time has elapsed). Therefore, by changing the timing of the left-hit notification depending on the type of time-saving mode, it is possible to change the playability and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, the timing of the execution of the left-hit notification does not change depending on the number of remaining reserved balls for winning into the first start port 45 at the end of the time-saving game state, but changes depending on the number of remaining reserved balls for winning into the second start port 47 at the end of the time-saving game state.
In addition, the left hit notification when either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends is executed in the same notification mode regardless of the timing of execution.
In addition, the left hit notification after the normal time-saving game state ends and the left hit notification after the special time-saving game state ends are executed in the same notification mode.

In addition, when the time-saving feature (for example, a special time-saving game state) ends, a specified left-hit notification (display of left-hit image 730, audio notification of left-hit) can be executed after a specified period of time has passed since the end of the time-saving feature (consummation of remaining reserves), and during the period from the end of the time-saving feature until the specified left-hit notification is executed, the execution of a specified preview effect (preview preview effect, jackpot preview effect) corresponding to the normal game state is restricted. This allows the player to bask in the afterglow of the end of the advantageous period, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, it can be set to multiple presentation modes (stages, modes that allow foresight presentation), and when the time-saving feature (for example, a special time-saving game state) ends, a specified left-hit notification (display of left-hit image 730, audio notification of left-hit) can be executed after a specified period of time has passed since the end of the time-saving feature (use of remaining reserves), and during the period from the end of the time-saving feature until the specified left-hit notification is executed, it is restricted from setting a specified presentation mode (a specific stage such as the first stage, a mode that allows for foresight presentation). This allows the player to bask in the afterglow of the end of the advantageous period, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from a time-saving gaming state (normal time-saving gaming state, special time-saving gaming state) to a normal gaming state, consider a configuration in which the left-hit image 730 is displayed after the end of a variable presentation based on the reserve (remaining reserve) for winning at the second starting port 47. In this case, the number of variable presentations executed before the left-hit image 730 is displayed differs depending on the number of remaining reserves. In other words, when either the normal time-saving gaming state or the special time-saving gaming state ends, the number of variable displays before the left-hit notification is made changes.

Furthermore, when the specified number of times is reached (when entering a special time-saving game state), a first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again in a first performance. Furthermore, in a normal state other than the specified number of times, in the case of a miss variation, a second predetermined image (first front image 707, second front image 709, etc.) appears during the variation of the pattern, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden (made difficult to see or impossible to see), and the decorative pattern 700 appears again in a second performance. When the first performance is performed, a transition is made to a special time-saving game state.
In this case, when the specified number of times is reached, the first predetermined image is displayed and the symbols are hidden, making the player look forward to a transition to a special mode (special time-saving game state), and improving the interest. Also, even if the specified number of times is not reached, a different second predetermined image is displayed and the symbols are hidden, making the player look forward to a special performance (jackpot). By suddenly hiding the symbols, an element of surprise is created, making the player excited. Although the common event of hiding the symbols occurs, it develops into a different performance and state. This makes it possible to diversify the variations in performance and improve interest.

Furthermore, while the first predetermined image is being displayed and while the second predetermined image is being displayed, the small pattern 704 (including the variation notification LED 59) continues to be displayed.
In this case, even when the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, the small pattern 704 is displayed, so that the changing state of the special pattern can be confirmed.

Furthermore, the display time of the first predetermined image is different from the display time of the second predetermined image. More specifically, the display time of the first predetermined image is longer than the display time of the second predetermined image.
In this case, by lengthening the display time of the first predetermined image, it is possible to impress a special effect when entering the special time-saving game state and to heighten the player's expectations, while by shortening the display time of the second predetermined image, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations.

In addition, the first predetermined image appears when the decorative pattern 700 starts to change or stops changing, and the second predetermined image appears while the decorative pattern is being scrolled.
In this case, by making the first predetermined image appear at the timing of starting or stopping the change of the decorative pattern 700, it is possible to ensure sufficient time to display the first predetermined image even if the change time is short. Also, by making the second predetermined image appear during the scrolling display of the decorative pattern 700, it is possible to improve the interest during scrolling.

Also, when the first performance is performed, the performance mode is switched from the first performance mode (for example, the first stage, normal game state) to the second performance mode (the sixth stage, special time-saving game state), but is not switched to the second performance mode even when the second performance is performed.
In this case, since the performance mode is switched by executing the first performance, a special value can be imparted to the first performance, and the entertainment value can be improved. The performance mode can be smoothly switched by executing the first performance.

In addition, when the first performance is performed, a right-hit notification is given, but even if the second performance is performed, no right-hit notification is given.
In this case, the execution of the first performance notifies the player of a right hit, so that the player can prepare for a right hit by the first performance.

Also, there are times when the first predetermined image and the decorative pattern 700 are displayed simultaneously, and there are times when the second predetermined image and the decorative pattern 700 are displayed simultaneously.
In this case, the decorative pattern 700 gradually disappears and gradually reappears, so that the screen can be switched smoothly without any sense of discomfort.

In addition, the second effect is not executed in the time-saving game state. That is, the execution rate of the second effect is higher in the first game state (normal game state) than in the second game state (time-saving game state). In this case, since the second effect is executed with a relatively high probability in the normal game state, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. In addition, since the execution probability of the second effect is low in the time-saving game state, it is possible to repeat the fluctuations one after another until the fluctuation with high expectation is reached without performing unnecessary effects.
In addition, if the execution rate of the second effect is higher in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state, the second effect may be executed in the time-saving game state.

Also, suggestive effects suggesting the first effect (display of the execution count image 705, display of the remaining number of times reached image 708, display of the countdown image 732) can be executed, and the execution probability of the suggestive effects is higher than the execution probability of the effect suggesting the second effect. Note that "the execution probability of the suggestive effects is higher than the execution probability of the effect suggesting the second effect" also includes the case where the effect suggesting the second effect is not executed (0%).
In this case, when the first performance is executed, a suggestive performance is executed, so that it is possible to increase the expectation for the first performance. Also, when the second performance is executed, it is difficult to execute a performance suggesting the second performance, so that it is possible to prevent excessive performances and not to have excessive expectations.

In addition, the appearance of the decorative pattern 700 is different before and after the first predetermined image appears (before and after entering the special time-saving game state).
In addition, in the variable performance example 9, the first predetermined image was displayed in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and the reach performance is not executed. Here, in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a reach performance is executed, the first predetermined image does not have to be displayed. Also, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a variable performance in which the lottery result is a big win or a reach performance is executed, the first predetermined image may be displayed.

Also, in the variation performance example 4, it has been explained that the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed. Here, the first eye-catching image 715 does not have to be displayed in the time-saving game state. That is, when the specified number of times is reached (when entering the special time-saving game state), the first performance is performed in which the first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again. Also, in the normal game state other than the specified number of times, after the SP reach performance is performed, the second performance is performed in which the second predetermined image (first eye-catching image 715) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the first eye-catching image 715 appears again. And, the execution rate of the second performance is higher in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state.
In this case, when the specified number of times is reached, the first predetermined image is displayed and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, so that the player can expect a transition to a special mode (special time-saving game state), thereby improving the interest of the player. Also, even if the specified number of times is not reached, the second predetermined image is displayed and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden when the reach is missed, so that the disappointment when the reach is missed can be reduced.
In addition, if the execution rate of the second effect is higher in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state, the second effect may be executed in the time-saving game state.

In addition, even if a predetermined condition (reaching a predetermined number of times) is satisfied, if a reach fluctuation pattern is selected, the first eye-catching image 715 may be displayed. In other words, if a reach fluctuation pattern is selected in the fluctuation of the predetermined number of times, a reach performance is performed according to the reach fluctuation pattern, and the reach is missed and the second predetermined image is displayed.
In this case, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied (a predetermined number of fluctuations), if a reach fluctuation pattern is selected, the second predetermined image is displayed, thereby reducing disappointment when the reach is missed.

Also, a specific performance (reach performance) can be executed, and when it is determined that there is a miss, the second predetermined image is displayed and the miss symbol is stopped after the specific performance is executed, and when it is determined that there is a big win, the big win symbol is stopped without displaying the second predetermined image after the specific performance is executed.
In this case, in the case of a big win, the player can be satisfied by immediately displaying the decorative pattern 700 of the same number, and in the case of a loss, the second predetermined image is displayed to reduce the player's disappointment and to give the player hope that the performance may develop into another performance.

In addition, when the second transition image 734 is displayed, when the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed, and in the special time-saving game state, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode, but this is not limited to the above. When the second transition image 734 is displayed, when the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed, and in the special time-saving game state, the light emission modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may be different. That is, during the display period of the first predetermined image, the lamps emit light in the first specific mode, during the display period of the second predetermined image, the lamps emit light in the second specific mode, and during the second game state (special time-saving game state), the lamps emit light in the third specific mode.
In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the time-saving mode will be entered based on the lighting state of the lamp.

Moreover, the first predetermined image appears at a first time from the start of the fluctuation, and the second predetermined image appears at a second time from the start of the fluctuation, which is longer than the first time.
In this case, since the first predetermined image appears in a short time after the start of the pattern variation, the first predetermined image can be displayed even if the variation time of the specified number of variations is short. Also, since the second predetermined image appears after a relatively long time has passed after the start of the variation, the player's expectations can be heightened.

(Example of variation 10)
195 to 198 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 10) of the variation presentation will be described with reference to Figs. 195 to 198. Variation presentation example 10 includes three variation presentations. The first of the three variation presentations is a variation presentation based on winning at the first start port 45 in the normal game state. The second of the three variation presentations is a variation presentation based on winning at the first start port 45 in the special time-saving game state. The third of the three variation presentations is a variation presentation based on winning at the second start port 47 in the special time-saving game state.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 195(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the performance control unit 130m when the previous special pattern variation ends. At this time, one reserved image 702 is displayed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting gate 45 shows "1". The number of times played image 705 shows the text "499 GAMES", and the remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text "1 more". The background corresponding to the first stage is also shown as the stage image 706. The top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second state. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous variation performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 195(2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the change display of the next special pattern. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 switches to "0". Also, at this time, the countdown image 732, "1", is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 195(3), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "421", are fixed and stopped with the stop of the variation of the special symbols. At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "500 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times reached image 708 is updated to "0 remaining". At this time, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state. When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state, a second right-hit image 725 is displayed. On the other hand, the background corresponding to the first stage is still displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second mode to the first mode.

When a predetermined time has elapsed without a game ball entering the first starting hole 45 after the special symbol stops changing, an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed as shown in FIG. 195 (4). This predetermined time is, for example, 20 seconds. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first state to the fifth state. Although not shown, the sound output device 9 outputs background music corresponding to the previous changing performance at a lower volume than when the changing performance is being executed.

Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed without a game ball entering the first starting hole 45 after the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed as shown in FIG. 195 (5). This predetermined time is, for example, 60 seconds. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 and the second right hit image 725 continue to be easily visible to the player. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth mode to the eighth mode. The eighth mode is a mode of light emission that lights up in purple, and is different from any of the first mode to the seventh mode. At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a notification sound to notify the player that the special time-saving game state has been entered. As an example, the audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs a sound saying "The special time-saving game state has been entered" as the notification sound.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the manner in which the sound is output by the sound output device 9 changes, as shown in FIG. 195 (6). As an example, a sound effect is output from the sound output device 9 to indicate that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving game state. This sound effect is different from the notification sound that notifies the player that the game machine 1 is in a special time-saving game state. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 continue to be difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the eighth mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196 (7), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth state to the second state. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 remain in a state that is difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196 (8), a non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is executed. The non-display effect is an effect in which the transparency of the image is increased over time, and the image is finally hidden. In the illustrated example, the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 is increased as a result of the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 being started. Then, as the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 is increased, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are in a state in which they are not easily visible to the player, but are visible to the player. Meanwhile, at this time, neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196 (9), the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 becomes even higher. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change at the start of the change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed to change at high speed. Also, at this time, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Also, at this time, the display of the reserved image 702 starts. Here, the step-by-step display performance is not executed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first image display device 70. Also, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are not easily visible to the player, but are visible to the player. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196 (10), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends, and the customer waiting image 710 becomes non-displayable. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, reserved image 702, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 become easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the start of the fluctuation operation is in progress. Also, at this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196 (11), the start-of-variation operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. The pending image 702 moves to the variation base 701P and expands, causing the varying image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 45 switches to "0". At this time, the countdown image 732, "0", is displayed. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as the game ball enters the first start hole 45, as shown in FIG. 196 (12), the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 45 displays "1". At this time, the stage display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output the winning sound.
Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (13), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 is started. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.

197(14), a special time-saving start image 733 is displayed. The display time of this special time-saving start image 733 is, for example, 3 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (15), the display of the second transition image 734 is started. More specifically, the second transition image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70. At this time, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transition image 734 is not displayed, the left decorative pattern 700, the execution count image 705, and the remaining number of times reached image 708, which are changing at high speed, continue to be visible to the player. In addition, the part of the stage image 706 that does not overlap with the second transition image 734 is visible to the player, and the part that overlaps with the second transition image 734 is difficult or invisible to the player. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, the changing image 701, and the reserved image 702 are difficult or invisible to the player. In addition, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transition image 734 is displayed, the pending number display 703, small pattern 704, and second right-hit image 725 continue to be visible or easily visible to the player.

Next, as shown in Fig. 197 (16), the second transition image 734 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70. At this time, the left decorative pattern 700, the execution count image 705, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 also become difficult or impossible for the player to see.
Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (17), when the game ball enters the first start hole 45, the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 45 displays "2". On the other hand, the reserved image 702 is difficult or impossible for the player to see. Also, at this time, the winning sound is not output.

Next, as shown in Fig. 197 (18), a special time-saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "a" mode in the special time-saving selection image 735.
Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (19), a mode start image 736 is displayed. At this time, as the game ball enters the second start hole 47, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 47. On the other hand, the reserved image 702 is difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, a winning sound that notifies the player of the winning of the second start hole 47 is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (20), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are not displayed, and the low-decorative decorative pattern 700 "125" is temporarily stopped on the first image display device 70. At this time, the background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the third right-hit image 737 and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 are displayed. Also, "2" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45, and "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47. Also, one reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode. On the other hand, the variable image 701 is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "125", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 198 (21).

Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (22), as the display of the special pattern begins to change, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 in the second starting port 47 switches to "0". Also, the first reserved image 702 moves to the changing base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. Although not shown, after that, as the special pattern stops and is displayed, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 stop and are fixed, and the changing image 701 is no longer displayed.

Figure 199 is an explanatory diagram of each effect in variable performance example 10.
As shown in FIG. 199, at time T1 of the variation performance example 10, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are in a state where they are difficult or impossible for the player to see. Also, at this time, the reserved image 702 is not displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the eighth mode. Also, at this time, an alarm sound is output from the sound output device 9 to notify that the special time-saving game state is in effect. The state at time T1 is the state shown in FIG. 195 (5).

After that, at time T2, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45.
After that, at time T3, the sound output device 9 starts to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state. That is, the sound output from the sound output device 9 switches from the notification sound to the sound effect. The state at time T3 is the state shown in FIG. 195 (6).
After that, at time T4, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c switch from the eighth position to the second position. The state at time T4 is the state shown in FIG. 196(7).

After that, at time T5, the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are visible to the player. On the other hand, the reserved image 702 is not displayed. The state at time T5 is the state shown in FIG. 196 (8).
After that, at time T6, the change presentation starts. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 changes slowly, and the small pattern 704 changes quickly. At this time, the display of the reserved image 702 starts, and the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. At this time, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode. At this time, the action presentation of the reserved image 702 starts. The state at time T6 is the state shown in FIG. 196 (9).

After that, at time T7, the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, and the small pattern 704 are all easily visible to the player. The state at time T7 is the state shown in FIG. 196 (10).
After that, at time T8, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.
After that, at time T9, the speed of the decorative pattern 700 changes. At this time, the reserved image 702 moves to the change base 701P. The state at time T9 is the state shown in FIG. 196 (11).

In this way, the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) can be displayed, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) based on winning at the first starting port 45 is not displayed while the first predetermined image (second transition image 734) is displayed, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) based on winning at the second starting port 47 is also displayed together with the appearance of the decorative pattern 700, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is displayed while the second predetermined image (first front image 707, second front image 709) is displayed.
In this case, since both the decorative pattern 700 and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) are not displayed while the first predetermined image is being displayed, the player can be more conscious of the first predetermined image. In addition, since the game state is changed, by making the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) invisible, the player can smoothly switch to another reserved image 702 (variable image 701) with the change to a different game state. In addition, while the second predetermined image is being displayed, the decorative pattern 700 is not displayed, while the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is displayed, so the player can be made aware of the current state (whether it is changing, how many reserved images are there, etc.).

In addition, a reserved image 702 (changing image 701) can be displayed, and the reserved image 702 (changing image 701) is not displayed while the first specified image (second transitional image 734) is being displayed, and another reserved image 702 (changing image 701) is also displayed when the decorative pattern 700 appears, and the reserved image 702 (changing image 701) is not displayed while the second specified image (first eye-catching image 715) is being displayed, and the reserved image 702 (changing image 701) is also re-displayed when the decorative pattern 700 appears.
In this case, since both the decorative pattern 700 and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) are displayed while the first predetermined image is being displayed, the first predetermined image can draw attention. Also, since the game state is changed, by hiding the reserved image 702 (variable image 701), it is possible to smoothly switch to another reserved image 702 (variable image 701) in a different game state. Also, by hiding the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) while the second predetermined image is being displayed, it is possible to smoothly switch from a reach miss to the next screen.

(Example of variation 11)
200 to 202 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 11) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 200 to Fig. 202. The variable performance example 11 is a variable performance example of the decorative pattern 700 based on winning the first start hole 45 in the special time-saving game state.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned examples of variable presentation will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the examples of variable presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 200(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the performance control unit 130m as the variation of the previous special pattern ends. Also, the execution count image 705 shows the text "500 GAMES", and the remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text "0 more". Also, the stage image 706 shows a background corresponding to the first stage. Also, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is a special time-saving gaming state, and the second right-hit image 725 is displayed. Also, at this time, the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed. Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the fifth mode. Also, at this time, the sound output device 9 outputs BGM corresponding to the previous variation performance at a volume lower than that during the execution of the variation performance. The state shown in Figure 200 (1) is the same as the state shown in Figure 195 (4).

Next, when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in Fig. 200 (2), the sound output device 9 starts to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the fifth mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 200(3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth mode to the second mode. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 200(4), a non-display effect of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 is started. In the illustrated example, the non-display effect is started, and as a result, the transparency of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 is increased. Then, as the transparency of the adjustment image 716 is increased, the portions of the center decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 that overlap with the adjustment image 716 are not easily visible to the player, but are still visible to the player. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 200(5), the non-display effect of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 ends, and the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are no longer displayed. As a result, the middle decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 are in a state where they are easily visible to the player as a whole. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change at the start of the change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed to change at high speed. Also, at this time, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Also, at this time, the display of the reserved image 702 starts. On the other hand, the step-by-step display effect is not executed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first image display device 70. This reserved image 702 is in a state where it is easily visible to the player. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 200 (6), the start-of-change operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. The pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 45 switches to "0". At this time, the countdown image 732, "0", is displayed. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 201 (7), the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 displays "1". At this time, the stage display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output the winning sound.
Next, as shown in FIG. 201(8), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 is started. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 201 (9), a special time-saving start image 733 is displayed.
201(10), the display of the second transitional image 734 begins. More specifically, the second transitional image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70.
Next, as shown in FIG. 201 ( 11 ), a second transitional image 734 is displayed over the entire first image display device 70 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 201 (12), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 displays "2". On the other hand, the reserved image 702 is difficult or impossible for the player to see. Also, at this time, a winning sound that notifies the player of the winning of the first starting hole 45 is not output.
Next, as shown in Fig. 202 (13), a special time-saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "a" mode in the special time-saving selection image 735.

Next, as shown in FIG. 202 (14), a mode start image 736 is displayed. At this time, as the game ball enters the second start hole 47, a "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 47. Meanwhile, the reserved image 702 is difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, a winning sound announcing the entry into the second start hole 47 is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 202 (15), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are not displayed, and the low-decorative decorative pattern 700 "125" is temporarily stopped on the first image display device 70. At this time, the background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the third right-hit image 737 and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the special time-saving remaining number image 738 displays the text "749". In addition, "2" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45, and "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47. In addition, one reserved image 702 is displayed. On the other hand, the variable image 701 is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "125", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 202 (16).

As described above, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the performance control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special performance, and if a win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the second mode, the reserved image of a specific mode is made difficult to see or invisible. Examples of the special performance include the display of the special time-saving start image 733, the display of the second transition image 734, and the display of the mode start image 736. Examples of the specific image include the customer waiting image 710, the adjustment image 716, and the menu image 717. Examples of the specific mode include the incomplete display mode.
In this case, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Also, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 in the specific mode is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state is prevented from drawing the player's excessive attention, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing an effect that is highly entertaining can be provided.

In this embodiment, the performance control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special performance in the second mode, and when a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the board makes the reserved image of the specific action mode difficult to see or invisible. An example of the specific action mode is an incomplete action mode.
In this case, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. In addition, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 of the specific action mode is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state is prevented from drawing the player's attention too much, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In this embodiment, the performance control board 130 can display the reserved image 702 on the first image display device 70 in the first form and then in the second form, and in the second mode, a specific image can be displayed before the start of the special performance, and if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the reserved image 702 in the first form is made difficult to see or impossible to see. An example of the first form is an incomplete form. An example of the second form is a completed form.
In this case, the player can be entertained by the change in the form of the reserved image 702. Also, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Furthermore, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the change in the form of the reserved image 702 is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from drawing the player's excessive attention in the special time-saving game state, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing an effect that is highly entertaining can be provided.

In this embodiment, the performance control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special performance in the second mode, and when a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the reserved image 702 with a specific transparency is made difficult to see or invisible. An example of the specific transparency is an incomplete transparency.
In this case, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Also, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 with a specific transparency is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from drawing the player's excessive attention in the special time-saving game state, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In this embodiment, the performance control board 130 can display the reserved image 702 at a first position on the first image display device 70 and then at a second position, and in the second mode, a specific image can be displayed before the start of the special performance, and if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the reserved image 702 at the first position is made difficult to see or impossible to see. An example of the first position is an incomplete display position. An example of the second position is a completed display position.
In this case, the change in the display position of the reserved image 702 can entertain the player. Also, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Furthermore, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the change in the display position of the reserved image 702 is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from drawing excessive attention from the player in the special time-saving game state, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing an effect that is highly entertaining can be provided.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the performance control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special performance, and can set the sound output to the first mode when the variable performance is being executed, and can set the sound output to the second mode when a specific image is being displayed in the second mode.
In this case, even before the start of the special effect, the special image can attract the player's interest. Also, by outputting a sound in a manner that corresponds to the display of a special image in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made aware that a special image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining effect can be provided.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the performance control board 130 is capable of displaying a specific image before the start of the special performance, and is capable of setting the top lamp 10b to the second state, etc., when a variable performance is being executed, and is capable of setting the top lamp 10b to the eighth state, etc., when a specific image is being displayed in the second mode.
In this case, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Also, by changing the state of the top lamp 10b according to the display of the specific image in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made to recognize that the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the performance control board 130 is capable of displaying a specific image before the start of the special performance, and is capable of setting the board lamp 74b to the second state, etc., when a variable performance is being executed, and is capable of setting the board lamp 74b to the eighth state, etc., when a specific image is being displayed in the second mode.
In this case, even before the start of the special effect, the special image can attract the player's interest. Also, by changing the state of the board lamp 74b according to the display of the special image in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made to recognize that the special image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the performance control board 130 is capable of displaying a specific image before the start of the special performance, and is capable of setting the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c to the second state, etc., when a variable performance is being executed, and is capable of setting the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c to the eighth state, etc., when a specific image is being displayed in the second mode.
In this case, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Also, by changing the state of the movable member lamp 74c and the state of the button lamp 17c according to the state in which the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made to recognize that the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the second mode, the performance control board 130 is capable of displaying a specific image before the start of the special performance, and if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the display of the decorative pattern 700 can begin before the display of the reserved image 702 begins.
In this case, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Also, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the effect pattern 700 is displayed earlier than the reserved image 702, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the variable effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the second mode, if a prize is won before the start of the special effect and while the special pattern is stopped and no pending information is stored in the main RAM 110c, the performance control board 130 makes the pending image 702 of a specific aspect difficult to see or impossible to see.
In this way, if a win occurs before the start of the special effect and while the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved, the reserved image 702 of the specific mode is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state is prevented from drawing the player's attention too much, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the second mode, if a prize is won before the start of the special performance and while the special pattern is stopped and no pending information is stored in the main RAM 110c, the performance control board 130 makes the pending image 702 of a specific operating mode difficult to see or impossible to see.
In this way, if a win occurs before the start of the special effect and while the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved, the reserved image 702 of the specific operation mode is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state is prevented from drawing the player's attention too much, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In this embodiment, when a prize is won before the start of the special effect in the second mode, when the special symbol is stopped and the reserved information is not stored in the main RAM 110c, the performance control board 130 makes the reserved image 702 of a specific form difficult to see or impossible to see. An example of the specific form is an incomplete form.
In this way, if a win occurs before the start of the special effect and while the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved, the reserved image 702 of a specific form is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state is prevented from drawing the player's attention too much, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In this embodiment, the performance control board 130 can display the reserved image 702 at the first transparency by the first image display device 70, and then at the second transparency, and when a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance and while the special symbol is stopped and reserved information is not stored in the main RAM 110c, the reserved image 702 at the first transparency is made difficult to see or impossible to see. An example of the first transparency is an incomplete transparency. An example of the second transparency is a completed transparency.
In this case, the player can be entertained by the change in transparency of the reserved image 702. Furthermore, if a win occurs before the start of the special effect and while the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved ball, the change in transparency of the reserved image 702 is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from drawing excessive attention from the player in the special time-saving game state, and the player can be made to focus on the effects that are unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In this embodiment, when a prize is won before the start of the special effect in the second mode, when the special symbol is stopped, and when the reserved information is not stored in the main RAM 110c, the performance control board 130 makes the reserved image 702 in a specific position difficult to see or impossible to see. An example of the specific position is an incomplete display position.
In this way, if a win occurs before the start of the special effect and while the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved, the reserved image 702 at the specific position is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state is prevented from drawing the player's attention too much, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that is unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining effects can be provided.

In this embodiment, the performance control board 130 can display the reserved image 702 on the first image display device 70 in the first mode and then display it in the second mode, and can display the special image in a display mode corresponding to the controlled mode of the first mode and the second mode. If a prize is won when the special pattern is stopped and the special image corresponding to the first mode is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 in the first mode is made difficult to see or cannot be seen, and the special image corresponding to the second mode is displayed. Examples of the first mode include an incomplete display mode, etc. Examples of the second mode include a completed display mode, etc. Examples of the special image include the decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706. Examples of the specific notification include the display of the second right hit image 725 and a sound that encourages the launch of the game ball to the right in the game area 5a.
In this case, the player can be entertained by the change in the state of the reserved image 702. In addition, even when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so that the player can be made to recognize that a prize can be won by shooting a game ball into the second game area. Furthermore, if a prize is won when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed while a special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the change in the state of the reserved image 702 is not made visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from being excessively focused on by the player in the special time-saving game state, and the player can be made to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation can be provided.

In this embodiment, the performance control board 130 can display the reserved image 702 on the first image display device 70 in the first operation mode and then in the second operation mode, and if a win occurs when the special image corresponding to the first mode is displayed while the special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 in the first operation mode is made difficult to see or cannot be seen, and a special image corresponding to the second mode is displayed. An example of the first operation mode is an incomplete operation mode. An example of the second operation mode is an operation mode in the operation performance.
In this case, the player can be entertained by the change in the operation mode of the reserved image 702. In addition, even when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so that the player can be made to recognize that a prize can be won by shooting a game ball into the second game area. Furthermore, if a prize is won when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed while a special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the change in the operation mode of the reserved image 702 is not made visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from being excessively focused on by the player in the special time-saving game state, and the player can be made to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won when the special pattern is stopped after the start of the specific notification and a special image corresponding to the first mode is being displayed, the performance control board 130 makes the reserved image 702 of a specific form difficult to see or impossible to see, and displays a special image corresponding to the second mode.
In this case, even when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so that the player can recognize that a prize can be won by shooting the game ball into the second game area. Furthermore, if a prize is won when the special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed after the specific notification is started, the reserved image 702 of a specific form is not made visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state is prevented from drawing the player's attention excessively, and the player can be made to pay attention to the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won when the special pattern is stopped after the start of the specific notification and a special image corresponding to the first mode is displayed, the performance control board 130 makes the reserved image 702 of the first transparency difficult to see or impossible to see, and displays a special image corresponding to the second mode.
In this case, the change in the transparency of the reserved image 702 can entertain the player. In addition, even when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so that the player can recognize that a prize can be won by launching a game ball into the second game area. Furthermore, if a prize is won when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed while a special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the change in the transparency of the reserved image 702 is not made visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from being excessively focused on by the player in the special time-saving game state, and the player can be made to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won when the special pattern is stopped after the start of the specific notification and a special image corresponding to the first mode is displayed, the performance control board 130 makes the reserved image 702 at the first position difficult to see or impossible to see, and displays a special image corresponding to the second mode.
In this case, the change in the display position of the reserved image 702 can entertain the player. In addition, even when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so that the player can recognize that a prize can be won by shooting a game ball into the second game area. Furthermore, if a prize is won when a special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed while a special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the change in the display position of the reserved image 702 is not made visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 is prevented from being excessively focused on by the player in the special time-saving game state, and the player can be made to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 130 is able to change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the display of the pending image 702 is completed.
In this case, when a win is made in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the sound output mode is switched earlier than the display of the reserved image 702, so that the player can easily recognize that the special time-saving game state is in progress even if the player has taken his eyes off the gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed in the second mode before the start of the special effect, the performance control board 130 is able to change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the specific image is no longer displayed.
In this case, when a win is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, by switching the sound output mode more quickly than by hiding the specific image, the player can be made to quickly recognize that the special time-saving game state is in effect, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining performance can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 130 is able to change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the decorative pattern 700 becomes easily visible.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the sound output mode is switched more quickly than when the decorative pattern 700 is in a state where it is easily visible to the player, so that the player can easily recognize that the special time-saving game state is in effect even if the player has taken his eyes off the gaming machine 1. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining performance can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 130 is able to change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the small pattern 704 becomes easily visible.
In this case, when a win is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the sound output mode is switched more quickly than when the small symbol 704 is made easily visible to the player, so that the player can easily recognize that the special time-saving game state is in progress even if the player has taken his eyes off the gaming machine 1. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining performance can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 130 is capable of changing the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before changing the top lamp 10b from the first light-emitting mode to the second light-emitting mode.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the sound output mode is switched more quickly than the switching of the light emission mode of the top lamp 10b, so that the player can easily recognize that the special time-saving game state is in progress even if the player has taken his eyes off the gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 130 is able to change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before changing the board lamp 74b from the first light-emitting mode to the second light-emitting mode.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the sound output mode is switched more quickly than the switching of the light emission mode of the board lamp 74b, so that the player can easily recognize that the special time-saving game state is in progress even if the player has taken his eyes off the gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 130 is able to change the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before changing the movable member lamp 74c or the button lamp 17c from the first light-emitting mode to the second light-emitting mode.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the sound output mode is switched more quickly than switching the light emission mode of the movable member lamp 74c or the button lamp 17c, so that the player can easily recognize that the special time-saving game state is in progress even if the player has taken his eyes off the gaming machine 1. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining performances can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the sound output mode is switched before the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. Therefore, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the sound output mode is switched before the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 begins. Therefore, even if the customer waiting image 710 prevents the player from recognizing the game situation from the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can be made to quickly recognize that he or she has won.

In addition, if a win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the state of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched before the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. Therefore, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the state of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched before the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 begins. Therefore, even if the customer waiting image 710 prevents the player from recognizing the game situation from the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won.

In addition, if a win occurs when a specific image is displayed in a special time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 700 is made visible to the player before the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. Therefore, even if the reserved image 702 is not visible, it is possible to quickly indicate to the player that a variable performance will be performed.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in a special time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 700 is made visible to the player before the customer waiting image 710 is hidden. Therefore, even if the information displayed on the first image display device 70 regarding the game is blocked by the customer waiting image 710, the player can be quickly informed that a variable performance will be performed.

In addition, if a win occurs when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the step-by-step display effect is not executed, whereas if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 between the start of the variable effect based on this win and the display of the second transition image 734, the step-by-step display effect is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy not only the effects unique to the special time-saving game state, but also the changes in the display mode of the reserved image 702, and can give the player a sense of exclusivity from the reserved image 702 that is displayed based on a win when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state.

In addition, if a win occurs while the second transition image 734 is being displayed, the reserved image 702 in an incomplete display state is not visible to the player. This prevents the player from focusing too much on the reserved image 702, and allows the player to focus on the change from the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state to the stage image 706 unique to the special time-saving game state.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the first start hole 45 while the second transition image 734 is being displayed, a winning sound announcing the entry into the first start hole 45 is not output. Therefore, in a special time-saving game state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start hole 47, the player is prevented from being overly aware that the game ball has entered the first start hole 45, and the player can focus on the change from the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state to the stage image 706 unique to the special time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, even when the second transition image 734 is displayed, if a game ball enters the second start hole 47, a winning sound is output to notify the player of the entry into the second start hole 47. This allows the player to recognize that the game is in a special time-saving game state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second start hole 47.

In addition, even when the second transition image 734 is displayed, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, a winning sound may be output to notify the player of the entry into the first starting hole 45. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the entry into the first starting hole 45 is invalid.
Also, when the second transition image 734 is displayed and the game ball enters the second start hole 47, the winning sound notifying the player of the entry into the second start hole 47 may not be output. In this case, the player is prevented from being overly aware of the game ball's entry, and the player can be made to pay attention to the change from the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state to the stage image 706 unique to the special time-saving game state.

(Variation of variation example 10)
Figures 203 to 205 are figures showing modified examples of variation performance example 10.
In the variation presentation example 10, a variation presentation based on winning at the first starting hole 45 is described as the first variation presentation in the special time-saving game state, but the first variation presentation in the special time-saving game state is not limited to the above example.
In the following, a modified example of the variation presentation example 10 will be described with reference to Figures 203 to 205. This modified example is an example in which a variation presentation based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 47 is performed as the first variation presentation in the special time-saving game state. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation presentation examples may be omitted.

First, in the same manner as in the variation performance example 10, in the normal game state, the final variation performance among the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game state. Also, when a predetermined time has passed since the final variation performance ended without a game ball entering either the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed as shown in FIG. 203 (1). Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all enter the eighth mode. Also, at this time, the sound output device 9 outputs a notification sound to notify that the special time-saving game state is entered. The state shown in FIG. 203 (1) is the same state as the state shown in FIG. 195 (5) in the variation performance example 10.

Next, when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 47, as shown in FIG. 203 (2), the audio output device 9 starts to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 continue to be difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all continue to be in the eighth mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 203 (3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth state to the second state. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 continue to be difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 203 (4), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 starts, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 increases. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 are in a state where they are visible to the player, although they are not easily visible to the player. Meanwhile, neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. Also, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 203(5), the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 becomes even higher. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 changes and is displayed at high speed. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 47 remains showing "0". Also, at this time, neither the changing image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. Also, although the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are not easily visible to the player, they continue to be visible to the player. Also, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 203(6), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends, and the customer waiting image 710 becomes non-displayed. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become easily visible to the player. At this time, the variation start operation ends, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes high speed. At this time, the countdown image 732, "0", is displayed. On the other hand, neither the variation image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed on the first image display device 70. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the sound output device 9.
In addition, at this time, when the game ball enters the second start hole 47, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 47. In addition, a winning sound that notifies the winning of the second start hole 47 is output from the audio output device 9. On the other hand, the reserved image 702 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 204 (7), a special time-saving start image 733 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 204 ( 8 ), the display of the second transitional image 734 begins, and the second transitional image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 204 ( 9 ), a second transitional image 734 is displayed over the entire first image display device 70 .
Next, as shown in Fig. 204 (10), a special time-saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "a" mode in the special time-saving selection image 735.
Next, as shown in FIG. 204(11), a mode start image 736 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 204 (12), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are not displayed, and the low-decorative decorative pattern 700 "125" is temporarily stopped on the first image display device 70. At this time, the background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the third right-hit image 737 and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 are displayed. Also, "0" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45, and "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47. Also, one reserved image 702 is displayed. On the other hand, the variable image 701 is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "125", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 205 (13).

As described above, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the first start hole 45 while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 is displayed (see FIG. 196(10)), and then the variable image 701 is displayed (see FIG. 196(11)). On the other hand, if a game ball enters the second start hole 47 while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, neither the reserved image 702 nor the variable image 701 is displayed (see FIG. 203(6)).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the reserved image 702 and the variable image 701 based on winning at the first start port 45 are not displayed even though the stage image 706 having a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the reserved image 702 and the variable image 701 based on winning at the second start port 47, which is difficult to win at in the normal game state, are displayed even though the stage image 706 having a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a reservation is made for a winning entry into the first starting port 45 during the first variable presentation in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 is displayed when a stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed (see FIG. 187 (6)), and the reserved image 702 is not displayed when a stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed (see FIG. 188 (12)).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the reserved image 702 based on winning at the first starting port 45 is not displayed even though the stage image 706 made of a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the reserved image 702 based on winning at the first starting port 45, which is difficult to aim for in the special time-saving game state, is displayed even though the stage image 706 made of a background corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a reservation is made for winning at the second starting port 47 during the first variable presentation in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 is not displayed when a stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed (see FIG. 203 (6)), and the reserved image 702 is displayed when a stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed (see FIG. 204 (12)).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the reserved image 702 based on winning at the second start port 47, which is difficult to win at in the normal game state, is displayed even though the stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. Also, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the reserved image 702 based on winning at the second start port 47, which is easy to win at in the special time-saving game state, is not displayed even though the stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed.

(Other examples of variation performance example 10)
Figure 206 is a diagram showing another presentation example in variable presentation example 10.
In the variation performance example 10, an example is described in which the first variation performance in the special time-saving game state starts when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, but the performance that is performed when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed is not limited to the above example.
In the following, other examples of the variation performance example 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. In the following description, differences from the above-mentioned variation performance examples and modified examples will be mainly described, and explanations of points that match the variation performance examples and modified examples may be omitted.

First, as in the case of the variation performance example 10, the final variation performance among the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game state. Also, when a predetermined time has passed since the final variation performance ended without a game ball entering either the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed as shown in FIG. 206 (1). Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all enter the eighth mode. Also, at this time, an alarm sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify that the special time-saving game state is entered. The state shown in FIG. 206 (1) is the same state as the state shown in FIG. 195 (5) in the variation performance example 10.

If an abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 57a while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, a magnetic error occurs, and as shown in FIG. 206 (2), a magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth mode to the ninth mode. The ninth mode is a light emission mode in which the light periodically flashes in orange, and is a mode different from any of the first mode to the eighth mode. The ninth mode is also considered to be a mode that suggests or notifies the occurrence of an error. The flashing period in the ninth mode is, for example, 1.5 seconds. In other words, the flashing period in the ninth mode is longer than the flashing period in the winning light emission performance. At this time, a warning sound is output from the audio output device 9 along with the voice "Magnet detected."

As described above, in this embodiment, if an error occurs while a specific image is being displayed in a special time-saving game state, the sound output mode is switched to a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the error. Therefore, even if the player takes his/her eyes off the gaming machine 1 while the specific image is being displayed, the player can be made aware that an error has occurred.

In the example shown in FIG. 206(2), if a magnetic error occurs when the customer waiting image 710 and the second right hit image 725 are displayed, neither the customer waiting image 710 nor the second right hit image 725 is displayed, and the magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed. However, this is not limited to this. If a magnetic error occurs when the customer waiting image 710 or the second right hit image 725 is displayed, the customer waiting image 710 and the right hit image 725 may continue to be displayed, and the magnetic error notification image 741 may be displayed on a layer in front of the customer waiting image 710.

In addition, regardless of the game status, if an error occurs when a specific image is displayed, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched to the ninth mode, the sound output mode is switched to a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the error, and further, a magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed.
In addition, not only when an error occurs while a specific image is being displayed, but in any case, when an error occurs, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched to the ninth state, the sound output state is switched to a state corresponding to the occurrence of the error, and further, a magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed.

(Variation of variation example 11)
Figures 207 to 209 are figures showing modified examples of variation performance example 11.
In the variable performance example 11, as the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state, a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning at the first starting port 45 is a miss has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
In the following, a modified example of the variation presentation example 11 will be described with reference to Figures 207 to 209. This modified example is an example in which a variation presentation is performed in which the result of the special pattern lottery based on winning the second start port 47 is a big win as the first variation presentation in the special time-saving game state. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and modified examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that match the variation presentation examples and modified examples may be omitted.

First, in the same manner as in the variation performance example 11, in the normal game state, the final variation performance among the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game state. Also, when a predetermined time has passed since the final variation performance ended without a game ball entering either the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed as shown in FIG. 207 (1). Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the fifth mode. Also, although not shown, at this time, the sound output device 9 outputs background music according to the previous variation performance at a lower volume than during the execution of the variation performance. The state shown in FIG. 207 (1) is the same state as the state shown in FIG. 200 (1) in the variation performance example 11.

Next, when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 47, as shown in Fig. 207 (2), a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is output from the sound output device 9. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the fifth mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 207(3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth mode to the second mode. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

207(4), the non-display effect of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 is started, and the transparency of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 increases. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 207(5), the non-display effect of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 ends, and the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are hidden. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed to change at high speed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 still shows "0", and neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. At this time, the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 207(6), the variation start operation ends, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes high speed. At this time, the countdown image 732, "0", is displayed. At this time, neither the variation image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the sound output device 9.
Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 47, as shown in FIG. 208 (7), the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 47 displays "1". In addition, a winning sound that notifies the winning of the second start hole 47 is output from the audio output device 9. On the other hand, the reserved image 702 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 208 ( 8 ), the display of the second transitional image 734 begins, and the second transitional image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70 .
Next, as shown in Fig. 208(9), the second transition image 734 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70. That is, the second transition image 734 is displayed without displaying the special time-saving start image 733 (see Fig. 201(9)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 208 (10), the second transition image 734 is hidden and the repeated number decorative pattern 700 "444" is temporarily stopped. At this time, the stage image 706 is displayed again. In the illustrated example, the background corresponding to the first stage is shown as the stage image 706. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c switch from the second state to the seventh state. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up orange, the board lamp 74b lights up yellow, the movable member lamp 74c lights up green, and the button lamp 17c lights up blue. At this time, the execution count image 705 and the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 are not displayed.

Then, as the special symbol stops varying, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "444", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 208 (11). At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the example shown, the top lamp 10b lights up yellow, the board lamp 74b lights up green, the movable member lamp 74c lights up blue, and the button lamp 17c lights up in indigo.

Next, as shown in Fig. 208 (12), an opening image 719 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the seventh position to the second position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 209 (13), a first right hit image 720 and a promotion image 721 are displayed.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the promotion image 721, a round in progress image 722 and a round number image 723 are displayed, as shown in Fig. 209 (14). In the illustrated example, the round number image 723 displays the text "Round 1".
Next, when the final round is over, as shown in Fig. 209 (15), a normal time-saving selection image 745 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is set to the "A" mode in the normal time-saving selection image 745.
Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal time-saving selection image 745 was displayed, the normal time-saving start image 724 is displayed as shown in Fig. 209 (16). At this time, a card warning image 739 and a game warning image 740 are also displayed.

Next, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 209 (17), the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness, "444", is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70. And, like the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "444". Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the third stage is displayed as the stage image 706. Also, at this time, the second right-hit image 725 and the normal time-saving remaining number image 726 are displayed. Also, "0" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45, and "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47. Also, one reserved image 702 is displayed.

In this modified example, the variable presentation based on winning when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed before the start of the first variable presentation in the special time-saving game state is described. Here, the variable presentation described in this modified example may be executed based on winning at the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed before the start of the first variable presentation in the special time-saving game state (see FIG. 195 (5)).

In this way, when the specified number of times is reached (when entering the special time-saving game state), the first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the first performance is performed in which the decorative pattern 700 appears again. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, a second performance is performed in which the decorative pattern 700 indicating a jackpot is displayed. In addition, both when the first performance is performed and when the second performance is performed, a transition to the time-saving game state occurs. The performance mode of the second performance in the case of a jackpot differs between when the specified number of times is reached and when the specified number of times is not reached.
In this case, when the specified number of times is reached, the first predetermined image is displayed and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, making the player expect a transition to a special mode (special time-saving game state), and improving the interest. Also, if a jackpot occurs even if the specified number of times is not reached, the game transitions to the time-saving game state. Also, by making the presentation mode different when the specified number of times is reached and when the specified number of times is not reached, the presentation can be diversified and the interest can be improved.

Furthermore, when the specified number of times is reached (when entering a special time-saving game state), a first performance is performed in which a first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again. In the case of a jackpot, a second performance is performed in which the decorative pattern 700 indicating a jackpot is displayed. In both cases, the first performance and the second performance are performed, and the game moves to a time-saving game state. When the specified number of times is reached, the performance mode of the first performance differs between a jackpot and a miss.
In this case, by making the presentation mode of the first presentation different between a big win and a miss when the specified number of times is reached, the presentation can be diversified and interest can be improved.

In addition, the right-hit notification effect when the first effect is performed (display of special time-saving start image 733) and the right-hit notification effect when the second effect is performed (display of first right-hit image 720 and promotion image 721) have different presentation styles.
In this case, the presentation of the right-hit notification presentation can be made different between when the first presentation is performed and when the second presentation is performed, thereby diversifying the presentation.

Furthermore, when the first performance is performed, a transition is made to a specific mode indicating the second game state (time-saving game state) without displaying the card warning image 739 (game warning image 740), and when the second performance is performed, a transition is made to a specific mode indicating the second game state (time-saving game state) after displaying the card warning image 739 (game warning image 740).
In this case, in the event of a jackpot, a card warning image 739 (game warning image 740) can be displayed to alert the player, and when entering a special time-saving game state, these images can be not displayed, allowing an immediate transition to a presentation mode showing the special time-saving game state.

In addition, the first time from when the first predetermined image is displayed until when the game state transitions to the second game state (time-saving game state) is shorter than the second time from when the second predetermined image is displayed until when the game state transitions to the second game state (time-saving game state).
In this case, when the first predetermined image is displayed, the game state can be shifted to the second game state in a short time, thereby improving the interest of the player.

(Example of variation 12)
210 and 211 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation performance example 12) of the variation performance will be described with reference to Fig. 210 and Fig. 211. Variation performance example 12 includes two variation performances. The first of these two variation performances is a variation performance based on a game ball winning the first start hole 45 in a special time-saving game state. The second variation performance is a variation performance based on a game ball winning the second start hole 47 in a special time-saving game state.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned various variable presentation examples and modified examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the various variable presentation examples and modified examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 210(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the performance control unit 130m when the variation of the previous special pattern ends. At this time, the text "700" is displayed in the special time-saving remaining number image 738. A background corresponding to the sixth stage is also displayed as the stage image 706. The reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 both show "0". The top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first mode. Although not shown, the BGM corresponding to the previous variation performance is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the first start hole 45, as shown in FIG. 210(2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the special pattern. Meanwhile, the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 45 still shows "0". Also, neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. Also, the display content of the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is updated to "699". Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first mode to the second mode.
Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 47, as shown in FIG. 210(3), the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 47 displays "1". At this time, the stage display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output the winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 210(4), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the reserved image 702 is started. On the other hand, even when the stage display performance is completed, the reserved image 702 does not move to the variable pedestal 701P, but continues to be displayed on the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, the winning sound continues to be output until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.
Also, at this time, when the game ball enters the second start hole 47, "2" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 47. Also, at this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the second reserved pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Next, as shown in Fig. 210 (5), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the second reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the second reserved image 702 is started. Also, the winning sound that notifies the winning of the second starting hole 47 is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "364", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 210(6).

Next, as shown in FIG. 211(7), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the display of the next special pattern. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting hole 47 switches to "1". At this time, the second reserved image 702 moves toward the first reserved base 702P. The first reserved image 702 moves toward the variable base 701P and expands, thereby displaying the variable image 701. The display content of the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is updated to "698".
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "712", are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 211(8). Also, the variable image 701 is no longer displayed.

(Example of variation 13)
212 to 214 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 13) of the variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 212 to 214. The variable performance example 13 is a variable performance based on the game ball entering the second start hole 47 in the special time-saving game state, and is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a big win.
In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned various variable presentation examples and modified examples will be mainly explained, and explanations of the points that are the same as the various variable presentation examples and modified examples may be omitted.

212(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the performance control unit 130m when the previous special pattern variation ends. At this time, the text "600" is displayed in the special time-saving remaining number image 738. The background corresponding to the 7th stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The 7th stage is the stage that is set when the "b" mode is selected in the special time-saving selection image 735 (see FIG. 188(10)). In addition, "0" is displayed in both the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47. In addition, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first mode. Although not shown, the BGM corresponding to the previous variation performance is continuously output from the sound output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 47, as shown in FIG. 212 (2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 changes and is displayed at high speed. Also, the display content of the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is updated to "599". Also, at this time, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 47. Also, at this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved base 702P. Also, at this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output the winning sound. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first state to the second state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 212 (3), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and a rectangular reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. This reserved image 702 has a display size larger than the example shown in FIG. 212 (2). The display mode of this rectangular reserved image 702 is a display mode corresponding to the seventh stage. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the operation performance of the reserved image 702 begins. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 212(4), the start-of-variation operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. Also, the reserved image 702 moves to the variable base 701P and expands, so that the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 switches to "0".
Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 47, as shown in FIG. 212(5), the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 47 displays "1". At this time, the stage display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output the winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 212 (6), the stage display performance is completed, and the rectangular reserved image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 begins. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 213(7), the left decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and then the right decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach performance begins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 213(8), the "4" which is the middle decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, and the "444" which is the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped. That is, the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped without performing either the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched from the second mode to the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b is lit in orange, the board lamp 74b is lit in yellow, the movable member lamp 74c is lit in green, and the button lamp 17c is lit in blue.

Then, as the special symbol stops varying, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "444", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 213 (9). At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the example shown, the top lamp 10b lights up yellow, the board lamp 74b lights up green, the movable member lamp 74c lights up blue, and the button lamp 17c lights up indigo blue.

Next, as shown in Fig. 213 (10), an opening image 719 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the seventh position to the second position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 213 (11), a first right hit image 720 and a promotion image 721 are displayed.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the promotion image 721, a round in progress image 722 and a round number image 723 are displayed, as shown in Fig. 213 (12). In the illustrated example, the round number image 723 displays the text "Round 1".
Next, when the final round is over, as shown in Fig. 214 (13), a normal time-saving selection image 745 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is set to the "A" mode in the normal time-saving selection image 745.
Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal time-saving selection image 745 was displayed, the normal time-saving start image 724 is displayed as shown in Fig. 214 (14). At this time, a card warning image 739 and a game warning image 740 are also displayed.

Next, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 214 (15), the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness, "444", is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70. And, like the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "444". Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the third stage is displayed as the stage image 706. Also, at this time, the second right-hit image 725 and the normal time-saving remaining number image 726 are displayed. Also, "0" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45, and "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47. Also, one reserved image 702 is displayed.

(Step-by-step display of the rectangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode)
Next, a step-by-step display effect by the rectangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. Fig. 215 is a diagram showing an example of a step-by-step display effect by the rectangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
The rectangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages as a stage display performance. When the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, a highly transparent reserved image 702 is displayed in white as the first stage of the stage display performance, as shown in FIG. 215(1). This reserved image 702 is a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the first stage of the stage display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 212(2) and FIG. 212(5).

Next, as shown in FIG. 215(2), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed in white as the second stage of the stage display performance. This reserved image 702 is formed by arranging a plurality of images each having a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. In the illustrated example, in the reserved image 702, four rectangular images are arranged at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. This reserved image 702 is displayed with a display size larger than that of the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 213(3), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed in white as the third stage of the stage display performance. In the illustrated example, in the reserved image 702, six images each having a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction are displayed side by side at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. This reserved image 702 is displayed with a larger display size than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 213(4), a reserved image 702 with a lower transparency than the third stage is displayed as the fourth stage, i.e., the final stage, of the staged display performance. This reserved image 702 is a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction. This reserved image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than the third stage. The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the final stage of the staged display performance is the display mode of the reserved image 702 shown in FIG. 212(3) and FIG. 212(6). That is, although not shown, after the reserved image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 212(2) and FIG. 212(5) is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the second stage of the staged display performance is displayed, and then the reserved image 702 in the third stage of the staged display performance is displayed. Then, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 212(3) and FIG. 212(6) is displayed.

In this way, the change from a stage where lines are formed on the reserved image 702 (see FIG. 215(3)) to a stage where lines are not formed on the reserved image 702 (see FIG. 215(4)) can also be regarded as a change in the form of the reserved image 702. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time from when the staged display performance begins to when the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, i.e., the execution time of the staged display performance of the reserved image 702 in the rectangular normal display mode, is 0.2 seconds.

When the stepwise display performance is completed, as shown in FIG. 215 (5), the motion performance of the reserved image 702 begins. The rectangular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically swings up and down as a motion performance. The period of the swing in this motion performance is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

(Example of variation 14)
216 and 217 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 14) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Fig. 216 and Fig. 217. Variable performance example 14 is a variable performance example based on winning at the first starting hole 45 in a normal game state, and is a variable performance example when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off during the execution of the variable performance and then restored. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples and each modified example will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples and each modified example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 216(1), the first special pattern display 60 stops the variable display of the previous special pattern. Also, the first special pattern reserve display 63 displays the reserved number for the winning of the first starting port 45 as "3". Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70. Also, "3" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45, and three reserved images 702 are displayed. Also, the execution count image 705 shows the text "150 GAMES", and the remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text "350 more". Also, the background corresponding to the first stage is shown as the stage image 706. Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second state. Also, although not shown in the figure, background music corresponding to the previous variable performance continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 216 (2), the first special pattern display 60 starts to display the next special pattern. Also, the first special pattern reserve display 63 displays the number of reserved prizes for the first starting port 45 as "2". Also, as the display of the special pattern starts to change, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 for the first starting port 45 switches to "2".

Next, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, the LEDs in the first special symbol display 60 and the first special symbol reserved display 63 go out, as shown in FIG. 216 (3). At this time, the first image display device 70, top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all go out. Additionally, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored, as shown in Fig. 216 (4), the variation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display 60 is resumed. Also, in the first special symbol reserve display 63, the number of reserved symbols for the winning of the first starting hole 45 is displayed as "2".
Thereafter, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all enter the tenth mode. The tenth mode is a light emission mode in which the lamps are lit in yellow-green, and is different from any of the first to ninth modes.
After that, a restoration in progress image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70 .
On the other hand, since the power to the gaming machine 1 has been restored, no sound has been output from the audio output device 9.

After that, as shown in FIG. 216 (5), the special pattern continues to change on the first special pattern display device 60. Also, on the first image display device 70, the recovery image 742 continues to be displayed. Also, at this time, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first special pattern reserve display device 63 displays the number of reserved balls for the winning ball in the first starting hole 45 as "3". On the other hand, neither the reserved image 702 nor the reserved number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70.

Next, as shown in FIG. 216 (6), the varying display of the special pattern stops on the first special pattern display device 60.
After that, the non-display performance of the image 742 during the recovery is started, and the transparency of the image 742 during the recovery is increased. Then, by increasing the transparency of the image 742 during the recovery, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are in a state where they are not easily visible to the player, but are visible to the player. Also, at this time, all three reserved images 702 are displayed in a completed display mode. That is, the third reserved image 702 is displayed without being visible to the player in an incomplete display mode. Also, no sound is output from the sound output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 217(7), the non-display effect of the image 742 during recovery ends, and the image 742 during recovery becomes non-display. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the small pattern 704, the number of times of execution image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are all in a state where they are easily visible to the player. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704, "135", are fixed and stopped. Also, "3" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45. Also, the number of times of execution image 705 shows the text "151 GAMES", and the remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text "349 left". Meanwhile, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.
At this time, the motion presentation of the three pending images 702 is being executed, and all three pending images 702 are rotating clockwise from their initial positions before the motion presentation started.

Next, as shown in Fig. 217 (8), a warning sound notifying the start of the next variable performance is output from the audio output device 9. For example, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound saying "Variable performance will start soon."
At this time, the motion presentation of the three pending images 702 continues, and the three pending images 702 further rotate in the clockwise direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 217(9), the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the next special symbol. Also, the first special symbol reserved display 63 displays the number of reserved symbols for the winning of the first starting hole 45 as "2".
After that, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "2". Also, the first reserved image 702 moves to the changing base 701P, and the changing image 701 is displayed. Also, BGM corresponding to the changing performance being performed is output from the audio output device 9. Although not shown in the figure, after that, as the special pattern stops changing, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped, and the changing image 701 is not displayed.

Figure 218 is an explanatory diagram of each effect in variable performance example 14.
As shown in FIG. 218, at time T1 of the variation performance example 14, the variation performance in the normal game state is started. At this time, the variation of the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 is started, and the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are in a state where they are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the action performance of the variable image 701 and the two reserved images 702 is executed, and the variable image 701 and the two reserved images 702 are in a state where they are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Also, at this time, the BGM according to the variation performance being executed is output from the sound output device 9. The state at time T1 is the state shown in FIG. 216 (2).

After that, at time T2, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, and the small pattern 704 are no longer displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all turned off. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9. The state at time T2 is the state shown in FIG. 216 (3).

After that, at time T3, the power to the gaming machine 1 is restored.
After that, at time T4, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all assume the tenth mode.
After that, at time T5, a recovery in progress image 742 is displayed. The state at time T5 is the state shown in FIG.
After that, at time T6, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45.

After that, at time T7, the variable effect that started before the power supply of the gaming machine 1 was cut off ends. At this time, the non-display effect of the recovery image 742 starts. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped, and the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 become visible to the player. At this time, the display of the third reserved image 702 starts. This third reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode. At this time, the action effect of the three reserved images 702 is being executed. At this time, all three reserved images 702 become visible to the player. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the tenth mode to the second mode. The state at time T7 is the state shown in FIG. 216 (6).

After that, at time T8, the non-display effect of the image 742 during recovery ends, and the image 742 during recovery is no longer displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the three reserved images 702, and the small pattern 704 are all easily visible to the player. The state at time T8 is the state shown in FIG. 217 (7).
After that, at time T9, a warning sound notifying the start of the next variable performance is output from the sound output device 9. The state at time T9 is the state shown in FIG.

After that, at time T10, the next change performance starts. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change. At this time, background music corresponding to the change performance being executed is output from the sound output device 9.
After that, at time T11, the first reserved image 702 moves to the variable stage 701P, and the display of the variable image 701 starts. The state at time T11 is shown in FIG.
This is the state shown in FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, if a win occurs after the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and while the special pattern that was being executed at the time of power cut is changing, i.e., while the recovery in progress image 742 is being displayed, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed without the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode being visible to the player.
In this case, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is not visible to the player, so that the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode can be seen by the player immediately after the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is restored after being cut off. Therefore, the player can quickly recognize that a reservation will occur due to a win in the first starting hole 45 while the restoration image 742 is being displayed, that is, when the decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706 are not being displayed, and the player can be given a sense of security.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while there is a hold, the hold image 702 is displayed as an action before the next change in the change being executed when the power is restored is started (see Figure 217 (7)).
In this case, the reserved image 702 stands out more than when no action is displayed on the reserved image 702. Therefore, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the reserved game when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off is not lost due to the power supply cutoff.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while there is a hold, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are displayed as still images when they are redisplayed, but the hold image 702 is displayed as an animated image.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused when the decorative pattern 700 or the small pattern 704 is redisplayed and the player is unable to recognize which variation the action display corresponds to. In addition, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the reserved items when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off are not lost due to the power supply cutoff.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the reserved images 702 that were hidden are gradually redisplayed (see FIG. 168(15) and FIG. 168(16)). On the other hand, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while there is a reserved image, the reserved images 702 that were hidden are displayed all at once (see FIG. 217(7)).
In this case, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the player can be made to recognize that the hidden reserved image 702 has not disappeared while suppressing the sense of incongruity caused by the re-display of the stage image 706, etc. Also, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored, the player can be made to recognize immediately that the reserved image at the time of the cut off has not been lost due to the cut off of the power supply, and the player can be given a sense of security. In other words, by changing the manner in which the reserved image 702 is redisplayed depending on whether the reserved image 702 has been hidden by the effect or not, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, both the hidden variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 are redisplayed (see FIG. 168 (16)). On the other hand, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while there is a reserved image, the hidden variable image 701 is not redisplayed, but the reserved image 702 is redisplayed (see FIG. 217 (9)).
In this case, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the player can be made to recognize that the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed in the variable effect based on the variable image 701. In addition, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored while there is a reserved ball, the variable image 701 is redisplayed, which can prevent the player from misunderstanding that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 was turned off will be executed again.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while there is a hold, the hold image 702 is displayed before the sound effect is output (see Figure 217 (7) and Figure 217 (8)).
In this case, the player can be made aware of the number of reserved balls before the variable presentation starts after the power to the gaming machine 1 is restored.

In particular, in this embodiment, when a prize is won in a special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the manner of sound output is switched before the display of the reserved image 702 is completed. On the other hand, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while there is a reserved item, the display of the reserved image 702 is completed before the effect sound is output. In other words, the chronological relationship between the sound output timing and the display timing of the reserved image 702 is reversed depending on whether there is a case where the reserved image 702 is not displayed because there is no reserved item, or there is a reserved item but the reserved image 702 is not displayed.
In this case, by making the player quickly aware that a special time-saving game state presentation will begin or by making the player quickly aware of the number of reserved balls depending on the state of the gaming machine 1, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from declining regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored, a sound effect is output after the restoration in progress image 742 is no longer displayed.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound effect for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player aware that the performance will resume.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed in a special time-saving game state before the start of a special effect, the sound output mode is switched before the specific image is hidden. On the other hand, if the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the restoration image 742 is hidden. In other words, the chronological relationship between the sound output timing and the image non-display timing is reversed depending on whether an image is displayed based on the change in the state of the gaming machine 1.
In this case, depending on whether an image is displayed based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the player is made to recognize the effect while suppressing the player's misunderstanding, or the player is made to recognize the effect as soon as possible, thereby making it possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored, a sound effect is output after the decorative pattern 700 is displayed.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is a sound related to a variable presentation.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win is made during a special time-saving game state before the start of a special effect, the sound output mode is switched before the decorative pattern 700 becomes easily visible. On the other hand, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the decorative pattern 700 becomes easily visible. In other words, depending on whether the decorative pattern 700 has become unvisible based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the effect is made visible to the player while suppressing the player's misconception, or the effect is made visible to the player as soon as possible, thereby making it difficult for the player's interest to decrease regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored, a sound effect is output after the small symbol 704 is displayed.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is a sound related to a variable presentation.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs during a special time-saving game state before the start of a special effect, the sound output mode is switched before the small symbols 704 become easily visible. On the other hand, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the small symbols 704 become easily visible. In other words, depending on whether the small symbols 704 have become invisible based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the effect is made visible to the player while suppressing the player's misconception, or the effect is made visible to the player as soon as possible, thereby making it difficult for the player's interest to decrease regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored, a sound effect is output after the top lamp 10b emits light.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is a sound related to the presentation.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win is made in a special time-saving game state before the start of a special effect, the sound output mode is switched before switching the mode of the top lamp 10b. On the other hand, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored, the sound effect is output after the top lamp 10b switches from an off state to an illuminated state. In other words, depending on whether the top lamp 10b has entered a specific state based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the player is made to recognize the effect while suppressing the player's misconception, or the player is made to recognize the effect as soon as possible, making it difficult for the player's interest to decrease regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the board lamp 74b is illuminated.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is a sound related to the presentation.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win is made in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output state is switched before the state of the board lamp 74b is switched. On the other hand, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the board lamp 74b switches from an off state to an illuminated state. In other words, by making the player aware of the effect while suppressing the player's misconception, or by making the player aware of the effect as soon as possible, depending on whether the board lamp 74b has entered a specific state based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing, regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored after being cut off, a performance sound is output after the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c emit light.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the output sound for a sound related to the power being restored, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is a sound related to the presentation.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in a special time-saving game state before the start of a special effect, the sound output mode is switched before the state of the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c is switched. On the other hand, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c switch from an off state to an illuminating state. In other words, depending on whether the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c have entered a specific state based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the effect is made to be recognized by the player while suppressing the player's misconception, or by making the player recognize the effect as soon as possible, making it difficult for the player's interest to decrease regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

(Example of variation 15)
219 and 220 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 15) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Fig. 219 and Fig. 220. Variation presentation example 15 is a variation presentation example based on winning the second start hole 47 in a special time-saving game state, and is a variation presentation example when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off during the execution of the variation presentation and then returned. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and each modified example will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation presentation examples and each modified example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 219(1), the second special pattern display 61 stops the display of the previous special pattern. Also, the first special pattern reserved display 63 displays the reserved number for the winning entry into the first starting gate 45 as "0", that is, it is turned off. Also, the second special pattern reserved display 64 displays the reserved number for the winning entry into the second starting gate 47 as "3". Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70. Also, "0" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting gate 45, and "3" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second starting gate 47. Also, three reserved images 702 are displayed. Also, the text "700" is displayed in the special time reduction remaining number image 738. Also, as the stage image 706, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed. Additionally, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second state. Although not shown, the background music corresponding to the previous variable performance is still being output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (2), the second special pattern display 61 starts to display the next special pattern. Also, the second special pattern reserve display 64 displays the number of reserved symbols for winning at the second starting port 47 as "2". Also, as the display of the special pattern starts to change, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 start to change. Also, the reserved symbol display 703 at the second starting port 47 switches to "2". Also, the display content of the special time-saving remaining number of times image 738 is updated to "699".

Next, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, as shown in FIG. 219 (3), the LEDs in the second special pattern display 61, the first special pattern reserved display 63, and the second special pattern reserved display 64 are turned off. At this time, the first image display device 70, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all turned off. Also, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored, as shown in Fig. 219 (4), the variation of the special symbols in the second special symbol display 61 resumes. Also, in the second special symbol reserve display 64, the number of reserved symbols for the winning of the second starting hole 47 is displayed as "2".
Thereafter, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all assume the tenth position.
After that, the return in progress image 742 and the second right hit image 725 are displayed on the first image display device 70.
On the other hand, since the power to the gaming machine 1 has been restored, no sound has been output from the audio output device 9.

After that, as shown in FIG. 219 (5), the special symbol continues to change on the second special symbol display device 61. Also, on the first image display device 70, the recovery image 742 continues to be displayed. Also, at this time, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol reserve display device 63 displays the number of reserved balls for the winning ball in the first starting hole 45 as "1". On the other hand, neither the reserved image 702 nor the reserved number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70. Also, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 219 (6), the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 displays the reserved number for the entry into the first starting hole 45 as "2". On the other hand, the first image display device 70 does not display either the reserved image 702 or the reserved number display 703. In addition, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47, as shown in FIG. 220 (7), the second special symbol reserved display 64 displays the reserved number for the entry into the second starting hole 47 as "3." On the other hand, neither the reserved image 702 nor the reserved number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (8), the variable display of the special pattern in the second special pattern display device 61 stops.
After that, the non-display effect of the recovery image 742 is started, and when the transparency of the recovery image 742 is increased, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, the stage image 706, and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 are in a state where they are not easily visible to the player, but are visible to the player. Also, at this time, the third reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode without a step-by-step display effect. Also, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

220(9), the non-display effect of the recovery image 742 ends, and the recovery image 742 becomes non-display. As a result, the decorative symbol 700, the reserved image 702, the small symbol 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 become easily visible to the player. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "135", are fixed and stopped. The reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 shows "2", and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 shows "3". The text "699" is displayed on the special time-saving remaining number image 738. At this time, the action effect of the reserved image 702 is being executed, and all three reserved images 702 have moved to the right from their initial positions before the action effect was started. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (10), a warning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to warn that the next change performance will start. At this time, the motion performance of the reserved images 702 continues, and all three reserved images 702 have moved to the left from their initial positions before the motion performance started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220(11), the second special symbol display 61 starts to display the next special symbol. Also, the second special symbol reserved display 64 displays the number of reserved symbols for the winning of the second starting hole 47 as "2".
After that, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 switches to "2". Also, the first reserved image 702 moves to the change base 701P, and the changing image 701 is displayed. Also, BGM corresponding to the change performance being performed is output from the audio output device 9. Although not shown in the figure, after that, as the special pattern stops changing, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped, and the changing image 701 is not displayed.

(Example of variation 16)
221 to 223 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variation presentation example 16) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Figs. 221 to 223. Variation presentation example 16 is an example of the first variation presentation based on winning at the first start hole 45 in a special time-saving game state, and is an example of variation presentation when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off during the execution of the variation presentation and then returned. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and each modified example will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation presentation examples and each modified example may be omitted.

First, in the normal game state, the final variable performance among the predetermined times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game state. Also, when a predetermined time has passed since the final variable performance is completed without a game ball entering either the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed as shown in FIG. 221 (1). Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the eighth mode. Also, at this time, a notification sound that notifies that the special time-saving game state is entered is output from the audio output device 9. The state shown in FIG. 221 (1) is the same state as the state shown in FIG. 195 (5) in the variable performance example 10.
In addition, the second special symbol reserved display 64 displays the reserved number for the winning of the second starting hole 47 as "0." In other words, the LED in the second special symbol reserved display 64 is turned off.

Next, when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 221 (2), the audio output device 9 begins to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 221(3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth position to the second position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 221(4), the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 is started, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 is increased, so that the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are in a state where they are not easily visible to the player, but are visible to the player. Also, as the stage image 706, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown. Also, at this time, a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is being output from the sound output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (5), the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 becomes even higher. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed changing at high speed. At this time, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45. At this time, the display of the reserved image 702 starts. Meanwhile, the step display performance is not executed, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (6), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends, and the customer waiting image 710 becomes non-displayed. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, reserved image 702, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 become easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the start of the fluctuation operation is in progress. Also, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

222(7), the start of the change operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. The pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the change image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 45 switches to "0". At this time, the countdown image 732, "0", is displayed. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9. Although not shown in the figure, background music corresponding to the change performance being performed is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, as shown in FIG. 222 (8), the first image display device 70, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all go out. In addition, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored, the variable display of the special symbols is resumed. After that, as shown in FIG. 222(9), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the tenth mode.
After that, a recovery in progress image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70. On the other hand, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.
In addition, when the recovery image 742 is displayed, if a game ball enters the second start hole 47, the second special symbol reservation display 64 displays the reservation number for the entry into the second start hole 47 as "1." On the other hand, neither the reservation image 702 nor the reservation number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70.

Next, when the special symbol stops fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 222 (10), the non-display effect of the recovery image 742 starts, and the transparency of the recovery image 742 increases. Then, by increasing the transparency of the recovery image 742, the decorative symbol 700, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small symbol 704, the stage image 706, and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 become visible to the player, although they are not easily visible to the player. At this time, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode without a step-by-step display effect. Also, as the stage image 706, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the tenth mode to the second mode. Also, no sound is output from the sound output device 9.

222(11), the non-display effect of the recovery image 742 ends, and the recovery image 742 becomes non-display. As a result, the decorative symbol 700, the reserved image 702, the small symbol 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the special time-saving remaining number image 738 become easily visible to the player. At this time, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "135", are fixed and stopped. The reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 shows "0", and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 shows "1". The text "749" is displayed on the special time-saving remaining number image 738. At this time, the action effect of the reserved image 702 is being executed, and the reserved image 702 has moved to the left from the initial position before the action effect started. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 222 (12), a warning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to warn that the next change performance will start. At this time, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 continues, and the reserved image 702 moves to the right from its initial position before the motion performance started.

Next, when the display of the special symbol changes starts, as shown in FIG. 223 (13), the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 start changing. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "0". Also, the first reserved image 702 moves to the changing base 701P, and the changing image 701 is displayed. Also, the display content of the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is updated to "748". Also, background music according to the changing performance being performed is output from the audio output device 9. Although not shown in the figure, after this, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped, and the changing image 701 is no longer displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while the special time-saving game state is changing and a special image corresponding to the normal game state is being displayed, a special image corresponding to the special time-saving game state will be displayed.
In this case, even if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, the player can quickly recognize that the gaming machine 1 is in the special time-saving gaming state.

When the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while fluctuations in the special time-saving game state are stopped and the decorative pattern 700 and stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state are displayed, the decorative pattern 700 and stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state are displayed again. In this case, the special image corresponding to the special time-saving game state will not be displayed unless a win occurs in the first start port 45 or the second start port 47.

(Example of variation 17)
224 and 225 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 17) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Fig. 224 and Fig. 225. The variable performance example 17 is a variable performance example based on winning at the first starting hole 45 in the normal game state, and is a variable performance example when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off during the execution of the variable performance and then returned. In addition, in the following explanation, the differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples and each modified example will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as the variable performance examples and each modified example may be omitted.

First, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, and then the final variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state ends, so that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal gaming state again without being controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 224 (1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 700 "421" is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70. Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the fifth stage is displayed as a stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state. Also, at this time, four reserved images 702, a number of executions image 705, and a left-hit image 730 are displayed. Also, the number of executions image 705 shows the text "1253 GAME". Also, on the first special pattern display 60, the variable display of the previous special pattern is stopped. Also, on the first special pattern reservation display 63, the number of reserved winnings in the first starting hole 45 is displayed in a manner in which "4" is displayed. The state shown in Figure 224 (1) is the same as the state shown in Figure 191 (29) in Variation Presentation Example 9.

Next, as the special symbol stops changing, the first special symbol display 60 starts changing and displaying the next special symbol, as shown in FIG. 224 (2). Also, the first special symbol reserved display 63 displays the number of reserved winnings in the first starting hole 45 as "3". Also, as the special symbol starts changing and displaying, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 start changing. Also, background music according to the changing performance being performed is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, the LEDs in the first special symbol display 60 and the first special symbol reserved display 63 go out, as shown in FIG. 224 (3). At this time, the first image display device 70, top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all go out. Additionally, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored, as shown in Fig. 224 (4), the variation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display 60 is resumed. Also, in the first special symbol reserve display 63, the number of reserved symbols for the winning of the first starting hole 45 is displayed as "3".
Thereafter, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all go to the 10 mode.
After that, a restoration in progress image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70 .
On the other hand, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (5), the special pattern continues to change on the first special pattern display device 60. Also, on the first image display device 70, the recovery in progress image 742 continues to be displayed. Also, at this time, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first special pattern reserve display device 63 displays the number of reserved balls for the entry into the first starting hole 45 as "4". On the other hand, neither the reserved image 702 nor the reserved number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70.

Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (6), the varying display of the special pattern stops on the first special pattern display device 60.
After that, the non-display performance of the image 742 during the recovery is started, and the transparency of the image 742 during the recovery is increased, so that the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, and the stage image 706 are in a state where they are not easily visible to the player, but are visible to the player. At this time, the fourth reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode without a stage display performance. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the tenth mode to the second mode. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 225(7), the non-display effect of the image 742 during recovery ends, and the image 742 during recovery becomes non-display. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, and the stage image 706 become easily visible to the player. In addition, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704, "135", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 shows "4". In addition, the background corresponding to the first stage is shown as the stage image 706. In addition, at this time, the action effect of the reserved image 702 is being executed, and all of the four reserved images 702 are rotating in a clockwise direction from the initial position before the action effect is started. In addition, at this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9.
Here, the execution count image 705 displays content different from the display content (see FIG. 224(2)) immediately before the power to the gaming machine 1 was cut off. In the illustrated example, the execution count image 705 displays the text "???."

Next, as shown in FIG. 225 (8), a warning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to warn that the next variable performance will start. At this time, the motion performance of the reserved images 702 continues, and the four reserved images 702 continue to rotate in the clockwise direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 225(9), the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the next special symbol. Also, the first special symbol reserved display 63 displays the number of reserved symbols for the winning of the first starting hole 45 as "3".
After that, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 is switched to "3". Also, BGM according to the change performance being executed is output from the audio output device 9. Also, at this time, a through performance is executed. The through performance is a performance that notifies that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal gaming state again without executing a change performance in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot in the special time-saving gaming state. In the through performance, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the 11th mode. The 11th mode is a mode of light emission that periodically flashes in purple, and is a mode different from any of the 1st mode to the 10th mode. Also, the period of flashing in the 11th mode is, for example, 2.0 seconds. In other words, the blinking period in the eleventh mode is longer than the blinking period in the light-emitting performance when a win occurs and the blinking period indicating or notifying the occurrence of an error.

In this way, the special time-saving game state can be executed only once between jackpots, and if the power is cut off during normal game mode after the special time-saving game state ends and then restored, a specific notification can be issued (displaying "???" on the execution count image 705, lighting the lamp in a specific manner) to indicate that the special time-saving game state has been executed. This allows for a friendly notification to be given to the player, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the special time-saving game state can be executed only once between jackpots, and if the power is cut off during normal game mode after the special time-saving game state ends and then restored, a first notification can be executed to notify the player that the power has been restored (display of restoration image 742) and a second notification can be executed to suggest that the special time-saving game state has been executed (display of execution count image 705 "???" and lighting of the lamp in a specific mode). This allows for friendly notifications to be given to the player, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if power is cut off and then restored during normal game mode after the special time-saving game mode ends, the error lamp is flashed with a specific notification, but the lamp is flashed in a different manner from when an error (magnetic error, etc.) occurs.
In addition, a specific notification is made by making the information (the execution count image 705) displayed during the normal game state into a specific display mode ("???").
Furthermore, when control is performed from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state without going through a jackpot game, regardless of whether the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off or not, the execution count image 705 may display "???." In other words, during the normal game state after the special time-saving game state ends and before the power supply is restored after being cut off, a first specific notification (the execution count image 705 "???") may be made, and after the power supply is restored after being cut off, the first specific notification and the second specific notification (light emission of the lamp in a specific mode) may be made.

In addition, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off in a state in which it is controlled from a normal time-saving gaming state to a normal gaming state and then returns, it is set to the first stage, but even in this case, the clear negation image 744 is displayed. On the other hand, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off in a state in which it is controlled from a special time-saving gaming state to a normal gaming state without going through a jackpot game and then returns, the clear negation image 744 is not displayed. That is, when the power is cut off in the second presentation mode (fifth stage) after the end of the normal time-saving gaming state and then returns, even if it is controlled to the first presentation mode (first stage) after the return, it is possible to execute a specific notification (such as displaying the clear negation image 744) regarding the presence or absence of RAM clearing, and when the power is cut off in the second presentation mode (fifth stage) after the end of the special time-saving gaming state and then returns, even if it is controlled to the first presentation mode (first stage) after the recovery, it is not executed to execute a specific notification (such as displaying the clear negation image 744) regarding the presence or absence of RAM clearing. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of useful information, and to improve the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state, and then is controlled to the normal gaming state again without being controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored, the text "???" is displayed in the execution count image 705, as described above, but this is not limited to the above.
When the game machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving game state and then controlled to the normal game state again without being controlled to the normal time-saving game state, the text "???" may be displayed in the number of executions image 705 when the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state is displayed (see FIG. 224 (1)), regardless of whether the power to the game machine 1 is cut off or not.

(Example of variation 18)
FIG. 226 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 18) of the variable performance of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to Fig. 226. The variable performance example 18 is a variable performance example when a game ball enters the second start hole 47 while a pre-reading performance based on a winning entry into the first start hole 45 is being executed. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variable performance examples and each modified example will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the variable performance examples and each modified example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 226(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped by the performance control unit 130m. At this time, two reserved images 702 are displayed. The second reserved image 702 is displayed in green. The display of this green reserved image 702 is an example of a look-ahead performance. A background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as a stage image 706. The top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second state. Although not shown, the BGM corresponding to the previous variation performance is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (2), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 begin to change. At this time, the zone performance begins, and the zone notification image 743 is displayed. During the execution of the zone performance, the display content of the stage image 706 changes. In the illustrated example, the background corresponding to the eighth stage is displayed as the stage image 706.

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting hole 47 displays "1", as shown in FIG. 226 (3).
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "412", temporarily stop and then stop as shown in Fig. 226 (4). At this time, the display mode of the first reserved image 702 switches from the green display mode to the normal display mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (5), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the decorative symbol 700 and small symbol 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "0". In other words, the change presentation being performed at this time is a change presentation based on winning at the second starting port 47. Also, at this time, the zone notification image 743 is hidden. Also, a background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as the stage image 706.

Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "721", stop as shown in FIG. 226 (6). After this, the first reserved image 702 moves to the changing base 701P, and a changing performance based on winning at the first starting hole 45 is executed. In this changing performance, the changing image 701 is displayed in the normal display mode, and when the changing performance ends, the changing image 701 is hidden.

In this way, in cases where a change based on a win at the second start port 47 is prioritized over a change based on a win at the first start port 45, when a win at the second start port 47 occurs during normal gameplay and a look-ahead effect based on a win at the first start port 45 is being executed, the look-ahead effect based on a win at the first start port 45 ends. This prevents the inconvenience of the look-ahead effect based on a win at the first start port 45 being disrupted by a win at the second start port 47, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the special 1 pre-reading effect (display of the green reserved image 702) is ended at the timing (end timing) when the change based on the winning at the first starting hole 45 is confirmed.
In addition, when a look-ahead performance in which the background changes is in progress, the look-ahead performance is terminated at the timing when the change starts based on winning at the second starting port 47.
Also, for example, when a look-ahead performance is being executed based on a winning entry into the first start hole 45, a game ball may win into the second start hole 47 while the variable performance based on a winning entry into the first start hole 45 is stopped. In this case, the look-ahead performance is ended at the timing of the winning entry into the second start hole 47.

(Example of variation 19)
FIG. 227 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example (variable performance example 19) of the variable performance will be described with reference to FIG. 227. The variable performance example 19 is a variable performance example based on winning the second starting hole 47 in the normal game state. In addition, in the following explanation, the difference from each of the variable performance examples described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the common points with each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, and then the final variable presentation in the special time-saving gaming state ends, whereby the gaming machine 1 is again controlled to the normal gaming state without being controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state. Then, as shown in FIG. 227 (1), the first image display device 70 displays the first transition image 728. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45 shows "0", and the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 47 shows "1". Also, at this time, the small symbol 704, "254", is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 227(2), the small symbol 704 starts to change with the start of the change display of the next special symbol. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 switches to "0". Also, at this time, if a game ball enters the first start port, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 displays "1". On the other hand, the reserved image 702 is not displayed, and the winning sound that notifies the winning of the first start port 45 is not output.
However, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while the first transition image 728 is being displayed, a winning sound may be output.

Next, as the special symbol stops changing, the three small symbols 704, "421", are displayed together and fixed, as shown in FIG. 227 (3). Also, at this time, if the game ball enters the first starting hole, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 displays "2". On the other hand, the reserved image 702 is not displayed, and the winning sound announcing the entry into the first starting hole 45 is not output.

When the variable presentation based on winning at the second start port 47 ends without any pending winning at the second start port 47, the highly decorative decorative pattern 700 "421" is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70, as shown in FIG. 227 (4). At this time, a background corresponding to the fifth stage is displayed as a stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state. At this time, two pending images 702 are displayed. These two pending images 702 are displayed in a completed display mode without a stepwise display presentation. Although not shown, both of the two pending images 702 are performing an action presentation. Also, the variable image 701 is not displayed.

Next, as the special pattern stops changing, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 start changing, as shown in FIG. 227 (5). At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45 displays "1". At this time, the second reserved image 702 moves toward the first reserved base 702P. Furthermore, the first reserved image 702 moves toward the changing base 701P, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. Although not shown in the figure, after this, as the special pattern stops changing, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped.

(Example of variation 20)
Figures 228 to 234 are figures showing an example of variable performance 20.
Next, another specific example of the variation presentation example (variation presentation example 20) will be described with reference to Figs. 228 to 234. The variation presentation example 20 is a variation presentation example when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 in a normal game state. In the following description, differences from the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and each modified example will be mainly described, and explanations of points that are the same as the variation presentation examples and each modified example may be omitted.

First, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped with the previous special pattern stopping. Next, when a predetermined time has passed without a game ball winning in either the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 in a state where there is no reserved ball for winning in the first start port 45, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed as shown in FIG. 228 (1). At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 become difficult or impossible to see for the player. On the other hand, the reserved number display 703 continues to be easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the eighth mode. Also, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 228 (2), the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 continue to be difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all continue to be in the eighth mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 228 (3), the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth state to the second state. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 continue to be difficult or impossible for the player to see. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output the winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 228 (4), a non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is executed, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 increases, so that the decorative pattern 700, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 are visible to the player, although they are not easily visible to the player. On the other hand, neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 are displayed. Also, at this time, the winning sound continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 228(5), the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 becomes even higher. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the special pattern starts to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change at the start of the change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed to change at high speed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45 displays "1". At this time, the display of the reserved image 702 starts. More specifically, the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode without the step-by-step display performance. This reserved image 702 is not easily visible to the player, but is visible to the player. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output the winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 228 (6), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends, and the customer waiting image 710 becomes non-display. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, reserved image 702, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, and remaining number of times reached image 708 become easily visible to the player. In addition, the operation at the start of the fluctuation is in progress. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 229 (7), the operation at the start of the change ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. In addition, the pending image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Also, at this time, the winning sound is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 229(8), the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 displays "1". At this time, the stage display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output the winning sound.
Next, as shown in FIG. 229(9), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 is started. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 229 (10), the left decorative pattern 700, "4", temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 229 (11), the right decorative pattern 700 "4" temporarily stops, and the reach performance begins.
Next, as shown in Fig. 229 (12), the development performance is executed. In the development performance, the movable performance is executed and the first emphasized image 711 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second state to the fourth state.

Next, as shown in Fig. 230 (13), the SP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SP reach effect, the SP reach image 712 is displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the second mode.
Next, as shown in Fig. 230 (14), the SPSP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SPSP reach effect, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 230 (15), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, the middle decorative pattern 700 "3" is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 230 (16).
Next, as shown in FIG. 230 (17), a first eye-catching image 715 is displayed.
Next, when the first eye-catching image 715 is no longer displayed, as shown in FIG. 230 (18), the three decorative patterns 700 "434" are temporarily stopped in a state where they are easily visible to the player.

Then, as the special symbol stops changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704, "434", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 231 (19). The display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "201 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is updated to "299 more". At this time, the changing image 701 is also hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 231 (20), as the display of the next special symbol begins to change, the small symbol 704 begins to change. Meanwhile, the decorative symbol 700 has not yet started to change. Also, the reserved image 702 has not moved toward the change base 701P, but is displayed on the reserved base 702P.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 231 (21), a staged display performance of the reserved image 702 is started. In the example shown, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the first reserved base 702P. This reserved image 702 is displayed in the first stage display mode (see FIG. 160 (1)) in the staged display performance. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound.

Next, as the stage display performance of the reserved image 702 progresses, a reserved image 702 having a display mode of the third stage (see FIG. 160 (3)) in the stage display performance is displayed on the first reserved base 702P, as shown in FIG. 231 (22). At this time, two reserved images 702 are displayed on the first reserved base 702P so as to overlap each other. More specifically, a reserved image 702 having a display mode of the third stage in the stage display performance and a reserved image 702 having a completed display mode are displayed so as to overlap each other. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the operation at the start of the change is started. At this time, the winning sound continues to be output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 231 (23), the stage display performance of the reserved image 702 is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the reserved image 702 displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P in the example shown in FIG. 231 (22) moves to the variable pedestal 701P, and the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the variable start operation is in progress. Also, the winning sound is continuously output until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 231 (24), the start-of-change operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 232 (25), a winning sound announcing the entry into the first starting hole 45 is output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 displays "2". Also, for the second reserved image 702, no stepwise display performance is performed, that is, the incomplete display mode is not visible to the player, and the image is displayed on the second reserved pedestal 702P in the completed display mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 232 (26), the left decorative pattern 700, "7", temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 232 (27), the right decorative pattern 700, "1", temporarily stops.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 232 (28), the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound to notify the winning of the first starting hole 45. Also, at this time, "3" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45. Also, at this time, the staged display performance of the third reserved image 702 starts, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above and away from the third reserved pedestal 702P.
Next, as shown in FIG. 232 (29), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the third reserved pedestal 702P. Also, the winning sound is continuously output until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.

Then, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "721", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 232 (30). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "202 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is updated to "298 more".

Next, as shown in FIG. 233 (31), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 switches to "2".
Then, with the stop of the variation of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "483", are fixed and stopped as shown in Fig. 233 (32). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "203 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is updated to "297 more".

Next, as shown in FIG. 233 (33), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 switches to "1".
Then, with the stop of the variation of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "532", are fixed and stopped as shown in Fig. 233 (34). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "204 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times to be reached image 708 is updated to "296 more".

Next, as shown in FIG. 233 (35), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 start to change. Also, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 switches to "0".
Then, with the stop of the variation of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "327", are fixed and stopped as shown in Fig. 233 (36). At this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "205 GAMES", and the display content of the remaining number of times reached image 708 is updated to "295 more".

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed without a game ball entering either the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47 after the special symbols have stopped fluctuating, an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed as shown in Fig. 234 (37). At this time, sound is no longer output from the sound output device 9.
Furthermore, when a predetermined time has elapsed without a game ball entering either the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47 after the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed as shown in FIG. 234 (38). At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are in a state where they are difficult or impossible to see for the player. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second state to the eighth state. Also, the state where no sound is output from the sound output device 9 continues. The state shown in FIG. 234 (38) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 228 (1).

As described above, in the variable performance example 20, when a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal game state, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is made visible or easily visible. Here, even if a prize is won when the stage image 706, adjustment image 716, and menu image 717 corresponding to the first stage are displayed in the normal game state, the same performance as the example shown in the variable performance example 20 may be executed. In other words, when a prize is won when the stage image 706, adjustment image 716, and menu image 717 corresponding to the first stage are displayed in the normal game state, the stage display performance may not be executed, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be easily visible while the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode remains invisible.

As described above, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display size is made difficult to see or impossible to see.
Even if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, if the player is made to view the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display size before the reserved image 702 of the completed display size is made visible to the player, it is necessary to start displaying the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display size after starting the non-display effect of the specific image. In this case, the display timing of the reserved image 702 of the completed display size is delayed by the amount of the non-display effect when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, compared to when a prize is won when a specific image is not displayed. Therefore, when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display size is made difficult or impossible to view, and the reserved image 702 of the completed display size is displayed without delay, thereby preventing the display timing of the reserved image 702 of the completed display size from being shifted depending on whether or not the specific image is displayed at the time of winning.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the incomplete reserved image 702 is made difficult to see or impossible to see.
Even if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, if the player is made to view the reserved image 702 in an incomplete form before the reserved image 702 in a completed form is made visible to the player, it is necessary to start displaying the reserved image 702 in an incomplete form after starting the non-display effect of the specific image. In this case, the display timing of the reserved image 702 in a completed form is delayed by the amount of the non-display effect when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, compared to when a prize is won when a specific image is not displayed. Therefore, when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 in an incomplete form is made difficult or impossible to view, and the reserved image 702 in a completed form is displayed without delay, thereby preventing the display timing of the reserved image 702 in a completed form from being shifted depending on whether or not the specific image is displayed at the time of winning.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 with incomplete transparency is made difficult to see or impossible to see.
Even if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, if the player is made to view the reserved image 702 of the incomplete transparency before the reserved image 702 of the completed transparency is made visible to the player, it is necessary to start displaying the reserved image 702 of the incomplete transparency after starting the non-display effect of the specific image. In this case, the display timing of the reserved image 702 of the completed transparency is delayed by the amount of the non-display effect when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, compared to when a prize is won when a specific image is not displayed. Therefore, when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete transparency is made difficult or impossible to view, and the reserved image 702 of the completed transparency is displayed without delay, thereby preventing the display timing of the reserved image 702 of the completed transparency from being shifted depending on whether or not the specific image is displayed at the time of winning.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete action mode is made difficult to view or impossible to view.
Even if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, if the player is made to view the reserved image 702 of an incomplete action mode and then the action presentation of the reserved image 702 is made visible to the player, it is necessary to start displaying the reserved image 702 of the incomplete action mode after starting the non-display presentation of the specific image. In this case, the execution timing of the action presentation of the reserved image 702 is delayed by the execution of the non-display presentation when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, compared to when a prize is won when a specific image is not displayed. Therefore, when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete action mode is made difficult or impossible to view, and the action presentation of the reserved image 702 is performed without delay, thereby preventing the execution timing of the action presentation by the reserved image 702 from being shifted depending on whether or not the specific image is displayed at the time of winning.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display position is made difficult to see or impossible to see.
Even if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, if the player is made to view the reserved image 702 at the incomplete display position before the reserved image 702 at the completed display position, it is necessary to start displaying the reserved image 702 at the incomplete display position after starting the non-display effect of the specific image. In this case, the display timing of the reserved image 702 at the completed display position is delayed by the amount of the non-display effect when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, compared to when a prize is won when a specific image is not displayed. Therefore, when a prize is won when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 at the incomplete display position is made difficult or impossible to view, and the reserved image 702 at the completed display position is displayed without delay, thereby preventing the display timing of the reserved image 702 at the completed display position from being shifted depending on whether or not the specific image is displayed at the time of winning.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed, the sound output mode is switched before the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. Therefore, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off while there is a reserved item and then restored, the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player before the effect sound is output. That is, the chronological relationship between the output timing of the sound and the display timing of the reserved image 702 is reversed depending on whether the reserved image 702 is not displayed because there is no reserved item, or the reserved image 702 is not displayed despite there being a reserved item.
In this case, by making the player aware either that a performance is about to begin or that the number of reserved balls is about to be recognized depending on the state of the gaming machine 1, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from declining regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed, the sound output mode is switched before the specific image is no longer displayed. This makes it easier for the player to quickly recognize that he or she has won, even if the player has taken their eyes off the gaming machine 1.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the sound output mode is switched before the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 begins. Therefore, even if the customer waiting image 710 prevents the player from recognizing the game situation from the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a win occurs while a specific image is being displayed, the state of the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c is switched before the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. Therefore, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the next variable performance after a variable performance in which an SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance has been executed, if a win occurs within a specified period, the pending image 702 in its completed display mode is displayed without the player being able to see the incomplete display mode of the pending image 702 (see FIG. 232 (25)). In this way, by not allowing the player to see a specific performance in the next variable performance after a variable performance in which an SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance has been executed, the player can enjoy the sense of accomplishment of having executed the SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance for a long time.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed in the normal game state and the game is in the first stage, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) is made difficult to see or invisible (see FIG. 228 (6)). On the other hand, if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed in the normal game state and the game is in the second stage, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is made visible or easily visible (see FIG. 166 (2)).

In this embodiment, when a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the chronological relationship between the timing for switching the sound output mode, the timing for switching the modes of the various lamps, and the timing for displaying or hiding the image differs depending on whether the background of the stage image 706 is the first stage or the second stage, but this is not limited to this.
Even if a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed and it is the second stage, the chronological relationship between the timing of switching the sound output mode, the timing of switching the various lamp modes, and the timing of displaying or hiding the image may be the same as that when a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed and it is the first stage. That is, when a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed and it is the second stage, first, the state in which no sound is output is switched to the state in which the winning sound is output (see FIG. 228 (2)), and then, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may all be switched from the eighth state to the second state (see FIG. 228 (3)). After that, the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 is started, and then the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the stage image 706, etc. may be made visible to the player (see FIG. 228 (4)). Furthermore, after that, the reserved image 702 may be made visible to the player, and then the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 may be completed (see Figure 228 (5) and Figure 228 (6)).

(Example of variation 21)
Figures 235 and 236 are figures showing an example of variable performance 21.
Next, another specific example of the variation performance example (variation performance example 21) will be described with reference to FIG. 235 and FIG. 236. In the variation performance example 21, two variation performances are executed. The first of these two variation performances is a variation performance when a game ball enters the first start hole 45 in a normal time-saving game state. The second of the two variation performances is a variation performance when a game ball enters the second start hole 47 in a normal time-saving game state. In the following description, differences from the above-mentioned variation performance examples and each modified example will be mainly described, and explanations of points that match each variation performance example and each modified example may be omitted.

First, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving game state, and as shown in FIG. 235(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704, "444", are fixed and stopped. At this time, the background corresponding to the third stage is displayed as the stage image 706. The text "100 times" is displayed in the normal time-saving remaining number image 726. The reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 shows "1", and the reserved number display 703 of the second start port 47 shows "0". Neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed. The top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Although not shown, background music corresponding to the normal time-saving game state is continuously output from the sound output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 235(2), as the next special symbol starts to change, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 start to change. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 switches to "0".
Next, when the game ball enters the second start hole 47, as shown in FIG. 235 (3), the reserved number display 703 of the second start hole 47 displays "1". At this time, the staged display performance of the reserved image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound that notifies the winning of the second start hole 47.

Next, as shown in FIG. 235(4), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 is started. The winning sound is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.
Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "853", are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 235(5).

Next, as shown in FIG. 235(6), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the change display of the next special pattern. At this time, the display content of the normal time reduction remaining number image 726 is updated to "99 times". At this time, the reserved image 702 moves to the change base 701P, and the change image 701 is displayed. At this time, when the game ball enters the first start hole 45, "1" is displayed on the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 45. On the other hand, the reserved image 702 is not displayed, and the step display performance is not executed. At this time, the winning sound that notifies the winning of the first start hole 45 is not output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 236(7), with the stopping of the variation of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, "421", are fixed and stopped. In addition, the variable image 701 is not displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 while a variable presentation based on a winning entry into the first starting hole 45 is being executed, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes visible or easily visible to the player. On the other hand, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while a variable presentation based on a winning entry into the second starting hole 47 is being executed, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode does not become visible to the player.

(Example of variation 22)
Figure 237 is a diagram showing an example of variable performance 22.
Next, another specific example of the variation performance example (variation performance example 22) will be described with reference to FIG. 237. The variation performance example 22 is an example in which a variation performance based on winning the first start hole 45 is performed as the first variation performance in the special time-saving game state. In the following description, differences from the above-mentioned variation performance examples and each modified example will be mainly described, and explanations of points that match each variation performance example and each modified example may be omitted.

First, in the normal game state, the final variable performance among the predetermined times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game state. Also, when a predetermined time has passed since the final variable performance is completed without a game ball entering either the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed as shown in FIG. 237(1). Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the eighth mode. Also, at this time, a notification sound that notifies that the special time-saving game state is being entered is output from the audio output device 9. The state shown in FIG. 237(1) is the same state as the state shown in FIG. 195(5) in the variable performance example 10.
Although not shown, a background corresponding to the second stage is shown as the stage image 706 until the customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Then, as a result of the customer waiting image 710 being displayed, the stage image 706 is in a state where it is difficult or impossible for the player to see.

Next, when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 237 (2), the audio output device 9 begins to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 237(3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth position to the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 237 (4), the customer waiting image 710 is hidden. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and small pattern 704 start to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed changing at high speed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45 displays "1". At this time, a step-by-step display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode on the first reserved base 702P. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 237 (5), the operation at the start of the fluctuation progresses. At this time, the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved base 702P. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

237(6), the start of the change operation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. The reserved image 702 moves to the change base 701P and expands, causing the change image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 in the first starting hole 45 switches to "0". At this time, the countdown image 732, "0", is displayed. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9. Although not shown, after this, the second transition image 734 (see FIG. 197(16)) is displayed, and the stage image 706 switches to the background corresponding to the sixth stage (see FIG. 198(20)), and the change performance ends.

As described above, in the variation performance example 22, when a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the player is in the second stage, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is made visible or easily visible. Here, even if a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the first variation performance and when the stage image 706, adjustment image 716, and menu image 717 corresponding to the second stage are displayed, the same performance as the example shown in the variation performance example 22 may be executed. In other words, in the special time-saving game state, when a prize is won when the stage image 706, adjustment image 716, and menu image 717 corresponding to the second stage are displayed before the start of the first variation performance, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be made visible or easily visible.

As described above, even if a prize is won at the first starting hole 45 when a specific image is displayed in a special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible to the player.
In particular, in this embodiment, when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the game ball enters the first start hole 45 when the game is in the first stage, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) is made difficult or impossible for the player to see (see FIG. 196 (10)). On the other hand, when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the game ball enters the first start hole 45 when the game is in the second stage, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode is made visible or easily visible for the player. When a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the game ball enters the second start hole 47 when the game is in the first stage or the second stage, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, when a specific image is being displayed in a special time-saving game state and the game ball enters the second starting hole 47 when the game is in the first or second stage, the reserved image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, in a special time-saving game state, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 before the start of a special performance and when the special pattern is stopped during the first stage and there are no reserved symbols, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, in the case where a game ball enters the first start hole 45 when the special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved ball when the special effect is before the start of the special effect and the game is in the second stage in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. Also, in the case where a game ball enters the second start hole 47 when the special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved ball when the special effect is before the start of the special effect and the game is in the first or second stage in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, even if the game ball enters the second start hole 47 before the start of the special performance in the special time-saving game state and during the first or second stage when the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first start hole 45 when a special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed while a special pattern is stopped after the start of a specific notification, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, if a game ball enters the first start hole 45 when a special pattern is stopped after the start of a specific notification and a special image corresponding to the second stage is displayed, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. Also, if a game ball enters the second start hole 47 when a special pattern is stopped after the start of a specific notification and a special image corresponding to the first or second stage is displayed, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, even if a game ball enters the second start hole 47 when a special pattern is stopped after the start of a specific notification and a special image corresponding to the first or second stage is displayed, the reserved image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first start opening 45 while a specific image is displayed in the first stage, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first start opening 45 while a specific image is displayed in the second stage, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. Furthermore, regardless of the game state, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 when a specific image is displayed in the first or second stage, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, regardless of the game state, even if a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 when a specific image is displayed in the first or second stage, the reserved image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first start opening 45 while a special pattern is stopped in the first stage and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first start opening 45 while a special pattern is stopped in the second stage and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In addition, regardless of the game state, if a game ball enters the second start hole 47 when a special symbol is stopped in the first or second stage and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, regardless of the game state, even if a game ball enters the second start hole 47 when a special symbol is stopped in the first or second stage and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, regardless of the stage, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 (second starting hole 47) while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.
In addition, regardless of whether the game is in a normal game state, a normal time-saving game state, or a special time-saving game state, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 (second starting hole 47) when a special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 of a specific uncompleted display mode (uncompleted size, uncompleted form, uncompleted operation mode, uncompleted transparency, uncompleted display position) may be made difficult to see or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.
Furthermore, regardless of which image is displayed on the first display device 70, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 (second starting hole 47) when a special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 of a specific uncompleted display mode (uncompleted size, uncompleted form, uncompleted operation mode, uncompleted transparency, uncompleted display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.

In addition, for example, the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode may be in a state in which the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode is visible. In other words, when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on a winning entry into the first starting hole 45 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, if a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on a winning entry into the first starting hole 45 while a specific image is being displayed in a special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 in a specified incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible before the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) is made visible or easily visible.

In addition, in a special time-saving game state, when a reserved image 702 in a normal display mode is displayed based on a winning entry into the first starting port 45 before the start of a special performance and while the special pattern is stopped and there are no reserved symbols, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, in the special time-saving game state, if a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on a winning entry into the first starting hole 45 before the start of the special performance and while the special pattern is stopped and there are no reserved symbols, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible before the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) is made visible or easily visible.

In addition, when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on winning when the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed while the special pattern is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, when the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on winning when the special pattern is stopped after the start of the specific notification and the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.

In addition, regardless of the game state, when a reserved image 702 in a normal display mode is displayed based on a winning entry into the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult to see or invisible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, if a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on winning at the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 in a specified incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible before the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) is made visible or easily visible.

In addition, regardless of the game state, when a reserved image 702 in a normal display mode is displayed based on a winning entry into the first start port 45 (second start port 47) when a special pattern is stopped and no reserved symbols exist, the reserved image 702 in a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, if a reserved image 702 in an expected color display mode is displayed based on a winning entry into the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) when the special pattern is stopped and no reserved symbols exist, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible before the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) is made visible or easily visible.

(Example of variation 23)
Figures 238 and 239 are figures showing an example of variable performance 23.
Next, another specific example of the variation performance example (variation performance example 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 238 and Fig. 239. Variation performance example 23 is an example in which a variation performance based on winning into the first starting hole 45 is performed as the first variation performance in the special time-saving game state. In the following explanation, differences from the above-mentioned variation performance examples and each modified example will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that match each variation performance example and each modified example may be omitted.

First, in the normal game state, the final variable performance among the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game state ends, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to enter the special time-saving game state. Also, when a predetermined time has passed since the final variable performance ended without a game ball entering either the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed as shown in FIG. 238 (1). Also, a background corresponding to the second stage is shown as a stage image 706. Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the fifth mode. Also, at this time, the sound output device 9 outputs background music corresponding to the previous variable performance at a lower volume than during the execution of the variable performance.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 238 (2), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth position to the second position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 238 (3), the audio output device 9 starts to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 238 (4), the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are hidden. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, and the small pattern 704 is displayed changing at high speed. At this time, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45 displays "1". At this time, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a completed display mode without a step-by-step display performance. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 238 (5), the decorative pattern 700 changes at a high speed. The pending image 702 moves to the changing base 701P and expands, causing the changing image 701 to be displayed. At this time, the pending number display 703 in the first starting hole 45 switches to "0". At this time, the countdown image 732, "0", is displayed. At this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 238(6), the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 displays "1". At this time, a stage display performance is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. At this time, the sound output device 9 starts to output a winning sound that notifies the winning of the first starting hole 45.
Next, as shown in Fig. 239 (7), the stage display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Although not shown, when the stage display performance is completed, the motion performance of the reserved image 702 is started. Also, the winning sound that notifies the winning of the first starting hole 45 is output continuously until the stage display performance is completed, and is not output when the stage display performance is completed.

Next, after the display of the second transition image 734 (see FIG. 197(16)), as shown in FIG. 239(8), a background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. In addition, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704, "125", are fixed and stopped.
After this, each time a variable presentation is executed in the special time-saving game state, the number of remaining times for special pattern selection in the special time-saving game state is reduced, and the value shown in the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is subtracted by one.

When the final variable presentation in the special time-saving gaming state ends, the gaming machine 1 is controlled back to the normal gaming state, and after the first transition image 728 (see FIG. 190 (22)) is displayed, the background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as the stage image 706. At this time, the reserved image 702 is also displayed. This reserved image 702 is the reserved image 702 (see FIG. 239 (7)) that was displayed when the background corresponding to the second stage was displayed as the stage image 706.

In addition, the change presentations described in each of the change presentation examples and modified examples are not limited to change presentations based on the reserved numbers shown in the figures.
The change presentation described in each change presentation example and variant example may be a change presentation based on the reserved number being 0, a change presentation based on the reserved number being 1, a change presentation based on the reserved number being 2, a change presentation based on the reserved number being 3, or a change presentation based on the reserved number being 4.

In addition, in this embodiment, a change presentation based on a winning combination when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in a special time-saving game state has been described as a change presentation in which the result of the lottery for the special pattern is a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this.
As a variable presentation based on winning at the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving game state, a variable presentation in which the result of the lottery for a special pattern is a jackpot may be executed, as in a modified example of variable presentation example 11 (see Figures 207 to 209).

In addition, in the variable performance example 20, a variable performance in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and an SPSP reach performance is executed is described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
As in the variation performance example 20, as a variation performance based on winning at the first starting port 45 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal game state, the "variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed" shown in the variation performance example 1 and the variation performance example 2 may be executed, or the "variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot" shown in the variation performance example 5 may be executed. Also, as a variation performance based on winning at the first starting port 45 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal game state, any of the variation performances described in the first embodiment to the sixth embodiment may be executed.

In addition, in the variable performance example 20, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal game state and a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, it is explained that the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes difficult or impossible for the player to see, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode becomes easily visible to the player.
Here, the case where the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes difficult or impossible for the player to see is not limited to the case where a game ball enters the first start opening 45 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal game state. As an example, even if a game ball enters the first start opening 45 when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed in the normal game state (see Fig. 169(1) and Fig. 169(2)), the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may become difficult or impossible for the player to see, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may become easily visible to the player. In this case, as a variable performance based on winning at the first starting hole 45 when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed in the normal game state, the "variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed" shown in the variable performance example 1 and the variable performance example 2 may be executed, or the "variable performance in which the reach performance is executed" shown in the variable performance example 3 and the variable performance example 4 may be executed, or the "variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot" shown in the variable performance example 5 may be executed. Also, as a variable performance based on winning at the first starting hole 45 when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed in the normal game state, any of the variable performances described in the first embodiment to the sixth embodiment may be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 47, a winning sound is output to notify the player of the winning, but the present invention is not limited to this.
A winning sound may be output when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, whereas no winning sound may be output when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that a specific image becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen. Examples of specific images include decorative pattern 700, variable image 701, reserved image 702, reserved number display 703, small pattern 704, execution count image 705, stage image 706, remaining number of times reached image 708, etc. Here, the state in which a specific image is difficult to see or cannot be seen may be a state in which a specific image is displayed but the specific image is difficult to see or cannot be seen because the specific image is hindered from being seen by other images displayed in a layer in front of the specific image. Examples of other images include customer waiting image 710, first emphasis image 711, SP reach image 712, SPSP reach image 713, first eye-catching image 715, second emphasis image 718, first transition image 728, second eye-catching image 731, second transition image 734, and recovery image 742. Furthermore, a state in which a particular image is not visible may be a state in which a particular image is not visible because the particular image is not displayed in the first place.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be difficult to see or may be impossible to see. Here, an example of a case in which the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes difficult to see or may be impossible to see is when the step-by-step display performance is not executed and the reserved image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode from the start of displaying the reserved image 702, so that the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes difficult to see or may be impossible to see. Also, an example of a case in which the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes difficult to see or may be impossible to see is when the step-by-step display performance is executed to display the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode, but the reserved image 702 is prevented from being seen by another image displayed in a layer in front of the reserved image 702, so that the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes difficult to see or may be impossible to see. Also, when reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode is difficult or impossible to see because another image is displayed on a layer in front of reserved image 702, the step-by-step display performance may or may not be executed. In this way, making reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) difficult or impossible to see includes both the case where reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode is not displayed and the case where reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode is displayed but difficult or impossible to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when the pending image 702 of an incomplete display mode becomes difficult to see or impossible to see, the pending image 702 of an incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) at any stage of the staged display performance also becomes difficult to see or impossible to see, but this is not limited to the above.
For example, when making reserved image 702 of an incomplete display mode difficult or impossible to see, reserved image 702 of an incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) in a first stage of the staged display performance may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then reserved image 702 of an incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) in a second stage of the staged display performance may be made visible or easily visible. In other words, when making reserved image 702 of an incomplete display mode difficult or impossible to see, it is sufficient to make reserved image 702 of a completed display mode in at least one stage of the staged display performance difficult or impossible to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the first stage, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible for the player to see. In this case, the reserved image 702 of the specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible for the player to see may be the reserved image 702 of any display mode in the stage presentation.
In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state and the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the second stage, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode may be made visible or easily visible to the player. In this case, the reserved image 702 in an incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.

In addition, in the special time-saving game state, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 before the start of the special performance and in the first stage, while the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 of the specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of the specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of the display mode of any stage in the stage performance.
In addition, in the special time-saving game state, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 before the start of the special performance and in the second stage, while the special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved ball, it is explained that the reserved image 702 of a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 of any stage of display mode in the stage performance.

Also, it has been explained that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while the special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the first stage is being displayed after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.
In addition, it has been explained that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while the special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the second stage is being displayed after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 of a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of the display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.

In addition, it has been explained that, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while a specific image is displayed in the first stage, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.
In addition, it has been explained that, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while a specific image is being displayed in the second stage, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.

In addition, it has been explained that, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while a special symbol is stopped in the first stage and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of a specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.
In addition, regardless of the game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 while a special symbol is stopped in the second stage and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 of a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 of a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 of any display mode in the stage performance.

In addition, in the case where the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on winning the first starting hole 45 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of a display mode in any stage in the stage presentation.
Also, in the case where the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on winning at the first starting hole 45 while a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible before the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) is made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any stage of the display mode in the stage presentation.

In addition, in the special time-saving game state, when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on winning the first start port 45 before the start of the special performance and while the special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved, it is explained that the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of the display mode of any stage in the stage performance.
In addition, in the case where the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on winning the first start port 45 before the start of the special performance and while the special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved in the special time-saving game state, it is possible to make the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) visible or easily visible, and then make the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any stage of the display mode in the stage performance.

In addition, when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on a winning result when the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed while the special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of a display mode of any stage in the stage presentation.
In addition, when the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on the winning when the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed while the special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made visible or easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is made visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any display mode in the stage performance.

In addition, regardless of the game state, when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on winning at the first start port 45 (second start port 47) when a specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of a display mode at any stage in the stage presentation.
Also, when the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on winning the first start port 45 (second start port 47) when a specific image is displayed, it is possible to make the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) visible or easily visible, and then make the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any stage of display mode in the stage presentation.

In addition, regardless of the game state, when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on winning the first start port 45 (second start port 47) when the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) may be made difficult or impossible to see, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific incomplete display mode that is difficult or impossible to see for the player may be the reserved image 702 consisting of the display mode of any stage in the stage performance.
In addition, when the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on winning the first start port 45 (second start port 47) when the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved, it is possible to make the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) visible or easily visible, and then make the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any stage of display mode in the stage performance.

In addition, when making the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) difficult to see or impossible to see, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode in one of the multiple stages in the staged display performance may be made difficult to see or impossible to see, while the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode in the other stages may be made visible or easily visible. As an example, when making the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) difficult to see or impossible to see, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode in the first stage of the staged display performance may be made difficult to see or impossible to see, while the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display mode in both the second and third stages may be made visible or easily visible.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that in the staged display presentation, the pending image 702, which is an incomplete display mode, has multiple stages, but this is not limited to this.
The display mode of the reserved image 702 in the staged display performance needs to have at least one stage of the reserved image 702 being an incomplete display mode (incomplete size, incomplete form, incomplete operation mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) and one stage of the reserved image 702 being a completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the winning sound is continuously output until the stage display performance is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The winning sound may be stopped from being output before the stage display performance is completed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a variable presentation is performed in which the result of the special pattern lottery in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot, the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 are displayed when the double-digit decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops or when the double-digit decorative pattern 700 definitely stops (see Figures 213 (8) and 213 (9)), but this is not limited to this.
In the case where a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot, when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped or when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is fixed and stopped, the variable image 701 may not be displayed and the reserved image 702 may be displayed. In addition, in the case where a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot, when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped or when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is fixed and stopped, the variable image 701 may be displayed without the reserved image 702. In addition, in the case where a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving game state is a jackpot, when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped or when the doublet decorative pattern 700 is fixed and stopped, neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first reserved image 702 moves to the variable pedestal 701P to display the variable image 701, but the variable image 701 may not be used. More specifically, when the variable performance ends while the first reserved image 702 is displayed, the first reserved image 702 may become hidden when the next variable performance starts. In this case, the first reserved image 702 may become hidden while moving, or may become hidden at the position displayed on the first reserved pedestal 702P without moving. In addition, when a prize is won when there is no reserved image, the reserved image 702 may be hidden after the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed on the first reserved pedestal 702P.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a stage corresponding to a normal game state is switched to a stage corresponding to a special time-saving game state while a reserved image exists, the variable image 701 is not displayed and the reserved image 702 is displayed (see FIG. 198 (20)). In other words, it has been described that the reserved image 702 moves to the variable pedestal 701P after the stage is switched, but is not limited to this.
When a stage corresponding to a normal game state is switched to a stage corresponding to a special time-saving game state in a state where a reserved game exists, the variable image 701 may be displayed. In other words, the movement of the reserved image 702 to the variable base 701P may be completed before the stage switching is completed. Also, when a stage corresponding to a normal game state is switched to a stage corresponding to a special time-saving game state in a state where a reserved game exists, the movement of the reserved image 702 to the variable base 701P may be started and may not be completed. Also, when the variable image 701 is not used, when a stage corresponding to a normal game state is switched to a stage corresponding to a special time-saving game state in a state where a reserved game exists, the first reserved image 702 may already be hidden.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 (second starting hole 47) while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the reserved image 702 moves after the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 ends, but this is not limited to the above.
When a game ball enters the first start port 45 (second start port 47) while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the reserved image 702 may move during the execution of the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710. In this case, the movement of the reserved image 702 may be started after the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 starts, and the movement of the reserved image 702 may be completed after the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 ends. In addition, the movement of the reserved image 702 may be started before the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 starts. Furthermore, after that, the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 is executed, and the movement of the reserved image 702 may be completed after the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 ends.

Furthermore, the chronological relationship between the timing at which the pending image 702 moves, the timing at which the pending image 702 changes to the display mode of the varying image 701, and the timing at which the decorative pattern 700 starts to vary is not limited to the example described above.
A change from the display mode of the first reserved image 702 to the display mode of the variable image 701 may be started and completed between the start of the movement of all the displayed reserved images 702 and the arrival of the next reserved pedestal 702P (variable pedestal 701P) (the completion of the movement). Also, after the start of the movement of all the displayed reserved images 702 and the start of the change from the display mode of the first reserved image 702 to the display mode of the variable image 701, the change of the decorative pattern 700 may be started. Then, after the start of the change of the decorative pattern 700, the movement of all the displayed reserved images 702 and the change from the display mode of the first reserved image 702 to the display mode of the variable image 701 may be completed.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss and a variable performance in which an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance is executed is performed, the next variable performance may be a variable performance in which the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed (see FIG. 180 (28) to FIG. 180 (30), FIG. 181 (31)). Then, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 (second starting hole 47) while this second eye-catching image 731 is displayed, the second eye-catching image 731 may block the view of the reserved image 702, making the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode difficult to view or impossible to view. Furthermore, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may become easily viewable after the second eye-catching image 731 is hidden.

Also, in this embodiment, even if a win occurs when the SPSP reach performance is being executed, a winning sound is not output (see FIG. 167 (11)). Here, in a variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, if the game ball wins in the first start hole 45 (second start hole 47) when the stage image 706 is displayed again after this SPSP reach performance (see FIG. 168 (16)), a stage display performance may be executed and a winning sound may be output.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first start hole 45 (second start hole 47) when the number of reserved balls stored is the upper limit (four), no winning sound is output, the staged display performance is not executed, and a new reserved image 702 is not displayed, regardless of the time at which the winning ball enters the first start hole 45 (second start hole 47).

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the customer waiting image 710 is displayed even in the special time-saving game state. Here, in the special time-saving game state, before the start of the first variable performance, the customer waiting image 710 is displayed when the special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved ball and no winning occurs for a predetermined time, while after the start of the first variable performance, the customer waiting image 710 may not be displayed even if there is no reserved ball and no winning occurs for a predetermined time. That is, in the special time-saving game state, whether or not the customer waiting image 710 is displayed may be switched between before the start of the first variable performance and after the start of the first variable performance. However, even after the start of the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state, if a game ball wins in the second start hole 47 (first start hole 45) when the special pattern is stopped and there is no reserved ball, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be made difficult to see or impossible to see, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be made easily visible. In addition, in the special time-saving game state, even after the first variable performance has started, if the special symbol is stopped and there is no reserved and no winning occurs for a predetermined time, the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the adjustment image 716 or the menu image 717 is displayed, the state of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, the button lamp 17c, and the state of the sound output are switched, but this is not limited to the above.
When the adjustment image 716 or the menu image 717 is displayed, the states of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched, but the state of the sound output does not have to be switched. And, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the states of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, and the state of the sound output may be switched.
Also, when the adjustment image 716 or the menu image 717 is displayed, the state of the sound output may be changed, but the states of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may not be changed. And, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the states of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may be changed. Also, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the state of the sound output may or may not be changed.
Furthermore, the states of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, and the sound output state do not need to be changed when the adjustment image 716 or the menu image 717 is displayed. And, the states of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, and the sound output state may be changed when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while there is a reserved play, a warning sound is output to notify that the next variable performance after the variable performance that was being executed when the power was cut off will start, and then the next variable performance starts, but this is not limited to the above.
When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off while there is a reserved ball and then restored, sound may be prevented from being output until the next variable performance of the variable performance being executed when the power supply was cut off is started. Then, when the next variable performance of the variable performance being executed when the power supply was cut off is started, output of background music corresponding to the variable performance may be started.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movement of the decorative pattern 700 at the start of its movement is described as a slow movement of the decorative pattern 700 downward, but this is not limited to this.
The movement at the start of the change may be, for example, a movement of the decorative pattern 700 upward at a low speed. In this case, when the movement at the start of the change is completed, the decorative pattern 700 may be caused to move downward at a high speed.
The movement at the start of the movement may be, for example, a specific movement by the character shown in the decorative pattern 700. Examples of the specific movement include a movement in which the character raises its hand, a movement in which the character's facial expression changes, a movement in which the character's hair or the clothes worn by the character move, etc. When the specific movement is performed, the decorative pattern 700 may move upward or downward at a low speed, or may remain in the position where it was fixed and stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, in both cases where a prize is won when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, and where a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the sound output mode is switched before switching the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, but this is not limited to this.
For example, if a prize is won when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, the sound output mode may be switched when the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched. Also, if a prize is won when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, the sound output mode may be switched after the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched. That is, if a prize is won when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, the sound output mode may be switched after the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched. Then, after the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c and the sound output mode are all switched, the fluctuation start operation and the display of the reserved image 702 may be started.

In addition, in this embodiment, if there are no reserved symbols when the special symbols stop changing, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the second state to the first state (see FIG. 195 (3)), but this is not limited to this. Even if there are no reserved symbols when the special symbols stop changing, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may continue to be in the second state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed while the change performance is being performed, but when the second transition image 734 is displayed, the decorative pattern 700 that is changing at high speed becomes difficult or impossible to see. That is, the decorative pattern 700 at the display size when changing at high speed becomes difficult or impossible to see. In other words, the decorative pattern 700 at the transparency during high speed change becomes difficult or impossible to see. In yet another way, the decorative pattern 700 in the form during high speed change becomes difficult or impossible to see. In yet another way, the decorative pattern 700 at the position during high speed change becomes difficult or impossible to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that as the staged display performance progresses, the display state of the pending image 702 approaches the completed display state, but this is not limited to this.
In the staged display performance, a stage may be provided in which the reserved image 702 is displayed in a display mode (display size, transparency, display position, form, etc.) that is farther away from the completed display mode. As an example, a stage may be provided in which the reserved image 702, which has a display size smaller than the completed display mode, is displayed in an even smaller display size. Also, a stage may be provided in which the reserved image 702, which has a higher transparency than the completed display mode, is displayed in an even higher transparency. Also, a stage may be provided in which the reserved image 702, which is displayed in a position farther away from the display position in the completed display mode, is displayed in a position even farther away from the display position in the completed display mode.

The number of stages provided in the stage display presentation may differ depending on the display mode of the reserved images 702, such as reserved images 702 displayed for each stage or reserved images 702 for each display color. In this case, for reserved images 702 in normal display mode, blue reserved images 702, red reserved images 702, and rainbow reserved images 702, the later the order, the more stages may be provided in the stage display presentation. In other words, the higher the expected reserved image 702, the more stages may be provided in the stage display presentation.

In addition, when the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed, in the first stage of the stage display performance, the reserved image 702 may be displayed in the same color as the completed display mode, or the reserved image 702 may be displayed in a color different from the completed display mode. In addition, for example, when a blue reserved image 702 is displayed, the reserved image 702 may be displayed in a color different from blue in the first stage of the stage display performance, whereas when a reserved image 702 in a specific color (red, rainbow, etc.) that has a higher expectation than blue is displayed, the reserved image 702 may be displayed in the specific color in the first stage of the stage display performance.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that one reserved image 702 periodically performs two different action displays in the action presentation (see FIG. 161 (5)). Here, the periods of the two different action displays may be the same as each other, or may be different. Furthermore, any period of the two different action displays may be the same as the period of the action display in the action presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. Furthermore, one period of the two different action displays may be the same as the period of the action display in the action presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode, and the other period may be different from the period of the action display in the action presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. Furthermore, any period of the two different action displays may be different from the period of the action display in the action presentation by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.
In addition, the hold image 702 in the normal display mode may periodically display two different actions.

In addition, the period of the action display in the action presentation may differ depending on the degree of expectation. For example, the blue reserved image 702 is displayed in the first period by the first action mode and in the second period by the second action mode different from the first action mode. Then, the reserved image of a specific color (red, rainbow, etc.) having a higher expectation than blue is displayed in the third period by the third action mode and in the fourth period by the fourth action mode different from the third action mode. In this case, the third period may be shorter or longer than the first period. The fourth period may be shorter or longer than the second period. The first period and the third period may be the same period, or the second period and the fourth period may be the same period. Furthermore, the third period and the fourth period may be the same period or different periods. The first to fourth action modes may be any of the above-mentioned actions (rotation in the clockwise direction, rotation in the counterclockwise direction, movement in the up and down direction, movement in the left and right direction, swinging, etc.), or may be actions different from the above-mentioned actions.

Also, in this embodiment, an example has been described in which no sound is output from the audio output device 9 when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, or when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Here, when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, or when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, a sound at a volume that is not audible to the player may be output from the audio output device 9. In other words, it is sufficient that no sound is audibly output from the audio output device 9 when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, or when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all blink in the winning light-emitting performance. Here, in the winning light-emitting performance, the blinking period of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may become longer over time. As an example, in the winning light-emitting performance, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may blink in a second period longer than the first period after blinking in a first period. In this case, the color of the light emitted in the blinking in the first period and the color of the light emitted in the blinking in the second period may be the same color or different colors. In addition, the first period and the second period may be shorter than the period of the blinking (blinking in the 9th mode) that suggests or notifies the occurrence of an error and the period of the blinking in the through performance (blinking in the 11th mode).

In the present embodiment, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c emit light of a single color in the first, second, fourth to sixth, and eighth to eleventh modes, but this is not limiting. In the illumination of these modes, the color of the emitted light may change as the performance progresses.
In the first, second, fourth to sixth, eighth to eleventh aspects, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are described as emitting light of the same color, but this is not limited thereto. In the first, second, fourth to sixth, eighth to eleventh aspects, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may be emitting light of different colors.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the light emission of the seventh aspect, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are described as emitting light in different colors, but this is not limited to the above. In the light emission of the seventh aspect, at least two or more light emitters (e.g., the top lamp 10b and the board lamp 74b, etc.) among the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may emit light in the same color, and the other light emitters may emit light in different colors. In addition, in the light emission of the seventh aspect, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may all emit light in the same color.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the reserved number display 703 is hidden during the execution of a jackpot game (see Figure 172 (20)), but this is not limited to this.
The reserved number display 703 may be displayed even during the execution of a jackpot game. In this case, if a game ball enters the first start hole 45 (second start hole 47) during the execution of a jackpot game, the reserved number display 703 of the first start hole 45 (second start hole 47) may be displayed in an increased manner. The reserved image 702 corresponding to this winning may be displayed in a completed display mode when the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state (time-saving game state) is displayed, without being displayed in an incomplete display mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that, depending on the stage, the image being displayed, whether or not there is a hold, the state of the gaming machine 1, etc., when the hold image 702 is displayed, the hold image 702 in the completed display state is easily visible without the hold image 702 in the incomplete display state being visible, but this is not limited to the above.
For example, in the normal time-saving game mode, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47, regardless of the stage, the image being displayed, whether or not there is a reserve, the state of the game machine 1, etc., the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be made easily visible, and then the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be made easily visible.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that a specific sound effect is output when the "7" decorative patterns 700 on the left and right are lined up (see FIG. 184 (12)).
Here, a sound effect may be output when a number other than "7" is aligned as the left and right decorative patterns 700. Furthermore, this sound effect may be a sound different from the specific sound effect output when "7" is aligned as the left and right decorative patterns 700.
In addition, the sound effect when a reach is achieved may be different in each of the normal game state, the normal time-saving game state, and the special time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when the first transition image 728 is displayed, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal gaming state, whether the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state or the special time-saving gaming state, but this is not limited to the above.
When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, the normal time-saving gaming state may continue when the first transition image 728 is displayed (see FIG. 177 (12)). Then, when the special symbol stops fluctuating with no reserved balls for the second start hole 47, the gaming machine 1 may be controlled to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, the gaming machine 1 may be controlled to the normal gaming state when the first transition image 728 is displayed (before the reserved balls for the second start hole 47 are gone). However, even when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, the special time-saving gaming state may continue when the first transition image 728 is displayed (when the reserved balls for the second start hole 47 are present), just like when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the customer waiting image 710 is hidden after the transparency is increased in stages, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The customer waiting image 710 may be switched from a displayed state to a hidden state without gradually changing the transparency. In this case, when the customer waiting image 710 becomes hidden, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed, and after the customer waiting image 710 becomes hidden, the display of the reserved image 702 may start.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the action presentation starts when the stage display presentation is completed, but this is not limited to this.
The action presentation may be started even before the completion of the staged display presentation. In this case, the action presentation may be started in the middle of the staged display presentation, that is, when the reserved image 702 is displayed in the incomplete display mode.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that a winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 in response to a win. Here, the winning sounds notifying that the gaming ball has won the first starting hole 45 in the first stage, the second stage, and the fifth stage may be different sounds or the same sound.
In addition, the winning sound notifying the player that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 47 in the third stage and the fourth stage may be different sounds or the same sound.
In addition, the winning sound notifying that the gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 47 in the sixth stage and the seventh stage may be different sounds or the same sound.
In addition, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 47 in the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state may be different sounds or the same sound.
In addition, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 47 in the first stage, the sixth stage, and the seventh stage may be different sounds or the same sound.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, a winning sound is output and the display of the reserved image 702 begins, but this is not limited to this.
For example, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, the display of the reserved image 702 may start after the sound output device 9 starts to output the winning sound.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sound output based on winning at the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state is described as a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. The sound output based on winning at the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state may be a winning sound that notifies of a win. Furthermore, regardless of the game state, the sound output based on winning at the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47 when a specific image is displayed may be background music corresponding to the variable presentation, and may be a sound output without reducing the volume.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the small symbols 704 are difficult or impossible for the player to see, but this is not limited to the above.
By displaying the small symbols 704 on a layer in front of the customer waiting image 710, the small symbols 704 may be easily visible to the player even when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the display of the reserved image 702 begins after the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 begins (see Figure 196 (9), Figure 221 (5), Figure 228 (5)), but this is not limited to this.
In the case where a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the display of the reserved image 702 may be started before the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 is started. In addition, in the case where a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be displayed without the step-by-step display performance being executed before the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 is started, so that the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be visible or easily visible without the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becoming visible. In addition, in the case where a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the step-by-step display performance may be started and completed before the non-display performance of the customer waiting image 710 is started, so that the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be visible or easily visible without the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode becoming visible.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the player operates the effect button 17 while the menu image 717 is displayed, a menu screen (not shown) is displayed on the first image display device 70. In addition, the menu screen is an image displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In addition, in this embodiment, an example of an effect when a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47 while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed has been described. Here, each of the above-mentioned examples of an effect when a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47 while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed may be an effect that is executed when a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47 while the menu screen is displayed. In other words, even if a prize is won when the menu screen is displayed instead of the customer waiting image 710, the same effect as when a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed may be executed. In this case, the menu screen is also regarded as a specific image.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first change performance is executed in the special time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed, and then the special time-saving start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736, etc. are displayed, but this is not limited to this.
When the first variation performance in the special time-saving game state is executed, before the decorative pattern 700 varies at high speed, that is, during the execution of the variation start operation, the special time-saving start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736, etc. may be displayed. Also, before the variation start operation starts, the special time-saving start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736, etc. may be displayed. Also, before the reserved image 702 is displayed, the special time-saving start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736, etc. may be displayed. That is, in the first variation performance in the special time-saving game state, the display start timing of the reserved image 702 and the display start timing of the special time-saving start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736, etc. may be displayed first.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first change performance is executed in the special time-saving play state, the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed, and then the decorative pattern 700 and stage image 706, etc., having a display mode corresponding to the special time-saving play state, are displayed, but this is not limited to this.
When the first change performance in the special time-saving game state is executed, before the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed, that is, during the execution of the change start operation, the decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706, etc., having a display mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state may be displayed. Also, before the change start operation starts, the decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706, etc., having a display mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state may be displayed. Also, before the reserved image 702 is displayed, the decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706, etc., having a display mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state may be displayed. That is, in the first change performance in the special time-saving game state, the display start timing of the reserved image 702 and the display start timing of the decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706, etc., having a display mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state may be either first.

Furthermore, the combination of the stage and the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is not limited to the above example.
Any combination of the above-mentioned stages and the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode may be used. For example, the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the first stage may be a star-shaped display mode (see FIG. 165).

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, various change effects in the special time-saving gaming state were described. Here, the various change effects described in the seventh embodiment may be change effects in the third time-saving gaming state.

Although multiple embodiments have been described above, the configuration included in one embodiment may be interchanged with the configuration included in another embodiment, or the configuration included in one embodiment may be added to another embodiment.

1...game machine, 9...audio output device, 10b...top lamp, 17c...button lamp, 70...first image display device, 74b...board lamp, 74c...movable member lamp, 700...decorative pattern, 701...variable image, 702...reserved image, 706...stage image, 710...customer waiting image, 716...adjustment image, 717...menu image, 733...special time-saving start image

Claims (1)

A first control means for controlling the progress of a game;
A second control means for controlling the performance;
A light emitting means capable of emitting light,
The first control means is
When the start condition is satisfied, judgment information is obtained,
A determination as to whether or not to play a special game can be executed according to the determination information;
The determination information can be stored as a reserved memory,
A variable display in which the special symbol is changed and then stopped according to the result of the judgment is possible.
The first mode is a mode advantageous to a player and is controlled after the special game is executed, and the second mode is a mode advantageous to a player and is controlled when the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches a specified number,
The second control means is
The presentation mode can be controlled,
The information display can be displayed in a predetermined manner,
The information display in the predetermined manner corresponds to the determination information,
When the start condition is satisfied, the information display of a specific operation mode can be displayed before the information display of the predetermined mode is displayed,
Depending on the result of the judgment, it is possible to execute a variable performance in which the performance pattern is displayed in motion and then stopped.
During the execution of the variable performance, a reach performance can be executed,
When the reserved memory is stored and the second mode is selected, a specific variable performance can be executed;
During the execution of a specific variable performance, it is possible to make the information display of the predetermined mode difficult to see or to limit the display,
When the reserved memory is not stored, if the start condition is satisfied after the control to the second mode, the information display of the specific operation mode can be limited;
When the presentation symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific sequence during the specific variation presentation, the reach presentation can be restricted during the execution of the specific variation presentation, and the gaming machine can be controlled to the first mode after the specific variation presentation ends .

Images